GQB Ee PDF

GATE QUESTION BANK
for
Electrical Engineering
By
GATE QUESTION BANK
Contents
Contents
#1.
#2.
Subject Name
Mathematics
Topic Name
Page No.
1-148
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Linear Algebra
Probability & Distribution
Numerical Methods
Calculus
Differential Equations
Complex Variables
Laplace Transform
1 28
29 57
58 73
74 112
113 131
132 143
144 148
Network Theory
8
9
10
11
12
13
#3.
19
168 185
186 203
204 206
207 214
215 216
217 223
224 238
239 250
251 256
257 261
262 275
276 340
Basics of Control System
Time Domain Analysis
Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion
Root Locus Technique
Frequency Response Analysis using Nyquist plot
Frequency Response Analysis using Bode Plot
Compensators & Controllers
State Variable Analysis
Analog Circuits
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
149 167
217 275
Introduction to Signals & Systems
Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems
Fourier Representation of Signals
Z-Transform
Laplace Transform
Frequency response of LTI systems and
Diversified Topics
Control Systems
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
#5.
Network Solution Methodology

Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to
DC Input
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis
Laplace Transform
Two Port Networks
Network Topology
Signals & systems

14
15
16
17
18
#4.
149 216
276 282
283 294
295 300
301 308
309 316
317 322
323 329
330 340
341 421
Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application
AC & DC Biasing-BJT and FET
Small Signal Modeling Of BJT and FET
BJT and JFET Frequency Response
Feedback and Oscillator Circuits
Operational Amplifiers and Its Applications
Power Amplifiers
th
th
341 353
354 363
364 372
373 375
376 381
382 420
421
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
: 080-65700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page I
GATE QUESTION BANK
#6.
Digital Circuits
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
#7.
422 424
425 430
431 435
436 438
439 456
457 462
463 464
465 472
473 483
Electromagnetic Field
473 483
Measurement
44
45
46
47
48
#9.
422 472
Number Systems & Code Conversions
Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps
Logic Gates
Logic Gate Families
Combinational and Sequential Digital Circuits
AD/DA Convertor
Semiconductor Memory
Introduction to Microprocessors
EMT
43
#8.
Contents
484 516
Basics of Measurements and Error Analysis
Measurements of Basic Electrical Quantities 1
Electronic Measuring Instruments 1
Power Systems
49
50
51
52
53
54
517 553
Transmission and Distribution
Economics of Power Generation
Symmetrical Components & Faults Calculations
Power System Stability
Protection & Circuit Breakers
Generating Stations
#10. Power Electronics

55
56
57
58
59
60
65
66
517 526
527 532
533 544
545 548
549 552
553
554 585
Basics of Power Semiconductor Devices
Phase Controlled Rectifier
Choppers
Inverters
AC Voltage Regulators and Cycloconverters
Applications of Power Electronics
554 559
560 570
571 575
576 581
582
583 585
#11. Electrical Machines

61
62
63
64
484 487
488 498
499 503
504 509
510 516
586 - 621
Transformer
Induction Motor
D.C. Machine
Synchronous Machine
Principles of Electro Mechanical Energy
Conversion
Special Machines
th
th
586 596
597 605
606 611
612 618
619 620
621
th
Page II
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Linear Algebra
ME 2005
1.
Which one of the following is an
Eigenvector of the matrix[
(A) [
(B) [ ]
2.
5.
]?
(C) [
(D) [
A is a 3 4 real matrix and Ax=B is an

inconsistent system of equations. The
highest possible rank of A is
(A) 1
(C) 3
(B) 2
(D) 4
ME 2006
3.
Multiplication of matrices E and F is G.
Matrices E and G are
os
sin
E [ sin
] and
os
G
4.
sin
os
sin
(B) [ os
os
sin
os
(C) [ sin
sin
os
sin
(D) [ os
os
sin
7.
Eigenvectors of 0
1 is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) Infinite
If a square matrix A is real and symmetric,

then the Eigenvalues
(A) are always real
(B) are always real and positive
(C) are always real and non-negative
(D) occur in complex conjugate pairs
ME 2008
8.
The Eigenvectors of the matrix 0
1 are
written in the form 0 1 and 0 1. What is

a + b?
(A) 0
(B) 1/2
Eigen values of a matrix

0
ME 2007
6.
The number of linearly independent
]. What is the matrix F?
os
(A) [ sin
Match the items in columns I and II.

Column I
Column II
P. Singular
1. Determinant is not
matrix
defined
Q. Non-square
2. Determinant is
matrix
always one
R. Real
3. Determinant is
symmetric
zero
matrix
S. Orthogonal
4. Eigen values are
matrix
always real
5. Eigen values are
not defined
(A) P - 3 Q - 1 R - 4 S - 2
(B) P - 2 Q - 3 R - 4 S - 1
(C) P - 3 Q - 2 R - 5 S - 4
(D) P - 3 Q - 4 R - 2 S - 1
9.
(C) 1
(D) 2
The matrix [
] has one Eigenvalue

p
equal to 3. The sum of the other two
Eigenvalues is
(A) p
(C) p 2
(B) p 1
(D) p 3
1are 5 and 1. What are the
Eigenvalues of the matrix = SS?

(A) 1 and 25
(C) 5 and 1
(B) 6 and 4
(D) 2 and 10
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
Page 1
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
For what value of a, if any, will the

following system of equations in x, y and z
have a solution
x
y
x y z
x
y z
(A) Any real number
(B) 0
(C) 1
(D) There is no such value
11.
ME 2012
15.
For a matrix,M-
(B) ( )
1 is
(A) 2
(B) 2 3
(C) 2 3
(D) 2
ME 2011
13. Consider the following system
equations:
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
The system has
(A) A unique solution
(B) No solution
(C) Infinite number of solutions
(D) Five solutions
14.
of
Eigen values of a real symmetric matrix

are always
(A) Positive
(C) Negative
(B) Real
(D) Complex
(D) ( )
of the matrix is equal to the inverse of the

,M- . The value of x is
matrix ,Mgiven by
)
(A) (
(C)
( )
(B)
(D)
1 , one of the
(C) ( )
(A) ( )
+, the transpose
ME 2010
12. One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix
For the matrix A=0
normalized Eigenvectors is given as
16.
ME 2009
Mathematics
x + 2y + z =4
2x + y + 2z =5
xy+z=1
The system of algebraic equations given
above has
(A) a unique algebraic equation of x = 1,
y = 1 and z = 1
(B) only the two solutions of ( x = 1,
y = 1, z = 1) and ( x = 2, y = 1, z = 0)
(C) infinite number of solutions.
(D) No feasible solution.
ME 2013
17. The Eigenvalues of a symmetric matrix
are all
(A) Complex with non zero positive
imaginary part.
(B) Complex with non zero negative
imaginary part.
(C) Real
(D) Pure imaginary.
18.
Choose correct set of functions, which are

linearly dependent.
(A) sin x sin x n os x
(B) os x sin x n t n x
(C) os x sin x n os x
(D) os x sin x n os x
ME 2014
19. Given that the determinant of the matrix
[
] is
12 , the determinant of
the matrix [
(A)
th
] is
(B)
th
(C)
th
(D)
Page 2
GATE QUESTION BANK
20.
One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix

0
21.
22.
2.
Consider a non-homogeneous system of

linear equations representing
mathematically an over-determined
system. Such a system will be
(A) consistent having a unique solution
(B) consistent having many solutions
(C) inconsistent having a unique solution
(D) inconsistent having no solution
3.
Consider the matrices

,
- . The order of , (
1 is
(A) { }
(C) 2
(B) { }
(D) 2 3
Consider a 33 real symmetric matrix S

such that two of its Eigenvalues are
with respective Eigenvectors
x y
[x ] [y ] If
then x y + x y +x y
x y
equals
(A) a
(C) ab
(B) b
(D) 0
Which one of the following equations is a
correct identity for arbitrary 33 real
matrices P, Q and R?
(A) (
)
)
(B) (
(
)
(C) et
et
et
)
(D) (
CE 2005
1.
Consider the system of equations (
)
is
s l r Let
(
)
(
) where
(
) e n Eigen -pair of an Eigenvalue
and its corresponding Eigenvector for
real matrix A. Let I be a (n n) unit
matrix. Which one of the following
statement is NOT correct?
(A) For a homogeneous n n system of
linear equations,(A
) X = 0 having
a nontrivial solution the rank of
(A
) is less than n.
(B) For matrix
, m being a positive
integer, (
) will be the Eigen pair for all i.
(C) If
=
then | | = 1 for all i.
(D) If
= A then is real for all i.
Mathematics
and
- will be
)
(C) (4 3)
(D) (3 4
(A) (2 2)
(B) (3 3
CE 2006
4.
Solution for the system defined by the set
of equations 4y + 3z = 8; 2x z = 2 and
3x + 2y = 5 is
(A) x = 0; y =1; z =
(B) x = 0; y = ; z = 2
(C) x = 1; y = ; z = 2
(D) non existent
5.
For the given matrix A = [
],
one of the Eigen values is 3. The other two

Eigen values are
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE 2007
6.
The minimum and the maximum
Eigenvalue of the matrix [
]are 2
and 6, respectively. What is the other

Eigenvalue?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
7.
For what values of and the following

simultaneous equations have an infinite
of solutions?
X + Y + Z = 5; X + 3Y + 3Z = 9;
X+2Y+ Z
(A) 2, 7
(C) 8, 3
(B) 3, 8
(D) 7, 2
th
th
th
Page 3
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
The inverse of the

(A)
(B)
1
1
m trix 0
(A)
(B)
is
(D)
( )
( )
( )
( )
11.
is
15.
(C)
(D)
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
CE 2012
1 are
and 8
and 5
The inverse of the matrix 0
The Eigenvalue of the matrix

[P] = 0
14.
(C)
CE 2008
9.
The product of matrices ( )
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) PQ
10.
1 is
Mathematics
n
n
The following simultaneous equation

x+y+z=3
x + 2y + 3z = 4
x + 4y + kz = 6
will NOT have a unique solution for k
equal to
(A) 0
(C) 6
(B) 5
(D) 7
CE 2009
12. A square matrix B is skew-symmetric if
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
CE 2011
13. [A] is square matrix which is neither
symmetric nor skew-symmetric and , is its transpose. The sum and difference of
these matrices are defined as
[S] = [A] + , - and [D] = [A] , - ,
respectively. Which of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) Both [S] and [D] are symmetric
(B) Both [S] and [D] are skew-symmetric
(C) [S] is skew-symmetric and [D] is
symmetric
(D) [S] is symmetric and [D] is skew
symmetric
The Eigenvalues of matrix 0

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
1 are
2.42 and 6.86

3.48 and 13.53
4.70 and 6.86
6.86 and 9.50
CE 2013
16. There is no value of x that can
simultaneously satisfy both the given
equations. Therefore, find the le st
squares error solution to the two
equations, i.e., find the value of x that
minimizes the sum of squares of the
errors in the two equations.
2x = 3 and 4x = 1
17.
What is the minimum number of

multiplications involved in computing the
matrix product PQR? Matrix P has 4 rows
and 2 columns, matrix Q has 2 rows and
4 columns, and matrix R has 4 rows and 1
column. __________
CE 2014
18.
Given the matrices J = [

K
19.
] n
], the product K JK is
The sum of Eigenvalues of the matrix, [M]

is, where [M] = [
(A) 915
(B) 1355
th
th
(C) 1640
(D) 2180
th
Page 4
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
20.
The determinant of matrix [
Let A be a 4x4 matrix with Eigenvalues

5, 2, 1, 4. Which of the following is an
I
Eigenvalue of 0
1, where I is the 4x4
I
identity matrix?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
is ____________
21.
The
rank
of
the
matrix
] is ________________
CS 2005
1.
Consider the following system of
equations
in
three
real
variables x x n x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
This system of equation has
(A) no solution
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but a finite number of
solutions
(D) an infinite number of solutions
2.
What are the Eigenvalues of the following

2 2 matrix?
0
(A)
(B)
1
n
n
(C)
(D)
n
n
CS 2006
3.
F is an n x n real matrix. b is an n
real
vector. Suppose there are two nx1
vectors, u and v such that u v , and
Fu=b, Fv=b. Which one of the following
statement is false?
(A) Determinant of F is zero
(B) There are infinite number of
solutions to Fx=b
(C) There is an x 0 such that Fx=0
(D) F must have two identical rows
Mathematics
CS 2007
5.
Consider the set of (column) vectors
defined by X={xR3 x1+x2+x3=0, where
XT =[x1, x2, x3]T }. Which of the following is
TRUE?
(A) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a basis for
the subspace X.
(B) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a linearly
independent set, but it does not span
X and therefore, is not a basis of X.
(C) X is not the subspace for R3
(D) None of the above
CS 2008
6.
The following system of
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Has unique solution. The only possible
value (s) for is/ are
(A) 0
(B) either 0 or 1
(C) one of 0,1, 1
(D) any real number except 5
7.
How many of the following matrices have

an Eigenvalue 1?
0
1 0
1 n 0
1 0
(A) One
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
CS 2010
8.
Consider the following matrix
A=[
]
x y
If the Eigen values of A are 4 and 8, then
(A) x = 4, y = 10
(C) x = 3, y = 9
(B) x = 5, y = 8
(D) x = 4, y = 10
th
th
th
Page 5
GATE QUESTION BANK
CS 2011
9.
Consider the matrix as given below
[
13.
The value of the dot product of the

Eigenvectors corresponding to any pair of
different Eigenvalues of a 4-by-4
symmetric positive definite matrix is
__________.
14.
If the matrix A is such that
Which one of the following options

provides the CORRECT values of the
Eigenvalues of the matrix?
(A) 1, 4, 3
(C) 7, 3, 2
(B) 3, 7, 3
(D) 1, 2, 3
CS 2013
11. Which one of
x x
equal [
y y
z z
x(x
y(y
(A) |
z(z
x
(B) |
y
z
x y
(C) |
y z
z
x y
(D) |
y z
z
15.
The product of the non zero Eigenvalues

of the matrix
is __________.
[
16.
the following does NOT

]
) x
) y
|
) z
x
|
y
z
x
y
y
z |
z
x
y
y
z |
z
],
Then the determinant of A is equal to

__________.
CS 2012
10. Let A be the 2
2 matrix with elements

and
.
Then the Eigenvalues of the matrix
are
(A) 1024 and
(B) 1024 and
(C) n
(D)
n
Mathematics
Which one of the following statements is

TRUE about every n n matrix with only
real eigenvalues?
(A) If the trace of the matrix is positive
and the determinant of the matrix is
negative, at least one of its
eigenvalues is negative.
(B) If the trace of the matrix is positive,
all its eigenvalues are positive.
(C) If the determinant of the matrix is
positive, all its eigenvalues are
positive.
(D) If the product of the trace and
determinant of the matrix is positive,
all its eigenvalues are positive.
ECE 2005
1.
Given an orthogonal matrix
CS 2014
12. Consider the following system of
equations:
x
y
x
z
x
y
z
x
y
z
The number of solutions for this system is
__________.
A= [
]. ,
is
(A) [
th
th
th
Page 6
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
(B) [
6.
The rank of the matrix [
(C) [
(A) 0
(B) 1
(D) [
2.
Let,
A=0
1 and
Then (a + b)=
(A)
(B)
3.
= 0
1.
(C)
(D)
Given the matrix 0
Eigenvector is
(C) 0
(B) 0 1
(D) 0
ECE 2006
4.
For the matrix 0

corresponding
0
the
ECE 2007
7.
It is given that X1 , X2 M are M nonzero, orthogonal vectors. The dimension
of the vector space spanned by the 2M
vector X1 , X2 XM , X1 , X2 XM is
(A) 2M
(B) M+1
(C) M
(D) dependent on the choice of X1 , X2
XM.
9.
All the four entries of the 2 x 2 matrix

p
p
P = 0p
p 1 are non-zero, and one of
its Eigenvalues is zero. Which of the
following statements is true?
(A) p p
p p
(B) p p
p p
(C) p p
p p
(D) p p
p p
Eigenvector
1 is
(A) 2
(B) 4
5.
1 , the Eigenvalue
to
(C) 6
(D) 8
The Eigenvalues and the corresponding

Eigenvectors of a 2 2 matrix are given
by
Eigenvalue
Eigenvector
=8
v =0 1
=4
(C) 2
(D) 3
ECE 2008
8.
The system of linear equations
4x + 2y = 7, 2x + y = 6 has
(A) a unique solution
(B) no solution
(C) an infinite number of solutions
(D) exactly two distinct solutions
1 the
(A) 0 1
v =0
ECE 2009
10. The Eigen values of the following matrix
are
[
The matrix is
(A) 0
(C) 0
(B) 0
(D) 0
(A) 3, 3 + 5j, 6 j
(B) 6 + 5j, 3 + j, 3 j
(C) 3 + j, 3 j, 5 + j
(D) 3, 1 + 3j, 1 3j
th
th
th
Page 7
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2010
11. The Eigenvalues of a skew-symmetric
matrix are
(A) Always zero
(B) Always pure imaginary
(C) Either zero or pure imaginary
(D) Always real
ECE 2011
12. The system of equations
x y z
x
y
z
x
y
z
has NO solution for values of
given by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Mathematics
ECE 2014
16. For matrices of same dimension M, N and
scalar c, which one of these properties
DOES NOT ALWAYS hold?
(A) (M )
M
(M)
(B) ( M )
(C) (M N)
M
N
(D) MN NM
17.
A real (4 4) matrix A satisfies the

equation
I where is the (4 4)
identity matrix. The positive Eigenvalue
of A is _____.
18.
Consider the matrix
J
ECE\EE\IN 2012
13.
Given that A = 0
1 and I = 0
the value of A3 is
(A) 15 A + 12 I
(B) 19A + 30
(C) 17 A + 15 I
(D) 17A +21
ECE 2013
14. The minimum Eigenvalue of the following
matrix is
[
19.
The determinant of matrix A is 5 and the

determinant of matrix B is 40. The
determinant of matrix AB is ________.
20.
The system of linear equations
(A) 0
(B) 1
15.
[
]
Which is obtained by reversing the order
of the columns of the identity matrix I .
Let
I
J where
is a nonnegative real number. The value of for
which det(P) = 0 is _____.
1,
(C) 2
(D) 3
Let A be a m n matrix and B be a n m

matrix. It is given that
) determinant
Determinant(I
(I
) where I is the k k identity
matrix. Using the above property, the
determinant of the matrix given below is
(A) 2
(B) 5
)h s
(A) a unique solution

(B) infinitely many solutions
(C) no solution
(D) exactly two solutions
21.
)4 5
]
(C) 8
(D) 16
th

NOT true for a square matrix A?
(A) If A is upper triangular, the
Eigenvalues of A are the diagonal
elements of it
(B) If A is real symmetric, the Eigenvalues
of A are always real and positive
th
th
Page 8
GATE QUESTION BANK
(C) If A is real, the Eigenvalues of A and

are always the same
(D) If all the principal minors of A are
positive, all the Eigenvalues of A are
also positive
22.
The maximum value of the determinant

among all 22 real symmetric matrices
with trace 14 is ___.
EE 2005
1.
5.
If R = [
] , then top row of
(A) ,
(B) ,
2.
(C) ,
(D) ,
(B) [
] [
] [
(C) [
] [
] [
(D) [
] [
] [
(A) [ ]
(B) [
(C) [
(B) [
(D) [ ]
In the matrix equation Px = q, which of

the following is necessary condition for
the existence of at least one solution for
the unknown vector x
(A) Augmented matrix [P/Q] must have
the same rank as matrix P
(B) Vector q must have only non-zero
elements
(C) Matrix P must be singular
(D) Matrix P must be square
] ,R=[
(C) [ ]
]
(D) [
EE 2007
6.
X = [x , x . . . . x - is an n-tuple non-zero
vector. The n n matrix V = X
(A) Has rank zero (C) Is orthogonal
(B) Has rank 1
(D) Has rank n
7.
The linear operation L(x) is defined by

the cross product L(x) = b x, where
b =[0 1 0- and x =[x x x - are three
dimensional vectors. The
matrix M
of this operation satisfies
x
L(x) = M [ x ]
x
Then the Eigenvalues of M are
(A) 0, +1, 1
(C) i, i, 1
(B) 1, 1, 1
(D) i, i, 0
8.
Let x and y be two vectors in a 3

dimensional space and <x, y> denote
their dot product. Then the determinant
xx
xy
det 0 y x
yy 1
(A) is zero when x and y are linearly
independent
(B) is positive when x and y are linearly
independent
(C) is non-zero for all non-zero x and y
(D) is zero only when either x or y is zero
EE 2006
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 4
and 5.
4.
is
] , one of
(A) [
] ,Q=[
] [
For the matrix p = [
P=[
(A) [
The following vector is linearly

dependent upon the solution to the
previous problem
the Eigenvalues is equal to 2 . Which of

the following is an Eigenvector?
3.
Mathematics
] are
three vectors
An orthogonal set of vectors having a
span that contains P,Q, R is
th
th
th
Page 9
GATE QUESTION BANK
Statement for Linked Questions 9 and 10.

Cayley-Hamilton Theorem states that a
square matrix satisfies its own
characteristic equation. Consider a
matrix.
A=0
A satisfies the relation

(A) A + 3 + 2
=0
2
(B) A + 2A + 2 = 0
(C) (A+ ) (A 2) = 0
(D) exp (A) = 0
10.
equals
(A) 511 A + 510
(B) 309 A + 104
(C) 154 A + 155
(D) exp (9A)
EE 2008
11. If the rank of a (
) matrix Q is 4, then
which one of the following statements is
correct?
(A) Q will have four linearly independent
rows and four linearly independent
columns
(B) Q will have four linearly independent
rows and five linearly independent
columns
(C) Q will be invertible
(D)
Q will be invertible
12.
13.
(A) A A+ A = A
(B) (AA+ ) = A A+
14.
The characteristic equation of a (

)
matrix P is defined as
() = | P| =
=0
If I denotes identity matrix, then the
inverse of matrix P will be
(A) (
I)
(B) (
I)
(C) (
I)
(D) (
I)
(C) A+ A =
(D) A A+ A = A+
Let P be a
real orthogonal matrix. x
is a real vector [x x - with length
x
(x
x ) . Then, which one of the
following statements is correct?
(A)
x
x
where at least one
vector satisfies
x
x
(B)
x
x for all vectors x
(C)
x
x
where at least one
vector satisfies
x
x
(D) No relationship can be established
between x and
x
9.
Mathematics
EE 2009
15. The trace and determinant of a
matrix are known to be 2 and 35
respe tively Its Eigenv lues re
(A) 30 and 5
(C) 7 and 5
(B) 37 and 1
(D) 17.5 and 2
EE 2010
16. For the set of equations
x
x
x
x =2
x
x
x
x =6
The following statement is true
(A) Only the trivial solution
x
x
x
x = 0 exists
(B) There are no solutions
(C) A unique non-trivial solution exists
(D) Multiple non-trivial solutions exist
17.
An Eigenvector of
(A) ,
(B) ,
(C) ,
(D) ,
] is
-
EE 2011
18.
The matrix[A] = 0
1 is decomposed
into a product of a lower triangular

matrix [L] and an upper triangular matrix
[U]. The properly decomposed [L] and [U]
matrices respectively are
A is m n full rank matrix with m > n and

is an identity matrix. Let matrix
A+ = (
)
, then, which one of the
following statements is FALSE?
(A) 0
th
th
1 and 0
1
th
Page 10
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B) 0
(C) 0
(D) 0
1 and 0
1 and 0
1 and 0
23.
1
1
1
EE 2013
19.
The equation 0
x
1 0x 1
0 1 has
0 1.
Eigenvector of the matrix A = 0
(C) Non zero unique solution

(D) Multiple solution
20.
(A) [ 1 1]T
(B) [3 1]T
A matrix has Eigenvalues 1 and 2. The

corresponding Eigenvectors are 0
0
1 respectively. The matrix is
(A) 0
(C) 0
(B) 0
(D) 0

true for all real symmetric matrices?
(A) All the eigenvalues are real.
(B) All the eigenvalues are positive.
(C) All the eigenvalues are distinct.
(D) Sum of all the eigenvalues is zero.
1?
(C) [1 1]T
(D) [ 2 1]T
Let A be a 3 3 matrix with rank 2. Then

AX = 0 has
(A) only the trivial solution X = 0
(B) one independent solution
(C) two independent solutions
(D) three independent solutions
2.
1 and
EE 2014
21. Given a system of equations:
x
y
z
x y
z
Which of the following is true regarding
its solutions?
(A) The system has a unique solution for
any given and
(B) The system will have infinitely many
solutions for any given and
(C) Whether or not a solution exists
depends on the given and
(D) The system would have no solution
for any values of and
22.
Two matrices A and B are given below:

p
q pr qs
p q
[
]
0
1
r s
pr qs r
s
If the rank of matrix A is N, then the rank
of matrix B is
(A) N
(C) N
(B) N
(D) N
IN 2005
1.
Identify which one of the following is an
(A) No solution
x
(B) Only one solution 0x 1
Mathematics
IN 2006
and 4
A
system of linear simultaneous
equations is given as Ax=B where
[
] n
[ ]
3.
The rank of matrix A is

(A) 1
(C) 3
(B) 2
(D) 4
4.
Which of the following statements is true?

(A) x is a null vector
(B) x is unique
(C) x does not exist
(D) x has infinitely many values
5.
For a given
that
0
matrix A, it is observed
0
1 n
Then matrix A is
th
th
th
Page 11
GATE QUESTION BANK
2 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 2 1 2
10.
(A) A
1 1 0 2
1 1
(B) A
1 2 0 2 1 1
(C) A
1 2 0
02 1
2 1 1
0 2
(D) A
1 3
IN 2007
6.
Let A = [ ]
i j n with n
= i. j. Then the rank of A is
(A)
(C) n
(B)
(D) n
7.
Let A be an nn real matrix such that

= I and y be an n- dimensional vector.
Then the linear system of equations Ax=Y
has
(A) no solution
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but finitely many
independent solutions
(D) Infinitely many independent
solutions
The matrix P =[
12.
9.
The Eigenvalues of a (2 2) matrix X are

2 and 3. The Eigenvalues of matrix
(
I) (
I) are
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
)(
(D) n
IN 2011
13.
The matrix M = [
] has
Eigenvalues
. An Eigenvector
corresponding to the Eigenvalue 5 is
,
- . One of the Eigenvectors of
the matrix M is
(A) ,
(C) ,
(B) ,
(D) ,
] rotates a vector
(C)
(D)
A real n n matrix A = [ ] is defined as

i
i j
follows: {
otherwise
The summation of all n Eigenvalues of A is
(A) n(n
)
(B) n(n
)
(C)
about the axis[ ] by an angle of

(A)
(B)
Let P 0 be a 3 3 real matrix. There exist

linearly independent vectors x and y such
that Px = 0 and Py = 0. The dimension of
the range space of P is
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 3
IN 2010
11. X and Y are non-zero square matrices of
size n n. If
then
(A) |X| = 0 and |Y| 0
(B) |X| 0 and |Y| = 0
(C) |X| = 0 and |Y| = 0
(D) |X| 0 and |Y| 0
IN 2009
8.
Mathematics
IN 2013
14. The dimension of the null space of the
15.
matrix [
] is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
One of Eigenvectors corresponding to the

two Eigenvalues of the matrix 0
(A) [
] 0
(B) 0 1 0
th
th
1 is
(C) [ ] 0 1
j
j
(D) [ ] 0 1
j
1
1
th
Page 12
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
IN 2014
16. For the matrix A satisfying the equation
given below, the eigenvalues are
, -[
(A) (
,)
(B) (1,1,0)
]
(C) (
)
(D) (1,0,0)
Answer Keys and Explanations

ME
1.
and G = [
[Ans. A]
[
Now E F = G
h r teristi equ tions is |

I|
(
)(
)(
)
Real eigenvalues are 5, 5 other two are
complex
Eigenvector corresponding to
is (
I)
(or)
( )
Verify the options which satisfies relation
(1)
Option (A) satisfies.
[Ans. B]
Given
in onsistent
4.
5.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. B]
1 Eigenv lues re 2, 2
I)
I)
No. of L.I Eigenvectors

(
(no of v ri les)
( )
7.
matrix be A = 0
sin
os
/
I)
[Ans. A]
(
I)
.
olving for , Let the symmetric and real
[Ans. C]
os
Given , E = [ sin
matrix, if Eigenvalues are

then for
matrix,
the Eigenvalues will be , ,
For S matrix, if Eigenvalues are 1 and 5

then for
matrix, the Eigenvalues are 1
and 25.
No (
3.
sin
os
[Ans. A]
For S
( )
n ( )
( (
)
minimum of m n)
For inconsistence
( )
( )
he highest possi le r nk of is
os
[ sin
,E-
2.
th
Now |
Which gives (
th
th
Page 13
GATE QUESTION BANK
Hence real Eigen value.

8.
Mathematics
x
[
][
[Ans. B]
Let
eigenv lues re
12.
Eigen vector corresponding to

is (
I)
x
.
/ .y/ . /
By simplifying
K
. / . / y t king K
Equating the elements x
[Ans. A]
0
1 Eigenv lues re
Eigenve tor is x
13.
Eigen vector corresponding to =2

is (
I)
x
.
/ .y/ . /
K
By simplifying
(
) 4
5 by
[Ans. C]
[
taking K
x verify the options
( )
infinite m ny solutions
9.
10.
[Ans. C]
Sum of the diagonal elements = Sum of
the Eigenvalues
1 + 0 + p = 3+S
S= p 2
[Ans. B]
Eigenvalues of a real symmetric matrix
are always real
15.
[Ans. B]
0
If
1 eigenv lues v lue
Eigen vector will be .
Norm lize ve tor
[Ans. B]
( )
11.
14.
( )
[( )
) ]
16.
system will h ve solution
[Ans. A]
iven M
MM
th
[Ans. C]
The given system is
x
y z
x y
z
x y z
Use Gauss elimination method as follows
Augmented matrix is
th
th
Page 14
GATE QUESTION BANK
, | -
| ]
[
So, |
[Ans. C]
Suppose the Eigenvalue of matrix A is
(
i )(s y) and the Eigenvector is
x where s the onjug te p ir of
Eigenvalue and Eigenvector is n x.
So Ax = x
and x x
king tr nspose of equ tion
x
x
[( )
n is s l r ]
x
x x x
x x x x ,
x x x x
(x x) (
re s l r )
(x x)
20.
[Ans. C]
We know that
os x
os x sin x
( ) os x
sin x ( ) os x
Hence 1, 1 and 1 are coefficients. They
are linearly dependent.
1 eigen v lues
Eigenve tor is
verify for oth

n
21.
[Ans. D]
We know that the Eigenvectors
corresponding to distinct Eigenvalues of
real symmetric matrix are orthogonal.
x
y
x
y
[ ][ ] x y
x y
x y
y
x
22.
[Ans. D]
(
)
In case of matrix PQ
CE
1.
QP (generally)
[Ans. C]
If
=
i.e. A is orthogonal, we can
only s y th t if is n Eigenv lue of
then
also will be an Eigenvalue of A,
which does not necessarily imply that

| | = 1 for all i.
2.
[Ans. A]
In an over determined system having
more equations than variables, it is
necessary to have consistent unique
solution, by definition
3.
[Ans. A]
With the given order we can say that
order of matrices are as follows:
34
Y 43
33
[Ans. A]
|
[Ans. D]
0
nnot e zero )
Hence Eigenvalue of a symmetric matrix

are real
19.
(Taking 2 common from each row)

(
)
( x x re Eigenve tors they

i
i
i
0
18.
nk ( )
nk ( | )
So, Rank (A) = Rank (A|B) = 2 < n (no. of
variables)
So, we have infinite number of solutions
17.
Mathematics
th
th
th
Page 15
GATE QUESTION BANK
(
) 33
P 23
32
P(
)
(23) (33) (32)
22
( (
)
) 22
Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to

an upper triangular matrix to find its
rank
| ]
4.
[Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for given system is
[
| ]
| ]
| ]
8.
| ]
( )
( )
( )
( )
olution is non existent for above
system.
5.
6.
7.
[Ans. B]
= Trace (A)
+ + = Trace (A)
= 2 + ( 1) + 0 = 1
Now = 3
3+ + =1
Only choice (B) satisfies this condition.

[Ans. B]
= Trace (A)
+ + =1+5+1=7
Now = 2, = 6
2+6+ =7
=3
1 is
(
)
0
9.
10.
1
1
[Ans. B]
( ) P=(
(
)(
)
=(
) (I) =
)P
[Ans. B]
A=0
Characteristic equation of A is
|
|=0
(4
)( 5
) 2 5 =0
+
30 = 0
6, 5
11.
[Ans. A]
[
[Ans. A]
Inverse of 0
Now for infinite solution last row must be

completely zero
ie 2=0 n
7=0
Then by Gauss elimination procedure

[
Mathematics
| ]
th
[Ans. D]
x
[
| ] 6y7 [ ]
z
k
Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to
an upper triangular matrix to find its rank
th
th
Page 16
GATE QUESTION BANK
| ]
17.
[Ans. 16]
, , M trix , The product of matrix PQR is
, - , - , The minimum number of multiplications
involves in computing the matrix product
PQR is 16
18.
[Ans. 23]
k
[
| ]
| ]
Now if k
Rank (A) = rank (A|B) = 3
Unique solution
If k = 7, rank (A) = rank (A|B) = 2
which is less than number of variables
When K = 7, unique solution is not
possible and only infinite solution is
possible
12.
[Ans. A]
A square matrix B is defined as skewsymmetric if and only if
= B
13.
[Ans. D]
By definition A +
is always symmetric
is symmetri
is lw ys skew symmetri
is skew symmetri
Mathematics
][
K JK
-[
,
]
-
19.
[Ans. A]
Sum of Eigenvalues
= Sum of trace/main diagonal elements
= 215 + 150 + 550
= 915
20.
[Ans. 88]
The determinant of matrix is
[
14.
[Ans. B]
1 =(
15.
,(
=
i)(
i
i
1
i -
i)
i
i
i
i
i
i
1
Interchanging Column 1& Column 2 and
taking transpose
Sum of the Eigenvalues = 17

Product of the Eigenvalues =
From options, 3.48 + 13.53 = 17
(3.48)(13.53) = 47
16.
[Ans. B]
0
[Ans. 0.5]
0.5
th
th
th
Page 17
GATE QUESTION BANK

* (
= (
21.
)+
= 1, 6
The Eigenvalues of A are 1 and 6
[Ans. 2]
]
3.
[Ans. D]
Given that Fu =b and Fv =b
If F is non singular, then it has a unique
inverse.
Now, u =
b and v=
b
Since
is unique, u = v but it is given
th t u
v his is contradiction. So F
must be singular. This means that
(A) Determinant of F is zero is true. Also
(B) There are infinite number of
solution to Fx= b is true since |F| = 0
(C) here is n
su h the
is
also true, since X has infinite number
of solutions., including the X = 0
solution
(D) F must have 2 identical rows is false,
since a determinant may become
zero, even if two identical columns
are present. It is not necessary that 2
identical rows must be present for
|F| to become zero.
4.
[Ans. C]
It is given that Eigenvalues of A is
5, 2, 1, 4
I
Let P = 0
1
I
Eigenvalues of P : |
I|
I
|
|
I
(
)
I
I
I
Eigenvalue of P is
( 5 +1 ), ( 2+ 1), (1+ 1), (4+1 ),
( 5 1 ), ( 2 1 ),(1 1), (4 1)
= 4, 1, 2, 5, 6, 3,0,3
5.
[Ans. B]
|x
X= {x
x
x
= ,x x x - then,
[
( )
( )
]
( )
( )
]
( )
no. of non zero rows = 2
[Ans. B]
The augmented matrix for the given
system is [
| ]
Using elementary transformation on above

matrix we get,
[
| ]
|
]
Rank ([A B]) = 3

Rank ([A]) = 3
Since
Rank ([A B]) = Rank ([A]) = number of
variables, the system has unique solution.
2.
[Ans. B]
0
The characteristic equation of this matrix

is given by
|
I|
|
CS
1.
)(
Mathematics
|
th
th
th
Page 18
GATE QUESTION BANK
{ [1, 1, 0]T , [1,0, 1 ]T } is a linearly

independent set because one cannot be
obtained from another by scalar
multiplication. However (1, 1, 0) and
(1,0, 1) do not span X, since all such
combinations (x1, x2, x3) such that
x1+ x2+ x3 =0 cannot be expressed as
linear combination of (1, 1,0) and
(1,0, 1)
6.
7.
Only one matrix has an Eigenvalue of 1

which is 0
| ]
Correct choice is (A)

8.
[Ans. D]
|
|
x
y
(
)(
y)
When
(
y)
x
y
x
When
(
y)
x
y
x
x
y
Solving (1) & (2)
x
y
[Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for above system
is
[
Mathematics
| ]
| ]
( )
( )
Now as long as 5 0,
rank (A) =rank (A|B) =3
can be any real value except 5. Closest
correct answer is (D).
9.
[Ans. A]
The Eigenvalues of a upper triangular
matrix are given by its diagonal entries.
Eigenvalues are 1, 4, 3 only
[Ans. A]
10.
[Ans. D]
Eigenvalues of 0
|
| =0
Eigenvalues of 0
|
Eigenvalues of the matrix (A) are the

roots of the characteristic polynomial
given below.
=0,1
1
| =0
=0
( )
)(
) =0
= 1, 1
n ( )
n
| =0
(
(
)
)
Eigenvalues of A are
respectively
So Eigenvalues of
)
=0
)
= i or 1
= 1 i or 1 + i
Eigenvalues of 0
)(
)(
|= 0
(
(
= 0, 0
Eigenvalues of 0
|
) =0
th
th
th
Page 19
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
12.
[Ans. A]
p
q
nd
Since 2
& 3rd columns have been
swapped which introduces a ve sign
Hence (A) is not equal to the problem
16.
(
)
( )
no of v ri
nique solution exists
14.
[
]
x
x
Let X = x
e eigen ve tor
x
[x ]
By the definition of eigenvector, AX =
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
[
] [x ]
[x ]
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
n x
x
x
x
x
x
(I) If
s yx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
(2) If
Eigenv lue
Three distinct eigenvalues are 0, 2, 3
Product of non zero eigenvalues = 2 3 = 6
les
[Ans. 0]
The Eigenvectors corresponding to distinct
Eigenvalues of real symmetric matrix are
orthogonal
ECE
1.
2.
[Ans. A]
If the trace or determinant of matrix is
positive then it is not necessary that all
eigenvalues are positive. So, option (B), (C),
(D) are not correct
[Ans. C]
Since, ,
]
(
=I
16
[Ans. A]
We know,
[Ans. 0]
| |
[Ans. 6]
Let A =
[Ans. 1]
x
y
x
z
x y z
x
y
z
ugmente m trix is [
13.
15.
Mathematics
7=0
1
1
1
1
b
, a
60
10
1 1 21 7
a+b =
3 60 60 20
Or 2a 0.1b=0, 2a
th
th
th
Page 20
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. C]
8.
[Ans. B]
Approach 1:
Given 4x + 2y =7
and 2x + y =6
(A I)=0
( 4 ) (3 ) 2 4=0
2 + 20=0 = 5, 4
4 2 x 7
2 1y 6

0 0 x 5
2 1y 6
x1
x2
Putting = 5, 0
1 =0
x + 2x = 0 x = 2x
On comparing LHS and RHS

0= 5, which is irrelevant and so no
solution.
Approach 2:
4x + 2y =7
x
x
1= 2
2 1
Hence, 0
4.
1 is Eigenvector.
[Ans. C]
Then Eigenvector is x
Verify the options (C)
5.
or 2x y=
1 We know th t it is Eigenvalue
We know
|I A|=0
2 I2 +32 =0
= 4, 8 (Eigenvalues)
For
= 4, ( I
)=0
)=0
9.
[Ans. C]
Matrix will be singular if any of the
Eigenvalues are zero.
|
|= 0
For = 0, P = 0
p
p
|p
p | =0
p p
p p
10.
[Ans. D]
Approach1: Eigenvalues exists as complex
conjugate or real
Approach 2: Eigenvalues are given by
v =0 1
For
= 8, ( I
v =0
6.
[Ans. C]
[
]
[
[Ans. C]
There are M non-zero, orthogonal vectors,
so there is required M dimension to
represent them
| =0
( )
7.
7
2
2x+y=6
Since both the linear equation represent
parallel set of straight lines, therefore no
solution exists.
Approach 3:
Rank (A)=1; rank (C)=2,
As Rank (A)
rank (C) therefore no
solution exists.
[Ans. A]
or m trix
Mathematics
11.
th
)((
,
)=0
)
j
[Ans. C]
Eigenvalue of skew symmetric matrix is
either zero or pure imaginary.
th
th
Page 21
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
13.
[Ans. B]
Given equations are x y z
x
y
z
and x
y
z
If
and
,
then x
y
z
have Infinite solution
If
and
, then
x
y
z
(
) no solution
x
y
z
If
n
x
y
z
will have solution
x
y
z
and
will also give solution
et of , -
et of [
16.
[Ans. D]
Matrix multiplication is not commutative
in general.
17.
[Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01

Let e Eigenv lue of hen
e Eigenv lue of
A.
=I=
Using Cauchey Hamilton Theorem,
[Ans. B]
0
Mathematics
will
Characteristic Equations is
18.
By Cayley Hamilton theorem
I
(
I)
I
14.
I
| |
[
[Ans. A]
[
[Ans. *] Range 199 to 201

From matrix properties we know that the
determinant of the product is equal to the
product of the determinants.
That is if A and B are two matrix with
determinant | | n | | respectively,
then | | | | | |
| | | | | |
20.
[Ans. B]
)
]
19.
| |
| | Product of Eigenvalues = 0
Minimum Eigenv lue h s to e
15.
[Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01

I
J
I
J
[Ans. B]
,
Let
[ ]
Then AB = [4]; BA
Here m = 1, n = 4
)
And et(I
th
les
[Ans. B]
onsi er
( )
( | )
no of v r
Infinitely many solutions
21.
et(I
th
1
th
Page 22
GATE QUESTION BANK
whi h is re l symmetri m trix

h r teristi equ tion is |
I|
(
)
(not positive)
( ) is not true
(A), (C), (D) are true using properties of
Eigenvalues
22.
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. B]
]
j( )
| |
=[
Top row of
=,
[Ans. D]
Since matrix is triangular, the Eigenvalues
are the diagonal elements themselves
namely = 3, 2 & 1.
Corresponding to Eigenvalue = 2, let
us find the Eigenvector
[A - ] x = 0
x
[
][x ]
[ ]
x
Putting
in above equation we get,
x
[
][x ] [ ]
x
Which gives the equations,
5x
x
x =0
. . . . . (i)
x =0
. . . . . (ii)
3x = 0
. . . . . (iii)
Since eqa (ii) and (iii) are same we have
5x
x
x =0
. . . . . (i)
x =0
. . . . . (ii)
Putting x = k, we get
x = 0, x = k and 5x
k
=0
[Ans. *] Range 48.9 to 49.1

Real symmetric matrices are diagnosable
Let the matrix be
x
0
1 s tr e is
x
So determinant is product of diagonal
entries
So | |
x x
M ximum v lue of etermin nt
x
x
| |
R= [
Mathematics
, of tor( )| |
x = k
| |=|
Eigenvectorss are of the form

x
k
x
[ ] * k +
x
= 1(2 + 3) 0(4 + 2) 1 (6 2) = 1
Since we need only the top row of
, we
need to find only first column of (R)
which after transpose will become first
row adj(A).
cof. (1, 1) = + |
|=2+3=5
cof. (2, 1) =
|= 3
cof. (2, 1) = + |
i.e. x x x = k : k : 0
= :1:0
=2:5:0
x
x
[ ]=[ ] is an Eigenvector of matrix p.
x
|= +1
3.
cof. (A) = [
[Ans. A]
Rank [P|Q] = Rank [P] is necessary for
existence of at least one solution to
x q.
Adj (A) =, of ( )=[
Dividing by |R| = 1 gives

th
th
th
Page 23
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. A]
We need to find orthogonal vectors, verify
the options.
Option (A) is orthogonal vectors
(
)(
[Ans. B]
The vector (
) is linearly
dependent upon the solution obtained in
- and ,
Q. No. 4 namely ,
We can easily verify the linearly
dependence as
|
6.
7.
[Ans. B]
xy
xx
| yx
xy
xx
x n xy yx
xy
x xy
y y | |y x y |
(x y)
x y
= Positive when x and y are linearly
independent.
Option (B), (C), (D) are not orthogonal

5.
)
i
8.
Mathematics
9.
[Ans. A]
A=0
|A | = 0
[Ans. B]
hen n
n m trix
xx
x x
x x
x x
x x x x
x x
*
+
x x x x
x x
Take x common from 1st row,
x common from 2nd row
x common from nth row.
It h s r nk
| =0
A will satisfy this equation according to

Cayley Hamilton theorem
i.e.
I=0
Multiplying by
on oth si es we get
I=0
I
=0
10.
[Ans. A]
To calculate
Start from
derived above
I = 0 which has
I
[Ans. D]
k
L(x) = |
|
x
= (x )
I)(
x
(
(
k
x )
I)
I
x
= x
=[
x k
x
L(x) = M [x ]
x
Comparing both , we get,
I)
(
I)
I
|
(
I)
I)
I
Hence Eigenvalue of M : | M
I)(
I
]
x
M=[
I)
I
)
th
th
th
Page 24
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
12.
13.
[Ans. A]
If rank of (5 6 ) matrix is 4,then surely
it must have exactly 4 linearly
independent rows as well as 4 linearly
independent columns.
= A is correct
=A[(
)
-A
= A[(
)
Put
=P
Then A [
] = A. = A
Choice (C)
= is also correct since
=(
)
=
I
14.
os
x in )
|| x || = x
(x in
[Ans. C]
Trace = Sum of Principle diagonal
elements.
16.
[Ans. D]
On writing the equation in the form of
AX =B
, *
nk ( )
nk( )
Number of variables = 4
Since, Rank (A) = Rank(C) < Number of
variables
Hence, system of equations are consistent
and there is multiple non-trivial solution
exists.
17.
[Ans. B]
Characteristic equation |
|
I|
(1 ) (
)(
)
Eigenve tors orrespon ing to

(
I)
x
[
] [x ] [ ]
x
2x
x
x
x
At x
x
x
x
x
x
At x
,x
is
Eigenvectors = c[ ]{Here c is a constant}
os )
18.
[Ans. D]
, - ,L-, - Options D is correct
19.
[Ans. D]
x
x
(i)
} (i) n (ii) re s me
x
x
(ii)
x
x
So it has multiple solutions.
|| x || = || x|| for any vector x

15.
* +
Argument matrix C =*
[Ans. B]
Let orthogonal matrix be
os
in
P=0
1
in
os
By Property of orthogonal matrix A
I
x os
x in
So, x = [
]
x in
x os
|| x || =
(x
x
x
+ *x +
x
[Ans. D]
If characteristic equation is
=0
Then by Cayley Hamilton theorem,
I=0
=
Multiplying by
on both sides,
=
I = (
I)
[Ans. D]
Choice (A)
Since
Mathematics
th
th
th
Page 25
GATE QUESTION BANK
20.
[Ans. D]
Eigen value
|A
Eigenvectors 0
1 n 0
Let matrix 0
x
x
10
10
I|= |
i.e., (1 ) (2 )
2
Thus the Eigenvalue are 1, 2.
If x, y, be the component of Eigenvectors
corresponding to the Eigenv lues
we
have
x
[A- I- 0
1 0y1=0
Mathematics
For =1, we get the Eigenvector as 0

Hence, the answer will be ,
21.
22.
23.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
AX=0 and (A) = 2
n=3
No. of linearly independent solutions
= n r
= 3
=1
3.
[Ans. C]
There are 3 non-zero rows and hence
rank (A) = 3
4.
[Ans. C]
Rank (A) = 3 (This is Co-efficient matrix)
Rank (A:b) =4(This is Augmented matrix)
s r nk( ) r nk (
) olution oes
not exist.
5.
[Ans. C]
We know
Hen e from the given
problem, Eigenvalue & Eigenvector is
known.
[Ans. B]
Since there are 2 equations and 3 variables
(unknowns), there will be infinitely many
solutions. If
if
then
x
y
z
x y
z
x z y
For any x and z, there will be a value of y.
Infinitely many solutions
[Ans. A]
For all real symmetric matrices, the
Eigenvalues are real (property), they may
be either ve or ve and also may be same.
The sum of Eigenvalues necessarily not be
zero.
[Ans. C]
p q
0
1
r s
( pplying p
q
r
s element ry tr nsform tions)
p
q pr qs
[
]
pr qs r
s
hey h ve s me r nk N
1
X1 , X2
1
1
2 , 1 1, 2 2

We also know that
, where
1 1
P X1 X2
1 2
1 0 1 0
0 2 0 2
[Ans. B]
Given:
2.
Solving
0
& D=
0
1
Hence
Characteristic equation is,
th
th
th
Page 26
GATE QUESTION BANK
1 1 1 0 2 1
A

1 2 0 2 1 1
6.
12.
[Ans. B]
A= [
]=[
A=[
[Ans. B]
Given
I
Hence rank (A) = n
Hence AX= Y will have unique solution
8.
[Ans. C]
9.
[Ans. C]
Approach 1:
13.
14.
Assume,
10
Now | I
[Ans. B]
Dim of null space [A]= nullity of A.
|
)(
Apply row operations

1
- is also vector
For given A = [
I)
0
[Ans. B]
If AX =
From this result [1, 2,
for M
|
(
I)
n
For diagonal matrix Eigenvalues are
diagonal elements itself.
n(n
)
Hence, rank (A) =1

7.
[Ans. A]
A=[ ]
i if i j
= 0 otherwise.
For n n matrix
Using elementary transformation

[
Mathematics
)=0
[Ans. D]
11.
[Ans. C]
A null matrix can be obtained by
multiplying either with one null matrix or
two singular matrices.
]
]
( )
By rank nullity theorem
Rank [A]+ nullity [A]= no. of columns[A]
Nullity [A]= 3
Nullity , -
Approach 2:
Eigenvalues of (
I) is = 1, 1/2
Eigenvalues of (X+5I) is = 3, 2
Eigenvalues of (
I) (X+5I) is =
,
10.
15.
[Ans. A]
A=|
Characteristics equation |
|
I|
|
j
j
th
th
th
Page 27
GATE QUESTION BANK
x
] 0x 1
Mathematics
0 1
x
x
j
j
j
j
x
] 0x 1
0 1
x
16.
[Ans. C]
A[
]=[
| | |
]
|
| |
(
| two rows ounter lose thus | |
| |)
=Product of eigenvalues
Verify options
Options (C) correct answer
th
th
th
Page 28
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Probability and Distribution

ME - 2005
1.
A single die is thrown twice. What is the
probability that the sum is neither 8 nor
9?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME - 2008
6.
A coin is tossed 4 times. What is the
probability of getting heads exactly 3
times?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
ME - 2009
7.
The standard deviation of a uniformly
distributed random variable between 0
and 1 is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
A lot has 10% defective items. Ten items

are chosen randomly from this lot. The
probability that exactly 2 of the chosen
items are defective is
(A) 0.0036
(C) 0.2234
(B) 0.1937
(D) 0.3874
ME - 2006
3.
Consider a continuous random variable
with probability density function
f(t) = 1 + t for 1 t 0
= 1 t for 0 t 1
The standard deviation of the random
variable is:
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
4.
A box contains 20 defective items and 80

non-defective items. If two items are
selected at random without replacement,
what will be the probability that both
items are defective?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME - 2007
5.
Let X and Y be two independent random
variables. Which one of the relations
between expectation (E), variance (Var)
and covariance (Cov) given below is
FALSE?
(A) E (XY) = E (X) E (Y)
(B) Cov (X, Y) = 0
(C) Var (X + Y) = Var (X) + Var (Y)
(D)
(X Y )
( (X)) ( (Y))
8.
If three coins are tossed simultaneously,

the probability of getting at least one head
is
(A) 1/8
(C) 1/2
(B) 3/8
(D) 7/8
ME - 2010
9.
A box contains 2 washers, 3 nuts and 4
bolts. Items are drawn from the box at
random one at a time without
replacement. The probability of drawing
2 washers first followed by 3 nuts and
subsequently the 4 bolts is
(A) 2/315
(C) 1/1260
(B) 1/630
(D) 1/2520
ME - 2011
10. An unbiased coin is tossed five times. The
outcome of each toss is either a head or a
tail. The probability of getting at least one
head is________
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME - 2012
11. A box contains 4 red balls and 6 black
balls. Three balls are selected randomly
from the box one after another, without
replacement. The probability that the
selected set has one red ball and two
black balls is
(A) 1/20
(C) 3/10
(B) 1/12
(D) 1/2
th
th
th
Page 29
GATE QUESTION BANK
ME - 2013
12. Let X be a normal random variable with
mean 1 and variance 4. The probability
(X
) is
(A) 0.5
(B) Greater than zero and less than 0.5
(C) Greater than 0.5 and less than 1.0
(D) 1.0
13.
The probability that a student knows the

correct answer to a multiple choice
the probability of obtaining red colour on

top face of the dice at least twice is _______
17.
A group consists of equal number of men

and women. Of this group 20% of the men
and 50% of the women are unemployed.
If a person is selected at random from this
group, the probability of the selected
person being employed is _______
18.
A machine produces 0, 1 or 2 defective

pieces in a day with associated
probability of 1/6, 2/3 and 1/6,
respectively. The mean value and the
variance of the number of defective pieces
produced by the machine in a day,
respectively, are
(A) 1 and 1/3
(C) 1 and 4/3
(B) 1/3 and 1
(D) 1/3 and 4/3
19.
A nationalized bank has found that the

daily balance available in its savings
accounts follows a normal distribution
with a mean of Rs. 500 and a standard
deviation of Rs. 50. The percentage of
savings account holders, who maintain an
average daily balance more than Rs. 500
is _______
20.
The number of accidents occurring in a

plant in a month follows Poisson
distribution with mean as 5.2. The
probability of occurrence of less than 2
accidents in the plant during a randomly
selected month is
(A) 0.029
(C) 0.039
(B) 0.034
(D) 0.044
question is . If the student dose not know

the answer, then the student guesses the
answer. The probability of the guessed
answer being correct is . Given that the
student has answered the questions
correctly, the conditional probability that
the student knows the correct answer is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME - 2014
14. In the following table x is a discrete
random variable and P(x) is the
probability density. The standard
deviation of x is
x
1
2
3
P(x) 0.3 0.6 0.1
(A) 0.18
(C) 0.54
(B) 0.3
(D) 0.6
15.
16.
Box contains 25 parts of which 10 are

defective. Two parts are being drawn
simultaneously in a random manner from
the box. The probability of both the parts
being good is
( )
( )
( )
( )
Consider an unbiased cubic dice with

opposite faces coloured identically and
each face coloured red, blue or green such
that each colour appears only two times
on the dice. If the dice is thrown thrice,
Mathematics
CE - 2005
1.
NOT true?
(A) The measure of skewness is
dependent upon the amount of
dispersion
th
th
th
Page 30
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B) In a symmetric distribution the value

of mean, mode and median are the
same
(C) In a positively skewed distribution
mean > median > mode
(D) In a negatively skewed distribution
mode > mean > median
CE - 2006
2.
A class of first years B. Tech students is
composed of four batches A, B, C and D
each consisting of 30 students. It is found
that the sessional marks of students in
Engineering Drawing in batch C have a
mean of 6.6 and standard deviation of 2.3.
The mean and standard deviation of the
marks for the entire class are 5.5 and 4.2
respectively. It is decided by the course
instruction to normalize the marks of the
students of all batches to have the same
mean and standard deviation as that of
the entire class. Due to this, the marks of a
student in batch C are changed from 8.5
to
(A) 6.0
(C) 8.0
(B) 7.0
(D) 9.0
3.
There are 25 calculators in a box. Two of

them are defective. Suppose 5 calculators
are randomly picked for inspection (i.e.
each has the same chance of being
selected). What is the probability that
only one of the defective calculators will
be included in the inspection?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE - 2007
4.
If the standard deviation of the spot speed
of vehicles in a highway is 8.8 kmph and
the mean speed of the vehicles is
33 kmph, the coefficient of variation in
speed is
(A) 0.1517
(C) 0.2666
(B) 0.1867
(D) 0.3646
Mathematics
CE - 2008
5.
If probability density function of a random
variable x is
x for
x
nd
f(x) {
for ny other v lue of x
Then, the percentage probability
P.
/ is
(A) 0.247
(B) 2.47
6.
(C) 24.7
(D) 247
A person on a trip has a choice between

private car and public transport. The
probability of using a private car is 0.45.
While using the public transport, further
choices available are bus and metro out of
which the probability of commuting by a
bus is 0.55. In such a situation, the
probability, (rounded upto two decimals)
of using a car, bus and metro, respectively
would be
(A) 0.45, 0.30 and 0.25
(B) 0.45, 0.25 and 0.30
(C) 0.45, 0.55 and 0.00
(D) 0.45, 0.35 and 0.20
CE - 2009
7.
The standard normal probability function
can be approximated as
(x )
|x | )
exp(
Where x = standard normal deviate. If
mean and standard deviation of annual
precipitation are 102 cm and 27 cm
respectively, the probability that the
annual precipitation will be between
90 cm and 102 cm is
(A) 66.7%
(C) 33.3%
(B) 50.0%
(D) 16.7%
CE - 2010
8.
Two coins are simultaneously tossed. The
probability of two heads simultaneously
appearing is
(A) 1/8
(C) 1/4
(B) 1/6
(D) 1/2
th
th
th
Page 31
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE - 2011
9.
There are two containers with one
containing 4 red and 3 green balls and the
other containing 3 blue and 4 green balls.
One ball is drawn at random from each
container. The probability that one of the
balls is red and the other is blue will be
(A) 1/7
(C) 12/49
(B) 9/49
(D) 3/7
CE - 2012
10. The annual precipitation data of a city is
normally distributed with mean and
standard deviation as 1000mm and
200 mm, respectively. The probability
that the annual precipitation will be more
than 1200 mm is
(A) < 50 %
(C) 75 %
(B) 50 %
(D) 100 %
11.
14.
A traffic office imposes on an average 5

number of penalties daily on traffic
violators. Assume that the number of
penalties on different days is independent
and follows a poisson distribution. The
probability that there will be less than 4
penalties in a day is ____.
15.
A fair (unbiased) coin was tossed four

times in succession and resulted in the
following outcomes:
(i) Head
(iii) Head
(ii) Head
(iv) Head
The prob bility of obt ining T il when
the coin is tossed again is
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
(D)
16.
An observer counts 240 veh/h at a

specific highway location. Assume that
the vehicle arrival at the location is
Poisson distributed, the probability of
having one vehicle arriving over a
30-second time interval is ____________
In an experiment, positive and negative

values are equally likely to occur. The
probability of obtaining at most one
negative value in five trials is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE - 2013
12. Find the value of such that the function
f(x) is a valid probability density function
____________________
(x
)(
f(x)
x)
for
x
otherwise
CE - 2014
13. The probability density function of
evaporation E on any day during a year in
a watershed is given by
f( )
mm d y
Mathematics
CS - 2005
1.
Box P has 2 red balls and 3 blue balls and
box Q has 3 red balls and 1 blue ball. A
ball is selected as follows: (i) select a box
(ii) choose a ball from the selected box
such that each ball in the box is equally
likely to be chosen. The probabilities of
selecting boxes P and Q are 1/3 and 2/3
respectively. Given that a ball selected in
the above process is red, the probability
that it comes from box P is
(A) 4/19
(C) 2/9
(B) 5/19
(D) 19/30
2.
Let f(x) be the continuous probability

density function of a random variable X.
The probability that a X b , is
(A) f(b a)
(C) f(x)dx
otherwise
The probability that E lies in between 2
and 4 mm/day in a day in the watershed
is (in decimal) ______
(B) f(b)
th
th
f( )
(D) x f(x)dx
th
Page 32
GATE QUESTION BANK
CS - 2006
3.
For each element in a set of size 2n, an
unbiased coin is tossed. The 2n coin
tosses are independent. An element is
chosen if the corresponding coin toss
were head. The probability that exactly n
elements are chosen is
(A) ( n )
(C) ( n )
(D)
(B) ( n )
CS - 2007
Linked Data for Q4 & Q5 are given below.
Solve the problems and choose the correct
answers.
Suppose that robot is placed on the
Cartesian plane. At each step it is easy to
move either one unit up or one unit right,
i.e if it is at (i,j) then it can move to either
(i+1,j) or (i,j+1)
4.
How many distinct paths are there for the
robot to reach the point (10,10) starting
from the initial position (0,0)?
(C) 210
(A)
20
(D) None of these
(B) 2
5.
Suppose that the robot is not allowed to

traverse the line segment from (4,4) to
(5,4). With this constraint, how many
distinct paths are there for the robot to
reach (10,10) starting from (0,0)?
(A) 29
(B) 219
(C) . / .
(D) .
6.
/
. / .
Suppose we uniformly and randomly

select a permutation from the 20!
ermut tions of
Wh t is
the probability that 2 appears at an
earlier position than any other even
number in the selected permutation?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) none of these
Mathematics
CS - 2008
7.
Let X be a random variable following
normal distribution with mean +1 and
variance 4. Let Y be another normal
variable with mean of 1 and variance
unknown
If (X
)
(Y ) the
standard deviation of Y is
(A) 3
(C)
(B) 2
(D) 1
8.
Aishwarya studies either computer

science or mathematics every day. If she
studies computer science on a day, then
the probability that she studies
mathematics the next day is 0.6. If she
studies mathematics on a day, then the
probability that she studies computer
science the next day is 0.4. Given that
Aishwarya studies computer science on
Monday, what is the probability that she
studies computer science on Wednesday?
(A) 0.24
(C) 0.4
(B) 0.36
(D) 0.6
CS - 2009
9.
An unbalanced dice (with 6 faces,
numbered from 1 to 6) is thrown. The
probability that the face value is odd is
90% of the probability that the face value
is even. The probability of getting any
even numbered face is the same. If the
probability that the face is even given that
it is greater than 3 is 0.75, which one of
the following options is closest to the
probability that the face value exceeds 3?
(A) 0.453
(C) 0.485
(B) 0.468
(D) 0.492
CS - 2010
10. Consider a company that assembles
computers. The probability of a faulty
assembly of any computer is p. The
company
therefore
subjects
each
computer to a testing process. This
testing process gives the correct result for
any computer with a probability of q.
What is the probability of a computer
being declared faulty?
th
th
th
Page 33
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
12.
pq+(1 p)(1 q)
(1 q)p
(1 p)q
pq
What is the probability that a divisor of

is a multiple of
?
(A) 1/625
(C) 12/625
(B) 4/625
(D) 16/625
If the difference between the expectation
of the square if a random variable ( ,x -)
and the square if the exopectation of the
random variable ( ,x-) is denoted by R,
then
(A) R = 0
(C) R
(B) R< 0
(D) R > 0
CS - 2011
13. A deck of 5 cards (each carrying a distinct
number from 1 to 5) is shuffled
thoroughly. Two cards are then removed
one at a time from the deck. What is the
probability that the two cards are
selected with the number on the first card
being one higher than the number on the
second card?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
14.
Consider a finite sequence of random

values X = [x1, x2 xn].Let
be the
me n nd x be the standard deviation of
X. Let another finite sequence Y of equal
length be derived from this as yi, a*xi+b,
where a and b are positive constants. Let
y be the me n nd y be the standard
deviation of this sequence. Which one of
the following statements is INCORRECT?
(A) Index position of mode of X in X is
the same as the index position of
mode of Y in Y.
(B) Index position of median of X in X is
the same as the index position of
median of Y in Y.
(C) y
x + b
(D) y
x + b
15.
Mathematics
If two fair coins flipped and at least one of

the outcomes is known to be a head, what
is the probability that both outcomes are
heads?
(A) 1/3
(C) 1/4
(B) 1/2
(D) 2/3
CS - 2012
16. Suppose a fair six sided die is rolled
once. If the value on the die is 1,2, or 3 the
die is rolled a second time. What is the
probability that the some total of value
that turn up is at least 6?
(A) 10/21
(C) 2/3
(B) 5/12
(D) 1/6
17.
Consider a random variable X that takes

values +1 and 1 with probability 0.5
each. The values of the cumulative
distribution function F(x) at x =
and
+1 are
(A) 0 and 0.5
(C) 0.5 and 1
(B) 0 and 1
(D) 0.25 and 0.75
CS - 2013
18. Suppose p is the number of cars per
minute passing through a certain road
junction between 5 PM and 6 PM, and p
has a Poisson distribution with mean 3.
What is the probability of observing
fewer than 3 cars during any given
minute in this interval?
e
(A) e
(C)
e
(B) e
(D)
CS - 2014
19. Suppose you break a stick of unit length
at a point chosen uniformly at random.
Then the expected length of the shorter
stick is ________ .
20.
th
Four fair six sided dice are rolled. The

probability that the sum of the results
being 22 is x/1296. The value of x is
____________
th
th
Page 34
GATE QUESTION BANK
21.
The security system at an IT office is

composed of 10 computers of which
exactly four are working. To check
whether the system is functional, the
officials inspect four of the computers
picked at random (without replacement).
The system is deemed functional if at
least three of the four computers
inspected are working.
Let the
probability that the system is deemed
functional be denoted by p. Then 100p =
_____________.
22.
Each of the nine words in the sentence

The quick brown fox jumps over the l zy
dog is written on
sep r te piece of
paper. These nine pieces of paper are kept
in a box. One of the pieces is drawn at
random from the box. The expected
length of the word drawn is _____________.
(The answer should be rounded to one
decimal place.)
23.
The probability that a given positive

integer lying between 1 and 100 (both
inclusive) is NOT divisible by 2, 3 or 5 is
__________.
24.
Let S be a sample space and two mutually

exclusive events A and B be such that
S If ( ) denotes the prob bility

of the event, the maximum value of
P(A) P(B) is _______
ECE - 2006
3.
A probability density function is of the
).
form (x)
e || x (
The value of K is
(A) 0.5
(C) 0.5a
(B) 1
(D) A
4.
Three Companies X, Y and Z supply

computers to a university. The percentage
of computers supplied by them and the
probability of those being defective are
tabulated below
Company
% of
Probability
computers
of being
supplied
defective
X
60%
0.01
Y
30%
0.02
Z
10%
0.03
Given that a computer is defective, the
probability that it was supplied by Y is
(A) 0.1
(C) 0.3
(B) 0.2
(D) 0.4
ECE - 2007
5.
If E denotes expectation, the variance of a
random variable X is given by
(A) E[X2] E2[X]
(C) E[X2]
(B) E[X2] + E2[X]
(D) E2[X]
6.
An examination consists of two papers,

Paper1 and Paper2. The probability of
failing in Paper1 is 0.3 and that in Paper2
is 0.2.Given that a student has failed in
Paper2, the probability of failing in
paper1 is 0.6. The probability of a student
failing in both the papers is
(A) 0.5
(C) 0.12
(B) 0.18
(D) 0.06
ECE - 2005
1.
A fair dice is rolled twice. The probability
that an odd number will follow an even
number is
2.
( )
( )
( )
( )
Mathematics
The value of the integral
x2
1
exp
dx is
2 0
8
(A) 1
(B)
(C) 2
(D)
th
th
th
Page 35
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2008
7.
The probability density function (PDF) of
a random variable X is as shown below.
(x)
exp( |x|)
exp( |x|) is
the probability density function for the
real random variable X, over the entire x
axis. M and N are both positive real
numbers. The equation relating M and N
is
8.
PDF
PDF
Mathematics
(A)
1
(B) 2M
x
11
The -1
corresponding
cumulative
0
distribution function (CDF) has the form
(A)
(C) M + N = 1
(D) M + N = 3
ECE - 2009
9.
Consider two independent random
variables X and Y with identical
distributions. The variables X and Y take
value 0, 1 and 2 with probabilities
CDF
N=1
and respectively. What is the

1
(B)
conditional probability
(x y
)
|x y|
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
CD
F
C
D
F
10.
0
1
-1
(C)
(B)
11.
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
2
(C)
2
(D)
10
1
2
(A)
CDF 1
A fair coin is tossed 10 times. What is the

probability that ONLY the first two tosses
will yield heads?
CDF
1
1
th
10
10
1
C2
2
(D)
10
1
C2
2
A discrete random variable X takes values

from 1 to 5 with probabilities as shown in
the table. A student calculates the mean of
X as 3.5 and her teacher calculates the
variance of X as 1.5. Which of the
following statements is true?
k
P(X=k)
1
0.1
2
0.2
3
0.4
4
0.2
5
0.1
th
th
Page 36
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) Both the student and the teacher are

right
(B) Both the student and the teacher are
wrong
(C) The student is wrong but the teacher
is right
(D) The student is right but the teacher is
wrong
ECE - 2010
12. A fair coin is tossed independently four
times. The prob bility of the event the
number of times heads show up is more
th n the number of times t ils show up is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2011
13. A fair dice is tossed two times. The
probability that the second toss results in
a value that is higher than the first toss is
(A) 2/36
(C) 5/12
(B) 2/6
(D) 1/2
ECE\EE\IN - 2012
14. A fair coin is tossed till a head appears for
the first time probability that the number
of required tosses is odd , is
(A) 1/3
(C) 2/3
(B) 1/2
(D) 3/4
ECE - 2013
15. Let U and V be two independent zero
mean Gaussian random variables of
variances and respectively. The
probability ( V U) is
(A) 4/9
(C) 2/3
(B) 1/2
(D) 5/9
16.
Consider two identically distributed zeromean random variables U and V . Let the
cumulative distribution functions of U
and 2V be F(x) and G(x) respectively.
Then, for all values of x
(x))
(A) ( (x)
(B) ( (x)
(C) ( (x)
(D) ( (x)
Mathematics
(x)) x
(x)) x
ECE - 2014
17. In a housing society, half of the families
have a single child per family, while the
remaining half have two children per
family. The probability that a child picked
at random, has a sibling is _____
18.
Let X X nd X , be independent and

identically distributed random variables
with the uniform distribution on [0, 1].
The probability P{X is the largest} is _____
19.
Let X be a random variable which is

uniformly chosen from the set of positive
odd numbers less than 100. The
expectation, E[X], is __________.
20.
An unbiased coin is tossed an infinite

number of times. The probability that the
fourth head appears at the tenth toss is
(A) 0.067
(C) 0.082
(B) 0.073
(D) 0.091
21.
A fair coin is tossed repeatedly till both

head and tail appear at least once. The
average number of tosses required is
_______.
22.
Let X X and X be independent and

identically distributed random variables
with the uniform distribution on [0, 1].
The probability P{X
X
X } is ______.
23.
Let X be a zero mean unit variance

Gaussian random variable. ,|x|- is equal
to __________
24.
Parcels from sender S to receiver R pass

sequentially through two post-offices.
Each post-office has a probability
of
losing an incoming parcel, independently

of all other parcels. Given that a parcel is
lost, the probability that it was lost by the
second post-office is ____________.
(x))
th
th
th
Page 37
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2005
1.
If P and Q are two random events, then
the following is TRUE
(A) Independence of P and Q implies that
probability (P Q) = 0
(B) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
+Probability (Q)
(C) If P and Q are mutually exclusive,
then they must be independent
(D) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
2.
A fair coin is tossed three times in

succession. If the first toss produces a
head, then the probability of getting
exactly two heads in three tosses is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
EE - 2006
3.
Two f ir dice re rolled nd the sum r
of the numbers turned up is considered
(A) Pr (r > 6) =
(B) Pr (r/3 is an integer) =
(C) Pr (r = 8|r/4 is an integer) =
(D) Pr (r = 6|r/5 is an integer) =
EE - 2007
4.
A loaded dice has following probability
distribution of occurrences
Dice Value
Probability
1
2
6
If three identical dice as the above are
thrown, the probability of occurrence of
values, 1, 5 and 6 on the three dice is
(A) same as that of occurrence of 3, 4, 5
(B) same as that of occurrence of 1, 2, 5
(C) 1/128
(D) 5/8
Mathematics
EE - 2008
5.
X is a uniformly distributed random
variable that takes values between 0 and
1. The value of E{X } will be
(A) 0
(C) 1/4
(B) 1/8
(D) 1/2
EE - 2009
6.
Assume for simplicity that N people, all
born in April (a month of 30 days), are
collected in a room. Consider the event of
atleast two people in the room being born
on the same date of the month, even if in
different years, e.g. 1980 and 1985. What
is the smallest N so that the probability of
this event exceeds 0.5?
(A) 20
(C) 15
(B) 7
(D) 16
EE - 2010
7.
A box contains 4 white balls and 3 red
balls. In succession, two balls are
randomly selected and removed from the
box. Given that the first removed ball is
white, the probability that the second
removed ball is red is
(A) 1/3
(C) 1/2
(B) 3/7
(D) 4/7
ECE\EE\IN - 2012
8.
Two independent random variables X and
Y are uniformly distributed in the interval
,
-. The probability that max ,
- is
less than 1/2 is
(A) 3/4
(C) 1/4
(B) 9/16
(D) 2/3
EE - 2013
9.
A continuous random variable x has a
probability density function
+ is
f(x) e
x
. Then *x
(A) 0.368
(C) 0.632
(B) 0.5
(D) 1.0
th
th
th
Page 38
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2014
10. A fair coin is tossed n times. The
probability that the difference between
the number of heads and tails is (n 3) is
(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
11.
12.
13.
14.
IN - 2005
1.
The probability that there are 53 Sundays
in a randomly chosen leap year is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
A mass of 10 kg is measured with an

instrument and the readings are normally
distributed with respect to the mean of
10 kg. Given that
Consider a dice with the property that the

probability of a face with n dots showing
up is proportional to n. The probability of
the face with three dots showing up is
_______________
Let x be a random variable with
probability density function
for |x|
f(x)
{
|x|
for
otherwise
The probability P(0.5 < x < 5) is_________
Lifetime of an electric bulb is a random
variable with density f(x) kx , where x
is measured in years. If the minimum and
maximum lifetimes of bulb are 1 and 2
years respectively, then the value of k
is__________
The mean thickness and variance of
silicon steel laminations are 0.2 mm and
0.02 respectively. The varnish insulation
is applied on both the sides of the
laminations. The mean thickness of one
side insulation and its variance are
0.1 mm and 0.01 respectively. If the
transformer core is made using 100 such
varnish coated laminations, the mean
thickness and variance of the core
respectively are
(A) 30 mm and 0.22
(B) 30 mm and 2.44
(C) 40 mm and 2.44
(D) 40 mm and 0.24
Mathematics
exp .
/ d =0.6
and that 60per cent of the readings are

found to be within 0.05 kg from the mean,
the standard deviation of the data is
(A) 0.02
(C) 0.06
(B) 0.04
(D) 0.08
3.
The measurements of a source voltage are

5.9V, 5.7V and 6.1V. The sample standard
deviation of the readings is
(A) 0.013
(C) 0.115
(B) 0.04
(D) 0.2
IN - 2006
4.
You have gone to a cyber-cafe with a
friend. You found that the cyber-caf has
only three terminals. All terminals are
unoccupied. You and your friend have to
make a random choice of selecting a
terminal. What is the probability that
both of you will NOT select the same
terminal?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
5.
Probability density function p(x) of a

random variable x is as shown below. The
value of is
p(x)
th
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
Page 39
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
Mathematics
Two dices are rolled simultaneously. The

probability that the sum of digits on the
top surface of the two dices is even is
(A) 0.5
(C) 0.167
(B) 0.25
(D) 0.125
measurements, it can be expected that the

number of measurement more than 10.15
mm will be
(A) 230
(C) 15
(B) 115
(D) 2
IN - 2007
7.
Assume that the duration in minutes of a
telephone conversation follows the
IN - 2011
12. The box 1 contains chips numbered 3, 6,
9, 12 and 15. The box 2 contains chips
numbered 6, 11, 16, 21 and 26. Two chips,
one from each box, are drawn at random.
The numbers written on these chips are
multiplied. The probability for the
product to be an even number is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
exponential distribution f(x) =
e ,x
The probability that the conversation will

exceed five minutes is
(A)
e
(C)
(B)
e
(D)
e
IN - 2008
8.
Consider a Gaussian distributed random
variable with zero mean and standard
deviation . The value of its cummulative
distribution function at the origin will be
(A) 0
(C) 1
(B) 0.5
(D)
9.
A random variable is uniformly

distributed over the interval 2 to 10. Its
variance will be
(A)
(C)
(B) 6
(D) 36
IN - 2013
13. A continuous random variable X has
probability density f(x) =
.
Then P(X > 1) is
(A) 0.368
(C) 0.632
(B) 0.5
(D) 1.0
IN - 2014
14. Given that x is a random variable in the
r nge ,
- with
prob bility density
function
the value of the constant k is
___________________
IN - 2009
10. A screening test is carried out to detect a
certain disease. It is found that 12% of the
positive reports and 15% of the negative
reports are incorrect. Assuming that the
probability of a person getting a positive
report is 0.01, the probability that a
person tested gets an incorrect report is
(A) 0.0027
(C) 0.1497
(B) 0.0173
(D) 0.2100
15.
IN - 2010
11. The diameters of 10000 ball bearings
were measured. The mean diameter and
standard deviation were found to be
10 mm and 0.05mm respectively.
Assuming Gaussian distribution of
The figure shows the schematic of

production process with machines A,B
and C. An input job needs to be preprocessed either by A or by B before it is
fed to C, from which the final finished
product comes out. The probabilities of
failure of the machines are given as:
Assuming independence of failures of the

machines, the probability that a given job
is successfully processed (up to third
decimal place)is ______________
th
th
th
Page 40
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics

ME
1.
4.
[Ans. D]
The number of ways coming 8 and 9 are
(2,6),(3,5),(4,4),(5,3),(6,2),(3,6),(4,5),
(5,4),(6,3)
Total ways =9
So Probability of coming 8 and 9 are
[Ans. D]
5.
[Ans. D]
X and Y are independent
( ) ( ) ( ) re true
Only (D) is odd one
6.
[Ans. A]
Number of favourable cases are given by
HHHT
HHTH
HTHH
THHH
Total number of cases
= 2C1 2C1 2C1 2C1 =16
So probability of not coming these
2.
[Ans. B]
Probability of defective item =
Probability of not defective item = 1 0.1
= 0.9
So, Probability that exactly 2 of the
chosen items are defective
=
( ) ( )
3.
[Ans. B]
Probability =
7.
[Ans. A]
A uniform
function
Mean (t) = t f(t) dt

t(
t
6
t)dt
t
t
6
t(
t)dt
t)dt
= (t
=0
t )dt
1
density
Density function
f(x) b a
0
t (
t)dt
a,x b
a x,x b
Mean E(x)=
t)dt
x(F(x))
x a
ab
2
Variance = F(x)2 f(x)
x F(x) xF(x)
x a
x a
=
Standard deviation = v ri nce
=
and
0,x a
x a
f(x) f x dx
, axb
0
b a
xb
0,
t (
distribution
Variance = t f(t)dt
= t (
( oth defective)
S mple sp ce
( oth defective)
Put the value of F(x), we get
1
1
b
dx x.
dx
Variance x
ba
x a
x a b a
b
th
th
th
Page 41
GATE QUESTION BANK

b
x3 xL

3(b a) a 2 b a
Mathematics
3
1 7
(3 3 1)
2 8
b3 a3 (b2 a2 )2
3(b a) 4 b a 2
(b a)(b2 ab a2 ) (b a)2(b a)2
2
3(b a)
4 b a
4b2 4ab 4a2 3a2 3b2 6ab

12
b2 a2 2ab
12
9.
[Ans. C]
Probability of drawing 2 washers, first
followed by 3 nuts, and subsequently the
4 bolts
10.
[Ans. D]
Required probability =
(b a)2
12
. / . /
Standard deviation = v ri nce
(b a)2
12
(b a)
12
11.
[Ans. D]
Given 4R and 6B
,
-
12.
[Ans. C]
Given: b=1, a=0
Standard deviation =
8.
10
1
12
12
[Ans. D]
Let probability of getting atleast one head
= P(H) then
P (at least one head) = 1 P(no head)
P(H)=1 P(all tails)
But in all cases, 23=8
1 7
8 8
X=0
P (H) = 1
(X
) is
Below X
(X
) has to be less than 0.5 but
greater than zero
Alternately
Probability of getting at least one head
( ) ( )
13.
1 7
1
8 8
Alternately
From Binomial theorem
Probability of getting at least one head
pq
( )
( )
X=1
[Ans. D]
A
event that he knows the correct
answer
B
event that student answered
correctly the question P(B) = ?
( )
( )
th
th
th
Page 42
GATE QUESTION BANK
( )
he knows
correct nswer
)
(
( )
14.
No. of employed men = 80% of men = 80

No. of employed women
= 50% of women = 50
Probability if the selected one person
being employed
= probability of one employed women
+probability of one employed man
e does not know

correct nswer
so he guesses
( ) ( )
)
( )
[Ans. D]
x
1
2
P(x) 0.3
0.6
(x)
(x)
x
18.
V(x)
x
(
(x )
[Ans. A]
3
0.1
So from figure
Mean value = 1
V ri nce : me n x defective pieces
(x )
)
n(n
(
)
(
) (
)
(
)
(x)
x (x)
Mathematics
, (x)-
(x) ( x (x))
) ( )
( )
15.
[Ans. A]
19.
16.
[Ans. *](Range 49 to 51)
[Ans. *] Range 0.25 to 0.27

p
orm l distribution
Given that
x x
z
ere x
, s x gre ter th n
z
)
ence prob bility (z
Using Binomial distribution

(x )
17.
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
e
dz
of s ving ccount holder
[Ans. *] Range 0.64 to 0.66

Let number of men = 100
Number of women = 100
th
th
th
Page 43
GATE QUESTION BANK
20.
[Ans. B]
Mean m = np = 5.2
me
(x
) e
25 Calculators
23 Non-defective
2 Defective
5 Calculators
e
(x
Mathematics
)
4 Non-defective
1 Defective
CE
1.
2.
[Ans D]
A, B, C are true
(D) is not true. Since in a negatively
skewed distribution
mode > median > mean
[Ans. D]
Let the mean and standard deviation of
the students of batch C be and
respectively and the mean and standard
deviation of entire class of first year
students be and respectively
Now given,
and
In order to normalise batch C to entire

class, the normalize score must be
equated
since Z =
Z =
Now Z =
p( defective in c lcul tors)
4.
[Ans. C]
5.
[Ans. B]
Given f(x) = x for
x
= 0 else where
(
f(x)dx
x dx
=0 1
The probability expressed in percentage
P=
= 2.469% = 2.47%
6.
[Ans. A]
Given
P(private car) = 0.45
P(bus 1 public transport) = 0.55
Since a person has a choice between
private car and public transport
P(public transport) = 1 P(private car)
= 1 0.45 =0.55
P(bus) = P(bus public transport)
(bus public tr nsport)
(public tr nsport)
= 0.55 0.55
= 0.3025 0.30
Now P(metro)
= 1 [P(private car) + P(bus)]
= 1 (0.45 + 0.30) = 0.25
Equation these two and solving, we get

=
x = 8.969 9.0
3.
[Ans. B]
Since population is finite, hypergeometric
distribution is applicable
th
th
th
Page 44
GATE QUESTION BANK
P(private car) = 0.45

P(bus) = 0.30
and P(metro) = 0.25
7.
12.
[Ans. D]
ere
cm;
(
x 102)
=P.
[Ans. 6]
f(x)dx
( x
f(x)
( x
cm
6
Mathematics
)dx
x
otherwise
x7
/
[
=P(
x
)
This area is shown below:
)]
-0.44
The shades area in above figure is given

by F(0) F ( 0.44)
=
( )
)(
= 0.5 0.3345
= 1.1655 16.55%
Closest answer is 16.7%
8.
13.
[Ans. 0.4]
(
f( )d
[Ans. C]
( )|
P(2 heads) =
9.
[Ans. C]
P(one ball is Red & another is blue)
= P(first is Red and second is Blue)
14.
=
10.
[Ans. A]
Given = 1000, = 200
We know that Z
When X= 1200, Z
Req. Prob = P (X
(Z
)
(
Z
Less than 50%
11.
[Ans. D]
(X
)
( )
(X
[Ans. *] Range 0.26 to 0.27

Avg= 5
Let x denote penalty
(x
)
(x
)
(x
)
(x
)
(x
)
e
ew (x n)
x
e
e
e
)
p(x
e
(X
15.
[Ans. B]
S * T+
n( )
( )
n(S)
16.
[Ans. *] Range 0.25 to 0.28

( t)
e
(n t)
n
( )
th
th
th
Page 45
GATE QUESTION BANK
no of vehicles
(
veh km
m ke ex ctly moves nd U moves

in any order.
Similarly to reach (10, 10) from (0,0) the
robot h s to m ke
moves nd
U
moves in any order. The number of ways
this can be done is same as number of
permutations of a word consisting of 10
s nd
Us
Applying formula of permutation with
limited repetitions we get the answer
as
= 2.e
= 0.2707
CS
1.
[Ans. A]
P: Event of selecting Box P,
Q: Event of selecting Box P
P(P)=1/3, P(Q)=2/3
P(R/P)=2/5, P(R/Q)=3/4
P(R/P).P(P)
P(R/P).P(P) P(R/Q)P(Q)
2/51/3
4/19
2/51/3 3/ 4 2/3
P(P/R)=
2.
5.
[Ans. D]
The robot can reach (4,4) from (0,0) in
8C ways as argued in previous problem.
4
Now after reaching (4,4) robot is not
allowed to go to (5,4)
Let us count how many paths are there
from (0,0) to (10,10) if robot goes from
(4,4) to (5,4) and then we can subtract
this from total number of ways to get the
answer.
Now there are 8C4 ways for robot to reach
(4,4) from (0,0) and then robot takes the
U move from ( ) to ( ) ow from
(5,4) to (10,10) the robot has to make 5
U moves nd moves in ny order
which can be done in 11! ways
= 11C5 ways
Therefore, the number of ways robot can
move from (0,0) (10,10) via (4,4) (5,4)
move is
[Ans. C]
If f (x) is the continuous probability
density function of a random variable X
then,
(
x b) P(
x b)
b
= f x dx
3.
4.
[Ans. A]
The probability that exactly n elements
are chosen
=The probability of getting n heads out of
2n tosses
=
) . /
=
=
) (
Mathematics
(Binomial formula)
)
8C
4
[Ans. A]
Consider the following diagram
(3,3)
11C
5
8 11
4 5
No. of ways robot can move from (0,0) to

(10,10) without using (4,4) to (5,4) move
is
20 8 11
ways
10 4 5
(0,0)
The robot can move only right or up as
defined in problem. Let us denote right
move by nd up move by U ow to
reach (3, 3), from (0,0) , the robot has to
which is choice (D)
th
th
th
Page 46
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. D]
umber of permut tions with in the
first position =19!
Number of permutations with in the
second position = 10 18!
(Fill the first space with any of the 10 odd
numbers and the 18 spaces after the 2
with 18 of the remaining numbers in 18!
ways)
umber of permut tions with in rd
position =10 9 17!
(Fill the first 2 place with 2 of the 10 odd
numbers and then the remaining 17
places with remaining 17 numbers)
nd so on until is in th place. After
that it is not possible to satisfy the given
condition, since there are only 10 odd
numbers v il ble to fill before the
So the desired number of permutations
which satisfies the given condition is
8.
[Ans. C]
Let C denote computes science study and
M denotes maths study.
P(C on Monday and C on Wednesday)
= P(C on Monday, M on Tuesday and C on
Wednesday)
+ P(C on Monday, C on Tuesday and C on
Wednesday)
=1 0.6 0.4+ 1 0.4 0.4
= 0.24 + 0.16 = 0.40
9.
[Ans. B]
It is given that
P (odd) = 0.9 P (even)
Now since P(x) = 1
P (odd) + P (even) = 1
0.9 P (even) + P (even) = 1
P(even) =
P(2) = P(4) = P(6) = P(even)

)
Which are clearly not choices (A), (B) or (C)

7.
/ = P (z
.z
/ = P (z
(z
) = P (z
10.
_____(i)
P(f ce
)
)
(
)
(
(0.5263)
= 0.1754
It is given that
P(even | face > 3) = 0.75
[Ans. A]
Given = 1, = 4
=2
and = 1,
is unknown
Given, P(X
) = P (Y 2 )
Converting into standard normal variates,
.z
= 0.5263
Now, it is given that P(any even face) is same

i.e. P(2) = P(4) = P(6)
Now since,
P(even) = P(2) or P(4) or P(6)
= P(2) + P(4) + P(6)
Now the probability of this happening is

given by =
(
Mathematics
= 0.75
= 0.75
( )
( )
=1
decl red f ulty
f ulty
q
p
=3
not
f ulty
decl red not f ulty

decl red f ulty
decl red not f ulty
From above tree

(decl red f ulty)
th
=0.468
[Ans. A]
The tree diagram of probabilities is
shown below
q
Now since we know that in standard

normal distribution
P (z
) = P (z 1)
_____(ii)
Comparing (i) and (ii) we can say that
th
pq
th
q)(
p)
Page 47
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
[Ans. A]
If
b c
Then, no. of divisors of
(x
)(y
)(z
)
iven
o of ivisors of
(
)(
(
)(
)
which are multiples
13.
14.
15.
[Ans. C]
(x ) , (x)V(x)
Where V(x) is the variance of x,
Since variance is and hence never
negative,
( t le st one he d)
TT )
So required prob bility
equired rob bility

12.
( )
16.
No. of divisors of
of
o of divisors of
(
)(
)
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Required Probability
= P (getting 6 in the first time)
+ P (getting 1 in the first time and getting
5 or 6 in the second time)
4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
3 or 4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
( )
( )
( )
17.
[Ans. C]
The p.d.f of the random variable is
x
+1
P(x) 0.5 0.5
The cumulative distribution function F(x)
is the probability upto x as given below
x
+1
F(x) 0.5 1.0
So correct option is (C)
18.
[Ans. C]
e
(k)
[Ans. A]
+
The five cards are *
Sample space
ordered pairs
st
nd
P (1 card = 2 card + 1)
)( )( )( )+
*(
k
P is no. of cars per minute travelling.
[Ans. D]
y = a x is the correct expression
Since variance of constant is zero.
For no cars. (i.e. k = 0)

For no cars. P(0) e
So P can be either 0,1,2. (i.e. k = 0,1,2)
For k = 1, p(1)=e
[Ans. A]
Let A be the event of head in one coin. B
be the event of head in second coin.
The required probability is
*
) ( )+
(
)| )
( )
(
)
( )
(
)
(both coin he ds)
For k = 2 , P(2)=
Hence
( )
e
e
th
( )
( )
e
4
th
e
5
th
Page 48
GATE QUESTION BANK
e
(
20.
equired prob bility is

(
(
)
( )
(
[Ans. *] Range 0.24 to 0.27

The smaller sticks, therefore, will range in
length from almost 0 meters upto a
maximum of 0.5 meters, with each length
equally possible.
Thus, the average length will be about
0.25 meters, or about a quarter of the
stick.
24.
[Ans. 10]
22 occurs in following ways
6 6 6 4
w ys
6 6 5 5
w ys
[Ans. 0.25]
( ) P(S) = 1
( )
( )
(
)
utu lly exclusive (
)
( )
( )
et ( ) x; ( )
x
P(A) P(B) = x(
x)
Maximum value of y = x (
x)
dy
(
x) x
dx
= 2x = 1
x
equired prob bility
(max)
x
21.
( )
)
e
19.
( )
Mathematics
ximum v lue of y
[Ans. *] Range 11.85 to 11.95

For functioning 3 need to be working
(function)
ECE
1.
[Ans. D]
3 1
6 2
3 1
P(even number )
6 2
Since events are independent, therefore
1 1 1
P(odd/even)
2 2 4
P(Odd number)
p
22.
[Ans. *] Range 3.8 to 3.9

Expected length = Average length of all
words
2.
[Ans. A]
I
omp ring with

(
23.
ut
[Ans. *] Range 0.259 to 0.261

Let A = divisible by 2, B = divisible by 3
and C = divisible by 5, then
n(A) = 50, n(B) = 33, n(C) = 20
n(
)
n(
)
n(
)
n(
)
P( )
rom
x
th
th
dx
dx
dx
nd
x
th
Page 49
GATE QUESTION BANK
Put
3.
in
Probability of failing in paper 2,

P (B) = 0.2
Probability of failing in paper 1, when
equ tion
A
0.6
B
A P A B
We know that, P
PB
B
student has failed in paper 2, P
[Ans. C]
P x.dx 1
Ke
Mathematics
.dx 1
ax
e dx
dx
x x,for x 0
x for x 0
K K
1
a a
( )
= 0.6 0.2
= 0.12
or
( )
7.
[Ans. A]
CDF: F x
PDF
dx
For x<0, F x
x 1
dx
4.
[Ans. D]
. / ( )
P (Y/D) =
. / ( )
. / ( )
=
5.
. / ( )
=0.4
F0
1
2
conc ve upw rds
For x>0, F x F0
x 1
dx
[Ans. A]
var[x]= =E[(x x)2]
Where, x=E[x]
x= expected or mean value of X defining
1 x2

x concave downwards
2 2
Hence the CDF is, shown in the figure (A).
E[X] =
xf xdx
x
8.
[Ans. A]
Given: Px x Me2|x| Ne3|x|
x P xi x xi dx
P xdx 1
x
xiP xi
Variance is a measure of the spread of

the values of X from its mean x.
Using relation , E[X+Y]= E[X]+E[Y]
And E[CX]=CE[X]
On var[x]= =E[(x x)2]
= ,Xx2
= E[X2] [ ,X-]
6.
Me2|x| Ne3|x| dx 2 Me2|x| Ne3|x| dx 1

0
By simplifying
2
3
M N 1
9.
[Ans. B]
x+y=2
x y=0
=> x =1, y = 1
P(x=1,y=1) =
[Ans. C]
Probability of failing in paper 1,
P (A) = 0.3
th
th
= 1/16
th
Page 50
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
[Ans. C]
14.
Probability of getting head in first toss =

Probability of getting head in second toss
=
[Ans. C]
P(no. of tosses is odd)
(no of tosses is
P(no. of toss is 1) = P(Head in 1st toss)
and in all other 8 tosses there should
P(no. of toss is 3) = P(tail in first toss, tail

in second toss and head in third toss)
be tail always.
So probability of getting head in first two
tosses
(
)(
)(
) (
)
= (1/2)10
P(no. of toss is 5) = P(T,T,T,TH)

. /
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Both the teacher and student are wrong
Mean =
k
= 0.1 + 0.4 + 1.2 + 0.8 + 0.5
= 3.0
E(x2) =
k
etc
So,
P(no. of tosses in odd)
Variance(x)= E(x2) * (x)+ =10.2 9=1.2

12.
[Ans. D]
P(H, H, H, T) +P (H, H, H, H )
=
13.
. /
. /
15.
[Ans. B]
( V V)
( V
V )
*z
v
v+ Linear combination of
Gaussian random variable is Gaussian
(z )
and not mean till zero
because both random variables has mean
zero hence ( )
Hence Option B is correct
16.
[Ans. D]
F(x) = P{X x}
(x)
* X x+
x
2X
3
. / =
[Ans. C]
Total number of cases = 36
Favorable cases:
(1, 1)
(2, 1)
(3, 1)
(4, 1)
(5, 1)
(6, 1)
(1, 2)
(2, 2)
(3, 2)
(4, 2)
(5, 2)
(6, 2)
(1, 3)
(2, 3)
(3, 3)
(4, 3)
(5, 3)
(6, 3)
(1, 4)
(2, 4)
(3, 4)
(4, 4)
(5, 4)
(6, 4)
(1, 5)
(2, 5)
(3, 5)
(4, 5)
(5, 5)
(6, 5)
(1, 6)
(2, 6)
(3, 6)
(4, 6)
(5, 6)
(6, 6)
Total number of favorable cases
For positive value of x,

(x)
(x) is always greater than zero
For negative value of x
(x)
(x)is ve
ut , (x)
(x)- x
Then probability
th
th
th
Page 51
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
18.
[Ans. *] Range 0.65 to 0.68

et be different types of f milies nd S
be there siblings.
S
S S (siblings)
Probability that child chosen at random
having sibling is 2/3
(x)
et S
x f(x)
[Ans. C]
21.

Let the first toss be head.
Let x denotes the number of tosses(after
getting first head) to get first tail.
We can summarize the even as
Event(After
x
Probability
getting first H)
T
1
1/2
HT
2
1/2 1/2=1/4
HHT
3
1/8
nd so on
II)gives
)S
(x)
i.e. The expected number of tosses (after
first head) to get first tail is 2 and same
can be applicable if first toss results in
tail.
Hence the average number of tosses is
22.
20.
(I
(II)
(I)
f(x)
(x)
[Ans. *] Range 0.32 to 0.34

This is a tricky question, here, X X X
independent and identically distributed
random variables with the uniform
distribution
, -.
So,
they
are
equiprobable. So X X or X have chances
being largest are equiprobable.
So, [P {X is largest}] or [P {X is largest}]
or [P {X is largest}] =1
and P {X is largest} = P {X is largest} =
P {X is largest}
[Ans. *] Range 49.9 to 50.1

Set of positive odd number less than 100
is 50. As it is a uniform distribution
x (x)
*X is l rgest +
19.
Mathematics
[Ans. *] Range 0.15 to 0.18

X
X
X
X
X
X
et z X
X
X
(X
)
X
X
(z
)
Pdf of z we need to determine. It is the
convolution of three pdf
(z
23.
th
dz
[Ans. *] Range 0.79 to 0.81

|x|
,|x|-
e dx
th
th
Page 52
GATE QUESTION BANK
|x| exp 4
x
x
x exp 4
pr(P Q) pr(P) + pr(Q)

(D) is true
since P Q P
n(P Q) n(P)
pr(P Q) pr(P)
5 dx
5 dx
5 dx
2.
x exp 4
x exp 4
[ exp (
,
24.
|x| exp 4
[Ans. B]
P(A|B) =
5 dx
5 dx
x ) dx]
( he d in tosses nd first toss in he d)

= P(HHT) + P(HTH)
4/5
Parcel is
sent to R
Required probability =
R
3.
1/5
Parcel is lost
Parcel is lost
parcel
is
[Ans. C]
If two fair dices are rolles the probability
distribution of r where r is the sum of the
numbers on each die is given by
r
P(r)
4/5
that
)
( )
Also, P(first toss is head) =
Parcel is sent to
Probability
P(2 heads in 3 tosses | first toss is

head)
( he ds in tosses nd first toss in he d)
(first toss is he d)
[Ans. *] Range 0.43 to 0.45

Pre flow diagram is
1/5
Mathematics
lost
2
Probability that parcel is lost by
3
Probability that parcel is lost by
provided that the parcel is lost
4
5
EE
1.
6
[Ans. D]
(A) is false since of P & Q are
independent
pr(P Q) = pr(P) pr(Q)
which need not be zero.
(B) is false since
pr(P Q)
= pr(P) + pr(Q) pr(P Q)
(C) is false since independence and
mutually exclusion are unrelated
properties.
7
8
9
10
11
12
th
th
th
Page 53
GATE QUESTION BANK
The above table has been obtained by

taking all different all different ways of
obtaining a particular sum. For example, a
sum of 5 can be obtained by (1, 4), (2, 3),
(3, 2) and (4, 1).
P(x = 5) = 4/36
Now let us consider choice (A)
Pr(r > 6) = Pr(r 7)
P(1, 5, 6) =
P(3, 4, 5) =
P(1, 2, 5) =
Choice (C) P(1, 5 and 6) =

5.
is correct.
[Ans. C]
x is uniformly distributes in [0, 1]
Probability density function
=
=
Mathematics
f(x) =
Choice (A) i.e. pr(r > 6) = 1/6 is wrong.

Consider choice (B)
pr(r/3 is an integer)
= pr(r = 3) + pr (r = 6) + pr (r = 9)
+ pr (r = 1)
=1
f(x) = 1 0 < x < 1

Now E(x ) = x f(x)dx
x
dx
=
=
6.
[Ans. B]
Let N people in room. So no. of events that
at least two people in room born at same
date
Choice (B) i.e. pr (r/3) is an integer

= 5/6 is wrong.
Consider choice (C)
Now,
pr(r/4 is an integer) = pr(r = 4)
+ pr (r = 8) + pr (r = 12)
=
=
Solving, we get N = 7
7.
[Ans. C]
(II is red|I is white)
(II is red nd I is white)
(I is white)
(I is white nd II is red)
(I is white)
8.
[Ans. B]
pr(r = 8) =
pr(r = 8 | r/4 is an integer) =
=
Choice (C) is correct.
4.
[Ans. C]
Dice value
1
2
Probability
and
is the entrie
rectangle
The region in which maximum of {x, y} is
less than
is shown below as shaded
region inside this rectangle
5
6
th
th
th
Page 54
GATE QUESTION BANK

y
(
12.
Mathematics
[Ans. *] Range 0.35 to 0.45

(
dx
x|
dx
dx
x|
13.
p .m x,x y-
f(x)dx

f(x) dx
by property
kx dx
k
9.
14.
[Ans. A]
(x
)
,e
10.
e dx
e -
, e -
[Ans. B]
Let number of heads = x,
Number of tails n x
ifference x (n x)or (n
x n or n
x
If x n n
x
n
x
If n
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
=52 weeks and 2 days are extra. Out of

x)
7, (SUN MON) (or) (SAT SUN) are

favorable.
So, Probability of this event=
2.
or x
[Ans. C]
Since the reading taken by the instrument
is normally distributed, hence
P(x
x )
Where,
[Ans. *] Range 0.13 to 0.15
Let proportionality constant = k
( dot) k ( dots)
k
( dots)
k
( dots)
k ( dots)
k
( dots)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
rob bility of showing dots
[Ans. D]
Since leap chosen will be random, so, we
assume it being the case of uniform
probability distribution function.
Number of days in a leap year=366 days
As x and n are integers, this is not

possible
Probability 0
11.
Now
.dx
e n of the distribution
St nd rd devi tion of the
distribution.
exp(
)dx
where, n=x 10 (
kg)
and from the data given in question
dx
On equating, we get 0.05=0.84

k
th
th
th
Page 55
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. D]
Mean=
8.
[Ans. B]
By definition of Gaussian distribution,
total area under the curve =1. Hence half
of the area =0.5
9.
[Ans. A]
=5.9 V.
(
V
(closest answer is 0.2)
P(x)=
4.
[Ans. C]
( )
Mean =
( )
x (x)dx =
Var(x)= (x
1 2
3 3
5.
Mathematics
[Ans. A] ]
(x
(x)dx
) dx =
10.
[Ans. C]
Probability of incorrect report
11.
[Ans. C]
mm
mm
Then probability
P(x)dx 1
x dx = 6
Area under triangle =
c
1
2
6.
[Ans. A]
Probability that the sum of digits of two
dices is even is same either both dices
shows even numbers or odd numbers on
the top of the surface
( )
( )
( )
Where
( )
Probability of occurring even
number of both the dices
( )
Probability of occurring odd
number of both the dices
(
(X
where x
mm
( )
So, number of measurement more than

10.15mm
P Total number of measurement
nd (
( )
12.
7.
[Ans. A]
f(x) dx=P
or
or e
.dx =P
[Ans. D]
For the product to be even, the numbers
from both the boxes should not turn out
to be odd simultaneously.
( )
( )( )
or P = .
th
th
th
Page 56
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. A]
f(x)dx
e |
14.
15.
e dx
[Ans. 2]
For valid pdf
Mathematics
dx
pdf dx
;k
[Ans. *] Range 0.890 to 0.899

Probability that job is successfully
processed = (
)(
)
th
th
th
Page 57
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Numerical Methods
ME 2005
1.
Starting from x = 1, one step of Newton
Raphson method in solving the equation
x +3x 7=0 gives the next value (x) as
(A) x=0.5
(C) x = .5
(B) x= . 0
(D) x=2
2.
With a 1 unit change in b, what is the

change in x in the solution of the system
of equation
= 2 .0
0.
=
(A) Zero
(C) 50 units
(B) 2 units
(D) 100 units
ME 2006
3.
Match the items in columns I and II.
Column I
Column II
(P) Gauss-Seidel
(1) Interpolation
method
(Q) Forward
(2) Non-linear
Newton-Gauss
differential
method
equations
(R) Runge-Kutta
(3) Numerical
method
integration
(S) Trapezoidal
(4) Linear algebraic
Rule
equation
(A)
2
(B)
2
(C)
2
(D)
2
4.
Equation of the line normal to function

)
f(x) = (x
(A) y = x 5
(B) y = x 5
at (0 5) is
(C) y = x
(D) y = x
5
5
ME 2007
5.
A calculator has accuracy up to 8 digits
2
after decimal place. The value of
sinxdx
0
when evaluated using this calculator by

trapezoidal method with 8 equal
intervals, to 5 significant digits is
(A) 0.00000
(C) 0.00500
(B) 1.0000
(D) 0.00025
ME 2010
6.
Torque exerted on a flywheel over a cycle
is listed in the table. Flywheel energy (in
J per unit cycle) using impsons rule is
Angle (degree)
Torque (N-m)
0
0
60
1066
120
323
180
0
240
323
300
55
360
0
(A) 542
(C) 1444
(B) 992.7
(D) 1986
ME 2011
7.
The integral
dx, when evaluated by
using impsons / rule on two equal

subintervals each of length 1, equals
(A) 1.000
(C) 1.111
(B) 1.098
(D) 1.120
ME 2013
8.
Match the correct pairs.
Numerical
Order of Fitting
Integration Scheme
Polynomial
. impsons
/
1. First
Rule
Q. Trapezoidal Rule 2. Second
. impsons /
3. Third
Rule
(A) P 2 , Q 1, R 3
(B) P 3, Q 2 , R 1
(C) P 1, Q 2 , R 3
(D) P 3, Q 1 , R 2
ME 2014
9.
Using the trapezoidal rule, and dividing
the interval of integration into three equal
sub intervals, the definite integral
|x|dx is ____________
th
th
th
Page 58
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
The value of .
( )
value approximate
estimate?
calculated using
the Trapezoidal rule with five sub

intervals is _______
11.
The definite integral
12.
The real root of the equation

5x
2cosx
= 0 (up to two decimal
accuracy) is _______
13.
Consider
an
equation
= t
.If x =x at t = 0 , the
CE 2005
Linked Answer Question 1 and 2
Give a>0, we wish to calculate its
reciprocal value 1/a by using Newton
Raphson Method for f(x) = 0.
2.
The Newton Raphson algorithm for the

function will be
(A) x
= (x
(B) x
= (x
x )
(C) x
= 2x
ax
(D) x
=x
in
the
(C)
(D)
CE 2007
4.
The following equation needs to be
numerically solved using the NewtonRaphson method
x3 + 4x 9 = 0 the iterative equation for
the purpose is (k indicates the iteration
level)
differential
increment in x calculated using RungeKutta fourth order multi-step method

with a step size of t = 0.2 is
(A) 0.22
(C) 0.66
(B) 0.44
(D) 0.88
1.
(A)
(B) 0
value)
is evaluated
using Trapezoidal rule with a step size of

1. The correct answer is _______
ordinary
Mathematics
For a = 7 and starting with x = 0.2 the

first two iteration will be
(A) 0.11, 0.1299
(C) 0.12, 0.1416
(B) 0.12, 0.1392
(D) 0.13, 0.1428
CE 2006
3.
A 2nd degree polynomial f(x) has values of
1, 4 and 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
5.
(A) x
(B) x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
Given that one root of the equation

x
10x + 31x 30 = 0 is 5, the other
two roots are
(A) 2 and
(C) and
(B) 2 and
(D) 2 and
CE 2008
6.
Three values of x and y are to be fitted in
a straight line in the form y = a + bx by
the method of least squares. Given
x = 6, y = 2 x =
and xy =
the values of a and b are respectively
(A) 2 and 3
(C) 2 and 1
(B) 1 and 2
(D) 3 and 2
CE 2009
7.
In the solution of the following set of
linear equation by Gauss elimination
using partial pivoting 5x + y + 2z = 34;
4y 3z = 12; and 10x 2y + z = 4; the
pivots for elimination of x and y are
(A) 10 and 4
(C) 5 and 4
(B) 10 and 2
(D) 5 and 4
The integral f(x) dx is to be estimated

by applying the trapezoidal rule to this
data. What is the error (define as true
th
th
th
Page 59
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE 2010
8.
The table below given values of a function
F(x) obtained for values of x at intervals
of 0.25.
x
0 0.25
0.5 0.75 1.0
F(x) 1 0.9412 0.8 0.64 0.50
The value of the integral of the function
between the limits 0 to using impsons
rule is
(A) 0.7854
(C) 3.1416
(B) 2.3562
(D) 7.5000
CE
9.
2011
The square root of a number N is to be
obtained by applying the Newton
Raphson iterations to the equation
x
= 0. If i denotes the iteration
index, the correct iteration scheme will be
(A) x
(B) x
= (x
= (x
CE 2013
12. Find the magnitude of the error (correct
to two decimal places) in the estimation
of following integral using impsons
Rule. Take the step length as 1.___________
(x
1.
Consider
(D) x
= (x
he error in
xe dx
is 2
1
R
xn1 xn can be used to compute
2
xn
the
(A) square of R
(B) reciprocal of R
(C) square root of R
(D) logarithm of R
0 .
CE 2012
The estimate of .
1
3
to an accuracy of at least 106
The Newton-Raphson iteration
for a continuous
The values of
and ( ) are 19.78 and
500.01, respectively. The corresponding
error in the central difference estimate
for h = 0.02 is approximately
(A) .
0
(C) .5
0
(B) .0
0
(D) .0
0
11.
function estimated with h=0.03 using the

central difference formula
f(x)|
using the trapezoidal rule is

(A) 1000e
(C) 100e
(B) 1000
(D) 100
f(x)|
series
CS 2008
2.
The minimum number of equal length
subintervals needed to approximate
3.
10.
the
= 0.5 obtained from the NewtonRaphson method. The series converges to

(A) 1.5
(C) 1.6
(D) 1.4
(B) 2
= (x
0) dx
CS 2007
(C) x
Mathematics
obtained using
impsons rule with three point function

evaluation exceeds the exact value by
(A) 0.235
(C) 0.024
(B) 0.068
(D) 0.012
CS 2010
4.
Newton-Raphson method is used to
compute a root of the equation
x
13 = 0 with 3.5 as the initial value.
The approximation after one iteration is
(A) 3.575
(C) 3.667
(B) 3.677
(D) 3.607
th
th
th
Page 60
GATE QUESTION BANK
CS 2012
5.
The bisection method is applied to
compute a zero of the function
f(x) = x
x
x
in the interval
[1,9]. The method converges to a solution
after ___________ iterations.
(A) 1
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 7
CS 2013
6.
Function f is known at the following
points:
x
f(x)
0
0
0.3 0.09
0.6 0.36
0.9 0.81
1.2 1.44
1.5 2.25
1.8 3.24
2.1 4.41
2.4 5.76
2.7 7.29
3.0 9.00
he value of f(x)dx computed using
the trapezpidal rule is
(A) 8.983
(C) 9.017
(B) 9.003
(D) 9.045
CS 2014
7.
The function f(x) = x sin x satisfied the
following equation:
( ) + f(x) + t cos x = 0.
The value of t is _________.
8.
In the Newton-Raphson method, an initial

guess of
= 2 made and the sequence
x x x
.. is obtained for the function
0.75x
2x
2x
=0
Consider the statements
(I) x = 0.
(II) The method converges to a solution
in a finite number of iterations.
Which of the following is TRUE?
(A) Only I
Mathematics
(B) Only II
(C) Both I and II
(D) Neither I nor II
9.
With respect to the numerical evaluation

of the definite integral,
= x dx
where a and b are given, which of the
following statements is/are TRUE?
(I) The value of K obtained using the
trapezoidal rule is always greater
then or equal to the exact value of
the defined integral
(II) The value of K obtained using the
impsons rule is always equal to the
exact value of the definite integral
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) Both I and II
(D) Neither I nor II
ECE 2005
1.
Match the following and choose the
correct combination
Group I
Group II
(A) Newton1. Solving nonRaphson
linear equations
method
(B) Runge-Kutta
2. Solving linear
method
simultaneous
equations
(C) impsons
3. Solving ordinary
Rule
differential
equations
(D) Gauss
4. Numerical
elimination
integration
method
5. Interpolation
6. Calculation of
Eigen values
(A) A-6, B-1, C-5, D-3
(B) A-1, B-6, C-4, D-3
(C) A-1, B-3, C-4, D-2
(D) A-5, B-3, C-4, D-1
th
th
th
Page 61
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2007
2.
The equation x3 x2+4x 4=0 is to be
solved using the Newton-Raphson
method. If x=2 is taken as the initial
approximation of the solution, then the
next approximation using this method
will be
(A) 2/3
(C) 1
(B) 4/3
(D) 3/2
(A) 2
sin x
..
2 cos x
..
(C) 2
..
(D) 2
..
8.
The series
eXn
1 eXn
X2 eXn 1 Xn 1
(D) Xn1 n
Xn -eXn
ECE 2014
6.
The Taylor expansion of
is
Match the application to appropriate

numerical method.
Application
Numerical
Method
P1:Numerical
M1:Newtonintegration
Raphson Method
P2:Solution to a
M2:Runge-Kutta
transcendental
Method
equation
P3:Solution to a
M : impsons
system of linear
1/3-rule
equations
P4:Solution to a
M4:Gauss
differential equation
Elimination
Method
(A) P1M3, P2M2, P3M4, P4M1
(B) P1M3, P2M1, P3M4, P4M2
(C) P1M4, P2M1, P3M3, P4M2
(D) P1M2, P2M1, P3M3, P4M4
(C) Xn1 1 Xn
ECE 2013
5.
A polynomial
f(x) = a x
a x
a x
a x a
with all coefficients positive has
(A) No real root
(B) No negative real root
(C) Odd number of real roots
(D) At least one positive and one
negative real root
(B) 2
7.
ECE 2008
3.
The recursion relation to solve x=
using Newton-Raphson method is
(A)
=e
(B)
=
e
ECE 2011
4.
A numerical solution of the equation
f(x) = x x
= 0 can be obtained
using Newton Raphson method. If the
starting value is x = 2 for the iteration,
the value of x that is to be used in the next
step is
(A) 0.306
(C) 1.694
(B) 0.739
(D) 2.306
Mathematics
converges to
(A) 2 ln 2
(B) 2
(C) 2
(D) e
EE 2007
1.
The differential equation
is
discretised using Eulers numerical

integration method with a time step
T > 0. What is the maximum permissible
value of T to ensure stability of the
solution of the corresponding discrete
time equation?
(A) 1
(C)
(B) /2
(D) 2
EE 2008
2.
Equation e
= 0 is required to be
solved using ewtons method with an
initial guess x =
. Then, after one
th
th
th
Page 62
GATE QUESTION BANK
step of ewtons method estimate x of

the solution will be given by
(A) 0.71828
(C) 0.20587
(B) 0.36784
(D) 0.00000
3.
A differential equation dx/dt = e u(t)

has to be solved using trapezoidal rule of
integration with a step size h = 0.01 sec.
Function u(t) indicates a unit step
function. If x(0)= 0, then value of x at
t = 0.01 s will be given by
(A) 0.00099
(C) 0.0099
(B) 0.00495
(D) 0.0198
EE 2009
4.
Let x
7 = 0. The iterative steps for
the solution using Newton aphsons
method is given by
(A) x
= (x
(B) x
=x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
=x
EE 2013
7.
When the Newton Raphson method is
applied
to
solve
the
equation
f(x) = x
2x
= 0 the solution at the
end of the first iteration with the initial
guess value as x = .2 is
(A) 0.82
(C) 0.705
(B) 0.49
(D) 1.69
EE 2014
8.
The function ( ) =
is to be
solved using Newton-Raphson method. If
the initial value of is taken as 1.0, then
the absolute error observed at 2nd
iteration is ___________
IN 2006
1.
For k = 0
2
. the steps of
Newton-Raphson method for solving a
non-linear equation is given as
2
5
xk 1 xk xK2 .
3
3
(x
Starting from a suitable initial choice as k

tends to , the iterate tends to
(A) 1.7099
(C) 3.1251
(B) 2.2361
(D) 5.0000
EE 2011
5.
Solution of the variables
and
for the
following equations is to be obtained by
employing the Newton-Raphson iterative
method
equation(i) 0x inx
0. = 0
equation(ii) 0x
0x cosx
0. = 0
Assuming the initial values
= 0.0 and
= .0 the jacobian matrix is
0
0.
0
0.
(A) *
(C) *
+
+
0
0.
0
0.
0 0
0
0
(B) *
(D) *
+
+
0
0
0
0
6.
Mathematics
IN 2007
2.
Identify the Newton-Raphson iteration
scheme for finding the square root of 2.
3.
(A) x
(x
(B) x
= (x
(C) x
(D) x
= 2
The polynomial p(x) = x + x + 2 has

(A) all real roots
(B) 3 real and 2 complex roots
(C) 1 real and 4 complex roots
(D) all complex roots
Roots of the algebraic equation

x
x
x
= 0 are
)
(A) (
(C) (0 0 0)
(B) (
j j)
(D) (
j j)
th
th
th
Page 63
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN 2008
4.
It is known that two roots of the
nonlinear equation x3 6x2 +11x 6 = 0
are 1 and 3. The third root will be
(A) j
(C) 2
(B)
j
(D) 4
IN 2013
8.
While numerically solving the differential
equation
with
x(0) = 0 and the constant

0 is to be
numerically integrated using the forward
Euler method with a constant integration
time step T. The maximum value of T such
that the numerical solution of x converges
is
(C)
(A)
(B)
2xy = 0 y(0) =
using
Eulers predictor corrector (improved

Euler Cauchy )method with a step size
of 0.2, the value of y after the first step is
(A) 1.00
(C) 0.97
(B) 1.03
(D) 0.96
IN 2009
5.
Mathematics
IN 2014
9.
The iteration step in order to solve for the
cube roots of a given number N using the
Newton- aphsons method is
(D) 2
(A) x
=x
(B) x
= (2x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
= (2x
x )
)
x )
)
IN 2010
6.
The velocity v (in m/s) of a moving mass,
starting from rest, is given as
=v
t.
Using Eulers forward difference method

(also known as Cauchy-Euler method)
with a step size of 0.1s, the velocity at 0.2s
evaluates to
(A) 0.01 m/s
(C) 0.2 m/s
(B) 0.1 m/s
(D) 1 m/s
IN 2011
7.
The extremum (minimum or maximum)
point of a function f(x) is to be
determined by solving
( )
= 0 using the
Newton-Raphson method.
Let f(x) = x
x and x = 1 be the initial
guess of x. The value of x after two
iterations (x ) is
(A) 0.0141
(C) 1.4167
(B) 1.4142
(D) 1.5000
th
th
th
Page 64
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics

ME
1.
y = sin ( ) =
2
[Ans. C]
By N-R method ,
=x
f(x) = x
f( ) =
x =x
( )
( )
y = sin (
x =
y = sin( ) = 0
5
y = sin ( ) =
y = sin (
f (x) = x
f ( )= ,
=1
) = 0.70 0
)=
7
y = sin ( ) =
[Ans. C]
Given x y = 2
(i)
.0 x 0.0 y = b
(ii)
Multiply 0.99 is equation (i) and subtract
from equation (ii); we get
( .0
0. )x = b (2 0. )
0.02x = b
.
0.02x = b
x =
0.02
[Ans. D]
4.
[Ans. B]
Given f(x) = (x
2
)
f (x) = (x
f(x)dx = [(y
0.70 0
6.
y )
[(0
0)
0.70 0
0.70 0
[(0
y )]
7.
[Ans. C]
x
y=
( 0
0)
2(
2.7 /unit cycle.
Slope of normal = 3
( roduct of slopes = 1)
Slope of normal at point (0, 5)
y 5 = (x 0)
y= x 5
[Ans. A]
b a 2
0
h=
=
=
n
y = sin(0) = 0
0=0
[Ans. B]
ower = = Area under the curve.
h
(y
= [(y
y )
y
y )
Slope of tangent at point (0, 5)

2
) / =
m = (0
2(0.70 0
2(y
2(y
)]
sinx dx =
5.
)=0
Trapezoidal rule
= 50 units
3.
0.70 0
(0.5) = .5
y = sin (
2.
0.70 0
1
1
x
dx = (y
= (
55)
2 )]
2
h
y
2
y )
= .
8.
[Ans. D]
By the definition only
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
th
th
th
Page 65
GATE QUESTION BANK
9.
[Ans. *] Range 1.10 to 1.12
By intermediate value theorem roots lie

be between 0 and 1.
et x = rad = 57. 2
By Newton Raphson method
f(x )
x
=x
f (x )
2x sin x
2 cos x
x
=
5 2 sin x
x = 0.5 2
x = 0.5 25
x = 0.5 2
|x|dx is
h
ydx = [y
2
2(y
0.33
y ]
0.33
|x|dx =
.)
0.33
0.333
2(0.
0.
)]
13.
= . 0
10.
[Ans. *] Range 1.74 to 1.76

2.5
h=
= 0.
5
y
2y
2y
. ln (x)dx = [
2y
y
=
[ln(2.5)
2ln( . )
= .75
11.
2(ln2. )
2y
2 ln( . )
CE
1.
[Ans. *]Range 1.1 to 1.2
t|
x = 0.0
0. = 0.
= 2t
t|
Set up the equation as x =

i.e. = a
f(x)dx = [y
2(y
iven in question
0
1
1
2
1
0.5
dx = [y
x
2
t
x =
2
To calculate using N-R method
rapezoidal rule
x
y
)dt
[Ans. C]
dx by trapezoidal rule
x
h=
[Ans. D]
The variation in options are much, so it
can be solved by integrating directly
dx
= t
dt
dx = ( t
ln( )]
2ln( .7)
Mathematics
..y
)]
a=0
i.e. f(x) =
2
3
0.33
a=0
Now f (x) =
f(x ) =
f (x ) =
2(y )]
For N-R method

= [
2
= .
0.
0.5]
=x
x
12.
[Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.56

Let f(x) = 5x 2 cos x
f (x) = 5 2 sin x
f(0) =
f( ) = 2.
=x
)
(
Simplifying which we get

x
= 2x
ax
th
th
th
Page 66
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
[Ans. B]
For a = 7 iteration equation
Becomes x
= 2x
7x
with x = 0.2
x = 2x
7x = 2 0.2 7(0.2) = 0.12
and x = 2x
7x = 2 0.12 7(0. 2)
= 0.1392
[Ans. A]
f(x) = 1, 4, 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2
respectively
f(x)dx = (f
2f
=x
x
5.
f )
f(x)dx = (1 + 2(4) + 15) = 12
and
4.
= 30
= 5
5 =
5 ( ) =
ince = from (i)
5 ( )
=
=5
=
olving for and
(5 ) =
5
=0
= 2 and =
Alternative method
5
1
0
31
0
0
5
25
30
1
5
6
0
(x 5)(x
)=0
5x
(x 5)(x 2)(x
)=0
x=2 5
x )dx
+ =
2=
[Ans. A ]
Given f(x) = x
x
=0
f (x) = x
Newton Raphson formula is
= (i)
Also
Error = exact Approximate value

=
= 5
Now exact value f(x)dx
= *x
2x
x
Approximate value by rapezoidal ule

= 12
Since f(x) is second degree polynomial, let
f(x) = a0 + a x + a x
f(0) = 1
a
0 0=
a =
f(1) = 4
a
a
a =
1+ a
a =
a
a =
f(2) = 15
a
2a
a = 5
2a
a = 5
2a
a =
Solving (i) and (ii) a =
and a =
f(x) = 1 x + 4 x
x
[Ans. A]
Given
x 10 x + 31x 30 = 0
One root = 5
Let the roots be and of equation
ax + bx + cx + d = 0
(3 points Trapezoidal Rule)

Here h = 1
= (
f(x )
f (x )
(x
x
)
( x
)
x
x
x
( x
)
=x
x
3.
Mathematics
6.
[Ans. D]
Y = a + bx
Given
n= x =
and xy =
th
th
y = 2 x = 14
th
Page 67
GATE QUESTION BANK
Normal equations are

y = na bx
xy = ax bx
Substitute the values and simply
a= b=2
7.
9.
5
[0
0
| 2]
2
0
[0
5
f(x )
f(x )
=x
=x
2x
2x
[x
10.
[Ans. D]
Error in central difference formula is
(h)
This means, error
If error for h = 0.03 is 2
0
then
Error for h = 0.02 is approximately
(0.02)
2
0
0
(0.0 )
11.
[Ans. D]
Exact value of .
| 2]
2
So the pivot for eliminating x is a = 10

Now we eliminate x using this pivot
as follows :
0
2
[0
| 2]
5
2
5
0
2
0
2]
[0
0
2
/2
Now to eliminate y, we need to compare
the elements in second column at and
below the diagonal element Since a = 4
is already larger in absolute value
compares to a = 2
The pivot element for eliminating y is
a = 4 itself.
The pivots for eliminating x and y are
respectively 10 and 4
8.
[Ans. A]
x
[Ans. A]
The equation is
5x + y + 2z = 34
0x + 4y 3z = 12
and 10x 2y + z =
The augmented matrix for gauss
elimination is
5
2
[0
| 2]
0
2
Since in the first column maximum
element in absolute value is 10 we need
to exchange row 1 with row 3
Mathematics
dx = .0
Using impsons rule in three point

form,
b a
.5 0.5
h=
=
= 0.5
n
2
So,
x 0.5 1 1.5
y 2
1 0.67
=
=
0.5
]
[2
0. 7
= .
So, the estimate exceeds the exact value by
Approximate value Exact value
= 1.1116 1.0986
=0.012(approximately)
12.
[Ans. *](Range 0.52 to 0.55)

Using impsons ule
X
0
1
2
3
Y
10
11
26
91
4
266
[Ans. A]
I = h(f
=
0.
= 0.7 5
2f
0.25(
0.
0.
0.5)
(x
f )
2
= [( 0
0)dx
2
2(2 )
)]
= 2 5.
The value of integral
th
th
th
Page 68
GATE QUESTION BANK
(x
0) dx = *
=2
x
5
0x+
3.
[Ans. A]
+
, x = 0.5
2 =
=x =
2 = + R
=R
=
So this iteration will compute the square
root of R
= +
=
8 = 4 +9
=
4.
= = 1.5
[Ans. A]
Here, the function being integrated is
f(x) = xe
f (x) = xe + e = e (x + 1)
f (x) = xe + e + e = e (x + 2)
Since,
both
are
increasing
functions of x, maximum value of f ( ) in
interval 1
2, occurs at = 2 so
(
)|
(2
max |f
=e
2) = e
Truncation Error for trapezoidal rule
= TE (bound)
[Ans. D]
y=x
dy
= 2x
dx
f(x)= x
x
= .5
5.
(b a) max |f ( )| 1
(2 1) [e (2 + 2)]
Now putting
= 57 7
)=5
f(x )
2
oot lies between and
x =(
)=2
f(x ) 0
2
After ' ' interations we get the root
x =(
=
max |f ( )|
[Ans. B]
f( ) = 5
f( ) = 5
72
)
)
f(
0 f(
0
is number of subintervals
= . 07
max |f ( )|
Where
(x
2=+
=
when the series converges x
= 1000 e
At convergence
x
=x =
=
Given x
2.
)/
[Ans. C]
5
Magnitude of error
= 2 5.
2 . = 0.5
CS
1.
Mathematics
6.
[Ans. D]
h
f(x)dx = [f(0)
2
=
0
[
.
.
0.
f( )
2(0.0
0.
. . 7.2 )
2(f )]
]
5 . ]
= 9.045
h=
Now, No. of intervals,
=
th
th
th
Page 69
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
8.
9.
ECE
1.
2.
[Ans. ]
Given (x) + f(x) + t cos x = 0
and f(x) = x sin x
f (x) = x cos x + sin x
f (x) = x ( sin x) + cos x + cos x
= 2 cos x x sin x
= 2 cos x f (x)
2 cos x f (x) + f(x) +t cos x = 0
2 cos x = tcos x t = 2
[Ans. A]
f(x) = 0.75x
2x
2x
f (x) = 2.25x
x 2
x =2 f = 2 f =
f
x =x
=0
f
f = f = 2
f
x =x
=2
f
f = 2 f =
f
x =x
=0
f
Also, root does not lies between 0 and 1
So, the method diverges if x = 2
nly ( )is true.
x1 2
3.
1 x n
4.
x1 x0
e
e
e xn
1 exn
[Ans. C]
x
f(x )
f (x )
=x
f(2) = (2
) = 2
f (2) =
=2
and
= .
5.
[Ans. D]
f(x) = a x
a x
a x
a x a
If the above equation have complex roots,
then they must be in complex conjugate
pair, because its given all co-efficients are
positive ( they are real )
So if complex roots are even no. (in pair)
then real roots will also be even.
ption ( )is wrong
From the equation
( 0)
roduct of roots =
As no. of roots = 4,
Product of roots < 1
either one root 0
(or)
Product of three roots < 0
ption ( )is rong.
Now, take option (A),
Let us take it is correct .
Roots are in complex conjugate pairs
=
Product of roots
0
| | | |
0 which is not possible
ption (A) is wrong
orrect answer is option ( )
[Ans. C]
By definition (& the application) of
various methods
4=0
Next approximation x1 x0
8 4
12 3
[Ans. C]
Given : f(x)= x e
By Newton Raphson method,
f(x )
x
x
=x
=x
f (x )
[Ans. C]
For value of K if trapezoidal rule is used
then the value is either greater than
actual value of definite integral and if
impsons rule is used then value is exact
Hence both statements are TRUE
[Ans. B]
y(t) =x3 x2 + 4x
x0 = 2
Mathematics
f x0
f ' x0
x03 x02 4x0 4

3x02 2x0 4
th
th
th
Page 70
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. A]
sin x 2 cos x
x
= (x
)
7.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. D]
2(
x
2
Put x =
as given,
x = [e ( 2)
]/e
= 0.71828
[Ans. C]
=e
.. = e
u(t)
x
2
. . x in
t
[Ans. D]
Here,
x = e u(t) dt = f(t) dt
At t = 0.01, x = Area of trapezoidal
=
x
f(x y) =
=(
)x
h
4.
5.
=[
=*
( )
f(x ) = e
f(x ) = e
6.
0x cos x
0x sinx
20x
0sinx
]
0cosx
0
0
is
0
+
0
[Ans. D]
x
x
x
=0
(x
)(x
)=0
x
=0 x
=0
x=
x= j
=x
(
The matrix at x = 0 x =
( )
[Ans. B]
u(x x ) = 0x sin x
0. = 0
v(x x ) = 0x
0x cosx
0. = 0
The Jacobian matrix is
u
u
x
x
v
v
[ x
x ]
[Ans. A]
Here
f(x) = e
f (x) = e
The Newton Raphson iterative equation is
=x
= *x
2
o maximum permissible value of is 2 .
i.e. x
[Ans. A]
since h = here
= x
=x
= 0.0099
or stability |
f(0.0 )] =
= [f(0)
Eulers method equation is

x = x h. f(x y )
x
x
= x h(
)
2.
i=0
x =
as e =
EE
1.
Now put
3.
Mathematics
th
th
th
Page 71
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
[Ans. C]
x =x
=
.2
Hence, it will have atleast 5 (0+1)= 4

complex roots.
f(x )
f (x )
( .2)
2( .2)
( .2)
2
4.
[Ans. C]
Approach- 1
Given, x3 6x2 + 11x 6 = 0
Or (x 1)(x 3)(x 2) = 0
x= 1, 2, 3.
= 0.705
8.
[Ans. *] Range 0.05 to 0.07

Clearly, x = 0 is root of the equation
f(x) = e
=0
f (x) = e and x = .0
Using ewton raphson method
(e .
)
f(x )
x =x
=
=
f (x )
e.
e
and x = x
f(x )
=
f (x ) e
=
(e
Approach- 2
For ax3 +bx2 + cx +d = 0
If the three roots are p,q,r then
Sum of the roots= p+q+r= b/a
Product of the roots= pqr= d/a
pq+qr+rp=c/a
)
e
5.
[Ans. D]
dx
x
=
dt
f(x, y) =
e
= 0. 7 0.
= 0.0
Absolute error at 2nd itteration is
|0 0.0 | = 0.0
IN
1.
=x
h
=(
[Ans. A]
As k xk+1 xk
xk = x
h (x y ) = x
)x
2.
3.
h(
or stability |
x = x
x =5
x =5
Mathematics
= 1.70
[Ans. A]
Assume x =
f(x) = x
=0
f(x )
x
=x
= [x
f (x ) 2
6.
[Ans. A]
dv
=v t
dt
t
v dv
=v t
dt
0 0 0 0+0 0. = 0
0.1 0 0+0.1 0. = 0.0
7.
[Ans. C]
f(x) = x
x
f (x) = x
= g(x)
x = initial guess
g (x) = x
g (x )
x =x
g (x )
2
]
x
[Ans. C]
Given p(x) = x + x + 2
There is no sign change, hence at most 0
positive root ( rom escartes rule of
signs)
p( x) = x
x+2
There is one sign change, hence at most 1
negative root ( rom escartes rule of
signs)
th
th
th
Page 72
GATE QUESTION BANK
=
x =x
= .5
= .
= .5
g(x )
g (x )
0.75
7
8.
[Ans. D]
dy
= 2xy x = 0 y = h = 0.2
dx
y =y
h. f(x y )
(0.2)f(0 ) =
=
and y = y
[f(x y ) f(x y )]
(0. )[f(0 ) f(0.2 )]
=
= 0.
is the value of y after first step, using
Eulers predictor corrector method
9.
[Ans. B]
For convergence
x
Mathematics
= x =x x=
x =
(2x
x=
th
th
th
Page 73
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Calculus
ME 2005
1.
ME 2006
The line integral of the vector

function ( ) 2xyz + xz +
ky from
the origin to the point P (1,1,1)
(A) is 1
(B) is Zero
(C) is 1
(D) cannot be determined without
specifying the path
2.
be
(A)
(B)
8.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Changing the order of the integration in

the double integral I =
What is q?
(A)
(C) X
(D) 8
)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
10.
(A) 0
(B)
is equal to
11.
(C)
(D) 1
The area of a triangle formed by the tips

of vectors a , b and c is
(A)
)(
(D) Zero
(B)
|(
Stoke theorem connects

(A) A line integral and a surface integral
(B) Surface integral and a volume
integral
(C) A line integral and a volume integral
(D) Gradient of function and its surface
integral
(C)
(D)
(C) 2 (
ME 2007
(B) 2
6.
1 and t is a real number,
Let x denote a real number. Find out the

INCORRECT statement
+ represents the set if all
(A) S *
real numbers greater then 3
+ represents the empty
(B) S *
set
+ represents the
(C) S *
union of set A and set B
+ represents the set
(D) S *
of all real umbers between a and b,
where and b are real number
leads to
(A) 4y
(B) 16y
(C) 0
(D)
dt is:
9.
4.
By a change of variables
x(u,v) = uv, y(u,v) = v/u is double
integral, the integral f(x,y) changes to
f(uv, u/v) ( ). Then, ( )
(A) 2 v/u
(C) v
(B) 2 u v
(D) 1
I = (
2x2 7x 3
, then limf(x) will
x 3
5x2 12x 9
Assuming i =
The right circular cone of largest volume

that can be enclosed by a sphere of 1 m
radius has a height of
3.
5.
If f( x ) =
7.
th
th
)
(
)|
|
)
th
Page 74
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
If
y (2) =
(A) 4 or 1
(B) 4 only
13.
, then
14.
20.
The divergence of the vector field

) (
) is
(x y) (
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 3
21.
Let
(C) 1
(D) 1/ln2
y2 4x and x2 4y is
(A)
(B) 8
23.
(C)
(D) 16
The distance between the origin and the

point nearest to it on the surface
The directional derivative of the scalar
z2 1 xy is
function f(x, y, z) = x2 2y2 z at the
(A) 1
point P = (1, 1, 2) in the direction of the

vector
is
(A) 4
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 1
at x=2, y=1?
ME 2009
22. The area enclosed between the curves
Which of the following integrals is

unbounded?
(C)
(A)
(D)
What is
(A) 0
(B) ln2
The length of the curve
(B)
16.
In the Taylor series expansion of ex about

x = 2, the coefficient of (x 2)4 is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The minimum value of function y = x2 in

the interval [1, 5] is
(A) 0
(C) 25
(B) 1
(D) Undefined
between x = 0 and x = 1 is
(A) 0.27
(C) 1
(B) 0.67
(D) 1.22
15.
19.
(C) 1 only
(D) Undefined
ME 2008
Mathematics
(C)
(D) 2
(B)
24.
A path AB in the form of one quarter of a

circle of unit radius is shown in the figure.
Integration of x y on path AB
2
17.
Consider the shaded triangular region P

shown in the figure. What is xydxdy?
y
18.
The value of
(A)
(B)
x+2y=2
0
(A)
(B)
traversed in a counter-clockwise sense is
(C)
(D) 1
(C)
(D)
25.
is
th
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 1

at a point (1,1,1) is
equal to
(A) 7
(C) 3
(B) 4
(D) 0
th
th
Page 75
GATE QUESTION BANK
ME 2010
26. Velocity vector of a flow field is given as
. The vorticity vector at

(1, 1, 1) is
(A) 4
(B) 4
27.
The function
(A)
o
o
(C)
(D)
(B)
o
o
except at x = 3/2
(C)
o
o
except at x = 2/3
(D)
o
o
28.
29.
ME 2012
33. Consider the function ( )
in the
interval
. At the point x = 0,
f(x) is
(A) Continuous and differentiable.
(B) Non continuous and differentiable.
(C) Continuous and non differentiable.
(D) Neither continuous nor
differentiable.
R
R
R
R
34.
R
R
ME 2011
30. If f(x) is an even function and is a positive
real number, then ( )dx equals
31.
What is
(A)
(B)
32.
36.
For the spherical surface

the unit outward
normal vector at the point
is
(C)
(D)
(C)
(B)
(C)
is
(A)
(B)
has
(C)
(D)
37.
equal to?
A series expansion for the function

(A)
( )
(C) 0
(D) 1
(C) 1
(D) 2
At x = 0, the function f(x) =

(A) A maximum value
(B) A minimum value
(C) A singularity
(D) A point of inflection
R except at x = 3
(D)
/ is
35.
The parabolic arc

is
revolved around the x-axis. The volume of

the solid of revolution is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A) 0
(B)
.
(A) 1/4
(B) 1/2

(A)
(B)
Mathematics
The area enclosed between the straight

line y = x and the parabola y = in the
x y plane is
(A) 1/6
(C) 1/3
(B) 1/4
(D) 1/2
ME 2013
38. The following surface integral is to be
evaluated over a sphere for the given
steady velocity vector field
defined with respect to a
cartesian coordinate system having i, j and
k as unit base vectors.
(
(D)
th
th
)
th
Page 76
GATE QUESTION BANK
Where S is the sphere,

and n is the outward unit normal vector to
the sphere. The value of the surface
integral is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
39.
45.
If a function is continuous at a point,

(A) the limit of the function may not exist
at the point
(B) the function must be derivable at the
point
(C) the limit of the function at the point
tends to infinity
(D) the limit must exist at the point and
the value of limit should be same as
the value of the function at that point
The value of the definite integral

( )
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
46.
Divergence of the vector field

(
) is
(A) 0
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 6
(C) 3
(D)Not defined
47.
ME 2014
40.
is
(A) 0
(B) 1
41.
Which one of the following describes the

relationship among the three vectors
(A) The vectors are mutually

perpendicular
(B) The vectors are linearly dependent
(C) The vectors are linearly independent
(D) The vectors are unit vectors
42.
/ is equal to
(A) 0
(B) 0.5
43.
)
)
)
(
(A) 3
(B) 0
48.
(C) 1
(D) 2

is
(
(C) (
(B) (
(D) .
(A)
)
/
).
Where, c is the square cut from the first

quadrant by the lines x = 1 and y = 1 will
(
G
h o
o h
h
line integral into double integral)
(A)
(C)
(B) 1
(D)
(
(
CE 2005
1.
Value of the integral (
(C) 1
(D) 2
Curl of vector
(A) (
(B) (
(C)
(D)
44.
Mathematics
2.
A rail engine accelerates from its

stationary position for 8 seconds and
travels a distance of 280 m. According to
the
Mean
Value
theorem,
the
speedometer at a certain time during
acceleration must read exactly.
(A) 0 kmph
(C) 75 kmph
(B) 8 kmph
(D) 126 kmph
The best approximation of the minimum

value attained by
(100x) for
is _______
th
th
th
Page 77
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE 2006
3.
What is the area common to the circles
o
2
(A) 0.524 a
(C) 1.014 a2
(B) 0.614 a2
(D) 1.228 a2
4.
The directional derivative of

f(x, y, z) = 2 + 3 + at the point
P (2, 1, 3) in the direction of the vector
a=
k is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE 2007
5.
Potential function is given as
=
. When will be the stream
function () with the condition
= 0 at x = y = 0?
(A) 2xy
(C)
(B)
+
(D) 2
6.
Evaluate
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
7.
10.
12.
transformed to
(A)
(B)
9.
(C)
(D) 18
parabola is y = 4h
(A)
(D)
(C)
= 0 by substituting
(C)
where x is the
horizontal coordinate and y is the vertical

coordinate with the origin at the centre of
the cable. The expression for the total
length of the cable is
= 0 can be
(D)
14.
The
is
(A) 2/3
(B) 1
The inner (dot) product of two vectors

and is zero. The angle (degrees)
between in two vectors is
(A) 0
(C) 90
(B) 30
(D) 120
(C) 40.5
(D) 54.0
(B) 2
is
CE 2010
13. A parabolic cable is held between two
supports at the same level. The horizontal
span between the supports is L. The sag at
the mid-span is h. The equation of the
CE 2008
+
For a scalar function

f(x, y, z) =
the directional
derivative at the point P(1, 2, 1) in the
is
direction of a vector
(A)
(B)
A velocity is given as
= 5xy + 2 y2 + 3yz2 . The divergence
The equation
The value of (
(A) 13.5
(B) 27.0
CE 2009
11. For a scalar function
f(x, y, z) = + 3 + 2 the gradient at
the point P (1, 2, 1) is
(A) 2 + 6 + 4
(C) 2 + 12 + 4
(D)
(B) 2 + 12 4
of this velocity vector at (1 1 1) is

(A) 9
(C) 14
(B) 10
(D) 15
8.
Mathematics
15.
th
(C) 3/2
(D)
Given a function
( )
The optimal value of f(x, y)
th
th
Page 78
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) Is a minimum equal to 10/3

(B) Is a maximum equal to 10/3
(C) Is a minimum equal to 8/3
(D) Is a maximum equal to 8/3
CE 2013
21.
CE 2011
16.
22.
(C) a
(D) 2a
magnitudes a and b respectively. | |

will be equal to
(A)
( )
(C)
+ ( )
(B) ab
(D) ab +
CE 2012
19. For the parallelogram OPQR shown in the
sketch,
and
R
.
The area of the parallelogram is
Q
(C) 1
(D)
24.
A particle moves along a curve whose

parametric equation are :
and z = 2 sin (5t), where x, y
and z show variations of the distance
covered by the particle (in cm) with time
t (in s). The magnitude of the acceleration
of the particle (in cm ) at t = 0 is
___________
25.
If {x} is a continuous, real valued random

variable defined over the interval
(
) and its occurrence is defined
by the density function given as:
(C) 1
(D)
If and are two arbitrary vectors with
R
P
( )
wh
the statistical attributes of the random

variable {x}. The value of the integral
(A) ad bc
(B) ac+bd
With reference to the conventional

Cartesian (x, y) coordinate system, the
vertices of a triangle have the following
coordinates:
(
)
( ) (
)
( )
(
)
( ). The area of the
triangle is equal to
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A) 0
(B)
(C) ad + bc
(D) ab cd
dx is
(A) 1
(B) 0.5
The infinity series
(A) sec
(B)
(C) 1
(D) 8/3
23.
20.
(A)
(B)
Wh ho
h
o such that
the function defined below is continuous
?
f(x)={
18.
The value of
(A) 0
(B) 1/15
CE 2014
(A) 0
(B) a/2
17.
Mathematics
26.
(C) o
(D)
(C)
(D)
The expression
(A) log x
(B) 0
th
th
(C) x log x
(D)
th
Page 79
GATE QUESTION BANK
CS 2005
1.
Let G(x)
CS 2010
1
g(i)xi where |x|<1.
2
(1 x) i0
What is g(i)?
(A) i
(B) i+1
(C) 2i
(D) 2i
CS 2007
2.
Consider the following two statements
about the function f(x) =|x|:
P: f(x) is continuous for all real values of x
Q: f(x) is differentiable for all real values
of x
Which of the following is true?
(A) P is true Q is false
(B) P is false Q is true
(C) Both P and Q are true
(D) Both P and Q are false
CS 2008
3.
4.
x sinx
equals
Lim
x x cosx
(A) 1
(B) 1
(C)
(D)
Let
P=
7.
What is the value of

(A) 0
(B)
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C)
(D) 1
(A) 0
(B) 2
(C) i
(D) i
CS 2012
9.
Consider the function f(x)= sin(x) in the
interval x , -. The number and
location(s) of the local minima of this
function are
(A) One , at
(B) One , at
(C) Two , at and
(D) Two , at and
CS 2013
10. Which one the following function is
continuous at x =3?
(A) ( )
(B) ( )
(C) ( )
(D) ( )
CS 2014
11. Let the function
( )
CS 2009
6.
/ ?
A point on a curve is said to be extreme if

it is a local minimum or a local maximum.
The number of distinct extrema for the
4
3
2
curve 3x 16x 24x 37 is
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 3
CS 2011
8.
Given i = , what will be the
evaluation of the definite integral
where k is a positive integer. Then

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
5.
Mathematics
(
(
Where
evaluates to
o
o (
o (
)
)
)
)
(
(
)|
)
1 and ( ) denote the
derivation of f with respect to . Which of

the following statements is/are TRUE?
(I) There exists
(C) ln2
(D)
ln 2
.
th
th
h h
th
( )
Page 80
GATE QUESTION BANK
(II) There exists

.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
12.
13.
14.
(A)
h h
( )
I only
II only
Both I and II
Neither I nor II
(B)
A function f (x) is continuous in the

interval [0, 2]. It is known that
f(0) = f(2) = 1 and f(x) = 1. Which one
of the following statements must be true?
(A) There exists a y in the interval (0,1)
such that f(y) = f(y + 1)
(B) For every y in the interval (0, 1),
f(y) = f(2 y)
(C) The maximum value of the function
in the interval (0, 2) is 1
(D) There exists a y in the interval (0, 1)
such that f(y)
(
)
(C)
(D)
ECE 2006
2.
As x is increased from
function f x
If and are 4 dimensional subspace

of a 6 dimensional vector space V, then
the smallest possible dimension of
is ____________.
If
dx = , then the value of k
e
1 ex
3
The integral sin d is given by
3.
1
2
2
(B )
3
(A)
(B)
, the
The value of the integral given below is
to
(A) monotonically increases

(B) monotonically decreases
(C) increases to a maximum value and
then decreases
(D) decreases to a minimum value and
then increases
is equal to_______.
15.
Mathematics
4
3
8
(D)
3
(A)
(C)
(D)
ECE 2005
1.
The derivative of the symmetric function
drawn in given figure will look like
(C)
P ds , where P is a vector, is
4.
equal to
(A) P dl
(C) P dl
(B) P dl
(D)
Pdv
P , where P is a vector, is equal to
5.
th
2
(A) P P P
(C) 2P P
2
(B) P P
(D) P 2P
th
th
Page 81
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2007
6.
For the function
, the linear
approximation around = 2 is
(A) (3 x)
(B) 1 x
ECE 2008
12. Consider points P and Q in the x y plane,
with P=(1,0) and Q=(0,1). The line
Q
integral 2 xdx ydy along the
(C) 3 2 2 1 2 x e
semicircle with the line segment PQ as its

diameter
(A) is 1
(B) is 0
(C) is 1
(D) depends on the direction (clockwise
or anticlockwise) of the semicircle
(D)
7.
8.
9.
10.
For x <<1, coth(x) can be

approximated as
(A) x
(C)
(B) x2
(D)
In the Taylor series expansion of

exp(x)+sin(x) about the point x= the
coefficient of (x )2 is
()
(A)
()
(C)
()
()
(B)
(D)
14.
Which of the following functions would

have only odd powers of x in its Taylor
series expansion about the point x=0?
(A) sin(x3)
(C) cos(x3)
2
(B) sin(x )
(D) cos(x2)
15.
The value of the integral of the function

g(x, y)=4x3+10y4 along the straight line
segment from the point (0,0) to the point
(1,2) in the x y plane is
(A) 33
(C) 40
(B) 35
(D) 56
16.
For real values of x, the minimum value of

the function f(x)=exp(x)+ exp( x) is
(A) 2
(C) 0.5
(B) 1
(D) 00
17.
Consider points P and Q in the x-y plane,

with P=(1, 0) and Q= (0, 1).
Which one of the following function is

strictly bounded?
2
(A)
(C) x
x
(B) e
(D)
(A) 0.5
(B) 1
11.
13.
Consider the function f(x) =
x 2.
The maximum value of f(x) in the closed
interval [ 4,4] is
(A) 18
(C) 2.25
(B) 10
(D) Indeterminate
sin /2
lim
is
0
(C) 2
(D) not defined
The following Plot shows a function y

which varies linearly with x. The value of
2
the integral I ydx is

1
Y
3
2
) along
(
the semicircle with the line segment PQ as
its diameter
(A) Is
(B) Is 0
(C) Is 1
h
1
1
Mathematics
(A) 1.0
(B) 2.5
(C) 4.0
(D) 5.0
th
th
th
Page 82
GATE QUESTION BANK
(D) Depends on the direction

(clockwise or anti-clockwise) of the
semicircle
21.
ECE 2009
18. The Taylor series expansion of
sinx
at x is given by
x
(A) 1
x 2 .....
3!
(B)
2
x
1
.....
(C)
2
x
1
.....
the value of the integral

(A) 3V
(B) 5V
3!
19.
3!
.....
If a vector field is related to another

, which
vector field through =
of the following is true? Note: C and
refer to any closed contour and any
surface whose boundary is C.
(A) =
(B) =
(C)
(D)
ECE 2010
20. If
, then over the

path shown in the figure is
(A) 0
(B)
is
(C) 10V
(D) 15V
ECE\IN 2012
23. The direction of vector A is radially
outward from the origin, with
where
and K is
constant. The value of n for which
. A = 0 is
(A) 2
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 0
ECE\EE 2012
24. The maximum value of
( )
in the interval
[1,6] is
(A) 21
(C) 41
(B) 25
(D) 46
ECE 2013
25. The maximum value of unit which the
approximation
holds to within
10% error is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
26.
, then has a
maximum at
minimum at
maximum at
minimum at
ECE 2011
22. Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
volume V. If is the position vector of a
point inside S, with the unit normal of S,
3!
(D) 1
If
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Mathematics
is
(A) 0
(B) 1/3
(C) 1
(D) 3
(C) 1
(D) 2
th
th
th
Page 83
GATE QUESTION BANK
27.
Consider a vector field ( ) The closed

loop line integral can be expressed
as
) over the closed
(A) (
surface boundary by the loop
(B) ( )dv over the closed volume
bounded by the loop
(C) ( )dv over the open volume
bounded by the loop
) over the closed surface
(D) (
bounded by the loop
Mathematics
34.
The magnitude of the gradient for the

function (
)
at the
point (1,1,1) is_______.
35.
The directional derivative of

( )
(
) ( )in the direction
of the unit vector at an angle of with

y axis, is given by ________________.
EE 2005
1.
For the scalar field u =
, magnitude
of the gradient at the point (1, 3) is

ECE 2014
28. The volume under the surface
z(x, y) = x+y and above the triangle in
the x-y plane defined by
{0 y x and 0 x 12} is______
29.
30.
For
function ( )
(A)
o
(B)
o
The value of
the maximum value of the

occurs at
(C)
(D)
o
.
(A)
(B)
(B)
2.
For the function f(x) =

, the
maximum occurs when x is equal to
(A) 2
(C) 0
(B) 1
(D) 1
3.
If S =
/ is
31.
The maximum value of the function

( )
(
)
(wh
)
occurs at x =____.
32.
The maximum value of

( )
0 x 3 is ______.
in the interval
EE 2006
4.
A surface S(x, y) = 2x + 5y 3 is
integrated once over a path consisting of
the points that satisfy
(x+1)2+ (y 1)2 = . The integral
evaluates to
(A) 17
(C) /17
(D) 0
(B) 17/
5.
33.
, then S has the value

(C)
(D) 1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C)
(D)
(A)
The expression V = R (
for the volume of a cone is equal to
For a right angled triangle, if the sum of

the lengths of the hypotenuse and a side
is kept constant, in order to have
maximum area of the triangle, the angle
between the hypotenuse and the side is
(A) 12
(C) 60
(B) 36
(D) 45
th
(A) R (
(B) R (
(C)
(D)
th
R) h
R )
th
Page 84
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE 2007
6.
EE 2010
The integral
equals
(A)
(B) 0
) o
EE 2009
8.
f(x, y) is a continuous function defined
over (x, y) [0, 1] [0, 1]. Given the two
constraints, x > and y > , the
volume under f(x, y) is
(A)
(B)
(C)
9.
10.
11.
a minimum
a discontinuity
a point of inflection
a maximum
Divergence of the three-dimensional

radial vector field is
(A) 3
(C)
(B) 1/r
(D)
(
)
13.
The value of the quantity P, where
(A) 0
(B) 1
, is equal to
(C) e
(D) 1/e
EE 2011
14. The two vectors [1, 1, 1] and [1, a,
where a = .
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
A cubic polynomial with real coefficients

(A) can possibly have no extrema and no
zero crossings
(B) may have up to three extrema and
upto 2 zero crossings
(C) cannot have more than two extrema
and more than three zero crossings
(D) will always have an equal number of
extrema and zero crossings
has
12.
)
(
At t = 0, the function ( )
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C) (1/2) o
(D) (1/2)
EE 2008
7.
Consider function f(x)= (
) where
x is a real number. Then the function has
(A) only one minimum
(B) only two minima
(C) three minima
(D) three maxima
(D)
Mathematics
15.
],
/, are
orthonormal
orthogonal
parallel
collinear
The function f(x) = 2x

has
(A) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
x=5
(B) a maxima at x = 1 and a minima at
x= 5
(C) only a maxima at x = 1
(D) only a minima at x = 1
EE 2013
16. Given a vector field
, the line integral
F(x, y) = (
)
(
)
line integral over the straight line from

(
) = (0, 2) to (
) = (2, 0)
evaluates to
(A) 8
(C) 8
(B) 4
(D) 0
evaluated along a segment on the x

axis from x = 1 to x = 2 is
(A) 2.33
(C) 2.33
(B) 0
(D) 7
17.
th
The curl of the gradient of the scalar field

defined by
(A)
th
th
Page 85
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B)
(C) (
(
(D)
19.
20.
21.
23.
( )
Where f and
v are scalar and vector fields respectively.
If
h
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
24.
The minimum value of the function

( )
0 in the
interval ,
- is
(A) 20
(C) 16
(B) 28
(D) 32
EE 2014
18. Let ( )
. The maximum value of
the function in the interval (
) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The line integral of function
, in the
counterclockwise direction, along the
circle
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Minimum of the real valued function
(
) occurs at x equal to
( )
(A)
(C) 1
(B)
(D)
IN 2005
1.
A scalar field is given by f = x2/3 + y2/3,
where x and y are the Cartesian
coordinates. The derivative of f along the
line y = x directed away from the origin,
at the point (8, 8) is
To evaluate the double integral

.
( )
substitution u = (
/ dy, we make the

) and
2.
( ) (
( ) (
( ) (
(A)
(B)
(A)
(B) 0
3.
( )
is
(C) f(1)
(D) f(0)

(A) 2
(B) does not exist
(C)
(D)
is
2
(t) has a constant magnitude,

If a vector R
then
4.
A particle, starting from origin at t = 0 s,

is traveling along x-axis with velocity
o . /
(D)
f(t) defined over [0,1],
(A) R
22.
(C)
Given a real-valued continuous function
. The
integral will reduce to

( ) (
Mathematics
(B) R
5.
(C) R
(D) R
If f =
+
+
where ai (i = 0 to n) are constants,
At t = 3 s, the difference between the

distance covered by the particle and the
magnitude of displacement from the
origin is _________
then
is
(A)
(B)
th
th
(C) nf
(D) n
th
Page 86
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
The plot of a function f(x) is shown in the

following figure. A possible expression for
the function f(x) is
f(x)
(B) once differentiable but not twice

(C) twice differentiable but not thrice
(D) thrice differentiable
11.
0
(A)
(C)
(B)
. /
(D)
. /
IN 2006
7.
The function
(
) is
approximated as
where is in
radian. The maximum value of for
which the error due to the approximation
is within
(A) 0.1 rad
(C) 0.3 rad
(B) 0.2 rad
(D) 0.4 rad
()
( )
(A) (
()
))
(B) (
()
))
()
))
()
))
()
(D) (
) ( )
( ))
( ))
13.
The expression
(A)
(B) x
14.
Given y =
(A)
(B)
10.
(C)
(D)
Consider the function f(x) =

, where x
is real. Then the function f(x) at x = 0 is
(A) continuous but not differentiable
+ 2x + 10, the value of
(C) 12
(D) 13
15.
(A) Indeterminate
(B) 0
(C) 1
(D)
IN 2009
16. A sphere of unit radius is centered at the
origin. The unit normal at a point (x, y, z)
on the surface of the sphere is
(A) (x, y, z)
(C) .
/
IN 2007
9.
dx dy is.
for x > 0 is equal to

(C)
(D)
is equal to
(A) 0
(B) 4
(B) .
(C)
(D)
is.
IN 2008
12. Consider the function y = x2 6x + 9. The
maximum value of y obtained when x
varies over the interval 2 to 5 is
(A) 1
(C) 4
(B) 3
(D) 9
The solution of the integral equation

()
(C)
For real x, the maximum value of

(A) 1
(B) e 1
8.
Mathematics
(D) .
IN 2010
17. The electric charge density in the region
R:
is given as
( )
, where x and y are in
meters. The total charge (in coulomb)
contained in the region R is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 0
th
th
th
Page 87
GATE QUESTION BANK
18.
The integral
evaluates to
(A) 6
(B) 3
19.
/ sin(t) dt
23.
A scalar valued function is defined

as ( )
, where A is a
symmetric positive definite matrix with
dimension n n ; b and x are vectors of
dimension n1. The minimum value of
( ) will occur when x equals
)
(A) (
(C) .
/
)
(B) (
(D)
24.
Given
()
()
o .
(C) 1.5
(D) 0
The infinite series

( )
converges to
(A) cos (x)
(B) sin(x)
(C) sinh(x)
(D)
IN 2011
20.
The series
for
(A)
(B)
Mathematics
The
o w
(A) A circle
(B) A multi-loop closed curve
(C) Hyperbola
(D) An ellipse
converges
(C)
(D)
IN 2013
21. For a vector E, which one the following
statement is NOT TRUE?
(A)
E
E
o o
(B) If
E
E is called conservative
(C) If
E
E is called irrotational
(D)
E
E
-rotational
IN 2014
22. A vector is defined as
are unit vectors in

Where
Cartesian (
) coordinate system.
The surface integral f.ds over the
closed surface S of a cube with vertices
having the following coordinates:
(0,0,0),(1,0,0),(1,1,0),(0,1,0),(0,0,1),
(1,0,1),(1,1,1),(0,1,1) is________
th
th
th
Page 88
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics

ME
1.
=
=
Since, potential function of is xyz

(
) (
)
(
)
2.
0 o
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
o
9.
[Ans. B]
10.
[Ans. B]
(
For V to be max
This is of the form . /
Hence, h
Applying L hospital rule

(
3.
[Ans. A]
. /
=
(
=
=
11.
4.
[Ans. A]
(
After changing order

5.
[Ans. A]
I= (
=2
[Ans. B]
Let the vectors be
)
( )( )( )
= 2
6.
[Ans. A]
A Line integral and a surface integral is
connected by stokes theorem
7.
[Ans. B]
Now Area vector will be perpendicular to

plane of
i.e.
will be the required unit vector.
And option (A), (D) cannot give a vector
product
)|
|( ) (
12.
[Ans. B]
Applying Hospital rule, we get

I=
8.
[Ans. A]
Given:
I=
For
0 1
]
th
th
th
Page 89
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
14.
But y is always greater than x.

Hence y= 4 only.
[Ans. B]
Since interval given is bounded, so
minimum value of functions is 1.
= 0
Now by partial fractions,

(a3 8) = (a 2)(a2+2a+4)
) |
L=
[Ans. D]
To see whether the integrals are bounded
or unbounded, we need to see that the
o
h
h
interval of integration. Let us write down
the range of the integrands in the 4
options,
Thus, (D) , i.e.,
[Ans. B]
h
19.
o
(
). (
( )
( )
( )
( )
Coefficient of (x- )
Now f(x)= ex
(x)= ex
(a)= ea
( )
Hence for a=2,

20.
[Ans. D]
div {(
(
Hence directional derivative is

(grad (x2+2y2+z)).
[Ans. C]
Taylor series expansion of f(x) about a is
given by
( )
dx is unbounded.
along a vector
(2x
(
(
A (0,1); B (0,1); C (0, ); D (0, )
16.
[Ans. B]
Let x= a3 a=2
=1.22
15.
).dx
= (
L=
L = (
=
18.
= (
[Ans. D]
h
Mathematics
)
(
)}
(
)
=3
21.
[Ans. C]
=
Hence at (1,1,2),
Directional derivative =
17.
[Ans. A]
I = .dx dy
The limit of y is form 0 to
and limit
of x from 0 to 2
I =
( )
(
(
)(
)
)
/
th
th
th
Page 90
GATE QUESTION BANK
22.
[Ans. A]
Given:
23.
y2 4x
x2 4y
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Short method:
Take a point on the curve z = 1, x = 0,
y=0
Length between origin and this point
)
(
)
(
) =1
(
This is minimum length because all
options have length greater than 1.
(4,4)
(0,0)
24.
x4
4x
16
[Ans. B]
Y
or x4 64x
or x(x 64) 0
3
or x3 64
or x 4
x = cos
y=sin
y 4
Required area = .
Path is x2 y2 1
R e
(x y)2 1 2sin cos
2 x3
2 x3 2
3 120
4
64
(4)3 2
3
12
32 16 16

3 3 3
cos2
(1 sin2)d
2 0
0
=
Alternately
For point where both parabolas cut each
other
1 1
1
2 2 2 2
Alternately
Given: x2 y2 1
Put x=cos , and y=sin
y2 4x, x2 4y
x y 2 cos2 sin2 2sincos
x 4 4x
2
= 1 sin2
or x2 8 x
or x4 64x
or x3 64
x 4,0 ,(4,0)
x2
dx
0 4

1
2
4x
0
cos2
1 1

2 0 2 2 2
Required area
4
2 x3 16
2 x3 2
3 120 3
25.
[Ans. C]
F 3xzi 2xyj yz2k

th
th
th
Page 91
GATE QUESTION BANK
3z 2x 2yz
At point (1, 1, 1), divergence =3+2 2=3

26.
30.
||
31.
(
27.
( )
[Ans. D]
Standard limit formulae
32.
[Ans. B]
33.
[Ans. C]
The function is continuous in [ 1, 1]
It is also differentiable in [ 1, 1] except at
x = 0.
Since Left derivative = 1 and
Right derivative = 1 at x = 0
34.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. C]
y is continuous for all x

differentiable for all x
since at
R, and
R, except at
Using this standard limit, here a = 1 then

= ( ) /2 =1/2
value towards the left and right side of
35.
[Ans. D]
( )
( )
( )
( )
f(x) has a point of inflection at x =0.
36.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
,
29.
( )
28.
[Ans. D]
If f(x) even function
||
* +
[Ans. D]
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
Volume from x = 1 to x = 2,
th
th
)
th
Page 92
GATE QUESTION BANK
38.
37.
[Ans. A]
By Gauss Divergence theorem,
( )
The unit outward normal vector at point

P is
(
Mathematics
(Surface Integral is transformed to

volume Integral)
( )
( )
( )
[Ans. A]
The area enclosed is shown below as
shaded
( )
( )
(
The coordinates of point P and Q is

obtained by solving
y = x and y = simultaneously,
i.e. x =
)
(
Now, x = 0
which is point Q(0,0)
and x = 1
which is point
P(1,1)
So required area is
39.
[Ans. C]
( ) ( )
Using Integration by parts
Here,
f=ln(x) and dg=
and g=
* +
o
( ) ( )
* +
[
th
th
( )
]
)
th
Page 93
GATE QUESTION BANK
40.
[Ans. A]
o
So the minimum value is
[Differentiating both
o
o
Hospital method]
o w
. /
45.
41.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
o
o
o
( )
( )
( )
otherwise it is said to be discontinuous.

So the most appropriate option is D.
[Ans. B]
G
o
46.
[Ans. C]
Div
Vectors are linearly dependent

42.
[Ans. B]
(
)
)
( )
,
o ( )( )
( )
o ( )( )
43.
47.
-
ho
[Ans. B]
Let
(
o (
[Ans. A]
[
[
]
)
48.
)]
()
[
,
(
44.
)
(
(
)
)
)]
(
,
(
[Ans. B]

)]
,
)
[
[Ans. *] Range 1.00 to 0.94

h
o
th
th
]
-
th
Page 94
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE
1.
a =2a cos i.e, cos

[Ans C]
G
theorem is
((
( )
= y and
)-
( )
. /
. /
[Ans. D]
Since the position of rail engine S(t) is
continuous and differentiable function
according to Lagranges mean value
theorem more
)
o )
o
(t) = v(t) =
*
(
( )
)+
m/sec
kmph
4.
[Ans. C]
f = 2 +3
= 126 kmph
Where v(t) is the velocity of the rail
engine.
3.
= 2y
h o
I=
= xy
Here I = (
2.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
h
o h
r=2acos
(i) r = a represents a circle with centre
(
)

(ii) r = 2acos represents a circle
symmetric about OX with centre at
( )

The circles are shown in figure below. At
h
o o
o

P
y Q
3
= 4xi + 6yj + 2zk

At P (2, 1, 3)
Directional derivation
(
)
(
)
( )
( )
( )
( )
5.
[Ans. A]
Potential function,
th
th
th
Page 95
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
Integrating
[Ans. D]
Put
wh
Mathematics
( )
Now given equation is

.. (ii)
6.
[Ans. B]
Let I()
= (
dx ( )
=
) [ from eqn(i)]
Then Integrating by parts we get,

=
o )1
=
dI =
Integrating, I =
( )
() ( )
+C=0
C=
()
( )
Now substitute in eqn (ii) we get

h
h
I(0) =
But from equation (i), I(0) =
dx
dx =
h
h
Which is the desired form

7.
[Ans. D]
=5 +2
+ 3y
( )
9.
[Ans. C]
=0

If = 0
= 5y + 4y + 6yz
At(1, 1, 1)
div ( ) = 5.1 + 4.1 + 6.1.1
= 15
is the correct transformation.
o
Since P and Q are non-zero vectors
o
0
th
th
th
Page 96
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
[Ans. A]
Since the limit is a function of x. We first
integrate w.r.t. y and then w.r.t. x
)
[Ans. D]
Length of curve f(x) between x = a and
x = b is given by
13.
Mathematics
+
Here,
4h ( )
= 8h
Since
(
and y = h at x =
* ( )
*
(As can be seen from equation (i), by

substituting x = 0 and x = L/2)
( )+
(Length of cable)
ho
11.
[Ans. B]
f = + 3 +2
f = grad f = i
+j
[Ans. A]
15.
[Ans. A]
( )
+k
= i(2x) + j(6y) + k(4z)

The gradient at P(1, 2, 1) is
= i(21) + j(62) + k(4 ( ))
= 2i + 12j 4k
12.
14.
[Ans. B]
(
Putting,
o
(
Given,
/ is the only stationary point.
+
.
th
th
th
Page 97
GATE QUESTION BANK
Since the limit is in form of
+
.
ho
and get
+
.
Since,
We have either a maxima or minima at
o ()
18.
Also since, r=0

)
[Ans. A]
= 8 > 0, the point
19.
o -
[Ans. A]
Area = | |

R (
So the optimal value of f(x, y) is a
)
o
The minimum value is

(
, we can use
Since,
Mathematics
minimum equal to
16.

R

R
[Ans. B]
Let I =
Since ( )
I=
( )
20.
[Ans. B]
21.
[Ans. B]
( )
( )
( )
(i) + (ii) 2I =
2I =
2I = |
I = a/2
17.
[Ans. C]
For a function f(x) to be continuous,
at x=a
( )
( )
o
(
If f(x) is continuous at x=
. /
th
th
th
Page 98
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Substituting the values we get

(
)
(
)
(
)
|
|
24.
[Ans. 12]
o )
( )
o ( )
( )
[
22.
Magnitude of acceleration
[Ans. C]
(
)
(
25.
[Ans. B]
We have
)
( )
, ow
( )
=1+0=1
Hence correct option is (C)
23.
( )
( )
[Ans. A]
(4, 3)
a
(2, 2)
b
( )
0.5
(1, 0)
0.5
o wh
o ordinate points are
given is given by
th
th
th
Page 99
GATE QUESTION BANK
26.
[Ans. A]
Use L hospital Rule
=
4.
=1
[Ans. A]
P=
= log x
1
n 1 r
Cr xr
n
1 x r0
r 0
r 0
r 0
i 0
5.
= 12
g(i) =i+1
24
48
+ 37
48 x = 0
x=
=2
[Ans. A]
f(x)= |x|
Continuity: In other words,
f(x) = x o
x for x< 0
Since,
=
=0 ,
f (x) is continuous for all real values of x
Differentiability:
96x
48
= 36
Now at x = 0
=
48
At 2 also
0 (using
calculator)
There are 3 extrema in this function
( )
6.
( )
[Ans. D]
Since ( )
R h
So |x| is continuous but not differentiable
at x=0
3.
x (12 48x 48 ) = 0
x = 0 or 12 48x 48 = 0
4x 4 = 0
()
[Ans. D]
y = 3 16
(since r is a dummy variable, r can be

replaced by i)
r 1 xr i 1 xi
1)
w h
(
r1 Cr xr r1 C1xr
1
21 r
Cr xr
1 x 2 r0
Putting n=2,
2.
=
Q=
[Ans. B]
w h a =1, l=2k 1
P= (
CS
1.
Mathematics
I =
=
= (
)
(
Since tan (A B) =
[Ans. A]
=
th
th
th
Page 100
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
9.
[Ans. B]
f(x) = sin x
( )
o
( )
o

(
(
)
)
(
(
)
)
( )
At
. /
gives maximum
value
=,
)-
At
= ln ( sec ) ln (sec 0)
= ln ( )
= ln (
. /
value
( )
10.
)0=
[Ans. A]
For x =
7.
[Ans. B]
(
8.
) [
*(
) +
) +
.
11.
[Ans. C]
By Mean value theorem
12.
[Ans. A]
Define g(x) = f(x) f(x + 1) in [0, 1]. g(0)
is negative and g(1) is positive. By
intermediate value theorem there is
(
)
h h g(y) = 0
That is f(y) = f(y + 1)
Thus Answer is (A)
13.
[Ans. 2]
*
w
+
*
w +
For min
maximum non common
elements must be there
*
+
must be common to any 2 elements
of V1
(
)minimum value = 2
o
o
+
[
-(
, f(x) =
For x = , f(x) = 3 1 = 2
For x = 3, f(x) = 2
(
) (
) = f(3)
[Ans. D]
gives minimum
th
th
th
Page 101
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
Mathematics
[Ans. 4]
(
)
o
o ()
Hence option (A) is correct
o
o
)
ECE
1.
[Ans. C]
dy
0 for x< 0
dx
dy
0 for x> 0
dx
o
Substituting the limits
o ()
o ( )
2.
[Ans. A]
Given,
f x
f ' x
1 e .e e
1 e
3.
= x cos
x 2
2x
ex
1 ex
Let cos = t
At
o
o
o
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
= o ( ) o
=
LHS = I + II =
15.
ex
1 ex
th
th
th
Page 102
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Given, f x x2 x 2
df x
0
dx
4.
2x 1=0
[Ans. A]
o h o
)
1
2
d2f x
= 2 ve
dx2
So it shows only minima for interval
[ 4, 4], it contains a maximum value that
will be at x= 4 or x=4
f( 4)=18 and f(+4)=10
5.
6.
[Ans. D]
From vector triple product
(
)
(
)
(
)
Here,
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
( )
[Ans. D]
y f x ; x 0,
[Ans. A]
( )
f x0
For strictly bounded, 0 limy
2
x x0 f' x0 x x0 f'' x0
......
e (x 2)(e
2
x0
or 0 lim y
x 2
)
x
2
So, y e x is strictly bounded
e ......
2
x 22 ......
e2 3 x
(Neglecting higher power of x)
7.
9.
10.
lim
0
ex e x
ex ex
x x2 x3
e 1 ..........
1 2 3
11.
ex 1
[Ans. B]
Two points on line are ( 1, 0) and (0, 1)
Hence line equation is,
y y
y 2 1 x c
x2 x1
y x c
y x 1 ( )
x x2 x3
..........
1 2 3
x2 x4
..........
ex ex
2 4
x x
e e
x3 x5
x ..........
3 5
1
or cot h (x)=
sin /2
1 sin /2
lim
0 2
/2
1 sin /2 1
= lim
2 0 /2 2
[Ans. C]
coth (x)=
[Ans. A]
2
2
5
I ydx x 1dx 2.5
2
1
1
1
x
(Since at x=1,y=2)
(Neglecting x2 and higher order)
th
th
th
Page 103
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
[Ans. B]
Taking f(x, y)= xy, we can show that,
xdx+ydy, is exact. So, the value of the
integral is independent of path
15.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Given : g x,y 4x3 10y 4

The straight line can be expressed as
y=2x
Then g(x,y)=4x3+ 10 (2x)4
(0, 1)
4
I 4x3 10 2x dx 4x3 160x4 dx
0
0
1
4x4 160 5
=
x 33
5 0
4
(1, 0)
[Ans. A]
f(x)= +
(x)=
=0 x=0
(x)= +
>0 x R.
Hence minimum at x=0
f(0)=1+1=2
Alternatively:
For any even function the maxima &
minima can be found by
A.M. >= GM
=> exp(x) + exp( x) 2
Hence minimum value = 2
17.
[Ans. B]
[ |
13.
16.
| ]
[Ans. B]
Let f(x) ex sinx
o
2
x a
f x f a x a f'a
f''a
2!
where, a=
2
x
f x f x f'
f''
2!
Coefficient of (x )2 is
f ''
2
f'' ex sinx |at x e
Coefficient of (x )2=0.5 exp ()

14.
[Ans. A]
o
Thus, (
( )w
o ( )w
o ( )w
)w
h
h
h
[ |
| ]
o
ow
ow
ow
ow
th
th
th
Page 104
GATE QUESTION BANK
18.
21.
[Ans. D]
sinx = x
= (x )
y=
or
19.
sin x = (x )
or
=1
)
(
= 1
)
(
....
(
)
...
....
( )
....
Therefore, at
22.
( )
and is the position vector)
23.
has a maximum.
[Ans. D]
Apply the divergence theorem
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
. /
* +
)
)
25.
[Ans. B]
( )
)]
(
(
)]
[Ans. C]
( )
, ( )
( )
( )
are the stationary points

( )
( )
( )
and f(2) = 25 and f(4)=21
M
o ( ) , f(6)=41
. /
24.
]
]
. /
along PQ y =1 dy =0]
= [
Since
[Ans. D]
o h o
=
According Stokes Theorem

=
20.
[Ans. A]
....
sin (x )
or
Mathematics
th
th
th
Page 105
GATE QUESTION BANK
30.
[Ans. C]
E o
E o
31.
[Ans. *] Range
( )
(
)
( )
=1+1+1
=3
[Ans. D]
o h o
h
integral of a
vector around a closed path L is equal

to the integral of curl of over the open
32.
33.
)
)
)
)
[Ans. C]
Let x (opposite side), y (adjacent side)
and z (hypotenuse side) of a right angled
triangle
29.

Maximum value is 6
( )
( )
(
(
(
(

Volume under the surface
(
)
( )
h
28.
to 0.01
( )
[Ans. D]
27.
26.
Mathematics
Given
)(
[Ans. A]
o
( )
( )
( )
Since ( ) is negative, maximum value of
f(x) will be where ( )
o
0(
o
( )
( )
( )
oh
( (
(
th
th
)(
))
)
th
Page 106
GATE QUESTION BANK
By trial and error method using options
34.
Now at x = 2
(2) =
(
)
=
(
)
= 2
<0
At x = 2 we have a maxima.
3.
[Ans. *] Range 2.99 to 3.01
At (1, 1),
Given unit vector,
[Ans. D]
5.
[Ans. D]
We consider options (A) and (D) only
because which contains variable r.
By integrating (D), we get
, which is volume of cone.
6.
[Ans. D]
By property of definite integral
)
)
=3
)
( )
(
On simplification we get option (D)
[Ans. C]
Grad u =
At (1, 3) Grad u =
,( )
7.
[Ans. B]
f(x) = (
)
(x) = 2(
)
=4x(
) =0
x = 0, x = 2 and x = 2 are the stationary
points.
(x) = 4[x(2x) +(
) ]
= 4[2
= 4 [3
= 12
(0) =
< 0, maxima at x = 0
(2) =(12)
= 32 > 0, minima at x =
( 2) =12(
)
= 32 > 0; minima at x =
There is only one maxima and only two
minima for this function.
=
2.
4.
So, directional derivative

(
)
(
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
At (1, 1, 1)
| |
35.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
f(x) =
(x) =
( )
=
(
)
Putting ( (x) = 0
(
)=0
(
)=0
x = 0 or x = 2 are the stationary points.
Now,
(
) (
(x) =
)(
)
=
(
(
))
=
(
)
(
)=2
At x = 0,
(0) =
Since (x) = 2 is > 0 at x = 0 we have a
minima.
th
th
th
Page 107
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
Mathematics
= ,
=, (
= (
[Ans. A]
))
) =1
14.
[Ans. B]
Dot product of two vectors
=1+a+ =0
So orthogonal
15.
[Ans. C]
f(x) =
( )
( )
So the equation f(x) having only maxima
at x = 1
16.
[Ans. B]
9.
10.
[Ans. C]
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
[Ans. D]
=(
)
(
(
) = (0, 2)
(
) = (2, 0)
Equation of starting line
11.
)
y = 2 x and dy = dx
17.
o
( )
.(
||
(
(
=0
||
) /
is undefined
[Ans. A]
Div ( )
=.
Discontinuous
/(
18.
= 1+1+1= 3
13.
[Ans. D]
But at
12.
[Ans. B]
(
Along x axis ,y=0,z=0

The integral reduces to zero.
y = 2 x , dy = dx
=(
(
)
Putting

[Ans. B]
P=
th
[Ans. A]
( )
o
M
th
) (
) (
(
( )
th
) (
) (
)
(
Page 108
)
)
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
/1
)( )(
23.
[Ans. A]
( )

( )
( )
24.
[Ans. B]
( )
( )
)(
(
( )
( )
( )
)
)
20.
[Ans. C]
( )
( )
(
)
For number of values of
)
o
( ) (
( ) (
( )
( )
)
( )
( )
M
21.
[Ans. B]
IN
1.
G
o
[Ans. A]
Unit vector along y = x is

G
(
(
22.
[Ans. 2]
(
o .
/.
2.
[Ans. D]
Using L Hospital Rule., numerator
becomes =
From the graph, distance at
th
th
()
= ( )
th
Page 109
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. B]
Mathematics
When
Given integral is, I=
( )
Let f(x) = so curve of 1/
will be
And when
f(x)
( )
The possible expression for f(x) is

1
.
7.
-1
[Ans. B]
Error,
This curve will be discontinuous at x=0

o
w
o
For error to be minimum

(
4.
[Ans. A]
(t) =x (t) +y (t) +
Let R
z (t)
( ) =K (constant)
|R
i.e., (t) + (t) + (t) = constant.
On analyzing the given (A) option, we find
(t)
that R
( )
[Ans. C]
Given :
f=
+
where,
will give constant magnitude,
+
(i=0 to n) are constant.
+(n 1)
+
and
so first differentiation of the integration will

be zero.
5.
=0+
(n 1)
+n
+
= ,
= nf
6.
[Ans. B]
( )
8.
[Ans. B]
()
When
( )
( )
( )
Differentiating the above equation
When
( )
th
th
th
Page 110
GATE QUESTION BANK
()
14.
()
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Given y = x2 + 2x + 10
= 2x + 2
( ) -
|
From equation (i)
()
()
()
()
This is Leibnitz linear equation

Integrating factor I.F =
the solution is
()
15.
[Ans. C]
By definition
16.
[Ans. A]
()
Unit vector=
=xi+yj+zk
and
17.
[Ans. C]
R:
Y
( )
1
1
,
[Ans. D]
10.
[Ans. A]
This is a standard question of
differentiability & continuity
Area =
[Ans. C]
y=
=(
- o
9.
11.
+1
( )
Total charge =
=
=
18.
).(cos x + sin x) = 0
tan x = 1
Or x =
coulomb.
[Ans. B]
We know that
() (
( )wh
. /
y will be maximum at x =
y=
19.
=
12.
13.
[Ans. C]
y(2) =
y(5) =
[Ans. B]
Expansion of sin x
........
( )
( )
20.
[Ans. B]
In a G.P
For a G.P to converge
[Ans. C]
y=
y=
th
th
th
Page 111
GATE QUESTION BANK
21.
[Ans. D]
.E=0 is not irrational (it is solenoidal)
22.
[Ans. 1]
From Gauss divergence theorem, we have

/dxdydz
Mathematics
[Ans. C]
24.
[Ans. D]
o .
23.
th
th
th
Page 112
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Differential Equations
ME 2005
1.
If x
xy
n y
what is y
(A) e
(B) 1
then
(C)
(D)
(B) degree 1 order 1

(C) degree 2 order 1
(D) degree 2 order 2
ME 2007
7.
2.
3.

and 3.
The complete solution of the ordinary
y
y
p
qy
s
x
x
y
Then, p and q are
(A) p =3, q = 3
(C) p =4, q = 3
(B) p =3, q = 4
(D) p =4, q = 4
Which of the following is a solution of the
y
y
p
q
y
x
x
(A)
(C) x
(B) x
(D) x
The solution of
For
ME 2008
8.
It is given that
+ 2y + y = 0, y (0) = 0,
y(1) = 0. What is y (0.5)?
(A) 0
(C) 0.62
(B) 0.37
(D) 1.13
9.
Given that x + 3x = 0, and x(0) = 1,

x (0) = 0, what is x(1)?
(A) 0.99
(C) 0.16
(B) 0.16
(D) 0.99
ME 2009
10.
+ 3y =
, the particular
integral is:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5.
The solution of x
with the
(A) y
(C) y
(B) y
(D) y
ME 2010
11.
+
The solution of the differential equation
(A) (1+ x)
(C) (1 x)
(B) (1+ x)
(D) (1
The Blasius equation,
, is a
(A) second order non-linear ordinary

(B) third order non-linear ordinary
(C) third order linear ordinary
(D) mixed order non-linear ordinary
2
dy
2xy ex with y (0) = 1 is:
dx
6.
(D) 2 x 2
(B) x 1
condition y
+4
with initial value
y (0) = 1 is bounded in the interval

(C) x 1,x 1
(A) x
ME 2006
4.
x)
The partial differential equation

(
)= 0 has
(A) degree 1 order 2

th
th
th
Page 113
GATE QUESTION BANK
ME 2011
12. Consider
the
differential
x
,yt
x
,yt
equation
y x. The general solution with

constant c is
(A) y
t n
(B) y
t n (
(C) y
t n ( )
(D) y
t n(
17.
18.
differential
y
equation
with the boundary
(B) s n ( )
(D)
partial
u
15.
19.
s n( )
differential
equation
is a
linear equation of order 2

non linear equation of order 1
linear equation of order 1
non linear equation of order 2
subjected to the boundary conditions

u(0) = 0 and u(L) = U, is
(A) u
(C) u
(
)
(
(D) u
y and
x
,y-
x
+ ,y-
x
+ ,y-
y is
20.
with
t
__________
The general solution of the differential

os x
constant, is
(A) y s n x
(B) t n (
(C)
os (
(D) t n (
y with c as a
x
Consider two solution x(t) = x t and

x t
x t of the differential equation
x t
x t
t
su t t
t
x t
x
|
t
x t
|
t
t
s
(A) 1
(B) 1
x t
x t
| t
(C) 0
(D)
The solution of the initial value problem

xy y
ME 2014
16. The matrix form of the linear system
x
,yt
at x
The wronskian W(t) =|
where k is a constant,
x
+ ,y-
If y = f(x) is the solution of
The solution to the differential equation
(B) u
conditions of y(0) =0 and y(1) = 1. The

complete solution of the differential
equation is
(A) x
(C)
s n( )
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
x
+ ,y-
the boundary conditions y
the
ME 2013
14. The
equation
ME 2012
13. Consider
x
t n
Mathematics
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE 2005
1.
Transformation to
substituting v = y
linear form by
of the equation
+ p(t)y = q(t)y ; n > 0 will be

(A)
th
+ (1 n)pv = (1 n)q
th
th
Page 114
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
(B)
+ (1 n)pv = (1+n)q
(C)
+ (1+n)pv = (1 n)q
(D)
+ (1+n)pv = (1+n)q
CE 2007
6.
The degree of the differential equation
+ 2x = 0 is
(A) 0
(B) 1
in the range
(A)
(B)
y
x
( os x
( os x
(C)
( os x
(D)
( os x
( )
7.
The solution for the differential equation

= x y with the condition that y = 1 at
is given by
x = 0 is
s n x)
(B) In(y) =
s n x)
s n x)
8.
xy
+4
(D) y =
A body originally at 600C cools down to

C in 15 minutes when kept in air at a
temperature of 250C. What will be the
temperature of the body at the end of 30
minutes?
(A) 35.20C
(C) 28.70C
0
(B) 31.5 C
(D) 150C
CE 2008
9.
The general solution of

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)

x
(C) In(y) =
(A) y =
s n x)
CE 2006
3.
A spherical naphthalene ball expanded to
the atmosphere losses volume at a rate
proportional to its instantaneous surface
area due to evaporation. If the initial
diameter of the ball is 2 cm and the
diameter reduces to 1 cm after 3 months,
the ball completely evaporates in
(A) 6 months
(C) 12 months
(B) 9 months
(D) Infinite time
+ y = 0 is
y = P cos x + Q sin x
y = P cos x
y = P sin x
y=Psn x
given that at x = 1,
10.
y = 0 is
5.
(C) 2
(D) 3
The solution of
y
4.
Mathematics
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
= 0.25 y is to be
solv us ng t b w r
mpl t Eul rs
method with the boundary condition y = 1 at
x = 0 and with a step size of 1. What would
be the value of y at x = 1?
(A) 1.33
(C) 2.00
(B) 1.67
(D) 2.33
Solution of
(A) x
(B) x
at x = 1 and y = is
y
y
(C) x
(D) x
y
y
CE 2009
11. Solution of the differential equation
3y
+ 2x = 0 represents a family of
(A) Ellipses
(B) Parabolas
(C) circles
(D) hyperbolas
CE 2010
12. The order and degree of the differential
equation
+ 4 ( )
respectively
(A) 3 and 2
(B) 2 and 3
th
th
= 0 are
(C) 3 and 3
(D) 3 and 1
th
Page 115
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
The solution to the ordinary differential

equation
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
14.
y=
y=
y=
y=
The following differential equation has

3
d2y dy
4 y2 2 x
dt2
dt
(A) degree=2, order=1
(B) degree=1, order=2
(C) degree=4, order=3
(D) degree=2, order=3
6y = 0 is
+
+
+
+
The partial differential equation that can

be formed from z = ax + by + ab has the
form (w t p
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
n q
Mathematics
ECE 2006
3.
For the differential equation
z = px + qy
z = px + pq
z = px + qy + pq
z = qx + pq
the boundary conditions are

(i) y=0 for x=0 and
(ii) y=0 for x=a
The form of non-zero solutions of y
(where m varies over all integers) are
m x
y
sn
CE 2011
15. The solution of the differential equation
+ = x, with the condition that y = 1 at
x = 1, is
(A) y =
(D) y =
CE 2012
16. The solution of the ordinary differential
y=0 for the boundary
condition, y=5 at x = 1 is
(A) y
(C) y
(B) y
(D) y
CE 2014
17. The
os
m x
(C) y = +
(B) y = +
equation
d2y
k2y 0
2
dx
integrating
for
the
equation
(A)
(B)
ECE 2007
4.
d2y
y y 2 under the boundary
dx2
conditions
(i) y=y1 at x=0 and
(ii) y=y2 at x=, where k, y1 and y2 are
constants, is
(A) y
y
y
xp( x ) y
(B) y
y
y
xp x
y
(C) y
y
y s n x
y
(D) y
y
y
xp x
y
k2
differential
s
(C)
(D)
ECE 2005
1.
A solution of the following differential
equation is given by
d2y
dy
5 6y 0
dx
dx2
ECE 2008
5.
Which of the following is a solution to the
2x
3x
(A) y e e
2x
3x
(C) y e e
2x
3x
(B) y e e
2x
3x
(D) y e e
(A)
t
(B) x t
th
th
x t
x t
(C) x t
(D) x t
th
t
t
Page 116
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2009
6.
The order of the differential equation
ECE 2011
10. The solution of the differential equation
d2y dy
y4 et is
dt 2 dt
(A) 1
(C) 3
(B) 2
(D) 4
7.
Match each differential equation in Group

I to its family of solution curves from
Group II.
Group I
Group II
1. Circles
dy y
P.
dx x
dy
y
Q.
dx
x
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3. Hyperbolas
dy
x
dx
y
y x
(C) y
(D) y
ECE\EE\IN 2012
11. With initial condition x(1) = 0.5, the
solution of the differential equation,
t
t is
(A) x
(C) xt
(B) x
(D) x
ECE\IN 2012
12. Consider the differential equation
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
wt y t |
n
|
num r
l v lu o
(A)
(B)
x with the initial condition
y
s ng Eul rs rst or r m t o
with a step size of 0.1, the value of y
is
(A) 0.01
(C) 0.0631
(B) 0.031
(D) 0.1
A function n x satisfies the differential
equation
is
(A) x
(B) x
P-2, Q-3, R-3, S-1

P-1, Q-3, R-2, S-1
P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-3
P-3, Q-2, R-1, S-2
ECE 2010
8.
Consider a differential equation
9.
y y
2. Straight Lines
dy x
R.
dx y
S.
Mathematics
where L is a
constant. The boundary conditions are:

n
and n
. The solution to
this equation is
(A) n x
xp x
(B) n x
xp x
(C) n x
xp x
(D) n x
xp x
y
|
t
(C)
(D) 1
ECE 2013
13. A system described by a linear, constant
coefficient,
ordinary,
first
order
differential equation has an exact solution
given by y t or t
when the forcing
function is x(t) and the initial condition is
y(0). If one wishes to modify the system
so that the solution becomes 2y(t) for
t > 0, we need to
(A) Change the initial condition to y(0)
and the forcing function to 2x(t)
(B) Change the initial condition to 2y(0)
and the forcing function to x(t)
(C) Change the initial condition to
j y(0) and the forcing function to
j x(t)
(D) Change the initial condition to
2y (0) and the forcing function to
2x(t)
th
th
th
Page 117
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2014
14. If the characteristic equation of the
y
t
15.
has two equal roots,
n t v lu s o
(A) 1
(B) 0,0
r
(C) j
(D) 1/2
xy
(C)
(B)
xy
(D)
(B) x t
(C) x t
(D) x t
EE 2011
3.
With K as a constant, the possible solution
for the first order differential equation
is
Which ONE of the following is a linear

non-homogeneous differential equation,
where x and y are the independent and
dependent variables respectively?
(A)
Mathematics
xy
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
EE 2013
4.
A function y
x
x is defined over
an open interval x = (1,2). At least at one
point in this interval ,
16.
17.
18.
If z
xy ln xy then
(A) x
(C) x
(B) y
(D) y
If a and b are constants, the most general

solution of the differential equation
x
x
x
s
t
t
(A)
(C)
bt
(B)
bt
(D)
(A) 20
(B) 25
tx
6.
x
x
(A) x t
with initial conditions

|
t
, the solution is
(B) s n t
os t
(C) s n t
os t
(D) os t
Consider
the
EE 2005
1.
The solution of the first order differential
qu t on x t
3x(t), x (0) = x is
(A) x (t) = x
(C) x (t) = x
(B) x (t) = x
(D) x (t) = x
EE 2010
2.
For the differential equation
(C) 30
(D) 35
EE 2014
5.
x
x w t n t l on t ons x
t
x
n
|
s
t
(A) t
t
With initial values y(0) = y (0) = 1, the

solution of the differential equation
y
is exactly
differential
equation
Which of the following is a solution to this

differential equation for x > 0?
(A)
(C) x
(D) ln x
(B) x
IN 2005
1.
The general solution of the differential
equation (D2 4D +4)y = 0, is of the form
(given D = d/dx), and C1 and C2 are
constants
(A) C1e2x
(C) C1e2x + C2 e2x
2x
(B) C1e + C2
(D) C1e2x + C2x
th
th
th
Page 118
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
urv s or w
t
urv tur t
3
any point is equal to cos w r s t
angle made by the tangent at that point
with the positive direction of the x-axis,
r
gv n
, where y and y
are the first and second derivatives of y

with respect to x)
(A) circles
(C) ellipses
(B) parabolas
(D) hyperbolas
IN 2006
3.
For an initial value problem
y
y
y
y
n y
various solutions are written in the
following groups. Match the type of
solution with the correct expression.
Group 1
Group 2
P. General solution
1. 0.1ex
of homogeneous
equations
Q. Particular integral 2.
(A cos 10 x
+ B sin 10 x)
R. Total solution
3.
cos 10 x +
x
satisfying boundary 0.1e
conditions
(A) P-2, Q-1, R-3
(C) P-1, Q-2, R-3
(B) P-1, Q-3, R-2
(D) P-3, Q-2, R-1
4.
A linear ordinary differential equation is

given as
d2y
dy
3 2y (t)
2
dt
dt
Where (t) is an impulse input. The
solut on s oun by Eul rs orw r difference method that uses an
integration step h. What is a suitable
value of h?
(A) 2.0
(C) 1.0
(B) 1.5
(D) 0.2
Mathematics
IN 2007
5.
The boundary-value problem y
y
y
y
w ll
v non-zero
solut on
n only t v lu s o r
(A)

(B)
(C)
(D)
IN 2008
6.
Consider the differential equation
= 1 + y2. Which one of the following
can be a particular solution of this
differential equation?
(A) y = tan (x + 3) (C) x = tan (y + 3)
(B) y = tan x + 3
(D) x = tan y + 3
IN 2010
7.
Consider
y
the
differential
equation
with y(0)=1. The value of
y(1) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN 2011
8.
y
y y
with boundary conditions
y(0) = 1, y(1) = 0. The value of y(2) is
(A) 1
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN 2013
9.
The type of the partial differential
equation
is
(A) Parabolic
(B) Elliptic
10.
th
(C) Hyperbolic
(D) Nonlinear
The maximum value of the solution y(t) of

the differential equation y t
y t
with initial conditions y
and
y
, for t
is
(A) 1
(C)
(B) 2
(D)
th
th
Page 119
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
IN 2014
11. The figure shows the plot of y as a
function of x
The function shown is the solution of the

differential equation (assuming all initial
conditions to be zero) is :
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
|x|
th
th
th
Page 120
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics

ME
1.
4.
[Ans. D]
x y
y
lnx
x
xy
x
lnx
x
omp r ng w g t
ow
y(I.F.) =
x y
olv ng bov
utt ng x
x
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
The given differential equation may be
written as
y
y
y
ux l ry qu t on s
lnx
x
Substituting D=2, we get
x
x
n t v lu o
t n n t v lu o y t
5.
[Ans. B]
First order equation,
sy
dy
Py Q,
dx
Where P = 2x and Q =
Since P and Q are functions of x, then
Integrating factor,
[Ans. C]
Given equation is
y
p
qy
x
x
p
q y
p
q
ts solut on s
y
um o roots p
p
ro u t o roots q
q
[Ans. C]
Given equation is
y
y
p
q
x
x
p
q
ut p
n q
y
I.F. = e Pdx e x
Solution is
y
yex x c
,c=1
Since, y
x2
(1 + x) e
y
6.
[Ans. A]
Order: The order of a differential equation
is the order of the highest derivative
appears in the equation
Degree: The degree of a differential
equation is the degree of the highest
order differential coefficient or derivative,
when the differential coefficients are free
from radicals and fraction.
The general solution of differential
qu t on o or r n must nvolv n
arbitrary constant.
th
th
th
Page 121
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
y
( )y x
x
x
Standard form
y
y
x
Where P and Q function of x only and
solution is given by
[Ans. C]
y
x
v n
y
y
x
nt gr t ng
y
x
nx
olut on y x
x
and x
Given condition
y
m ns t x
r or yx
y
[Ans. D]
x
x
Auxiliary equation is
m2 + 3 = 0
i.e. m =
x
os t
sn t
x
os t
s n t
At t = 0
1=A
0=B
x = os t
x
11.
[Ans. B]
is third order (
is linear, since the product
) and it
is not
allowed in linear differential equation

12.
os t
[Ans. D]
y
x
y
y
t n
10.
y
9.
x x x
yx
[Ans. A]
y
y y
A.E is, D2+2D+1 =0
2=0
m 1
The C.F. is (C1+C2x)e-x
P.I. = 0
ow y
n y
x
x
8.
Where, integrating factor (I.F)

r
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Given differential equation is
y
x
y x
x
th
y
t n.
th
y x
x
x
x
th
Page 122
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. A]
17.
y
y
x
x
y
x
x
y
n y
Choice (A) satisfies the initial condition as
well as equation as shown below
y x
y
n y
y
lso
x
x
y
x
18.
y
y
x
x
y
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o y x is the solution to this equation with
given boundary conditions
14.
[Ans. D]
15.
[Ans. B]
m
m
u
u
At x=0,
At x=L,
(
y
x
y
x
y
x
tx
y
y
tx
x
y
x
tx
y
[Ans. D]
y
os x y
x
Let x y z
y
z
x
x
z
os z
x
z
os z
x
z
s
( ) z
x
z
os ( )
Integrating
z
t n( )
x
z
t n( )
x
x
t n(
)
n
19.
u x
Solving we get u = U(
16.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
x
x
y
t
y
x
y
t
So by observation it is understood that,
x
x
,y- *
+ ,yt
y
)
[Ans. A]
Since the determinant of wronskian
matrix is constant values for, therefore it
is same for both t=0 and t=
t
20.
x t
x t
t
[Ans. B]
y
x x
y
y
ln ( )
x
y
x t
t
x t
ln y
ln
v ny
n
th
y
th
th
Page 123
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE
1.
y
tx
x
[Ans. A]
Given
+ p(t)y = q(t) y
n
y
3.
Multiplying by (1 n) y we get
v
p t
n y
q t
t
Now since y
= v we get
v
n pv
n q
t
Where p is p (t) and q is q(t)
t
Where, V =
4 r
sn x
os
x
sn
x
os x
sn x
os x
r )
t
utt ng r
r
t
dr = kdt
Integration we get
r = kt + C
At t = 0, r = 1
1= k0+C
C=1
r = kt + 1
Now at t = 3 months r = 0.5 cm
0.5 = k 3 + 1
r
r
t
t
Substituting in (i) we get
os x
sn x)
y
(
( os x
[Ans. A]
[Ans. A]
y
y
y
x
x
y
y
( )
x
This is a linear differential equation
+ p(t) y = q(t) y ; n > 0
Given, v = y
v
y
n y
t
t
y
v
t
n y
t
Substitution in the differential equation
we get
2.
Mathematics
n solv ng g v s
t
sn x
t = 6 months
y
os
sn
4.
sn x
os x
[Ans. A]
Given
y
x
xy x
x
y
x
xy x
x
Dividing by x
os x
sn x
sn x
os x
th
th
th
Page 124
GATE QUESTION BANK
y
x
( )y (
)
x
x
x
Which is a linear first order differential of
the form
y
y
x
Integrating factor = I.F =
=
y I.F = .(I.F)dx
x
yx
(
)x x
x
Now at x = 1, y = 0
Hence, here the degree is 1, which is

power of
7.
[Ans. D]
y
x y
x
This is variable separable form
= x dx
y
y
tx
log y
C
x y
5.
x
x
[Ans. B]
=
0C
=
Now at t = 30 minutes
y =2
6.
ln = kt +

C.

C.
Given = 250C
Now t t
60 = 25 + C.e0
C = 35
At t
m nut s
40 = 25 + 35
y +1=0
t
=
y
y
y
0.25hy
y
+y =0
Putting k = 0 in above equation
0.25h y
y +y =0
Since, y = 1 and h = 1
0.25 y
0) (Newtons law of cooling)
[Ans. C]
y
y y
tx
x
h=1
Iterative equation for backward (implicit)
Euler methods for above equation would
be
y
y
x
8.
y
log y
i.e. 0
Mathematics
= 25 + 35 (
= 25 + 35 ( ) (s n
[Ans. B]
Degree of a differential equation is the
power of its highest order derivative after
the differential equation is made free of
radicals and fractions if any, in derivative
power.
= 31.
th
th
th
Page 125
GATE QUESTION BANK
9.
12.
[Ans. A]
+y=0
10.
13.
x x
C=2
Solution is
y
x
[Ans. D]
y y
x n y
x x
This is a linear differential equation of the
form
y
y
wt
n
x
x
x
IF = Integrations factor
x x
y
x
( )
( )
x
(
x x
Solution is
y (IF) =
x
y. x = xx x
yx = x x
y
)
15.
x
x
y
[Ans. C]
y
y
x
x
Auxiliary equation is
+D6=0
(D 2) = 0
D = 3 or D = 2
Solution is y =
[Ans. C]
Z = ax + by + ab
z
p
x
z
q
b
y
Substituting a and b in (i) in terms of p
and q we get z = px + qy + pq
[Ans. A]
y y
y
y
/
0( )
y 1
x
x
The order is 3 since highest differential
14.
x +y =4
y
x
y y
is
3y
y
)
x
Removing radicals we get
At x = 1, y =
11.
The degree is 2 since power of highest

differential is 2
[Ans. D]
y
x
x
y
y dy = x dx
y y
[Ans. A]
y
x
+1=0
E sm
m
General solution is
y=
[ cos (1 x) + sin (1 x)]
= cosx + sinx
= P cosx + Q sinx
Where P and Q are some constants
Mathematics
Which is the equation of a family of ellipses
yx =
th
th
+C
th
Page 126
GATE QUESTION BANK
y=
sin ka=0
m x
Now y(1) = 1
ot
solut on s y
17.
m x
[Ans. D]
k2D2y= y
y2
y2
2 1
D k2 y k2
1
m1 =
k
x/k
x/k
C.F. = C1e C2 e
[Ans. D]
x/k
x/k
y2
y= C1e C2 e
At y=y1, x=0
y1 = C1+ C2+y2
At y=y2 , x= Hence C1 must be zero
y1 = C2+y2
C2 =y1 - y2
[Ans. B]
d2y
dy
5 6y 0
dx
dx2
A.E. is D2 5D 6 0
D=2,3
2x
3x
Hence, solution is y e e
2.
sn
[Ans. D]
y
y
x
y
y
y
Particular integral (P.I) =

=
ECE
1.
x
4.
16.
Mathematics
x
y=(y1 y2) exp + y2
k
5.
[Ans. B]
x t
x t
t
(D +3) x(t) = 0
[Ans. B]
3
d2y dy
4 y2 2 x
dt2
dt
Order of highest derivative=2
Hence, most appropriate answer is (B)
3
3.
[Ans. A]
Given, Differential equation,
d2y
k2y 0
dx2
Auxilary equation is
y
Let y
os x
sn x
At x=0, y = 0 A=0
y
sn x
At x=a, y=0 B sin ka=0
B0 otherwise y=0 always
So, x t ke3t ,
Hence x t 2e3t is one solution (for
some boundary / initial condition)
6.
[Ans. B]
The order of a differential equation is the
order of the highest derivative involving
in equation, so answer is 2.
The degree of a differential equation is
the degree of the highest derivative
involving in equation, so answer is 1.
7.
[Ans. A]
P.
log y log x log

y
xw
s qu t on o str g t l n
th
th
th
Page 127
GATE QUESTION BANK
Q.
log y
y
log x
y y
y
8.
yp rbol
x x
9.
t
t t
xt
xt
12.
[Ans. D]
Approach 1:
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
Converting to s-domain
s y s
sy
y
sy s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
n nv rs
pl
tr ns orm
y t
t
u t
y t
t
t
y t
|
t
[Ans. D]
Approach 2:
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
Applying Laplace Transform on both
sides
y
s y s
sy
|
t
(sy s
y
) y s
s y s
s
sy s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
s
s
n x
m
Auxiliary equation m
olut on n x
Since, n
Since, n
must be zero)
Therefore
(hence
The solution is, n x

10.
r l
y
old y +0.1 ( ) new
x
y
x y
0 0
0+0
0+0.10=0
=0
0. 0
0.1+0
0+0.10.1=0.01
1 =0.1
0. 0.0 0.2+0.01 0.01+0.210.1
2 =0.21
1
=0.031
The value of y at x= 0.3 is 0.031.
x
x=1
Using initial condition, at t = 1, x = 0.5
ypr bol
Equ t on o
[Ans. B]
y x
y x
x
x y
ol s xt
qu t on o
y y
x
x x
S.
[Ans. C]
t
log
qu t on o
R.
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. C]
Given y
ln y
When
y
y
and
x
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
t
t
th
th
th
Page 128
GATE QUESTION BANK
z
y
x ln xy
ox
z
x
y t
|
t
13.
[Ans. D]
Let the differential equation be
y t
y t
x t
t
Apply Laplace transform on both sides
y t
{x t }
2
y t 3
t
sy s
y
y s
x s
s
y s
x s
y
x s
y
y s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace on both sides
x s
{y s }
2
3 y
{
}
s
s
y t
x t
y
So if we want
y t as a solution both
x(t) and y(0) has to be multiplied by
.
Hence change x(t) by
x t and y(0) by
y
14.
[Ans. A]
y
y
y
x
x
The auxiliary equation is
m
m
then either
m
or m
i.e., roots of the equation are equal to
or
z
y
18.
EE
1.
xy ln xy
xy
[Ans. C]
z xy ln xy
z
y ln xy
x
y ln xy
x (t)
x
t
x
lnx =
t
x
Putting
x
Now putting initial condition x(0) = x
x
x
Solution is x = x
i.e. x(t) = x
0 is a first order linear
xy
omog n ous
xy
xy
equation (homogeneous)
r non l n r qu t ons
16.
xy
[Ans. *] Range 0.53 to 0.55

E m
m
m
olut ons s y
bx
y
bx
b
s ng y
y
n
gv s
n b
y
x
tx
y
[Ans. A]
v n x t
is a first order linear
equation non
x ln xy
[Ans. B]
x
x
x
t
t
Pre auxiliary equation is
m
m
Pre roots of AE are m
Repeated roots are present.
So, most general solution in
n t
bt
[Ans. A]
xy
xy
z
y
i.e.
15.
xy
xy ln xy
z
x
ox
17.
Mathematics
th
th
th
Page 129
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
[Ans. B]
x
x
x
t
t
Auxiliary equation m
m
m
m
(m+4)(m+2)=0
m= 2, 4
x(t) =
6.
[Ans. C]
x y
xy
y
y
x
nx
On solving (1) & (2), we get
IN
1.
x(
s ts
[Ans. C]
y
and
x(t)= 2
3.
(1)
y
y
x
w subst tut y
n
x(0) = 1 1=
Mathematics
Since there is double root at 2, so general

solution of the given differential equation
would be
+
[Ans. A]
y
Integrate on both sides

2.
y
4.
5.
[Ans. B]
v n
os
y
n
y
now y t n
Equating equations (i) and (ii) and using

equation (iii) in equation (ii), we get
y os = os
[Ans. B]
y
x
x
p n nt rv l
x
y
x
x
y
x
x
Value is in between 20 and 30
So it is 25
[Ans. C]
x
x
gv n
t
x
os t
sn t
x
n
x
sn t
os t
t
x
|
t
x
os t
y= .x
Which is equation of a parabola.
3.
[Ans. A]
A.E.
D= 1+ 10i
C.F =
(A cos10 x + B sin 10 x)
x
4.
[Ans. C]
5.
[Ans. C]
sn t
th
th
th
Page 130
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. A]
Given
Hyperbolic if
El ps
Compare the given differential equation
with standard from A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
= 1 + y2
Integrating
= x
Or t n y = x + c
Or y = t n x
7.
Parabolic
[Ans. C]
y
y
x
Auxiliary equation, m + 1 = 0
m= 1
C.F =
10.
[Ans. C]

is
y
x
Now, y
and y
, placing these
values
We get,
and
y
s nx
s nx
os x
So, y
os x s n x
or m x m
y
s nx
os x
s nx
os x
x
y
os x s n x
y
or x
m xm
y m x
os
sn
11.
[Ans. A]
Given partial differential equation is
x
os x
y
y
9.
[Ans. D]
y t
y t
y
y
y=
8.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
By back tracking, from option (D)
y
|x| x or x
x
= x or x
Integrating
y
x x or x
x
x x or x
x
t
We know that
y
(x y
or
x
or x
is said to be
Parabolic if
th
th
th
Page 131
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Complex Variables
ME 2007
1.
If
x y and (x, y) are functions with
continuous second derivatives, then
x y + i (x, y)
can be expressed as an analytic function
of x + i (i = ), when
(A)
ME 2014
6.
The argument of the complex number

where i =
7.
+
(D)
(A) 2i
(B) 4i
An analytic function of a complex variable

z x + i y is expressed as
z
u x y +iv x y
where i
f u(x,y)= 2xy, then
v(x,y) must be
(A) x + y + onst nt
(B) x
y + onst nt
(C) x + y + onst nt
(D) x
y + onst nt
9.

z = x + i y is expressed as
f(z) = u(x, y) + i v(x, y),
where i =
. If u (x, y) = x y , then
expression for v(x, y) in terms of x, y and
a general constant c would be
(A) xy +
(C) 2xy +
ME 2009
3.
z = x + iy is expressed as
f(z) = u(x, y) +iv(x, y) where i = 1 .
If u = xy, the expression of v should be
y
2
y
(C)
(D)
x2
2
x y 2 k
2
ME 2010
4.
The modulus of the complex number
(B)
) is
(A) 5
(B)
(C) 1/
(D) 1/5
traversed in
8.
(C) 2i
(D) 0
x y 2 k
is evaluate
counter clock wise direction. The integral

is equal to
(A) 0
4
4
ME 2008
2.
The integral z z evaluated around
the unit circle on the complex plane for
z
is
x y
along the circle x + y
(C)
(B)
The integral y x
(B)
(A)
, is
10.
(D)
If z is a complex variable, the value of

is
(A)
i
(B)
0.511+1.57i
(C)
i
(D) 0.511+1.57i
ME 2011
5.
The product of two complex numbers
1 + i and 2 5i is
(A) 7 3i
(C) 3 4i
(B) 3 4i
(D) 7 + 3i
th
th
th
Page 132
GATE QUESTION BANK
CE 2005
1.
Which one of the following is NOT true for
complex number and ?
(A)
(B) |
(C) |
(D) |
2.
=|
|| |+| |
|| | | |
| +|
|
2| | + 2| |
+
+
CE 2011
6.
For an analytic function,
f(x + iy) = u(x, y)+iv(x, y), u is given by
u = 3x 3y . The expression for v
considering K to be a constant is
(C) 6x 6y+k
(A) 3y
3x + k
(D) 6xy +k
(B) 6y 6x + k
CE 2014
Consider likely applicable of

u hys
integral theorem to evaluate the following
integral counter clockwise around the
unit circle c.
s
z z
7.
i
i
ECE 2006
1.
The value
of
2.
/2: singul riti s s t

{ n n
2
}
(D) None of the above
dz is
(A)
4i
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
(C)
(D)
the
contour
i
i
integral
z in positive sense is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
For the function of a complex variable

W = In Z (where, W = u + jv and
Z = x + jy), the u = constant lines get
mapped in Z-plane as
(A) set of radial straight line
(B) set of concentric circles
(C) set of confocal hyperbolas
(D) set of confocal ellipses
(C) I
CE 2006
3.
Using Cauchys is integral theorem, the
value of the integral (integration being
taken in counter clockwise direction)
can be expressed as
(A)
(B)
z being a complex variable. The value of I

will be
(A) I = 0: singularities set =
(B) I = 0: singularities set
=,
Mathematics
ECE 2007
3.
If the semi-circular contour D of radius 2
is as shown in the figure, then the value of
the integral
is
CE 2009
4.
The analytic function f(z) =

singularities at
(A) 1 and 1
(B) 1 and i
5.
has
j2
(C) 1 and i
(D) i and i
j2
dz
(A) j
(B) j
(where C is a closed curve given by

|z| = 1) is
(A) i
(C)
(B)
(D) i
th
th
(C)
(D)
th
Page 133
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE 2008
4.
The residue of the function
f z
5.
z 2 z 22
2
(A)
(B)
at z=2 is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(D) 2
) z is
(A) 4
(B) 4
The equation sin(z)=10 has

(A) no real or complex solution
(B) exactly two distinct complex
solutions
(C) a unique solution
(D) an infinite number of complex
solutions
12.
+ j2
j2
(C) 4
(D) 4
+ j2
j2
The real part of an analytic function z

where z x + jy is given by
cos().
The imaginary part of z is
(A)
os x
(C)
sin x
(B)
sin x
(D)
sin x
EE 2007
If f(z) =
is given by
(A) 2
(B) 2 +
, then
(C) 2j
(D) 2j
z
and 1
and
(C)
(D)
The value of
at its poles are
(A)
1.
where C is the
contour |z-i/2| = 1 is
(A) 2i
(C) t n z
(B)
(D) i t n z
ECE 2010
7.
The residues of a complex function
(B)
ECE 2014
11. C is a closed path in the z-plane given by
|z|=3. The value of the integral
ECE 2009
6.
Mathematics
EE 2011
2.
A point z has been plotted in the complex
plane, as shown in figure below.
nit ir l
and
z
and
ECE 2011
8.
ECE\EE\IN 2012
9.
If x =
then the value of x is
(C) x
(A)
(D) 1
(B)
10.
Given f (z)
nit ir l
lm
where is the circle |z|

is given by
(A) 0
(C) 4/5
(B) 1/10
(D) 1
lm
nit ir l
lm
nit ir l
y
y
lmlm
. If C is a
nit ir l
counterclockwise path in the z plane

such that |z+1| =1, the value of
z z is
th
th
th
Page 134
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE 2013
3.
z evaluated anticlockwise around
the circle |z
(A) 4
(B)
4.
i|
2 where i
(C) 2 +
(D) 2 +2i
Square roots of i, where i =

(A) i, i
(B)
os (
) + i sin (
, is
, are
IN 2005
1.
Consider the circle |
| 2 in the
complex plane (x, y) with z = x + iy. The
minimum distant form the origin to the
circle is
(C) 4
(A) 2 2
(B) 4
(D) 2
2.
Let
, where z is a complex number
not equal to zero. The z is a solution of
(C) z
(A) z
(D) z
(B) z
os ( ) + i sin ( )
(C)
os ( ) + i sin ( )
os ( ) + i sin ( )
(D) os ( ) + i sin (
os (
) + i sin ( )
EE 2014
5.
Let S be the set of points in the complex
plane corresponding to the unit circle.
{z: |z|
} . Consider the
(That is,
function f(z)=zz* where z* denotes the
complex conjugate of z. The f(z) maps S to
which one of the following in the complex
plane
(A) unit circle
(B) horizontal axis line segment from
origin to (1, 0)
(C) the point (1, 0)
(D) the entire horizontal axis
IN 2006
3.
The value of the integral of the complex
function
3s 4
f(s)
(s 1)(s 2)
Along the path s 3is
(A) 2j
(B) 4j
7.
All the values of the multi-valued complex

function , where i
are
(A) purely imaginary.
(B) real and non-negative.
(C) on the unit circle.
(D) equal in real and imaginary parts.
Integration of the complex function
z
, in the counter clockwise
(C) 6j
(D) 8j
IN 2007
4.
For the function
of a complex variable
z, the point z=0 is

(A) a pole of order 3
(B) a pole of order 2
(C) a pole of order 1
(D) not a singularity
5.
6.
Mathematics
Let j =
(A) j
(B) 1
.Then one value of

(C)
is
(D)
IN 2008
6.
A complex variable
x+j
has its
real part x varying in the range
to + . Which one of the following is
the locus (shown in thick lines) of 1/Z in
the complex plane?
direction, around |z 1| = 1, is
(A) i
(C) i
(B)
(D) 2i
th
th
th
Page 135
l xis
(Note:
j
m gin ry
xis
m gin ry
xis
l xis
IN 2009
The value of
where the contour
of integration is a simple closed curve

around the origin, is
(A) 0
(C)
(D)
(B) 2j
8.
If z = x+jy, where x and y are real. The

value of | | is
(A) 1
(C)
(D)
(B)
9.
One of the roots of the equation =j,

where j is positive square root of 1, is
(A) j
(C)
j
+j
(D)
pl n
l xis
(B)
z is.
l xis
7.
Mathematics
IN 2010
10. The contour C in the adjoining figure is
described by x + y
. The value of
m gin ry
xis
m gin ry
xis
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) 2j
(B) 2j
(C) 4j
(D) 4j
IN 2011
11. The contour integral /
with C as
the counter-clockwise unit circle in the zplane is equal to
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 2
(D)
th
th
th
Page 136
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics

ME
1.
2.
4.
[Ans. B]
By definition C-R equation holds
[Ans. A]
f(z)=
has simple pole at z = 0
Residue of f(z) at z = 0
lim
z z
lim
os z
z z 2i (residue at z = 0)
2i
2i
3.
[Ans. B]
+ 4i
+ 2i
2i
+ 2i
+ i + 4i
+4
Modulus =
[Ans. C]
Given u=xy
For analytic function
u v
x y
and
[Ans. A]
+i
2
2
i + 2i
6.
dw u v
i
dz x x
7.
y x
Replacing x by z and y by 0, we get
8.
+ 2i + i
i
r os
x
r sin
r sin
r os
[Ans. C]
u
v
x
y
v
2y
y
2y
+ x
v
2
y + x
v
u
v
y
x
2x
x
2x
+
x
2
x
x
z2
C
2
Where C is a constant,
z
v
m0 i + 1
2
Integrating, w i
(x2 y2 2ixy)
mi
or v
x y
y = r sin x
y r os
dw
y ix
dz
Where, z = x + iy
dw = izdz
[Ans. C]
u u
i
x y
dw
0 iz
dz
[Ans. C]
+i
+i
i
i
+i
2i
i
+ i
2
+i
rg (
) t n ( )
i
u
v
y
x
By Milne Thomson method

Let w = u + iv
or
5.
+ 2i
y 2 x2
2
th
th
th
Page 137
GATE QUESTION BANK
y
y
9.
10.
[Ans. B]
z
ln z|
z
[Ans. B]
s
z
os z
The poles are at z = n + /2
=
/2 /2 + /2
None of these poles lie inside the unit
circle |z| =1
Hence, sum of residues at poles = 0
Singularities set = and
2i [sum o r si u s o t z t th
poles]
2 i
[Ans. C]
iv n u x
y
v
v
v
x+
y
x
y
v
u v
u
y
x x
y
u
u
v
x+
y
y
x
2y x + 2x y
rm ont ing y t rms only llow
v 2 xy +
3.
z z
ln i
ln
ln + ln i
ln
ln
z
os
z i
z
i
ln i ln z
i
(
2
ln
+ ln i
+ i sin
i sin /2
=|
z=
pplying
z
z
u hys int gr l th or m, using

i
.2i ( )/
2i
Now,
ln
i.e.
[Ans. C]
(A) is true since
[Ans. A]
u hys int gr l th or m is
f(a) =
CE
1.
2.
x
x + onst nt
Mathematics
i
.2i 0( )
1/
i
.2i 0( )
1/
4i
(B) is true by triangle inequality of

complex number
(C) is not true since |
|| | | |
(D) is true since
| + |2 = ( + )
+
= ( + ) (z + z )
= z + z + z + z
i
And |
|2 = ( + )
4.
4i
[Ans. D]
z
z
z
z + z
z i z+i
The singularities are at z = i and i
5.
[Ans. C]
= ( + ) (z z )
= z + z
z + z
ii
Adding (i) and (ii) we get
| + |2 + |
|2 = 2 z + 2 z
= 2| | + 2| |
os 2z
2z
z
*
th
th
+
*z
th
Page 138
GATE QUESTION BANK
in
is point with in |z|=1(the
los
urv
w
n us
integral theorem and say that
7.
[Ans. B]
2
i
z
+i
Multiplying by conjugates
2
i
i
+i
i
2i + i
2 +
+ i
2
+
i
u hys
os 2z
[2i ( )] wh r z
2
2
z
[Notice that f(z) is analytic on all points
inside |z|
]
2
[2i
os 2
/2
)
Mathematics
2i
6.
[Ans. D]
f = u + iv
u = 3x2 3y2
For f to be analysis, we have CauchyRiemann conditions,
u
v
i
x
y
u
v
ii
y
x
From (i) we have
u
v
x
x
y
v
ECE
1.
Given ,
2.
x +
z +4
j| 2
|z
2j
2j 2j 2
[Ans. B]
iv n
log
1
y
u iv loge x iy log x2 y2 i tan1
2
x
Since, u is constant, therefore
x
v
+ x
2
i.e. v = 3x2 + f(x) iii
Now applying equation (iii) we get
u
v
y
x
[ x+
1
1
z 4 z 2jz 2j
2
Pole (0, 2) lies inside the circle |z j|=2

y u hys nt gr l ormul
x y
[Ans. D]
1
log x2 y2 c
2
x +y
Which is represented set
of concentric circles.
3.
[Ans. A]
s
y
x
x
By integrating,
f(x) = 6yx 3x2 + K
Substitute in equation (iii)
v= 3x2 + 6yx 3x2 + K
v
yx + K
2j sum o r si u
Singular points are s =

Only s= +1 lies inside the given contour
lims 1 f s
Residues at s= +1 = S1
lims 1
S1
th
th
1
1
S 1 2
th
2j ( )
2
Page 139
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. A]
Residue of z=2 is
Mathematics
d
2
z 2 f z
z2 dz
d 1
2
1
lim
lim
2
3
z2 dz
z
z 2 32
z 2
z+
lim
5.
(z
+
F(z
2j
7.
[Ans. C]
X(z) =
[Ans. D]
sin z
Poles are Z= 0, Z =1, Z=2

Residue at Z=0 is lim
2i
Residue at Z =1 is lim
2 i
Residue z =2 is lim
2 i
(
2 i
ut m
m
8.
[Ans. A]
z+4
z + 4z +
2 im
2 i
m
2 i
iz
log
2
2 i + i
2
2 i
9.
log i + log(
iz log + i (
2n)
2
+log
iz i (
2n) + log
2
z (
2n) ilog(
2
[Ans. D]
f(z) = +
+ z
z
z
log y
i log i
i i
2
x log x
i log
10.
z+
z
F z
2 j r si u o
Residue at z = 0 ( 2- order )
[Ans. C]
z z
2j
z+
z+
where f (z) =1
11.
+
z
log y
z
+
ty
log y
(
2
infinite number of complex solutions
sin z
has infinite no. of complex
solutions
6.
z + 4z +
z+2 +
2 j will be outside the unit circle
o th t int gr tion v lu is z ro
[Ans. A]
iz
[Ans. C]
s z
lim
2j
z + 2j
4+ j
2j[ 4 + j
th
th
th
+ 2j
Page 140
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
Suppose that z
u x y + iv x y is
analytic then, u and v satisfy the Cauchy
Riemann equation
u
v
u
v
n
x
y
y
x
r u xy
os x
u
v
sin x
x
y
u
v
os x
y
x
v
sin x
z +
2 i
2.
+
o / is outside the unit circle is IV
quadrant
3.
[Ans. A]
z
4
z +4
|z i| 2
z +4
z
4
z
2i
For z
2i
Residue at z +2i
4 4
+2i
z + 2i
+4i
t z 2i li insi
tz
2i li outsi
z
4
o
2i sum o r si u
z +4
2i 2i
4
4.
[Ans. B]
Let + i
i
Squaring both sides we get
+2 i
i
Equating real and imaginary parts
[Ans. B]
Pole (z=i) lies inside the circle. |z-i/2|=1.
Hence
z+i z
2 i i , wh r
z
z
2i
[Ans. D]
Let
+ i
Since Z is shown inside the unit circle in I
quadrant, a and B are both +ve and
+
ow
+ i
i
+
Since
Mathematics
wh n
i
2
wh n
+
o
+i
in
qu
r nt
wh n
| |
in
) +(
2
2
i
i
+i ( )
2
2
i
i
i
2
2
2
i
i
i
+i
+ i( )
+
2
2
2 2
i
+( )
2
2
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4
4
th
th
th
Page 141
GATE QUESTION BANK
or
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4
4
5.
[Ans. C]
z
zz
}
n s {z: |z|
z
All point of s will be mapped on the
point (1, 0)
6.
[Ans. B]
z
log z i log
z
r l n Non-negative
7.
[Ans. C]
x x
lim z
IN
1.
2.
int gr tion
2i
z+
2
2
o |z |
king
z |z|
|z|
z
uis o th ir l
y
4
[Ans. C]
z
z
Multiply both the side by z, we get
z
z z
|z|
z
|z|
|z| wh r is ngl o z
|z|
since
is a real quantity so in order to
satisfy above equation
has to be real
quantity = 1 and
, (where n =
+2 )
z
z
r
+
2 x
z
lim
z+
quir
2i r s (f(a)) where a is a
singularity in contour c
|z
|
r
n
pol s o z
z
nly z
li s insi |z
s(
y
x
x
|z|
Mathematics
/2
z
3.
[Ans. C]
X X
-2 -1
Cx y y
(Cx (
-3
[Ans. A]
|
+ i | 2
Radius of the circle is 2 and centre is at
+ i
3
Cx
y(n) n n
y(n)
)y(n))
3s
4
1
2
C3 =
F(s)
C3
.
CC3
(sC 1)(s 2) s 1 s 2
y(n) 3 3
y(n)
dz y(n)
2
+ i
By Formula,
y y
( (
Since, both
n n
contour,
) )
xy
z a 2j
the poles are enclosed by
therefore
Value of integral=2j + 2 2j
For distance to be min. The point P will be
on the line passes through origin and
centre of the circle.
Slope of line OP = Slope of line OC
4.
[Ans. B]
Expand by Laurent series
th
th
th
Page 142
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
[Ans. D]
10.
tx
log
log
2j
11.
2j
[sum o r si
2
o pol
4j
x +
x +
( + +
+
+ ) z
z 2z
z
The only pole of z is at z
, which lies
within |z|
z z 2i (residue)
Note: Residue of z at z
is coefficient
of z i.e. 1, here.
x j
x +
x
j
j
x +
lim {
x +
j
ption
z
j
j 2[ j
[Ans. C]
z
x+j
[Ans. B]
x+j
7.
log (
j
2
j j
2
log
6.
log (
z=
Pole z
j
Residue at z
log x
[Ans. D]
Mathematics
s tis y th
ov
on itions
[Ans. A]
u hys int gr l ormul is
Here a = 0, then f(0) = sin 0 = 0
8.
[Ans. D]
z x + iy
p | |= |
= |
9.
|
|=
|=
[Ans. B]
Given x3 = j = e+j/2
x
os
+ j sin
+j
2
2
th
th
th
Page 143
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
Laplace Transform
ME 2007
1.
If F (s) is the Laplace transform of
function f (t), then Laplace transform of
t
f (t) dt is
0
(A)
F (s)
(C) sF (s) f (0)
(B)
F (s) f (0)
(D)
CE 2009
1.
Laplace transfrm of the function
f(x) = cosh(ax) is
(A)
(C)
ME 2009
2.
The inverse Laplace transform of

is
(A)
(B)
1
s s
2
(B)
(C) 1
(D)
ME 2010
3.
The Laplace transform of a function
. The function
is
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ME 2012
4.
The inverse Laplace transform of the
function F(s)
is given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(D)
ECE - 2005
1.
In what range should Re(s) remain so
that the Laplace transform of the function
exists.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE 2006
2.
A solution for the differential equation
x(t)+2x(t)= (t) with initial condition
x( )=0 is
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
ECE 2008
ME 2013
5.
The function
equation
3.
Consider the matrix P = *
satisfies the differential
value of eP is
and the auxiliary
conditions,
+ . The
(A) *
(B) [
. The
Laplace transform of
is given by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME 2014
6.
Laplace transform of
The Laplace transform of
(C) [
(D) [
is
ECE - 2010
4.
The trigonometric Fourier series for the
waveform f(t) shown below contains
th
th
th
Page 144
GATE QUESTION BANK
Mathematics
ECE 2013
9.
A system is described by the differential
equation
=x(t). Let x(t)
be a rectangular pulse given by

,
Assuming that y(0) = 0 and
(A) Only cosine terms and zero value for
the dc component
(B) Only cosine terms and a positive
value for the dc component
(C) Only cosine terms and a negative
value for the dc component
(D) Only sine terms and a negative value
for the dc component.
5.
the Laplace transform of y(t) is
Given
[
10.
then the value of K is

(A) 1
(C) 3
(B) 2
(D) 4
ECE 2011
6.
If
then the initial
and final values of f(t) are respectively

(A) 0, 2
(C) 0, 2/7
(B) 2, 0
(D) 2/7, 0
The maximum value of the solution y(t) of

the differential equation y(t) +
with initial condition
and
(A) 1
(C)
(B) 2
(D)
ECE 2014
11. The unilateral Laplace transform of
. Which one of the following
is the unilateral Laplace transform of
?
ECE/EE/IN 2012
7.
The unilateral Laplace transform of f(t) is
. The unilateral Laplace transform
8.
of t f(t) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The numerical value of

(A)
(B)
EE 2005
12. For the equation
(t) + 3 (t) + 2x(t) = 5, the solution
x(t) approaches which of the following
values as t
?
(A) 0
(C) 5
(D) 10
(B)
EE 2014
is
13.
(C)
(D)
Let
be
the
transform of signal x(t). Then,

(A) 0
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 21
th
th
th
Laplace
is
Page 145
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
Mathematics
[
Let g: [
be a function
[ ] where [x]
defined by g(x)
represents the integer part of x. (That is,
it is the largest integer which is less than
or equal to x). The value of the constant
term in the Fourier series expansion of
g(x) is_______

ME
1.
5.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
From definition,
We know
2.
Taking Laplace transformation on both

sides
[
]
[ ]
( )
( )
[Ans. C]
1
1
1
1

(s s) s(s 1) s (s 1)
2
3.
( )
)
(
[Ans. A]
[
6.
4.
s and constant
[Ans. B]
It is the standard result that
L (cosh at) =
ECE
1.
[Ans. A]
[
[Ans. D]
{
[Ans. D]
CE
1.
Matching coefficient of
in numerator we get,
}
2.
{
[Ans. A]
(t) + 2x (t) = (t)
Taking Laplace transform of both sides ,
we get
th
th
th
Page 146
GATE QUESTION BANK
sX(s) X(0) + 2X(s) = 1

1
X(s) =
s2
From Inverse Laplace transform gives, we
get
[
]
3.
[Ans. D ]
eP=
[
Mathematics
cosine terms and a negative value of the

dc component.
5.
[Ans. D]
]
[
0 1
and P=
2 3
s 1
Where
=
2 s+3
s 3 1
1
s 1s 2 2 s
s 3
s 1 s 2
=
1
s 2

1
s
s
s 1s 2
6.
[Ans. B]
Using initial value theorem:
eP
2
1
s 1 s 2
2 2
s 1 s 2
1
1
s 1 s 2
2
1
s 2 s 1
=[
]
=2
4.
[Ans. C]
Since f(t) is an even function, its
trigonometric Fourier series contains
only cosine terms
7.
[Ans. D]
+
t
)]
8.
[Ans. D]
Therefore, the trigonometric Fourier

series for the waveform f(t) contains only
Taking Laplace transform on both the

sides. We have,
th
th
th
Page 147
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
By Laplace transform property,

[
]
[
]
12.
9.
[Ans. B]
=5
By taking Laplace transform
[Ans. B]
Writing in terms of Laplace transform
X(s) =
(
)
13.
[Ans. B]
(
(
10.
[Ans. D]
14.
[Ans. 0.5]
For t =
Value of constant term = 0.5

+ sin
th
th
th
Page 148
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Network Solution Methodology

ECE - 2006
1.
A negative resistance R
is connected to
a passive network N having driving point
impedance
(s) as shown below. For
(s) to be positive real,
Rneg
4.
In the interconnection of ideal source

shown in the figure, it is known that the
60V source is absorbing power.
20 V
+
I
60 V
12 A
Z2(s)
Which of the following can be the value of

the current source I?
(A) 10 A
(C) 15A
(B) 13A
(D) 18A
Z1(s)
(j )
(A) |R
Re
(B) |R
| (j )|
(C) |R
(D) |R
ECE - 2010
5.
In the circuit shown, the power supplied
by the voltage source is
(j )
(j )
ECE - 2007
2.
For the circuit shown in the figure, the
Thevenin voltage and resistance looking
into X Y are
1
1
10V
1
i
2i 1
(A) 4/3 V 2
(B) 4V 2/3
(C) 4/3 V 2/3

(D) 4V 2
ECE - 2009
3.
In the circuit shown, what value of RL
maximizes the power delivered to RL?
V
4
4
V
(A) 0 W
(B) 5 W
(C) 10 W
(D) 100 W
ECE - 2011
6.
In the circuit shown below, the value of
R such that the power transferred to R
is maximum is
10
10
10
V
100V
(A) 2.4
(B) 83
5V
(C) 4
(D) 6
2V
(A) 5
(B) 10
th
th
(C) 15
(D) 20
th
Page 149
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
In the circuit shown below, the current I

is equal to
11.
VB =6 V, then VC
R
j4
j4
If VA
Network Theory
VD is
R
14 0 V
R
V
5V
(C) 2.8 0 A
(D) 3.2 0 A
In the circuit shown below, the Norton

equivalent current in amperes with
respect to the terminals P and Q is
25
(A) 6.4 j4.8

(B) 6.56 j7.87
ECE/IN - 2012
9.
The average power delivered to an
impedance (4 j3) by a current
5cos (100t+100) A is
(A) 44.2 W
(C) 62.5 W
(B) 50 W
(D) 125 W
RC
RB
RA
(C) 1/k
(A) k
(B) k
13.
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
10. The impedance looking into nodes 1 and
2 in the given circuit is
i
9k
Rc
Rb
(C) 10 + j0
(D) 16 + j0
99i
1k
(C) 3 V
(D) 6 V
Ra
j50
15
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
12. Consider a delta connection of resistors
and its equivalent star connection as
shown. If all elements of the delta
connection are scaled by a factor k, k>0,
the elements of the corresponding star
equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
j30
16 0
(A) 5 V
(B) 2 V
(A) 1.4 0 A
(B) 2.0 0 A
8.
10V
(D) k
Three capacitors C1, C2 and C3 whose

values are 10F 5F and 2F
+respectively, have breakdown voltages
of 10V, 5V and 2V respectively. For the
interconnection shown below , the
maximum safe voltage in Volts that can be
applied across the combination, and the
corresponding total charge in C stored in
the effective capacitance across the
terminals are respectively,
C2
C3
1
100
2
(A) 50
(B) 100
C1
(C) 5 k
(D) 10.1 k
(A) 2.8 and 36

(B) 7 and 119
th
th
(C) 2.8 and 32

(D) 7 and 80
th
Page 150
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2014
14. For maximum power transfer between
two cascaded sections of an electrical
network, the relationship between the
output impedance of the first section to
the input impedance
of the second
section is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
18.
15.
19.
Consider the configuration shown in the

figure which is a portion of a larger
electrical network
Network Theory
In the figure shown, the value of the

current I (in Amperes) is______.
5
5
5V
10
In the circuit shown in the figure, the

value of node voltage V is
10 0
i
i
V
4
R R
For R 1 and currents i =2 i

1
i
4 which one of the following is
TRUE?
(A) i
5
(B) i
4
(C) Data is sufficient to conclude that the
supposed currents are impossible
(D) Data is insufficient to identify the
currents i i and i
17.
j6
j3
16.
4 0
A Y-network has resistances of 10 each

in two of its arms, while the third arm has
a resistance of 11 . In the equivalent
-network, the lowest value (in .)
among the three resistances is ________
(A) 22 + j 2 V
(B) 2 + j 22 V
20.
(C) 22 j 2 V
(D) 2 j 22 V
The circuit shown in the figure, the

angular frequency (in rad/s) at which
the Norton equivalent impedance as seen
from terminals b-b is purely resistive
is_____________.
1
1F
b
10 cos t
(volts)
0.5
21.
Nortons theorem states that a complex

network connected to a load can be
replaced with an equivalent impedance
(A) in series with a current source
(B) in parallel with a voltage source
(C) in series with a voltage source
(D) in parallel with a current source
For the Y-network shown in the figure,

the value of R (in ) in the equivalent
-network is ____.
R
3
7.5
th
th
th
Page 151
GATE QUESTION BANK
22.
The magnitude of current (in mA)

through the resistor R in the figure
shown is__________
R
1k
R
10 m
2k
23.
2m
4k
3k
The equivalent resistance in the infinite

ladder network shown in the figure, is R .
2R
R
(A) Very low

(B) L/3
(C) 3L
(D) Very high
EE - 2007
2.
A 3V dc supply with an internal resistance
of 2 supplies a passive non-linear
resistance characterized by the relation
VNL = . The power dissipated in the
non-linear resistance is
(A) 1.0 W
(C) 2.5 W
(B) 1.5 W
(D) 3.0 W
EE - 2008
3.
value of the current i will be given by
1
1
The value of R /R is________

24.
Network Theory
5V
a
+ V
1
1
3
1
4V
1
1
The circuit shown in the figure represents a

(A) 0.31 A
(B) 1.25 A
4.
Assuming ideal elements in the circuit

shown below, the voltage Vab will be
2
(A) voltage controlled voltage source

(B) voltage controlled current source
(C) current controlled current source
(D) current controlled voltage source
EE - 2006
1.
The three limbed non ideal core shown in
the figure has three winding with nominal
inductances L each when measured
individually with a signal phase AC
source. The inductance of the winding as
connected will be
R
(C) 1.75 A
(D) 2.5 A
+
1A
Vab
5V
(A) 3 V
(B) 0 V
(C) 3 V
(D) 5 V
EE - 2009
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 5
& 6:
2k
5V
3VAB
A
2k
1k
B
th
th
th
Page 152
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
For the circuit given above,

Thevenins
resistance across
terminals A and B is
(A) 0.5k
(C) 1k
(B) 0.2k
(D) 0.11k
the
the
Network Theory
EE - 2010
10. If the 12 resistor draws a current of 1A
as shown in the figure, the value of
resistance R is
1
6.
7.
8.
For the circuit given above, the

Thevenins voltage across the terminals
and B is
(A) 1.25V
(C) 1V
(B) 0.25V
(D) 0.5V
How many 200W/220V incandescent
lamps connected in series would consume
the same total power as a single
100W/220V incandescent lamp?
(A) not possible
(C) 3
(B) 4
(D) 2
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Is = 5A
4V
(5A; Put Vs=20V)

(2A; Put Vs =8V)
(5A; Put Is = 10A)
(7A; Put Is= 12A)
11.
1k
6V
(A) 0mA
(B) 1mA
(C) 2mA
(D) 6mA
6V
(C) 8
(D) 18
As shown in the figure, a 1 resistance is

connected across a source that has a load
line v + i = 100. The current through the
resistance is
i
Source
(A) 25A
(B) 50A
(C) 100A
(D) 200A
EE - 2011
12. In the circuit given below, the value of R
required for the transfer of maximum
power to the load having a resistance of
3 is
R
10 V
The current through the 2 k resistance

in the circuit shown is
C
1k
1k
2k
1k
12
(A) 4
(B) 6
For the circuit shown, find out the current

flowing through the 2 resistance. Also
identify the changes to be made to double
the current through the 2 resistance.
9.
(A) Zero
(B) 6
oad
(C) 3
(D) Inifnity
EC/EE/IN - 2012
13. Assuming both the voltage sources are in
phase the value of R for which maximum
power is transferred from circuit A to
circuit B is
th
th
th
Page 153
GATE QUESTION BANK

2
16.
j1
10V
Circuit
3V
In the figure, the value of resistor R is

(25 + I/2) ohms, where I is the current in
amperes. The current I is______
Circuit
(A) 0.8
(B) 1.4
Network Theory
300V
(C) 2
(D) 2.8
EC/IN/EE - 2013
14. The following arrangement consists of an
ideal transformer and an attenuator
which attenuates by a factor of 0.8. An ac
voltage V
100V is applied across
WX to get an open circuit voltage V
across YZ. Next , an ac voltage
V = 100V is applied across YZ to get an
open circuit voltage V
across WX.
Then,V /V
V
/V are
respectively.
W
17.
Two identical coupled inductors are

connected in series. The measured
inductances for the two possible series
connections are 380 H and 240 H. Their
mutual inductance in H is_______
18.
The total power dissipated in the circuit,

shown in the figure, is 1 kW.
10
ac source
oad
200V
1:1.25
The voltmeter, across the load, reads 200

V. The value of
is__________
19.
The line A to neutral voltage is 10 15 V

for a balanced three phase star-connected
load with phase sequence ABC. The
voltage of line B with respect to line C is
given by
(A) 103 105 V
(C) 103
75 V
(B) 10 105 V
(D) 103 90 V
20.
The Nortons equivalent source in

amperes as seen into the terminals X and
Y is _______
(A) 125/100 and 80/100

(B) 100/100 and 80/100
(C) 100/100 and 100/100
(D) 80/100 and 80/100
EE - 2014
15. The three circuit elements shown in the
figure are part of an electric circuit. The
total power absorbed by the three circuit
elements in watts is ___________
10
2.5V
2.5
100V
80V
5
15V
5V
th
th
th
Page 154
GATE QUESTION BANK
21.
The power delivered by the current

source, in the figure, is_____________
3.
Which one of the following equations is

valid for the circuit shown below?
1
1
I3
I1
1V
I2
1V
Network Theory
5V
I5
I6
22.
An incandescent lamp is marked 40 W,

240V. If resistance at room temperature
(26C) is 120 , and temperature
coefficient of resistance is 4.5 10 /C,
then its ON state filament temperature in
C is approximately___________
IN - 2006
1.
The root mean square value of a
voltage waveform consisting of a
superimposition of 2V dc and a 4V peak
to peak square wave is
(A) 2 V
(C) 8 V
(B) 6 V
(D) 12 V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4.
1V
5.
1A
(C) 1A
(D) 2A
In the circuit shown below the maximum

power that can be transferred to the load
is
102 sin(1000t)
(C) 2.5W
(D) 3.0W
10
10 m
i(t)
(A) 0W
(B) 1.0W
(A) 0A
(B) 0.5A
3
3
0
0
0
0
The current I supplied by the dc voltage

source in the circuit shown below is
IN - 2008
2.
The power supplied by the dc voltage
source in the circuit shown below is
3V
I4
I7
(A) 250 W
(B) 500 W
th
th
(C) 1000 W
(D) 2000 W
th
Page 155
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2009
6.
The source network S is connected to the
load network L as shown by dashed lines.
RL
+
10 V
3V
Source Network S
Network Theory
IN - 2014
9.
The circuit shown in the figure contains a
dependent current source between A and
terminals. The Thevenins equivalent
resistance in k between the terminals C
and D is ___________.
5k
5k
C
10 V
10 V
Load Network L
The power transferred from S to L would

be maximum when RL is
(A) 0
(C) 0.8
(B) 0.6
(D) 2
IN - 2010
7.
A 100 , 1W resistor and a 800 , 2W
resistor are connected in series. The
maximum dc voltage that can be applied
continuously to the series circuit without
exceeding the power limit of any of the
resistors is
(A) 90V
(C) 45 V
(B) 50 V
(D) 40V
IN - 2011
8.
The current I shown in the circuit given
below is equal to
10
10 V
(A) 3 A
(B) 3.67 A
10
10
10
(C) 6 A
(D) 9 A
th
th
th
Page 156
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory

ECE
1.
4.
[Ans. A]
(s) =
(s)
(S)
R ( (s))
60V
V
x
2i
i
1
For V
Apply nodal analysis,
V
V
2i
2 V
0 V
i
2
1
V
V
2 2V
2i 0
2
2
2
V
V
4V
Similarly,
2
V
V
4V R
2
3.
[Ans. C]
For maximum power transfer, R
V
4
5.
12 A
[Ans. A]
3
1
1
1
(
3)
3
10V
2)
2
(
2)
1
Fig .1
The current through all the branches are

marked as shown in Fig. 1.
Apply KVL to outer loop
2(
3) 2(
2) 10
4
10 10
0
Power supplied by 10 V 10 0 0
V
100V
100V
100 (100 V )
8
4
Also V
50V
12.5 12.5 25
V
R
4 R
12 A
In the given circuit, the current through

the branch of 60 V source is (12 I) as
shown in Fig. The source of 60 V absorbs
power, only if
P =(12 I)60 is +ve. i.e., I<12.
The value of the current source, I can only
be 10A given in option (a), as the currents
given in other options are more than 12 A.
[Ans. D]
1
(12 I)A
0
|R
20 V
12 A
(R
m( (s)) R
For (s)to be +ve & real,
Re ( (s))
R
|Re( (s))|
2.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. C]
10
10
10
15
4
Fig. 2
For Maximum power transfer to RL

th
th
th
Page 157
GATE QUESTION BANK
R
R
R
Thevenins resistance seen across
the terminals of R into the rest of the
network. The relevant circuit is shown in
Fig.2, where the independent current
source is open circuited and the voltage
sources are short circuited.
R
10 (10 10)
R
R
15
7.
Network Theory
8.
[Ans. A]
The Norton equivalent current is
25
16 0
(40 30)
3
8
tan ( ) 8
36.86
4
(6.4 j4.8)
9.
[Ans. B]
The load consists of a resistance and a
capacitance of this, only R is passive and
consumes power
So P
=
R
[Ans. B]
To find the current I in the given circuit in
Fig. (1), the delta network with 6 each is
converted to a star as shown in Fig. (2)
=( )
14 0 V
*Note rms value of
j4
j4
10.
50
cos t
+.
[Ans. A]
i
6
Fig. 1
99i
1k
6
2
9k
100
6
6
2
99i )
Fig. 2
Then the given circuit reduces to Fig. (3),

(4) and (5)
(2 j4)||(2 j4) 5 and
Where
14 0
2 0
7
14 0
2
2
2
Fig. 3
5
14 0
14 0
100
99i
After connecting a voltage source of V

V
V
(10k)( i ) 100(
99i
i )
10000i
100(
100 i )
100
10000i
20000i
100
100
i
(
)
[
]
20000
200
V 100
99i
i
j4
j4
10k
100 [
50
V
100 (
50
200
)]
50
Fig. 4
th
th
th
Page 158
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
[Ans. A]
R
14.
[Ans. C]
For maximum power transfer
Load impedance = complex conjugate of
source impedance
15.
[Ans. A]
R
R
Network Theory
10V
1
R
V
5V
From the given circuit,V

V
V
V
3
2
KC at gives
V
V
2 3 0V
V
1
12.
13.
[Ans. B]
Consider R
k R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
k
k R
k
3k
6V
R R
5F
5V
(Safe voltage)
V
C
5V
10V
k.
2F
(Safe voltage)
(Safe voltage)
For safe warping voltage across

should
not increased from 2V
C V
V
C
C
V Total safe voltage across C and C
5V
2
5 2
5V
2
7
14
[V
2.8V]
5
C
C
(C C )
80
C
10F (5 2)
F
7
80
Total charge C . V
2.8 32C
7
2
4
1
KC at node
i
i
i
KCL at node B
i
i
i
KCL at node C
i
i
i
Put the value of i and i in equation
2 ( 1) i
i
1
Put i and i in equation
1 ( 4) i
i
3
Put the value of i and i in equation
3 i
2
i
5
2V
10F
[Ans. C]
C
i
i
i
16.
[Ans. *] Range 29.08 to 29.10

R
10
10
11
R
29.09
R
32
32
So lowest value is 29.09

th
th
th
Page 159
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
[Ans. D]
Nortons theorem: Here for a complex
network, after isolating the element, we
short circuit the two ends and find the
current
.
is the current of the
independent current source with the
equivalent resistance in parallel
10 0 V
V1
4 0
20.
10
5V
3j

The Nortons equivalent circuit is
1
1F
Voltage
source
shorted
5
0.25 mp
20
For current
5
In
0.5
doiman
1
j
j
(1||0.5j )
1
5
20
0.5j
1 0.5j
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j
1 0.25
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j(1 0.25 )
(1 0.25 )
Equating the imaginary part to zero, we
get
0.5
1 0.25
0
0.25
1
2rad/sec
10
0.25 mp
(0.25 0.25)
0.50 mp
19.
6j
Applying KCL to the super node we have

V
V
V
4 0
0
.
3j 6 6j
From super node we get
V
V
10 0
.
Solving
and
for V we get
V
2 22j V
[Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51

Apply superposition theorem
For voltage
5
V2
4
18.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
Using super node concept, we can treat
nodes 1 and 2 to gather as a super node
as shown in the figure by the dotted lines
th
th
th
Page 160
GATE QUESTION BANK
21.
R
R
R
24.
Network Theory
2.618
[Ans. C ]
7.5
22.
In the above circuit in the output side

there is a dependent current source
which is controlled by the input current
and hence it is a current control current
source.
7.5 3 7.5
7.5
7.5 2 5 3
10
7.5
EE
1.
[Ans. *] Range 2.79 to 2.81

By source transformation theorem
2k
1k
4k
20V
[Ans. A]
The inductance of all three coils are
and they are connected to same line
carrying the same current and set up the
flux in the same direction
8V
2 2
by KV 20
28
10k
23.
10k
3k
8 0
2.8 m
All these fluxes linked with each other
and they will balance each other. So net
flux will reduce drastically. Thus net L
will be very low
[Ans. *] Range 2.60 to 2.64

We know that in a infinite ladder network
if all resistance are comprises of same
value R then the equivalent resistance is
(
. Then the above given network
2.
[Ans. A]
can be redrawn as R series with R

equivalent as follows
R
R
R
1.618R
(1
2
3V
5)R
2
+
I
3 2
1
Power delivered by source = 31=3W.
2.618R
th
th
th
Page 161
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power dissipated by 2 resistor

2 2 .
Power dissipated in non-linear element
= 3-2=1W
6.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
2k
3V
1k
[Ans. B]
5 1
V
2
Also, 4 V
Also, V
V
2.5V
4i
V
2
To calculate thevenins voltage terminals

A-B are kept open.
Applying source transformation into
correct source
4i . (1)
1.25 V
4i (From (1))
3V
3V
2k
2k
2k
1k
Applying source transformation current

source is transformed into voltage source.
[Ans. B]
Thevenins resistance is calculated using
the circuit shown in fig. (1) and (2),
where independent voltage source is
short circuited
1k
3V
5
V
2
1k
I
A
2k
Applying KVL, {I is assumed to be in mA}

5
1k
3V
1k
0
2
5
2k
3V
0
(1)
2
V
(2)
1k
Put the value of in quation (1)
5
2V
3V
0
2
V
0.5V
1k
B
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
3 V
10 )
I
V
10
1k
1k
5.
[Ans. A]
V
2i
V)
4(V
4V
4(2.5 1.25)
i 1.25
4.
2k
5V
3.
Fig. 2
7.
[Ans. D]
For a lamp, P KV
For 200 220V lamp, K 200
220
Consider n lamps connected in series,
Total power consumed n K 110
Write the loop equation :

(
V
3V
V
10 )10
10
V
5V
10
V
10
R
0.2k
5
100
th
th
110
th
100
n 2
Page 162
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
[Ans. B]
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
As the voltage across 2 4V
4
2
2
In order to double the current through 2
resistance, V is to be doubled (Put
V
8V) ]
Note that the 5 A source has no effect on
the answer. However it gives 3A current
through the voltage source as shown in
fig.
4V
R
6R
6 R
6
3
R
13.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
2
j1
10V
Circuit
[Ans. A]
As the ABCD bridge is balanced,
[Ans. B]
Current through R =1A
By KVL, 1.R +6=12
R=6
[Ans. B]
V i 100 and V i .1(by ohms law)
2i 100 i 50
[Ans. B]
To calculated
circuited
R
5V
10
2.5
4
So in our circuit
10V
12.
Circuit
2
10V
11.
3V
5V
Fig.
10.
For maximum power transfer

Source impedance = Load impedance
z R
9.
2.5
5V
3V
pply KV in loop
5 2.5R 3 0
2
[R
0.8]
2.5
voltage source is short

14.
[Ans. B]
W
1:1.25
100 V
125 V
Y
V
R
X
V
6R
R
6||R
6 R
According to maximum power transfer
theorem
100
V
0.8
when V
th
th
turns ratio
125
V
100V
100V
th
Page 163
GATE QUESTION BANK

2
18.
[Ans. *] Range 17.3 to 17.4

(10)
200
Thevenins circuit seen by 2 2 will be

as follow
V
100V
nd R
0.2||0.8 negligible
V
100V
V
V
turns ratio
100V 1
1.25
80V
R
(2) (1)
Power dissipated
4 10R
1000
996
R
10
400
R
400 99.6
17.33
100V
0.8
Network Theory
19.
10
[Ans. C]
C
120
120
15.
16.
[Ans. 330]
Power absorbed by battery 100V = 100
10 1000
Power supplied by battery
80V 80 8 640
Current through 15V battery
10 8
2
Power supplied by battery
15V 15 2 30
Total power absorbed
1000 640 30
330 att
120
lags voltage A by 90
V
90
3 10
Angle 90 with respect to A
Hence
V
20.
3 10 ( 90
103
75
[Ans. 2]
2.5V
[Ans. 10]
300
(25
600
(50
10
15)
2.5
2
)
)
i
5
5
5V
17.
[Ans. 35]
Total flux linkage =
total
Terminal x y shorted
Applying superposition
i due to 5V
(5)
5
(5
) 7.5
380m
240m
4
140m
35
5
20
7.5
i due to 2.5V
th
th
5
10
th
0.5
Page 164
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.5
1
0.5
(2.5 2.5) 2
Total i 0.5 0.5 1 (NOTE: Option
not matching with IIT website)
21.
2.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
The given circuit in Fig. 1 is simplified as
shown in Fig. 2 and Fig.3
[Ans. 3]
V1=3
V
1V
V1
Fig.1
1
1V
3.
Power delivered by current source
Applying nodal at V
(
)
( )
[Ans. D]
The circuit is shown in Fig. marking the
nodes: P,Q,R and S
Apply KCL at nodes,
3
3
v
2
Power delivered
2v
22.
I1
I2
[Ans. *] Range 2470 to 2471
I5
I3
I6
I4
I7
At node, P
. (1)
At nodeQ ,
. . (2)
At nodeR ,
. (3)
At nodeS ,
. (4)
From (3) and (4)
0
4.
[Ans. A]
I
P
I1
[Ans. C]
For d.c voltage of 2 V, M.S.V = 4
For square wave voltage with peak to
peak value of 4 V or amplitude = 2V,
M.S.V = 4 + 4 = 8
R. . S. V
5V
40
R
(240)
R
40
R R (1
T)
R is resistance of room temperature
(240)
120(1 4.5 10
T)
40
11 4.5 10
T
11 1000
T T
4.5
11 1000
T 26
2470.44
4.5
IN
1.
Fig.3
Fig.2
2
O
( )
V1
From Fig.3, I = 1 A, power supplied by 3 V

d.c source = P = V1 I = 3 1 3 W
1V
1A
The circuit is shown in Fig.

Voltage across 1 =1V
1 = 1A
Apply KCL at node, P
8 V
th
th
th
Page 165
GATE QUESTION BANK
I+1= I1,
or I+1=1 ,
0
5.
I
+
Source Network S
10
3V +
Load Network L
7
2 R
Power supplied by the 10V source,
10 m
P
Power dissipated in 2 resistance,
98
P
2
(2 R )
Power transferred to the network,
102 Sin (1000 t)

10 /
Phasor of i(t)
R j
102
10 j10
10 10
10 j 10
The Thevenin equivalent circuit is shown
in Fig. 2
P (R )
P would be maximum, if
70
2
98
0
(2 R )
(2 R )
196
196 98
70 2 R
2 R
70
35
98
28
R
2
0.8
35
35
V
7.
[Ans. C]
Resistor 1 : 100 1
Resistor 2 : 800 , 2 W
Maximum current that
withstand
Fig. 2
10 j 10
V
102
102(10 j 10)
200 e
For maximum power transfer to load,
10 j 10 R
10
10 e
20
i (t) 10 sin(
45 )
10
(rms)
10
2
Power transferred to load,
100
(rms) R
P
10 500
2
6.
+
10 V
10
i(t)
RL
[Ans. B]
The circuit is shown in Fig. 1
i(t)
Network Theory
1
100
resistor can
1
10
Similarly,
2
800
1
20
If these two resistors are connected in

series.
100
800
[Ans. C]
Then maximum value of

th
th
th
Page 166
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
(100 800)
1
(900) 45Volts
20
9.
[Ans. 20]
5k
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is Fig. 1
Convert the (10 V, 10 ) voltage source
across A, B to the left into a current
source, (1 A, 10 ). The resultant circuit is
shown in Fig. 2
5k
10 V
10 V
For R calculation
Independent
voltage source should be short circuited
So
10
10 V
10
10
10
5k
Fig. 1
Network Theory
10
10
5K
10
10 V
1V( ssume)
so V
1
10
R
So *R
Fig. 2
Apply KCL at Node A

10 V
1 V
V
10
5k
5K
1 V
.5 V
2V
1.5
V
0.75V
1 V
1 0.75
So
5k
5k
0.25
5k
5 10
0.05m
1
[R
20k]
0.05m
The circuit is further simplified as shown

in Fig. 3 and 4
1
10
10
Fig. 3
10
Fig. 4
5
15
th
th
th
Page 167
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Transient/Steady State Analysis of RLC Circuits to DC Input

Q
ECE - 2006
1.
In the figure shown, assume that all the
capacitors are initially uncharged.
If Vi(t) =10u(t) Volts, then V0(t) is given
by
Q2 P2
+
S2
(t)
F
1K
+
+
Vi(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4 F
4K
1F
Assume that the capacitor has zero initial

charge. Given that u(t) is a unit step
(t) across the
function, the voltage
capacitor is given by
(A) ( ) tu(t nT)
(B) u(t) + 2 ( ) u(t nT)
(C) tu(t) + 2 ( ) (t nT)
u(t nT)
)
)
(D)
0
e (
+0 e (
]
Vo(t)
8e
Volts
8(
e
) Volts
8 u(t) Volts
8 Volts
ECE - 2007
2.
In the circuit shown, Vc is 0 volts at t = 0
sec. For t>0, the capacitor current iC (t),
where t is in seconds, is given by
20k
Common Data for Questions 4 and 5:

The following series RLC circuit with zero
initial condition is excited by a unit
impulse function (t)
1H
20k
10V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
0.50 exp (
0.25 exp (
0.50 exp (
0.25 exp (
+
4 F
-
VC
25t)mA
25t)mA
12.5 t)mA
6.25 t)mA
ECE - 2008
3.
The circuit shown in the figure is used to
charge the capacitor C alternately from
two current sources as indicated. The
switches S1 and S2 are mechanically
coupled and connected as follows
For 2nT t< (2n+ )T,
(n = 0, , 2) S to P and S2 to P2
For (2n+ )T t< (2n+2)T,
(n = 0, , 2) S to Q and S2 to Q2
(t)
4.
+
1F
For t > 0, the output voltage

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5.
(e
VC(t)
(t) is
te
e
e
cos (
t)
t)
sin (
For t > 0, the voltage across the resistor

is
(A)
(e
(B) e
(C)
(D)
th
th
*cos (
)
)
sin (
cos (
th
sin (
)+
Page 168
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
Network Theory
0
In the following circuit, the switch S is

closed at t=0. The rate of change of
current
1.5A
(0 ) is given by
15mH
i(t)
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Rs
ECE - 2009
7.
The time domain behavior of an RL circuit
is represented by
L + Ri =
t=0
0
IS
S
i(t)
( + e
i(t) = 0
i(t) =
i(t) = 0
i(t) = 0
ECE - 2011
10. In the circuit shown below, the initial
charge on the capacitor is 2.5 mC, with
the voltage polarity as indicated. The
switch is closed at time t = 0. The current
i(t) at a time t after the switch is closed is
i(t)
sint) u(t)
For an initial current of i(0) =
0 2 e
0 2 e
0 e
e
, the
steady state value of the current is given

by
00
0 F
(A) i(t)
(B) i(t)
8.
(C) i(t)
(1+B)
(D) i(t)
(1+B)
The switch in the circuit shown was on

position a for a long time and is moved
to position b at time t = 0. The current
i(t) for t > 0 is given by
0 k a
b
i(t)
100 V
0.2 F
0.2e
20e
0.2e
20e
i(t) =
exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) = exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) = 0 exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) =
exp( 2
0 t)
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
11. In the following figure, C1 and C2 are ideal
capacitors.
has been charged to 12 V
before the ideal switch S is closed at t = 0.
The current i(t) for all t is.
S
t=0
0.3 F
0.5 F
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
u(t)m
u(t)m
u(t)m
u(t)m
i(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2010
9.
In the circuit shown, the switch S is open
for a long time and is closed at t = 0. The
current i(t) for t 0 is
th
Zero
a step function
an exponentially decaying function
an impulse function
th
th
Page 169
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
ECE - 2013
Common Data for Questions 12 and 13:
Consider the following figure
R
k
+
1
10V
13.
), =
), =
( ) (t) = (
), =
msec
( ) (t) = (
2
), =
msec
( ) (t) =
The current Is in Amps in the voltage

source, and voltage Vs is Volts across the
current source respectively , are
(A)
, 20
(C)
, 20
(B) ,
0
(D)
, 20
The current in the 1 resistor in Amps is
(A) 2
(C) 10
(B) 3.33
(D) 12
17.
ECE - 2014
14. In the figure shown, the ideal switch has
been open for a long time. If it is closed at
t = 0, then the magnitude of the current
(in m ) through the 4 k resistor at
t = 0 is _______.
k
4k
( ) (t) =
2A
12.
2k
Is
Vs
msec
msec
A series RC circuit is connected to a DC

voltage source at time t = 0. The relation
between the source voltage
, the
resistance R, the capacitance C, and the
current i(t) is given below:
= R i(t) + i(u)du
Which one of the following represents the
current i(t)?
( )
()
0
15.
16.
+
0 F
mH
A series LCR circuit is operated at a

frequency different from its resonant
frequency. The operating frequency is
such that the current leads the supply
voltage. The magnitude of current is half
the value at resonance. If the values of L, C
and R are H, F and
, respectively,
the operating angular frequency (in
rad/s) is ________.
( )
i(t)
In the figure shown, the capacitor is

initially uncharged. Which one of the
following expressions describes the
current I(t) (in mA) for t >0?
th
th
th
Page 170
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
( )
R
R
L1
i(t)
+
I
(A) 1,4
(B) 5,1
(C) 5,2
(D) 5,4
( )
2.
An ideal capacitor is charged to a voltage

Vo and connected at t = 0 across an ideal
inductor L. (The circuit now consists of a
capacitor and inductor alone). If we let
i(t)
18.

(t) (in volts )for t
value of
is
________
i
0u(t)
2H
2i
, the voltage across the capacitor
at time t > 0 is given by

(A) Vo
(B) Vocos ( t)
(C) Vosin ( t)
(D) Voe
cos ( t)
+
(t)
EE - 2007
3.
In the circuit shown in figure switch
is initially CLOSED and Sw is OPEN. The
inductor L carries a current of 10 A and
the capacitor is charged to 10 V with
polarities as indicated. Sw is initially
caps at t = 0 and Sw is OPENED at t = 0.
The current through C and the voltage
across L at t = 0 + is
SW2
R2 0
EE - 2006
1.
current source I = 1A, voltage source
V = 5V, R = R = R = 1,
= =
= 1H, = = 1F.
The currents (in A) through R3 and the
voltage source V respectively will be
R1= 0
SW1
L 10A
(A) 55 A, 4.5 V
(B) 5.5 A, 45 V
4.
+
_10V
(C) 45 A, 5.5 V
(D) 4.5 A, 55 V
The state equation for the current I1

shown in the network shown below in
terms of the voltage Vx and the
th
th
th
Page 171
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
independent source V, is given by

0 2H
1F
+
1F
0 H
1F
3A
02
s
4 s
(A)
(B)
(A)
= 1.4 Vx 3.75I1 + V
(B)
= +1.4 Vx 3.75I1
(C)
= 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 + V
(D)
= 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1
EE - 2008
and 6
The current i(t) sketched in the figure
flows through an initially uncharged
0.3 nF capacitor.
(C) 4 s
(D) 9s
EE - 2009
8.
In the figure shown, all elements used are
ideal. For time t<0, S remained closed
and S open. At t = 0, S is opened and S
is closed. If the voltage Vc2 across the
capacitor
at t = 0 is zero, the
voltage
across
the
capacitor
combination at t=0+ will be
S1
S2
3V
C1
1F
C2
2F
6
i(t) mA5
4
3
2
1
(A) 1V
(B) 2 V
0 1
9
5.
5 6
t ( s)
7 8
The charge stored in the capacitor at

t = 5 s, will be
(A) 8nC
(C) 13nC
(B) 10nC
(D) 16nC
(C) 1.5 V
(D) 3 V
EE - 2010
Linked Answer Questions 9 and 10
The L-C circuit shown in the figure has an
inductance L = 1mH and a capacitance
C = 10F.
L
i
6.
7.
The capacitor charged upto 5 ms, as per

the current profile given in the figure, is
connected across an inductor of 0.6 mH.
Then the value of voltage across the
capacitor after 1s will approximately be
(A) 18.8 V
(C) 23.5 V
(B) 23.5 V
(D) 30.6 V
t=0
9.
100 V
100+V
The initial current through the inductor is

zero, while the initial capacitor voltage is
100 V. The switch is closed at t = 0. The
current i through the circuit is:
(A) 5 cos(
0 t) A
(B) 5 sin( 0 t) A
(C) 10cos(
0 t) A
(D) 10 sin( 0 t) A
The time constant for the given circuit

will be
th
th
th
Page 172
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
The L C circuit of Q.9 is used to

commutate a thyristor. Which is initially
carrying a current of 5 A as shown in the
figure below. The values and initial
conditions of L and C are the same as in
Q.9. The switch is closed at t=0. If the
forward drop is negligible, the time taken
for the device to turn off is
EE/IN - 2012
Statement for Linked answer question 14
and 15:
In the circuit shown, the three voltmeter
reading = 220V, = 122 V, =136 V
R
R
L
I
C
t=0
100V
(A)
(B)
11.
The switch in the circuit has been closed

for a long time. It is opened at t = 0.
At t = 0 , the current through the 1F
capacitor is
t =0
1F
(A) 0A
(B) 1A
14.
The power factor of the load is

(A) 0.45
(C) 0.55
(B) 0.50
(D) 0.60
15.
If RL = 5, the approximate power

consumption in the load is
(A) 700W
(C) 800W
(B) 750W
(D) 850W
20
(C)
2 s
(D) 26 s
5V
oad
100V
5A
2 s
6 s
Network Theory
(C) 1.25A
(D) 5A
EE - 2014
16. The switch SW shown in the circuit is
kept at position for a long duration t
t = 0 the switch is moved to position 2
Assuming
, the voltage (t)
across the capacitor is
R
EE - 2011
Common Data For Q.No 12 & Q.No 13
An RLC circuit with relevant data is given
below
=
= 2
= 2
12.
13.
4
4
The power dissipated in the resistor R is

(A) 0.5 W
(C) 2
(B) 1 W
(D) 2
The current
(A)
2
(B)
17.
in the figure above is

(C) +
(D) +j2A
th
(A)
(t) =
(B)
(t) =
)+
(C)
(t) =
(D)
(t) =
)(
)(
)+
The voltage across the capacitor, as

shown in the figure, is expressed as
(t) =
)
sin( t
)
+
sin ( t
The values of
and
respectively, are
th
th
Page 173
GATE QUESTION BANK

H
20 sin 0t
(A) 2.0 and 1.98

(B) 2.0 and 4.20
(B) P = 0 and Q = 3/
(t)
Network Theory
(C) P = 5 and Q = 6/
(D) P = 5 and Q = 3
0 sin t
(C) 2.5 and 3.50

(D) 5.0 and 6.40
IN - 2006
1.
In the circuit shown in the following
figure, the input voltage vi(t) is constant
at 2V for time t
s and then it changes
to 1 V. The output voltage, v0(t), 2 s after
the change will be
IN - 2008
Statement for Linked Answer Question 3
and 4:
In the circuit shown below the steadystate is reached with the switch K open
subsequently the switch is closed at time
t=0.
t=0
Vi(t)
+
+
3.
1
t
At time t=0 , current I is

(A) ( )
(C)
(B) 0A
(D)
1F
Vi(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4.
At time t =0 , is
(A)
(B)
Vo(t)
5A / s
( 0 )
is
(C) 0A / s
(D) 5A / s
IN - 2010
5.
In the dc circuit shown in the adjoining
figure, the node voltage V2 at steady state
is
exp ( 2) V
1 + exp ( 2) V
exp ( 2) V
1 exp ( 2) V
2k
IN - 2007
2.
input signal is ( ) = + cos
+
(t)
The steady state output is expressed as

(t) = P + Q cos( t
). If
R = 2,
the values of P and Q are
20 F
(A) 0V
(B) 1V
(t)
Fig.
0 F
(C) 2V
(D) 3V
IN - 2011
6.
In the circuit shown below, the switch,
initially at position 1 for a long time, is
changed to position 2 at t = 0.
(A) P = 0 and Q = 6/
th
th
th
Page 174
GATE QUESTION BANK
1H
4A
10.
2 t=0
10V
The current i through the inductor for

t 0 is
(A)
e
(C) + 2e
(B) + e
(D) 2 e
Network Theory
In the circuit shown in the figure, initially

the capacitor is uncharged. The switch S
is closed at = 0. Two milliseconds after
the switch is closed, the current through
the capacitor (in mA) is _____________
S
2k
i (t)
t =0
4 F
2k
IN - 2012
7.
In the circuit shown below, the current
through the inductor is
11.
j
0
0
~+
+ ~
0
j
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 0 A
IN - 2014
8.
The circuit shown in figure was at steady
state for t < 0 with the switch at position
The switch is thrown to position at
time = 0, . The voltage V (volts) across
the 0 resistor at time
t = 0 is _________________
2
t=0
analog
interface
P
Sense harge
control
If T = kT
12.
+
0
In
the
microprocessor
controlled
measurement scheme shown in the
figure, R is the unknown resistance to be
measured, while R and
known.
is charged from voltage
to
(by
a constant DC voltage source ), once
through R in T
seconds and then
discharged to . It is again charged from
voltage to
through R in T seconds.
Sense
ischarge
then
(A) R = kR
(B) R = kR
ln ( )
(C) R = kR
(D) R = R
capacitor is to be connected across

the terminals and as shown in the
figure so that the power factor of the
parallel combination becomes unity. The
value of the capacitance required in F
is___________.
9.
The average real power in watts delivered

to a load impedance
= (4 j2) by an
ideal current source
i (t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 ) is ______________
th
60
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
th
th
Page 175
lnk
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory

ECE
1.
Vc(t)
[Ans. D]
The transform circuit is shown below
(s)
+
(s)
( )
For the given circuit

Where
( )
(S) =
( )
( )
Where, R = 4
(S) =
In mathematical form,
(t) = tu(t) 2(t T)u(t 2T) +
2(t 2T)u(t 2T)
( )
( )
v (S) =
2.
4.
( )
( )
(t) = (t)
(S) =
(S + 2) + ( )
(t) =
(S) , v (t) = 0 v (t)

0, v (t) =
=(
(S) =
5.
Sin (
[Ans. B]
(S) = R (S) =
(t) = e
6.
( S
(S)
=S
=0 m
( )=0
Time constant of the circuit = R
= 4 F 20 k 20
= 40 ms
Using direct formula
(t) = ( )
( )
(0)]e
(t) = 0 (0 0 )e
(t) = 0 e
m
3.
nT)
[Ans. D]
[Ans. A]
At t = 0 Capacitor is short circuit and at t
=
apacitor is open circuit
So (0 ) =
nT)u(t
for v (t) = 0 for t
) (t
= tu(t) + 2 (
Where, R =
,
=4 F
R
=R
= 0
4
0 sec
=4
0 sec
For t 0u(t) = s = 0 (for dc signal)
( )
-1
(s)
(s)
2
T
t)
(s))
(S) =
S
(S + S + )
)
( )
os (
t)
[Ans. B]
In the circuit shown,
R
=0
=
R
(R + R )
Sin (
= (R + R )
T = R
[Ans. C]
The waveform of voltage Vc(t) is shown
below.
= (R + R )
R
(R + R )
= =
=
T
(R + R )
di
|
dt
th
th
th
Page 176
t)
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
Network Theory
0
[Ans. A]
Take L.T of given differential equation
with i(0)=
and use the L.T pairs:

1.5 A
sin(t) u(t)
e
+ Ri =
( + e
(0 ) =
t t = , the status of the circuit is shown
in Fig. 3
sin t) u(t)
Take Laplace on both side

[s (s)
,
(s + ) +
i(0 )
s +
sin(t) u(t)
()
i (0 )
] + R (s) =
r ( s + R) (s) = +
0.5 A
+
(s + ) +
+
+
(
0.5 A
0.5 A
1.5 A
i ( )
S
0
i( )
0
(s) = [
]
(
i( ) = 0
The given circuit is a first order circuit
According to final value theorem,

Steady state value of
i(t) = i(t) =
8.
s (s)] =
R= 0+( 0
=
mH =
[Ans. B]
hen S is in position a, (0 ) = 00
fter S is moved to b, (for t 0)
= 00
=0 R=
0
02
=
=0 6 F
(t) = 00 e
(t)
i(t) =
= 20e
9.
with time constant, =
0.75 A
i(t) =
=0
10.
1.5 A
0
0
15mH
i (0 ) = 0
, i(0 ) = 0
S is closed for 0 t <
At t = 0 , i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
The status of the circuit is shown in Fig. 2
)(
+(
)(
2
0 2 e
[Ans. A]
Q(0 ) =
e ),t
e
,t
11.
th
)
0
2 m
(
For t 0, =
0
= 00
= R
= 0 m sec
(t) = ( 00
)u(t)
0e
d
i (t) =
dt
= 0
0
0 2000 e
= e
u(t)
i (0 )
i(0 )
+ (F
(0 ) =
0.75 A
S
= 0 sec, = 0 sec
i(t) =
[Ans. A]
S is open for
< 0
At t = 0 the status of the circuit is shown
in Fig. 1
0.75 A
General formula:
= 00e
u(t)m
0) = 0 +
0 H
u(t)
[Ans. D]
When the switch in closed at t = 0
Capacitor C1 will discharge and C2 will get
charge since both C1 and C2 are ideal and
there is no-resistance in the circuit
th
th
Page 177
GATE QUESTION BANK
charging and discharging time constant

will be zero.
Thus current will exist like an impulse
function.
15.
Network Theory
[Ans. *] Range 0.45 to 0.47

A series LCR circuit operating frequency
is such that current leads the supply
voltage so
The current at resonance =
12.
[Ans. D]
R=
= H
= amp
= F
The magnitude of current is
the value at
resonance
0
+
10V
+
v
= 0
=0
0+2=
as
=0
+ +4
=
2
= 0 4 rad/sec
(omitting the negative value)
= 0

k
4k
16.
0
urrent after long time =
= m
0k
At t = 0 the voltage across the capacitor
is 10
Where,
=
= 0
=
Now at t= 0
i
i(t)
i
F
2k
= 2000i(t)
dv
di
i =c
= 0 002
dt
dt
di
i
= [0 002 + i(t)] amp
dt
di
= 2 + 000i(t)
dt
+ =
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt
s
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt
s
000
2 [s (s) +
(s)] =
2
s
4k
The current is m =
4
[Ans. A]
mH
0 F
+(
) =
13A
[Ans. C]
x )
2=
R + (x
2= +(
current through
14.
Across AB voltage drop is 10V

= 13A, = 20V
=
13.
0
2 =
2A
20
2 m
th
th
th
Page 178
GATE QUESTION BANK
000
]=
2
s
2 (s) [s +
(s) =
2s(s +
= [
2 s
=
600 s
= [
i(t) =
17.
By Nodal analysis at node A

0+
00
s+
s+
e
+i =0
0+
00)
s+
Network Theory
00
= 0
00
00
i =
(t) = i =
] amp
EE
1.
]m
= *
+ where is in m sec
= [
], =
[Ans. D]
At steady state, inductor acts as short
circuit & capacitor acts open circuit
2
+i =0
msec
_+ 5V
[Ans. A]
= Ri(t) + i(u)du
=R +
=
S
=
Current through R = 5/1 =5A

Current delivered by 5V source = 5 1
= 4A
aplace transform ]
2.
is a D.C voltage source,

so
where
depends on
S k
=
=
s(RS + ) R (s +
i(t) =
[Ans. B]
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
+
(t)
k
e
R
Fig.
()
It is a standard LC circuit.
With v (t) = cos( t)
or
sin( t + 0 )
3.
18.
[Ans. D]
Equivalent circuit at t = 0 is,
[Ans. *] Range 31.24 to 31.26
i
+
0u(t)
2H
2i
I
0
10A
10V
(t)
By nodal analysis,
0+
Since we have to evaluate (t) in steady
state the inductor will behave as a short
circuit and hence
= i
th
th
=0
=
th
2
(
0 = 00
)
= 4
Page 179
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. A]
8.
V-3( +
[Ans. A]
The status of the circuit at t = 0
shown in fig. 1.
= 0 (1)
= 0.2
+02
Network Theory
= 0 (2)
+
3V
Eliminating I2 for eq(1) and (2) we get

=
5.
3V
Fig. 1
The status of the circuit at t = 0
shown in Fig. 2.
S
S
A
2
A1
Charged stored in the capacitor = area

under i t curve
Q=
+
= (2
2
0 )
(4
0
0
= [4 +
6
2
0 ) + (4 + 2)
2
(
2)
=
=
9.
(0 )
00
=
s
s
1/s
C
I(s
)
(s) =
cos
06
7.
sL
(s +
00
(
s +
[Ans. C]
= F;R
= 6
T=R
Fig. 2
[Ans. D]
Initial current through the inductor is
zero and capacitor voltage is charged
upto to voltage
(0 ) = 00
As current through inductor and voltage
across cannot change abrupty.
So, after closing the switch
i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
And (0 ) = (0 ) = 00
The circuit is s domain
[Ans. D]
apacitor charged upto
s, so total
charge stored in capacitor = Q = 13nC
Voltage across the capacitor before
connecting to indictor
Q
0
= =
=4
0
0
Voltage across the capacitor at time t
(t)at t =
s
(t)
=
cos t]
= 2.357 rad =
(t)
=4
is
+
V
+
3V
3V
A2
2 s
t=
2F
1F
B
[Ans. C]
i(t)
mA
4
6.
is
= 00 (
= 4sec
s + (
th
th
th
)
)
Page 180
GATE QUESTION BANK
Taking inverse Laplace transform

(s)]
i(t) =
= 2
13.
= 00 sin
=
00
sin (
t)
i(t) = 10sin (104t)A

10.
14.
[Ans. A]
i
iT
Network Theory
VC(t)
[Ans. D]
Using KCL,
+
+
=
= 2
=0
2
=2 0
=+ 2
[Ans. A]
Pharor diagram
= 220
= 122 V
= 136V
= +
20
100V
5A
When the switch is closed, I flows through

thyristor.
Load current = =
Net current through thyrostor
i =
i
i =
sin 0
Let at t=T, circuit get turned off and
current i becomes zero
i =
0 sin 0 T = 0
0 sin T =
sin 0 T = 0
0 T = 0 or 0 2 rad
T
2 s
11.
[Ans. B]
(0 ) = 4
i (0 ) =
12.
(0 ) = 4
)
By parallelogram law of addition of

vectors
=
+
+2
cos
by using options, cos = 0.45
15.
P
16.
= A
[Ans. B]
Power supplied by the source =
cos
Where = angle between
= 4 inductor and capacitor do not
consume power.
Therefore, power dissipated in R = Power
supplied by the source
P =
cos
=
cos
[Ans. B]
:R =
= cos = 136 x 0.45 [From Q 4]
= 61.2V
=
= 749W = 750W
[Ans. D]
At t = 0
Voltage across capacitor =
tt 0
+i R+i R+ =0
d
+ 2c
R+ =0
dt
Taking Laplace
s
s
+ (2Rc) s
+ 2Rcs
(0)] +
2R
( + 2Rcs) = 2R
th
=0
s
th
=0
th
Page 181
GATE QUESTION BANK
2R
+ 2Rcs S( + 2Rcs)
2R
2Rc
(s) =
+
+ 2Rcs
+ 2Rcs
s
1F
(s) =
(t)
+
(e) =
* (t) =
17.
)(
Network Theory
Vi(t)
Vo(t)
)+
Input is 2V for t 1s.

Time constant ( ) =
=
=
So (0 ) = 2
Laplace Equivalent circuit after the change
2/s
1/sc
[Ans. A]
Applying superposition theorem
Resolving 0 sin t source
(t) =
sin ( 0t + tan
( )
0)
( )
Removing 20 sin 0t voltage source
1/s
I(s)
(s) =
R+
2 s
(s) =
Rsc +
c
(s) =
= ce
+s
Now voltage across Resister at t = 2s
(t) = (t) R
ce R
( ) =
= Rc e
e
]
( ) =
+ j
( )
= 0 sin( t)
= 0 sin( t)
0
+2
(t) =
+ j
sin t
tan ( )]
2.
20
00 +
( 0 tan
+
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
sin( 0t
0
+2
tan
)
))
+
sin( t
+
(t)
(t)
Fig.
[Ans. A]
(t) = + cos( t)
Due to 5V d.c alone , C is open and no
current flows through R,
= 0 and
=0
ue to cos ( t) alone, with
Vi(t)
2
1
0
THE GATE ACADEMY tPVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore-11
Page 182
th
th
th
GATE QUESTION BANK
H( ) =
For
R+
j R
+j R
iL (t) andv (t) cannot change

instantaneously.
i (0 ) = (0 ) = (0 ) = 0
v (0 ) = v (0 ) = 0
At t =0 , the state of the circuit is shown
in Fig. 4
R=2
R
H( ) =
R
+
H( ) = 0
tan (2)
v (t) =
cos
t+ 0
I1(0 )
After a long time, at t = 0 L behaves as

short circuit and C behaves as open
circuit. The relevant circuit is shown in
Fig.2.
IL(0 )
L
2k
At t = 0 , I1(0 )=0, iL(0 )= I2(0 )=0 and

v (0 ) = 0
For t > 0, the switch, K is closed and the
relevant circuit is shown in Fig. 3
1
V2
R2
20 F
Fig. 1
2k
C1
V1
V2
R1
I2
1k
9V
I1
5V
0 F
V1
1k
9V
Fig. 2(at t = 0 )
R1
10 V
(0 )
= (0 ) =
[Ans. B]
The given circuit is shown in Fig. 1
t steady state i e , as t , capacitor
behaves as open circuit. The circuit at
steady state is shown in Fig.2
I2(0 )
I1(0 )
5.
10 V
I=0
10 V
[Ans. B]
From Fig. 3: Write the Outer loop
equation:
d (t)
(t)
]+
+ 0=
dt
At t = 0
d
(0 ) =
(0 ) =
+
dt
=
/sec
Fig. 1(for t <0)
0
= v (0 )
4.
1H
1F
i (0 ) = 0
Fig. 4
I1
2
5V
I2
I=0
I(0 ) I2(0 ) = 0
5V
[Ans. A]
For t < 0, the circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1
tan(2)]
According to Superposition Theorem

v (t) = v (t) + v (t)
v (t) = P + Q cos( t
)
6
P = 0, Q =
, =
0 + tan (2)
3.
Network Theory
C2
1H
Fig. 2
1
F
Fig. 3(t >0)
10 V
Apply voltage division across R1 = 2k

and R2 = 1k
th
th
th
Page 183
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
Node voltage, V1=

=
[Ans. C]
(
0
0
From the given circuit,

=
j
= (
)
10 V
=0
=
8.
=
10
0
+
0
[Ans. D]
For t < 0, the status of the circuit is
shown in Fig. 1 inductor behaves as short
circuit after a long time.
i(0 ) =
)
j
V1 is divided between C1 = 0 F and

C2 = 20 F
Apply, again voltage division across C1
and C2
0
=
=
=
+
0
6.
Network Theory
[Ans.
tt=0
1H
Fig. 1
for t 0, the status of the circuit is shown

in Fig. 2
Current through the inductor cannot
change instantaneously.
i(0 ) = i(0 ) =
initial value (I.V)
After a long time inductor behaves as
short circuit.
i( ) = 2 = final value (F. V)
Time constant =
6
=
2
At t= 0
T =
, = 20
+
0
10
10
(0 )
10
4A
(inductor
in steady
state)
+
0
1H
0 ]
Fig. 2
i(t) =
+ (F
for t 0
= + (2
=2 e
)(
)(
( )
9.
[Ans. 32]
Load impedance =
= (4
Ideal current source
i(t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 )
Average real power = i
=( )
Power =
th
th
6
2
j2)
4= 2
th
Page 184
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
[Ans. *]Range 1.5 to 1.6

at t = 0 , switch is open so
(0 ) =
at (t = )so capacitor is in steady state
11.
[Ans. C]
Time constant of RC Circuit is = R
In case I
Time constant T = R
In case II
Time constant (T ) = R
Given T = k T
So R
=k R
R =k R ]
12.
2k
2k
( ) = 2k
4k
Network Theory
( )
=2
We know that
(t) =
(0 ) v ( )]e
= 0 2 ]e
+2
( )
60
= (2k
2k
= k 4 =
0
4
0
=4
0 s
000
=
=2 0
4
(t) = 2 e
+2
(t) = 2
2 e
we know that
dv (t)
i (t) =
dt
d
i (t) = c
2
2 e
]
dt
= 2 c( 2 0)e
=4 F
i (t) = +2
4
0
2 0e
i (t)
= 2
0 e
(t)
]
i
=
m
0 Hz
0 Hz
H
0
0 Hz
This is a tank circuit configuration of a

Parallel R-L-C circuit.
Resonant frequency of tank circuit
f =
=4
f =
+(
R=4 ,
f= 0H
+
( )
=
=
th
th
th
Page 185
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis

ECE - 2007
1.
The RC circuit shown in the figure is
R
C
+
ECE - 2008
4.
The Thevenin equivalent impedance ZTh
between the nodes P and Q in the
following circuit is
1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
a low-pass filter
a high-pass filter
a band-pass filter
a band-reject filter
(A) 1
(C) 2 + s +
(B) 1 + s+
2.
3.
An independent voltage source in series

with an independence ZS =RS + jXS
delivers a maximum average power to a
load impedance ZL when
(A)
j
(C)
j
(B)
(D)
j
In the AC network shown in the figure,
the phasor voltage VAB (in Volts) is
(D)
ECE - 2009
5.
An AC source of RMS voltage 20V with
internal impedance Zs (1 2j) feeds a
load of impedance ZL (7 4j) in the
figure below. The reactive power
consumed by the load is
(1
2j)
53
j3
(A) 0
(B) 53
(7
(C) 12.53
(D) 173
(A) 8VAR
(B) 16 VAR
j3
4j)
(C) 28 VAR
(D) 32 VAR
ECE - 2010
6.
The current I in the circuit shown is
2 m
1
1
(C) 0 A
(D) 20 A
(A) j1 A
(B) j1 A
th
th
rad s
th
Page 186
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
For the parallel RLC circuit, which one of

the following statements is NOT correct?
(A) The bandwidth of the circuit
decreases if R is increased
(B) The bandwidth of the circuit remains
same if L is increased
(C) At resonance, input impedance is a
real quantity
(D) At resonance, the magnitude of input
impedance attains its minimum
value
ECE/EE - 2013
8.
A source v (t)
cos 1
t has an
internal impedance of (4 + j3) . If a
purely resistive load connected to this
source has to extract the maximum power
out of the source , its value in should be
(A) 3
(C) 5
(B) 4
(D) 7
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
9.
In the circuit shown below, if the source
voltage Vs= 10053.130 V then the
Thevenins equivalent voltage in volts as
seen by the load resistance RL is
3
j4
(A) 100900
(B) 80000
10.
j6
j4
Network Theory
ECE - 2014
11. A 230 V rms source supplies power to
two loads connected in parallel. The first
load draws 10 kW at 0.8 leading power
factor and the second one draws 10 kVA
at 0.8 lagging power factor. The complex
power delivered by the source is
(A) (18 j 1.5) k
(B) (18 j 1.5) k
(C) (2
j 1.5) k
(D) (2
j 1.5) k
12.
A periodic variable x is shown in the

figure as a function of time. The rootmean-square (rms) value of x is ______.
x
1
t
T 2
13.
T 2
The circuit shown in the figure, the value

of capacitor C (in mF) needed to have
critically damped response i(t) is ________.
4
5
i(t)
RL= 10
(C) 800900
(D) 100600
Two magnetically uncoupled inductive

coils have Q factors q1 and q2 at the
chosen operating frequency. Their
respective resistances are R1 and R2.
When connected in series, their effective
Q factor at the same operating frequency
is
(A) q
q
(B) (1q ) (1 q )
) (
(C) (q
q
)
) (
(D) (q
q
)
14.
In the magnetically coupled circuit shown

in the figure, 56 % of the total flux
emanating from one coil links the other
coil. The value of the mutual inductance
(in H) is ______ .
1
6 cos
(4t 3 )
15.
th
(116)
The steady state output of the circuit

shown in the figure is given by
th
th
Page 187
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
V1 at a frequency which causes resonance

with a current of I.
( )). If the
y(t) = A( )sin( t
amplitude | ( )| 0.25, then the
frequency is
y(t)
sin t
~
( )
( )
( )
3
2
( )
The phasor diagram which is applicable

to this circuit is
(A)
EE - 2006
1.
In the figure the current source is 1 0 A,
R = 1, the impedances are Zc =
j ,
and ZL = 2j. The Thevenin equivalent
looking into the circuit across X-Y is
(B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
20 V, (1 + 2j)
2 450 V, (1 2j)
2 450 V, (1 + j)
2450 V, (1 + j)
(D)
2.
3.
An energy meter connected to an

immersion heater (resistive) operating on
an AC 230 V, 50 Hz, AC single phase
source reads 2.3 units (kWh) in 1 hour.
The heater is removed from the supply
and now connected to a 400 V peak to
peak square wave source of 150 Hz. The
power in kW dissipated by the heater will
be
(A) 3.478
(C) 1.540
(B) 1.739
(D) 0.870
The circuit shown in the figure is
energized by a sinusoidal voltage source
EE - 2007
4.
In the figure transformer T1 has two
secondaries, all three windings having the
same number of turns and with polarities
as indicated. One secondary is shorted by
a 1 resistor , and the other by a 15m
th
th
th
Page 188
GATE QUESTION BANK
capacitor. The switch SW is opened (t =0)

when the capacitor is charged to 5 V with
left plate as positive At (t =0+) the
voltage VP and Current IR are
T1
R
B
+
+
Vp
Im
(A) 25 V, 0.0A
(B) Very large voltage, very large
current
(C) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(D) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
5.
(A)
25V
IR
SW
Network Theory
Re
(B)
In the figure given below all phasors are

with reference to the potential at point
O. The locus of voltage phasor YX as R is
varied from zero to infinity is shown by
Im
Re
(C)
C
XY
Im
O
2V
(A) 0
(C)
2V
0
VYX
VYX
Locus of VYX
Re
Locus of VYX
(D)
Im
(B)
Locus of VYX
(D)
Locus of VYX
VYX
0
VYX
2V
2V
Re
6.
The R-L-C series circuit shown is supplied

from a variable frequency voltage source.
The admittance locus of the
network at terminals AB for increasing
frequency is
EE - 2008
7.
The Thevenin's equivalent of a circuit
operating at = 5rad/s, has
= 3.71 15.90 V and
ZO =2.38 j 0.667. At this frequency,
the minimal realization of the Thevenin's
impedance will have a
th
th
th
Page 189
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) resistor and a capacitor and an

inductor
(B) resistor and a capacitor
(C) resistor and an inductor
(D) capacitor and an inductor
Network Theory
EE - 2011
10. The r.m.s value of the current i(t) in the
circuit shown below is
1
1
1
8.
The resonant frequency for the given

circuit will be
i(t)
0.1H
~
(1. sin t)
(C) 1
(D) 2
(A)
(B)
1
Common Data Q. 11 and Q. 12

The input voltage given to a converter is
(A) 1 rad /s
(B) 2 rad /s
(C) 3 rad /s
(D) 4 rad /s
EE - 2010
9.
If the electrical circuit of figure (b) is an
equivalent of the coupled tank system of
figure (a), then
v
1 2 sin(1
t)
The input drawn by the converter is
i
11.
(a) oupled tank

B
A
)
t
22 sin(5
t
The input power of the converter is
(A) 0.31
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.44
(D) 0.71
)
6)
The active power drawn by the convert is

(A) 181 W
(C) 707 W
(B) 500 W
(D) 887 W
and C, D
EE - 2012
13. A twophase load draws the following
phase currents:
),
i (t)
sin( t
i (t)
cos( t
).
These currents are balanced if 1 is equal
to
)
(A)
(C) ( 2
)
(B)
(D) ( 2
and B, D
14.
D
C
(b) Electrical equivalent
(A) A, B are resistances

capacitances
(B) A, C are resistances
capacitances
(C) A, B are capacitances
resistances
(D) A, C are capacitances
resistances
52 sin(3
12.
(1 2 sin (1
and C, D
and B, D
th
The average power delivered to an

impedance (4 j3) by a current
5 cos (100t+100) A is
(A) 44.2 W
(C) 62.5 W
(B) 50 W
(D) 125 W
th
th
Page 190
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2014
15. A combination of 1 F capacitor with an
initial voltage ( )
2 in series with
a 100 resistor is connected to a 20 mA
ideal dc current source by operating both
switches at t = 0s as shown. Which of the
following graphs shown in the options
approximates the voltage
across the
current source over the next few seconds?
Network Theory
16.
A non-ideal voltage source

has an
internal impedance of
. If a purely
resistive load is to be chosen that
maximizes the power transferred to the
load, its value must be
(A) 0
(B) real part of
(C) magnitude of
(D) complex conjugate of
17.
A series RLC circuit is observed at two

frequencies. At
= 1 krad/s, we note
that source voltage
1
results
in a current
. 331 A. At
= 2krad/s, the source voltage
1
results in a current
2 A. The closest values for R,L,C
out of the following options are
(A)
5
25 m
1
(B)
5
1 m
25
(C)
5
5 m
5
(D)
5
5m
5
t
t
( )
t
2
IN - 2006
1.
Consider the AC bridge shown below. If
( )
RC = 1 and
V
C
<0.01, then ratio 0 is
C
Vs
approximately equal to
( )
( )
(C)
(A) 1
(D)
(B)
t
2
IN - 2007
2.
figure, the current through the 1
resistor is
th
th
th
Page 191
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B)
j
j
L=1H
C = 0.25F
V = 1V
3.
I = (5cos2t)A
(A) (1 + 5 cos 2t) A

(B) (5 + cos 2t) A
(C) (1 5 cos 2t) A

(D) 6A
Consider the AC bridge shown in the

figure below, with R, L and C having
positive finite values
Then
if
(B)
if
(C)
if
(D)
j (
j (
j
)
)
(D)
j (
j (
j (
)
)
)
1 2 sin (1
t)
1 2 cos (3
t)
1 mH
(A) 50 W
(B) 1050 W
(C) 5000 W
(D) 10100 W
cannot be made zero
6.
For the circuit shown below the voltage

across the capacitor is
Consider the coupled circuit shown

below.
j1
(10+j0)V
j1
ig a
At angular frequency , this circuit can be

represented by the equivalent
T network shown below.
(A) (10 + j 0)V

(C) (0 + j100)V
(B) (100+j0)V
(D) (0 j100)V
For the circuit shown below the steadystate current I is
7.
cos(1000t)V
ig b
Indicate the correct set of expressions for

the impedances of the T network
(A)
j (
)
j (
)
j
V(t)= 52
4.
(C)
IN - 2008
5.
In the circuit below the average power
consumed by the 1 resistor is
sin t
(A)
Network Theory
th
1mH
th
th
1000 F
Page 192
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
(A) 0A
(B) 52 cos (1000t)A
(C) 52 cos (1
(D) 52A
IN - 2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions: 8
&9
A coil having an inductance (L) of 10mH
and resistance R is connected in series
with an ideal 100 F capacitor (C). When
excited by a voltage source of value
102 cos (1000t)V, the series RLC circuit
draws 20W of power.
8.
The value of the coil resistance R is

(A) 1
(C) 4
(B) 2
(D) 5
9.
The Q factor of the coil at an angular

frequency of 1000rad/s is
(A) 1
(C) 4
(B) 2
(D) 5
IN - 2011
Common Data for Question 10 & 11
Consider the circuit shown below:
2 sin(5t)
cos(5t)
.1
i(t)
10.
The current i(t) through the capacitor is

(A) sin (5t) A
(C) sin (5t 45) A
(B) cos (5t) A
(D) 1 A
11.
The average total power delivered by the

sources is
(A) 0 W
(C) 2 W
(B) 0.5 W
(D) 4 W
th
th
th
Page 193
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory

ECE
1.
6.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
( || 1 )
( )
( )
J ,
1)
(J )
(J )
,
,
J
1
3
3J
Filter is band-pass filter.
1
2.
power
, (J )
[Ans. D]
For
maximum
J
(L = 20 mH, C = 50 )
Nodal analysis at node A
2
j
1 1 j
(J )
s
s
( )
( )
ut
( || 1 ))
j1
j
[
1
2
j1
transfer,
2
2
j1
1
j
]
2
j1
1
3.
[Ans. D]
current
53
5 3
4.
j1
impedance
((5 3J)||(5
34
173
1
3J))
[Ans. A]
Replace 10V by short circuit and 1A by
open circuit
(
1). (1 1 )
1
1
2
7.
[Ans. D]
This is standard concept of parallel
resonant circuit
8.
[Ans. C]
|
9.
[Ans. B]
The RMS current in the load is given by
tan ( )
2
tan
j4
53 13
553 13
j4 2
4
2
8 9
8 9
j4
( )
2 , reactive power
4 4
16
Also note that the active power consumed
by the load
4 7 28
[Ans. C]
1
j4
5.
10.
[Ans. C]
fter series connection

th
th
th
Page 194
GATE QUESTION BANK
1
2
)
1
11.
[Ans. B]
Total ower (s)
1
cos
.8
.8
18 1.5j
1
cos
.8
4
c
.8
[Ans. *] Range 0.39 to 0.42

x
1
2
1 4
c
12.
Network Theory
14.
(T2 , 1)
1
2
4
4
4
[Ans. *] Range 2.49 to 2.52

oupling coefficient given is
e know,
t
T 2
iven
T 2
Equation of line
1
(t
T 2
2t
T
1
*
T
15.
4
3
[Ans. B]
2t
( ) dt
T
y(t)
sin t
+
( ) sin[ t
( )]
y(t)
| ( )|
.25
By nodal analysis
x 1
x
x
1 cj
2 cj
1
cj
1
x[
cj
]
2
2 3 cj
1
x[
]
x
2
x
1
y
2 2 3 cj
1
1
| ( )|
4 4 9
9
12
2
1
8
6
.4 8
[Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01
4
13.
1 4t
*
+
T 3T
.56
.56 4
2.5 4
1
x dt
T
1 m
i(t)
For critically damped

1 1 2
2
3 cj
3 c
th
th
th
Page 195
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
To calculate Thevenins impedance,
current source is open circuited
x
R=1
200
V
2
T/2
Zth
ZL=2j
ZC= j
z
z
1 2j j
= 1 j
Open circuit voltage at terminals X Y
z
(1 j)
1
1
*
T
1
15
dt+
1
2
dt ( 2
T
[ {
2
2
1
k
23
1.739 k
245 volts
[Ans. B]
Assuming resistance of the heater = R
(i) When heater connected to 230 V.
50 Hz source, energy consumed by
the heater = 2.3 units or 2.3 kWh in
1 hour
Power consumed by the heater
1
f
Vrms value of the input voltage
2.
Network Theory
3.
) dt
}]
[Ans. A]
2.3k h
1 hour
2.3 k
rms value of the input voltage
23
j(
At resonance,
2.3
23
so
Therefore, input impedance is purely
resistive, is minimum and the input
voltage and output current are in phase
23
(ii) When heater connected to 400 V

(peak to peak ) square wave source
of 150 Hz
j(
)]
phase
with
but
Therefore,
is
in
Voltage across the capacitor
th
th
th
Page 196
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
j
l
So,
lags the current by 9 . The phasor
diagram on the basis of above analysis
y
C
Let capacitive reactance
4.
[Ans. D]
R
T1
using
IR
,.
s1
Vs
s2
P1
25V
VP
)
)
C
P2
T1
T2
VT
Method -1
All the three windings has same number

of turns, so magnitude of induced emfs in
all the three windings will be same i.e.
| | | | | |
Polarity of the windings is decided on the
basis of dot convention.
As capacitor is charged to 5 V with left
plate as positive.
So, T1 is positive wrt T2
5
As T2 has negative polarity. So, P1 has
negative polarity
Therefore, VP =
5
Similarly, S1 has negative polarity
So,
5
5
.5
1
when
when
Method-2
18
(18
(
2 tan
(
(
( ))
Magnitude of
So, option (c) and (d) can not be correct,
as magnitude is 2V in these two options.
th
Angle of
1 8
When
18
18
when
2tan ( )
2 9
36
th
th
2 tan
( )
Page 197
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
18
2 tan ( ) 18
On the basic of above analysis, the locus
of
is drawn below:
2V
O
when
Ref
when
R=0
6.
[Ans. B]
Admittance of the series connected RLC
(
7.
[Ans. B]
Thevenins mpedance
2.38 j .667
as real part is not zero , so has resistor
m[ ]
j .667
Case I
Z0 has capacitor (as Im[Z0]is negative )
Case II
Z0 has both capacitor and inductor, but
inductive
reactance
capacitive
reactances
at = 5 rad / sec
For minimal realization case (i) is
considered
Therefore, Z0 will have a resistor and a
capacitor.
8.
[Ans. C]
Input impedance
1
z j
*By rationlization}
Separating, real and imaginary part of
admittance.
e[ ]
(
For any value of

positive.
When
At
, the real part is always

or
(resonance)
e[ ]
(maximum value)
(
( )
(
(
)
(
At
(resonance)
Imaginary part of zero

m( )
For
Therefore Im [Y] > 0

For
j
0.1H
1F
j .1
j .1
Therefore, [ ]
On the basis of above analysis, the
admittance locus is
1
j ( .1
)
1
1
At resonance, imaginary part must be
zero.
.1
th
1
th
th
Page 198
GATE QUESTION BANK
.1
11.
1
1
1
9
3 rad/sec
9.
C=
10.
[Ans. B]
rms value of input voltage
1 2
1
2
rms value of current
1 2
52
22
(
)
(
)
(
)
2
2
2
11.358
Let input power factor cos
l
cos =active power drawn by
the converter
1
11.358 cos
5
cos
.44
[Ans. D]
In such system, volumetric flow rate C is
analogous to current and pressure is
analogous to voltage.
The hydraulic capacitance due to storage
in gravity field is defined as
Where A = Area of the tank
ensity of the fluid

g = Acceleration due to gravity
The hydraulic capacitance is represented
by A & C.
Liquid trying to flow out of a container,
can meet with resistance in several ways.
If the outlet is a pipe, the friction between
the liquid and the pipe walls produces
resistance to flow.
Such resistance is represented by B & D.
Network Theory
12.
[Ans. B]
1
i
2 sin(1
t)
1 2 sin (1
52 sin (3
)
4
22sin(5
t
4)
Fundamental component of input voltage
( )
1 2 sin(1
t)
1
( )
(i )
1
2
Fundamental component of current
(i )
1 2 sin(1
t
3)
[Ans. B]
1 sint
sin t
1 and
1 rad sec
Impedance of the branch containing
inductor & capacitor
j(
)
1
j(
)
1
1
j (1 1
)
1 1
So, this branch is short circuit and the
whole current flow through it
1. sin t
i(t)
1. sint
1
rms values of the current
1
1 2
2
Phase difference
components
1
between
these
two
, cos
cos
.5
3
3
Active power due to fundamental
components
( ),
(i ) ,
cos
1
1
.5 5
Since, 3rd & 5th harmonics are absent in
input voltage, there is no active power due
to the these components.
Hence, active power drawn by the converter
=Active power due to fundamental
components = 500 W
th
th
th
Page 199
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. D]
i
sin( t
i
cos( t
17.
[Ans. B]
)
)
j(
sin (
t
)
2
As these two currents are balanced.
i
i
sin
sin
2. sin (
)
sin( t
2 sin ( t
14.
1k rad s
1
. 331
1
. 331
j(
)
j (1
)
t
1
1
2
(2
IN
1.
1
and
25
)
)
d
dt
1
dt
(
At t = 0,
k
2
t
t
16.
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
[Ans. D]
[Ans. C]
tt
On solving equation
5 ,
1 m ,
[Ans. B]
Z = 4 j3 = RL jXc; RL=4;
5cos(1
t 1 )
mcos(cot
5
2
1
. 331
)
1 c
2k rad s
j (2
)
)
) . cos (
t
P=
15.
sin (
1
cos (
2 2
1
(
2 2
Network Theory
[Ans. C]
Magnitude of
| | (using
transfer theorem)
1
1
2
maximum
1
2
power
th
th
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
( )
1
th
Page 200
GATE QUESTION BANK
2 (2
i
3.
Network Theory
(1
5 cos 2t)
[Ans. D]
The A.C bridge is shown in Fig
. 1,
it can neglected in comparison to
2
[Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure 1
Let
.25
(5 cos 2t)
Fig. 1
Superposition theorem can be used to

find i
Due to 1 V d.c source alone, the circuit is
shown in Fig. 2, where the current source
is open circuited (I = 0). Also, in steady
state, L behave as short circuit and C
behave as open circuit
With R, L and C having positive finite

value, becomes imaginary which is not
possible.
cannot be made zero
4.
j ,
of the vridge is balanced if product
of the impedances of opposite arms is
same i.e.,
j
or
j
[Ans. A]
The coupled circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1
i
Fig. 2
From figure 2, i
1
Due to AC source (5 cos 2t) alone, the
circuit is shown in figure 3, where the
voltage source is short circuited (V = 0)
ig 1
Write the mesh equations:

j
j
(1)
j
j
(2)
The equivalent T network is shown in Fig .2
1
.25
(5 cos 2t)
2.
Fig. 3
For
As
2,
2 1
.25
.5,
2
ig 2
, the parallel RLC circuit is
Write the mesh equations:

(
)
under resonance
i
5 cos 2t
th
th
th
Page 201
GATE QUESTION BANK
or
. (3)
For C = 1000
1
1
l
(
)
(
)
or
. (4)
omparig (1)with (3)and (2)with (4, )
j
,
j
,
j (
)
j
,
j (
)
5.
[Ans. D]
Let v (t)
v (t)
1 2 in (1
1 2 cos(7
RMS value of v (t)
j(
t)
)
MSV of v (t) 1
1
Similarly M.S.V of v (t) 1
Let v(t) = v (t) v (t)
. . of v(t) 1
1
1
1 1
1 ,1
Power is consumed or dissipated only in
1 . if it is ,
. . of v(t)
1 ,1
8.
= 10
circuit it under
( )
Q=
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
Circuit is under resonance
I=
[Ans. D]
= 1000 1
resonance
1
1
1
1
9.
6.
The circuit is open for the excitation

frequency
1 r s
steady state current,
It may also be noted that in steady state,
as t
v(t) = 0 because of the exponential,
t) and
Network Theory
10.
100JV
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is shown in fig. 1
2
cos(1
52e
( )
2 sin(5t)
[Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure
1m
Given:
For the given input,

v(t) 5 2e cos(1
1 r s
Z=1+
For L = l mH
1
1
1
.1
i(t)
i( )
cos(5t)
Fig. 1
1
R=2 ,
5 rad sec
.1 ,
Taking cos (5t) = Re[1e e ]

1 cos (5t)
e[1 e e ]
hasor,
1e
for (t) 2 sin(5t) 2 cos(5t
hasor, 2 e
v(t)
7.
t)
The phasor equivalent circuit is shown in

fig 2
th
th
th
Page 202
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
9
j2
j2
Fig. 2
The circuit is further simplified to the

circuit in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4
j1
j2
Fig. 3
(1
j)
j2
Fig. 4
From Fig 4
(1 j)2
(1 j)
245
2 j2
1 j
2 45
19
1 9
j
i(t)
e[ e ]
e[1e
e ]
e[e (
sin(5t)
11.
cos(5t
[Ans. C]
Phasor current through 2
1
1
1
j
j
i (t) 1 cos(5 t)
Power is dissipated in the resistance, 2 .
Assuming that the source values are given
in RMS value
Power delivered by the 2 sources
= Power dissipated in the equivalent 2
of Fig. 4
(1)
2 2
Note: Assuming Peak value for the
sources,
Power delivered by the 2 sources
=( )
th
th
th
Page 203
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Laplace Transform
ECE - 2006
1.
The first and the last critical frequencies
(singularities) of a driving point
impedance function of a passive network
having two kinds of elements, are a pole
and a zero respectively. The above
property will be satisfied by
(A) RL network only
(B) RC network only
(C) LC network only
(D) RC as well as RL networks
2.
A 2 mH inductor with some initial current

can be represented as shown below,
where s is the Laplace Transform
variable. The value of initial current is
I(s)
ECE - 2009
4.
If the transfer function of the following
network is
=
R
+
RL
Vi
V0
The value of the load resistance RL is

(A) R/4
(C) R
(B) R/2
(D) 2R
ECE - 2011
5.
The circuit shown below is driven by a
sinusoidal input
. The
steady state output is
R
0.002
1mV
+
(A) 0.5 A
(B) 2.0A
(C) 1.0 A
(D) 0.0A
ECE - 2007
3.
Two series resonant filters are as shown
in the figure. Let the 3-dB bandwidth of
Filter 1 be B1 and that of Filter 2 be B2.
The Value of
C1
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
6.
The transfer function
of the circuit
shown below is
L1
00F
+
Vi
+
R
Vo
10k
V1(s)
Filter 1
V2(s)
00F
+
Vi
+
R
Vo
Filter 2
(A) 4
(B) 1
(C)
(D)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 204
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
EE 2014
1.
The driving point impedance Z(s) for the
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)

ECE
1.
[Ans. B]
2.
[Ans. A]
5.
[Ans. A]
Redrawing the circuit s domain
I(S)
+
( )
LS
V(S)
Li (0 )
3.
So here,
Now,
[Ans. D]
4.
Put ,
[Ans. C]
(
So,
))
I(s) =
Now ,
( )
Satisfies above equation

th
th
th
Page 205
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
In time domain,
( )
6.
[Ans. D]
100 F
0
100 F
Substituting the values we get
EE
1.
Ans. A]
peda e f
du a e
peda e f apa
f F
th
th
th
Page 206
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Two-Port Networks
ECE - 2006
1.
In the two port network shown in the
figure below, Z12 and Z21are, respectively
(A) r n
(B)
n
(C)
n r
(D) r n
The z-parameter matrix for this network

is
4.
3.
+[
(C) *
(B) *
(D) *
(A) *
(C) *
(B) *
(D) *
Z(s)
. The component values are
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2008
Statement for linked Answer Questions 3
and 4
A two port network shown below is
excited by external dc sources. The
voltages and currents are measured with
voltmeters
and ammeters
(All assumed to be ideal) as indicated.
Under following switch conditions, the
readings obtained are:
(i)
open ,
- closed
closed ,
The driving point impedance of the

following network is given by
If port-2 is terminated by RL, then input

impedance seen at port-1 is given by
(ii)
A two-port network is represented by

ABCD parameters given by
[ ]
The h-parameter matrix for this network

is
5.
2.
(A) *
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
L
H R
L
H R
L = 0.1H, R = 2
L
H R 2
F
F
0.1F
F
ECE - 2010
6.
For the two-port network shown below,
the short circuit admittance parameter
matrix is
(A) *
open
(B) *
2
2
+S
(C) *
+S
(D) *
+S
2
2
+S
2
wo port
n twork
ECE - 2011
7.
In the circuit shown below, the network N
is described by the following Y matrix:
*
th
th
+.
th
Page 207
GATE QUESTION BANK
The voltage gain
is
Network Theory
s s
s s
s
s s
s s
s s
s s
s
s s
s
s s
s
(A) 1/90
(B) 1/90
(C)
(D)
1/99
1/11
11.
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
Common Data for questions 8 and 9
With 10 V dc connected at port A in the
linear nonreciprocal two-port network
shown below, the following were
observed:
(i) 1 connected at port B draws a
current of 3 A
(ii) 2.5 connected at port B draws a
current of 2 A
2
2
12.
8.
9.
In the h-parameter model of the 2-port

network given in the figure shown, the
value of h (in S) is ______ .
Consider the building block

N twork N shown in th figur
L t
F n R
k
N twork N
With 10 V dc connected at port A, the

current drawn by 7 connected at port B
is
(A) 3/7 A
(C) 1 A
(B) 5/7 A
(D) 9/7 A
called
Two such blocks are connected in

cascade, as shown in the figure.
For the same network, with 6 V dc

connected at port A, 1 connected at port
B draws 7/3 A. If 8 V dc is connected to
port A, the open circuit voltage at port B
is
(A) 6 V
(C) 8 V
(B) 7 V
(D) 9 V
N twork N
N twork N
h tr nsf r fun tion

ECE - 2014
10. A two-port
network
has scattering
s
s
parameters given by [ ] *s
s + If
the port-2 of the two- port is short
circuited, the s
parameter for the
resultant one-port network is
th
of the cascaded
network is
(A)
(C) (
(B)
(D)
th
th
Page 208
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
For the two-port network shown in the

figure, the impedance (Z) matrix (in ) is
I1
Network Theory
k
49i1
Input loop
F
F
(A) *
(B) *
2
2
(C) *
(D) *
2
2
(A) 2 F
(B)
F
+
+
EE - 2006
1.
The parameters of the circuit shown in
the figure are R
M R = 10 ,
A =
V/V.If
= 1 V, then output
voltage, input impedance and output
impedance respectively are
R
R
+
(C) 2
F
(D)
Fs
EE - 2010
4.
The two-port network P shown in the
figure has ports 1 and 2, denoted by
terminals (a, b) and (c, d), respectively. It
has an impedance matrix Z with
parameters denoted by . A 1 resistor
is connected in series with the network at
port 1 as shown in the figure. The
impedance matrix of the modified twoport network (shown as a dashed box) is
+
_
(A) 1V, , 10
(B) 1 V,0, 10
2.
(C) 1 V, 0,
(D) 10 V, ,10
The parameter type and the matrix

representation of the relevant two port
parameters that describe the circuit
shown are
(A) [
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
IN - 2007
(A) z parameters,*
(B) h parameters,*
(C) h parameters,*
1.
The DC voltage gain

circuit is given by.
R
(D) z parameters,*
in the following
R
EE - 2009
3.
The equivalent capacitance of the input
loop of the circuit shown is
th
(A) AV
(C) AV
(B) AV
(D) AV
th
th
+R
Page 209
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2008
2.
For the circuit shown below the input
resistance R11 =
3I2
2V3
I2
V3
V1
+I
1
V1
IN - 2013
3.
Considering the transformer to be ideal,
th tr nsmission p r m t r of th
2 port network shown in the figure
below is
is
+
Network Theory
1:2
I1
V2
(C)
(D)
I2
V2
2
(A) 1.3
(B) 1.4
(A)
(B) 2
(C) 0.5
(D) 2.0

ECE
1.
3.
[Ans. C]
=
=
[Ans. B]
|
current source will be
s (1)
open)
=0
|
|
2.
=0
s (2)
|
[Ans .D]
The ABCD parameter equations are given
by,
=*
4.
wh n th n twork is t rmin l
R
R
R
= 1.5
+
[Ans. A]
=h
h
=h
h
From giv n
p r m t rs
2
fig
R
R
= 1.5
H=*
RL
= 3
+
Fig. 1
th
th
th
Page 210
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
R
L
R L
(R L
Note:
R
R L
R L
is Independent of
L )
8.
[Ans. C]
As per the given conditions, we can draw
the following two figures.
RL
R L
R
L )
2
s 2
Comparing (1) and (2)
2
R
L
10
V
F
R
2A
B
A
6.
3A
10V
2.5
[Ans. A]
|
|
|
[ ]
7.
Let Vth and Rth be the Thevenin voltage &

resistance as seen from part B.
2
2
2
[Ans. D]
iv n
+
2
2
From the circuit shown in Fig. 1
R
2
Vth = 3Rth + 3
(1)
&
Vth = 2Rth + 5
(2)
Solving (1) & (2)
Rth 2
So, Vth = 3 x 2 + 3 = 9V
Now,
Fig
From eqn (2)
th
th
th
Page 211
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
i=
9.
The y parameter of the parallel network is

equal to the sum of the individual
network y parameter
For network A
[Ans. B]
R
So, Vth = 7/3 x 2 +

=
= 7V.
The open circuit voltage at port B is 7V.

10.
[Ans. B]
p r m t rs
ort
ort 2
Lo
2
For network B
s
s
s
Port 2 is short circuited
h n ws
2
2
From
s
s
[
s ]
s
s
s
From
s
s
[
s
s
11.
s ]
s s
[
s
s s
s s
s
s
s
[Ans. *] Range 1.24 to 1.26

In the figure two port networks in parallel
th
th
th
Page 212
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE
1.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
= 1V
=
=
12.
2.
[Ans. C]
h
h
V1
Apply mesh analysis to determine the

current s
)
(2R
s
)
R
s
Since port 1 is open circuit , I1=0

Port 2 is short circuit, V2 =0
[from
R]
R +
) (2R
s R
) (R
*(2R
s R
s
s
(2R
) (R
R s
Rs
2Rs
k
F
s
s
R s
o h p r m t rs
R
3.
}R
h
h
h
]
h
s
s
[Ans. A]
Assume a 1A current source at input
terminals,
= 1A
R s
sr
s R
R
V2
(2R
[(R
om ining
I2
s
s
(R
h
h
I1
R
s
13.
R = 10
[Ans. B]
F
F
[Ans. C]
Applying KVL
i
i [2
+
*
j
]
Input impedance
As imaginary part is negative, input

impedance has equivalent capacitive
reactance
.
th
th
th
Page 213
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
2
h r
put it in qu tion
2
2 F
4.
o[
[Ans. C]
The impedance matrix
of the modified
network is calculated from fig. given
below:
3.
[Ans. A]
2
1 I1
[ ][ ]
[ ]
V1
V2
2
[
[ ]
][ ]
[ ]
2
2
From qu tion
From qu tion
Fig.
2
IN
1.
From qu tion
2
n
[Ans. A]
V=
=
2.
[Ans. D]
2
2V3
+ I1
+ +
V1
3I2
I2
c
2
V3
Apply KVL on abcdef
th
th
th
Page 214
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory
Network Topology
ECE - 2008
1.
In the following graph, the number of
trees (P) and the number of cut-sets (Q)
are

(A) The equations v1 v2+v3 = 0,
v3 +v4 v5 =0 are KVL equations for
the network for some loops
(B) The equations v1-v3-v6 = 0,
v4 +v5 v6 =0 are KVL equations for
the network for some loops
(C) E = AV
(D) AV = 0 are KVL equations for the
network
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(A) P = 2, Q = 2
(B) P = 2, Q = 6
(C) P = 4, Q = 6
(D) P = 4, Q = 10
EE - 2007
1.
The matrix A given below is the node
incidence matrix of a network. The
columns correspond to branches of the
network while the rows correspond to
nodes. Let V = [v1 v2 v6]T denote the
vector of branch voltages.
While I = [i1 i2 i6]T that of branch
currents. The vector E=[e1 e2 e3 e4]T
denotes the vector of node voltages
relative to a common ground.
[
EE - 2008
2.
The number of chords in the graph of the
given circuit will be
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
th
th
th
Page 215
GATE QUESTION BANK
Network Theory

ECE
1.
The graph of the network is shown in fig.

Where
From the graph it can be observed that
(i)
are not KVL equations as set of
branches (1, 2, 3) and (3, 4, 5) do not
form closed paths.
(ii)
and
are KVL equations for the loops
(1, 3, 6) and (4,5, 6)
From the matrix, A it can be
concluded that
(i) E
(ii) AV = 0 are not KVL equations
Statement in option (b) is true.
[Ans. C]
Different trees (P) are shown below.
Different cut sets (Q are shown below
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6) (4)
So P = 4, Q = 6
2.
EE
1.
[Ans. A]
The graph of the given circuit is shown in
Fig.
Number of nodes = N = 4
Number of branches = B = 6
Number of tree branches = (N 1) = 3
Number of links = L = B (N 1) = 3
[Ans. B]
For the given node to branch
incidence matrix
[
]
1
5
III
II
Fig.
4
IV
Fig.
th
th
th
Page 216
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Introduction to Signals & Systems

ECE - 2006
1.
The Dirac delta function t is defined as
t
(A)
t
,
t rw s
t
(B)
t
,
t rw s
t
(C)
t
,
t rw s
(D)
t t
t
t
rw s
t t
ECE - 2007
2.
The 3-dB bandwidth of the low-pass
signal
u t , where u(t) is the unit step
function, is given by
(C)
(A)
z
(D)
z
(B)
z
ECE - 2009
3.
A function is given by f(t) = sin2t +cos2t .
Which of the following is true?
(A) f has frequency components at 0 and
/ z
(B) f has frequency components at 0 and
/ z
(C) f s fr qu cy c mp
ts t /
/ z
(D) f has frequency components at 0,
/
/ z
ECE - 2011
4.
If the unit step response of a network is
, then its unit impulse response
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE /EE/IN- 2013

5.
Two systems with impulse responses
(t) and (t) are connected in cascade.
Then the overall impulse response of the
cascaded system is given by
(A) Product of h1(t) and h2(t)
(B) Sum of h1(t) and h2(t)
(C) Convolution of h1(t) and h2(t)
(D) Subtraction of h2(t) from h1(t)
ECE - 2014
6.
A discrete-time signal
x[n] s
t
(A) Periodic with period
(B) Periodic with period
(C) Periodic with period /
(D) t p r
c
r s
7.
A system is described by the following

differential equation, where u(t) is the
input to the system and y(t) is the output
of the system. y t
y t
u t
When y (0) = 1 and u(t) is a unit step
function, y(t) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
8.
The sequence x[n] =

u[n] , where
u[n] is the unit step sequence, is
convolved with itself to obtain y[n]. Then
y is___________
EE - 2006
1.
Which of the following is true:
(A) A finite signal is always bounded
(B) A bounded signal always possesses
finite energy
(C) A bounded signal is always zero
outside the interval [ t , t ] for
some t
(D) A bounded signal is always finite
th
th
th
Page 217
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2007
2.
If u(t), r(t) denote unit the unit step and
unit ramp functions respectively and
u(t) * r(t) their convolution, then the
function u (t+1) * r(t 2) is given by
(A) (1/2) (t 1) (t+2)
(B) (1/2) (t 1) (t 2)
(C) (1/2) (t 1)2 u(t 1)
(D) none of the above
Signals and Systems
EE - 2014
5.
The function shown in the figure can be
represented as
EE - 2008
3.
Given a sequence x[n], to generate the
sequence y[n] = x[3 4n], which one of
the following procedures would be
correct?.
(A) First delay x[n] by 3 samples to
generate z [n], then pick every 4th
sample of z1[n] to generate z2[n], and
then finally time reverse z2[n] to
obtain y[n]
(B) First advance x[n] by 3 samples to
generate Z1[n], and then pick every
4th samples of z1[n] to generate z2 [n]
and then finally time reverse Z2[n] to
obtain y[n]
(C) First pick every fourth sample of x[n]
to generate v
time-reverse
v
to obtain v
& finally
advance v
by 3 sample to obtain
y[n]
(D) First pick every fourth sample of x[n]
to generate V1[n], time-reverse V1[n]
to obtain V2[n], and finally delay
V2[n] by 3 samples to obtain Y[n]
EE - 2011
4.
A zero mean random signal is uniformly
distributed between limits
and its mean square value is equal to its
variance. Then the r. m. s. value of the
signal is
(A)
(C)
(D)
(B)
(A) u t
u t
u t
u t
(B) u t
(C) u t
u t
u t
u t
u t
u t
(D) u t
u t
u t
6.
An input signal x t
s
t is
sampled with a sampling frequency of
400 Hz and applied to the system whose
transfer function is represented by
z
z
(
)
z
Where, N represents the number of
samples per cycle. The output y(n) of the
system under steady state is
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 5
7.
For the signal

f t
s
t
s
t s
t
the minimum sampling frequency (in Hz)
satisfying the Nyquist criterion is ________
IN - 2007
1.
Consider the periodic signal
x t
c s t c s
t
where t is in seconds. Its fundamental
frequency, in Hz, is
(A) 20
(C) 100
(B) 40
(D) 200
th
th
th
Page 218
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2008
2.
The fundamental period of the discretetime signal x[n] =
(A)
(B)
3.
The integral
is
(C) 6
(D) 12
The step response of a linear time

invariant system is y t
u t ,
where u(t) is the unit step function. If the
output of system corresponding to an
impulse input t is h(t), then h(t) is
(A)
u t
(B)
t
(C) u t
u t
(D)
t
u t
) s
(t
IN - 2009
4.
The fundamental period of
x(t) = 2sin2t +3sin3t , with t
expressed in seconds, is
(A) 1s
(C) 2s
(B) 0.67s
(D) 3s
5.
7.
Signals and Systems
t v u t t
(A) 6
(B) 3
(C) 1.5
(D) 0
IN - 2011
8.
Consider a system with input x(t) and
output y(t) related as follows
y(t) =
x t }

TRUE?
(A) The system is nonlinear
(B) The system is time-invariant
(C) The system is stable
(D) The system has memory
9.
The continuous-time signal x(t) = s

t
is a periodic signal. However, for its
discrete-time counterpart x[n] = s
to be periodic, the necessary condition is
(A)
For input x(t), an ideal impulse sampling

system produces the output
(B)
to be an integer
(C)
to be a ratio of integers
y t
(D) none
Where t is the dirac delta function.

The system is
(A) Non-linear and time invariant
(B) Non-linear and time varying
(C) Linear and time invariant
(D) Linear and time varying
IN - 2010
6.
The input x(t) and the corresponding
output y(t) of a system are related by .
y(t) =
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
. The system is
EC/IN - 2013
10. If the A-matrix of the state space model of
a SISO linear time invariant system is
rank deficient, the transfer function of the
system must have
(A) A pole with a positive real part
(B) A pole with a negative real part
(C) A pole with a positive imaginary part
(D) A pole at the origin
11.
time invariant and causal

time invariant and non-causal
time variant and non-causal
time variant and causal
th
The impulse response of a continuous

time system is given by
h(t) = t
t
. The value of
the step response at t = 2 is
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 3
th
th
Page 219
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2014
12. Time domain expressions for the
voltage
t
t r v
s
t
s
t
t =
c s
t
Which one of
the following statement is TRUE?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Signals and Systems
t
t
t
t
t y
t y
t y
t y
s
s
s

ECE
1.
s
Every
after
s
[Ans. D]
s
trigonometric function repeats
t rv
S c s
y
teger, there is no
p ss
v u f f rw c c
an integer, thus non-periodic
t
2.
[Ans. A]
f
m
tu
7.
s
t
fr qu
cy
[Ans. A]
y t
y t
I.F. =
y t
r
f
3.
u t
8.
c s t
c s t
Here x
[Ans. A]
t
6.

We know, if y
x
Frequency components are

f
5.
u t , P = 5, Q = u t ,
y t
f t
4.
[Ans. B]
y t
[Ans. C ]
Cascade means convolution
[Ans. D]
Assume x
N)
x
x
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
If the amplitude of a signal have some
finite boundaries for all values of time
then it is called as bounded signal.
to be periodic, (with period
th
th
th
Page 220
GATE QUESTION BANK
|f t |
}f r t
r |f t |
f tt
v v u
So a bounded signal may possess finite
energy or infinite energy.
For example u (t) is bounded signal but it
possess infinite energy because it is a
power signal.
It can be zero or nonzero outside a finite
interval ( t t
But it is always true that it will be always
finite for any value of time t.
Signals and Systems
i.e, z
z
x
Now reverse (time reverse) z
give y[n] = z
x
4.
will
[Ans. A]
Variance
Mean square value

2.
[Ans. C]
u t
RMS value
r t
r
z t
5.
u t
[Ans. A]
Result graph
r p
r p
r p
r p
u
z t
u t
For (t
r p
z t
u t
r p
f r t
t
z t
For
z t
u t
For
z t
3.
u t
6.
[Ans. C]
x t
t
ft
[Ans. B]
Y[n] = x[3 4n] = x[ 4n+ 3]
So to obtain y[n] we first advance x[n] by
3 unit.
i.e, z
x
Now we will take every fourth sample of
z
m p r
s
t
t
f
fx t
ms
s mp
um
th
th
p r
r f s mp s
th
ms
c cyc
Page 221
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Now, fundamental period of x(t) is the

LCM of T1, T2 and T3 , which is
x z
So, fundamental frequency = 20 Hz
s mp
p r
r st
y st t
my
m
m
[
2.
z
y z
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
z x z
x
Fundamental period
z
t
t
3.
[Ans. D]
Step response s(t)
u t
Impulse response h(t)
zs
zc s
z
+
z
(Using L Hospital rule)
m*
z
z
zs
zc s
z
z
z
m*
7.
t
t
z
m
z
t
+
[Ans. 14]
r qu cy f s
t
z
r qu cy f s
t
z
r qu cy f s
t
z
By Nyquist theorem, sampling frequency
f
z
x mum fr qu cy f
z
u t
u t
4.
u t / t
t t
[Ans. C]
x t
S
t
S
P r
f S
t s
P r
t s
P r
of final original is LCM of
= LMC
/
= 2 sec.
5.
[Ans. D]
Given signal is
y t
[Ans. A]
X(t) = (1+0.5 cos t c s
t
c s
t
c s t c s
t
c s
t
c s
t
c s
t
x t
x t
x t
w r
x
c s
t
x
c s
t
x
c s
t
Now,
tm p r
fx t
This is the representation of a signal x(t)

in weighted and sum form and it obeys
the principle of superposition and
homogeneity. So, this is linear but it is
time varying as for x(t t ),
y t
x
t
t
And y t t
x
t t
Therefore
y t t
y t s t m v ry
6.
[Ans. C]
x t
y t
s
Value of y t t depends on values of x for
times from
t t
As output is depending on future values
of input, the system is Non casual
th
th
th
Page 222
GATE QUESTION BANK
For the input x t

y t
y t
x t
As y(t) depends only on x(t), the system

has no memory.
9.
[Ans. C]
If x(n) is periodic with period N, then the
condition to be satisfied is x(n) = x(n+N).
If x(n) = s
then the necessary
condition is
s
s
Or
N= m m 1, 2,
From (1),
y(t-t
Let
From (3),
Or
y t
As (4) & (5) are not same, the system is

Time variant.
syst m s m v r t
causal.
7.
r t
Or
[Ans. D]
11.
[Ans. B]
Y(s)
(t
rs
(step response)
u t
) s
should be expressible as ( )
10.
[Ans. B]
Given signal is
x t
Signals and Systems
u t
u t
u t
By shifting property of unit impulse

function
x t
t
(t
x t
{
) s
t
t
s w r
s
u t
u t
At t = 2 value is 1
Hence, correct option is (B)

8.
12.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
t
Given the system, y(t) =

y t
x t
x t }
x t
x t
x t ]
t
As y(t) is obtained from linear operation
on x(t), the system is linear .
As the input x(t) is multiplied by a time
varying function
, the system is
Time varying.
For a bounded input x(t) ,
x(t) is
bounded, y(t) is also bounded. Therefore
the system is stable.
th
v
t
t
t
c s
c s
c s
th
s
t
t
t
t y
th
Page 223
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems

ECE - 2006
1.
A system with input x
given
as
(s
5.
and output y
)x
Let x(t) be the input and y(t) be the

output of a continuous time system.
Match the system properties P1, P2 and P3
with system relations R1, R2, R3, R4.
Properties
Relations
P1: Linear but NOT
: y(t) = t x (t)
time-invariant
P2: Time-invariant
: y(t) = t |x (t)|
but NOT linear
P3: Linear and
: y(t) = |x (t)|
time-invariant
:y t
x t
5)
(A) (P1, R1), (P2, R3), (P3, R4)
(B) (P1, R2), (P2, R3), (P3, R4)
(C) (P1, R3), (P2, R1), (P3, R2)
(D) (P1, R1), (P2, R2), (P3, R3)
is
The
system is
(A) linear, stable and invertible
(B) non-linear, stable and non-invertible
(C) linear, stable and non-invertible
(D) linear, unstable and invertible
ECE - 2008
2.
A discrete time linear shift-invariant
system has an impulse response h[n] with
, and zero
otherwise. The system is given an input
sequence x[n] with x[0] = x[2] =1, and
zero otherwise. The number of nonzero
samples in the output sequence y[n] and
the value of y[2] are, respectively
(A) 5, 2
(C) 6, 1
(B) 6, 2
(D) 5, 3
3.
4.
ECE - 2009
6.
Consider a system whose input x and
output y are related by the equation :
The impulse response h(t) of a linear

time-invariant continuous time system is
described by
h(t) = exp( t)u(t) + exp( t)u( t), where
u(t) denotes the unit step function, and
and are real constants. This system is
stable if
(A) is positive and is positive
(B) is negative and is negative
(C) is positive and is negative
(D) is negative and is positive
y t
x t
H(t)
(t)
Where h(t) is shown in the graph.

Which of the following four properties are
possessed by the system?
BIBO: Bounded input gives a bounded
output
Causal: The system is casual
LP : The system is low pass
LTI : The system is linear and timeinvariant
(A) Casual ,LP
(B) BIBO ,LTI
(C) BIBO, Casual, LTI
(D) LP , LTI
The input and output of a continuous time

system are respectively denoted by x(t)
and y(t). Which of the following
description corresponds to a causal
system?
(A) y(t) = x(t 2) + x (t + 4)
(B) y(t) = (t 4) x (t + 1)
(C) y(t) = (t + 4) x (t 1)
(D) y(t) = (t + 5) x (t + 5)
th
th
th
Page 224
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
ECE - 2010
7.
Two discrete time systems with impulse
responses
and
are connected in
cascade. The overall impulse response of
the cascaded system is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2013
12. The DFT of a vector
c is the vector
. Consider the product
c
c
pqrs
c [
].
c
c
The DFT of the vector p q r s is a scaled
version of
(A)
ECE - 2011
8.
A system is defined by its impulse
response
u
. The system
is
(A) Stable and causal
(B) Causal but not stable
(C) Stable but not causal
(D) Unstable and noncausal
ECE - 2014
13. The
value
of
the
s c t t is ________.
9.
An input
is applied
response
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
x t
xp
t u t
t
to an LTI system with impulse
t
u t The output is
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
(B) [ ]
(C)
(D)
14.
A continuous, linear time-invariant filter

has an impulse response h(t) described
f r t
by t
,
t rw s
When a constant input of value 5 is
applied to this filter, the steady state
output is_____.
15.
Consider a discrete-time signal

f r
x
,
t rw s
If y[n] is the convolution of x[n] with
itself, the value of y[4] is _________.
16.
The input-output relationship of a causal

stable LTI system is given as
y
y
x
If the impulse response
of this
system
satisfies
the
condition
, the relationship between

and is
(A)
/
(C)
(B)
/
(D)
17.
Let h(t) denote the impulse response of a
ECE /EE/IN- 2012

10. The input x(t) and output y(t) of a system
are related as y(t) = x c s
The system is
(A) time-invariant and stable
(B) stable and not time-invariant
(C) time-invariant and not stable
(D) not time-invariant and not stable
11.
Let y[n] denote the convolution of h[n]

and g[n], where h[n]= (1/2)n u[n] and
g[n] is causal sequence. If y[0]=1 and
y[1]=1/2, then g[1] equals
(A) 0
(C) 1
(B) 1/2
(D) 3/2
integral
causal system with transfer function
Consider the following three statements.

S1: The system is stable.
th
th
th
Page 225
GATE QUESTION BANK
S2:
y [ 0 ] = 3, y[ 2 ] = 2 is the output of a
discrete time LTI system. The system
impulse response h [ n ] will be
(A) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 2, h[ 0 ] = 1,
h[1]=h[2]= 1
(B) h [ n ] = 0; n < 1, n > 1, h[ 1 ] = 1,
h[0]=h[1]=2
(C) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 3, h[ 0 ] = 1,
h [ 1 ] =2, h [ 2 ] = 1
(D) h [ n ] = 0; n < 2, n > 1,
h[ 2 ] = h [ 1 ] =h [ 1]
= h[0]=3
is independent of t for t > 0.
S3: A non-causal system with the same

transfer function is stable.
For the above system,
(A) only S1 and S2 are true
(B) only S2 and S3 are true
(C) only S1 and S3 are true
(D) S1, S2 and S3 are true
18.
A real-valued signal x(t) limited to the

frequency band |f| is passed through
a linear time invariant system whose
frequency response is
|f|
f
{
|f|
The output of the system is

(A) x t
(C) x t
(B) x t
(D) x t
19.
A stable linear time invariant (LTI)

system
has
a
transfer
function
H(s)
. To make this system causal
it needs to be cascaded with another LTI

system having a transfer function
s .
A correct choice for
s among the
following options is
(A) s
(C) s
(B) s
(D) s
EE - 2006
1.
A continuous time system is described
by y(t) = | | , where y(t) is the output
and x(t) is the input. y(t) is bounded
(A) only when x(t) is bounded
(B) only when x(t) is non negative
(C) only for t 0 if x(t) is bounded for
t0
(D) even when x(t) is not bounded
2.
x[n] = 0; n < 1, n > 0, x [ 1] = 1,

x[ 0 ] = 2 is the input and
y[ n ] = 0;
n < 1, n > 2, y [ 1 ] = 1 = y [1],
Signals and Systems
EE - 2007
3.
X(z) = 1 z , Y(z)= 1+ z are
Z transforms of two signals x[n], y[n]
respectively. A linear time invariant
system has the impulse response h[n]
defined by these two signals as
h[n] = x[n 1] y[n] where
denotes
discrete time convolution. Then the
output of the syst m f r t
put
-1]
(A) Has Z-transform
X(z) Y(z)
(B) qu s
2]
4]
5]
(C)
s
tr sf rm
z
z
z
(D) Does not satisfy any of the above
three.
EE - 2008
4.
A signal
sin ( t) is the input to a
Linear Time Invariant system. Given K
and
are constants, the output of the
system will be of the form
sin
(vt
) where
(A)
t
qu t
; but equal
to
(B) v need not be equal to
ut
qu
to
(C)
qu t
and equal to
(D)
t
qual to and need
not be equal to
th
th
th
Page 226
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
6.
The impulse response of a causal linear

time-invariant system is given as h(t).
Now consider the following two
statements
Statement (i): Principle of superposition
holds
Statement (ii) : h(t) = 0 for t < 0
correct?
(A) Statement (i) is correct and
Statement (ii) is wrong
(B) Statement (ii) is correct and
Statement (i) is wrong
(C) Both Statement (i) and Statement (ii)
are wrong
(D) Both Statement (i) and Statement (ii)
are correct
A system with input x(t) and output y(t)
is defined by the input-output relation,
y (t) =
The system will be
(A) causal, time-invariant and unstable

(B) causal, time-invariant and stable
(C) non causal, time-invariant and
unstable
(D) non - causal, time-variant and
unstable
EE - 2009
7.
A Linear Time Invariant system with
an impulse response h(t) produces
output y(t) when input x(t) is applied.
When the input x (t
s pp
t
system with impulse response h(
),
the output will be
(A) y(t)
(C) y(t
(B) y(2(t
(D) y(t
8.
The z transform of a signal x[n] is given

by z + z + 2 6z2 + 2z3. It is
applied to a system, with a transfer
function H(z) = z
2. Let the output
be y[n]. Which of the following is true?
(A) y[n] is non causal with finite support
(B) y[n] is causal with infinite support
Signals and Systems
(C) y[n] = 0;|n|>3

(D) Re[Y[z]
= Re[Y[z]
Im[Y[z]
= Im[Y[z]

9.
A cascade of 3 Linear Time Invariant

systems is causal and unstable. From this,
we conclude that
(A) Each system in the cascade is
individually causal and unstable
(B) At least one system is unstable and at
least one system is causal
(C) At least one system is causal and all
systems are unstable
(D) The majority are unstable and the
majority are causal
EE - 2010
10. Given the finite length input x[n] and the
corresponding finite length output y[n] of
an LTI system as shown below, the
impulse response h[n] of the system is
h[n]
y[n] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1}
x[n] = {1, 1}
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
The system represented by the inputoutput relationship

y t
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
t
is
x
Linear and causal
Linear but not causal
Causal but not linear
Neither linear nor causal
EE - 2011
12. The response h(t) of a linear time
v r t syst m t
mpu s
t
under initially relaxed condition is
th
th
th
Page 227
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
h(t) =
. The response of this
system for a unit step input u(t) is
(A) u(t) +
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
t
u t
Given two continuous time signals
x(t) =
and y(t) =
which exist for
t > 0 the convolution z(t) = x(t) * y(t) is
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
(D)
EE - 2013
14. Which one of the following statement is
NOT TRUE for a continuous time causal
and stable LTI system?
(A) All the poles of the system must lie on
the left side of the j axis.
(B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere
in the s-plane
(C) All the poles must lie within |s|
(D) All the root of the characteristic
equation must be located on the left
side of the j axis.
If the input to the system is cos(3t) and

the steady state output is A sin(3t + ),
then the value of A is
(A) 1/30
(C) 3/4
(B) 1/15
(D) 4/3
17.
Consider an LTI system with impulse

response h(t) =
u t . If the output of
the system is y t
u t
u t
then the input, x(t), is given by
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
u t
18.
A 10 kHz even-symmetric square wave is

passed through a bandpass filter with
centre frequency at 30 kHz and 3 dB
passband of 6 kHz. The filter output is
(A) a highly attenuated square wave at 10
kHz.
(B) nearly zero.
(C) a nearly perfect cosine wave at 30
kHz.
(D) a nearly perfect sine wave at 30 kHz.
19.
A continuous-time LTI system with

system function H( ) has the following
pole-zero plot. For this system, which of
the alternatives is TRUE?
EE - 2014
15. x(t) is nonzero only for
t
, and
similarly, y(t) is nonzero only for
t
. Let z(t) be convolution of x(t)
and y(t). Which one of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) z(t) can be nonzero over an
unbounded interval.
(B) z(t) is nonzero for t
(C) z(t) is zero outside of
t
(D) z(t) is nonzero for t
.
16.
(A) |
(B) |
(C) |
(D) |
Consider an LTI system with transfer

function
s
Signals and Systems
|
|
|
|
|
| | |
s mu t p m x m
|
| | |
c st t
s s
th
th
th
Page 228
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2007
1.
The signals x(t) and h(t) shown in the
figures are convolved to yield y(t) .
3.
Consider a discrete-time LTI system with

input x [n] = [n] + [n 1] and impulse
response h[n] = [n] [n 1]. The
output of the system will be given by
(A) [n] [n 2]
(B) [n] [n 1]
(C) [n 1]+ [n 2]
(D) [n]+ [n 1]+ [n 2]
x(t)
1
1
1
1
h(t)
1
0
Which one of the following figures

presents the output y(t)?
(A)
y(t)
IN - 2009
4.
A linear time-invariant casual system has
frequency response given in polar form
as:
For input x(t) = sint, the output is
(A)
(B)
(B)
y(t)
(C)
1
4
(C)
(D)
y(t)
1
1
Signals and Systems
c st
c s (t
s t
s
(t
IN - 2011
5.
Consider the signal
t
x(t) = {
t
Let X( ) denote the Fourier transform of
this signal. The integral
is
(D)
(A) 0
(B)
y t)
1
3
1
(C) 1
(D)
IN - 2013
6.
The impulse response of a system is
h(t) = t u(t). for an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A)
IN - 2008
2.
Which one of the following discrete-time
systems is time invariant?
(A) y [n] = nx [n]
(C) y[n] = x[ n]
(B) y [n] = x [3n]
(D) y [n] = x[n 3]
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
th
u t
th
th
Page 229
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
IN - 2014
7.
The impulse response of an LTI system is
given as :
{s
It represents an ideal
(A) non-causal, low-pass filter
(B) causal, low-pass filter
(C) non-causal, high-pass filter
(D) causal, high-pass filter

ECE
1.
[Ans. C]
x
x[k]
[s
( )] x
The system is linear as y(n) is

proportional to the input x(n)
Times varying as x(n) is multiplied not by
a constant but by a function of n.
Stable as bounded input, x(n) gives
bounded output , y(n) :
|s ( )|
and |y
| |x
2
1
0
1
h[k]
+1
2
Not invertible as several inputs: k (n) ,

where k is any arbitrary integer, give the
same output equal to zero.
The system is Linear, stable and
non invertible
(It is also Time varying).
2.
[Ans. D]
y
x
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
3.
[Ans. D]
h(t) = u t
u t
For the system to be stable ,
t t
For the above condition, h(t) should be as

shown below.
th
th
th
Page 230
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
u t
u t
9.
syst m s
[Ans. D]
s
y(s) = X(s).H(s)
Therefore
Graph for
s s
y t
[Ans. C]
A system is casual if the output at any
time depends only on values of the input
at the present time and in the past.
5.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. B]
y t
10.
x t
y t
c s
check for time invariant

x
y t
f r
x t
c s
t
y
utput
c s
For delayed input
y t
It is not low pass filter.

But the system is LTI and BIBO.
8.
u t
[Ans. D]
y t
x
t
c s
P
p
[Ans. C]
H(z) =
u t
h(t)
7.
s
s
taking inverse
w
t
4.
t st
where
t
P t t
When
P
Also
P t
z =
[Ans. B]
u
For causal system h(n) = 0 for n < 0.
Hence given system is casual.
For stability:
y t
x P c s
s c y t
y t t
It is not time invariant for a bounded
input, x (t) = cos (3t) u(t)
th
th
th
Page 231
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
x
y t
c s
{x
} { c um v ct r }
su
11.
{x
x
Designing the
sequence
x
x
x
x
c s
u
syst m s
st
t stable.
[Ans. A]
g(1)
g(0)
1[- k]
1/2
1/4
k
0 1 0 1
c
c
y
x
x
x
x
x
[ x
]
Now circular convolutions given by
x
x
x
c
c
[
]
c
c
Now circular convolution of
c with
it self
c
c
c
c
[
]0 1
c
c
c
Taking transpose both side
c
c
0 1 0 1
c
[
]
c
c
c
c
Let
( ) u
} { c um v ct r }
x
matrix using same
Take DFT both side
y
P
0 1 0 1
c
c
y
h[1 k] will be zero for k > 1 and g[k] will
be zero for k<0 as it is causal sequence.
P
13.
g [1] = 0
12.
[Ans. *] Range 0.19 to 0.21

f
s c t
r ct ( )
| |
s c
[Ans. A]
Matrix method
| |
th
th
f
|r ct ( )|
th
P rs v
st
Page 232
r m
GATE QUESTION BANK

f
tr ( )
Signals and Systems
( tr ( ) f)
f
tr ( ) f
| |
17.
[Ans. A]
t
14.
f r t
t
,
t rw s
t
u t
u t
s
y s
r st
s
y st t
s
S : Syst m s st
c us
t s ut y
t
S :
s
p
t
t
s
utput
m sy s
s
c s t f rm f % s
Hospital Rule?
pp y

18.
t ftm
t ftm
x t
[Ans. *] Range 9.9 to 10.1

f r
x
,
t rw s
x z
z
z
z
z
Convolution in time domain is
multiplication z domain
z
x z x z
f rf
y
,we have to find
coefficient of z
fy z
S t s
t (a non-causal system)
[Ans. D]
t
y t
[Ans. A]
y
y
y z
y z z
y z
x z
z
t r
but this is not absolutely integrable thus

unstable
Only S and S are TRUE
16.
u t
S : A non-causal system with same

transfer function is stable
15.
x t
f
x f
f
y t
x t
19.
y t
t c v ut
f
f
[Ans. B]
s
s
s
s
s
For a stable causal LTI systems, all system
poles should lie on LHP of s-plane.
So to make H(s) causal, we need to cancel
out the pole at s = 2
So,
s
s
x
x z
th
th
th
Page 233
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE
1.
2.
= output of the LTI system due to

the input =
output due to the input
[Ans. D]
y(t) = | | ,
|x t | is always positive for positive as
well as negative values of x(t).
When x(t) is bounded, y (t) is bounded.
Even when x(t) is not bounded
i.e, x(t) = f r y t
Y(t) =
y t s u
v w
x t s t
bounded.
[Ans. A]
For finite duration convolution
x[n] have M terms
h[n] have N terms
then, y[n] should have terms (M+N 1)
Here, x[n] = { 1, 2}
Note that the following definitions and

properties are used:
z
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2}
so option (A) is correct .
3.
If the input to an LTI system is shifted by

units, the output is also shifted by
units.
4.
[Ans. A]
If the input x(t) = s
t to a real Linear
Time Invariant system with frequency
response
, then the output
y(t) = s
t
If the input is a damped sinusoid
need not equal to alpha but frequency
v
5.
[Ans. D]
An LTI system is causal if the impulse
response , h(t) =0 for t< 0
The principle of superposition holds for a
linear system.
t st t m ts
r c rr ct
6.
[Ans. D]
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2}
So, h[n] should have only 3 terms and
h[n] have value starting from origin of
[n=0] only because y[n] have start from
[n = 1]
s r pt
1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
Signals and Systems
Given y(t) =
y at time t is depending on values of x(t)

in the range of t = 0 to ( 2t).
i.e., y for negative values of time is
depending on x at positive values of time.
Hence System is non causal
For a bounded input like a step function
the output is not bounded , as the input is
integrated.
[Ans. B]
For (x) = 1 3z
x(n)
delaying by 1
x
For Y(z) =
z
y
x
y
put x t
For x t
th
th
utput y t
x t
t
th
Page 234
GATE QUESTION BANK
utput
x t
x t
greater than zero even so atleast one of

them must be causal. Similarly even if one
(alteast) of the system become unstable
then overall system will become unstable.
t
10.
Where t
But y t
x t t
As equations (1) and (2) are not equal ,

System is Time variant
Syst m s
causal , Time variant ,
and unstable.
It may be noted that the system is Linear.
7.
8.
[Ans. D]
Case 1: Y(s) = H(s). X(s)
Case 2: input = x(t
s
Impulse response = h(t
Output: Y(s) = X(s).
. H(s)
= X(s). H(s).
y(t 2
[Ans. A]
y[n] = x[n] *H[n]
y[z]=x[z] H[z]
y[z] = z
z
Since output has
z
z
z
z
comparing with
y[n] = [1, 0, 0, 0, - 1]
z
z
z
y
f r
Therefore it is not causal with finite
support
9.
no. of elements
Where N is number of elements in

impulse response h[n]
1
N=4
Let it be
Then X(z)=
z
z
z
z
y z
x z z
y z
z
z
z
z
So,
y
[Ans. C]
x[n] = {1,-1} , M=2
y[N] = { 1,0,0,0, - 1} . N1 =5
z
z
Signals and Systems
[Ans. B]
Since in cascade overall impulse response
h(t) = h1(t)* h2(t)* h3(t)
h1(t), h2(t), h3(t) are impulse responses of
individual systems.
Since initial point where h(t) is nonzero is
t 0 and since in convolution initial point
t
t
t
Where t t t are initial points of
t
t
t respectively.
So for it to be greater than zero atleast
one of them
t t
t must be +ve
11.
[Ans. B]
Integrator is always a linear support
Since y(t) =
For t = 1
y t
Here value at t = 1 depends on future

v u s
tt
f put x t
So it is a non-causal system.
th
th
th
Page 235
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
[Ans. C]
For given LTI system with input
response h(t) =
t
15.
t
Signals and Systems
[Ans. C]
,
x t
Note that u(t) =

t t. For an LTI
system, if the input is integrated, the
output is also integrated.
r u t st p
put
u t
t
response, s(t) is given
s t
s t
y t
t t
Thus z t is zero outside

t
by
convolution
f r t
s t
[Ans. B]
[Ans. A]
X(s) =
s
s s
s
s
Z(s) = taking partial fraction

z t
14.
of
u t
16.
13.
property
u t
17.
[Ans. C]
Since it is a stable system all poles should
lie in the left half of s-plane
|S|
s This implies one pole lie
in RHS
[Ans. B]
t
s
u t
s
y s
y s
s
x s
s
s
th
s
s
18.
s
s
u t
[Ans. C]
10 kHz even symmetric square wave have
frequency component present
th
th
Page 236
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
Signals and Systems
10kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz, 70kHz

[Only odd harmonics due to half wave
symmetry]
Since bandpass filter is centered at
30kHz, 30kHz component will pass
through
filter output is nearly perfect cosine
wave at 30 kHz
Cosine in due to reason that signal in even
signal.
y(t)
[Ans. D]
-1
h(t+1)
1
1
1
21
h(t 1)
Fig. 3
y(t)
1
2
2
-1
Fig. 4
x(t) = 1 t
t
y t
t
* t
t
* t
using the properties of convolution:
t * t
t
t
* t
t
y t
t
t
The resultant of the triangles in Fig. 3 is
shown in Fig. 4
s
(
)(
(
(
(
su st tut
w
t|
IN
1.
)(
)(
)(
)(
)(
)(
s
|
st
2.
[Ans. D]
y(n) =x(n 3) represents a time delay
system with delay = 3 secs.
It is a Time invariant system as can be
confirmed from the following Test.
Test for time invariance:
If y1(n) = y(n-n0), then the system is time
invariant
rt
v syst m x
y
x -3)
[Ans. D]
y(t) = x(t) * h(t)
x(t) and h(t) are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig.2
x(t)
1
1
1
1
x
x
From (1) y
Fig. 1
y
x
x
h(t)
1
0
3.
[Ans. A]
z
z
y
Fig. 2
th
th
z
z
z
z
z
z
th
Page 237
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
Signals and Systems
[Ans. D]
T/F
x t
y t
Given,
Transfer function
And input x(t) = sint

t
y t
5.
[Ans. C]
Given x (t) =
t
t
x t
f
r pr p rty:
6.
f f
[Ans. C]
t
tu t
s
y s
y t
7.
x t |
s
s
*
u t
s
s
+
ut
[Ans. A]
For a system to be non-causal its impulse
response h(n) should depends upon
future value of n and if h(n) is
independent of the past value it never
means that system is non-causal
And it is the equation of LPF with cutoff
frequency
th
th
th
Page 238
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Fourier Representation of Signals

ECE - 2006
1.
t x t
) be Fourier Transform
pair. The Fourier Transform of the signals
x(5t 3) in terms of X(j ) is given as
(A)
(B)
X( )
X( )
(C)
X( )
(D)
X( )
ECE - 2012
6.
The Fourier transform of a signal h(t) is
H{j) = (2 cos) (sin 2 ) /. The value
of h(0) is
(A) 1/4
(C) 1
(B) 1/2
(D) 2
ECE- 2013
ECE - 2007
2.
A 5-point sequence x[n] is given as
x[ 3]=1, x[ 2]=1, x[ 1]=0, x[0]=5,
x[1]=1. Let X(
denote the discretetime Fourier transform of x[n]. The value
of
( )
s
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 16
(D) 5+j10
ECE - 2008
3.
The signal x(t) is described by
f r
t
x(t) =,
.
t rw s
Two of the angular frequencies at which
its Fourier transform becomes zero are
(A)
(C) 0,
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2009
4.
The Fourier series of a real periodic
function has only
P. cosine terms if it is even
Q. sine terms if it is even
R. cosine terms if it odd
S. sine terms if it is odd
Which of the above statement are
correct?
(A) P and S
(C) Q and S
(B) P and R
(D) Q and R
ECE - 2011
5.
The trigonometric Fourier series of an
even function does not have the
(A) dc term
(B) cosine terms
(C) sine terms
(D) odd harmonic terms
7.
Let g(t) =
and h(t) is a filter
matched to g(t). If g(t) is applied as input
to h(t) , then the Fourier transform of the
output is
||
(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
ECE- 2014
8.
For a function g(t), it is given that
t
value if
y(t) =
for any real

t
(A) 0
(B)
9.
y t t s
(C)
(D)
Consider a discrete time periodic signal

x[n] = s
( ) Let
be the complex
Fourier series coefficients of x[n]. The

coefficients { } are non-zero when
k = Bm 1, where m is any integer. The
value of B is ______.
10.
A Fourier transform pair is given by

( ) u
( )
Where u[n] denotes the unit

sequence. The values of A is _______.
step
EE- 2006
1.
x(t) is a real valued function of a real
variable with period T. Its trigonometric
Fourier Series expansion contains no
terms of frequency = 2 (2k) / T;
th
th
th
Page 239
GATE QUESTION BANK
k = 1,
s
s
t rms r
present. Then x(t) satisfies the equation
(A) x(t) = x (t T)
(B) x(t) = x (T t) = x ( t)
(C) x(t) = x (T t) = x (t T / 2)
(D) x(t) = x (t T) = x(t T / 2)
EE- 2008
4.
Let x(t) = rect(t
x t
the Fourier Transform of x(t) + x( t) will

be given by
5.
c s(
(C)
s (
(B)
c s(
(D)
s (
The frequency spectrum of a signal is

shown in the figure. If this signal is ideally
sampled at intervals of 1 ms, then the
frequency spectrum of the sampled signal
will be
|U |
(A) sinc( )
(C) 2sinc( )cos( )
(B) 2sinc ( )
(D) sinc( )sin( )
Let x (t) be a periodic signal with time

period T. Let y(t) = x(t t0) + x(t + t0)
for some t0. The Fourier Series
coefficients of y (t) are denoted by .
If = 0 for all odd k, then t0 can be equal
to
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 2T
EE- 2009
6.
The Fourier Series coefficient, of a
periodic signal x(t), expressed as
x(t) =
are given by
=
j1;
= 0.5 + j0.2;
= j2;
=0.5 j0.2;
= 2 + j1; and = 0; for
| |> 2.Which of the following is true?
(A) x(t) has finite energy because only
finitely many coefficients are nonzero
(B) x(t) has zero average value because
it is periodic
(C) The imaginary part of x(t) is constant
(D) The real part of x(t) is even
1 KHz
|U
and
(A)
(A)
zero otherwise). Then if sinc(x) =
x t
{
Which among the following gives the
fundamental Fourier term of x(t)?
3.
(where rect (x) = 1) for
EE- 2007
2.
A single x(t) is given by
t
Signals and Systems
(B)
EE- 2010
7.
x t is a positive rectangular pulse from
t
t t
with unit height as
shown in the figure. The value of
|
{ where
is the Fourier
|
(C)
(D)
transform of x t } is
th
th
th
Page 240
GATE QUESTION BANK

x(t)
(A) 2
(B)
8.
(C) 4
(D)
The second harmonic component of the

periodic waveform given in the figure has
an amplitude of
EE- 2014
11. For a periodic square wave, which one of
the following statements is TRUE?
(A) The Fourier series coefficients do not
exist.
(B) The Fourier series coefficients exist
but the reconstruction converges at
no point.
(C) The Fourier series coefficients exist
and the reconstruction converges at
most points.
(D) The Fourier series coefficients exist
and the reconstruction converges at
every point.
12.
+1
Let f(t) be a continuous time signal and

let F( ) be its Fourier Transform defined
by
0
T
T/2
Signals and Systems
f t
Define g(t) by
-1
t
(A) 0
(B) 1
9.
(C) 2/
The period of the signal

t
) is
(A) 0.4s
(B) 0.8s
(C) 1.25s
(D) 2.5s
EE- 2011
10. The Fourier series expansion
f(t) =
c s t
s
t of
the periodic signal shown below will
contain the following nonzero terms
13.
f(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
and ,
and ,
and
and ,
What is the relationship between f(t) and

g(t) ?
(A) g(t) would always be proportional to
f(t).
(B) g(t) would be proportional to f(t) if
f(t) is an even function.
(C) g(t) would be proportional to f(t)
only if f(t) is a sinusoidal function.
(D) g(t) would never be proportional to
f(t).
(D)
x(t) = 8 s (
A discrete system is represented by the

difference equation
[
+[
It has initial conditions

. The pole locations
of the system for a = 1, are
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 241
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
A function f(t) is shown in the figure.
2.
If the waveform, shown in the following

figure, corresponds to the second
derivative of a given function f(t), then
the Fourier transform of f(t) is
f t
/
f t
t
/
/
Signals and Systems
/
1
The Fourier transform

f f t is
(A) real and even function of .
(B) real and odd function of .
(C) imaginary and odd function of .
(D) imaginary and even function of .
15.
A signal is represented by
|t|
x t
{
|t|
The Fourier transform of the convolved
signal y t
x t x t is
4.
The magnitude of fourier transform

of a function x(t) is shown below in figure
(a). The magnitude of fourier transform
of another function y(t) is shown
below in figure(b). The phases of
and
are zero for all
. The
magnitude frequency units are identical
in both the figures. The function y(t) can
be expressed in terms of x(t) as
|
|
|
|
A differentiable non constant even

function x(t) has a derivative y(t), and
their respective Fourier Transforms are
X( ) and Y( ). Which of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) X( ) and Y( ) are both real.
(B) X( ) is real and Y( ) is imaginary.
(C) X( ) and Y( ) are both imaginary.
(D) X( ) is imaginary and Y( ) is real.
IN- 2006
1.
The Fourier transform of a function g(t) is
s
Then the function
g(t) is given as,

(A)
t
xp( 3|t|)
(B) c s t
xp( 3t)
(C) s
t
c s t
(D) s
t
xp( 3t)
(D)
The Fourier series for a periodic signal is

v
s x t
c s
t
c s t
cos
t
fu
m t
fr qu cy
of the signal is
(A) 0.2 Hz
(C) 1.0 Hz
(B) 0.6 Hz
(D) 1.4 Hz
(C)
3.
16.
(A) 1 + sin
(B) 1 + cos
s ( )s
s ( )
+1
(A)
x( )
(C)
x t
(B)
x t
(D)
x( )
IN- 2007
5.
Consider the discrete-time signal
x[n] =( )
, where u
=,
Define the signal y[n] as y[n] = x[ n],
th
th
th
Page 242
GATE QUESTION BANK
y
(A)
(B)
IN- 2011
9.
Consider a periodic signal x(t) as shown
below
qu s
(C)
(D) 3
Signals and Systems
x(t)
1
6.
Let the signal x(t) have the Fourier

tr sf rm
s rt s
y(t) =
x t
where t
0 1
2 3
4 5 6
is an
It has a Fourier series representation
arbitrary delay. The magnitude of the

Fourier transform of y(t) is given by the
expression
| | |
(A) |
|
(B) |
|
(C)
.|
|.
(D) | |.|
IN- 2008
7.
The fourier transform x(t) =
u t
when u(t) is unit step function,
(A) Exist for any real value of a
(B) Does not exist for any real value of a
(C) Exists if any real value of a is strictly
negative
(D) Exists if the real value of a is strictly
positive
x t

TRUE?
(A)
for k odd integer and T = 3
(B)
, for k even integer and T = 3
(C)
for k even integer and T = 6
(D)
, for k odd integer and T = 6
IN- 2014
10. x(k)is the Discrete Fourier Transform of a
6-point real sequence ().
If X(0)= 9 + j0, X(2)= 2 + j2, X(3)=
3 j0, X(5)= 1 j1,x(0) is
(A) 3
(C) 15
(B) 9
(D) 18
IN- 2010
8.
f(x), shown in the adjoining figure is
represented by
f x
The value of
c s x
x }
is
f x
(A) 0
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 243
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems

ECE
1.
6.
[Ans. C]
c s
[Ans. A]
x t
x [ (t
)]
c s s c
s c
[Ans. B]
( )
[Ans. A]
t
r ct ( )
{
t { t
t
{r c (
t }
}
t
)
r ct (
)}
-1
+1
)
7.
[Ans. D]
The concept of matched filter assumes
that the input signal is of the same form
g(t) as the transmitted signal(except
difference in amplitude ). This requires
that the shape of the transmitted signal
not change on reflection.
h(t) = g( t f
(f)
G f
f
f sr

[Ans. A ]
P & S are correct
[Ans. C]
S xp s
f
have sine terms.
t
r ct ( )
-3
5.
s c(
x t
4.
)
ys c
3.
Now r ct ( )
s c(
c s
Using scaling and shifting property.

2.
g(t) =
(fourier transform)
y t
h(t)
g(t)
fu ct
g(t)
s t
y(t)= h(t) * g(t) [convolution]
th
th
th
Page 244
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
[Ans. B]
Given
9.
x(t T) = x( t+T)
but signal is periodic with period T.
therefore x(t T) = x(t)
therefore x(t) = x(T t
Now since signal contains only odd
harmonics i.e no terms of frequency
y t
y t t
y
i.e. no even harmonics. This means signal
contains half wave symmetry this implies
that
x(t) = x(t /
From (i) and (ii)
x(t) = x(T t)
= x(t T/2)
[Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01
x
s * +
/
P r
S
fx
Signals and Systems
2.
[Ans. A]
The given signal x(t) is a periodic
waveform with period T0 =2 T and
satisfies half wave symmetry:
So is non-zero for k = 1 and

.
Fourier co-efficient are periodic with N
N= 10
So the value of k for which
are
x(t) =
x (t
x t
as shown
in Fig.1
Comparing
We see m x
10.
x(t)
1
[Ans. *] Range 3.36 to 3.39

( ) u
( )
( ) u
( )
( )
( )
0
-1
u
u
Fig . 1
Fundamental frequency =
x t
( )
EE
1.
m is any integer
x (t
shown
/
= /
in
Fig.
possesses Even symmetry and also half

wave symmetry.
Fundamental Fourier term of
( )
x t
( )
c st ( t)
Where M = peak to peak value of

x t
[Ans. C]
Since trigonometric fourier series has no
sine terms and has only cosine terms
therefore this will be an even signal i.e. it
will satisfy
x(t) =x( t)
or we can write
th
th
th
Page 245
GATE QUESTION BANK

x1(t)
4.
[Ans. C]
x t
r ct t
x t
t
= 0 otherwise
1
t
Signals and Systems
x t
x t
Fig. 2
)
As x(t)= x (t
Fundamental component of
x t
c s [ (t
)]
c s* t
+
3.
x t
f(in kHz)
Sampling interval ,
ms f
z
f
f . Therefore Aliasing or overlap of
the adjacent spectra in the sampled
spectrum because f
f .
The sampled spectrum ,
U*
f
f
f
f
as shown in Fig. 2.
The resultant spectrum, U*
is
c st t f r
f s s w
w c
is the same figure given in option(b)
|
x t
s c(
c s
5.
)c s( )
[Ans. B]
y t
x t t
x t t
Since y(t) is periodic with period T.
Therefore x t t
x t t will also
be periodic with period T.
fs
M
f
0
Fig. 3
|
is fourier series coefficient of signal

x(t) therefore
[
]
c s
t
s c
f r
f |
-2
Fig. 1
+x
w r x t
0, otherwise
[Ans. B]
Highest frequency of the input signal,
fh = 1kHz as shown in its spectrum of
Fig. 1
|
| r| f |
-1 0 1
Fig. 2
f(in kHz)
th
th
th
Page 246
GATE QUESTION BANK
i.e.
r
t
t
6.
I.
Signals and Systems
]x t t
[Ans. C]
A periodic signal x(t) has always
infinite energy
III.
x t t
x t t
For a0 to be purely imaginary = 2j

The first integral should be zero and
the second integral should not be
zero.
i.e. xR(t) should be either 0 or an odd
function.
option (D) is not true.
And xI(t) should be a constant or an
even function so that the integral is
not zero.
option (C) is true.
7.
]x t t
option (A) is not true.

The average value a0 of a periodic
signal need not be zero.
Infact a0 = j2 as given in this
question
option (B) is not true.
The complex value of a0 indicates
that x(t) should be complex.
Let x(t) = xR(t) +jxI(t)
Where xR(t) and xI(t) are the real and
imaginary parts of x(t).
II.
x t x t t
|x t |
|x t |
8.
[Ans. A]
f(t) is odd no cosine terms and no dc.
Also, by inspection, half wave symmetry
no sine even harmonics no second
harmonics amplitude = 0.
9.
[Ans. D]
From the given signal x(t)
rad/sec
s c
10.
[Ans. D]
Observe the given periodic f(t) shown in
Fig. 1
f(t)
A
[Ans. D]
Fig. 1
(1) Its
t]
average
value
f t t
(2) It has even symmetry. i.e; f(t) = f(-t)

th
th
th
Page 247
GATE QUESTION BANK
s
t rms r
s t f t
(3) The function f1(t) = [f(t)-a0] has half
wave symmetry or odd harmonic
symmetry:
i.e., f t
f (
Signals and Systems
14.
[Ans. C]
Given function is odd
is imaginary and odd in
15.
[Ans. A]
Even harmonics are absent

From observations (2) and (3)
above,
bn
f r v u s f
an
f r v v u s f
an
f r
x t
x t
f1(t)
12.
16.
*
*
|S
P
s
s
sr
(x t ) t
f ur r tr
sf rm
ry
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
t
Given ,
Use the F.T. pairs:

t
u t
|
s
( )s
[Ans. B]
x t v fu ct
+ putt
s
( )
[Ans. A]
Poles of the system are the roots of the
|
equation |S
r
y t
f t ff t s v
t is proportional to f(t) if f(t) is even.
13.
( )
[Ans. B]
Since F( ) is FT of f(t) hence
[Ans. C]
Fourier series exists for periodic waves.
Since it is a square wave, convergence
occurs at most points
/ s
Convolution in time domain

= multiplication of Fourier transforms
t
y t
x t x( )
Fig. 2
11.
/
/
t
x( )
If t replaced by ( t),
(
is replaced by
u t
th
th
th
Page 248
GATE QUESTION BANK
u t
Signals and Systems
t
So, y t
||
||
5.
In general, K
t
2.
t/
[Ans. C]
||
Given x(n) = ( ) u
||
[Ans. C]
From the given plot,
t
y
t
( )
( )
Take F.T on both sides

Use the following pairs and properties:
Let f(t)
rst t rm
mm r t
f t
t
t
6.
[Ans. A]
{x t t }
c s
c s
4.
7.
[Ans. A]
f
z; f
z f
z
u
m t fr qu cy f x t
f0=0.2
Hz (HCF of are the frequency)
f
f
rm c f
f
harmonic
x t
| ||
[Ans. C]
The fourier transform of
u
t s
s >0
f
u t will exist
If
a<0
8.
[Ans. A]
The given function f(x) is periodic
function with period, T =
F(x) is shown over one period from 0 to
in Fig.
[Ans. D]
c s
3.
The d.c value of f(x) =

r
We know that expansion in frequency
domain result in compression in time
domain and vice-versa.
Here compression is done in frequency
domain, So there will be expansion in
time domain by same amount.
f x x
rf x
As can be seen from Fig.
So for x ( )
th
th
th
Page 249
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
f(x)
1.5
1.0
x
0
-1.0
-1.5
Fig.
9.
[Ans. B]
Clearly, period of the signal x(t) is 3.
So, T = 3
And
x t t
x t t
so, ak=0 for k even integer.

10.
[Ans. A]
Given 6 point DFT of x[n] with
y symm try pr p rt s
th
th
th
Page 250
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Z-Transform
ECE - 2006
1.
If the region of convergence of
x [n] +x [n] is 1/3 < |z|<2/3, then the
region of convergence of x [n] x [n]
includes
(A) < |z|< 3
(C) < |z|< 3
(B) < |z|< 3
(D) < |z|<
ECE - 2009
5.
The ROC of Z-Transform of the discrete
time sequence ,
x[n] = ( ) u
region of convergence of x[z] includes the

unit circle. The value of x[0] is
(A) 0.5
(C) 0.25
(B) 0
(D) 0.5
ECE - 2008
Statement for linked question 3 and 4:
In the following network, the switch is
closed at t =
and the sampling starts
from t = 0. The sampling frequency is 10Hz.
(D)
|z|
ECE - 2010
6.
Consider the z-transform
|z|
z
z
z
;
inverse z-transform x[n] is
(A) 5
(B) 5
(C) 5 u
u
u
(D) 5 u
u
u
7.
The
The transfer function of a discrete time LTI

system is given by
Consider the following statements:

S1: The system is stable and causal for ROC:
|z|
x z
x
S mp r
f
z
is
(C) |z|
(B) |z|
. It is given that the
|z|
(A)
ECE - 2007
2.
The z-transform x[z] of a sequence x[n] is
given by x[z] =
( ) u
S2: The system is stable but not causal for

z
tr
sf rm
ROC: |z|
S3: The system is neither stable nor causal
|z|
for ROC:
3.
The samples x [n] (n = 0, 1, 2, ...) are given

by
(A) 5 (1
)
(C) 5 (1
)
(B) 5
(D) 5
4.
The expression and the region of

convergence of the z-transform of the
sampled signal are
(A)
, |z| < e-5
(B)
(C)
(D)
, | z | < e-0.05
-
, | z | > e-0.05

valid?
(A) Both S1 and S2 are true
(B) Both S2 and S3 are true
(C) Both S1 and S3 are true
(D) S1, S2 and S3 are all true
ECE - 2011
8.
Two systems
z and
z are connected
in cascade as shown below. The overall
output y(n) is the same as the input x(n)
with a one unit delay. The transfer function
of the second system
z is
, |z| > e-5
th
th
th
Page 251
GATE QUESTION BANK
=
(C) y [ n ]
(D) y [ n ]
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
(A)
| |
(C)
| |
(B)
| |
(D)
| |
of X(z) z
(A) an-1
(B) an
3.
) u
+ z
z
+1
) u
The region of convergence (ROC) of the ztransform of x[n]

(C) s
(B) s |z|
(D) Does not exist
)H(z)
is
the
entire
Z-plane
(Except z = 0). It can then be inferred that H

(z) can have a minimum of
(A) one pole and one zero
(B) one pole and two zero
(C) two poles and one zero
(D) two poles and two zeros
(A) s |z|
at z = a for n 0 will be
(C) nan
(D) nan-1
H (z) is a transfer function of a real system.

(When a signal x[n] = (1 + j)n is the input to
such a system, the output is zero. Further,
the region of convergence (ROC) of
ECE - 2014
(
| |
with | |> a, the residue
Given X (z) =
(
tx
z
y (z)=
y (z)= z
EE - 2008
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
| |
u
9.
If x
then the
region of convergence (ROC) of its Ztransform in the Z-plane will be
10.
Signals and Systems
|z|
EE - 2014
11.
12.
Let x[] = ]. Let

z be the
-transform of []. If 0.5+j0.25 is a zero of
z which one of the following must also
be a zero of z
(A)
(B) /
(C) /
(D)
The z-transform of the sequence x[n] is
given by
with the region of
convergence|z|
. . Then, x [2] is_______.
EE - 2007
1.
The discrete time signal
x[n]
X (Z) =
4.
Let
causal signal x[n]. Then, the values of x[2]

and x[3] are
(A) 0 and 0
(C) 1 and 0
(B) 0 and 1
(D) 1 and 1
IN - 2008
1.
The region of convergence of the ztransform of the discrete-time signal
x[n] = 2nu[n] will be
(A) | |>2
(C) | |>
(B) | |< 2
(D) | |<
y[n]
Where
denotes a transform pair
relationship, is orthogonal to the signal
y (z)=
(B) y [ n ]
y (z)
be the Z-transform of a
IN - 2011
2.
Consider the difference equation
z ,
(A) y [ n ]
x[n] = ( ) u
. Assuming the condition of
initial rest, th s ut
( ) z
(A) 3 ( )
th
th
and suppose that
f ry
( )
th
Page 252
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B)
( )
( )
(C)
( )
( )
(D)
( )
( )
4.
Signals and Systems
(A) | |<
(C) | |>
(B) | |<
(D) | |<
The transfer function of a digital system is

given by:
IN - 2014
3.
The system function of an LTI system is
given by
; where
is real.
The transfer function is BIBO stable if the

value of is:
(A) 1.5
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.75
(D) 1.5
z
z
The above system can have stable inverse if
the region of convergence of H(z)is defined
as

ECE
1.
r|
[Ans. D]
ROC {x
x }
{x
x }(if
are no pole-zero cancellation)
5.
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
ROC is |z|
x
0.5
[Ans. A]
Recall the z transform pairs:
For
the
Right
sided
sequence:
|z| | |
u
For Left sided sequence:

|z|
u
[Ans. B]
s
r |z|
there
( ) u
|z|
z
z
( )
| |
|z|
For x(n) containing both the above

terms the ROC is the overlapping region:
t
Therefore samples
|z|
6.
4.
[Ans. A]
For the given X(z) , note that the ROC is
the entire z plane except
z
z
Recall the z transform pair:
Recall the time shifting property:
If g(n) G(z)
z
z
[Ans. C]
z
z
z
th
th
th
Page 253
GATE QUESTION BANK
z
For given X(z) ,
x(n)=5
7.
8.
[Ans. B]
y
x
Taking z transform of both sides
z
z
z
z
z
z
For cascaded system
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
9.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. C]
Given : H(z)=
Express H(z) in +ve powers of z and find
the zeros and poles.
z
z(
z)
(z
z (z
(z
) (z
)
)
Poles are at z = and z = lying inside

the unit circle in the z plane.
Consi r t t r p ss
s:
Signals and Systems
| |
(i)|z|
For a casual system h(n) =0, n< 0 and
h(n) is a Right sided sequence and ROC is
the region outside the circle passing
through the right most pole z =
syst m s us
For stability of LTI system unit circle
should be inside the ROC
syst m s st
S sv
st t m t
( )
( ) u
s y
z
| |
x ( )
x ( )
(ii)|z|
x ( ) z
H(n) is a Left sided sequence and the

system is not causal.
t s t c us :
f r
As unit circle is not inside the ROC , the
system is unstable.
S s t valid statement.
(iii)
x ( z)
, z
( z)
,( z
|z|
( z
The ROC is the annular region between

two circles bounded by the poles:
At z
( z
| z|
| z
z
|z|
H(n) is a two sided signal existing for

sw
sf r
Syst m s
not causal. As unit circle is not inside the
ROC , the system is unstable.
S s v
st t m t
t S
S r tru
S s t tru
|z|
| |
( ) u
x
s| z
r|z|
th
th
th
Page 254
GATE QUESTION BANK
We draw the three ROC on the Z plane

So,
The over lapping region is given by
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
Two discrete time signals x(n) and y (n)
are said to be orthogonal, if
x
y
whose * denotes
complex conjugatio
Or
x
y
for real x(n) and
y
|z|
10.
[Ans. C]
v x
(
) u
r(
) u
s qu
xt r r f c rc
fr
us
From the option given , according to the

definition of Z.T:
|z|
[Ans. B]
x
x
x z
x z
12.
fx z s
| |
z
z
y
is a zero of x(z)
x z
( ) u
y
For
s s z r
us v r
11.
For the given x(n) , X(z) =
|z|
) u
ts
Signals and Systems
It can be seen that equation (2) is

satisfied only when y(n) = y
x z
[Ans. *] Range 11.9 to 12.1

2.
x z
[Ans. D]
For the given X(z) =
z
(
Let Y(z) = z
taking Inverse z-transform using

Frequency domain multiplication
=time domain convolution
x
u
u
u
u
Residue of Y(z)=
z
z
with |z|>a
z |
z |
Note that the Question asked is to find

x(n) given
X(z) =
with |z|>a , for which the
answer is known through the following

fundamental ZT pairs and properties.
z
|z|
u
z
z
z
u
z (
)
z z
z
|z|
x
S x
th
th
th
Page 255
GATE QUESTION BANK
z
z
|z|
| |
2.
|z|
| |
[Ans. A]
(1
z
z
put x
z
( ) u
(z
|z|
)
[Ans. B]
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
x z
x
x
) (z
(z
z
z
3.
( )
( ) +u
[Ans. C]
For a system to be stable, it should
contain Z=1 circle in its ROC
r
x
u
z
4.
( )
z
) (z
}
x
) (z
[Ans. A]
Given,
x[n] = u
x z
z
z
IN
1.
|z|
z has ROC as entire Z-plane
which implies that it is polynomial.

z
s
p
4.
[Ans. B]
y
u
3.
| z
z
| |
Signals and Systems
[Ans. C]
Only this option gives poles inside unit
circle.
th
th
th
Page 256
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Laplace Transform
ECE - 2006
1.
Consider the function f(t) having Laplace
transform F(s) =
; Re[s]>0. The final
value of f(t) would be
(A) 0
(C)
(B) 1
(D)
1<f
<1
ECE - 2007
2.
If the Laplace transform of a signal y(t) is
Y(s)=
; then its final value is
(A) 1
(B) 0
ECE - 2011
6.
If
(C) 1
(D) Unbounded
ECE - 2009
3.
An LTI system having transfer function
and input x(t) = sin(t+1) is in
steady state. The output is sampled at a
rate
rad/s to obtain the final output
{y(k)}. Which of the following is true ?
(A)
s z r
f r
s mp
frequency
(B)
s
z r f r
s mp
frequency
(C)
s
z r f r
> 2 , but zero
for < 2
(D)
sz r f r
> 2 , but nonzero
for < 2
4.
Assuming zero initial conditions, the

response y(t) of the above system for the
input
x t
u t s v
y
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
u t
Given that F(s) is the one-sided Laplace

transform of f(t), the Laplace transform of
s
f
(A) sF(s) f(0)
(C)
(B)
(D) [F(s) f(0)]
ECE - 2010
5.
A continuous
described by
y t
y t
t
t
time
y t
LTI
system
x t
t
f t
then the initial
and final values of f t are respectively

(A) 0, 2
(C) 0, 2/7
(B) 2, 0
(D) 2/7, 0
ECE - 2013
7.
A system is described by the differential
equation
y t
x t .
Let x(t) be a rectangular pulse given by

t
x t
,
t rw s
Assuming that y (0) =0 and
at
t =0, the Laplace transform of y(t) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
EE 2006
1.
The running integrator, given by
y t
x t
(A) has no finite singularities in its

double sided Laplace Transform Y(s)
(B) produces a bounded output for every
casual bounded input
(C) produces bounded output for every
anticasual bounded input
(D) has no finite zeros in its double sided
Laplace Transform Y (s)
is
x t
th
th
th
Page 257
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2010
Common Data for Questions 2 and 3
Given f t and t as shown below:
f(t)
1
(A)
(B)
g(t)
1
0
3.
EE - 2012
5.
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
y
wt y t |
|
t
um r c v u
2.
Signals and Systems
t can be expressed as
(A) t
f t
(B)
f(
(C)
f( t
(D)
f(
2
1
(C) 0
(D) 1
IN - 2006
1. Given, x t x t
t xp
the function x(t) is
(A) xp
t u t
(B) xp t u t
(C) t xp t u t
(D)
xp t u t
t u t
)
IN - 2010
2. u(t) represents the unit step function. The
Laplace transform of u(t- is
)
)
The Laplace transform of
t is
(A)
(B)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN - 2013
3. The
(C)
discrete-time
transfer
function
is
(D)
EE - 2011
4.
Let the Laplace transform of a function
f(t) which exists for t > 0 be
s and the
Laplace transform of its delayed version
f t
be
s . Let (s) be the complex
conjugate of
s with the Laplace
v r
s t s s
. If
G(s) =
, then the inverse Laplace
transform of G(s) is
(A)
mpu s
t
(B)
y
mpu s
t
(C) an ideal step function u(t)
(D) an ideal delayed step function u(t
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Non minimum phase and unstable.

Minimum phase and unstable.
Minimum phase and stable.
Non-minimum phase and stable.
IN - 2014
4. The transfer function of a system is given
by
/
s
s
The input to the system is ( )=sin100 t .
In periodic steady state the output of the
system s f u
t
y t
s
t
). The phase angle ( ) in degree is
___________.
th
th
th
Page 258
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems

ECE
1.
[Ans. C]
s}
s
sF(s) has poles , which lie on the
imaginary axis.
v u t
r mc
t
pp
For the given F(s) , f(t) = s
t u t
f
Hence the final value can be taken as :

f
2.
3.
s
s
t
[Ans. D]
poles of S.Y(s) lie on right half of Splane)
s = 1 is right s plane pole
Unbounded.
s
tx t
u t
s
s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform on both
side
y t
u t
6.
[Ans. B]
s
f t
Initial value
[Ans. A]
For the given LTI system
mf t
H(s) =
mf t
The frequency response is given by
ms s
s (
s (
s
s
t
For the input x(t) = sin (t +1) with
|
| s (t
y t
)
t
r /s c
Y(.) is zero for all sampling frequencies
sy t
4.
[Ans. B]
0 f
5.
Final value theorem

mf t
ms s
ms
7.
1
[Ans. B]
x t
u t
s
s
s s
s
u t
x s
With zero initial condition.
s
s
Now taking Laplace transform
[Ans. B]
y t
y t
x t
y t
x t
t
t
t
Taking Laplace transform on both side
(assuming zero initial conditions).
s s
s s
s
s s
s
s y s
y s
y s
th
th
sy s
y s
s s
s s
th
Page 259
GATE QUESTION BANK
s s
Signals and Systems
f(
f(
Time shifting (delay by 2)
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
y t
x t
u t
3.
[Ans. C]
Form Fig. 3 in the above question,
g(t) = u(t 3) u(t 5)
Use L.T pair and property:
u t
u t
*
Fig. 3
if we take x(t) as casual input

ut
x t
u t
y t
s
f
s
*
f r
t s
4.
[Ans. B]
f t t
2.
[Ans. D]
Time scaling (Expansion by 2) and Time
shifting by 3 get g(t) from f(t)
f(t) , f(t/2) and g(t) = f (
f t
) are shown
1
t
5.
s
s |
|
s |
| s | ,
[Ans. D]
+
Fig.1
Time scaling (expansion by 2)
y t
Converting to s domain,
s2y(s) sy(0) y (0) + 2[sy(s) y(0)] +
y(s) = 1
[s2 + 2s + 1] y (s) + 2s + 4 = 1
f(t/2)
1
|
s
s
G(s)
t
t
)
The inverse LT of G(s) is a unit ideal
impulse delayed by .
f(t)
fig. 1,2 and 3
y(s) =
1
find inverse lapalce transform

y(t) [ 2 et tet] u(t)
Fig. 2
= 2et + tet et
|
th
th
=21=1
th
Page 260
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN
1.
Signals and Systems
[Ans. A]
Given,
x t x t
t xp
t u t
taking Laplace transform on both sides
we get,
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform of X(s)
is
x t
xp
t u t
2.
[Ans. C]
Laplace transform of u(t) =1/s
Use Time shifting property:
If the L.T of f(t) is F(s),
Then L.T of x(t) = f(t
s s
f u t-
3.
[Ans. D]
Transfer function is
Clearly all the zeros are on the RHS of
imaginary axis so the system is nonminimum phase.
Also, the poles z = 0.5 is inside the unity
circle thus the system is stable.
4.
[Ans. *]Range 67 to 69
P s
s
t
(
)
c s
t
th
th
th
Page 261
GATE QUESTION BANK
Signals and Systems
Frequency Response of LTI systems and Diversified Topics

ECE - 2006
1.
A signal m(t) with bandwidth 500 Hz is
first multiplied by a signal g(t) where
t
A uniformly distributed random variable

X with probability density function
y
1
2.5
f x
If S(f) is the power spectral density of a

real, wide-sense stationary random
process, then which of the following is
ALWAYS true?
(A) S
S f
(B) S f
(C) S f
s f
(D) S f f
The resulting signal is then passed

through an ideal low pass filter with
bandwidth 1 kHz. The output of the low
pass filter would be
(A)
t
(C) 0
(B) m t
(D) m t t
2.
4.
2.5
(u x
u x
Where u(.) is the unit step function is

passed through a transformation given in
the figure below. The probability density
function of the transformed random
variable Y would be
(A) f y
(u y
(B) f y
(C) f y
ECE - 2008
&6
The impulse response h(t) of a linear
time-invariant continuous time system is
given by h(t) = exp( 2t) u(t), where u(t)
denotes the unit step function.
5.
fr qu cy r sp s
f t s
system in terms of angular frequency is
v
y
u y
(B)
(D)
The output of this system to the

sinusoidal input x (t) = 2cos (2t) for all
time t, is
(A) 0
(B)
c s t
(C)
c s t
(D)
c s t
7.
{x[n]} is a real-valued periodic sequence

with a period N. x[n] and X[k] form Npoint Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
pairs. The DFT Y[k] of the sequence
(D) f y
(C)
6.
y
y
(A)
y
/
y
(u y
u y
ECE - 2007
3.
If
is the autocorrelation function of a
real, wide-sense stationary random
process, then which of the following is
NOT true?
(A)
|
(B) |
(C)
(D) The mean square value of the
process is R(O)
y[n]=
xrx
r is
(A) |X [k]|2
(B)
r x
(C)
x r x
(D) 0
th
th
th
Page 262
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
The probability density function (PDF) of

a random variable X is as shown below.
(B)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The
corresponding
cumulative
distribution function (CDF) has the form
(A)
CDF
1
(A)
PDF
ECE - 2009
10. The 4 point discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) of a discrete time sequence
{ 1, 0 ,2, 3} is
(A) [ 0 , 2 +2j , 2 , 2 2j]
(B) [2, 2 +2j , 6,2, 2j]
(C) [ 6 , 1 3j , 2 , 1 + 3j]
(D) [ 6 , 1 +3j , 0 , 1 3j]
11.
A system with transfer function H(z) has

impulse response h(.) defined as h[2]=1 ,
h[3] = 1 and h[k] = 0 otherwise.
Consider the following statements.
S1: H(z) is a low-pass filter
S2: H(z) is an FIR filter.
Which of the following is correct?
(A) Only S2 is true
(B) Both S1 and S2 are false
(C) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a
reason for S1
(D) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a
reason for S1
12.
A white noise process X(t) with two-sided

power spectral density
/ z is
input to a filter whose magnitude squared
response is shown below
1 x
CDF
1
1
(C)
1 x
CDF
1
(D)
Signals and Systems
1 x
CDF
1
|
X(t)
10kHz
1 x
f |
Y(t)
10kHz
The power of the output process Y(t) is

given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
9.
|x|
|x|
P x
xp
xp
is
the probability density function for the
real random variable X, over the entire x
axis. M and N are both positive real
numbers. The Equation relating M and N
is
th
th
th
Page 263
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
If the power spectral density of stationary

random process in a sinc-squared
function of frequency, the shape of its
autocorrelation is
(A)
Signals and Systems
(B)
t
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2010
14. The Nyquist sampling rate for the signal
s t
is given by
(A) 400 Hz
(B) 600 Hz
15.
16.
(C) 1200 Hz
(D) 1400 Hz
For an N-point FFT algorithm with

, which one of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) It is not possible to construct a signal
flow graph with both input and
output in normal order
(B) The number of butterflies in the m
stage in N/m
(C) In place
computation
requires
storage of only 2N node data
(D) Computation of a butterfly requires
only one complex multiplication
Consider the pulse shape s t as shown.
The impulse response t of the filter
matched to this pulse is
ECE - 2011
17. The first six points of the 8-point DFT of a
real valued sequence are 5, 1 j3, 0, 3 j4,
0 and 3+j4. The last two points of the DFT
are respectively
(A) 0, 1 j3
(C) 1+j3, 5
(B) 0, 1+j3
(D) 1 j3, 5
ECE - 2013
18. The impulse response of a system is
h(t)=tu(t). For an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
u t
EC/EE/IN - 2013
19. For a periodic signal
v(t)=30sin100t+10cos300t+6sin
(500t / , the fundamental frequency
in rad/s is
(A) 100
(C) 500
(B) 300
(D) 1500
s t
ECE - 2014
20. Consider two real valued signals, x(t)
band-limited to [ 500 Hz, 500 Hz] and
y(t) band-limited to [ 1 kHz, 1 kHz]. For
z(t) = x(t).y(t), the Nyquist sampling
frequency (in kHz) is ______.
21.
An FIR system is described by the system

function
z
The system is
th
th
th
Page 264
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) maximum phase

(B) minimum phase
(C) mixed phase
(D) zero phase
22.
through the linear constant-coefficient

y t
y t
y t
x t
t
t
Let another signal g(t) be defined as
t
t
t
t
If G(s) is the Laplace transform of g(t),
then the number of poles of G(s) is________
Consider the periodic square wave in the

figure shown.
x
27.
t
Let
z
qz
z
z
r
z . The quantities p,
q, r are real numbers.
|r|
(A) also has a pole at
all .
If
(A)
(B)
w
m
r | (
)|
for
, then b equals
(C) /
(D) /
25.
A
modulated
signal
is
y t
m t c s
t
where the
baseband signal m(t) has frequency
components less than 5 kHz only. The
minimum required rate (in kHz) at which
y(t) should be sampled to recover m(t) is
_____
26.
A causal LTI system has zero initial

conditions and impulse response h(t). Its
input x(t) and output y(t) are related
300
(B) has a constant phase response over

the z-plane: arg| z | = constant
(C) is stable only, if it is anticausal
(D) Has a constant phase response over
the unit circle: arg|
| =
constant
For an all-pass system

z
EE - 2006
1.
A discrete real all pass system has a pole
at z = 2 300 it, therefore
. If the
zero of H(z) lies on the unit circle then

r = _____
24.
Denote this relation as

DFT(x). For
, which one of the following
sequences satisfies DFT (DFT (x)) = x ?
(A) x = [1 2 3 4]
(B) x = [1 2 3 2]
(C) x = [1 3 2 2]
(D) x = [1 2 2 3]
pz
Consider P
The N-point DFT X of a sequence x[n],

is given by
The ratio of the power in the 7th

harmonic to the power in the 5th
harmonic for this waveform is closest in
value to _______.
23.
Signals and Systems
EE - 2007
& 3:
2.
A signal is processed by a causal filter
with transfer function G(s). For a
distortion free output signal waveform,
G(s) must
(A) Provide zero phase shift for all
frequency
(B) Provide constant phase shift for all
frequency
th
th
th
Page 265
GATE QUESTION BANK
(C) Provide linear phase shift that is

proportional to frequency
(D) Provide a phase shift that is
inversely proportional to frequency
3.
4.
G(z) = z + z is a low-pass digital

filter with a phase characteristics same as
that of the above question if
(1/3)
(A)
(C)
/
(B)
(D)
Consider the discrete-time system shown
in the figure where the impulse response
of G(z) is g[0] = 0, g[1] = g[2] = 1,
+
+
G(z)
The system is stable for range of values of

K
(A) [ 1, ]
(C) [ 1/2, 1]
(B) [ 1, 1]
(D) [ 1/2, 2]
EE - 2008
5.
A signal x (t) = sinc( t) where
constant (s c x
filter with a cut-off frequency of 20 Hz.

The resultant system of filters will
function as
(A) An all-pass filter
(B) An all-stop filter
(C) A band stop (band-reject) filter
(D) A band-pass filter
EE - 2014
7.
A sinusoid x(t) of unknown frequency is
sampled by an impulse train of period 20
ms. The resulting sample train is next
applied to an ideal lowpass filter with a
cutoff at 25 Hz. The filter output is seen to
be a sinusoid of frequency 20 Hz. This
means that x(t) has a frequency of
(A) 10 Hz
(C) 30 Hz
(B) 60 Hz
(D) 90 Hz
IN - 2006
1.
A digital filter has the transfer function
H(z) =
If this filter has to reject a
50 Hz interference from
the sampling frequency
signal should be
(A) 50 Hz
(C)
(B) 100 Hz
(D)
is a real
) is the input
to a Linear time invariant system whose

impulse response h(t) = sinc ( t) where
s real constant. If min (
t s
the minimum of
and
and similarly
max (
) denotes the maximum of
and and K is a constant, which one of
the following statements is true about the
output of the system?
(A) It will be of the form K sinc( t)
where = min (
)
(B) It will be of the form K sinc( t)
where = max (
)
(C) It will be of the form K sinc( t)
(D) It cannot be a sinc type of signal
Signals and Systems
2.
the input, then

for the input
150 Hz
200 Hz
The spectrum of a band limited signal

after sampling is shown below. The value
of the sampling interval is
f(Hz)
100 0
100 150
350 400
(A) 1 ms
(B) 4 ms
3.
600
(C) 2 ms
(D) 8ms
A digital measuring instrument employs a

sampling rate of 100 samples/second.
The sampled input x(n) is averaged using
the difference equation
y
x
x
x
x
/
EE - 2011
6.
A low-pass filter with a cut-off frequency
of 30 Hz is cascaded with a high-pass
th
th
th
Page 266
GATE QUESTION BANK
For a step input, the maximum time taken

for the output to reach the final value
after the input transition is
(A) 20ms
(C) 80ms
(B) 40ms
(D)
IN - 2007
4.
Let x(t) be a continuous-time, real-valued
signal band-limited to F Hz. The Nyquist
sampling rate, in Hz,
for y(t) = x (0.5t) + x(t) x(2t) is.
(A) F
(C) 4F
(B) 2F
(D) 8F
IN - 2010
8.
4-point DFT of a real discrete-time signal
x[n] of length 4 is given by X[k ], n= 0,1 2,
3, and k =0, 1, 2 ,3.It is given that
X[0] =5,X[1]=1+ j1, X[2]=0.5. X[3] and
x[0] respectively are
(A) 1 j, 1.875
(B) 1 j, 1.500
(C) 1+j, 1.875
(D) 0.1 j0.1, 1.500
9.
A digital filter having a transfer function

H(z) =
y[n 1].
If y[n] = 0 for n < 0 and x[n] = [n], then

y [n] can be expressed in terms of the unit
step u[n] as
(C)
u
(A) ( ) u
(D)
u
(B) ( ) u
10.
IN - 2009
6.
An analog signal is sampled at 9kHz. The
sequence so obtained is filtered by an FIR
filter with transfer function
H[z]
z . One of the analog
frequencies for which the magnitude
response of the filter is zero is
(A) 0.75kHz
(C) 1.5kHz
(B) 1kHz
(D) 2kHz
7.
The transfer function H(z) of a fourth

order linear phase FIR system is given by
z
z
z
z .
Then G(z) is
(A)
z
z
(B)
(C)
(D)
z
z
z
is implemented
using Direct Form I and Direct Form II

realizations of IIR structure. The number
of delay units required in Direct Form I
and Direct Form II realizations are,
respectively
(A) 6 and 6
(C) 3 and 3
(B) 6 and 3
(D) 3 and 2
IN - 2008
5.
Consider a discrete-time system for which
the input x[n] and the output y[n] are
related as y[n] = x[n]
Signals and Systems
H(z) is a discrete rational transfer

function. To ensure that both H(z) and its
inverse are stable its
(A) poles must be inside the unit circle
and zeros must be outside the unit
circle
(B) poles and zeros must be inside the
unit circle
(C) poles and zeros must be outside the
unit circle
(D) poles must be outside the unit circle
and zeros should be inside the unit
circle
IN - 2011
11. The continuous time signal
x(t) = c s
t
s
t is
sampled at the rate 100 Hz to get the
signal x t
x
t
,
= sampling period
The signal x t is passed through an ideal
low pass filter with cutoff frequency 100
Hz. The output of the filter is proportional
to
th
th
th
Page 267
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
12.
c s
c s
c s
s
t
t
t
t
s
s

TRUE?
(A) This is a low pass filter
(B) This is a high pass filter
(C) This is an IIR filter
(D) This is an FIR filter
t
t
Shown below is the pole-zero plot of a

digital filter
Im
Z plane
Re
6th order pole

at the origin
Signals and Systems
IN - 2014
13. A discrete-time signal x[] is obtained by
sampling an analog signal at 10 kHz. The
signal x is filtered by a system with
impulse response
[] = 0.5{ []+ [ 1]}. The 3dB cutoff
frequency of the filter is:
(A) 1.25 kHz
(C) 4 .00 kHz
(B) 2.50 kHz
(D) 5.00 kHz

ECE
1.
[Ans. B]
m(f)
500
500
20kHz
= m(t) in time domain.
500
2.
m(t)*g(t)=m(F) G(f)
G(f)
20kHz
500
[Ans. B]
Sample
of
random
variable
After transformation smaple space of

random variable Y=(0, 1)
Hence f y
y
y
pt
s t sf s
m f
space
3.
[Ans. C]
Autocorrelation function is an even
function
4.
[Ans. B]
PSD is always a positive quantity
500
500 20kHz
20kH
z pass filtering with f
After low
z
th
th
th
Page 268
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
[Ans. C]
9.
[Ans. A]
P
P x
u t H(s) =
h(t) =
Signals and Systems
|x|
xp
xp
|x|
P x x
6.
[Ans. D]
Input x(t) = 2cos(2t)
Frequency response
| |
Output
} x
10.
x t t
| |
r {
[Ans. D]
4-point DFT of sequence {1,0,2,3} is given
as
[
][ ]
{
}
11.
c s t
[ c s t
c s t
[Ans. A]
8.
[Ans. A]
P
f x
t]
h[n] is high pass filter & FIR filter.
c s t
7.
12.
t
t
u t
u t
[Ans. A]
h[2] =1 and h[3]= 1
}
h [n] = {
[Ans. B]
PSD of white noise
/ z
PSD of output
| f |
f
f
| f |
utput
s p w r
tu t
f x x
f f
r
Integral of increasing ramp signal is

increasing parabola and integral of
decreasing ramp signal is decreasing
parabola.
r|
f | curv
f
th
th
th
Page 269
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
13.
[Ans. B]
PS
18.
Signals and Systems
[Ans. B]
For 8-points DFT;
x
x
x
x
x
x
it is conjugate symmetric about x[4]
x
x
[Ans. C]
= FT
tu t
s
c s
s t
[c s
c s
t ]
[Ans. A]
t
[Ans. D]
(A), (B) and (C) are wrong
c s
t
]
are rational
20.
[Ans. C]
Impulse response h(t) of the filter
matched to the input pulse s(t) existing
from t =0 to t= T is given by
h(t) =s[-(t-T)]
the operation of time reversal and then
time delay of T should be performed on
s(t) , to get h(t). This is equivalent to the
following statement;
scan the sketch of s(t) backward from t =T
to t =0 and draw the sketch of h(t)
forward from t=0 to t =T.
s(t) & h(t) are shown below in Fig.
21.
fu
p r
fu
t fr qu
cy
p r
[Ans. *] Range 2.99 to 3.01

f
z
z
f
f
z
[Ans. C]
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
So, zeros are at
ut
s [
Maximum frequency in s t is 600Hz

(
s t )
SO,
Nyquist sampling rate 2 +
z
16.
c s
19.
15.
y t
y s
[Ans. C]
u t
s c fu ct
14.
and
th
and
When all the zeroes are inside the unit

circle minimum phase
th
th
Page 270
GATE QUESTION BANK
When all the zeros are outside the unit

circle Maximum phase
When some zeros are inside unit circle
some outside unit circle
mixed
phase
22.
[Ans. *] Range 0.50 to 0.52

Consider one period from t
t
s c
x
t
t
t
t
|
S
|
23.
Pz
(P
z
z
qz
z
rz
z
z
z sz
r
25.
[Ans. *] Range 9.5 to 10.5

u t s
y t
m t c s
t
to recover m(t) minimum required rate
should be twice the minimum frequency of
m(t)
f
f
z
26.
[Ans. *] Range 0.99 to 1.01

y
y
y t
x t
t
t
y
y
*
y t +
t
t
s
s
s
s
s
t
t
t
t
z
s
rz
(z
) (z
z*
z
)
r z
(z
) (z
s *
r
Since, this zero lies on unit circle |z|
z
z
S c
|r|
27.
r
r
s
s
+
s
s
[Ans. B]
x
s
s
s
s
x t
s
s
s
s
So number of poles G(s) = 1
One zero is at origin. The other zero lies at

z
z
w
Poles of H(z) is
z
r
p ss syst m w
(q
[Ans. *] Range
z
|
|
[Ans. B]
c s
c s
m rm c | |
c s
|
|
P w r f
24.
Signals and Systems
th
th
th
Page 271
GATE QUESTION BANK
] x
] x
z
z
z
z
S t syst m w
st
f ts ut r
most pole will lie inside the unit circle.
Location of poles
[Ans. C]
For causal system, if all poles are inside
the unit circle then system is stable, and
converse is true for anti-causal system.
2
z
z
Now check for each Options

EE
1.
Signals and Systems
If anti-causal, ROC is |z|

Syst m s st
.
2.
3.
4.
[Ans. C]
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of frequency i.e.
proportional to frequency this is because
delay to all frequency component will be
equal.
sc
s s t sf
y pt
(A)
5.
[Ans. A]
x(t) = sinc( t
h(t) =s
t
x(t) = s t
[Ans. A]
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of
as will as all the
frequency component must be amplified
by
same
amount
so
z
corresponds to frequency
. While
z
corresponds to frequency 3 .
In order to have same amplification of
frequency component at
,
s t
s t
1/
h(t)= s t
1/
[Ans. A]
Given
g(1) =g(2) =1. Otherwise 0
i.e. g[n] =
therefore
G(z) = z
z
Therefore overall transfer function of
closed loop system
z
z
z
y(t) = h(t) * x(t)

1/
if
y
th
th
th
Page 272
GATE QUESTION BANK

1/
or
[Ans. C]
Sinusoid x(t) frequency say f .Hz
s mp
Or Y(j
So
7.
if
y(t) = s t
c
y(t) = s
z utput
z u t frqu
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
The frequency response,
f of LPF with
cutoff frequency, 30 Hz is shown in Fig. 1.
The frequency response
f of HPF with
cutoff frequency, 20 Hz is shown in Fig. 2
If these two filters are cascaded, the
overall frequency response of the
resultant system H(f) = H1(f) H2(f), shown
in Fig. 3, represents a BPF with
Bandwidth, B = 10 Hz
H1(f)
0 10 20 30 40
2.
ms=4ms
[Ans. B]
Since output y depends on input, such as
no delay, delay by 1 unit, delay by 2 unit,
delay by 4 unit, so it will sum all the
sample after 4Ts (maximum delay), to get
one sample of y[n].
t
4.
20
30
s t
Where fs is the sampling frequency i.e.,

X(f) is repeated at
f f f
tc
From the given spectrum of Xs(f) in the
question, fs = 250 s/sec
S mp
t rv
Fig. 2
H(f)
20
Ts=
20 30
cy tr
[Ans. B]
Let X(f) be the spectrum of the
bandlimited signal, x(t). let Xs(f) be the
spectrum of the sampled signal xs(t)
3.
20
[Ans. A]
In order to reject the 50 Hz interference,
sampling frequency must be as low as the
noise frequency (so that they are
separated in time domain and has less
interference)
So, f
z
Fig. 1
H2(f)
30
cy
y(t) = s
30
fr qu
So output is of the form k sinc( t

Where
m
6.
Signals and Systems
ms c
[Ans. C]
x(t) band limited to FHz
i.e., fm = FHz
y(t) = x(0.5t) + x(t) x(2t) is
x(t) maximum frequency =
Fig. 3
th
th
th
Page 273
GATE QUESTION BANK
x(0.5t) maximum frequency =
Signals and Systems
z
z
x(2t) maximum frequency = 2FHz.

Y(t) maximum frequency
z
z
= max (F,
Nyquist rate =
=2
5.
m x frequency
z
we know that for linear phase filter
[Ans. A]
for
where M is the number of points filter
here,
Now,
Given y(n) = x(n) y

y
y
Take z transform:
z [
H(z) =
For the given x(n) =
z
So,
: :
: :
This is only in option (a).
Use the standard Z.T. pair:

z
|z| | |
u
z
y
8.
[Ans. A]
As signal is real,
X[3] = 1 J and
|z|
) u
6.
[Ans. B]
z
( )
z
c s
| (
| (
)|
7.
c s
9.
[Ans. B]
c s
Given H(z) =
This T.F corresponds to a 3rd order digital

filter
D F I realization requires 2N delays
D F II realization or canonic realization
with minimum number of delay elements
requires N delays.
Where N is the order of the order of the
filter
I requires 6 delays
D F II requires 3 delays
)|
so, | ( )|
w r
, if
f r
[Ans. A]
z
Let, z
then,
z
z
z
z
th
th
th
Page 274
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
11.
12.
[Ans. B]
The discrete time system with rational
transfer function , H(z) is stable if the
poles of H(z) lie inside the unit circle in
the z plane.
r
z
ts v rs
/ z t
stable , both the poles and zeros of H(z)
must lie inside the unit circle in the z
plane.
[Ans. B]
Highest frequency component in x(t) is
150 Hz. So, the Nyquist sampling rate is
300 Hz.
But, x(t) is sampled at 100 Hz. While
cos(100 t) with frequency 50 Hz will be
recovered satisfactorily after passing
through the low pass and sin(300t) will
get aliased resulting in filter output sin
(100 t).
Cos (100 t
s t c tribute to aliasing.
)(
[z
[(z
[ z
(z
z
) z
As the impulse response, h(n) = Inverse

Z.T of H(z) has only finite duration =7
samples, the given digital filter is an FIR
filter.
13.
[Ans. B]
Given that
( )
]
c s
| (
)|
cut ff
th
th
c s( )
|
s mp
r
c s
c s
c s
c s
) z
c s
z
z
]
[Ans. D]
From the given pole zero plot of the
digital filter, the system function
(
Signals and Systems
r
z
s mp
th
Page 275
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Basics of Control System

ECE - 2008
1.
A signal flow graph of a system is given
below
ECE - 2010
2.
The transfer function Y(s)/R(s) of the
system shown is
(s)
(s)
s
1 1
1/s
u
s
1/s
1
1/s
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
The set of equations that correspond to
this signal flow graph is
x
x
(A) (x ) = [
] (x ) +
x
x
[
x
] (x )
x
tr ns r un t on
( )
+
4.
x
] (x )
x
(s)
( )
x
x
]( )
x
(s)
(s)
u
] .u /
x
[x ]
x
(D)
(s)
u
] .u /
x
x
( )
x
(C)
ECE - 2014
3.
For the following system,
u
] .u /
x
(x )
x
(B)
(D)
( )
( )
s
s(s
s
( )
s(s
( )
s
s
)
)
Consider the following block diagram in

the figure.
(s)
(s)
u
] .u /
(A)
(s)
s
(s)
(C)
(B)
(D)
tr ns r un t on
th
th
th
Page 276
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2007
1.
The system shown in figure below.
c0
b0
b1
1/s
EE - 2010
3.
As shown in the figure, a negative
feedback system has an amplifier of gain
100 with 10% tolerance in the forward
path, and an attenuator of value 9/100 in
the feedback path. The overall system
gain is approximately:
C1
1/s
Control Systems
Can be reduced to the form

X
(A) 10 1%
(B) 10 2%
(C) 10 5%
(D) 10 10%
With
(A) X = s
EE - 2014
4.
The closed-loop transfer function of a
Y= (s
(B) X = 1, Y =
)
)
(s
s
( s
(C) X =
(D) X
s
(s
)
(s
The steady
The signal flow graph of a system is

shown below. (s) is the input and (s)is
the output.
( s
state error due to unit step input is________

5.
s
s
(s)
system is
)
s
(s)
EE - 2008
2.
A function y(t) satisfies the following
differential equation,
()
(s)
Assuming
n
the input-output transfer
+ y(t) = (t),
( )
(s)
where
(t) is the delta function.
Assuming zero initial condition and
denoting the unit step function by u(t),
y(t) can be of the form
(A)
(C) u(t)
(B)
(D)
u(t)
( )
( )
(s)
( )
(s)
( )
(s)
( )
th
(s)
th
,
function
of the system is given by

s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
th
Page 277
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
The block diagram of a system is shown in

the figure
(s)
(s)
(s)
IN - 2009
3.
A filter is represented by the signal flow
graph shown in the figure. Its input x(t)
and output is y(t).
The transfer function of the filter is
If the desired transfer function of the

system is
( )
Control Systems
X(s)
then G(s) is
( )
(A) 1
(B) s
Y(s)
(C) 1/s
(D)
1/s
1/s
(A)
1
s
(B)
s 1
s(s2 2)
s(s2 1)
s2 2
(A)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(C)
(D)
)
)
The transfer function (C/R) of the system

is
IN - 2007
2.
A feedback control system with high K, is
shown in the figure below:
R(s) +
Y(s)
(C)
2
IN - 2011
4.
The signal flow graph of a system is given
below.
R
1/s
(B)
(A)
IN - 2006
1.
The signal flow graph representation of a
control system is shown below. The
Y(s)
transfer function
is computed as
R(s)
R(s)
1/S
G(s)
C(s)
(D)
)
(
)
(
)
(
IN - 2012
5.
The transfer function of a Zero-orderHold system with sampling interval T is
H(s)
Then the closed loop transfer function is.

(A) sensitive to perturbations in G(s)
and H(s)
(B) sensitive to perturbations in G(s)
and but not to perturbations H(s)
(C) sensitive to perturbations in H(s)
and but not to perturbations G(s)
(D) insensitive to perturbations in G(s)
and H(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN - 2013
6.
The complex function tanh(s) is analytic
over a region of the imaginary axis of the
complex s- plane if the following is TRUE
everywhere in the region for all integers n
(A) Re(s) =0
(C) Im(s)
(
(B) Im (s) n
th
th
(D) Im(s)
th
Page 278
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
The signal flow graph for a system is

given below. The transfer function
( )
( )
for
this system is given as
Control Systems
IN - 2014
8.
A plant has an open-loop transfer
function,
(s)
(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(s
)(s
)(s
)
The approximate model obtained by
retaining only one of the above poles,
which is closest to the frequency response
of the original transfer function at low
frequency is
(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)

ECE
1.
[Ans. D]
2.
[Ans. B]
(s)
(s)
x
(s)
x
s
x
(s)
x
x
(s)
(s) [
s
(s)
(s)
o (s)
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
x
x
u
x
x
[ ] [
][ ] [
] 0u 1
x
x
One can denote any state by any name
So, that answer is
x
x
u
[x ] = [
] (x ) + [
] .u /
x
x
(s)
r or
3.
(s)
(s)
s
(s)
(s)
[Ans. D]
When x (s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
y(s)
x (s)
th
th
s
s(s
th
Page 279
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. C]
Control Systems
These are four individual loops
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
s
s
All the loops touch forward paths
(
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
s
s ng M sons g n ormul
(s)
(s)
s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
EE
1.
)s (
s) (s
s) (s
(
(
)
s
)
s
()
(s)
[Ans. D]
(s)
(s)
xy
(s)
yz
Comparing eg. (I) and (ii), we get
s
xy
s
s
s
yz
s
s
Hence option (D) is correct
s
s
Signal flow graph of the block diagram
s
( )
2.
[Ans. D]
Take LT on both sides,
( )
s.Y(s)+Y(s) =1 Y(s) = (
y(t) =
There are forward paths

3.
u(t)
[Ans. A]
T.F =
th
th
=10
th
Page 280
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
Also,
Control Systems
[Ans. B]
overall change in T.F for G = 10 is
(s)
(s)
= 1%
(s)
1%
4.
[Ans. 0]
(s)
(s)
s
( or un t st p)
(s)
s(s
y(t)
y st t
s(s
( )
( )
( )
( )
So put G(s) = s
( )
( )
( )
IN
1.
Loops:
(
(s)
(s)
n
( )
( ( )
( )
)
s
num
( )1
[Ans. A]
( )
( )
( )
s
1 C(s)
rror
G(s)
1/s
[Ans. C]
Using Masons gain formula
Paths:
R(s)
l m sy(s)
t
5.
Convert the given block diagram to signal

low gr p n us M sons rul
1
There individual loops with gains:

ro p t s
( )( )(
s s
) ( )( )(
s s
(s)
(s)
)( )(
s
s
(s)
(s)
(
.
2.
(
[Ans. C]
In this case, open loop gain sensitivity is
measured with respect to KG. Because
here open loop gain = KG
s
s
s
s
th
th
th
)(
Page 281
GATE QUESTION BANK
)( ) (
s ount)
6.
Control Systems
[Ans. D]
t n (s)
)(
( or l rg
s
For analytical region there should be no

poles
os
sn
os
sn
os
( n
)
s n (s)
os (s)
So close loop transfer function is sensitive

to perturbation in H(s) but not to
perturbation in G(s) for large k values.
7.
[Ans. A]
u(s)
3.
y(s)
forward path =
. /;
(
( )
( )
4.
[Ans. A]
(
(
)
)
Loop =
[Ans. C]
(s)
=1 (
)
8.
(
(
5.
[Ans. A]
Writing the given open loop transfer in
)
)
form of
[Ans. A]
The transfer function of a Zero-orderHold system having a sampling interval T
is
g t
/.
/.
So, at low frequencies, the approximate

model equivalent to original transfer
function will
th
th
th
Page 282
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Time Domain Analysis

ECE - 2006
1.
In the system shown below,
x(t) = (sin t) u(t). In steady-state, the
response y(t) will be
x(t)
(A)
(B)
2.
3.
y(t)
sin .t
(C)
sin .t
(D) sin t cos t
ECE - 2008
6.
Step responses of a set of three secondorders underdamped systems all have the
same percentage overshoot. Which of the
following diagrams represents the poles
of three systems?
(A)
j
sin t
The unit impulse response of a system is

(t)
t
For this system, the
steady-state value of the output for unit
step input is equal to
(A) 1
(C) 1
(B) 0
(D)
(B)
j
The unit-step response of a system

starting from rest is given by
(t)
or t
. The transfer
function of the system is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(C)
j
ECE - 2007
4.
The frequency response of a linear, timeinvariant system is given by H(f)=
5.
(D)
. The step response of the system is

(A) 5 (1
)u(t)
(C) (1
)u(t)
(B) 5 (1
)u(t)
)u(t)
(D)
(1
The transfer function of a plant is

(s)
)(
The
second-order
approximation of T(s) using dominant

pole concept is
(A)
(B)
(
(
)(
)(
)
)
(C)
(D)
(
(
7.
A
linear,
time-invariant,
causal
continuous time system has a rational
transfer function with simple poles at
s
and s
, and one simple zero
at s
. A unit step u(t) is applied at
the input of the system. At steady state,
)
)
th
th
th
Page 283
GATE QUESTION BANK
the output has constant value of 1. The

impulse response of this system is
(A) , xp ( t)
xp ( t)- u(t)
(B) ,
xp ( t)
xp ( t)
xp
( t)- u(t)
(C) ,
xp ( t)
xp ( t)- u(t)
(D) ,
xp ( t)
xp ( t)- u(t)
8.
Group I lists a set of four transfer

functions. Group II gives a list of possible
step responses y(t). Match the step
responses with the corresponding
transfer functions
Group I
Control Systems
4.
y(t)
1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
9.
P-3, Q-1, R-4, S-2

P-3, Q-2, R-4, S-1
P-2, Q-1, R-4, S-3
P-3, Q-4, R-1, S-2
The magnitude of frequency response of

an underdamped second order system is
5 at 0 rad/sec and peaks to
s
s
s
Group II
1.
at
rad/sec. The transfer function of the

system is,
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2009
10. The unit step response of an underdamped second order system has steady
state value of 2. Which one of the
following transfer function has these
properties?
y(t)
2.
y(t)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2010
11. A system with the transfer function
( )
has an output
( )
3.
y(t)
1
t
y(t)
os . t
x(t)
p os . t
/ for the input signal

/.Then, the system
p r m t r p s
(A)
(C) 1
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2011
12. The differential equation
y
x(t)
describes
system with an input x(t) and an output

th
th
th
Page 284
GATE QUESTION BANK
y(t). The system, which is initially

relaxed, is excited by a unit step input.
The output y(t) can be represented by the
waveform
Control Systems
(s)
(s)
Which one of the following compensators

C(s) achieves this?
(C) (s
)
(A) . /
(A)
y(t)
(B)
t
(D)
15.
The natural frequency of an undamped

second-order system is 40 rad/s. If the
system is damped with a damping ratio
0.3, the damped natural frequency in
rad/s is ________.
16.
The input
u(t) where u(t) is the
unit step function, is applied to a system
(B)
y(t)
(C)
with transfer function
y(t)
. If the initial
v lu o t output s
t n t v lu
of the output at steady state is _______.
t
17.
(D)
y(t)
The steady state error of the system

shown in the figure for a unit step input is
_________
(s)
r(t)
(s)
(s)
(t)
(t)
t
s
ECE - 2012
13. A system with transfer function
)
(s
)(s
(s)
(s
)(s
)(s
)
is excited
y s n( t). The steady-state
output of the system is zero at
(A)
r
s
(C)
r
s
(B)
r
s
(D)
r
s
ECE - 2014
14. For the
(s)
following
)(
feedback
18.
(s)
(s)
s(s
(A) 16
(B) 4
system
. The 2%-settling time of
the step response is required to be less

than 2 seconds.
For the second order closed-loop system

shown in the figure, the natural frequency
(in rad/s) is
)
(C) 2
(D) 1
EE - 2007
1.
Consider the feedback control system
shown below which is subjected to a unit
step input. The system is stable and has
th
th
th
Page 285
GATE QUESTION BANK
the following parameters kp = 4, ki = 10,

n
1
The transfer function of a system is given

as
s
+
5.
KP
The steady state value of z is

(A) 1
(C) 0.1
(B) 0.25
(D) 0
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Control Systems
. The system is ___________
An over damped system

An underdamped system
A critically damped system
An unstable system
EE - 2009
6.
The unit-step response
feedback system with
of a unity
open loop
transfer function G(s) =
Statement for Linked Answer Question Q.2

& Q.3
R-L-C circuit shown in figure,
)(
is
shown in the figure. The value of K is

1
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0
2.
3.
For a step- input

overshoot in the
output will be
(A) 0,Since the system is not under
damped
(B) 5%
(C) 16%
(D) 48%
If the above step response is to be
observed on the non-storage CRO, then it
would be best have the as a
(A) Step function
(B) Square wave of frequency 50 Hz
(C) Square wave of frequency 300 Hz
(D) Square wave of frequency 2.0KHz
EE - 2008
4.
The transfer function of a linear time
invariant system is given as
G(s) =
2
Time
(A) 0.5
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 6
EE - 2010
7.
For the system
, the approximate
time taken for a step response to reach

98% of its final value is
(A) 1s
(C) 4s
(B) 2s
(D) 8s
EE - 2011
8.
The steady state error of a unity feedback
linear system for a unit step input is 0.1.
The steady state error of the same system,
for a pulse input r(t) having a magnitude
of 10 and a duration of one second, as
shown in the figure is
r(t)
10
. The steady state value of
the output of the system for a unit

impulse input applied at time instant t=1
will be
(A) 0
(C) 1
(B) 0.5
(D) 2
1s
(A) 0
(B) 0.1
th
th
(C) 1
(D) 10
th
Page 286
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2007
Common Data for Questions 1 & 2
The following figure represents a
proportional control scheme of a first
order system with transportation lag.
R(s)
(s
1.
2.
at which the response to a unit step input

reaches its peak is seconds
4.
The damping coefficient for the closed

loop system is
(A) 0.4
(C) 0.8
(B) 0.6
(D) 1
5.
The value of p is
(A) 6
(B) 12
C(s)
Control Systems
The angular frequency

in
(s
)( sradians/s
)( at
) (s
s
which the loop phase lag becomes
is
(A) 0.408
(C) 1.56
(B) 0.818
(D) 2.03
IN - 2009
6.
A plant with a transfer function
is
controlled by a PI controller with

=1
and
n
un ty
configuration. The lowest value of that
ensures zero steady state error for a step
change in the reference input is
(A) 0
(C) 1/2
(B) 1/3
(D) 1
The steady state error for a unit step

input when the gain
= 1 is
(C)
1
(A)
(D) 2
(B)
IN - 2008
3.
If a first order system and its time
response to a unit step input are as
shown below, the gain K is
Statement for the Linked data Q.No.7 &

Q.No.8:
A disturbance input (t)is injected into
the unity feedback control loop shown in
the figure. Take the reference input r(t) to
be a unit step.
y(t)
r(t)
(C) 14
(D) 16
(s)
r(t)
d(t)
+
1
1
S(S+1)
y(t)
0.8
7.
If the disturbance is measurable, its effect on

the output can be minimized significantly
(s) To
using a feedforward controller
eliminate the component of the output due to
(t) s n t
( )
Should be
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.8
(C) 1
(D) 4

&5
A unity feedback system has open loop
Let (s)
ontroll r I (t) s n t
the amplitude of the frequency component of
y(t) due to d(t) is
8.
.The time
th
th
th
Page 287
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN - 2011
11. The unit-step response of a negative unity
feedback system with the open-loop
(A)
(B)
IN - 2010
9.
A unity feedback system has an open loop
transfer function (s)
(s)
(
(A) 0
(B) 0.5
(C)
(D)
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
12. Assuming zero initial condition, the
response y(t) of the system given below
to a unit step input u(t) is
(A) u(t)
(B) t u(t)
(s)
Y(s)
U(s)
A unit ramp input is applied to the system

shown in the adjoining figure. The steady
state error in its output is
r(s)
is
.The value
of k that yields a damping ratio of 0.5 for

the closed loop system is
(A) 1
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 9
10.
Control Systems
(C)
u(t)
(D)
u(t)
(C) 1
(D) 2

ECE
1.
(s
[Ans. A]
y(t) x(t)
(s)
(s)
(
x(t)
utput
s s
(
)u(t)
When t =
at steady state
output = 1
s n(t)u(t)
y(t)
2.
s
s
(t)
(s)
s n .t
3.
[Ans. B]
,st p r spons s
[Ans. C]
(t)
(s)
(s)
s
s
4.
[Ans. B]
()
(s) (s)
output
s(s
(s
)s
( )
s
th
th
.s
th
Page 288
GATE QUESTION BANK
t p r spons
.s
ns
s .s
s
s
s
(t) (
)u(t)
Which is also the required impulse
response of the system.
/
(s
8.
When s =
[Ans. D]
Comparing the given transfer functions
with
(s)
5.
y(t)
-u(t)
s
)(s
ln
s
Therefore P is undamped
[Ans. D]
In dominant pole concept the factor that
has to be eliminated should be in time
constant form
(s
Control Systems
s ov r
/ (s
.
s
mp
s rt
6.
[Ans. C]
ov rs oot
p n s on s
r
os
Where is the angle made by pole from
negative real axis.
To make M same, should be the same.
7.
[Ans. C]
Transfer functions
(s
)
(s)
(s
)(s
)
mp
9.
[Ans. A]
10.
[Ans. B]
Steady state value = -2
Denominator
underdamped
11.
[Ans. B]
(s)
or
(s)
s un
s
(s) (s)
Output, (s)
v n l m s (s)
s (s
)
(s
)(s
)
mp
Input (s)
or l m
lly
1=
P=
(s
)
(s
)(s
)
th
th
th
Page 289
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
[Ans. A]
y
y
y x(t)
t
t
Taking Laplace Transform of both sides
(s)
s (s)
s (s)
(s)
(s)
( s
)
(s)
s
s
ol s r
ts
[Ans. C]
(s)
x(s)
15.
(s
(s
)(s
)
)(s
)(s
)
Where
damped natural frequency
undamped natural frequency
damping ratio
y(s)
14.
16.
[Ans. C]
(s
s
s
pt on
o
(s)
(s)
y( )
17.
(s)
u(t)
(s)
So all poles of CLTP should lie on the left

of s =
line
The characteristic equation is
(s) (s)
. We have to check
whether are the roots this equation lies
on me left of s =
or not
[Ans. *] Range - 0.01 to 0.01

s
(s)
s
x(t)
s ttl ng t m
pt on
[Ans. *] Range 38.13 to 38.19

We know
(s
)(s
)
.
/
(s
)(s
)(s
)
s
For applying final value theorem system
must be stable, mean all poles should lie
in left half plane
) (s
So (s
)
r
s
s)
(s
)(s
)
(s+1)(s+2)+0.15+5s=0
s
s
s
s
(s)
pt on
(s
)
(s) (s)
o
(s
)
(s
)(s
)
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
s
s
s
Hence Option C is correct
As poles are on the right hand side of splane so given system is unstable system.
Only option (A) represents unstable
system.
13.
Control Systems
(s)
s
l m s y(s)
lm
s
s
[Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51

(s)
(s)
(s)
s
( )
s
(s) (s)
)(s
)(s
s
s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s) (s)
(s) *
+
(s) (s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
th
th
(s) (s)
th
Page 290
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
(s)
(s)
r
(s)
s
s
s
s
2.
[Ans. C]
m
l m s (s)
l ms
s
s s
s
s
+
18.
[Ans. C]
r ns r un t on
or
or
r un t
t
t
Taking Laplace transform
syst m
(s)
[Ans. A]
Step input
s
t
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
t (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
)(
s
Overshoot
/.
Comparing with
s
s
s
.
(s)
(s)
s
Steady state value of Z
t s (s)
t
(s)
s
.s
(s)
(s)
I(s)
Characteristic eq.
n (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) [
]
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) *
+
(s)
(s)
(s)
) I(s)
(s)
I(s)
EE
1.
= 0.163 or 16.3%
th
th
th
Page 291
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. C]
5.
Control Systems
[Ans. C]
M(s)
s
s
Comparing with standard form
M(s)
Setting time (t )
Square Wave
The system is critically damped

6.
[Ans. D]
t
y st t v lu o r spons
Input is unit step
So steady state error
For the square Wave should be
ms
For
(s)
(s)
w
t
z
ms
(s
Therefore, it would be best to have the

as a square wave of 300Hz.
(s)
(s) (s)
ppl
(s)
s (s)
(s) (s)
s
t
(
[Ans. A]
r(t) un t mplus
(t
)
R(s) = 1[r(t)] =
(s)
(s)
(s) s
)(s
s
Steady state error using final value
theorem
t s (s)
z
ms
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
rror
greater than t
For
z
4.
ms
For
)(
tt
s
7.
[Ans. C]
s
s
Steady state value of output, using final
value theorem
t s (s)
s
t
s
s
] ( s s rst or
s
.c Gain=2, T=1 sec
For 98%
t
s
th
th
th
r syst m)
Page 292
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
[Ans. A]
R(s)
Control Systems
Given
C(s)
+
G(s)
,
4.
[Ans. B]
(s)
n t
s (s)
|
(s)
x(t)
,u(t)
x(s)
s
(
u(t
s
)-
)
|
(s)
5.
[Ans. B]
6.
[Ans. A]
( )
( )
IN
1.
t n ( )
t n ( )
r
s -
d(t)= (t)
(s)
s
or r(t)
u(t)
os t on l rror onst nt
t (s)
8.
(s
]
)
( )
s(s
(
+
)
)
(s)
, (s)
(s)
y(s)-
ontroll r
So
s
s
s
(s) *
y(s) *
+
+
)
s(s
)
s(s
y(s)
s
(
)
(s)
s s
t
t (s)
[Ans. D]
lm
(s)
(s) wor s s
s
s
s(s
)
(
[Ans. B]
s
(s)
y(s)
OR
(s)
(s)
(
)
(t)
s nt *
(s)
3.
(t) [
[Ans. B]
or
)
(
( )
s
s
[Ans. D]
Output due to
7.
(
)
/
)
s
m
( )
Phase lag
It satisfy ,
(s)
/.
[Ans. D]
(s)
2.
y(s)
|
|
x(s)
th
th
th
Page 293
GATE QUESTION BANK
9.
[Ans. D]
T(s) =
and
or
10.
Control Systems
or
K = 9.
[Ans. B]
(s)
s(s
)
For unit Ramp input, r(t)
t u(t)
lo ty rror onst nt
(s)
t
11.
[Ans. D]
(s)
(s) s
The unit step response is given by
(s)
(t)
12.
s(s
(
) u(t)
[Ans. B]
H(s)
u(s)
Y(s)
u(s)= s [unit step i/p]

s =
y(s) = H(s).U(s)= s
s
y(t)
0 s 1 t u(t)
th
th
th
Page 294
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion

ECE - 2006
1.
The positive values of
and
so that
the system shown in the figure below
oscillates at a frequency of r
s
respectively are
R(s)
(s
(s
s
)
s
C(s)
)
4.
The number of open right half plane poles

of G (s) =
is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
ECE - 2012
5.
The Feedback system shown below
oscillates at 2 rad/s when
(s)
(s
s
(s
(A) 1, 0.75
(B) 2, 0.75
(C) 1, 1
(D) 2, 2
ECE - 2007
2.
If the closed-loop transfer function of a
control system is given as,
(s)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
)(
, then it is
an unstable system
an uncontrollable system
a minimum phase system
a non-minimum phase system
, where
is a parameter.
Consider the standard negative unity

feedback configuration as shown below
+
ECE - 2014
6.
The forward path transfer function of a
unity negative feedback system is given
by
(s)
(s
)(s
)
The value of K which will place both the
poles of the closed-loop system at the
same location, is _______.
7.
Consider a transfer function

(s)
with p a positive
real parameter. The maximum value of p

until which
remains stable is __________
G(s)

(A) The closed loop system in never
st l or ny v lu o
(B) or som pos t v v lu s o
t
closed loop system is stable, but not
for all positive values
(C) For all positive v lu s o
t
los
loop system is stable
(D) The closed loop system is stable for
ll v lu s o
ot pos t v
n
negative
(s)
(A) K=2 and a=0.75

(B) K=3 and a=0.75
(C) K=4 and a=0. 5
(D) K=2 and a=0.5
ECE - 2008
3.
A certain system has transfer function
G(s) =
)
s
EE - 2007
1.
The system shown in the figure is
U1 +
s
s
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
U2
+
stable
unstable
conditionally stable
stable for input u1, but unstable for
input u2
th
th
Page 295
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
If the loop gain K of a negative feedback

system having a loop transfer function
(
(
)
)
(C) unstable and of the minimum phase

type
(D) unstable and of the non-minimum
phase type
to be adjusted to induce a sustained
oscillation then
(A) The frequency of this oscillation
must be
rad/s.
(B) The frequency of this oscillation

must be 4rad/s
(C) The frequency of this oscillation
6.
The frequency response of the linear

system ( ) is provided in the tabular
form below.
( )
( )
1.3
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.3
The gain margin and phase margin of the
system are
(A)
n
(B)
n
(C)
n
(D)
n
must be 4 or
rad/s
(D) Such a K does not exist

EE - 2008
3.
Figure shows a feedback system where
K > 0. The range of K for which the
system is stable will be given by
+
(A) 0 < K < 30

(B) 0 < K <39
s(s
)(s
(C) 0 < K < 390

(D) K > 390
EE - 2009
4.
The first two rows of Routh's tabulation
of a third order equation are as follows.
s3
2
2
2
s
4
4.
This means there are
(A) two roots at s= j and one root in
right half s-plane
(B) two roots at s = j2 and one root in
left half s-plane
(C) two roots at s= j2 and one root in
right half s-plane
(D) two roots at s = j and one root in
left half s-plane
Control Systems
EE - 2014
7.
In the formation of Routh-Hurwitz array
for a polynomial, all the elements of a row
have zero values. This premature
termination of the array indicates the
presence of
(A) only one root at the origin
(B) imaginary roots
(C) only positive real roots
(D) only negative real roots
8.
For the given system, it is desired that the

system be stable. The minimum value of
for this condition is __________
(s)
(s
s
)s
(s)
)
(
)s
EE - 2011
5.
An open loop system represented by the
transfer function G(s) = (
)
)(
is
9.
A system wth the open loop transfer

function
(A) stable and of the minimum phase

type
(B) stable and of the non-minimum
phase type
(s)
th
s(s
th
)(s
th
Page 296
GATE QUESTION BANK
is connected in a negative feedback

configuration with a feedback gain of
unity. For the closed loop system to be
marginally stable, the value of K is_________
10.
A single-input single-output feedback

system has forward transfer function G(s)
and feedback transfer function H(s). It is
given that |G(s)H(s)| < 1. Which of the
following is true about the stability of the
system?
(A) The system is always stable
(B) The system is stable if all zeros of
G(s)H(s) are in left half of the s-plane
(C) The system is stable if all poles of
G(s)H(s) are in left half of the s-plane
(D) It is not possible to say whether or
not the system is stable from the
information given
IN - 2006
1.
The range of the controller gains (Kp, Ki)
that makes the closed loop control system
(shown in the following figure) stable is
given as
(s)
(s)
s
(s
Ki
20
12
K
(B) Ki < 0 and Kp i 20
12
(A) Ki < 0 and Kp <
(C) Ki 0 and Kp 0
(D) Ki 0 and Kp
Ki
20
12
)(s
Control Systems
IN - 2008
2.
A closed loop control system is shown
below. The range of the controller gain KC
which will make the real parts of all the
closed loop poles more negative than -1 is
+
s(s
(s) _
(A) KC> 4
(B) KC> 0
( )
(C) KC> 2
(D) KC< 2
IN - 2010
3.
The open loop transfer function of a unity
gain feedback system is given by:
G(s) =
(
(
)
)(
. The range of positive
values of k for which the closed loop

system will remain stable is:
(A) 1 <k <3
(C) 5 < k <
(B) 0 < k < 10
(D) 0 < k <
IN - 2011
4.
rst two rows o out s t l o
third-order characteristic equation are
s
3
3
s
4
4
It can be inferred that the system has
(A) one real pole in the right-half of splane
(B) a pair of complex conjugate poles in
the right-half of s-plane
(C) a pair of real poles symmetrically
placed around s = 0
(D) a pair of complex conjugate poles on
the imaginary axis of the s-plane
th
th
th
Page 297
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems

ECE
1.
(
,
(s
(
(s
s
From Routh array, s
k =2 & a = 0.75
)
)
[Ans. D]
System is stable, controllable and nonminimum phase system.
3.
[Ans. C]
losed loop gain is
( )
(s) s
s
s
Characteristic equation
(s) s
(
)s
los loop system is stable only for
r or or ll pos t v o
the closed loop system is stable.
[Ans. C]
Perform Routh analysis to the polynomial
in denominator of G(S).
1
3
5
s
2
6
3
s
()
s
(
s
1
a
[Ans. *] Range 2.24 to 2.26

Using root locus
Calculation of break point

(s
)(s
)
(s
)(s
)
s
s
(s)
,
7.

(s) to remain stable, the poles of
For
(s) should lie in LHP of s-plane
1
2P
s
3+P
s
2P
s
[Ans. A]
Characteristic equation is 1+G(S)H(S)= 0
(
= k + 1;
3
Number of sign changes =2
1+
6.
)
(
(1+k)
(
)
s
s
s =
+ (k + 1) = 0; a
4a = k + 1;
From options, k = 2, a = 0.75
))
2.
5.
(s)
4.
o m x mum v lu o
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
u ( )
s
s
+ s (k + 2) + (k + 1) = 0
k+2
k+2
y ( )
s
th
th
th
Page 298
GATE QUESTION BANK

(
( )
(s
(s
(
)
)
5.
[Ans. B]
For G(s), poles are at 2 and 3
Stable
Also, zeroes are to the right of S-plane
non-minimum phase type
6.
[Ans. A]
At gain across over frequency (
magnitude of ( ) is 1.
| (
)|
Pole is in LHS of s-plane, Hence stable.

u ( )
y ( )
s
s
s
( )
(
Phase of (
)s
)p
s o
log
log
7.
[Ans. B]
It is a special case under R-H stability
criteria. Imaginary roots are calculated
using auxiliary polynomial
8.
[Ans. *] Range 0.61 to 0.63

(
)s
(
)s (
s
64+3k
s
64+3k
(or)
for marginal stability
For K = 16,
[Ans. C]
(s)
( (
)(
)
Characteristics equation
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
(
)s
rt r
1
[Ans. D]
s
s
(s
s
)(s
1
(
1
)
s
(
(
(
)
)(
& k < 390 (for stability)

4.
)
( ) t
m gn tu o
| (
)|
Gain margin=
),
)
(
[Ans. B]
T(s) =
At phase cross frequency (
(s
)(s
)
Hence unstable as it has pole at right
hand side of S-plane
3.
Phase of margin =
2.
Control Systems
S=
th
th
th
Page 299
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
[Ans. 5]
)(s
)
s(s
s
(s
)
s)(s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
IN
1.
s
s
s
s
1
4
5
6
4
K
s
2.
[Ans. C]
)
s(s
s
s
k
0
[Ans. A]
Characteristic equation of system
(s) (s)
G(s) H(s) =
For system to be stable all the zeroes of
G(s) H(s) should lie in left of (
) plane
So for (s) (s)
The system will be always stable.
or
Put S = Z 1 and apply RH criterion for

the polynomial in z
Value of k to be marginally stable

K=5
10.
12
M n mum v lu
9.
3.
[Ans. D]
1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
(s + 1) (s + 2) + k(s+3) = 0
System is stable, for all positive K.(from
Routh Hurwitz criterion)
(or)
4.
[Ans. D]
3
4
S
0(
1
4
[Ans. D]
Characteristic equation is
s(s+2)(s+10)+(
)
s
s
s
3
4
)
s
)(
S=
th
th
th
Page 300
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Root Locus Technique

ECE - 2007
1.
A unity feedback control system has an
open-loop transfer function
(s)
. The gain K for which
s= 1+j1 will lie on the root locus of this

system is
(A) 4
(C) 6.5
(B) 5.5
(D) 10
ECE - 2009
2.
The feedback configuration and the polezero locations of G(s) =
are shown
(A)
(s) (s)
(B)
(s) (s)
(C)
(s) (s)
)(
(
(
)(
(
(s) (s)
(D)
)
)(
)
(
)
)(
)
)
ECE - 2014
4.
Consider the feedback system shown in
the figure. The Nyquist plot of G(s) is also
shown. Which one of the following
conclusions is correct?
(s)
below. The root locus for negative values

of
k,
i.e.
for
s
breakaway/break-in points and angle of
departure at pole P (with respect to the
positive real axis) equal to
Im (
+
+
G(s)
Im(s)
(A) G (s) is an all-pass filter

(B) G (s) is a strictly proper transfer
function
(C) G (s) is a stable and minimum-phase
transfer function
(D) The closed-loop system is unstable
for sufficiently large and positive k
Re(s)
P
(A) and 00
(B) and 450
(C) and 00
(D) and 450
5.
In the root locus plot shown in the figure,

the pole/zero marks and the arrows have
been removed. Which one of the following
transfer functions has this root locus?
ECE - 2011
3.
The root locus plot for a system is given
below. The open loop transfer function
corresponding to this plot is given by
th
th
th
Page 301
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
6.
)(
)(
)(
(
(
)(
)(
)(
)
)(
(C)
)(
Control Systems
)
)
The characteristic equation of a unity

negative feedback system is
(s)
. The open loop transfer
function G(s) has one pole at 0 and two
poles at 1. The root locus of the system
for varying K is shown in the figure.
+1
(D)
+2
+1
+2
The constant damping ratio line, for
nt rs ts t root lo us t po nt
The distance from the origin to point A is
given as 0.5. The value of K at point A
is__________
EE - 2006
1.
A Closed loop system has the
characteristic function
(s
)(s
) + K (s
) = 0. Its root
locus plot against K is
j
(A)
(B)
EE - 2010
2.
The characteristic equation of a closedloop system is
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
.
(A) Its roots are always real
(B) It cannot have a breakaway point in
,s- 0
the range
(C) Two of its roots tend to infinity along
the asymptotes Re, (D) It may have complex roots in the
right half plane.
EE - 2011
3.
The open loop transfer function G(s) of a
unity feedback control system is given as,
G(s) =
+1
From the root locus, it can be inferred

that when k tends to positive infinity.
(A) three roots with nearly equal real
parts exist on the left half of the splane
(B) one real root is found on the right
half of the s-plane
(C) the root loci cross the j axis for a
fin t v lu o
(D) three real roots are found on the

right half of the s-plane
+2
+1
+2
th
th
th
Page 302
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2014
4.
The root locus of a unity feedback system
is shown in the figure
Control Systems
controller of gain K in the forward path, in

a unity feedback configuration.
The transfer function is
(A) ( )( )(
(C) ( )( )( )
2.
(B)
3.
The closed
system is
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
)(s
(s
)(s
(s
)(s
(s
)(s
)(
)(
(
(
)
)(
The root locus plot of the system has

(A) Two breakaway points located at s
= 0.59 and s = 3.41
(B) One breakaway point located at s
= 0.59
(C) One breakaway point located at s
= 3.41
(D) One breakaway point located at s
= 1.41
imaginary at =4 2 rad/s with gain

K=384. It is observed that the point
s= 1.5+j1.5 lies in the root locus. The
gain K at
+j1.5 is computed as
IN - 2009
5.
A unity feedback system has the transfer
1.5+j1.5
(A) 11.3
(B) 21.2
(D)
feedback system is G(s)=
X
4
)(
IN - 2008
4.
IN - 2006
1.
The root locus of a plant is given in the
following figure. The root locus crosses
X
8
)(
If the root locus plot of the closed loop

system passes through the points j ,
the maximum value of K for stability of
the unity feedback closed loop system is
(C) 10
(A)
(B) 6
(D) 6
loop transfer function of the
(s
function
)
)
. The value of b for which
the loci of all the three roots of the closed

loop characteristic equation meet at a
single point is
(A) 10/9
(C) 30/9
(B) 20/9
(D) 40/9
(C) 41.25
(D) 61.2
IN - 2007
and 3
A transfer function with unity DC gain has
three poles at
and
and no
finite zeros. A plant with this transfer
function is connected with a proportional
(
(
IN - 2011
6.
Consider the second-order system with
the characteristic equation
)
(s
)
s(s
. Based on the
properties of the root loci, it can be shown
that the complex portion of the root loci
of the given system for
is
described by a circle, and the two
breakaway points on the real axis are
th
th
th
Page 303
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN - 2012
7.
gain negative feedback control system is
given by G(s) =
)(
ngl
Control Systems
IN - 2014
8.
A loop transfer function is given by :
(s
)
(s) (s)
(
)
The point of intersection of the
asymptotes of G(s)H(s) on the real axis in
the s-plane is at ___________.
which the root locus approaches the zeros

of the system, satisfies
(A)
t n
. /
t n
. /
(B)
(C)
t n
. /
(D)
t n
. /

ECE
1.
[Ans. D]
ro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop pol s to t t po nt
pro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop z ro to t t po nt

2.
[Ans. B]
(
(
5.
)
)
[Ans. B]
Angle of departure is
Where
z
z
3.
4.
[Ans. B]
From plot we can observe that one pole
terminates at one zero at position
and
three poles terminates to
. It means
there are four poles and 1 zero. Pole at
goes on both sides. It means there are two
poles at
There are 4 poles/zeros at

s = 1,
There has to be one pole zero pair at
both cannot be poles or zeros
at the same time.
So option A and D are crossed out
There are 2 asymptotes. So number of
poles is two more than number of zeros.
[Ans. D]
For larger values of K, it will encircle the
critical point (
) which makes
closed-loop system unstable.
th
th
th
Page 304
GATE QUESTION BANK
(s
Since there has to be one zero at either

s
or s
, the remaining break
frequencies are all poles
ons r
opt on
ntro
po nt w
r t
(s
)(s
)
Zero of OLTF s = 1: z = 1
Poles of OLTF s =
symptot s m t
The picture
forms to this
For option C, centroid is at 0 which is
wrong
Hence Option B is correct.
6.
Control Systems
l n
The root locus starts from open loop

poles and terminates either on open loop
zero or infinity.
Root locus exist on a section of real axis it
is the sum of the open loop poles and
zeros to the right of the section is odd.
Number of branches terminating on
infinity.
[Ans. *] Range 0.32 to 0.41
Angles of asymptotes
(
)
(
( )
or
Intersection of asymptotes on real axis

(centroid)
pol s z ros
So the co-ordinates of point A is
On the root locus, we know
( )
[Ans. B]
Characteristic function
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
(s
)
(s) (s)
(s
)(s
)
Open loop transfer function
(s) (s)
( )
1
Option (B) is correct on the basis of above
analysis.
( )
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. C]
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
(s
)
s(s
)(s
)
Comparing with 1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
G(s)H(s) = open-loop transfer function
th
th
th
Page 305
GATE QUESTION BANK
(s
)(s
)
s(s
Number of zeros = Z = 1, zero at
Number of poles = P = 3
Poles at 0,
&
Number of branches terminating at
infinity =
Angle of asymptotes
(
)
(
Control Systems
So all these roots have nearly equal real

parts on left half plane when
4.
[Ans. C]
n
pol s
ntr o
z ros
)
X
Im g n ry
Given root locus is complementary root

locus for which either k < 0 or loop gain
is +ve means +ve feedback, means G(s) is
always +ve
So for k > 0
G(s) H(s) =
Breakaway point lies in the range

,sand two branches
terminates at infinity along the
asymptotes Re(s)
3.
[Ans. A]
(s)
(s
s (s
(s)
(s)
IN
1.
)(
(s)
s)
)
(s
)(s
s(s
(s)
)(s
(s)
(s)
Angle of asymptotes
(s)
(s) (s)
[Ans. C]
ntro
(s)
(s)
s s
ts
( Z 1)
for poles at zero

,
-
so Rool locus is
th
th
th
Page 306
GATE QUESTION BANK
Note that the data given at the

intersecting point with imaginary axis is
not necessary
2.
3.
(s
s )
(s
)
We need to find the breakaway point.
o
[Ans. B]
With unity DC gain, poles at
s
n
and no finite zeros
l nt
(s
)(s
)(s
s
)( s
s) (s
s )
s
s
s s
s
(
)s
s
s
ow s
is not the breakaway point
(
)s
o s
For all the three root loci to meet at a
single point, we need that this equation
has equal roots.
)
o(
(s
s
( )
(
( )
s
s
s
s
)(
)(
)
(
(
)
row has zero elements if 6k = 60 or
k = 10 then 2 roots lie on the imaginary axis
given by s
s
. If k > 10,
the root at s t to
o s pl n
4.
so
)
(
) (
(
)
or
st
r qu r
.(
)(
6.
[Ans. C]
K=
)
) (
(
7.
s
s(s
)(s
(s (
s(s
(s)
[Ans. B]
(s
)
s (s
)
For unity feedback,
equation is 1+ G(s) = 0
s
s
s
[Ans. D]
(s)
5.
) /
S=
v lu
=0
s
s
S=
RL exists at 3.41
(
But b = 20 is not the required value of b

because it will cancel out an open-loop
pole
)
(
)
)(
[Ans. C]
(s)
or
[Ans. C]
T(s)=
Control Systems
)
))(s (
)(s
)
))
(s)
characteristic
th
th
th
Page 307
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Angle at which RLD approaches to zeros

is the angle of arrival for zeros.
,
(
. /1
t nt
[
* [
( )
t n
t nt
t n
8.
( )]
( )]+
( )
[Ans.
]
Int r s t on o symptot s
sum o pol s sum o z ros
num r o pol s num r o z ro
(
) ( )
th
th
th
Page 308
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Frequency Response Analysis Using Nyquist plot

ECE - 2006
1.
The open-loop transfer function of a
unity-gain feedback control system is
given by, G(s) =
)(
. The gain
margin of the system in dB is given by

(A) 0
(C) 20
(B) 1
(D)
2.
Consider
two
(s)
and
transfer
(s)
G(s)
4.
Which of the following statement is true?

(A) G(s) is an all-pass filter
(B) G(s) has a zero in the right-half plane
(C) G(s) is the impedance of a passive
network
(D) G(s) is marginally stable
5.
The gain and phase margins of G(s) for

closed loop stability are
(A) 6 dB and
(C) 6 dB and
(B) 3 dB and
(D) 3 dB and
functions,
. The
3-dB bandwidths of their frequency

responses are, respectively
3.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The Nyquist plot of ( ) ( ) for a

closed loop control system, passes
through (
) point in the GH plane.
The gain margin of the system in dB is
equal to
(A) Infinite
(B) greater than zero
(C) less than zero
(D) zero
ECE - 2011
Common Data Question 6 and 7:
The input output transfer function of a
( )
plant
. The plant is placed
in a unity negative feedback configuration

as shown in the figure below.
r
(s)
y
s(s
l nt
ECE - 2009
Common Data for Question 4 and 5
The Nyquist plot of a stable transfer
function G(s) is shown in the figure. We
are interested in the stability of the closed
loop system in the feedback configuration
shown
6.
The signal flow graph that DOES NOT

model the plant transfer function ( ) is
(A)
1
1/s
1/s
1/s
100 y
Im
(B)
1/s
1/s
1/s
100
Re
th
th
th
Page 309
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
(D)
(C)
1/s
1/s
1/s
100
(D)
1/s
1/s
7.
1/s
100
The gain margin of the system under

closed loop unity negative feedback is
(A) 0 dB
(C) 26 dB
(B) 20 dB
(D) 46 dB
EE - 2006
1.
Consider the following Nyquist plots of
loop transfer functions over = 0 to
= . Which of these plots represents a
stable closed loop system?
(1)
Im
R
=
8.
For the transfer function

( )
the corresponding Nyquist
plot for the positive frequency has the form
(A)
Re
1
Im
(2)
Re
(B)
(3)
Im
j5
=
Re
(C)
(4)
Im
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
Re
(1) only
all, except (1)
all, except (3)
(1) and (2) only
th
th
Page 310
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2007
2.
If x = Re G(j ), and y = Im G(j ) then for
, the Nyquist plot for
G(s) = 1 / s(s+1) (s+2) becomes
asymptotic to the line
(A) x = 0
(C) x = y
(B) x =
Control Systems
(A)
Im
3/4
Re
(D) d = y /
EE - 2009
3.
The polar plot of an open loop stable
system is shown below. The closed loop
system is
=0
=0
(B)
Im
Imaginary
Real
Re
3/4
(A) Always stable

(B) Marginally stable
(C) Unstable with one pole on the RHS splane
(D) Unstable with two poles on the RHS
s-plane
4.
(C)
The open loop transfer function of a

unity feedback system is given by
(
)
G(s) =
s The gain margin of this
system is
(A) 11.95dB
(C) 21.33dB
(B) 17.67dB
(D) 23.9dB
=0
Im
Re
1/6
Im
(D)
EE - 2010
5.
The frequency response of
(s)
)(s
)- plotted in the
,s(s
complex ( ) plane (for
) is
Re
=0
1/6
th
th
th
Page 311
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2011
6.
A two-loop position control system is
shown below.
Motor
s(s
IN - 2009
4.
A unity feedback control loop with an
open transfer function of the form
(s)
(s)
having a transfer function
s
Tacho-generator
by G(s) = (
5.
G(s) =
2.
3.
)(
6.
The gain margin of the system is

(A) 0.125
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.25
(D) 1
(C) 125
(D) 125
v lu o
or t
mp ng r t o to
be 0.5, corresponding to the dominant
closed-loop complex conjugate pole pair
is
(A) 250
(C) 75
(B) 125
(D) 50
IN - 2012
7.
negative feedback control system is given
by
G(s) =
The phase crossover frequency of the

system in radians per second is
(A) 0.125
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.25
(D) 1
is inserted
(A) 250
(B) 250

&3
Consider a unity feedback system with
open loop transfer function
The value of K for the phase margin of the

system to be 45 is
(s)
(C)
(D)
IN - 2011
The open-loop transfer function of a unity
negative feedback control system is given
IN - 2008
1.
For the closed loop system shown below
to be stable, the value of time delay TD (in
seconds) should be less than
into the loop, the phase margin will

become
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The gain k of the Tacho-generator

influences mainly the
(A) peak overshoot
(B) natural frequency of oscillation
(C) phase shift of the closed loop
transfer function at very low
)
frequencies (
(D) phase shift of the closed loop
transfer function at very high
)
frequencies (
(A)
(B)
has a gain crossover frequency of 1 rad/s

and a phase margin of
. If an element
(s)
Control Systems
)(
. The gain margin of the
system is
(A) 10.8 dB
(B) 22.3dB
(C) 34.1dB
(D) 45.6dB
IN - 2014
8.
The loop transfer function of a feedback
control system is given by
(s) (s)
)( s
)
s(s
Its phase crossover frequency (in rad/s),
approximated to two decimal places, is __.
th
th
th
Page 312
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems

ECE
1.
6.
[Ans. D]
or option (D).
[Ans. D]
( )
(s)
(s
)(s
or g n m rg n
t n ( )
t n
( )
t n
. /
7.
[Ans. C]
(s) (s)
)
s(s
(
)
t n
phase
cross-over
=0
o (s)
For
[ ]
Gain margin =
log
t n (
0 1
r
Using Root locus of G(s)
) (
root locus will cut the

when k
) (
3.
= 0 axis only
0 1
8.
[Ans. D]
At
(
GM = 20 log
4.
[Ans. B]
5.
[Ans. C]
(
At
log
) (
(
) (
log
[Ans. A]
Assuming no.of open loop poles in the
RHS of s plane = P = 0
Complete nyquist plots
Im
) (
GM = 20
|
(
At
EE
1.
[Ans. A]
( )
=5
So ( ) is a straight line parallel to
axis.
) (
M n
[Ans. C]
BW depends only on denominator and is
equal to (
So gain margin =
frequency,
ut s
(
2.
(s)
s not tr ns r un t on o
) (
PM =
No.of encirclements = N = 0
th
th
th
Page 313
GATE QUESTION BANK
N=PZ=0
Control Systems
Hence the system is unstable

So option (A) is correct
Hence system is stable.
2.
[Ans. B]
Imj
) (
(
(
)(
symptot to x =
3.
Two anti clockwise encirclement

N=2
PZ=N=2
)
)(
[Ans. D]
2 clockwise encirclement of 1 + j0
= 0; N = 2
=2
Z = number of closed loop ploes in RHS
Hence system is unstable
4.
[Ans. D]
Open loop transfer function, G(s) =
Put s =
Hence system is unstable.

Im
At phase crossover frequency (

phase of OLTF is
( )
Two clockwise encirclement of 1

Hence N = 2
| s lw ys
(
Im
or ny v lu o
)
n t
Hence the system is unstable
(p
ross r qu n y)
Gain margin = 20log
| (
)|
) )
((
log
5.
[Ans. A]
(
As
(
((
G(
)
)
))
s
( ) -0 +
Option (A) satisfies above
Two clockwise encirclement of 1

Hence N = 2
Z=2
th
th
th
Page 314
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. A]
T(s) =
2.
(
M is dependent on K
(A) is correct
is independent of K
(B) is not
correct
T(J ) = (
[Ans. C]
( )
t n ( )
( )
Control Systems
3.
[Ans. A]
( )
4.
[Ans. A]
M o (s)
t n
( )
( )
( ) n ( ) r p rt lly orr t
(
[Ans. C]
(s) =
s
(s)
t low r qu n s
t g r qu n s
IN
1.
t n (
)
t n (
(
(
PM of
y(s)
5.
t n
)
)
(s) =
[Ans. B]
PM = 45= 180
t n
(s)
. /)
t n
. /
rad/sec
( )
y(s)
. /
|(
G(s) =
For system to be stable G(s) should lie in
the left of ( 1, 0)
For finding the critical/ marginal value
apply phase condition
w
6.
[Ans. A]
r t r st
(s
)
s
s
s (
The dominant poles are given by
)
s
s (
or (s)
(s)
w
qu t on
s
|
So w
For stable system
or
7.
[Ans. C]
= 15 r/s
th
th
th
Page 315
GATE QUESTION BANK
G.M in dB =
8.
log 0
Control Systems
[Ans. *]Range 0.30 to 0.34

(s) (s)
s(s
)( s
or
(s) (s)
t n
t n ( )
t n (
As t n
So
=1
r s
r s
th
th
th
Page 316
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Frequency Response Analysis Using Bode Plot

ECE - 2006
&2
Consider a unity-gain feedback control
system whose open-loop transfer
function is
ECE - 2010
4.
For the asymptotic Bode magnitude plot
shown below, the system transfer
function can be
M gn tu
( )
1.
The value of 'a' so that the system has a

phase-margin equal to is approximately
equal to
(A) 2.40
(B) 1.40
2.
(C) 0.84
(D) 0.74
With the value of 'a' set for a phasemargin of

the value of unit-impulse
response of the open-loop system at
second is equal to
(A) 3.40
(C) 1.84
(B) 2.40
(D) 1.74
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2014
5.
The phase
( )
margin
)(
)(
in
)
degrees
calculated
of
using
the asymptotic Bode plot is ________.

ECE - 2007
3.
The asymptotic bode plot of a transfer
function is as shown in the figure. The
transfer function G(s) corresponds to this
Bode plot is
|G(
6.
In a Bode magnitude plot, which one of

the following slopes would be exhibited at
high frequencies by a 4th order all-pole
system
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
7.
The Bode asymptotic magnitude plot of a

minimum phase system is shown in the
figure.
)|(dB)
60
20 dB/decade
40
40 dB/decade
20
0.1
10
2
0
(
(
100
)
)
60 dB/decade
(A)
(B)
)(
(
)(
(C)
)
)
(D)
(r
(
)(
)(
s) n log s l
If the system is connected in a unity

negative feedback configuration, the
steady state error of the closed loop
system, to a unit ramp input, is_________.
th
th
th
Page 317
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2006
1.
The Bode magnitude plot of
(
)(
H (j ) = (
(
(A)
)
)
Control Systems
EE - 2008
2.
The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
minimum phase transfer function is
shown in the figure.
is
(
40
40 dB/ decade
(dB)
20
20
20 dB/ decade
(r
s)
(log scale)
0.1
0
+1
+3
+2
Log ( )
20
0 dB/ decade
(B)
This transfer function has

(A) Three poles and one zero
(B) Two poles and one zero
(C) Two poles and two zeros
(D) One pole and two zeros
)
40
20
+1
+2
+3
Log ( )
EE - 2009
3.
The asymptotic approximation of the
log-magnitude vs frequency plot of a
system containing only real poles and
zeros is shown. Its transfer function is
40 dB / dec
(C)
60 dB / dec
80 dB
40
20
+1
+2
+3
Log ( )
0.1
(A)
(D)
(
)(
(B)
(
2 5
)
(
)(
(C)
)
)
(
)(
(
(D)
25
)
)
)
)(
)
40
EE - 2014
4.
The Bode magnitude plot of the transfer
20
function (s)
0
+1
+2
+3
(
.
)(
/(
)
).
is shown
below:
Note that -6 dB/octave = -20 dB/decade.
The value of is_______
Log ( )
th
th
th
Page 318
GATE QUESTION BANK
The gain and phase margin of the system

are
(A) 0 dB, 180
(C) 0 dB, 10
(B) 3.88 dB, 170
(D) 3.88 dB, 10
t v
t v
Control Systems
t v
t v
t v
t v
(r
s )
IN - 2008
2.
The Bode asymptotic plot of a transfer
function is given below. In the frequency
range shown, the transfer function has
dB
5.
6.
For the transfer function

(s
)
( )
s(s
)(s
s
)
The values of the constant gain term and
the highest corner frequency of the Bode
plot respectively are
(A) 3.2, 5.0
(C) 3.2, 4.0
(B) 16.0, 4.0
(D) 16.0, 5.0
+ 20dB / decade
20dB / decade
0dB / decade
log
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The magnitude Bode plot of a network is

shown in the figure
(
)
lop
log
The maximum phase angle

and the
corresponding gain
respectively, are
(A) 30 and 1.73dB
(B) 30 and 4.77dB
(C) + 30 and 4.77dB
(D) + 30 and 1.73dB
IN - 2006
1.
A unity feedback system has the following
open loop frequency response:
(r s )
( )
( )
2
7.5
3
4.8
4
3.15
5
2.25
6
1.7
8
1
10
0.64
3 poles and 1 zero

1 pole and 2 zeroes
2 poles and 1 zero
2 poles and 2 zeroes
IN - 2010
3.
The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
lead network with its pole and zero on the
left half of the s-plane is shown in the
adjoining figure. The frequency at which
the phase angle of the network is
maximum (in rad/s) is
r
s
(log scale)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN - 2013
4.
The Bode plot of a transfer function G(s)
is shown in the figure below.
th
th
th
Page 319
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Gain (dB)
The gain (20 log|G(s)|) is 32 dB and -8 dB

at 1 rad/s and 10 rad/s respectively. The
phase is negative for all . Then G(s) is
40
32
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
20
5.
The discrete time transfer function

is
0
1
10
-8
(r
s)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
100
Non minimum phase and unstable.

Minimum phase and unstable.
Minimum phase and stable.
Non minimum phase and stable.

ECE
1.
4.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
| ( )|
M
w r
G(s) =
(
(
t n (
5.
(
M
t n (
2.
= 0.84
[Ans. C]
(s)
g(t)
u(t)
t u(t)
3.
[Ans. D]
(s)
o
s(s
)(
plot s (
r ts typ
log
)
) orm
syst m so
(
)(
)(
)
From the plot frequency at which gain is 0
dB is
r
s
( )
M
At t = 1, g(t)
6.
[Ans. A]
In a transfer function if all are poles if we
plot the BODE diagram, then an each and
every corner frequency we have to
introduce a line of slope
and hence on the 4th frequency the slope
of line will become 80 dB/sec and will
continue upto infinity
|
K = 100
th
th
th
Page 320
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
[Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51

From the Bode plot given, we can see that
there are 2 break frequencies at
= 2
and
= 10 rad/sec. Also it is a type 1
system.
So, the transfer function is
(
)
( )
(
)
( )
At
= 1 rad/sec,
(given)
2.
[Ans. C]
Initial slope is 40 dB/decade, it means
there are double pole at origin. Slope
changes from
dB/decade to
dB/decade. It means there is a zero.
Slope changes from
dB/decade to 0
dB/decade at some other frequency. It
means there is one more zero. Therefore
transfer function has two poles and zeros.
20 log | |
3.
[Ans. B]
log
(
(
In s domain,
(
(s)
(
(
)
)
l m s (s)
(
log
s)
s)
(s
s(s
(s
lm
s
)
)
)
)
)

For initial dotted slope
[Ans. A]
(
/.
(s
)(s
s (s
(
)(
log )
s .
(
.
4.
(
s )
s )(
s )
s (
So,
EE
1.
Control Systems
log
( )
log
(
( )(
)
Corner frequencies are 1, 10 & 100
rad/sec
( )
(
)
log
log
.
(s)
.
log
/.
/.
/.
log
(
5.
[Ans. A]
(s)
(s
)(s
s(s
(
log
)(
s(
log
log
log
log
log
log
)
s
s
)
s) .
n m x mum r qu n y
th
th
th
r s
Page 321
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
Control Systems
[Ans. C]
(s)
has 2 poles and 1 zero

s
s
3.
t n
[Ans. B]
This condition is only for phase lead N/W
t n
=
(
4.
[Ans. B]
32 dB
10
t n
. /
g n
to
Is 1 dec are change & change is (G) is
40dB
lop s
r r pol s s or g n
. /
g n
IN
1.
t n
log
So, G(s)=
= 32 dB
(given)
[Ans. D]
M
r
s M
log
)
5.
[Ans. D]
z
z
For minimum phase system, all poles and
zeros must lie inside the unit circle. For
stable system, all poles must be inside the
unit circle. For the system, zero is at 2
pole is at 0.5. This system is stable but
non minimum phase.
[Ans. C]
Compare with Bode magnitude plot of
standard transfer function.
.
(
(z)
)
.
. /|
log
= 3.88 dB
2.
log
th
th
th
Page 322
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
Compensators & Controllers

ECE - 2006
1.
The transfer function of a phase-lead
Z
-
(s)
compensator is given by
where
. The maximum phase-shift
provided by such a compensator is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Group I
ECE - 2007
2.
A control system with PD controller is
shown in the figure. If the velocity error
constant Kv =1000 and the damping ratio
t n t v lu s o p and KD are
r
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3.
s(s
Kp=100, KD=0.09
Kp=100, KD=0.9
Kp=10, KD=0.09
Kp=10, KD=0.9
The open-loop transfer function of a plant

is given as 0 (s)
1. If the plant is
operated
in
a
unity
feedback
configuration, Then the lead compensator
that can stabilize this control system is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Group II
1. PID controller
2. Lead compensator
3. Lag compensator
(A) Q 1, R 2
(C) Q 2, R 3
(B) Q 1, R 3
(D) Q 3, R 2
ECE - 2009
5.
The magnitude plot of a rational transfer
function G(s) with real coefficients is
shown below. Which of the following
compensators has such a magnitude plot?
(
)
20dB
log
ECE - 2008
4.
Group 1 gives two possible choices for the
impedance Z in the diagram. The circuit
elements in Z satisfy the condition
R2C2 >R1C1. The transfer function
represents a kind of controller. Match the
impedances in Group I with the types of
controllers in Group II.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Lead compensator
Lag compensator
PID compensator
Lead lag Compensator
ECE - 2010
6.
A unity negative feedback closed loop
system has a plant with the transfer
function G(s) =
and a controller
(s) in the feed forward path. For a unit

step input, the transfer function of the
th
th
th
Page 323
GATE QUESTION BANK
controller that gives minimum steady

state error is
(A)
(s)
(B)
(s)
(C)
(s)
(D)
(s)
)(
)(
ECE - 2012
Statement Linked answer Questions 7 and
8
The transfer function of a compensator is
given as
(s)
.
7.
8.
Gc(s)is a lead compensator if

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Control Systems
(D) A lag-lead compensator that provides

an attenuation of 20 dB and phase
lead of 450 at the frequency of 3
rad/s
EE - 2008
2.
The
transfer
function
of
two
compensators are given below
(s
)
s
(s
)
(s
)
correct?
(A) C1 is a lead compensator and C2 is a
lag compensator
(B) C1 is a lag compensator and C2 is a
lead compensator
(C) Both C1 and C2 are lead
compensators
(D) Both C1 and C2 are lag compensators
IN - 2006
1.
The transfer function of a position servo
The phase of the above lead compensator

is maximum at
(C) r
s
(A) r
s
(D)
s
(B) r
s
r
system is given as G (s) =
1
. A first
s(s 1)
order compensator is designed in a unity

feedback configuration so that the poles
of the compensated system are placed at
1 j1 and 4. The transfer function of
the compensated system is
EE - 2007
1.
The system 900/s(s+1)(s+9) is to be
compensated such that its gain-crossover
frequency becomes same as its
uncompensated phase-crossover frequency and provides a 450 phase margin. To
achieve this, one may use
(A) A lag compensator that provides an
attenuation of 20 dB and a phase lag
of 450 at the frequency of rad/s
(B) A lead compensator that provides an
amplification of 20dB and a phase
lead of 450 at the frequency of 3
rad/s
(C) A lag-lead compensator that provides
an amplification of 20 dB and a phase
lag of 450 at the frequency of
rad/s.
(A)
(C)
(D)
(B)
Common Data Questions 2, 3, 4

The following figure describes the block
diagram of a closed loop process control
system. The unit of time is given in
minute
ontroll r
(s)
r(s)
th
th
th
stur
l nt
(s)
m(s)
s
Page 324
(s)
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
The digital implementation of the

controller with a sampling time of 0.1
minute using velocity algorithm is
( ) m( )
* ( )
( )+
( ) m( )
* ( )
( ) m( )
m(
( ) m( )
m(
4.
motor is given as
( )
( )
. When
connected in feedback as shown below,

the approximate value of
that will
reduce the time constant of closed loop
system by one hundred times as
compared to that of the open loop
system is
)+
)-
)-
R(s)
(s)
(s)
)
( )
,
3.
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
6.
The open loop transfer function of a dc
)
, ( )
Control Systems
Suppose a disturbance signal

d(t)= sin 0.2t unit is applied. Then at
steady state, the amplitude of the output
e(t) due to the effect of disturbance alone
is
(A) 0.129 unit
(C) 0.529 unit
(B) 0.40 unit
(D) 2.102 unit
(A) 1
(B) 5
(C) 10
(D) 100
IN - 2014
7.
Consider the control system shown in
figure with feed forward action for
rejection of a measurable disturbance
d(t). The value of K, for which the
disturbance response at the output ( ) is
zero mean, is:
The control action recommended for

reducing the effect of disturbance at the
output(provided that the disturbance
signal is measurable) is
(A) cascade control
(B) P-D control
(C) ratio control
(D) feedback-feed forward control
(t)
y(t)
r(t)
(A) 1
(B) 1
IN - 2007
5.
A Cascade control system with
proportional controllers is shown below.
(C) 2
(D) 2
(s)
(
)(
( s
(s)
Theoretically, the largest values of the

gains
and
that can be set without
causing instability of the closed loop
system are:
(A) 10 and 100
(C) 10 and 10
(B) 100 and 10
(D)
n
th
th
th
Page 325
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems

ECE
1.
4.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
M xp s s t
(s)
t n
t n
From maximum phase shift
s
s
s
t
(
(
(
(
)
) -
(t )
)
s
(s)
(s
)(s
)
(s)
s
The above equation is a PID controller
or
t n ( )
2.
t n
s
( )
(
)
(
)
( )
The above equation is a lag compensator.
(
)
[Ans. B]
(s)
(
(s
m
m
s
(s) (s)
(
)
)
)
(s
comparing Eq.(1) with standard 2nd

order equation
5.
[Ans. D]
( ) plot shows presence of 2 poles &
2 zeroes in Bode equivalent plot
6.
[Ans. D]
m
3.
S.E(s)=
7.
[Ans. A]
(s
)(s
)
Only option (A) is satisfies.
t n
s
(s
)(s
)
The lead compensator C(s) should first
(s) (s)
m
s
for (D)
t n
for phase lead

t n
term
(s
(s
( ) ( ))
[Ans. A]
(s)
stabilize the plant i.e. remove
should be positive
t n
)
Option (A) & (C) satisfies, it may be
observed have be observed that option (C)
will have poles and zero in RHS of s plane,
thus not possible (not a practical system)
it can be concluded that option (A) is right
th
th
th
Page 326
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
[Ans. A]
y ( )
t n
Control Systems
A lag lead compensator that provides an

attention of 20dB and phase lead of 45 at
the frequency of 3rad/sec is used.
t n
For maximum phase shift

t
2.
[Ans. A]
t n
t n
is always positive
t n
t n
is always negative
sl
IN
1.
r
EE
1.
)(s
)|
.
.
s(s
)(s
) (
)|
/
/
log
log (
| (
)
( )
(s
(s
(s)
Negative GM implies that the system is

unstable.
should become
gain
cross over frequency,
r
s ,
the magnitude should be 0dB.
o m
t
m gn tu

t
r
s a lag compensator which
gives an attenuation of 20dB(before
compensation the magnitude is 20dB)
and to obtain 45 phase margin at
r
s a lead compensator with
a phase lead of 45 is used.
(s)
) (s)
s(s
ol s o t
omp ns t syst m r g v n s s
s
(s
)
t (s)
(s
)
r t r st qu t on
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
)
,(s
-(s
)
(
)s
(
)s
s
(s
)(s
)
s
s
s
s
(
)
) (
(
(
(s)
( )
(s) (s)
(s) (s)
| (
s l g omp ns tor
[Ans. C]
Let the T.F of the compensator be
o t
omp ns t syst m
[Ans. D]
s(s
2.
)
)
[Ans. A]
v n
(s) {
m(s)
)}
s
{ (s)
m( )
s
th
* ( )
pl
th
(s)}
( )+
tr ns orm o
th
(t) t
I(s)
s
Page 327
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
(
)
0
s
For stable system all elements of first
column should be greater than zero. By
substituting all the given options in
o
nt o w ll g v n g t v v lu
except option D.
[Ans. B]
The given diagram can be reduced as
(s)
(s)
(s)
r ns r un t on (s)
( )
( )
( )
( )
Control Systems
6.
[Ans. C]
Open loop transfer function of a dc motor
as
( )
( )
( )
R(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
d(t)= sin 0.2t

or g tt ng mult ply ng
|
tor
Topic: P controller with unity feed back
Formula: For first order system loop
( )
transfer function is
with
o mpl tu o output (t)

n t l mpl tu
. Now for
( )
closed loop overall transfer function is

given by
.
[Ans. B]
(PD controller can be used)
( )
/
.
/
(
5.
Dividing numerator and denominator by

10
[Ans. D]
(s)
(
)(
( s
(s)
ow
)( s
((s
)( s
( )
( )
(s)
(s)
comparing
( )
( )
( )
4.
(s)
(s)
( y omp r ng rom ormul )

In Question given that time constant of
closed loop system is
times of
( )
( )
((
)(
)(
Characteristics equation is
(
)s
s
s
(
)
For stability, according to R-H array
6
(6+3k2)
s
(
11
s
(
)
0
s
so
.
approximate value
th
th
th
Page 328
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
Control Systems
[Ans. D]
y(s)
(s)
(s)
y(s)) [
y(s)
(s)
(s) [
(s) [
s
s
(s) [
]
]
Zero means at
th
th
th
Page 329
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems
State Variable Analysis

ECE - 2006
1.
A linear system is described by the
following state equation
(t)
(t)
(t)
ECE - 2007
2.
The state space representation of a
separately excited DC servo motor
dynamics is given as,
+
10 1
The Eigen value and eigenvector pairs

( v ) for the system are
The state-transition matrix of the system

is
os t
s nt
(A) 0
1
s n t os t
s nt ]
(B) [ os t
s nt
os t
os
t
s
n t]
(C) [
s nt
os t
os t
s nt
(D) 0
1
s nt
os t
3.
4.
( )
(C)
(B)
(D)
x(0) = 0
1, then the system response is
x(t) = 0
1. If the initial state vector
of the system changes to x (0) = 0
1/
(B) .
1/ and .
1/
(C) .
1/ and . 0
1/
(D) .
1/ and . 0
1/
(B) 0
1
1
(C) 0
(D) 0
ECE - 2009
5.
Consider the system

A=0
= Ax + Bu with
1 and B = 0 1 , where p and q
are arbitrary real numbers. Which of the

following statements about the
controllability of the system is true?
(A) The system is completely state
controllable for any nonzero values
of p and q
(B) Only P = 0 and q = 0 result in
controllability
(C) The system is uncontrollable for all
values of p and q
(D) We
cannot
conclude
about
controllability from the given data
1 u;
Common Data Questions 3 and 4

Consider a linear system whose state
space representation is (t) = Ax (t). If
the initial state vector of the system is
1/ and .
(A) 0
of the motor is
(A)
The system matrix A is
Where is the speed of the motor,

is
the armature current and u is the
armature voltage. The transfer function
( )
(A) .
ECE - 2010
The signal flow graph of a system is
shown below.
1,
(s)
(s)
then the system response becomes

x (t) = 0
1.
th
th
th
Page 330
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
The state variable representation of the

system can be
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
7.
1x
-x
1x
-x
1x
0 1u
0 1u
0 1u
-x
1x
0 1u
-x
The transfer function of the system is

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2011
8.
The block diagram of a system with one
input and two outputs and is given
below.
u
ECE - 2012
9.
The state variable description of an LTI
system is given by
x
x
x
[x ] [
][ ] [ ]u
x
x
x
- [x ]
y ,
x
Where y is the output and u is the input.
The system is controllable for
(A) a1 2 =0, a3
(B) a1 =0, a2
3
(C) a1=0, a2
3 =0
(D) a1 2
3 =0
ECE - 2013
and 11:
The state diagram of a system is shown
below. A system is described by the state
variable equations
u y
u
u
10.
y
A state space model of the above system

in terms of the state vector
and the
output vector , - is
, -x
(B) x
(C) x
(D) x
, -u y
-x
, -u
1x
1x
,
y
(C)
,
-x
0 1x
11.
1u
1u
1u
1u
u
1
-
u
1
u
1
The state transition matrix

of the
system shown in the figure above is
(A) 0
(B) 0
th
y
(D)
-x
0 1u y
0 1u y
(B)
0 1x
The state variable equation of the

system shown in the figure above are
(A)
(A) x
Control Systems
th
(C) 0
t
t
(D) 0
th
1
t
Page 331
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2014
12. Consider the state space model of a
system, as given below
x
x
x
[x ] [
][ ] [ ]u
x
x
x
- [x ]
y ,
x
The system is
(A) controllable and observable
(B) uncontrollable and observable
(C) uncontrollable and unobservable
(D) controllable and unobservable
13.
or x
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
16.
0 1 x(t) s
(A) 0
0 1 x(t)
nx
Consider the state space system

expressed by the signal flow diagram
u
Control Systems
The state transition matrix (t) of a

x
x
system [ ] 0
1 0x 1 is
x
t
(A) 0
(C) 0
1
1
t
t
(B) 0
(D) 0
1
1
t
EE - 2006
1.
For a system with the transfer function
(
H(s) =
, the matrix A in the
state space form x = Ax + Bu is equal to

The corresponding system is
(A) always controllable
(B) always observable
(C) always stable
(D) always unstable
14.
15.
An unforced linear time invariant (LTI)

system is represented by
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1
x
If the initial conditions are x (0)=1 and
x ( )
t
solut on o t
st t
equation is
(A) x (t)
x (t)
(B) x (t)
x (t)
(C) x (t)
x (t)
(D) x (t)
t x (t)
The state equation of a second-order
linear system is given by
x (t)
x(t)
x( ) x
or x
1 x(t)
(A) [
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
EE - 2008
and 3
The state space equation of a system is
described by x = Ax + Bu, y = Cx, where
x is state vector, u is input, y is output
1 , B = 0 1, C = ,
and A = 0
2.
The transfer function G(s) of this system

will be
(A)
1 n
(B)
th
(
th
(C)
(D)
)
th
Page 332
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
A unity feedback is provided to the above

system G(S) to make it a closed loop
system as shown in figure.
r +
(
t
)
y
(
t
)
G(s)
For a unit step input r(t), the steady state

error in the output will be
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D)
EE - 2009
Common Data Questions: 4 & 5
A system is described by the following
state and output equations
()
x (t)
x (t)
()
x (t)
u(t)
4.
5.
EE - 2013
The state variable formulation of a system
is given as
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u x ( )
x
x
- 0x 1
x ( )
n y ,
7.
The system is
(A) Controllable but not observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(C) Both controllable and observable
(D) Both not controllable and not
observable
8.
The response y(t) to a unit step input is

(A)
(B)
u(t)
y(t) = x1(t)
Where u(t)is the input and y(t) is the
output
(C)
(D)
EE - 2014
9.
A system matrix is given as follows.
[
The system transfer function is

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The state transition matrix of the above

system is
(A) [
(B) 0
(C) 0
(D) 0
0
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The absolute value of the ratio of the

maximum eigenvalue to the minimum
eigenvalue is _____
10.
The second order dynamic system

u
y
the matrices P, Q and R as follows:
0
0 1
EE - 2010
6.
The system
Control Systems
,
The system has the following controllability
and observability properties:
(A) Controllable and observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(C) Controllable but not observable
(D) Not controllable and not observable
with
0 1 is
stable and controllable

stable but uncontrollable
unstable but controllable
unstable and uncontrollable
th
th
th
Page 333
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
The state transition matrix for the system

x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u is
x
(A) 0
(B) 0
(C) 0
1
t
(D) 0
Control Systems
IN - 2008
2.
The state space representation of a
= 0
system is given by
y = [1 0]x. The transfer function
t 1
Consider the system described by

following state space equations
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u
x
x
- 0x 1
y ,
If u is unit step input, then the steady
state error of the system is
(A) 0
(C) 2/3
(B) 1/2
(D) 1
IN - 2006
1.
The state-variable representation of a
plant is given by
= Ax + Bu , y = Cx.
Where x is the state, u is the input and y is
the output. Assuming zero initial
conditions, the impulse response of the
plant is given by
(A) exp (At)
(B)
xp , (t - )] Bu () d
(C) C exp (At) B
(D)
xp , (t - )] Bu () d
( )
( )
of
the system will be

(A)
12.
1 X + 0 1u,
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN - 2009
3.
A linear time-invariant single-input
single-output system has a state space
model given by
=Fx + Gu; y = Hx
Where F =0
1; G=0 1; H =,
-.
Here, x is the state vector, u is the input,

and y is the output. The damping ratio of
the system is
(A) 0.25
(C) 1
(B) 0.5
(D) 2
IN - 2011
4.
The transfer function of the system
described by the state-space equations
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u
x
x
- 0x 1 is
y ,
(A)
(C)
(B)
th
(D)
th
th
Page 334
GATE QUESTION BANK
Control Systems

ECE
1.
6.
[Ans. A]
(t) = L *( I
( I
) +
( I
)
s nt
1
os t
x
x
y
x
u ( )
x
x ( )
(x
x )
(x
x
x )
y
x ( )
From equation 1, 2, 3 the state variable
representation of the system is
(s)
I (s)
I (s)
(s)
u(s)
u(s)
( )
( )
(t)
1x
0 1u
[Ans. C]
,sI
,
&
-0
,
s
10 1
s
(s
s
s
) )
s
s
s
-[
1
)
(( I
(s
)(s
find eigen vector
s
s
Method II
It can also be solved by applying the
M sons g n ormul
&
[Ans. D]
From above, , I
0
5.
[Ans. A]
Let A = [
4.
7.
3.
x
x
(s)
(s)
) (s)
(s)
x
u
(s)
)(s
[Ans. A]
(s
(s)
(
os t
(t) = 0
s nt
2.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. B]
(s)
u(s) s
(s) x (s)
x (s) u(s) s
x (s)
y (s)
u(s) s
x (s)
Similarly
x (s)
y (s)
u(s)
s
u(s)
so sx (s)
x (s) u(s)
y (s) x (s)
sx (s)
x (s) u(s)
[Ans. C]
,
p p
0q q1
p q un ontroll
p, q
th
th
th
Page 335
GATE QUESTION BANK
y (s)
x (s)
x (t)
x (t) u(t) y (t)
x (t)
x (t) u(t) y (t)
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u(t)
x
x
x
u
,y y -
rom qu st on y
9.
x (t)
x (t)
y=,
From the graph we can find that

,u
x - ( ) x
x
x
u ( )
n
( ),x
x
x
x
x
x
From eq. (i) put value of x
( x
x
x
u)
x
x
x
u ( )
s m l rly y x ( )
y x
x
u ( )
(
x
x
x ) ( u)
[
]
(
x
x
x ) u
In matrix form
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u
x
x
x 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u
And
x
,
- 0x 1 u
y
-x u
y ,
0 1
x
] [x ] + [ ]u
x
x
- [x ]
x
A=[
]& B = [ ]
So, AB = [
=*
][ ] = [ ]
+
So, the controllability matrix, h
=[
11.
[Ans. A]
,s I
Determinant should be non-zero

So, a1a2 ( a2)
1
a2
a3 may be 0
10.
[Ans. D]
x
*x + = [
x
Control Systems
s0
s
-
sI
[Ans. A]
For state variable form, we have to find
number of integral (1/s) in the graph
Assign output of these integral with state
variable & input of these integral with
derivative of state variable.
1. Then find out the relation between
these derivative in terms of state
variable and input
2. Similarly we can write the relation
between output and these variable
and input using state flow graph
3. Lets assume & as state variable
,sI
s
s
(s
sI
) s
[(s
]
Take inverse Laplace transform both side
,sI
[(s
0
th
th
th
Page 336
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
[Ans. B]
[
[ ]
,
Controllable matrix
,
[Ans. B]
Applying linearity property
0
o x(t)
the state
16.
[Ans. D]
(t)
, I
s
s
EE
1.
x
1 0x 1
s ]
3
1t
0
0
1
1
(s)
(s)
(s)
( )
( )
( )
( )
(s)
(s)
(s)
s x
t
)
0
[Ans. B]
x ( )
x ( )
(t)
The rank of S is 3
So the system is always controllable
(I
) -
[s
(t)
[Ans. C]
x
[ ] 0
,( I
s
0
The state controllable matrix is

,
14.
0 1
-[ ]
[Ans. A]
From the state diagram,
equations are
[ ][
][ ] [ ]
15.
0 1
so o s rv
x (t) x ( )
x (t) x ( )
2
0
Rank is less than 3, so uncontrollable

Observability matrix
o ,
( )
13.
Control Systems
(s
).
)
s
/
s
s
s
(s)
s x
sx (s)
u(s)
(s
s
x (s)
Replacing s by
x
t
th
x
t
x
t
th
x
t
u(t) ( )
th
Page 337
3]
GATE QUESTION BANK
x
x
x
t
Replacing eq.(i)
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
[x ] [
] [x ] [ ] u(t)
x
x
o
2.
3.
- (0
5.
[Ans. B]
0
( I
( I
( ))
x (t)
y(t)
x (t)
-[
]
x (t)
y
o
-&
, I
s
s
s
0
s
(s
)(s
r ns r un t on
, I
-
[Ans. C]
, AB] |
controllable
(s) ( I
) & (t)
( (s )) has
exponential with positive power
Unstable
7.
[Ans. A]
,
M
1
ontroll
8.
( I
, I
*, I
(s)+
1
)
ot o s rv
[Ans. A]
Y(t) ,
6.
t(M )
t(M )
1
0 1
y(t)
)(s
[Ans. C]
Selecting x (t) and x (t) as state variables
x (t)
x (t)
x (t) x (t)
u(t)
t
x (t)
x (t)
x (t) u(t)
t
x (t)
x (t)
[
] 0
] 0 1 u(t)
1[
x (t)
x (t)
x
, I
(s
[s
m
s
s
[Ans. A]
1 )0 1
1
s
0 1
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
,
-0
1
s
(s
)(s
)
s
s
(s
)(s
) s
s
,
s
4.
[Ans. D]
(s)
Control Systems
[s
]
s
th
th
th
Page 338
GATE QUESTION BANK
[, I
x (t)
[
]
x (t)
9.
[s(s
)]
,, I
s
[(s
* I
(s)-
12.
)(
(s)
0
,
)
)-
,(
(
(s)
[Ans. C]
0
or ontroll
,
0 1
11.
1
2.
[Ans. C]
0
1+
1
s 0 1
rror
lm
(s)
l ms (
l m u(t)
s
s(s
y(t)
s
[Ans. A]
(s)
( I
1
(
th
(sI
(s)
th
)
s
)
(s)
y(t)
( I
(sI
(t)
(sI
( I
State transition matrix

s
I
0
1
s
s
0
s
I
(s
)
s
y st t
u(t)
(s)
ot o s rv
[Ans. C]
(s)
(s)
ontroll
For observability:
y(s)
(s)
)
(s)
s(s
l
-
IN
1.
y(s)
u(s)
v n
- *0 s
10.
[Ans. A]
,(
( I

|
r ns r un t on
x (t)
-[
]
x (t)
Y(t)
s(s
(s)]
Control Systems
.,
-0
-0
.,
1/
th
1 0 1/
(s)
Page 339
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
Control Systems
[Ans. B]
The poles of the s/y are obtained from the
s/y matrix, f
det (SI F )= 0
0
S(S + 2) + 4 = 0
4.
[Ans. A]
T(s) = ( I
,
(
)
-
10 1
th
th
th
Page 340
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Diode Circuits - Analysis and Application

ECE - 2006
1.
For the circuit shown below, assume that
the zener diode is ideal with a breakdown
voltage of 6 Volts. The waveform
observed across R is
ECE - 2007
2.
The correct full wave rectifier circuit is
(A)
Input
Output
(B)
(A)
6V
Input
6V
(B)
Output
(C)
12V
(C)
12V
Input
Output
6V
(D)
(D)
Input
6V
Output
3.
For the Zener diode shown in the figure,

the Zener voltage at knee is 7 V, the knee
current is negligible and the Zener
dynamic resistance is 10 . If the input
voltage ( ) range is from 10 to 16 V, the
th
th
th
Page 341
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
output voltage ( ) range from
. The small signal input

where
(A) 7.00 to 7.29V

(B) 7.14 to 7.29 V
(C) 7.14 to 7.43 V

(D) 7.29 to 7.43 V
ECE - 2008
4.
In the following limiter circuit, an input
voltage
= 10sin100 t is applied.
Assume that the diode drop is 0.7V when
it is forward biased. The Zener
breakdown voltage is 6.8V.The maximum
and minimum values of the output
voltage respectively are
6.
The bias current

(A) 1 mA
(B) 1.28 mA
7.
The ac output voltage

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
8.
A Zener diode, when used in voltage

stabilization circuits, is biased in
(A) reverse bias region below the
breakdown voltage
(B) reverse breakdown region
(C) forward bias region
(D) forward bias constant current mode
1k
D1
through the diodes is

(C) 1.5 mA
(D) 2 mA
is
D2
Z
(A) 6.1V, 0.7 V

(B) 0.7 V, 7.5 V
6.8 V
(C) 7.5 V, 0.7 V

(D) 7.5 V, 7.5 V
ECE - 2009
5.
In the circuit below, the diode is ideal. The
voltage V is given by
(A) min (
(B) max (
)
)
(C) min (
(D) max(
ECE - 2012
9.
The diodes and capacitors in the circuit
shown are ideal. The voltage v(t) across
the diode
is
)
)
ECE - 2011
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 6
and 7
In the circuit shown below, assume that
the voltage drop across a forward biased
diode is 0.7V. The thermal voltage
(A)
(B) i
th
th
(C) 1
(D) 1 i
th
Page 342
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
10. The I-V characteristics of the diode in the
circuit given below are
i
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
sin
(sin
(sin
0 for all t
Analog Circuits
i
i
)/2
)/2
{
ECE - 2014
13. In the figure, assume that the forward
voltage drops of the PN diode
and
Schottky diode
are 0.7 V and 0.3 V,
respectively. If ON denotes conducting
state of the diode and OFF denotes nonconducting state of the diode, then in the
circuit,
The current in the circuit is

(A) 10 mA
(C) 6.67 mA
(B) 9.3 mA
(D) 6.2 mA
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
11. In the circuit shown below, the knee
current of the ideal Zener diode is 10 mA.
To maintain 5 V across RL, the minimum
value of RL in and the minimum power
rating of the Zener diode in mW,
respectively , are
(A) both
and
are ON
(B)
is ON and
is OFF
(C) both
and
are OFF
(D)
is OFF and
is ON
14.
100
ILoad
10V
RL
VZ=5V
(A) 125 and 125

(B) 125 and 250
12.
The diode in the circuit shown has

= 0.7 Volts but is ideal otherwise.
If = 5sin()Volts, the minimum and
maximum values of
(in Volts) are,
respectively,
(C) 250 and 125

(D) 250 and 250
A voltage 1000 sin

Volts is applied
across YZ. Assuming ideal diodes, the
voltage measured across WX in Volts, is
(A) 5 and 2.7

(B) 2.7 and 5
(C) 5 and 3.85

(D) 1.3 and 5
1k
W
Y
Z
15.
X
1k
th
The figure shows a half-wave rectifier.

The diode D is ideal. The average steadystate current (in Amperes) through the
diode is approximately __________
th
th
Page 343
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
D1
D2
i
z
Vi
V0
RL =
5V
10V
16.
(A)
Two silicon diodes, with a forward

voltage drop of 0.7 V, are used in the
circuit shown in the figure. The range of
input voltage
for which the output
voltage
is
10
10
(B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5
5
EE - 2006
1.
What are the states of the three ideal
diodes of the circuit shown in figure?
(C)
10
5
5 10
10V
5A
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ON,
OFF,
ON,
OFF,
OFF,
ON,
OFF,
ON,
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10
10
2.
Assuming the diodes D1 and D2 of the

circuit shown in figure to be ideal ones,
the transfer characteristics of the circuit
will be
th
th
th
Page 344
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(B)
EE - 2007
3.
The three terminal linear voltage
regula r i
e e
a
l a
resistor as shown in the figure. If Vin is
10 V, what is the power dissipated in the
transistor?
+10V
(C)
RL
Vin
6.6V
Zener diode
0
(A) 0.6 W
(B) 2.4 W
(D)
(C) 4.2 W
(D) 5.4 W
EE - 2008
4.
The equivalent circuits of a diode, during
forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
+
0.7
V
5.
In the voltage doubler circuit shown in

he igure he wi h S i l e a
Assuming diodes D1 and D2 to be ideal,
load resistance to be infinite and initial
capacitor voltages to be zero, the steady
state voltage across capacitors C1 and C2
will be
~
If such diodes is used in clipper circuit of
figure given above, the output voltage (v0)
of the circuit will be
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
= 10V,
= 10V,
= 5V,
= 5V,
= 5V
= 5V
= 10V
= 10V
EE - 2009
6.
The following circuit shown has a source
voltage Vs as shown in the graph. The
current through the circuit is also shown
th
th
th
Page 345
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
10V
15V
15
10
(A) 4V
(B) 5V
Vs (Volts)
5
0
EE - 2011
8.
A clipper circuit is shown below.
-5
1k
-10
-15
100
200
300
Time (ms)
400
1.5
Current (mA)
(C) 7.5V
(D) 12.12V
5V
1.0
0.5
Assuming forward voltage drops of the

diodes to be 0.7 V, the input-output
transfer characteristics of the circuit is
0
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
(A)
0
100
200
300
Time (ms)
400
The element connected between a and b

could be
4.3
4.3
a
(B)
10
4.3
EE - 2010
7.
Assuming that the diodes in the given
circuit are ideal, the voltage
is
4.3
th
th
th
10
Page 346
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
dynamic resistance of the diode at room

temperature is approximately,
(C)
5.7
1.7V
0.7
0.7 5.7
(A)
(B)
(D)
10
10
(C)
(D)
IN - 2011
2.
Assuming zener diode
has currentvoltage characteristics as shown below on
the right and forward voltage drop of
diode
is 0.7 V, the voltage
in the
EE - 2014
9.
The sinusoidal ac source in the figure has
an rms value of
. Considering all
possible values of , the minimum value

of
in to avoid burnout of the Zener
diode is __________
2.7V
0.7V
~
(A) 3.7 V
(B) 2.7 V
10.
Assuming the diodes to be ideal in the

figure, for the output to be clipped, the
input voltage must be outside the range
~
(A)
(B)
(C) 2.2 V
(D) 0 V
IN - 2014
3.
For the circuit shown in the figure assume
ideal diodes with zero forward resistance
and zero forward voltage drop. The
current through the diode
in mA is
___________.
(C)
(D)
IN - 2008
1.
In the circuit shown below, the ideality
factor
of the diode is unity and the
voltage drop across it is 0.7V. The
th
th
th
Page 347
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
Analog Circuits

ra i r ha
=0.7 V, and the
voltage across the Zener diode is 15 V.The
current (in mA) through the Zener diode
is ___________.

ECE
1.
[Ans. B]
When
, zener diode is in forward
bias so
When
, zener diode is in reverse
bias, so when
, zener diode
will be OFF and
.
When
, zener diode will be in
breakdown region and
.
2.
[Ans. C]
Option C, Circuit makes Full wave
rectifier.
3.
[Ans. C]
For zener
When
4.
[Ans. C]
When
,
is forward bias and
are OFF, and
When
is +10V,
are ON and zener
diode is in reverse bias so
V
5.
[Ans. A]
When
, diode is ON and V =
When
, diode is OFF and V = 1 V
So V = min (
6.
[Ans. A]
7.
[Ans. B]
and
When
, current
~
th
th
th
Page 348
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
8.
[Ans. B]
Zener diode operated in reverse in
breakdown region.
i
i
r
Since diode will be forward biased voltage
across diode will be 0.7 V
i
Stabilized
9.
11.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. B]
i
5v
40 mA
10 V
la per
ea
e i ier
10 mA
he ex i e
y
he la pi g
section clamp the positive peak to 0 volts
and negative peak to 2 volts. So whole
cos (
i l wer y 1 volts
When zener starts

will be held @ 5V.
i
pu
When zener starts the current drawn

from supply is 50 mA at 10 V
p wer drawn = 500 mW
This should be dissipates in circuit power
i ipa e i
Resistance
=
Remaining 250 mW has to be dissipated
by zener assuming worst bad
ze er h ul e ra e r
th
th
th
Page 349
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
[Ans. D]
14.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. C]
1k
y
i
tz
1k
w
When Z is relatively positive to y

Both D1& D2 are
&
l a
Gets shorted.
When
positive maximum
When y is relatively positive to Z all Diode

Biased
urre
ll w
always.
13.
[Ans. D]
When
negative minimum
Assume both the diode ON.

Then circuit will be as per figure (2)
15.
w
p
is off and hence
i le
[Ans. *] Range 0.08 to 0.12

For average steady state case, capacitor is
open circuited
S i
th
a pere
th
th
Page 350
GATE QUESTION BANK
16.
[Ans. D]
3.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
So current through
Current through 1k ,
So
mA
mA
= 0.5893
Power dissipated in transistor
i
r hi
W
4.
[Ans. A]
When diode is OFF, the equivalent circuit
is shown as follows:
i
EE
1.
r hi
[Ans. A]
Let
is ON,
OFF and
equivalent circuit
10 V
~
i
OFF, then
i.e. when
is max i.e.,
so
diode never conducts and it is always
OFF. So,
i
5A
In this case,
5.
10A
[Ans. D]
When
,
is ON and
charges upto 5V and
When
,
is ON and
charges by -10 V and
So in steady state,
and
A
So voltage across diode
So
is in reverse bias i.e. it is OFF.
Voltage across diode
V it is
also in Reverse bias so OFF.
Voltage across diode
it is in
forward bias and ON.
2.
[Ans. A]
When
,
,
and
is ON and
6.
is OFF so
.
is OFF, so
[Ans. A]
It is
are OFF, so
When
OFF so,
mA, and diode conducts

, diode will be reverse bias
and I will become zero.
th
th
th
Page 351
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
Analog Circuits
Hence for output to be clipped input

should not be lie inside this range
[Ans. B]
Right side diode is off
So ,
8.
9.
[Ans. C]
When
output will
follow input, because zener diode and
normal diodes are off
When
V Zener diode forward
bias and
V
When
V Diode is forward bias and
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
Dynamic resistance r
r
2.
[Ans. C]
First Assume that the diode
does not
reach reverse breakdown. So circuit
becomes
10.
[Ans. B]
S
S
This is less than reverse breakdown
voltage
of diode
. So our
assumption is correct
3.
[Ans. 10]
Diode
goes to forward biased due to
10 V and 8V across
diode and current
through diode is
4.
Given circuit is union of both the above

circuit for range
th
th
th
Page 352
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Nodal at
th
th
th
Page 353
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
AC & DC Biasing-BJT and FET

ECE - 2006
1.
An n- channel depletion MOSFET has
following two points on its
curve:
(i)
d
(ii)
Which of the following Q-points will give
the highest trans-conductance gain for
small signals.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2007
2.
The DC current gain ( ) of a BJT is 50.
Assuming that the emitter injection
efficiency is 0.995, the base transport
factor is
(A) 0.980
(C) 0.990
(B) 0.985
(D) 0.995
3.
For the BJT circuit shown, assume that

the of the transistor is very large and
= 0.7 V. The mode of operation of the
BJT is
The value of current is approximately

(A) 0.5 mA
(C) 9.3 mA
(B) 2 mA
(D) 15 mA
ECE - 2011
5.
For a BJT, the common base current
g i
.98
d he c ec r b e
junction reverse bias saturation current
.
. This BJT is connected in the
common emitter mode and operated in
the active region with a base drive
current
. The collector current
for this mode of operation is
(A) 0.98 mA
(C) 1.0 mA
(B) 0.99 mA
(D) 1.01 mA
6.
10 k
2V
9.
In the circuit shown below, for the MOS

transistor,
and the
threshold voltage
. The voltage
at the source of the upper transistor is
6V
1 k
5V
(A) cut-off
(B) saturation
W/L = 4
(C) normal active

(D) reverse active
W/L = 1
ECE - 2010
4.
In the silicon BJT circuit shown below,
assume that the emitter area of transistor
Q1 is half that of transistor Q2.
(A) 1 V
(B) 2 V
th
th
(C) 3 V
(D) 3.67 V
th
Page 354
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2013
7.
In the circuit shown below, the silicon
npn transistor Q has a very high value of
. The required value of R2 in k to
produce IC = 1mA is
10.
Analog Circuits
For the MOSFETs shown in the figure, the

threshold voltage | | = 2 V and
( )
. The value of
(in mA) is ______.
VCC
3V
R1
60 k
IC
Q
R2
(A) 20
(B) 30
8.
RE
500
(C) 40
(D) 50
11.
In a MOSFET operating in the saturation

region, the channel length modulation
effect causes
(A) an increase in the gate source
capacitance
(B) a decrease in the transconductance
(C) a decrease in the unity gain cutoff
frequency
(D) a decrease in the output resistance
ECE - 2014
9.
For the n-channel MOS transistor shown
in the figure, the threshold voltage
is
0.8 V. Neglect channel length modulation
effects. When the drain voltage =1.6 V,
the drain current
was found to be 0.5
mA. If
is adjusted to be 2 V by changing
the values of R and
, the new value of
(in mA) is
For the MOSFET

shown in
assume W/L = 2,
= 2.0 V,
100
/ and
=
transistor
switches from
region to linear region when
is__________
the figure,
0.5 V. The
saturation
(in Volts)
EE - 2006
1.
Consider the circuit shown in figure. If
the of the transistor is 30 and ICBO is 20
nA and the input voltage is + 5 V, then
transistor would be operating in
+12V
.
(A) 0.625
(B) 0.75
(C) 1.125
(D) 1.5
12V
(A) saturation region

(B) active region
th
th
th
Page 355
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(C) breakdown region

(D) cut off region
2.
A TTL NOT gate circuit is shown in fig.

Assuming
.
of both the
transistor, if
.
then the states of
the two transistors will be,
+5V
(A) 0 mA
(B) 3.6 mA
(C) 4.3 mA
(D) 5.7 mA
EE - 2010
5.
The transistor circuit shown uses a silicon
transistor with
= 0.7V,
and a
dc current gain of 100. The value of is
+10 V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
d
e er e
e er e
d
d
d
e er e
50 k
10 k
EE - 2007
3.
The common emitter forward current
g i f he r i r h w i F = 100.
100
+10V
(A) 4.65V
(B) 5V
6.
(C) 6.3V
(D) 7.23V
Figure shows a composite switch

consisting of a power transistor (BJT) in
series with a diode. Assuming that the
transistor switch and the diode are ideal ,
the I-V characteristic of the composite
switch is
The transistor is operating in

(A) Saturation region
(B) Cutoff region
(C) Reverse active region
(D) Forward active region
EE - 2008
4.
Two perfectly matched silicon transistors
are connected as shown in the figure.
Assuming the of the transistors to be
very high and the forward voltage drop in
diodes to be 0.7 V, the value of current I is
(B)
(A)
th
th
th
Page 356
GATE QUESTION BANK

I
(D)
(C)
V
IN - 2006
1.
The biasing circuit of a silicon transistor
is shown below. If = 80, then what is VCE
for the transistor?
+12V
EE - 2011
7.
The transistor used in the circuit shown
be w h
f
d
is negligible.
15k
1k
Analog Circuits
RB
RC
2.2k
D
= 0.7V
.
(A) 6.08 V
(B) 0.2 V
(C) 1.2 V
(D) 6.08 V
IN - 2007
2.
In the circuit shown below,
If the forward voltage drop of diode is

0.7V, then the current through collector
will be
(A) 168 mA
(C) 20.54 mA
(B) 108 mA
(D) 5.36 mA
EE - 2014
8.
The transistor in the given circuit should
always be in active region. Take
= 0.2 V,
= 0.7 V. The
maximum value of
in . Which can be
used, is__________
The
f he r
respectively,
(A) 19 and 2.8 V
(B) 19 and 4.7 V
(C) 38 and 2.8 V
(D) 38 and 4.7 V
3.
are,
The three transistors in the circuit shown

below are identical, with
= 0.7 V and
.
th
th
th
Page 357
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
IN - 2014
6.
In the figure, transistors T and T have
identical characteristics.
of
transistor T is 0.1 V. The voltage
is
high enough to put T in saturation.
Voltage
of transistors T T and T is 0.7
V. The value of (
) in V is ___________.
10 V
2V
The voltage
(A) 0.2 V
(B) 2 V
is
(C) 7.4 V
(D) 10 V
IN - 2010
4.
The matched transistors
and
shown
in the adjoining figure have
=100.
Assuming the base-emitter voltages to be
0.7V, the collector-emitter voltage V2 of
the transistor
is
(A) 33.9V
(B) 27.8V
(C) 16.2V
(D) 0.7V
IN - 2013
5.
In the transistor circuit as shown below,
the value of resistance RE in k is
approximately,
+10V
1.5k
15k
.
(A) 1.0
(B) 1.5
6k
IC=2.0 mA
.
VCE=5.0 V
RE
Vout
(C) 2.0
(D) 2.5
th
th
th
Page 358
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits

ECE
1.
5.
[Ans. D]
[Ans. D]
From the below graph it is clear that
a
increase conductance i.e. slope of
graph is increased.
.98
.98
.
6.
9
.
[Ans. C]
The transistor which has
12mA
and
6
V
So that transistor in saturation region.

The transistor which has
2.
Transfer characteristic of n-channel DMOSFET.
Drain is connected to gate

So that transistor in saturation
[Ans. B]
The current flow in both the transistor is

same
( ) (
base transport factor emitter injection

efficiency
b e r
r f c r
( )
(
.99
.98
3.
[Ans. B]
Given is large so
d
Assuming BJT is in active
Applying KVL in Base. Emitter loop
.
.
.
9.8
w
.9
7.
[Ans. C]
So BJT is in saturation
4.
[Ans. B]
Assuming
.
.
i ce is very large
=1mA
So,
eg igib e
So,
= 2.04 mA
ge dr
2 mA
th
th
cr
th
e i er f
re i
Page 359
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
.
w
Analog Circuits

Initially the transistor
is in saturation
[
.
.
( )]
gi e circ i
r .
r .
b i
i g
.
.
.
.
.8
.
8.
[Ans. D]
9.
[Ans. C]
ere
EE
1.
i
r i
[Ans. B]
Let the device is in saturation and
. V
regi
Collector current
.
.8
For saturation
Base voltage
.
current through 100
.
.
.8
.
.
.
.
10.
.
.
= 5.3mA
= 0.178 mA
re i
ce
= 0.127 mA
c rre hr
.
[Ans. *] Range 0.88 to 0.92
gh
re i
ce
= 0.29 mA
Base current
. 9
.
= 0.163 mA
So this is less than
it means device
is not in saturation. It is in active region.
NMOS is in saturation region

.
.
.9
2.
[Ans. C]
When
.
he
will be in
reverse active mode .i.e. Reverse on and
will be ON.
3.
[Ans. D]
We assume BJT is in active region
applying KVL in base emitter circuit
.
i g
th
th
th
Page 360
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
To calculate
max, take end condition
.
i
.
.
i
9.
9
.
Ti i
4.
Analog Circuits
.9
ci e
c i e regi
.
.
.
.8
[Ans. B]
.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
.
.
9
9
. and drop across diode = 0.7
.
.
.
i
So device is not active region.

Let the device is in saturation and
. V
.
.9
ery rge
As both transistors are perfectly matched

and
. of both transistors.
. mA
5.
.9
8
.
.
[Ans. A]
So device is in saturation, so
.
9.
2.
.
.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. C]
When V will be + ve both transistor and
diode will be on making V across them
Zero and Current I will be flow and when
V is -ve both will be off offering infinite
resistance so current I will be Zero.
7.
[Ans. D]
Transistor is in Saturation region
.
.
.
.
.
th
th
th
Page 361
GATE QUESTION BANK
Apply KVL
.
Analog Circuits
.
8
For matched transistor
.
di
is same for both the
transistors)
Now apply KVL in the outer port of
transistor
.
8
.8
9
9.
Apply KVL to output terminals
5.
.9
3.
9.
.
[Ans. A]
10 V
.
.8
2m A
V=IR=1.5k 2mA=3V
15k
[Ans. C]
=10-3=7V
10V
gi e
2V
6k
gi e
Using KVL in the left hand transistor,

.
be
.
6.
gi e

9
Now again apply KVL to the collector

resistor of the right and transistor
T
.
.
.
.
4.
[Ans. B]
rre hr
.
T
.
gh
re i
ce
Apply KVL on path 1

9
.
.
.
.
=1.66mA
.
th
th
th
Page 362
GATE QUESTION BANK
Tr
.
r ide ic
h
.
Analog Circuits
.
.
.98
.
.
th
th
th
Page 363
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Small Signal Modeling of BJT and FET

ECE - 2006
Common Data Questions 1, 2, 3
In the transistor amplifier circuit shown
in the figure below, the transistor has the
following parameters:
h
h
The capacitance can be assumed to be
infinite.
defined to be
2.
3.
In the figure above, the ground has been

shown by the symbol
Under the DC conditions, the collector-toemitter voltage drop is
(A) 4.8 Volts
(C) 6.0Volts
(B) 5.3 Volts
(D) 6.6Volts
ECE - 2008
4.
Two identical NMOS transistors M1 and
M2 are connected as shown below.
is
chosen so that both transistors are in
saturation.The equivalent g of the Pair is
of the
of the

and 6
In the following transistor circuit,
If
is increased by 10%, then collectorto-emitter voltage drop
(A) increases by less than or equal to
10%
(B) decreases by less than or equal to
10%
(C) increases by more than 10%
(D) decreases by more than 10%
The small-signal gain of the amplifier
is
(A) 10
(C) 5.3
(B) 5.3
(D) 10
The equivalent g of the pair is

(A) the sum of individual g
transistors
(B) the product of individual g
transistors
(C) nearly equal to the g of M1
(D) nearly equal to g g of M2
1.
at constant
, and
and all the
capacitances are very large.
5.
The value of DC current is

(A) 1mA
(C) 5mA
(B) 2mA
(D) 10mA
6.
The mid-band voltage gain

amplifier is approximately
(A) 180
(C) 90
(B) 120
(D) 60
th
th
th
of
the
Page 364
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2009
7.
A small signal source
() A
+B i
is applied to
a transistor amplifier as shown below.
The transistor has =150 and h =3k
.Which expression best approximates
( )?
(B) The input resistance

decreases
and the magnitude of voltage gain
increases
(C) Both input resistance
and the
magnitude of voltage gain
decrease
(D) Both input resistance
and the
magnitude of voltage gain
increase
12V
3k
100k
V0(t)
100 nF
Vi(t)
100nF
20k
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(
(
(
(
)=
)=
)=
)=
900k
ECE - 2012
9.
The current ib through the base of a
silicon npn transistor is
1 + 0.1 cos(10000 t) mA . At 300 K, the
r in the small signal model of the
transistor is
i
Analog Circuits
i
i
ECE - 2010
8.
The amplifier circuit shown below uses a
silicon transistor. The capacitors
and
can be assumed to be short at signal
frequency and the effect of output
resistance
can be ignored. If
is
disconnected from the circuit, which one
of the following statements is TRUE?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2013
10. The small-signal resistance(i.e., dVB/dID)
in k offered by the n channel MOSFET
M shown in the figure below, at a bias
point of VB =2V is (device data for M:
device
transconductance
parameter
2
kn nCox(W/L) 4 / ,
threshold
voltage VTN=1V and neglect body effect
and channel length modulation effects)
ID
VB
(A) The input resistance increases and

the magnitude of voltage gain
decreases
(A) 12.5
(B) 25
th
th
(C) 50
(D) 100
th
Page 365
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
ECE - 2014
11. For the amplifier shown in the figure, the
BJT parameters are
and thermal voltage
= 25 mV. The
voltage gain ( / ) of the amplifier is
_____ .
(A) g
(B)
F
12.
(C) g
(D)
14.
A BJT in a common-base configuration is

used to amplify a signal received by a 50
antenna. Assume kT/q = 25 mV. The
value of the collector bias current (in mA)
required to match the input impedance of
the amplifier to the impedance of the
antenna is __________
15.
For the common collector amplifier

h w i he figu e he JT h high
negligible
= 0.7 V. The
( ) and
maximum
undistorted
peak-to-peak
output voltage
(in Volts) is
In the circuit shown, the PNP transistor

has
= 0.7 Vand = 50. Assume that
= 100 k . For to be 5 V, the value of
(in k .) is __________
F
F
13.
Consider the common-collector amplifier

in the figure (bias circuitry ensures that
the transistor operates in forward active
region, but has been omitted for
simplicity). Let be the collector current,
be the base-emitter voltage and
be
the thermal voltage. Also, g
are
the small-signal transconductance and
output resistance of the transistor,
respectively. Which one of the following
conditions ensures a nearly constant
small signal voltage gain for a wide range
of values of ?
th
th
th
Page 366
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
1.
The voltage gain
below is
(A) 0.967
(B) 0.976
of the circuit shown
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
EE - 2014
2.
The magnitude of the mid-band voltage
gain of the circuit shown in figure is
(assuming h of the transistor to be 100)
Analog Circuits
(C) 0.983
(D) 0.998
IN - 2008
2.
For a single stage BJT common base
amplifier
(A) current gain as well as voltage gain
can be greater than unity
(B) current gain can be greater than
unity but voltage gain is always less
than unity
(C) voltage gain can be greater than
unity but current gain is always less
than unity
(D) current gain as well as voltage gain is
always less than unity
3.
In the amplifier circuit shown below,

assume VBE
he
f he
transistor and the values of C1 and C2 are
extremely high. If the amplifier is
designed such that at the quiescent point
its VCE =
where VCC is the power supply
voltage, its small signal voltage gain |
will be
(A) 1
(B) 10
(C) 20
(D) 100
IN - 2006
1.
An amplifier circuit is shown below.
Assume that the transistor works in
active region. The low frequency smallsignal parameters for the transistor are
g = 20 mS, 0 = 50, =, =0. What
is the voltage gain,
( ) of the
amplifier?
(A) 3.75
(B) 4.5
+Vcc
Vi
(C) 9
(D) 19
IN - 2009
The circuit shown in the figure uses three
identical transistors with
= 0.7V and
Gi e : = =
th
th
th
Page 367
GATE QUESTION BANK
kT/ = 25mV.
The collector current of transistor
2mA.
4.
The bias voltage

at the base of the
transistor
is approximately
(A) 9.3V
(C) 10.3V
(B) 10.0V
(D) 11.0V
The small signal voltage gain of the circuit
is
(A) 20
(C) 20
(B) 40
(D) 40
is
+12V
5.
R1
R2
Q1
Analog Circuits
Q2
Q3
R3
12V

ECE
1.
So,
[Ans. C]
Under DC conditions capacitor
as open. By KVL,
will act
(
)
Which is equal to the g of
but
[Ans. A]
Equivalent circuit
5.
= 6V
2.
[Ans. B]
in increased by 10%, i.e.
By KVL,
4
i e
ge
By KVL, in E B loop,
e e e
3.
[Ans. A]
4.
[Ans. C]
Both transistor carry same current and
both are in saturation
[Ans. D]
6.
Voltage gain
u
th
th
)(
ge
th
Page 368
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
Analog Circuits

From the model
i
7.
[Ans. B]
The e
is
we f
u u
) e
ge
h
h
(
For the calculation of gain we need to

calculate . so DC analysis is required
8.
[Ans. A]
The moment
is disconnected from the
circuit,
h
(
h )
but with capacitor,
h
which also reduces voltage gain
So, increases and
decreases.
9.
[Ans. C]
i = 1 + 0.1 cos (
Calculate
Solution:
[
)
= 3V
whe e
i he he
ge
e u e
44
10.
[Ans. B]
4
4
)
i
)
(
4
th
th
th
)i
Page 369
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
i
i
i
i
i
i
4 4
he e
e figu e
i
i
(
) i
i
(
)i (
)
) (
i (
)
i
(
) i
4 4
Now assuming that

collector current g
emitter terminal.
g
is very large, the

flows through the
4 4
g
g
12.
So if g
constant g
[Ans. *] Range 1.04 to 1.12

(
which is nearly
14.
[Ans. *] Range 0.49 to 0.51

For CB configuration
15.
[Ans. *] Range 9.39 to 9.41
4
4
13.
[Ans. B]
This is a common-collector configuration.
i e
eg i e
can vary
( )i
between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage =
4
Negative excursion of output voltage
i
u
`
Replacing the transistor
equivalent model, we get
with
So, undistorted peak to peak output

voltage
4
4
th
th
th
Page 370
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Apply millers theorem

ge
i
u e
i
i
i e
eg i e
can vary
( )i
between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage
=
4
Negative excursion of output voltage
i (
(
) i
i (
(
) i
[Ans. D]
In DC Analysis capacitor will behave as an
open circuit
whe e
So, undistorted peak to peak output

voltage
4
4
EE
1.
)
)
4
Consider input section
i
i
(i
i
i )
)i
i
(
i
i
i
i
(
)
2.
)i
[Ans. D]
g
whe e
g
Small signal analysis of circuit
i g
and Q point to be in
the middle of the load line
th
th
th
Page 371
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN
1.
Analog Circuits
By Voltage division rule

[Ans. D]
Apply KVL to the base emitter circuit
Vi
AC equivalent circuit for
he
e i e
i ui
model
4
g
G i
4
| |
4.
[Ans. A]
Emitter
voltage
of
transistor,
g
L
i
Where
i i
i
10 V
i
i
(i
i
(i
(
So
i )
5.
)
i
(
(i
[
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
When output is taken between one
collector and ground then
)i
)
g
i
i
i
(i e
i g
e g i )
and if take the output between two

collectors then differential gain.
g
collector resistance
[Ans. C]
For CB, current gain is close to unity while
voltage gain is very high.
/
and here output is taken between one
collector and ground therefore gain
g
[Ans. A]
th
th
th
Page 372
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
BJT and JFET Frequency Response

ECE - 2010
Consider the common emitter amplifier
shown below with the following circuit
parameters:
g
A/V,
,
RD
10 k
C
V0
Vi
M
RL
10 k
and
(A) 8
(B) 32
(C) 50
(D) 200
ECE - 2014
4.
1.
The resistance seen by the source v is

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
The lower cut off frequency due to

(A) 33.9 Hz
(C) 13.6 Hz
(B) 27.1 Hz
(D) 16.9 Hz
A cascade connection of two voltage

amplifiers
and
is shown in the
figure. The open-loop gain
, input
resistance
, and output resistance
for
and
are as follows:
The approximate overall voltage gain

/ is __________.
is
ECE - 2013
3.
The ac schematic of an NMOS common
source stage is shown in the figure below,
where part of the biasing circuits has
been omitted for simplicity. For the nchannel MOSFET M, the transconductance
gm =1mA/V, and body effect and channel
length modulation effect are to be
neglected. The lower cutoff frequency in
Hz of the circuit is approximately at
IN - 2011
1.
The amplifier shown below has a voltage
gain of
an input esistance of
and a lower 3-dB cut-off frequency of 20
Hz. Which one of the following statements
is TRUE when the emitter resistance
is
doubled?
th
th
th
Page 373
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(A) Magnitude of voltage gain will

decrease
(B) Input resistance will decrease
(C) Collector bias current will increase
(D) Lower 3-dB cut-off frequency will
increase
th
th
th
Page 374
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits

ECE
1.
[Ans. B]
Equivalent model of the given circuit is
shown below
[
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
The small signal model is
g
The resistance seen by the source
h
2.
[Ans. B]
Lower cut-off frequency due to
f
h
increases
3.
ec eases
ec ease
f
f
4.
doubled Zi
ou e
ec eases
owe
frequency decreases as
increases
s
inc eases
[Ans. A]
w
ec eases
[Ans. *] Range 34 to 34.72
p ifie
p ifie
th
th
th
Page 375
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Feedback and Oscillator Circuits

ECE - 2006
1.
The input impedance ( ) and the output
( )
impedance
of
an
ideal
transconductance (voltage controlled
current source) amplifier are
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE - 2011
4.
In the circuit shown below, capacitors
and are very large and are shorts at the
input frequency. is a small signal input.
The gain magnitude | | at 10 Mrad/s
is
5V
2k
ECE - 2007
2.
In a transconductance amplifier, it is
desirable to have
(A) A large input resistance and a large
output resistance
(B) A large input resistance and a
small output resistance
(C) A small input resistance and a
large output resistance
(D) A small input resistance and a
small output resistance
ECE - 2009
3.
In the circuit shown below, the op-amp is
ideal the transistor has
Decide whether the feedback in the
circuit is positive or negative and
determine the voltage V at the output of
the op-amp
1nF
2k
2.7V
2k
~
(A) Maximum
(B) Minimum
(C) Unity
(D) Zero
ECE - 2014
5.
In the ac equivalent circuit shown in the
figure, if is the input current and
is
very large, the type of feedback is
10V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A) voltage-voltage feedback

(B) voltage-current feedback
(C) current-voltage feedback
(D) current-current feedback
Positive Feedback V=10V

Positive Feedback V= 0V
th
th
th
Page 376
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
The feedback topology in the amplifier

circuit ( the base bias circuit is not shown
for simplicity) in the figure is
Analog Circuits
(A)
5
10
(B)
10
5
~
(C)
(A) Voltage shunt feedback

(B) Current series feedback
(C) Current shunt feedback
(D) Voltage series feedback
7.
10
The desirable characteristics of a

transconductance amplifier are
(A) high input resistance and high output
resistance
(B) high input resistance and low output
resistance
(C) low input resistance and high output
resistance
(D) low input resistance and low output
resistance
EE - 2006
1.
A relaxation oscillator is made using
OPAMP as shown in figure. The supply
voltages of the OPAMP are
12V. The
voltage waveform at point P will be
(D)
10
EE - 2009
2.
The nature of feedback in the op-amp
circuit shown is
+6V
2
R1
Vin
C
6V
R2
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
_
+
2k
P
10k
Current - Current feedback

Voltage - Voltage feedback
Current - Voltage feedback
Voltage - Current feedback
10k
th
th
th
Page 377
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
EE - 2014
3.
In the Wien Bridge oscillator circuit
shown in figure, the bridge is balanced
when
F
If the lower and upper trigger level

voltages are 0.9 V and 1.7 V, the period
(in ms), for which output is LOW,
is_________
( )
IN - 2007
1.
A FET source follower is shown in the
figure below:
+ 15 V
( )
( )
( )
4.
An oscillator circuit using ideal op-amp

and diodes is shown in the figure.
The nature of feedback in this circuit is

(A) Positive current
(B) Negative current
(C) Positive voltage
(D) Negative voltage
ECE/IN - 2013
2.
In the feedback network shown below , if
the feedback factor k is increased , then
the
The time duration for +ve part of the
cycle is
and for ve part is
. The
value of
5.
Vin
V1
A0
vf=kvout
Vout
will be _______________
A hysteresis type TTL inverter is used to

realize an oscillator in the circuit shown
in the figure.
(A) Input impedance increases and output

impedance decreases
th
th
th
Page 378
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(B) Input impedance increases and output

impedance also increases
(C) Input impedance decreases and
output impedance also decreases
(D) Input impedance decreases and
output impedance increases

ECE
1.
6.
[Ans. B]
Current Series
O/P is taken at collector which is voltage
emitter node will be current and
resistor is grounded
Series
7.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
Ideal transconductance amplifier has
infinite input and output resistance.
2.
[Ans. A]
3.
[Ans. D]
EE
1.
2
[Ans. A]
Output will be either at
.
When output will be at
diode
connected to
resistance will be on
making voltage at point P equal to 6V.
When output is at
diode connected
to 2
resistance will be on making
voltage at point equal to
.
( Refer Diagram below)
5v
V
+
+
-
[Ans. B]
It is voltage voltage feedback.
3.
[Ans. C]
Barkhausen criteria for oscillation (for
positive feedback)
4.
2.
[Ans. A]
In the parallel RLC Ckt
Hand
F
A = open loop gain

B = feedback factor
=
So that for a tuned amplifier, gain is

maximum at resonant frequency
5.
||
[Ans. B]
th
th
th
Page 379
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
)(
Real and imaginary part on LHS and RHS

are same so imaginary part = 0
For (+Ve) cycle capacitor charges from

2
2
Apply KCL at node (
)
4.
)
2
( 2
)
)
(
(
2
2
2
2
[
For (- Ve) cycle capacitor discharges from

2
2
Apply KCL at node (
)
(
(
K
th
th
2
( 2 )
th
Page 380
GATE QUESTION BANK
( 2 )
(
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Feedback in this circuit is drain voltage as
negative.
)
2
(
2.
[Ans. A]
Given connection is voltage series F/B.
increases and
decreases
2
]
2
Analog Circuits
y q
2
2
[
5.
2 ]
[Ans. *] Range 0.62 to 0.66
During the charging of capacitor

()
( ) ( ( )
( ))
(
()
During discharging of capacitor
()
( )
()
( ( )
( ))
)
(
th
th
th
Page 381
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Operational Amplifiers and Its Applications

ECE - 2006
1.
For the circuit shown in the following
figure, the capacitor C is initially
uncharged. At t
, the switch S is closed.
The voltage
across the capacitor at
t
millisecond is
ECE - 2007
4.
For the Op-amp circuit shown in the
figure, is
2 k
1 k
1V
1 k
1 k
In the figure shown above, the OP AMP is

supplied with 15V.
(A) 0 Volts
(C) 9.45 Volts
(B) 6.3 Volts
(D) 10 Volts
(A)
(B)
5.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
3.
(C) 0.5 V
(D) 0.5 V
In the Op-amp circuit shown, assume that

the diode current follows the equation
I = exp (V/ ). For = 2 V,
=
and for
= 4 V,
=
. The
relationship between
and
is

and 3
A regulated power supply, shown in
figure below, has an unregulated input
(UR) of 15 Volts and generates a
regulated output
. Use the component
values shown in the figure.
k
2V
1V
=
=e
=
ln 2
= ln 2

and 7
Consider the Op-Amp circuit shown in the
figure.
In the figure above, the ground has been

shown by the symbol
The Power dissipation across the
transistor Q1, shown in the figure is
(A) 4.8 Watts
(C) 5.4 Watts
(B) 5.0 Watts
(D) 6.0 Watts
If the unregulated voltage increases by
20%, then power dissipation across the
transistor Q1
(A) Increases by 20%
(B) Increases by 50%
(C) Remains unchanged
(D) Decreases by 20%
th
th
th
Page 382
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
7.
The transfer function
(s)/
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(s) is
10.
Analog Circuits
Consider the Schmidt trigger circuit

shown below
k
If
sin t and
sin t
, then the minimum
and maximum values of
(in radians)
are respectively
(A) / and /
(C) and
(B) and /
(D) / and
k
k
A triangular wave which goes from 12V

to 12V is applied to the inverting input of
the OPAMP. Assume that the output of the
OPAMP swings from +15V to 15V.The
voltage at the non-inverting input
switches between
(A) 12V and +12 V
(B) 7.5V and 7.5V
(C) 5V and +5V
(D) 0V and 5V
ECE - 2008
8.
Consider the following circuit using an
ideal OPAMP. The I-V characteristics of
the diode is described by the relation
I= (e
) where
m
and V is the voltage across the
diode (taken as positive for forward bias)
D
4k
= 1
100k
ECE - 2009
11. In the following astable multivibrator
circuit, which properties of
t depend
on ?
For an input voltage

the output
voltage is
(A) 0V
(C) 0.7V
(B) 0.1V
(D) 1.1V
9.
The OPAMP circuit shown below

represents a
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
High pass filter

Low pass filter
Band pass filter
Band reject filter
th
Only the frequency

Only the amplitude
Both the amplitude and frequency
Neither the amplitude nor the
frequency
th
th
Page 383
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
ECE - 2010
12. Assuming the OP AMP to be ideal, the
voltage gain of the amplifier shown below
is
13.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The transfer characteristic for the

precision rectifier circuit shown below is
(assume ideal OP AMP and practical
diodes)
ECE - 2011
14. The circuit below implements a filter
between the input current i and the
output voltage v . Assume that the opamp
is ideal. The filter implemented is a
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
low pass filter

band pass filter
band stop filter
high pass filter
ECE/EE/IN - 2013
15. In the circuit shown below what is the
output voltage (Vout) if a silicon transistor
Q and an ideal op amp are used?
th
th
th
Page 384
GATE QUESTION BANK

+15 V
Analog Circuits
1 k
k
k
Vout
.7
5V
(A)
(B)
16.
15 V
15 V
0.7 V
(C) +0.7 V
(D) +15 V
19.
In the circuit shown below the op amps

are ideal. The Vout in Volts is
1 k
1 k
+15 V
+15 V
Vout
1 k
-15 V
+1V
-15 V
(A)
(B)
1 k
1 k
20.
(A) 4
(B) 6
(C) 8
(D) 10
ECE - 2014
17. In the low-pass filter shown in the figure,
for a cut-off frequency of 5 kHz , the value
of
(in k ) is ________
18.
In the circuit shown, the op-amp has finite

input impedance, infinite voltage gain and
zero input offset voltage. The output
voltage
is
(C)
(D)
In the differential amplifier shown in the

figure, the magnitudes of the commonmode and differential-mode gains are
and , respectively. If the resistance
is increased, then
In the voltage regulator circuit shown in

the figure, the op-amp is ideal. The BJT
has
.7
and
and the
zener voltage is 4.7 V. For a regulated
output of 9V, the value of R (in is
_________
(A)
increases
(B) common-mode rejection ratio
increases
(C)
increases
(D) common-mode rejection ratio
decreases
th
th
th
Page 385
GATE QUESTION BANK
21.
Assuming that the Op-amp in the circuit

shown is ideal, is given by
Analog Circuits
(A)
(B)
22.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The circuit shown represents

(C)
12V
0.7V
(A) a bandpass filter

(B) a voltage controlled oscillator
(C) an amplitude modulator
(D) a monostable multivibrator
(D)
EE -2006
1.
For a given sinusoidal input voltage, the
voltage waveform at point P of the
clamper circuit shown in figure will be
0.7V
12V
EE -2007
2.
The circuit shown in the figure is
~
oad
r
Vin
(A) A voltage source with voltage

(B) A voltage source with voltage
(C) A
current
source
with
current
th
th
th
Page 386
GATE QUESTION BANK
(D) A
current
source
with
current
Analog Circuits
(D)
.
3.
IC 555 in the adjacent figure is configured

as an astable multivibrator. It is enabled
to oscillate at t =0 by applying a high
input to pin 4. The pin description is: 1
and 8 supply; 2- trigger; 4- reset;
6 threshold; 7 discharge. The
waveform appearing across the capacitor
starting from t = 0, as observed on a
storage CRO is
4.
The switch S in the circuit of the figure is

initially closed. It is opened at time t=0.
You may neglect the Zener diode forward
voltage drops. What is the behaviour of
for t
?
+10V
10K
+10 V
8
7
+
IC 555
10K
10V
0.01
2, 6
C
5.0V
5.0V
k
1
10V
(A) It
(A)
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
(B) It
(C) It
(D) It
(B)
transition
.
s
transition
. 7 s
transition
.
s
transition
. 7 s
from
from
from
from
EE -2008
5.
The block diagrams of two types of half
wave rectifiers are shown in the figure.
The transfer characteristics of the
rectifiers are also shown within the block.
P
(C)
V0
V0
Vin
V0
Vin
V0
Vin
0
Vin
It is desired to make full wave rectifier

using above two half wave rectifiers.
The resultant circuit will be
th
th
th
Page 387
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(A)
5V
2.5V
t(sec)
(B)
t(sec)
0
2.5V
5V
(C)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
(D)
5V
0
5V
t(sec)
Statement for Linked Answer Questions

7 and 8
A general filter circuit is shown in the
figure:
6.
A waveform generator circuit using

OPAMPs is shown in the figure. It
produces a triangle wave at point with
a peak to peak voltage of 5V for = 0 V.
If the voltage
is made + 2.5 V, the
voltage waveform at point will become
7.
If R1 = R2 = RA and R3 = R4 = RB, the

circuit acts as a
(A) all pass filter
(C) high pass filter
(B) band pass filter (D) low pass filter
8.
The output of the filter in Q.7 is given to

the circuit shown in below figure
th
th
th
Page 388
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
/
k
z
rms
pamp
The gain vs frequency characteristic of

output (Vo) will be
(A)
Gain
(A)
m
(B)
m
(C) 1 m
(D)
m
()
leading by 0
leading by 0
leading by 900
lagging by 0
(B)
10.
Gain
An ideal op-amp circuit and its input

waveform are shown in the figures.
The output waveform of this circuit will
be
()
(C)
Gain
6V
k
()
+
(D)
3V
Gain
()
t
EE -2009
9.
The following circuit has
k
C = 10 F . The input voltage is a sinusoid
at 50Hz with an rms value of 10V. Under
ideal conditions, the current is from the
source is
th
th
th
Page 389
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
(A)
(B)
t
t
t
t
(C)
EE -2010
11. Given that the op-amp is ideal, the output
voltage is
(D)
(A) 4V
(B) 6V
(C) 7.5V
(D) 12.12V
EE -2011
12. For the circuit shown below,
13.
the CORRECT transfer characteristic is
th
A-Low pass filter with a cut-off frequency

of 30Hz is cascaded with a high pass filter
with a cut-off frequency of 20Hz. The
resultant system of filter will function as ,
(A) An all-pass filter
(B) An all-Stop filter
(C) A band stop (band -reject) filter
(D) An band-pass filter
th
th
Page 390
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
ECE/EE/IN -2012
14. The circuit shown is a
(|
|)
utput
ntput
(A) Low pass filter with

f
rad/s
(B) High pass filter with f
rad/s
(C) Low pass filter with f
rad/s
(D) High pass filter with f
rad/s
/
/
EE -2014
15. Given that the op-amps in the figure are
ideal, the output voltage is
(|
|)
(A)
(B)
16.
(C)
(D)
In the figure shown, assume the op-amp

to be ideal. Which of the alternatives gives
the correct Bode plots for the transfer
function
/
/
/
/
th
th
th
Page 391
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
(|
Analog Circuits
An operational-amplifier circuit is shown

in the figure.
|)
The output of the circuit for a given input

is
/
/
)
or
(|
18.
|)
The transfer characteristic of the Op-amp

circuit shown in figure is
/
/
th
th
th
Page 392
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
Analog Circuits
When the switch S2 is closed the gain of

the programmable gain amplifier shown
in the following Figure is
k
k
(A) 0.5
(B) 2
IN - 2006
1.
If the value of the resistance R in the
following figure is increased by 50%, then
voltage gain of the amplifier shown in the
figure will change by
(C) 4
(D) 8
3.
The potential difference between the

input terminals of an op-amp may be
treated to be nearly zero, if
(A) The two supply voltages are
balanced
(B) The output voltage is not saturated
(C) The op amp is used in a circuit
having negative feedback
(D) There is a dc bias path between each
of the input terminals and the circuit
ground
4.
A dual op-amp instrumentation amplifier

is shown below. The expression for the
output of the amplifier is given by
k
k
Vin
(A) 50%
(B) 5%
(C) 50%
(D) negligible amount
(A) v0 1
th
th
R2
(v v 1 )
R1 2
th
Page 393
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B) v0 1
2R2
(v v 1 )
R1 2
8.

figure , the op-amp has input bias current
n
and input offset voltage
m . The maximum dc error in the
output voltage is
2R2
(C) v0
(v v 1 )
R1 2
(D) v0 1
Analog Circuits
2R1
(v v 1 )
R 2 2
k
k
5.
An astable multivibrator circuit using a

555 IC is given in the following figure. The
frequency of oscillation is
8
I=5 mA
(A) 1.0 mV
(B) 2.0 mV
Output
6
2
555
discharge
(C= 0.1 uF)
(A) 20 kHz
(B) 30 kHz
(C) 2.5mV
(D) 3.0 mV
(C) 40 kHz
(D) 45 kHz
IN - 2007
9.
When light falls on the photodiode shown
in the following circuit, the reverse
saturation current of the photodiode
changes from
to
.
k
Statement for linked answer questions 6

and 7
In the Schmitt trigger circuit shown
below, the Zener diodes have VZ (reverse
saturation voltage) = 6V and VD (forward
voltage drop) = 0.7V
6.
If the circuit has the input lower trip point

(LTP)=0V, then the value of
(A) 0.223
(B) 2.67
Assuming the op amp to be ideal, the

output voltage,
of the circuit.
(A) does not change
(B) changes from 1 V to 2V
(C) changes from 2 V to 1 V
(D) changes from 1 V to 2V
10.
is given as
Consider the linear circuit with and ideal

op-amp shown in the figure below.
1
(C) 4.67
(D)
7.
The input upper trip point (UTP) of the

Schmitt trigger is
(A) 1.5 V
(C) 2.42V
(B) 2.1 V
(D) 7V
Vi
Vo
The Z-parameters of the two port

feedback network are
k
th
th
th
Page 394
GATE QUESTION BANK
and
=
amplifier is
(A) + 110
(B) + 11
11.
k. The gain of the
Analog Circuits
(D)
o/ i
4 dB
(C)
1
(D) 120
1dB
20 dB/decade
Consider the circuit shown below
f
330pF
22k
21.9kHz
22k
330pF
12.
10k
In the circuit shown below the switch (S)

is closed whenever the input voltage
is positive and open otherwise.
7k
The correct frequency response of the

circuit is
(A)
.
Vin
o/ i
4 dB
The circuit is a
(A) Low pass filter
(B) Level shifter
(C) Modulator
(D) Precision rectifier
1 dB
20dB/decade
f
21. 9kHz
(B)
13.
/
0 dB
3 dB
Consider the triangular wave generator

shown below.
40dB/decade
R k
Input
1 k
10 k
21. 9kHz
(C)
o/ i
Assume that the op amps are ideal and

have 2 V power supply. If the input is a
5 V, 50 Hz square wave of duty cycle
50%, the condition that results in a
triangular wave of peak to peak
amplitude 5 V and frequency 50 Hz at the
output is
(A) RC = 1
(C)
4 dB
1 dB
40 dB/decade
21. 9kHz
Output
(B)
th
(D)
th
th
Page 395
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
A 555 astable multivibrator circuit is

shown in the figure below
Analog Circuits
Noise
Square Wave
7V
8V
3V
RA
RB
output
-7V
threshold
Which one of the following is an

appropriate choice for the upper and
lower trip points of the Schmitt trigger to
recover a square wave of the same
frequency from the corrupted input
signal
(A) 8.0 V
(C) 0.5 V
(B) 2.0 V
(D) 0V
ground
is shorted, the waveform at
is
(A)
VC
2/3 VCC
cc
cc
1/3VCC
0
16.
(B)
V
ccC
2/3 VCC
cc
cc
1/3 VCC
cc
The figure shows a signal op-amp

differential amplifier circuit .
k
(C)
-3V
tr gger
If
6V
1V
-1V
reset
discharge
cc
VC
+
+
k
k
cc
cc
2/3 VCC
Which of the following statement about

the output is correct?
(A)
m
(B)
m
m
(C)
m
v
m
(D)
m
1/3 VCC
0
(D)
VC
cc
2/3 VCC
1/3 VCC
0
15.
The input signal shown in the figure

below is fed to a Schmitt trigger. The
signal has a square wave amplitude of
6 V p-p. It is corrupted by an additive high
frequency noise of amplitude 8 V p-p.
th
th
th
Page 396
GATE QUESTION BANK
Common Data Question for Q.No. 17, 18 &

19
Consider the op-amp circuit shown in the
figure below:
21.
-+
(A) 10V
(B) 10.5V
22.
-
18.
19.
A differential amplifier shown below has

a differential mode gain of 100 and a
CMRR of 40dB. If
.
and
.
, the output V0 is
17.
Analog Circuits
If
.
.
and
7
and the op-amp is ideal , the value of the
is
(A) k
(C)
k
(B)
k
(D)
k
Let
sin f t and
K .
The Op-amp has a slew rate of . / s
with its other parameters being ideal .The
values of
and f for which the amplifier
output will have no distortion are,
respectively,
(A) 0.1 V and 300kHz
(B) 0.5 V and 300kHz
(C) 0.1 V and 30kHz
(D) 0.5 V and 30kHz
(C) 11V
(D) 15V
The op-amp circuit shown below is that of

a
(A) Low-pass filter with a maximum gain

of 1
(B) Low-pass filter with a maximum,
gain of 2
(C) High-pass filter with a maximum
gain of 1
(D) High-pass filter with a maximum
gain of 2
23.
Let
and
k . Assume
that the op-amp is ideal except for a
non-Zero input bias current. What is the
value of
for the output Voltage of the
op-amp to be Zero?
(A) . k
(C)
k
(B) . k
(D)
k
In the op-amp circuit shown below the

input voltage vin is gradually increased
from 10V to +10V. Assuming that the
output voltage vout saturates at 10V and
+10V,vout will change from
IN - 2008
20. An ideal op-amp has the characteristics of
an ideal
(A) Voltage controlled voltage source
(B) Voltage controlled current source
(C) Current controlled voltage source
(D) Current controlled current source
(A) 10V to +10V when vin

(B) 10V to +10V when vin
(C) +10V to 10V when vin
(D) +10V to 10V when vin
th
th
th
1V
1V
1V
1V
Page 397
GATE QUESTION BANK
24.
For the op-amp circuit shown below

approximately equal to
is
27.
Analog Circuits
The input resistance of the circuit shown

in the figure, assuming an ideal op-amp, is
2R
3R
(A)
(B)
10V
5V
(A) R/3
(B) 2R/3
(C) +5V
(D) +10V
IN - 2009
25. The circuit shown is the figure is
28.
(C) R
(D) 4R/3

switch S has been in Position 1 for a long
time. It is then moved to Position 2.
Assume the Zener diodes to be ideal. The
time delay between the switch moving to
Position 2 and the transition in the output
voltage is
osition
osition
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
26.
An all-pass filter
A bandpass filter
A highpass filter
A lowpass filter
In the circuit shown, the Zener diode has

ideal characteristics and a breakdown
voltage of 3.2V. The output voltage
for
an input voltage = +1V is closest to
(A) 5.00ms
(B) 8.75ms
.7k
ener
diode
.7k
ener
diode
(C) 10.00ms
(D) 13.75ms
IN - 2010
29. In the ideal opamp circuit given in the
below figure, the value of Rf is varied from
1k to 100k . The gain G = ( ) will
k
k
(A)
(B)
10V
6.6V
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5V
3.2V
th
remain constant at +1
remain constant at -1
vary as -( /10,000 )
vary as (
/10,000)
th
th
Page 398
GATE QUESTION BANK
30.
An active filter is shown in the below

figure. The dc gain and the 3dB cut-off
frequency of the filter respectively, are,
nearly
Analog Circuits
IN - 2011
33and 34
and in the circuit shown below
are matched n-channel enhancement
mode MOSFETs operating in saturation
mode, forward voltage drop of each diode
is .7 reverse leakage current of each
diode is negligible and the op-amp is ideal
k
R1 = 15.9 k , R2 = 159 k , C1 = 1.0nF

(A) 40dB, 3.14 kHz
(B) 40dB, 1.00 kHz
(C) 20dB, 6.28 kHz
(D) 20dB, 1.00 kHz
Common Data for Questions: 31 & 32
A differential amplifier is constructed
using an ideal op-amp as shown in the
adjoining figure. The values of R1 and R2
are 47k and 470k respectively.
31.
32.
The input impedances seen looking into

the terminals V1 and V2, with respect to
ground, respectively are
(A) 47k and 43k
(B) 47k and 47k
(C) 47k and 517k
(D) 517k and 47k
33.
The current
(A) 1 mA
(B) .5 mA
34.
For the computed value of current

output voltage is
(A) 1.2V
(C) 0.2V
(B) 0.7V
(D) 0.7V
35.
The ideal op-amp based circuit shown

below acts as a
in the circuit is
(C) m
(D) 2 ma
0.5 F
, the
0.5 F
k
1 F
V1 and V2 are connected to voltage

sources having an open circuit output of
+1V each and internal resistances of
13k and 3k respectively. The output
voltage V0 is
(A) 0V
(C) 1.5V
(B) 0.15V
(D) 10V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
low-pass filter
high-pass filter
band-pass filter
band-reject filter
th
th
Page 399
GATE QUESTION BANK
36.
The value of
shown below is
of the series regulator
40 V(DC)
k
(C) 6.7 V and 4.7 V

(D) 5.3 V and 3.3 V
38.
k
6 V(DC)
(A) 24 V
(B) 28 V
Assuming base-emitter voltage of 0.7V

and
of transistor
, the output
voltage
in the ideal opamp circuit
shown below is
5V
k
(C) 30 V
(D) 32 V
The transfer characteristics of the circuit

drawn below is observed on the
oscilloscope used in XY mode. The display
on the oscilloscope is shown on the right
hand side.
is connected to the X input
with a setting of 0.5 V/div, and
is
connected to the Y input with a setting of
2 V/div. The beam is positioned at the
origin when is zero.
sin
37.
1k
Analog Circuits
5V
1V
(C)
(D)
(A) 1V
(B) 1/3.3V
V
V
IN - 2013
39. The operational amplifier shown in the
circuit below has a slew rate of 0.8 Volts /
s. The input signal is .
sin( t . The
maximum frequency of input in kHz for
which there is no distortion in the output
is
~V
470k
22k
0.25sin t
V0
(A) 23.84
(B) 25.0
40.
Assuming that the op-amp is ideal and the
zener diodes have forward biased voltage
drop of 0.7V, the values of reverse breakdown voltages of
and
are,
respectively.
(A) 3.3 V and 5.3 V
(B) 4.7 V and 6.7 V
th
(C) 50.0
(D) 46.60
The circuit below incorporates a

permanent magnet moving coil milli
ammeter of range 1 mA having a series
resistance of 10k. Assuming constant
diode forward resistance of 50, a
forward diode drop of 0.7 V and infinite
reverse diode resistance for each diode ,
the reading of the meter in mA is
th
th
Page 400
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
R2
mA
10 k
R1
10 k
Z
Y
5V,
50Hz
V0
R3
V0
V1
(A) 0.45
(B) 0.5
41.
R4
(C) 0.7
(D) 0.9
Fig. a
+5V
A signal Vi(t)=10+10sin 100t + 10 sin

4000t + 10sin 100000t is supplied to a
filter circuit (shown below) made up of
ideal opAmp. The least attenuated
frequency component in the output will
be
R
X
.
2k
1k
Strain
Gage
750
.
V1(t)
(A) 0 Hz
(B) 50 Hz
Differential
Amplifier
V0(t)
(C) 2 kHz
(D) 50kHz

and 43
A differential amplifier with signal
terminals X, Y, Z is connected as shown in
Fig. (a) below for CMRR measurement
where the differential amplifier has an
additional constant offset voltage in the
output. The observations obtained are :
when Vi= 2V, V0=3mV, and when Vi=3V,
V0=4mV.
42.
43.
th
Fig. b
Assuming its differential gain to be 10 and
the op amp to be otherwise ideal , the
CMRR is
(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
The differential amplifier is connected as

shown in Fig. (b) above to a single strain
gage bridge. Let the strain gage resistance
vary around its no load resistance R by
1%. Assume the input impedance of the
amplifier to be high compared to the
equivalent source resistance of the
bridge, and the common mode
characteristic to be as obtained above.
The output voltage in mV varies
approximately from
(A) +128 to 128 (C) +122 to 122
(B) + 128 to 122 (D) +99 to 101
th
th
Page 401
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2014
44. For the op-amp shown in the figure, the
bias currents are
= 450 nA and
=350 nA. The values of the input bias
current ( ) and the input offset current
( ) are:
47.
For the given low-pass circuit shown in

the figure below, the cutoff frequency in
Hz will be ___________.
. 7
k
k
. 7
(A) = 800 nA, =50 nA

(B) = 800 nA, =100nA
(C) = 400 nA, =50nA
(D) = 400 nA,
100nA
45.
Analog Circuits
48.
The amplifier in the figure has gain of -10

and input resistance of 50 k . The value
of and are
The figures show an oscillator circuit

having an ideal Schmitt trigger and its
input-output characteristics. The time
period (in ms) of
t is___________.
output
k
nput
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
46.
k
k
k
k
k
k
Assuming an ideal op-amp in linear range

of operation, the magnitude of the
transfer impedance
in
of the
current to voltage converter shown in the

figure is ___________.
k
k
. k
th
th
th
Page 402
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits

ECE
1.
4.
[Ans. C]
2 k
[Ans. D]
Initially the switch is closed at t= 0
Then circuit is
The circuit is integrator circuit
1 k
1V
dt
1 k
pply K at node
dv
k
dt
(
k
2.
k
k
k
k
( )
k
[Ans. D]
1 k
)
.
k
) .
k
(
.
.
k
5.
[Ans. D]
Applying KCL
exp (
k
Volt across 24 k
due to virtual
ground concept. So voltage across 12k
is 3V
exp (
ln
ow
)
i
k
ln
ln
watts
3.
[Ans. B]
Unregulated voltage increases by 20%
i. e. New regulated voltage = 18V
6.
k
k
ln
[Ans. A]
watts
increases
th
th
th
Page 403
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. C]
k
k
j
j
j
s
s
s
s
7.
From KCL
s
s
[Ans. C]
s
s
..
Threshold depends on output
So, when
s
s
s
s
When
s
s
tan
tan
tan
inimum value of
at
maximum value of
at
11.
[Ans. A]
12.
[Ans. C]
a
8.
[Ans. B]
(e
Where
Voltage across diode = 60 mV

Voltage across 4k resistor s
k
m
Total voltage
is
m
m
9.
and
k
Op-amp is ideal, so it will satisfy the

virtual ground property
a
c
So, we can redraw the circuit as
m
.
[Ans. B]
At low frequency, capacitor is open and
inductor short so,
At high frequency capacitor is short and
inductor open so,
so it is low pass filter.
Circuit is similar to standard inverting

amplifier
th
th
th
Page 404
GATE QUESTION BANK
[
13.
Analog Circuits
)]
[Ans. B]
i
i
Hence given circuit is a high pass filter
15.
[Ans. B]
k
.7
Redraw the given circuit

Case (1)
5V
i
For non-zero value of
off, so i
, diode
must be
by virtual short
equivalent connection for transistor is
Then
t
0
t
.7
When
,
conducting so =0V
14.
both
diode
are
16.
0.7V
[Ans. C]
ain of
stage
k
(
)
k
[Ans. D]
At
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below
1k
-2V
k
i
k
)
k
1k
Vout
+1V
-15 V
1k
1k
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below
Gain of stage II =
th
th
th
Page 405
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
[Ans. *] Range 3.1 to 3.26

ut off frequency f
20.
18.
[Ans. B]
e
h
is inversily proportional to Re
if
increases
decreases
f
.
k z
Analog Circuits
if
[Ans. *] Range 1092 to 1094
21.
decreases CMRR increases
[Ans. D]
a
.7
Op-Amp ideal so it will satisfy the

property of virtual ground
.7
ere
.
k
.7k
.7
.7k
.7k
.
7
22.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. D]
The circuit shown in the figure has
positive feedback. So it can be either a
oscillator or multivibrator.
So option A and C are cancelled out
Now, a voltage controlled oscillator is
usually implemented using a artleys
oscillator where the feedback is like
shown below.
Due to virtual ground
must have inductors in the feedback

circuit. Since the given circuit has no
inductors, it has to be a multivibrator.
.
19.
.7
th
th
th
Page 406
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE
1.
2.
5.
[Ans. D]
When
is positive,
diode will be OFF, so
When
is negative,
diode will be ON, so
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
From the transfer characteristic of the
rectifier P is
for
for
will be ve and
V
will be ve and
.7
[Ans. D]
Voltage at non inverting terminal,
From the transfer characteristics of the
rectifier Q is
for
for
Due to virtual ground

current through Load,
r
r
So this circuit acts as a current source
with current
3.
[Ans. A]
An astable multi-vibrator is providing
pulses as given below.
But in this case initial voltage at capacitor

is zero so it starts from zero also charging
time will be larger (normally) than
discharging time but it is made equal by
using a diode.
4.
[Ans. D]
It is limited circuit
It makes transition from +5V to 5V
(
For full wave rectifier output is W

must be connected to inverting and
must be connected to non-inverting
terminal of the op-amp
6.
[Ans. A]
When
. , O/P will be clamped by a
dc value of 2.5 V
7.
[Ans. C]
(Voltage across 100k )

.
sec
t
. 7 s
th
th
th
Page 407
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
i
Let,
only inverting terminal
magnitude i
ere
s
s
is only on non-inverting terminal
Let,
mA
and it will be lagging by 90
)
10.
(
[Ans. D]
k
Putting the value of

(
, we get
k
ere
(
When
When
upto t
after t
ve
ve
( )
o it is high pass filter
8.
11.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
(
12.
C
[Ans. D]
First section is differential amplifier
having gain off 1.
.
.
.
=
.
.
So gain
frequency characteristics will
be as option (D)
9.
[Ans. D]
Voltage at inverting terminal
Output is
So
th
th
th
Page 408
GATE QUESTION BANK
15.
econd stage
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
schmitt trigger
x
x
y
y
Applying superposition theorem
When y = 0
x
when x
y/
13.
[Ans. D]
Low Pass Filter
y
y
High Pass Filter
x
from equation
16.
and
[Ans. A]
k
i
20Hz
30Hz
Pass band
It is a band pass filter.

14.
[Ans. B]
V= =0
=
=-
=
=
=
High pass Fitter with f
s
rad /sec
th
th
th
Page 409
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
Since positive feedback is there at the

output of op-amp 1 depending on
output will vary between
and
At the output of op-amp
Gain of op-amp
is
Hence net output
will vary between
and
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Voltage gain
So it does not depend on R.
2.
[Ans. B]
When switch
(
18.
is closed,
)
[Ans. C]
3.
[Ans. C]
When Op-Amp is used in ve feedback
then voltage difference between the
terminals is treated as zero.
4.
[Ans. A]
The equivalent circuit is as follows:
When
is on
is off
when
is on
is off
------------- (1)
and
From equation (1)
=(
th
th
)
th
Page 410
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
[Ans. B]
It is a sawtooth wave generator across
capacitor C.
8.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
DC output Voltage that is output offset
voltage,
(
So maximum offset (dc voltage) at the

output will be,
(
t
T
d
o
dt
d
dt
d
dt
) m
m
m
T
9.
[Ans. B]
k
.
a
T
f
T
6.
k z
The given circuit is
pply K at a
[Ans. C]
.7
=0
.
When
When
When reverse circuit of the photodiode
changes from 100 to
, the output
voltage change from 1V to 2V
I=
I
. =0
.
1.5 =
= 4.47
7.
10.
[Ans. C]
6.7V
I
1.5V
I=
=I
=
. =
.
[Ans. D]
Given that the imp. Parameters are
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Then the given op-amp circuit is
= 2.45V
th
th
th
Page 411
GATE QUESTION BANK

k
12.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
R
R
k
k
a
Vin
b
pply K
at a
pply K
at x
Case-1
When
ve half cycle then switch (s)
is closed and circuit will become
ain
11.
[Ans. B]
.
p
Vin
k
k
p
( )
(
7k
Case -2
When
ve half cycle then switch s is
open and circuit will become
The given circuit is a second order low

pass filter therefore it has a
dB/decade and it has 3 dB cut-off
frequency as
f
Vin
. k z
It has a decade form 0 dB to
frequency range.
3 dB in mid
th
th
th
Page 412
GATE QUESTION BANK
No circuit flow through left side Op-Amp

due to open switch so
through resistor
. But
is shorted
out. So discharge time constant
.So
capacitor
will
instantly discharge so correct output is in
option (A)
=
So, the circuit as a rectifier (fullwave)
13.
[Ans. B]
O/P of first OPAMP
t
15.
t dt, where
and O/P of second OPAMP

t
t
t dt
t dt
input is
, 50Hz square wave. O/P
should be triangular wave of
.
50Hz means 20msec, so in 10msec O/P
should charge from
.
to
. ,
when
.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
The UTP value selected in such a way that
to recover a square wave of same
frequency from the input signal
When
The output is
When
and
When
We can recover a square wave of same
frequency from the corrupted input signal
when UTP and LTP value are
16.
[Ans. B]
k
dt
k
+
+
14.
[Ans. C]
Apply KCL at
K
RA
node
reset
discharge
RB
out
tr gger
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Now, Apply KCL at
threshold
ground
Capacitor C charges toward

through
and
until in raises upto 2/3
.
This voltage is the threshold voltage of
pin 6 which drives comparator 1 to
trigger the flip-flop so that the output at
pin 3 goes low. In addition, the discharge
transistor is driven on. Causing the output
at pin 7 to discharge the capacitor
Node
.
For an ideal op-amp
.
.
.
.
.7
. m
th
th
th
Page 413
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
[Ans. B]
Analog Circuits
K
.
--
20.
[Ans. A]
21.
[Ans. B]
K
K
. K
and
.
Apply the KCL at the inverting node
[
Put,
. 7
]
.
and
.
22.
[Ans. D]
At low frequency, C is open and
At high frequency C is short and
(
k
18.
so it is a high pass filter with max. gain of

2.
[Ans. C]
sin f (
23.
sin ft
d
| |
dt
f cos ft
[Ans. D]
When
and is connected to
inverting terminal, output will saturate to
+10V.
f
To avoid distortion,
Slew rate
.
f
|
f
f
7 7. 7
So when f
k z and
Then f
7 7.7
So option (C) is correct.
19.
nd
oltage divider rule
When
crosses 1 V,
So, output
will not change to
.
So, output will change from
to
when
.
[Ans. B]
In order to avoid the effect of the bias
current, resistance at +ve terminal must
be equal to dc resistance seen from ve
terminal by replacing all the sources by
their internal resistances.
Therefore,
k
K
K
th
th
th
Page 414
GATE QUESTION BANK
24.
[Ans. B]
Equivalent circuit
k
Analog Circuits
.
Now first open the zener diode then
circuit will be
k
k
k
k
By neglecting current through, 100K

compare to current through 105
resistance,
.
Similarly, by neglecting current through
K compare to current through
resistance,
So zener will be on and circuit will be as

i
k
.
i
k
.7
.7
.7
o
.
will lie between

and
.
Because zener will be on then current 1
mA will be divided in two parts and
output will be 10V < < 3.2V
f output
then i
. m
i
. m
oi
i
hence this is not possible
When
.
Then i
. m
.
.
i
. m
5.2 V
25.
[Ans. A]
s
s [
So it is all - pass filter.

26.
[Ans. B]
Zener diode is in reverse bias. The
equivalent circuit is,
here i
k
k
th
th
th
Page 415
GATE QUESTION BANK
27.
[Ans. A]
Analog Circuits
at time t , when
will switch to 5V.
2R
. ,
e
.7 ms
.
t
3R
becomes
29.
[Ans. A]
Input resistance
a
b
Voltage at inverting terminal,

By KCL at node A,
and
pply K
at a
By KCL at inverting terminal
By equ (1) and (2),

Gain =
28.
[Ans. B]
When the switch is at position 1,
capacitor will be charged by +30V and
. so voltage at non inverting
terminal will be 2.5V.
When switch is moved to position 2,
capacitor will start discharging and when
. .
will switch to 5V.
Equivalent circuit
30.
[Ans. D]
DC gain = 20 log | | = 20 dB
3-dB cut-off frequency =
31.
= 1 kHz
[Ans. C]
7 k
7k
k
nvertinf terminal
7k
7 k
Input impedance seen looking into the

terminals
and
with respect to
ground
Apply superposition theorem put
So voltage at
By virtual ground concept voltage at
s
voltage
i t
e
at
i t
inverting
terminal
th
th
th
Page 416
GATE QUESTION BANK
So input impedance seen from

respect to ground is
7k
Now put
The input impedance from
respect to ground
7
7 k
7k
32.
with
Since,
and
are all matched
transistors
So,
say
Then
m
or
. m
lso
. m
with
[Ans. B]
Now the effective circuit is
7 k
34.
[Ans. A]
will be reverse biased while
will be
forward biased
o
(Forward voltage drop of )
.7
.
.
35.
[Ans. A]
The ideal op-amp based circuit is shown
in figure 1. with T-network at the input
and feedback paths,. Note the specific
relations between resistances and
capacitances used. It can be shown that
this circuit acts as a double integrator and
hence it is a low pass filter specifically
transfer function
7k
Analog Circuits
7 k
Now voltage at point P is

7
7
By virtual ground capacitor, voltage at
point Q is
7
Now apply KCL at point Q

k
7 k
.
.
33.
igure
[Ans. B]
k
s
s
s
.
or
.
. sec
. s
s
The frequency response is given by
j
which shows the gain falls by
40 dB per decade
Clearly
th
th
th
Page 417
GATE QUESTION BANK
36.
[Ans. C]
When input voltage

cycle)
everse biased
}
orward iased
.7
.7
.
38.
Using voltage divider rule
[Ans. D]
When input voltage
cycle)
Forward biased
Reverse biased
(During
(During
ve
[Ans. C]
.7
. m
or
so
or
37.
Analog Circuits
ve
.7
ow
39.
[Ans. A]
.
1k
Where
f
.7
.7
.7
.7
or
.
.
40.
[Ans. A]
41.
[Ans. C]
For Op-Amp
Analysis
k z
sin t
.
sin t
.7
th
th
th
Page 418
GATE QUESTION BANK
s
s
T.
Analog Circuits
. k z
7
d
. k z
d
d
Lower 3 dB dominant frequency is 0.5
kHz.
Total response
ere
one pole
s
OP-Amp
and reject response
is low pass response;
east attenuated
frequency k z
Low frequencies
z
z
k z
f
. k z
k z
Only option (C)is lying in this range

Option (C) is correct
k z
Op-Amp
Analysis
42.
[Ans. C]
from given data
m
m
Solving (1) & (2)
s
s
T.
s
s
*
43.
[Ans. B]
5V
+*
*
High pass response

R
High frequencies
. k z
For
variation is
varies from 12.48mV to 12.56mV
.
th
th
th
Page 419
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
m , given
from bridge
For
change
.
m
=127.8 mV
For
change
op amp
. m
m
. m
m
. m
O/P varies from 7. m to
. m
i
.
47.
[Ans. *]Range 15 to 16
It is second-order low pass system. ts
high cut-off-frequency
f
ere
44.
[Ans. D]
In an OPAMP,
45.
48.
[Ans. B]
Given
k and gain
For an inverting amplifier, Gain =
-10
/ k
Then
k
f
. 7
nput bias current

n /
input offset current
n
k
k
. 7
. 7

T
ln [
ln [
]
]
.
Time period
.
46.
.
m secs
[Ans. 0.6]
k
. k
i
d
virtual ground
K
i
at ode
k
oi
i
. ki
. k
ki
ki
. k
ki
. k
ki
ki
. ki
ki
ki
k
th
th
th
Page 420
GATE QUESTION BANK
Analog Circuits
Power Amplifiers
EE - 2007
1.
The input signal Vin shown in the figure is
a 1 KHz square wave voltage that
alternates between +7V and 7V with a
50% duty cycle. Both transistors have the
same current gain, which is large. The
circuit delivers power to the load resistor
RL. What is the efficiency of this circuit for
the given input? Choose the closest
answer.
(A) 46%
(B) 55%
EE - 2009
2.
Transformer and emitter follower can
both be used for impedance matching
at the output of an audio amplifier. The
basic relationship between the input
power Pin and output power Pout in both
the cases is
(A) Pin = Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(B) Pin > Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(C) Pin < Pout for transformer and
Pin = Pout for emitter follower
(D) Pin = Pout for transformer and
Pin < Pout for emitter follower
(C) 63%
(D) 92%

EE
1.
[Ans. C]
load voltage = 6.3 V
So efficiency
2.
[Ans. D]
For emitter follower
th
th
th
Page 421
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Number Systems & Code Conversions

ECE-2006
1.
A new Binary Coded Pentary (BCP)
number system is proposed in which
every digit of a base-5 number is
represented by its corresponding 3-bit
binary code. For example, the base-5
number 24 will be represented by its BCP
code 010100. In this numbering system,
the
BCP
code
100010011001
corresponds to the following number in
base-5 system
(A) 423
(C) 2201
(B) 1324
(D) 4231
2.
The number of product terms in the

minimized sum-of-product expression
obtained through the following K-map is
(where, d denotes dont care states)
1
0
0
1
0
d
0
0
0
0
d
1
1
0
0
1
(A) 2
(C) 4
(B) 3
(D) 5
ECE-2007
3.
X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5-bit
binary numbers represented in twos
complement format. The sum of X and Y
represented in twos complement format
using 6 bits is,
(A) 100111
(C) 000111
(B) 001000
(D) 101001
ECE-2008
4.
The two numbers represented in signed
2s complement form are P = 11101101
and Q = 11100110. If Q is subtracted
from P, the value obtained in signed 2s
complement form is
(A) 100000111
(C) 11111001
(B) 00000111
(D) 111111001
ECE-2014
5.
The number of bytes required to
represent the decimal number 1856357
in packed BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
form is __________.
EE-2007
1.
The octal equivalent of the HEX number
AB.CD is
(A) 253.314
(C) 526.314
(B) 253.632
(D) 526.632
EE-2014
2.
A cascade of three identical modulo-5
counters has an overall modulus of
(A) 5
(C) 125
(B) 25
(D) 625
3.
Which of the following is an invalid state

in an 8-4-2-1 Binary Coded Decimal
counter
(A) 1 0 0 0
(C) 0 0 1 1
(B) 1 0 0 1
(D) 1 1 0 0
IN-2006
1.
A number N is stored in a 4-bit 2s
complement representation as
a3
a2
a1
a0
It is copied into a 6-bit register and after a
few operations, the final bit pattern is
a
a
a
a
a
1
The value of this bit pattern in 2s
complement representation is given in
terms of the original number is N as
(A) 32 a3 + 2N + 1 (C) 2N 1
(B) 32 a3 2N 1
(D) 2N + 1
IN-2008
2.
The result of (45)10 (45)16 expressed in
6-bit 2s complement representation is,
(A) 011000
(C) 101000
(B) 100111
(D) 101001
th
th
th
Page 422
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN-2009
3.
The binary representation of the decimal
number 1.375 is,
(A) 1.111
(C) 1.011
(B) 1.010
(D) 1.001
Digital Circuits
IN-2011
4.
The base of the number
addition operation 24 +
true is
(A) 8
(C)
(B) 7
(D)
system for the

14 = 41 to be
6
5
Answer Keys & Explanations

ECE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[Ans. D]
100 010
4
2
011
3
001
1
[Ans. A]
1
1 byte = 8 bit so
Here d = 7
No. of bits = 28
[Ans. C]
x
= 01110
y
= 11001
)
x y(
= 100111
Carry discard it
00111 in 6 bits will be 000111
[Ans. B]
igned 2 s complement of
P = 11101101
o P = 00010011
igned 2 scomplement of
= 11100110
P
= P (2 s complement of )
= 00010011
11100110
11111001
) = 00000111
2 s complement of (P
byte =
EE
1.
= 3 5= 4
[Ans. B]
Hex number (AB.CD)
1010
1011
1100
1101
For finding its octal number, we add one
zero in both extreme and group 3 bit
together
010
101
011
110
011
010
quivalent octal number 253 632
2.
[Ans. C]
Overall modulus = 5 = 125
3.
[Ans. D]
BCD counter counts up to 1001
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Given number is a a a a in 2s
complement form.
We know that in 2s complement form if
we copy MSB at left of MSB any times the
number remains unchanged.
So a a a a = a a a a a a =
When we left shift a number by 1 bit then
it is multiplied by 2, a a a a a 0 = 2
Now,
a a a a a 0 1=a a a a a 1=2
1

A decimal digit is represented by 4 bit in
BCD format, so for a decimal number with
digits requires 4d bit and
th
th
th
Page 423
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
[Ans. C]
(45)
(45)
= ( 24)
3.
[Ans. C]
0.375 2 = 0.750
0.750 2 = 1.5
1.5 2 = 1.0
Hence answer is 1.011
4.
[Ans. B]
Let the base is x, Here
(24)
(14) = (41)
(4 x
2 x) (4 x
= (4 x
4 + 2x + 4 + x = 4x + 1
x=7
Digital Circuits
= (101000)
1 x)
1 x )
th
th
th
Page 424
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps

ECE-2007
1.
The Boolean expression

be minimized to

(A)

(B)
can
(A) X
(B) Y
(C)
ECE-2014
5.
The Boolean expression (
( ) simplifies to
Consider the Boolean function, F(w, x, y,

z) = wy + xy + xyz + y + xz + .
Which one of the following is the
complete set of essential prime
implicates?
(A)
(C)

(B)
(D)
7.
For an n-variable Boolean function, the

maximum number of prime implicants is
(A) (
)
(C)
(B)
(D) ( )
ECE-2009
2.
If X = 1 in the logic equation
EC/EE/IN -2012
3.
In the sum of
products function
(
) (
), the prime implicants
are
(A)

(B)
(C)

(D)
(C) XY
(D) X+Y
6.
(D)
[X+Z{
( +X ) }] { + ( X + Y)}
=1 then
(A) Y = Z
(C) Z = 1
(D) Z = 0
(B) Y =
)(
EE-2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions1
and 2
The following Karnaugh map represent a
function .
F
YZ
ECE-2013
4.
In the circuit shown below, Q1 has
negligible collector to emitter
saturation voltage and the diode drops
negligible voltage across it under forward
bias. If Vcc is +5 V, X and Y are digital
signals with 0 V as logic 0 and
as logic
1, then the Boolean expression for Z is
X
YZ
0
01
11
10
00
01
11
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
A minimized form of the function is
(A)
(C)0
1
0
1
(B)
(D)
1.
R1
Z
R2
X
00
F
10
0
0
0
Q1
Diode
2.
Which of the following circuits is a

realization of the above function ?
(A) XY
(C) X
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 425
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A)
Digital Circuits
( )
X
F
(A)
Y
Z
(B)
X
(B)
X
F
Y
Z
(C)
X
F
Y
Z
F
(C)
X
Y
Z
(D)
X
4.
The SOP (sum of products) form of a

Boolean function is (0,1,3,7,11), where
inputs are A,B,C,D (A is MSB, and D is
LSB).
The
equivalent
minimized
expression of the function is
)( )(
(A) (
)(
)
)(
)(
(B) (
)(
)
)( )( )
(C) (
)(
)( )(
(D) (
)(
)
F
Y
Z
(D)
Y
X
( )
Y
Z
F
Z
F
EE-2014Y
Z
3.
Which of the following
logic circuits is a
realization of the function F whose
Karnaugh map is shown in figure
( )
( )
IN-2006
1.
Min-term (Sum of Products) expression
for a Boolean function is given as follows.
f(A, B, C) = m (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6) where A is
the MSB and C is the LSB. The minimized
expression for the function is
(A) A + (B C)
(C)
(B C)
(B) (A B) + C
(D)
IN-2007
2.
A logic circuit implements the Boolean
function F = . Y + X . . . It is found that
the input combination X = Y = 1 can
never occur. Taking this into account, a
simplified expression for F, is given by
(C) X + Y
(A) + .
(B) X + Z
(D) Y + X.
th
th
th
Page 426
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
Let X
and Y =
be unsigned
2-bit numbers. The function F = 1 if X > Y
and F = 0 otherwise. The minimized sum
of products expression for F is
(A)
+ . .
+ +
(B)
(C)
+
+
+
. +
(D)
Digital Circuits
IN-2011
6.
For the Boolean expression

,
the
minimized Product of Sum (PoS)
expression is
(
(A)
) (
)
)
(B)
(
) (
(C)
(
)(
)
(D)
IN-2008
4.
The minimum sum of products form of
the Boolean expression
Y =

(A) Y = P +
(B) Y = P
(C) Y = P
(D) Y =
IN-2009
5.
The minimal sum-of-products expression
for the logic function f represented by the
given Karnaugh map is
PQ
RS
00 01 11 10
00 0 1 0 0
01
11
10
(A) QS +
(B)
(C)
+
+
(D)
th
th
th
Page 427
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits

ECE
1.
4.
[Ans. B]
X Y Z
0 0 0
[Ans. D]
K-map corresponding to given Boolean
expression
CD
AB
01
00
00
11
10
1
1
01
11
Comments
Transistor off
diode ON
Transistor off
diode rev biases
Transistor ON
diode rev biases
Transistor ON
diode rev biased
10
So, Y=Z
OR
5.
[Ans. A]
(
)(
6.
2.
[Ans. D]
yz
[Ans. D]
(
wx
))+ [
)]
By putting X = 1
(
*
[
) (
)
))+ [
)]
xz
y
So, P.I. are

y, zx,
3.
[Ans. A]
(
YZ
1
7.
[Ans. D]
Maximum P.I will occurs at condition like
1 1

(
)
So prime implicants are and .
1
1
1
1
1
1
i.e., no grouping at all so

)
So, (
th
th
th
Page 428
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. D]
[Ans. B]
X
01 11 10
F = + YZ
2.
3.
4.
[Ans. D]
From the figure it is clear that, two NAND
and now two
gates generate the
and inputs
AND gates with inputs
Y and Z is used to generate two terms of
SOP form and now OR gate is used to sum
them and generate the F.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
K map
YZ
00
X
0 0
[by consensus theorem]
)(
)(
)(
X
F=Y+X
[Ans. D]
F = 1 if X > Y, so following will be K map
of function F.
00
00
0
01
0
11
0
10
0
01
11
10
F=
4.
00
01
11
10
1 0
F
0
0
1
1
1
0
x
x
10
1
[Ans. C]
From K map
BC
Z
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01 11
0
1
3.
IN
1.
Truth table:
X
Y
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
YZ
00
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
By K map
f = + B + C
=+B C
th
th
th
Page 429
GATE QUESTION BANK

PQ RS
5.
00
00 1
01
0
11
0
10
1
01
11
10
[Ans. A]
PQ
RS
00
Q
S 00
0
6.
Digital Circuits
01
1
11
0
10
0
01
11
10
[Ans. A]
(
)
(
[
)(
[(
)]
(
)
(
)
(
)(
)
(
)(
)
Alternative method:
00
1
01
0
11
0
10
1
)(
th
th
th
Page 430
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Logic Gates
ECE-2007
1.
The Boolean function Y =AB + CD is to be
realized using only 2 input NAND gates.
The minimum number of gates required
is
(A) 2
(C) 4
(B) 3
(D) 5
5.
Match the logic gates in Column A with

their equivalents in Column B.
Column B
Column A
ECE-2008
2.
The logic function implemented by the
following circuit at the terminal OUT is
(A) P NOR Q
(B) P NAND Q
3.
P-2, Q-4, R-1, S-3

P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3
P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
P
Q
Y
R
(A) Two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are

0
(B) Two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are
1
(C) Any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R
is 0
(D) Any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R
is 1
Y
R
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE-2011
6.
The output Y in the circuit below is
always 1 when
(C) P OR Q
(D) P AND Q
Which of the following Boolean

Expressions correctly represents the
relation between P, Q, R and ?
P
Q
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
OUT
P
= (P OR Q)XOR R
= (P AND Q) XOR R
= (P NOR Q) XOR R
= (P XOR Q) XOR R
ECE-2010
4.
For the output F to be 1 in the logic circuit
shown, the input combination should be
A
B
F
C
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
A=1, B=1, C=0

A=1, B=0, C=0
A=0, B=1, C=0
A=0, B=0, C=1
th
th
th
Page 431
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
ECE-2012
7.
In the circuit shown
5 Volts
A
C
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
B
Y
C
10.
A
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4
1024
3
1024
E
2
1024
E
B.
C.
D.
In the circuit shown in the figure, if

the expression for is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
input
S1 S0
0C00H
2C00H
1800H
3800H
0500H
3500H
0800H
2800H
0FFFH, 1C00H
2FFFH, 3C00H
1FFFH, 2800H
3FFFH, 4800H
08FFH, 1500H
38FFH, 5500H
0BFFH, 1800H
2BFFH, 3800H
XOR
1
11
10
01
00
0,
EE-2007
1.
A, B, C and D are input bits, and Y is the
output bit in the XOR gate circuit of the
figure below. Which of the following
statements about the sum S of A, B, C, D
and Y is correct?
A
XOR
B
1024
A15
A.
8 bit data bus
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
y
y
y
y
ECE-2013
8.
There are four chips each of 1024 bytes
connected to a 16 bit address bus as
shown in the figure below. RAMs 1, 2, 3
and 4 respectively are mapped to
addresses
A0 A9
y
y
y
y
1FFFH,
3FFFH
2FFFH,
4FFFH
18FFH,
58FFH
1BFFH,
3BFFH
ECE-2014
9.
The output F in the digital logic circuit
shown in the figure is
C
XOR
D
(A) S is always either zero or odd
(B) S is always either zero or even
(C) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
is even
(D) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
is odd
EE-2009
2.
The complete set of only those Logic
Gates designated as Universal Gates is
(A) NOT, OR and AND Gates
(B) XNOR, NOR and NAND Gate
(C) NOR and NAND Gates
(D) XOR, NOR and NAND Gates
th
th
th
Page 432
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2011
3.
The output Y of the logic circuit given
below is
(A) 1
(B) 0
Digital Circuits
average value of the output voltage as

function of for 0
(A)
( )?
Vav
5V
(C) X
(D)
T/2
IN-2006
1.
All the logic gates in the circuit shown
below have finite propagation delay. The
circuit can be used as a clock generator, if
(B)
Vav
5V
Vav
Y
(C)
Vav
X
(A) X = 0
(B) X = 1
1
T/2
Vav
(C) X = 0 or 1
(D) X = Y
IN-2007
2.
Two square waves of equal period T, but
with a time delay are applied to a digital
circuit whose truth table is shown in the
following figure.
X
Y
Output
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
5V
T/2
(D)
Vav
2.5V
T/2
IN-2009
3.
The diodes in the circuit shown are ideal.
A voltage of 0V represents logic 0 and
+5V represents logic1.The function Z
realized by the circuit for inputs X and Y
is
+ 5V
T/2
Y
1
T/2
The high and the low levels of the output

of the digital circuit are 5 V and 0 V,
respectively. Which one of the following
figures shows the correct variation of the
(C) Z =
(D) Z=
(A) Z=X + Y
(B) Z=XY
th
th
th
Page 433
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN-2010
4.
The logic gate circuit shown in the figure
realizes the function
A
X
(A) XOR
(B) XNOR
(C) Half adder

(D) Full adder
Digital Circuits
EC/EE/IN-2013
5.
A bulb in a staircase has two switches,
one switch being at the ground floor and
the other one at the first floor. The bulb
can be turned ON and also can be turned
OFF by any one of the switch irrespective
of the state of the other switch. The logic
of switching of the bulb resembles
(A) An AND gate
(C) A XOR gate
(B) An OR gate
(D) A NAND gate

ECE
1.
5.
[Ans. D]
P = = = 4
Q = = + = 2
R = A B = A + B = 3
S = A B = AB + = 1
6.
[Ans. B]
The output Y expression in the ckt
(Majority circuit)
So that two or more inputs are 1,
always 1.
[Ans. B]
A
B
AB + CD
C
D
2.
3.
[Ans. D]
When P = Q = 1, then OUT = 1
P = Q = 0, then OUT = 0
P = 0, Q = 1, then OUT = 0
P = 1, Q = 0, then OUT = 0
So, it is AND gate
7.
[Ans. A]
In NMOS circuit
Since & are in parallel so those
represent (
) & is in sense, so it
represents dot operation and the whole
function should be inverted or it is
complementary logic.
So,

(
)
8.
[Ans. D]
For RAM #1
[Ans. D]
X=
;Y=P+Q
Z = XY =
=(
. (P + Q)
)(
4.
[Ans. D]
For 3 input XNOR for output to be one,
two input must be one, and we know that
2- input XOR & XNOR gate are
complementary & hence only 1(1s) will
be generated & C=1 is required
i.e, When A = 0, B = 0 and C = 1,
then F = 1
is
0 0 0
0
0 0
0
ower add
ighest add
0000
1 0 1 1 11
0
So range of add for RAM #1
0 00
0
which is present only in option D
th
th
th
Page 434
GATE QUESTION BANK
9.
10.
[Ans. A]
( )(( )
( )(( )
( )
)
(
)
(
IN
1.
A
B
[Ans. B]
When X = 1, equivalent circuit is
))
Y
This circuits act as clock generator.
[Ans. A]
C
2.
[Ans. C]
When = 0 X and Y will be same and
out-put will be equal to dc of 5V.
(
(
EE
1.
2.
3.
of each other and output will be equal to

dc 0.
AB
When = , X and Y will be complement
A
B
)
) (
[Ans. B]

from the given
diagram. We know that sum of any
number of bits is XOR of all bits.
So
S

S=YY
S = either zero or even because LSB is
zero (always).
[Ans. C]
NOR and NAND are designated as
universal logic gates, because using any
one of them we can implement all the
logic gates.
[Ans. A]
Y= .
X
1
0
0
1
.
Y
Digital Circuits
When increases from 0 to
, O/P will
decrease from 5V to 0V linearly.

3.
[Ans. B]
When any of X or Y is zero, Z = 0. For
X = Y = 1, Z = 1
4.
[Ans. A]
X
y
x
Z= y. y
5.
= y
y =xy
[Ans. C]
When both switches in on position, bulb
is off
When both switches in off position, bulb
is off
Bulb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
It is a XOR gate
1
1
th
th
th
Page 435
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Logic Gate Families

ECE - 2007
1.
The circuit diagram of a standard TTL
NOT gate is shown in the figure. When
Vi = 2.5V, the modes of operation of the
transistors will be
1 4k
4k
Q1
Ignoring the body-effect, the output

voltages at P, Q and R are,
100k
R
2
(A) 4 V, 3 V, 2 V
(B) 5 V, 5 V, 5 V
Q4
D
4.
Q2
(C) 4 V, 4 V, 4 V
(D) 5 V, 4 V, 3 V
The output (Y) of the circuit shown in the

figure is
Q3
1k
-
(A) Q1: reverse active; Q2: normal active;

Q3: saturation; Q4: cut-off
(B) Q1: reverse active; Q2: saturation;
Q3: saturation; Q4: cut-off
(C) Q1: normal active; Q2: cut-off;
Q3: cut-off; Q4: saturation
(D) Q1: saturation; Q2: saturation;
Q3: saturation; Q4: normal active
ECE - 2009
2.
The full forms of the abbreviations TTL
and CMOS in reference of logic families
are
(A) Triple Transistor Logic and Chip
Metal Oxide Semiconductor
(B) Tristate Transistor Logic and Chip
Metal Oxide Semiconductor
(C) Transistor Transistor Logic and
Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
(D) Tristate Transistor Logic and
Complementary Metal Oxide Silicon
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
EE - 2010
1.
The TTL circuit shown in the figure is fed
with the waveform X (also shown). All
gates have equal propagation delay of
10ns. The output Y of the circuit is
x
100 ns
ECE - 2014
3.
In the following circuit employing pass
transistor logic, all NMOS transistors are
identical with a threshold voltage of 1V.
th
th
th
Page 436
GATE QUESTION BANK

X
Digital Circuits
IN - 2007
1.
A CMOS implementation of a logic gate is
shown in the following figure:
5v
(A)
Y
X
Y
PMOS
1
0
NMOS
(B)
Y
The Boolean logic function realized by the

circuit is.
(A) AND
(C) NOR
(B) NAND
(D) OR
1
0
(C)
IN - 2014
2.
The figure is a logic circuit with inputs A
and B and output Y. = + 5 V. The
circuit is of type
(D)
1
0
(A) NOR
(B) AND
th
th
(C) OR
(D) NAND
th
Page 437
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits

ECE
1.
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
reverse active,
saturation
saturation,
2.
[Ans. A]
X
cut off
[Ans. C]
TTL Transistor Transistor Logic
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
1
X
0
3.
[Ans. C]
Suppose all NMOS at saturation
For
1 &
Y=X
4
For
(
IN
1.
1)
(4
[Ans. C]
NOR Gate
(4
2.
[Ans. D]
Given circuit is of the standard 2 input
NAND gate.
4
1
(4
4.
4
4
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is CMOS implementation
If the NMOS is connected in series, then
the output expression is product of each
input with complement to the final
product.
th
th
th
Page 438
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Combinational and Sequential Digital Circuits

ECE - 2006
1.
The point P in the following figure is
stuck-at-1. The output f will be
A
B
1 0 1 1
MSB
LSB
FULL
ADDER
CK
f
0 0 1 1
Shift Registers
Ci
C0
CK
D
(A)
(B)
CK
(C)
(D) A
CLOCK
2.
Two D-flip-flops, as shown below, are to

be connected as a synchronous counter
that goes through the following Q1Q0
sequence
The inputs
and
respectively should
be connected as
(A) S =0, C0= 0

(B) S = 0, C0= 1
ECE - 2007
4.
For the circuit shown, the counter state
(Q1 Q0) follows the sequence
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3.
(C) S = 1, C0= 0
(D) S = 1, C0= 1
and
and
and
and
For the circuit shown in figure below, two

4-bit parallel-in serial-out shift registers
loaded with the data shown are used to
feed the data to a full adder. Initially, all
the flip-flops are in clear state. After
applying two clock pulses, the outputs of
the full adder should be
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5.
The following binary values were applied

to the X and Y inputs of the NAND latch
shown in the figure in the sequence
indicated below:
X=0, Y=1; X=0, Y=0; X=1, Y=1
The corresponding stable P, Q outputs
will be
X
P
Y
th
th
th
Page 439
GATE QUESTION BANK
(A) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=0 or

P=0, Q=1
(B) P=1, Q=0; P=0, Q=1 or P=0, Q=1;
P=0, Q=1
(C) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=0 or
P=0, Q=1
(D) P=1, Q=0; P=1, Q=1; P=1, Q=1
Digital Circuits
CLK
1
CLK
0
T
6.
In the following circuit, X is given by

0
1
1
0
I0
I1
I2
I3
4-to-1
MUX
Y
S1
S0
0
1
1
0
I0
I1
I2
I3
S1
4-to-1
MUX
Y
Which of the following waveforms

correctly represents the output at ?
S0
(A)
1
0
2T
t
1
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
0
4T
t
(D)
(C)
ECE - 2008
7. For the circuit shown in the following
figure,
are inputs to the 4:1
multiplexer. R(MSB) and S are control
bits.
1
0
2T
(D)
1
0
4T
t
9.
For the circuit shown in the figure, D has a

transition from 0 to 1 after CLK changes
from 1 to 0. Assume gate delays to be
negligible
The output Z can be represented by

(A) PQ + P S +
(B) P +PQ +
(C) P + QR +PQRS +
(D) PQ +PQR +P S +
8.

(A) Q goes to 1 at the CLK transition and
stays at 1.
(B) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and
stays at 0.
(C) Q goes to 1 at the CLK transition and
goes to 0 when D goes to 1.
(D) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and
goes to 1 when D goes to 1.
For each of the positive edge triggered

J-K flip flop used in the following figure,
the propagation delay is T.
th
th
th
Page 440
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2009
10. What are the counting states (Q1, Q2) for
the counter shown in the figure below?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
ip
Statement for Linked Answer Question 13

and 14.
Two products are sold from a vending
machine, which has two push buttons
and . When a button is pressed, the
price of the corresponding product is
displayed in a 7-segment display.
If no buttons are pressed is displayed,
signifying s.
If only
is pressed, is disp ayed
signifying s.
If only p are pressed, 5 is disp ayed
signifying s.5
If both
a d
are pressed, E is
displayed, Signifying Err r.
The names of the segments in 7-segment
display, and the glow of the display for
5 a d E are sh w be w.
ip
11, 10, 00, 11, 10 . . . . .

01, 10, 11, 00, 01 . . . . .
00, 11, 01, 10, 00, . . . . .
01, 10, 00, 01, 10 . . . . . .
Refer to the NAND and NOR latches

shown in the figure. The inputs
for
both the latches are first made (0, 1) and
then, after a few seconds, made (1, 1). The
corresponding stable outputs (
) are
P1
Q1 P 1
Digital Circuits
a
f
Q1
b
c
d
P2
Q2 P 2
(A) NAND : first (0, 1) then (0, 1)

NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0)
(B) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0)
(C) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0)
(D) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 1)
12.
What are the minimum number of

2 to. 1 multiplexers required to
generate a
2-input AND gate and a 2-input Ex-OR
gate?
(A) 1 and 2
(C) 1 and 1
(B) 1 and 3
(D) 2 and 2
Q2
Consider
(i) Push Button pressed/not Pressed in a
equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively.
(ii) A segment glowing / not glowing in the
display is equivalent to logic 1/0
respectively.
13.
If segment a to g are considered as

functions of
and
, then which are of
the following is correct?
(A) g
d c e
(B) g
d c e
(C) g
e b c
(D) g
e b c
14.
What are the minimum numbers of NOT

gates and 2-input OR gates required to
design the logic of the driver for this
7-segment display?
(A)
a d
(B)
a d
(C)
a d
(D)
a d
th
th
th
Page 441
GATE QUESTION BANK
ECE - 2010
15. The Boolean function realized by the logic
circuit shown is
Data
Digital Circuits
Clock
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MUX
19.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
16.
5
5
5
cha ged fr
t
cha ged fr
t
changed in either direction
not changed
The logic function implemented by the

circuit below is (ground implies a logic

MUX
Assuming that all flips flops are in reset

condition initially, the count sequence
observed at
in the circuit shown is
utput
(A) F = AND(P, Q)
(B) F = OR(P, Q)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2014
20. Five JK flip-flops are cascaded to form the
circuit shown in Figure. Clock pulses at a
frequency of 1 MHz are applied as shown.
The frequency (in kHz) of the waveform
at Q3 is _____.
ECE - 2011
17. Two D flip flops are connected as a
synchronous counter that goes through
the
following
sequence
The connections to the inputs
are
(A)
and
(C) F = XNOR(P, Q)
(D) F = XOR(P, Q)
21.
The digital logic shown in the figure

satisfies the given state diagram when Q1
is connected to input A of the XOR gate.
(B)
(C)
(D)
18.
When the output Y in the circuit below is

it i p ies that data has
th
th
th
Page 442
GATE QUESTION BANK
Suppose the XOR gate is replaced by an

XNOR gate. Which one of the following
options preserves the state diagram?
(A) Input A is connected to
(B) Input A is connected to
(C) Input A is connected to
complemented
(D) Input A is connected to
22.
23.
Digital Circuits
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
and S is
24.
In a half-subtractor circuit with X and Y as

inputs, the Borrow (M) and Difference
(N = X Y) are given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
In the circuit shown, choose the correct
timing diagram of the output (y) from the
given waveforms
a d
.
The outputs of the two flip-flops Q1, Q2 in

the figure shown are initialized to 0, 0.
The sequence generated at Q1 upon
application of clock signal is
(A)
(B)
25.
(C)
(D)
The circuit shown in the figure is a

E
atch
atch
utput y
(A) Toggle Flip Flop

(B) JK Flip Flop
(C) SR Latch
(D) Master-Slave D Flip Flop
th
th
th
Page 443
GATE QUESTION BANK
26.
Digital Circuits
Consider the multiplexer based logic

circuit shown in the figure.
Which one of the following Boolean

functions is realized by the circuit?

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
27.
In the circuit shown, W and Y are MSBs of

the control inputs. The output F is given
by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
28.
29.
If X and Y are inputs and the Difference

(D = X Y) and the Borrow (B) are the
outputs, which one of the following
diagrams implements a half-subractor?
An 8-to-1 multiplexer is used to

implement a logical function as shown
in the figure. The output Y is given by
30.
th
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
A 16-bit ripple carry adder is realized

using 16 identical full adders (FA) as
shown in the figure. The carrypropagation delay of each FA is 12 ns and
the sum-propagation delay of each FA is
15 ns. The worst case delay (in ns) of this
16-bit adder will be __________
th
th
Page 444
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
EE - 2011
3.
A two-bit counter circuit is shown below.
EE - 2006
1.
A 4 1 MUX is used to implement a 3
input Boolean function as shown in figure.
The
Boolean
Function
F(A,B,C)
implemented is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
If the state
of the counter at the
clock time t is the the state
of the counter at t
(after three clock
cycles) will be
(A) 00
(C) 10
(B) 01
(D) 11
F (A, B, C)
CLK
EE - 2013
4.
The clock frequency applied to the digital
circuit show in the figure blow is 1 kHz. If
the initial state of the output Q of the flip
f p is the the freque cy f the
output wavefrom Q in kHz is
(1,2,4,6)
(1,2,6)
(2,4,5,6)
(1,5,6)
EE - 2008
2.
A 3 line to 8 line decoder, with active low
outputs, is used to implement a
3 variable Boolean function as shown in
the figure.
CLK
3L x 8L Decoder
z
y
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.5
F
The simplified form of Boolean function

p e e ted i r duct f
u f r wi be
(A) (X + Z). ( ). (Y + Z)
(B) ( ). (X + Y + Z). ( ).
(C) ( + Z). ( + Y + Z). (X + + Z).
(X +Y + )
). (X + + ).
(D) (
. (
(
)
>
(C) 1
(D) 2
EE - 2014
5.
A state diagram of a logic gate which
exhibits a delay in the output is shown in
the figure, where X is the d t care
condition, and Q is the output
representing the state.
The logic gate represented by the state

diagram is
(A) XOR
(C) AND
(B) OR
(D) NAND
th
th
th
Page 445
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
Digital Circuits
A 3-bit gray counter is used to control the

output of the multiplexer as shown in the
figure. The initial state of the counter is
. The output is pulled high. The
output of the circuit follows the sequence
-bit gray
c u ter
f ip f p
8.
Two monoshot multivibrators, one

positive edge triggered ( ) and another
negative edge triggered ( ), are
connected as shown in figure
utput
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
7.
A JK flip flop can be implemented by T

flip-flops.
Identify
the
correct
implementation.
The monoshots a d
when triggered
produce pulses of width
a d
respectively, where
. The steady
state output voltage
of the circuit is
f ip f p
t
f ip f p
f ip f p
th
th
th
Page 446
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2006
1.
Given that the initial state (Q1Q0) is 00,
the counting sequence of the counter
shown in the following figure is, Q1Q0 =
Digital Circuits
IN - 2007
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3 & 4
Consider the circuit shown in the following
figure.
J0
J1
Q1
CLK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
K0
00
00
00
00
11
01
11
10
01
11
10
01
10
10
01
11
00
00
00
00
A combinational circuit using a 8-to-1

multiplexer is shown in the following
figure. The minimized expression for the
output (Z) is
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
(MSB)
The correct input-output relationship

between Y and ( , ) is
(A) Y= +
(C) Y=
(B) Y=
(D) Y=
4.
The
flip-flops are initialized

=000. After 1 clock cycle,
is equal to
(A) 011
(C) 100
(B) 010
(D) 101
5.
A sequential circuit is shown in the figure

below. Let the state of the circuit be
encoded as
. he
tati
implies that state Y is reachable from
state X in a finite number of clock
transitions.
Y
Z
MUX
A
B
C
Select Inputs

(A)
(B) C (A + B)
3.
(LSB)
(C)
(D) + AB
to
QB
QA
CLK
TA
CLK
Q
TB
CLK
Identify the INCORRECT statement.

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 447
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
A MUX circuit shown in the figure below

implements a logic function
. The
correct expression for is
Z
1
MUX out
9.
The output F of the multiplexer circuit

shown below expressed in terms of the
inputs P, Q and R is
F1
I0
I1
4
0
S
Digital Circuits
I2
I3
1
MUX out
F0
0
Y
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A) ()
)
(B) (

+Z
(C)
(D)
IN - 2008
&8
Consider the counter circuit shown
below.
10.
1 MUX
S1
S0
F=PQR
F = PQ + QR + RP
F = (P Q) R
F = (P Q)
The inverters in the ring oscillator circuit

shown below are identical. If the output
waveform has a frequency of 10 MHz, the
propagation delay of each inverter is
Output
J Q
Q0
J Q
Q1
Q2
Clock
KCLR
KCLR
KCLR
J Q Q3
(A) 5 ns
(B) 10 ns
K CLR
IN - 2009
11. The figure below shows a 3-bit ripple
counter, with
as the MSB. The flipflops are rising-edge triggered. The
counting direction is
8.
1
Clock
7.
(C) 20 ns
(D) 50 ns
In the above figure, Y can be expressed as

(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CLK
1
Q1
CLK
CLK
(A) always down

(B) always up
(C) up or down depending on the initial
state of
only
(D) up or down depending on the initial
states of
and
The above circuit is a

(A) Mod 8 Counter
(B) Mod 9 Counter
(C) Mod 10 Counter
(D) Mod 11 Counter
th
th
th
Page 448
Q2
GATE QUESTION BANK
12.
In the figure shown, the initial state of Q is

0. The output is observed after the
application of each clock pulse. The
output sequence at Q is
1
CLK
In this circuit, the race around

(A) Does not occur
(B) Occurs when CLK = 0
(C) Occurs when CLK = 1 and A =B =1
(D) Occurs when clk = 1 and A = B = 0
(A) 0 0 0 0 . . .
(B) 1 0 1 0 . . .
(C) 1 1 1 1 . . .
(D) 1 0 0 0 . . .
16.
IN - 2011
13. The circuit below shows as up/down
counter working with a decoder and a
flip-flop. Preset and clear of the flip-flop
are asynchronous active-low inputs
Consider the given circuit
CLOCK
15.
Digital Circuits
The state transition diagram for the logic

circuit shown is
e ect
3 to 8 Decoder
C
reset
Q
Flip-Flop
Clock
c ear
Count
Down
A(L.SB)
Up/down Counter
Count Up
Clock
Assuming that the initial value of counter

output (
as zero, the counter
output in decimal for 12 clock cycles are
(A) 0,1,2,3,4,4,3,2,1,1,2,3,4,
(B) 0,1,2,3,4,5,0,1,2,3,4,5,0,
(C) 0,1,2,3,4,5,5,4,3,2,1,0,1
(D) 0,1,2,3,4,5,4,3,2,1,0,1,2
ECE/EE/IN - 2012
14. The output Y of a 2-bit comparator is logic
1 whenever the 2-bit input A is greater
than the 2-bit input B.
The number of combinations for which
the output is logic 1, is
(A) 4
(C) 8
(B) 6
(D) 10
th
th
th
Page 449
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN - 2013
17. The digital circuit shown below uses two
negative edge- triggered D flip- flops.
Assuming initial condition of
and
as zero, the ouput
of this circuit is
D1
D0
D-Flip-flop
D-Flip-flop
Digital Circuits
IN - 2014
18. Frequency of an analog periodic signal in
the range of 5 kHz - 10 kHz is to be
measured with a resolution of 100Hz by
measuring its period with a counter.
Assuming negligible signal and transition
delays the minimum clock frequency and
minimum number of bits in the counter
needed, respectively, are:
(A) 1 MHz, 10-bits
(B) 10 MHz, 10-bits
(C) 1 MHz, 8-bits
(D) 10MHz, 8-bits
Clock
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
00, 01, 10, 11,

clock
00, 01, 11, 10,
00, 11, 10, 01,
00, 01, 11, 11,

ECE
1.
S = 1,
[Ans. D]
When P is stuck at 1, f = A
4.
[Ans. B]
The i/p to first F/F
=
The i/p to second F/F
=
C
(
2.
0
0
1
1
3.
[Ans. A]
Present State
So
,C=1
0
1
1
0
[(
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
5.
[Ans. C]
When X = 0, Y = 1 then P = 1 and Q = 0
X = 0, Y = 0 then P = 1 and Q = 1
X = 1, Y = 1 then P = 0 and Q = 1 or
P = 1 and Q = 0
6.
[Ans. A]
Let the output of first MUX is Y
Y = B + A = A B
and
[Ans. D]
Before clock pulse S = C = 0
After first clock pulse A = B = 1 So
S = 0,
C=1
After second clock pulse A = B = 1 So
(initially
at rest)
1st
0 0 1 1
clk
2nd 1 1 0 0
3rd
0 0 0 0
So sequence generated
00, 01, 10, 00
Next State
0
1
1
0
)]
th
th
th
Page 450
GATE QUESTION BANK
X=
So X = A B C

i.e,
7.
So sequence is (00, 11, 10, 00, 11) or

..
[Ans. A]
(
ts
11.
[Ans. C]
For NAND latch, when (
) are (0, 1),
(
) will be (1, 0) and when (
)
are (1, 1), (
) will be (1, 0).
For NOR latch, when (
) are (0, 1),
(
) will be (1, 0) and when (
)
are (1, 1), (
) will be (0, 0).
12.
[Ans. A]
ap
PQ
RS
00
00
01
11 10
1
01
11
10
Digital Circuits

SP
O
Y = AB
PQ
So
Now only option (A) has two similar
terms, we can say that option A is not
most simplified version of Z it can be
obtained as
A
B
Y=A B
1
PQ
RS
11
10
01
11
10
00
00
01
0
A
PS
PQ
So option A is correct choice

8.
9.
10.
13.
[Ans. B]
At
clock will be divide by 4 and will
have 2 T delay w.r.t clock.
[Ans. C]
Initially, when clk is high and D is low,
Q = 0 or 1,
When clk goes low and D is also low ,
Q = 1,
When clk is low and D goes high, Q = 0.
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
14.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
g
d
[Ans. A]
0
1
0
1
1
[Ans. B]
.
.
c e

[Ans. D]
gates
gates
th
th
th
Page 451
GATE QUESTION BANK
15.
[Ans. D]
21.
[Ans. D]
If one input of the gate is kept constant,
and A is interchanged with , an XNOR
gate acts as XOR gate.
22.
[Ans. C]
In half subtractor
Difference x y xy
x y
b rr w x y
x
y
Borrow
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
x.
5
16.
[Ans. D]
Initially
0
After first clk
1
nd
After 2 clk
1
After 3rdclk
0
So
. . . . . ..
17.
[Ans. D]
Q(present)
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
Digital Circuits
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
23.
Difference
0
1
1
0
[Ans. C]
Q (next)
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
18.
19.
20.
[Ans. A]
Given Y=1, this implies
Both the output of D- flip flop
should be 1 i.e, input at first flip flop is 1
and for output of 2nd flip flop to be 1,
inverted output of first flip should be 1 in
previous clock, for which input must be 0
so data is changing from 0 to 1.
[Ans. D]
From the CKT
0 is connected to
&
d is c
ected t
So wave form
24.
[Ans. *] Range 62.4 to 62.6

.5
[Ans. D]
This is a figure of Johnson counter
So
0
1
1
0
0
1
So =
and
is correct
0
0
1
1
0
0
z
th
th
th
Page 452
GATE QUESTION BANK
25.
[Ans. D]
26.
[Ans. D]
2.
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
[
3.
[Ans. C]
Clock
Input
Output
utput f first
et
utput f sec d
Initial
state
1
2
3
28.
[Ans. C]

CLK
[Ans. A]
30.
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. B]
From above Fig.
.
]
[
ecause
a ways
29.
0
1
0
4.
27.
1
0
1
>
a ways
[Ans. *] Range 194.9 to 195.1

Worst case propagation delay
= carry propagation delay of 15FA stages
+ max(carry Pd & sum Pd of last FA
stage)
5
5
5 s
i put
a ways
r f ip flop if input is =1 then output
will be complemented at the time of
triggering.
CLK
[Ans. A]
2T
F (A, B, C)=
th
.5 f
.5
.5 z
th
th
Page 453
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
[Ans. D]
IN
1.
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
Clock
(
1
1
1
1
1
gate
6.
[Ans. A]
Gray code output
o/p
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
When
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
2.
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. C]
)
)(
utput
e ect i puts
3.
[Ans. B]
Y=
[Ans. A]
T-FF to JKFF is given by eq
4.
[Ans. B]
a d
This is implemented on options [A]

8.
1
0
1
0
utput
7.
1
1
1
1
1
[Ans. C]
Let
is initially high. Since
is from
will be high for
time. The
waveform is shown below:
So initially
it means
so after one clock cycle
will be 010.
5.
[Ans. D]
01
10, both
both will toggle.
= 1 so
and
6.
[Ans. B]
7.
[Ans. A]
Y =
.
trigger
t
=
=
t
8.
[Ans. C]
Whenever Y=1, then clear input of all the
s receives a d utputs f the
th
th
th
Page 454
GATE QUESTION BANK
counter will be reset. When count = 1010,

Y=1 and counter will be reset.
Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
9.
10.
So sequence is 0,1,2,3,4,5,4,3,2,1,0,1,2.
14.
[Ans. B]
Let A1 A0 be the bits of number A and
B1B0 be the bits of number B and let Y be
the output
A1
A0
B1
B0
Y
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
A1
A0
B1
B0
Y
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
From the truth table we see that the
u ber f ti es bec es is
15.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. A]
(
[Ans. B]
f
t
where N no. of inverters
and t - Propagation delay of each, so
t
sec
11.
[Ans. A]
Since triggering in positive edge
triggering & Q of pervious flip flop is
input to next hence always down
12.
[Ans. C]
Digital Circuits
Also the truth table
1
1
13.
[Ans. D]
Initially Q=0 and count up ( =1) is active
so it started counting up and when it
reaches to 5 then decoder output at pin 5
becomes 0 and preset will be active and it
will set Q and it will make the counter
mode down and count becomes 4, then 3
then 2 then 1 then 0, as soon as it reaches
0, decoder output at pin 0 is low and clear
is active and Q goes to 0 and = 1 so up is
active a d it c u ts
next
= .
.
= A.CLK + Q
next = A.CLK +
If CLK = 1 and A and B = 1
then
} No race around
If CLK = 1 and A = B = 0
} No race around
th
th
th
Page 455
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Thus race around does not occur in the

circuit
16.
[Ans. D]
State table
A
From State table

A=O
Q=O
Q=1
A=O
A=1
A=1
17.
[Ans. B]
State table
Present
state
Next
state
0
0 0
0
1 1
1
1 1
1
0 0
00, 01, 11, 10, 00
18.
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. C]
i c c freque cy
z
5
i
th
th
th
Page 456
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
AD /DA Convertor
ECE-2006
1.
A 4-bit D/A converter is connected to a
free-running 3-bit UP counter, as shown
in the following figure. Which of the
following waveforms will be observed at
V 0?
3.
D3
D2
D1
D0
Q1
Q0
Clock 3-bit
Counter
IDEAL
Vo
1k
(C) 3.125 V
(D) 6.250 V
ECE-2008
Statement for linked Answer Questions 4
and 5
In the following circuit, the comparator
output is logic 1 if
and is logic
0otherwise. The D/A conversion is
done as per the relation
=
2
Volts, where
(MSB),
and
(LSB) are the
counter outputs.
The counter starts from the clear state.
1k
Q2
The voltage Vo is
(A) 0.781 V
(B) 1.562 V
D/A
Convertor
In the figure shown above, the ground has

been shown by the symbol
(A)
4 bit D/A
converter
+5V
Binary
to
BCD
(B)
2 Digit
LED
Display
4bit
Upcounter
= 6.2
Clock
(C)
4.
The stable reading of the LED displays is

(A) 06
(C) 12
(B) 07
(D) 13
5.
The magnitude of the error between

and
at steady state in volts is
(A) 0.2
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.3
(D) 1.0
(D)
ECE-2007
and 3
In the Digital-to-Analog converter circuit
shown in the figure below,
= 10 V and
R = 10k.
R
2R
V
R
2R
2R
2R
2R
R
+
2.
The current I is
(A) 31.25 A
(B) 62.5 A
V0
ECE-2011
6.
The output of a 3 stage Johnson
(twisted ring) counter is fed to a
digital to analog (D/A) converter as
shown in the figure below. Assume all
states of the counter to be unset initially.
The waveform which represents the D/A
converter output is
(C) 125 A
(D) 250 A
th
th
th
Page 457
GATE QUESTION BANK
(B) droop rate decreases and acquisition

time increases
(C) droop rate increases and acquisition
time decreases
(D) droop rate increases and acquisition
time increases
D/A
Converter
D
Clock
Johnson
Counter
(A)
Digital Circuits
EE-2006
1.
A student has made a 3 bit binary down
counter and connected to the R 2R
ladder type DAC [Gain = ( 1 K/2R)] as
shown in figure to generate a staircase
waveform.
The output achieved is
different as shown in figure. What could
be the possible cause of this error?
(B)
2R
1kHz
clock
2R
2R
2R
1k
+12V
Vo
12V
Counter
10k
7
6
(C)
5
4
3
2
1
0
ms
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A) The resistance values are incorrect

(B) The counter is not working properly
(C) The connection from the counter to
DAC is not proper
(D) The R and 2R resistances are
interchanged
(D)
ECE-2014
7.
For a given sample-and-hold circuit, if the
value of the hold capacitor is increased,
then
(A) droop rate decreases and acquisition
time decreases
IN-2006
An R-2R ladder type DAC is shown below.
If a switch status is 0 0 is applied and if
a switch status is 1 5 is applied to the
corresponding terminal of the DAC.
th
th
th
Page 458
GATE QUESTION BANK

R
R
2R
2R
2R
1.5V will produce a digital output of

(A) 90H
(C) 9BH
(B) 96H
(D) A0H
+
5V
1.
What is the output voltage (V0) for the

switch status S0=0,S1=1,S2=1?
(A)
(B)
2.
(C)
(D)
.
.
Digital Circuits
IN - 2010
5.
A 4-bit successive approximation type
ADC has a full scale value of 15V. The
sequence of the states, the SAR will
traverse, for the conversion of an input of
8.15V is
(A)
( )
What is the step size of the DAC?

(A) 0.125 V
(C) 0.625 V
(B) 0.525 V
(D) 0.75 V
IN-2007
3.
The circuit shown in the figure below
works as a 2-bit analog to digital
converter for 0
3 .
3V
0.5k
(C)
tart
conversion
tart
conversion
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
End
conversion
End
conversion
(D)
tart
conversion
tart
conversion
1.0k
1.0k
Digital
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
Circuit
0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
End
conversion
End
conversion
0.5k
The MSB of the output , expressed as a

Boolean function of the inputs , , , is
given by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
+
IN-2009
4.
An 8- it ADC with 2s complement
output, has a nominal input range of 2V
to +2V. It generates a digital code of 00H
for an analog input in the range
7.8125mV to +7.8125mV. An input of
IN-2014
6.
A thermopile is constructed using 10
junctions
of
Chromel-Constantan
(sensitivity 60 /C for each junction)
connected in series. The output is fed to
an amplifier having an infinite input
impedance and a gain of 10. The output
from the amplifier is acquired using a
th
th
th
Page 459
GATE QUESTION BANK
10-bit ADC, with reference voltage of 5 V.

The resolution of this system in units of
C is _________
7.
DAC output and input to be positive, the

maximum error in conversion of the
analog sample value is:
Input
Comparator
ample
An N-bit ADC has an analog reference

voltage V. Assuming zero mean and
uniform distribution of the quantization
error, the quantization noise power will
be:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Digital Circuits
tart of conversion
( C)
Control
logic
l
l
R 2R
adder
DAC
Clock
p
counter
l
utpt uffer
8.
Reset l
The circuit in the figure represents a

counter-based unipolar ADC. When SOC is
asserted the counter is reset and clock is
enabled so that the counter counts up and
the DAC output grows. When the DAC
output exceeds the input sample value,
the comparator switches from logic 0 to
logic 1, disabling the clock and enabling
the output buffer by asserting EOC.
Assuming all components to be ideal,
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
Ena le
End of
Conversion
l
(E C)
directly proportional to
inversely proportional to
l
independent of
directly proportional to
frequency
th
clock
Page 460
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits

ECE
1.
2.
7.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. B]
The i/p to D/A will be 0000, 0001, 0010,
0011, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011. So O/P will
be in B waveform
In a capacitor drop rate in given an

we know i = C
dv 1
dt C
From the above relation it is clear that if
capacitor value increases then the drop
rate decreases because of inversion
relation.
C
Also = C = it t =
t c
i
From the above relation, it is clear that if
capacitor value increases acquisition time
also increases as of proportionality
relation
[Ans. B]
I
2
I
V
2R
I
4
2R
I
8 R
I
16
2R
2R
2R
I
16
I
4
R
V0
Due to virtual ground, node A can be

considered as ground so
= 10K
So I =
So I =
3.
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
=
4.
= 1mA
= 62.5 A
I
R[
4
I
]=
16
[Ans. C]
Sequence generated is
7111
0000
3011
1001
5101
2010
1001
3011
6110
Instead of
4100
2010
5101
4100
6110
0000
7111
Simply just by observation we can say
that error is because of lack of proper
connections
3.125
[Ans. D]
=
volts
Counter will stop when VDAC> 6.2 volt

So counter will stop when
= 1101
o ED will display 1101 i.e CD 13
5.
6.
[Ans. B]
In steady state
= 0.5
6.5V
So error = 6.5 6.2 = 0.3V
dv
dt
4=
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
At switch status
=0
=
=1
[Ans. A]
For the Johnson counter sequence
D D D
0 0 0
0
1 0 0
4
1 1 0
6
1 1 1
7
0 1 1
3
0 0 1
1
0 0 0
0
2R
2R
2R
2R
Thevenin s equivalent
th
th
th
Page 461
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
i.e 2V 128
2R
2R
1.5V
2R
2R
5
2
2R
5
5.
[Ans. A]
By characteristics of SAR ADC.
6.
[Ans. * ] Range 0.800 to 0.833

For 10 junctions the thermopile voltage
will be 600 = 0.6 m
When it measured through amplifier of
gain 10, its voltage will be 6 mV. So, the
thermopile sensitivity after amplification
is 0.006 V/ C
Which will be input to ADC of resolution
=
/2
1
ADC resolution = 5/1023=0.00488
In terms of temperature, the resolution is
0.00488/0.006=0.814
7.
[Ans. A]
8.
[Ans. A]
Maximum error is equal to step size
which is directly proportional to
.
2.
15
2
[Ans. C]
Step size =
3.
4.
= = 0.625
[Ans. B]
Truth table of ADC is
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
=
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
128 = 96
It is 96 for 1.5 analog input, while is

given an 96 = 2 complement of +96
= 2s complement of 01100000
=10100000
= A0H
[Ans. D]
8 it ADC o/p is in 2s complement form
i.e it represents 127
128
i/p voltage Range = 2 to 2
aximum Error =
th
th
th
Page 462
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Semiconductor Memory
ECE-2014
1.
If WL is the Word Line and BL is the Bit
Line, an SRAM cell is shown in
EE-2009
1.
The increasing order of speed of data
access for the following devices is
i. Cache Memory
ii. CDROM
iii. Dynamic RAM
iv. Processor Registers
v. Magnetic Tape
(A) (v), (ii), (iii), (iv), (i )
(B) (v), (ii), (iii), (i), (iv)
(C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv), (v)
(D) (v), ( ii), (i) , (iii), (iv)
IN-2011
1. An
bit RAM is interfaced to an 8085
microprocessor. In a fully decoded Scheme
if the address of the last memory location
of this RAM is 4FFFH, the address of the
first memory location of the RAM will be,
(A) 1000 H
(C) 3000 H
(B) 2000 H
(D) 4000 H
th
th
th
Page 463
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits

ECE
1.
EE
1.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
For an SRAM construction four MOSFETs
are required (2-PMOS and 2-NMOS) with
interchanged outputs connected to each
CMOS inverter. So option (B) is correct.
[Ans. B]
Processor registers has highest speed.
Followed by cache memory then dynamic
ram (slower than static ram because of
refreshing required)
[Ans. C]
Capacity of chip
= last memory address First memory
address+1
= last memory address Capacity of chip+1
= 4FFFH 2000H+1
=3000H
th
th
th
Page 464
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits
Microprocessors
ECE-2006
1.
An I/O peripheral device shown in
Figure (b) below is to be interfaced to an
8085 microprocessor. To select the I/O
device in the I/O address range D4 H - D7
H, its chip-select () should be
connected to the output of the decoder
shown in Figure (a) below.
A2
LSB
A3
3 8
Decoder
A4
MSB
3.
In the circuit shown, the device connected

to Y5 can have address in the range
o de ice
hip e ec
o
decode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(A) 2000 20FF

(B) 2D00 2DFF
A7
A6
Data
Fig.
(a)
I/O
Peripheral
A1
A0
Fig. (b)
(A) output 7
(B) output 5
(C) 2E00 2EFF

(D) FD00 FDFF
(C) output 2
(D) output 0
ECE-2010
2.
For the 8085 assembly language program
given below, the content of the
accumulator after the execution of the
program is
3000
MVI A, 45H
3002
MOV B, A
3003
STC
3004
CMC
3005
RAR
3006
XRA B
(A) 00H
(C) 67H
(B) 45H
(D) E7H
ECE-2011
4.
An 8085 assembly language program is
given below. Assume that the carry flag is
initially unset. The content of the
accumulator after the execution of the
program is
MVI A, 07H
RLC
MOV B, A
RLC
RLC
ADD B
RRC
(A) 8CH
(B) 64H
(C) 23H
(D) 15H
ECE-2014
5.
For the 8085 microprocessor, the
interfacing circuit to input 8-bit digital
data (
) from an external device
is shown in the figure. The instruction for
correct data transfer is
th
th
th
Page 465
GATE QUESTION BANK

o
ecode
(A) MVI A, F8H

(B) IN F8H
6.
(C) OUT F8H

(D) LDA F8F8H
mic op oce o execu e

H wi h a ing add e
oca ion
1FFEH (STA copies the contents of the
accumulator to the 16-bit address
location). While the instruction is fetched
and executed, the sequence of values
written at the address pins
is
(A) 1FH, 1FH, 20H, 12H
(B) 1FH, FEH, 1FH, FFH, 12H
(C) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 12H
(D) 1FH, 1FH, 12H, 20H, 12H
EE-2006
1.
In an 8085 microprocessor based system,
it is desired to increment the contents of
memory location whose address is
available in (D, E) register pair and store
the result in same location. The sequence
of instructions is
(A) XCH G
(C) INXD
INRM
XCH G
(B) XCH G
(D) INRM
INXH
XCH G
2.
How many times DCR L instruction will

be executed?
(A) 255
(C) 65025
(B) 510
(D) 65279
e ice
aa u
igi a
inpu
Digital Circuits
A software delay subroutine is written as

given below:
DELAY: MVI H, 255 D
MVI L, 255 D
LOOP:
DCR L
JNZ LOOP
DCR H
JNZ LOOP
EE-2008
3.
The contents (in Hexadecimal) of some of
the memory location in an 8085A based
system are given below
Address Contents
..
..
26FE
00
26FF
01
2700
02
2701
03
2702
04
..
..
The contents of stack pointer (SP),
Program counter (PC) and (H, L) are
2700H, 2100H and 0000H respectively,
when the following sequence of
instruction are executed,
2100 H: DAD SP
2101 H: PCHL
The contents of (SP) and (PC) at the end
of execution will be
(A) PC = 2102 H, SP = 2700 H
(B) PC = 2700 H, SP = 2700 H
(C) PC = 2800 H, SP = 26 FE H
(D) PC = 2A02 H, SP= 2702 H
EE-2009
4.
In an 8085 microprocessor, the contents
of the Accumulator, after the following
instructions are executed will become
XRA A
MVI B, F0H
SUB B
(A) 01 H
(C) F0 H
(B) 0F H
(D) 10 H
EE-2010
5.
hen a
dd in uc ion i
executed, the CPU carries out the
following
sequential
operations
internally:
th
th
th
Page 466
GATE QUESTION BANK
Note:
(R) means content of register R
((R)) means content of memory location
pointed to by R
PC means Program Counter
SP means Stack Pointer
(A) (SP) incremented
(PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC)
(B) (PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC)
(SP) incremented
(C) (PC) Addr
(SP) incremented
((SP)) (PC)
(D) ((SP)) (PC)
(SP) incremented
(PC) Addr
EE-2011
6.
A portion of the main program to call a
subroutine SUB in an 8085 environment
is given below.
:
:
LXI D, DISP
LP: CALL SUB
:
:
It is desired that control be returned to
LP + DISP + 3 when the RET instruction
is executed in the subroutine. The set of
instructions that precede the RET
instruction in the subroutine are
(A) POP D
(C) POP H
DAD H
DAD D
PUSH D
PUSH H
(B) POP H
DAD D
INX H
INX H
INX H
PUSH H
(D) XTHL
INXD
INX D
INX D
XTHL
Digital Circuits
EE-2014
7.
An output device is interfaced with 8-bit
microprocessor 8085A. The interfacing
circuit is shown in figure
ecode
u pu
u pu
e ice
The interfacing circuit makes use of 3

Line to 8 Line decoder having 3 enable
The address of the device
lines
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
8.
In an 8085 microprocessor, the following

program is executed
Address location - Instruction
2000H XRA A
2001H MVI B, 04H
2003H MVI A, 03H
2005H RAR
2006H DCR B
2007H JNZ 2005
200AH HLT
At the end of program, register A contains
(A) 60H
(C) 06H
(B) 30H
(D) 03H
9.
In 8085 microprocessor, the operation

performed by the instruction LHLD
is
(A) H
(B) H
(C) H
(D) H
IN-2006
1.
An 8085 assembly language program is
given as follows. The execution time of
th
th
th
Page 467
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
Digital Circuits
each instruction is given against the

instruction in terms of T-state.
Instruction
T-states
MVI B, 0AH
7T
LOOP:
MVIC, 05H
7T
DCR C
4T
DCR B
4T
JNZ LOOP
10T/7T
The execution time of the program in
terms of T-states is
(A) 247 T
(C) 254 T
(B) 250 T
(D) 257 T
4.
A memory mapped I/O device has an

address of 00F0H. Which of the following
8085 instructions outputs the content of
the accumulator to the I/O device?
(A) LXI H, 00F0H
MOV M, A
(B) LXI H, 00F0H
OUT M
(C) LXI H, 00F0H
OUT F0H
(D) LXI H, 00F0H
MOV A, M
IN-2008
5.
A part of a program written for an 8085
microprocessor is shown below. When
the program execution reaches LOOP2,
the value of register C will be
SUB A
MOV C, A
LOOP1: INR A
DAA
JC LOOP2
JNC LOOP1
LOOP2: NOP
(A) 63H
(C) 99H
(B) 64H
(D) 100H
IN-2007
3.
8-bi igned in ege in comp emen
form are read into the accumulator of an
8085 microprocessor from an I/O port
using the following assembly language
program
segment
with
symbolic
addresses.
BEGIN: INPORT
RAL
JNC
BEGIN
RAR
END:
HLT
This program
(A) Halts upon reading a negative
number
(B) Halts upon reading a positive
number
(C) Halts upon reading a zero
(D) Never halts
A snapshot of the address, data and

control buses of an 8085 microprocessor
executing program is given below:
Address
2020H
Data
24H
Logic high
IO/
Logic high
Logic Low
The assembly language instruction being
executed is
(A) IN 24H
(C) OUT 24H
(B) IN 20H
(D) OUT 20H
6.
A 2k8 bit RAM is interfaced to an 8-bit

microprocessor. If the address of the first
memory location in the RAM is 0800H,
the address of the last memory location
will be
(A) 1000H
(C) 4800H
(B) 0FFFH
(D) 47FFH
IN-2009
7.
The following is an assembly language
program for 8085 microprocessors
Address Instruction Mnemonic
Code
1000H
3E06
MVI A, 06H
1002H
C6 70
ADI 70H
1004H
32 07 10
STA 1007H
1007H
AF
XRA A
1008H
76
HLT
th
th
th
Page 468
GATE QUESTION BANK
When this program halts, the accumulator

contains
(A) 00H
(C) 70H
(B) 06H
(D) 76H
8.
Consider a system consisting of a

microprocessor, memory, and peripheral
devices connected by a common bus.
During
DMA
data
transfer,
the
microprocessor
(A) only reads from the bus
(B) only writes to the bus
(C) both reads from and writes to the
bus
(D) neither reads from nor writes to the
bus
IN-2010
9.
In an 8085 processor, the main program
calls the subroutine SUB1 given below.
When the program returns to the main
program after executing SUB1, the value
in the accumulator is
Address
Opcode Mnemonic
2000
3E 00
SUB1: MVIA,00h
2002
CD 05 20
CALL SUB2
2005
3C
SUB2: INR A
2006
C9
RET
(A) 00
(C) 02
(B) 01
(D) 03
10.
(A) 3000H
(B) 4FFFH
11.
a
a
b
b
b
b
The subroutine SBX given below is

executed by an 8085 processor. The value
in the accumulator immediately after the
execution of the subroutine will be:
SBX: MVI A, 99H
ADI 11H
MOV C, A
RET
(A) 00H
(C) 99H
(B) 11H
(D) AAH
dd e
x
og ammab e
n e up
con o e
aa u
Assuming vectored interrupt, a correct

sequence of operations when a single
external interrupt (Ext INT1) is received
will be :
(A) x
a a ead
(B) x
a a ead
(C) x
dd e
Write
(D) x
aa
ead dd e
ie
(C) AFFFH
(D) C000H
IN-2014
12. A microprocessor accepts external
interrupts (Ext INT) through a
Programmable Interrupt Controller as
A 8-bit DAC is interfaced with a

microprocessor having 16 address lines
(A0...A15) as shown in the adjoining
figure. A possible valid address for this
DAC is
ine o
ine ecode
Digital Circuits
na og
ou pu
th
th
th
Page 469
GATE QUESTION BANK
Digital Circuits

ECE
1.
2.
0100
[Ans. B]
I/O address range D4 D7 H
xx
So,
and
should be.
So, decoder output should be 5.
3.
5.
0111
RLC
1110
MOV B,
A
1110
RLC
1100
RLC
1000
ADD B
A 0000 1110
+
B 0011 1000
That is F8 F8 memory address is selected

So LDA F8F8 [Load accumulator from the
content of memory location F8F8H]
should be the instruction for data transfer
[Ans. B]
Address bits should be as follows:
[Ans. C]
MVI A,
07 H
[Ans. D]
In this figure the chip select
and
will be selected if the memory address
will be
Content of register
A = 45
B = 45
CY =1
CY =0
A = 22
6.
(and for
hey can be he o
2D00 2DFF (Range)
4.
[Ans. C]
MVI A, 45
MOV B, A
STC
CMC
RAR
XRA B
0110
[Ans. A]
STA 1234H is stored as follows
1FFE
Opcode of STA
1FFF
34 H
2000
12H
After this 1234H will be loaded in the
address bus.
So the correct sequence of values at
are 1F, 1F, 20, 12
he
content
of
he
content
of
he
content
of
he
content
of
he
content
of
EE
1.
[Ans. A]
XCHG (HL) (DE)
INR M (HL) = (HL) + 1
So this sequence stores the address into
HL pair and then increment the content of
memory location specified by HL pair.
2.
[Ans. D]
DCR L executed = 255 255 + 255 1
= 65279 times
3.
[Ans. B]
Given, (SP) = 2700H
(PC) = 2100 H
(HL) = 0000H
th
th
th
Page 470
GATE QUESTION BANK
2100 H : DAD SP
(SP) + (HL) (HL)
2700 H + 0000 H = 2700 H stored in HL
pair
2101 H : PCHL : The content of HL are
transferred to (PC)
So now (PC) = 2700H and (SP) also
unchanged
(PC) = 2700 H
(SP) = 2700 H
4.
5.
6.
[Ans. D]
XRA A
MVI B, F0H
SUB B
Output line 2 is selected

So
[Ans. A]
H XRA A
H MVI B,
H
H MVI A,
H
H RAR
B will go
to accumulator
00 F0 = 10
SUB
[Ans. D]
First of all content of PC is loaded into
stack. i.e. address of next instruction to be
executed is loaded onto stack. i.e. SP is
decremented then PC is loaded by
address given in call instruction.
CALL
8.
[Ans. C]
Call take 3 address locations. RET always
returns to LP + 3 location, this stored in
SP. So to return to LP + DISP + 3 we have
to add DISP to SP.
POP H
DAD D
PUSH H
Normal call operation shown.
Digital Circuits
clear accumulator
B= H
A=
Rotate accumulation
to right A = 10000001
Decrement B, B=
ump o
when
z
H
H
DCR B
INZ
2005
200 AH HLT
After 3 rotation
H
9.
[Ans. C]
LHLD instruction loads the value at
memory location specified by the
immediate
Value
in H and L pair register
Value at
will be stored in L register
value of
will be stored in H
register
IN
1.
[Ans. C]
RET
2.
7.
[Ans. A]
Since I/O device is memory mapped I/O
Memory related instructions will be
used for data transfer
[Ans. B]
To enable decoder
th
th
th
Page 471
GATE QUESTION BANK
H
H load the address of
memory in HL pair
load the memory by content
of A
3.
4.
5.
Digital Circuits
6.
[Ans. B]
Starting address 0800H, so last
address = 0800 + 7FF = 0FFFH.
7.
[Ans. A]
Last instruction is XRA A, so accumulator
contents will be 00
8.
[Ans. C]
In DMA transfer of data between source
and destination takes place without any
involvement of microprocessor. During
both in read/write mode.
9.
[Ans. B]
SUB 1: MVI A, 00H
H
CALL SUB 2 program will shift to SUB 2
address location
SUB 2: INR A A = 00H + 01H=001H
RET returned to main program
The contents of Accumulation after
execution of the above SUB 2 is 01H
[Ans. D]
Address 2020H: The contents of lower
and higher address lines are same i.e.
20H. So, this indicates that the technique
is I/O mapped I/O.
Data 24H: This indicates that the content
of accumulator is 24 H, which have to sent
to I/O port.
(Logic High):
high indicates
that this is input/output operation.
(Logic High): logic high indicates
that read operation is inactive.
(Logic Low): logic low indicates
that write operation is active.
So, by observing all the operations the
appropriate instruction is OUT20H.
10.
[Ans. A]
To select 2-4 line decoder, A15 = 0
To select the DAC, b2 should be active, i.e.
A14 = 0 and A13 = 1.
Reset all address lines can be either 0 or
1.
So, address can be
001x xxxx xxxx xxxx
Out of four choices this is satisfied by
3000 H only.
11.
[Ans. D]
Instructions
MVI
A, 99H
ADI
11H
MOV
C,A
[Ans. A]
Execution will go to Loop 2 when A
contain 64H =
, at that time C
contains 63 H.
12.
[Ans. A]
e.g. 01H positive number
After RAL
CY
Accumulator
0
0000 0010 or 00000011
JNC is TRUE and again IN instruction will
load accumulator with same port address,
and microprocessor will go into infinite
loop.
Negative number
after
RAL
CY
Accumulator
1
0000 0001 or 00000000
JNC is false and microprocessor will come
out from the loop.
So, this program halts upon reading a
negative number.
th
Content of register
A = 99
A = 99 + 11 = AAH
C = AAH
[Ans. B]
The correct sequence is external
interrupts occurs at PIC, then it is
transferred to microprocessor, then
interrupt is acknowledge and finally data
is read.
th
th
Page 472
GATE QUESTION BANK
EMT
Electromagnetic Field
ECE - 2007
1.
If C is a closed curve enclosing a surface S,
then the magnetic field intensity , the
Which current distribution leads to this

field?
[Hint: The algebra is trivial in cylindrical
co-ordinates.]
current destiny and the electric flux

destiny are related by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C)
) r
) r
) r
)
)
If a vector field is related to another

vector field through
,which of
5.
the following is true? Note: C and Sc refer

to any closed contour and any surface
whose boundary is C.
(A) .
.
(B) .
(C) .
. .
(D) .
(D)
is a constant)
(B)
A plane wave of wavelength is travelling

in a direction making an angle
with
positive x-axis and
positive y-axis.
The Field of the plane wave can be
represented as (
(A)
6.
Two infinitely long wires carrying current

are as shown in the figure below. One
wire is in the y-z plane and parallel to the
y-axis. The other wire is in the x-y plane
and parallel to the x-axis. Which
components of the resulting magnetic
field are non-zero at the origin?
ECE - 2008
3.
For static electric and magnetic fields in
an inhomogeneous source-free, medium
which of the following represents the
corr ct form of two of Maxw s
equations?
(A) .
(C)
B
B
(B) .
(D)
.B
.B
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE - 2009
4.
A magnetic field in air is measured to be
x
y
B
B (
y
x)
x
y
x
y
th
x, y, z components
x, y components
y, z components
x, z components
th
th
Page 473
GATE QUESTION BANK
EMT
ECE - 2010
7.
If
x a .
shown in the figure is,
xya
over the path
The magnetic field inside the hole is

(A) uniform and depends only on d
(B) uniform and depends only on b
(C) uniform and depends on both b and d
(D) non uniform
(A) 0
(B)
(C) 1
(D)
ECE - 2013
11.
ECE - 2011
8.
Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
volume V. IF r is the position vector of a
point inside S, with the unit normal on
S, the value of the integral r.
is
(A) 3V
(B) 5V
Consider a vector field r . The closed

loop line integral
can be expressed
as
(A) s over the closed surface
bounded by the loop
(B) v over the closed volume
bounded by the loop
(C) v over the open volume
bounded by the loop
(D) ( ) s over the open surface
(C) 10V
(D) 15V
bounded by the loop

ECE - 2012
and 10
An infinitely long uniform solid wire of
radius a carries a uniform dc current of
density .
9.
The magnetic field at a distance r from the

center of the wire is proportional to
(A) r for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a
(B) 0 for r < a and 1/r for r > a
(C) r for r < a and 1/r for r > a
(D) 0 for r < a and 1/r2 for r > a
10.
A hole of radius b (b < a) is now drilled

along the length of the wire at a distance
d from the center of the wire as shown
below.
ECE - 2014
12. In spherical co-ordinates, let a a denote
unit vectors along the , directions.
r
si
cos
r a
And
.
si cos t
r a
m
r
represent the electric and magnetic field
components of the EM wave at large
distances r from a dipole antenna, in free
space. The average power (W) crossing
the hemispherical shell located at
r
m
is _______.
13.
th
xa
ya
za a |r| r
iv r r = ____________
If r
th
th
th
Page 474
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
Given the vector

cos x si y a
si x cos y a
where a a denote unit vectors along x,y
directions, respectively. The magnitude of
curl of A is __________
15.
The electric field (assumed to be onedimensional) between two points A and B

is shown. Let
a
be the
electrostatic potentials at A and B,
respectively. The value of
in
Volts is_________
EE - 2007
&3
An inductor designed with 400 turns coil
wound on an iron core of 16 cm2 cross
sectional area and with a cut of an air gap
length of 1mm. The coil is connected to a
230 V, 50 Hz ac supply. Neglect coil
resistance, core loss, iron reluctance and
a ag i ucta c . o 4 x -7 H/m)
2.
The current in the inductor is
(A) 18.08 A
(C) 4.56 A
(B) 9.04 A
(D) 2.28 A
3.
The average force on the core to reduce

the air gap will be
(A) 832.29N
(C) 3332.47N
(B) 1666.22N
(D) 6664.84 N
4.
The total reactance and total susceptance

of a lossless overhead EHV line, operating
at 50 Hz, are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu
respectively. If the velocity of wave
propagation is
km/s, then the
approximate length of the line is
(A) 122 km
(C) 222 Km
(B) 172 km
(D) 272 km
5.
A solid sphere made of insulating material

has a radius R and has a total charge Q
distributed uniformly in its volume. What
is the magnitude of the electric field
intensity, E, at a distance r (0 < r < R)
inside the sphere?
cm
4
cm
cm
16.
Given
za
xa
ya . If S represents
the portion of the sphere x
y
z =1
for z
the . s is ___________
17.
If
yz x
xz y
xyz z
is the electric field in a source free region,
a valid expression for the electrostatic
potential is
(A) xy
yz
(C) y
xyz
(B) xy
xyz
(D) xy
xyz
xy
EE - 2006
1.
Which of the following statements holds
for the divergence of electric and
magnetic flux densities?
(A) Both are zero
(B) These are zero for static densities
but non zero for time varying
densities
(C) It is zero for the electric flux density
(D) It is zero for the magnetic flux
density
EMT
6.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Divergence of the vector field

V( x, y, z) = (x cos xy+ y) i + (y cos xy)j +
(sin z2 + x2 + y2) k is
(A) 2z cos z2
(B) sin xy + 2z cos z2
(C) x sin xy cos z
(D) None of these.
th
th
th
Page 475
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE - 2008
7.
A coil of 300 turns is wound on a nonmagnetic
core
having
a
mean
circumference of 300 mm and a crosssectional area of 300 mm2. The
inductance of the coil corresponding to a
magnetizing current of 3A will be
(Given that = 4 x 10-7 H/m)
(A) 37.68 H
(C) 37. 68 H
(B) 113.04 H
(D) 113. 04 H
8.
9.
10.
A capacitor consists of two metal plates

each 500 500 mm2 and spaced 6 mm
apart. The space between the metal plates
is filled with a glass plate of 4mm
thickness and a layer of paper of 2 mm
thickness. The relative permittivities of
the glass and paper are 8 and 2
respectively. Neglecting the fringing
effect, the capacitance will be (Given that
= 8.85 x
F/m)
(A) 983.33 pF
(C) 637.5 pF
(B) 1475 pF
(D) 9956.25 pF
Two point charges
= 10 C and
= 20C are placed at coordinates
(1,1,0) and ( 1, 1,0) respectively, the
total electric flux passing through a plane
z = 20 will be
(A) 7.5 C
(C) 15.0 C
(B) 13.5 C
(D) 22.5 C
An extra high voltage transmission line of
the length 300 km can be approximated
by a lossless line having propagation
constant
.
radians per km.
Then the percentage ratio of the length to
wavelength will given by
(A) 24.24%
(C) 19.05%
(B) 12.12%
(D) 6.06%
EMT
EE - 2013
12. The curl of the gradient of the scalar field
defined by
x y
y z 4z x is
(A) 4xya
yza
zxa
(B) 4a
a
a
(C) 4xy 4z a
x
yz a
y
zx a
(D)
13.
The flux density at a point in space given

by B 4xa
ya
a
m . The
value of constant k must be equal to
(A) 2
(C) +0.5
(B) 0.5
(D) +2
14.
A dielectric slab with 500 mm x 500 mm

cross-section is 0.4 m long. The slab is
subjected to a uniform electric field of
a
a
mm.
The
relative
permittivity of the dielectric material is
equal to 2. The value of constant
is
.
m . The energy stored in
the dielectric in Joules is
(C)
.5
(A) .
(D)
(B) .
EE - 2014
15.
is the capacitance of a parallel plate
capacitor with air as dielectric (as in
figure (a)). If, half of the entire gap as
shown in figure (b) is filled with a
dielectric of permittivity
, the
expression for the modified capacitance is
a
(A)
(B)
16.
EE - 2012
11. The direction of vector A is radially
outward from the origin, with | |
r
where r
x
y
z and k is a
constant. The value of n for which A=0
is
(A) 2
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 0
th
(C)
(D)
The following four vector fields are given

in Cartesian co-ordinate system. The
vector field which does not satisfy the
property of magnetic flux density is
(A) y a
z a
x a
(B) z a
x a
y a
(C) x a
y a
z a
(D) y z a
x z a
x y a
th
th
Page 476
GATE QUESTION BANK
17.
A parallel plate capacitor consisting two

dielectric materials is shown in the figure.
The middle dielectric slab is placed
symmetrically with respect to the plates.
19.
A hollow metallic sphere of radius r is

kept at potential of 1 Volt. The total
electric flux coming out of the concentric
spherical surface of radius R
r is
(A) 4 r
(C) 4
(B) 4 r
(D) 4
20.
A perfectly conducting metal plate is

placed in x-y plane in a right handed
coordinate system. A charge of
columbs is placed at coordinate (0, 0, 2).

is the permittivity of free space.
Assume to be unit vectors along x, y
and z axes respectively. At the coordinate
) the electric field vector
ot
If the potential difference between one of

the plates and the nearest surface of
dielectric interface is 2 Volts, then the
ratio
is
(A) 1:4
(C) 3:2
(B) 2:3
(D) 4:1
18.
EMT
(Newtons/Columb) will be
o um s
y
The magnitude of magnetic flux density

B at a point having normal distance d
meters from an infinitely extended wire
carrying current of
is
ucti g
u its .
An infinitely extended wire is laid along

the x-axis and is carrying current of 4 A in
the +ve x direction. Another infinitely
extended wire is laid along the y-axis and
is carrying 2 A current in the +ve y
direction. is permeability of free space.
Assume to be unit vectors along x, y
and z axes respectively.
am s
rf ct y co
m ta at
(C)
(D)

(A)
(B)
Assuming
right
coordinate
system, magnetic field intensity, at
coordinate (2,1,0) will be
w
B
handed
r m
m
m
th
th
th
Page 477
GATE QUESTION BANK
EMT

ECE
1.
[Ans. D]
B
x
B
+a
y
From stokes theorem

.
2.
5.
). s
[Ans. B]
rom sto
s th or m
[Ans. A]
z axis
iv

x axis
x axis
6.
[Ans. D]
z
z axis
cos
)
y
cos
3.
[Ans. D]
rom Maxw
.B
a a
a
a a
a
Non-zero field components x and z
s quatio
7.
[Ans. C]
xya
xa
For static magnetic field,
ya
xa
4.
[Ans. C]
B
B
ya
xy x
||
||
B
x a
B
a
z
B
a
z
B
(
x
P-Q:
y=1 dy=0
B
)a +
y
x x
Q-R:
th
th
th
Page 478
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
[Ans. D]
By curl stroke theorem
. c
. s ov r o
R-S:
Y=3 ,dy=0
.
x x
12.
x |
= (
=1
9.
[Ans. D]
Apply the divergence theorem
10.
si
si
. r
.
.
and r is
13.
[Ans. C]
r
a r si
( . r
v
the position vector)
si
.
si
a
r
Average power crossing
r. x
si
8.
si
a
m
r
So, average poynting vector is
( )
So, .
si
r
.
surfac
[Ans. *] Range 55.4 to 55.6

In phasor notation
S-P:
x=
EMT
r
.ra
r
a

r xa
ya
za
r
x
y
z
r x r y r z
x r y r z r
r
x
x
r .
iv r .
r
. a
r x
r
r
r [ . a
x
r
r
)
x
x
r
(r. )
z
z
r
( )
x
(r.
[Ans. C]
Magnetic held inside hole depends on
radius of hole i.e b and also on the
location of hole from center of the
conductor ie d. Hole has uniform cross
section magnetic field is uniform
(r.
r. [
th
th
r
)
x
r.
x r
]
r x
r
r
a
a
y
r z
r
r
a
a ]
y
z
r
x
(r.
r
)
y
x
( )
r
th
Page 479
GATE QUESTION BANK
x
x
) ( )
r r
r
x
x
( )
r
r
r
(r. )
x
x
si
r. (
14.
15.
[Ans. *] Range 0.01 to 0.01

si x cos y
cos x si y
cur
x
y
cos x cos y cos x cos y
Magnitude of curl of A = 0
17.
(4
x
x)|
16.
EE
1.
[Ans. *] Range 3.13 to 3.15

za
xa
ya
a
a
a

x
z
a
x
y
sphere
y
x
a
z
y
a
|
2.
[cos
cos
.
]
[Ans. D]
. 4
yz x
xy
xyz z
xz y
[Ans. D]
Inductance
L=
represents a hemi-
= 0.32115H
r si cos
r si si
r cos
. s
si
[Ans. D]
.B
.
ot a ways Zero)
a
x
y
z
si
si
v
Hence
tio
v [ y a
xy
z a
yz a ]
tio B
[ y
v
yz x
xy
xz y
]
xyz z
tio
[yz x
v
y
xz y
xyz az]
tio
[ y
v
yz x]
xy
xz y
xyz z
Hence D option is correct
si
cos
. s
[Ans. *] Range
.
.
cm
cm ;
A=
cm 4
cm
B=
4
x
4
x
EMT
I=
x
r
s
(a
si
a ) . s
th
th
th
Page 480
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. A]
9.
[Ans. C]
Net flux will be half of the total charge,
Force =
Energy =
F=
4.
= 0.835J
. 4
10.
[Ans. D]
m
wav
.4
.
Length = 3
11.
=185 km
5.
= 15C
[Ans. B]
v
EMT
[Ans. A]
r
.
m
4 4 .
.
gth
)
gth
4 4 .
r . r
.
i radius r =
ra ia s
gth
i
wav
[Ans. A]
harg
.
r
r
or .
r
r
6.
[Ans. A]
iv rg c
12.
[Ans. D]
cur [ sca ar]
13.
[Ans. A]
.
=
. B
cos xy yx si xy
cos xy y si xy cos z . z
zcos z
7.
[Ans. B]
L=
=
4x
4
14.
[Ans. B]
15.
[Ans. A]
Case (i)
= 113.09H
8.
[Ans. B]
C=
.
.
= 4.4nF
.
C = 1.467nF
th
th
th
Page 481
GATE QUESTION BANK
.h
h
EMT
gio
4
Case(ii)
h
i-
In any system the charge Q = CV is

constant
ctric
.h
18.
[Ans. C]
h
[
m t r
am s
16.
[Ans. C]
magnetic flux density [w
If B
. B
B a
i. . if B
B a
B a
. B
B
B
B
Must
x
y
z
Option (A) : . B
Option (B) : . B
Option (C) : . B
x y
Option (D) : . B
sourc
m ]
m t r
4 am s
sourc
qua to z ro
B
B
4 m s
B
17.
[Ans. C]
am s
( )
w
m
w
am
= cross product of
Note: Direction of B
current direction and radial drections
respectively [Biot savarts aw]
4
gio
4
th
th
th
Page 482
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
[Ans. A]
EMT
a
4 |r |
|r |
( )
|r |
a
a
|r |
4
The net flux leaving any closed surface is

equal to charge enclosed in it
Total electric flux leaving the
co c tric s h r of ra ius
charg
co tai
y th m ta s h r of ra ius r
ot tia at a oi t o m ta ic s h r
4
4
[ 4]
r
wto o um
iv
ot
4 r
(flux ) leaving the sphere of radius
4 r
20.
[Ans. B]
Method of image:
A perfect conducting plate acts like a
mirror for the existing charge by the
introduction of virtual charge opposite to
the existing charge and equivalent distant
from it
z axis
ou om s
ou om s
imag
a
|r |
a
|r |
th
th
th
Page 483
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement
Basics of Measurements and Error Analysis

(Static & Dynamic Characteristics of Measuring Instrument)
EE-2006
1.
A 200/1 Current transformer (CT) is
wound with 200 turns on the secondary
on a toroidal core. When it carries a
current of 160 A on the primary, the ratio
and phase errors of the CT are found to be
and 30 minutes respectively. If the
number of secondary turns is reduced by
1 the new ratio error (%) and phase error
(min) will be respectively
(A) 0. 0, 30
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
A variable w is related to three other

variables x, y, z as w = xy/z. The
variables are measured with meters of
accuracy
0.5% reading,
% of full
scale value and
1.5% reading. The
actual readings of the three meters are
80, 20 and 50 with 100 being the full scale
value for all three.
The maximum
uncertainty in the measurement of will
be
(A)
0.5 % rdg
(C)
6.7 % rdg
(B)
5.5 % rdg
(D)
7.0 % rdg
IN-2006
1.
A certain quantity x is calculated from
measured values of a, b, and c using the
formula,
x=k(
) Where k is a constant.
The maximum limiting error in each of

the three measured quantities is
The maximum limiting error in x will be
(A) 2(| |
(B) (| |
|
|
|) | |
|) | |
(C) (
| |
(D) (
| |
IN-2007
2.
Two sensors have measurement errors
that are Gaussian distributed with zero
means
and
variances
and ,
respectively.
The
two
sensor
measurements and
are combined to
form the weighted average
x=
+ (1
Assuming
that the measurements errors of the two
sensors are uncorrelated, the weighting
factor
that yields the smallest error
variance of x is.
(C)
(A)
(B)
3.
(D) 0.5
Consider a non-ideal voltage source

whose output voltage is measured by a
non-ideal voltmeter as shown below
Non-ideal
Voltage
source
ideal
voltmeter
ideal
voltage
source
Non-ideal
voltmeter
Let be the difference between and

the measured voltage
is function of
(A)
only
(C)
(B)
only
(D)
IN-2009
4.
A quantity x is calculated by using the
formula x = (p q)/r, the measured
values are p = 9, q = 6, r = 0.5. Assume
that the measurement errors in p, q and r
are independent. The absolute maximum
error in the measurement of each of the
three quantities is . The absolute
maximum error in the calculated value of
x is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 6
th
th
th
Page 484
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
The response of a first order

measurement system to a unit step input
is 1 e
, where t is in seconds. A ramp
of 0.1units per second is given as the
input to this system. The error in the
measured value after transients have died
down is
(A) 0.02units
(C) 0.2units
(B) 0.1units
(D) 1unit
IN-2010
6.
The volume of a cylinder is computed
from measurements of its height (h) and
diameter (d). A set of several
measurements of height has an average
value of 0.2m and a standard deviation of
1%. The average value obtained for the
diameter is 0.1m and the standard
deviation is 1%. Assuming the errors in
the measurements of height and diameter
are uncorrelated, the standard deviation
of the computed volume is
(A) 1.00%
(C) 2.23%
(B) 1.73%
(D) 2.41%
7.
IN-2013
9.
Two ammeters A and A measure the same
current and provide readings
and ,
respectively. The ammeter errors can be
characterized as independent zero mean
Gaussian random variables of standard
deviations
and
, respectively. The
value of the current is computed as:
The value of
which gives the lowest
standard deviation of I is
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
IN-2014
10. The resistance of a wire is given by the
expression
Where is the resistivity -meter), L is
the length (meter) and D (meter) is the
diameter of the wire. The error in
measurement of each of the parameters
L and D is
. Assuming that the
errors are independent random variables,
the percent error in measurement of R
is ___________.
A measurement system with input x(t)

and output y(t) is described by the
differential equation 3
Measurement
.The
static sensitivity of the system is

(A) 0.60
(C) 1.67
(B) 1.60
(D) 2.67
8.
The diameters of 10000 ball bearings

were measured. The mean diameter and
standard deviation were found to be
10 mm and 0.05 mm respectively.
Assuming Gaussian distribution of
measurements, it can be expected that the
number of measurements more than
10.15 mm will be
(A) 230
(C) 15
(B) 115
(D) 2
th
th
th
Page 485
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

EE
1.
(
[Ans. A]
Considering only positive values of error
Nominal ratio
Primary current
n (
=(
= 7%
% Ratio error =
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
Actual ratio
n
trun ratio
Given X = K (
X=K.Y
Applying log on both sides
log X = log K + log Y
log K = 0 ( K is constant)
= log Y
= 2 log
n
)
)
Let Y =
ii
when no. of secondary is reduced by 1
6 A
Actual ratio =
n (
iii
= 2 *| |
|+
Dividing eq. (ii) and (iii)
2.
[Ans. B]
For the case given, the smallest error is
3.
[Ans. C]
Measured voltage
atio rror
v
Phase angle error
( )
v
v
Reduction of one or two turns of the

secondary winding, no doubt, reduces
the ratio error, but it has no effect on the
phase angle error.
2.
[Ans. D]
Given, w =
learly
v
v
f(
Taking log on both sides,

log w = log x + log y log z
th
th
th
Page 486
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
5.
[Ans. C]
p
q
p
q
10.
r
r
[Ans. B]
R(s) =
e
lim
lim

L
DD
d
L
d
DD
d
dL
DD
d
L
d
DDD
d
d
)
d
s s
lim
s s
s
s s
Measurement
L
)
L
D
)
D
D
)
D
6.
[Ans. A]
Volume = r h
h = 0.2, 2r=0.1
= 1%
= 1%
7.
[Ans. B]
dy
i
o
y
t
y t
dt
p
p
Applying Laplace transform
3s Y(s) + 5Y(s) = 8X(s)
Y(s) [3s+5] = 8X(s)
s
s
s
s
s
s
6
(
s)
8.
[Ans. B]
By Gaussian distribution, the expected
Measurement are 115.
9.
[Ans. A]
th
th
th
Page 487
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

(Current Voltage, Resistance)
EE-2010
2.
An ammeter has a current range of 0-5A,
and its internal resistance is 0.2 . In
order to change the range to 0-25A, we
need to add a resistance of
(A) 0.8 in series with the meter.
(B) 1.0 in series with the meter.
(C) 0.04 in parallel with the meter.
(D) 0.05 in parallel with the meter.
EE-2012
3.
A periodic voltage waveform observed on
an oscilloscope across a load is shown. A
permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC)
meter connected across the same load
reads.
v(t)
(A)
12
(D)
6.
Suppose that resistors

n
are
connected in parallel to give an equivalent
resistor R. If resistors
n
have
tolerance of 1% each, the equivalent
resistor R for resistors = 300 and
= 200 will have tolerance of
(A) 0.5% (B) 1% (C) 1.2% (D) 2%
7.
Two ammeters X and Y have resistances

of 1.2 and 1.5 respectively and they
give full-scale deflection with 150 mA and
250 mA respectively. The ranges have
been extended by connecting shunts so as
to give full scale deflection with 15 A. The
ammeters along with shunts are
connected in parallel and then placed in a
circuit in which the total current flowing
is 15A. The current in amperes indicated
in ammeter X is ______________
20
time (ms)
(C) 8 V
(D) 10 V
EE-2014
5.
The dc current flowing in a circuit is
measured by two ammeters, one PMMC
and another Electrodynamometer type,
connected in series. The PMMC meter
contains 100 turns in the coil, the flux
density in the air gap is 0.2 Wb/m , and
the area of the coil is 80 mm . The
electrodynamometer ammeter has a
change in mutual inductance with respect
to deflection of 0.5 mH/deg. The spring
constants of both the meters are equal.
The value of current, at which the
deflections of the two meters are same,
is__________
5V
10
(C)
(B)
10V
0
5V
(A) 4 V
(B) 5 V
j1
EE-2006
1.
A current of 8 + 6 (sin
+ 300) A is
passed through three meters. They are a
centre zero PMMC meter, a true rms
meter and a moving iron instrument. The
respective readings (in A) will be
(A) 8,6,10
(C) 8,10,10
(B) 8,6,8
(D) 8,2,2
EE-2013
4.
Three moving iron type voltmeter are
connected as shown. Voltmeter reading
are
n
, as indicated. The correct
relation among the voltmeter reading is
th
th
th
Page 488
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
Measurement
1.6V
An LPF wattmeter of power factor 0.2 is

having three voltage settings 300 V, 150 V
and 75 V, and two current settings 5 A
and 10 A. The full scale reading is 150. If
the wattmeter is used with 150 V voltage
setting and 10 A current setting, the
multiplying factor of the wattmeter
is____________
100
500
1000
Rs=100
Ig
Eu
9.
A periodic waveform observed across a

load is represented by
1
in
() {
1
in
1
The measured value, using moving iron
voltmeter connected across the load, is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A) 0.9910 V
(B) 0.9991 V
3.
The voltmeter shown in the following

figure has a sensitivity of 500 /V and a
full scale of 100V. When connected in the
circuit as shown, then meter reads 20 V.
The value of Rx is
+
Rs
IN-2006
1.
A 4 k, 0.02 W potentiometer is used in
the circuit shown below. The minimum
value of the resistance Rs in order to
protect the potentiometer is
(A) 2.23k
(B) 2.71k
Rx
(A) 75 k
(B) 50 k
(C) 25 k
(D) 10 k
An ac voltmeter uses the circuit shown

below, where the PMMC meter has an
internal resistance of 100 and requires
a dc current of 1 mA for full scale
deflection.
Rp
100 V
4.
15V
(C) 1.0012 V
(D) 1.0048 V
Vo
(C) 3.82k
(D) 8.92k
+
~
2.
An unknown voltage source Eu

(with negligible internal resistance) is
connected to a potentiometer circuit as
shown in the following figure. If the
galvanometer current is 10A with the
direction as indicated, then value of Eu is
AC input
nput
PMMC
meter
Assuming the diodes to be ideal, the value

of Rs to obtain full scale deflection with
100V (ac rms) applied to the input
terminal would be Rs
(A) 80 k
(C) 89.9 k
(B) 89 k
(D) 90 k
th
th
th
Page 489
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
A voltmeter has a range of [4 V, 20 V] and

a resolution of 1 mV. The dynamic range is
(A) 24 dB
(C) 72 dB
(B) 60 dB
(D) 84 dB
9.
Measurement
The op-amp based circuit of a half wave

rectifier electronic voltmeter shown
below uses a PMMC ammeter with a full
scale deflection (FSD) current of 1 mA
n
oil re i n e of 1k . The v lue of
R that gives FSD for a sinusoidal input
voltage of 100 mV (RMS) is
IN-2007
6.
The figure shows a potentiometer of total
resistance
with a sliding contact.
Sinusoidal
input
1k
PMMC
Ammeter
P
+
RL
The resistance between the points P and

Q of the potentiometer at the position of
the contact shown is
and the voltage
(A)
(B)
ratio
Statement for Linked Answer Question for

10 and 11
In the wheatstone bridge shown below
the galvanometer G has a current
sensitivity of 1
mm a resistance of
2.5 k and a scale resolution of 1 mm. let
be the minimum increase in R from its
nominal value of 2
that can be
detected by this bridge.
at this point is 0.5. If the ratio
=1, the ratio
(A)
(B)
IN-2008
7.
If a
is
(C)
(D) 1+
current
1+
of
in(1
)
is
o (
]A
passed through a true RMS ammeter, the
meter reading will be
(C) 12A
(A) 6
(D) 1
(B) 1
8.
A 2A full-scale PMMC type dc ammeter

has a voltage drop of 100 mV at 2A. The
meter can be converted into a 10A fullscale dc ammeter by connecting a
(A) 1 . m re i or in p r llel wi h he
meter
(B) 1 . m re i or in erie wi h he
meter
(C)
. m re i or in p r llel wi h he
meter
(D)
. m re i or in erie wi h he
meter
(C) 1
(D) 1
7.
k
1
10.
When R is 2 k
(A) 6 V
(B) 6.0024 V
11.
The value of
(A) .
(B) .
th
th
is
(C) 6.0038 V
(D) 6.005 V
is approximately
(C) .
(D) 1
th
Page 490
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN-2009
12. A galvanometer with internal resistance
1
n full-scale current 1mA is used
to realize a dc voltmeter with a full scale
range of 1V. The full scale range of this
voltmeter can be extended to 10V by
connecting an external resistance of value
(A) 9 k
(C) 1 k
(B) 9.9 k
(D) 11 k
13.
The dc potentiometer shown in the figure

has a working current of 10mA with
switch S open. Let Rg+R1=100 . The
galvanometer G can only detect currents
gre er h n 1
. The m ximum
percentage error in the measurement of
the unknown emf Ex as calculated from
the slider position shown is closest to
3V
2m
3m
(A) 0.3
(B) 0.5
15.
v()
(A) 100 A
(B) 70.7 A
(C) 63.7 A
(D) 31.8 A
16.
The deflection angle of the pointer of an

ideal moving iron ammeter is
for
1.0 ampere dc current. If a current of
3sin(314t) amperes is passed through the
ammeter then the deflection angle is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 9
17.
The PMMC ammeter A in the adjoining

figure has a range of 0 to 3mA. When
switch
is opened, the pointer of the
ammeter swings to the 1mA mark,
returns and settles at 0.9mA. The meter is
(C) 0.6
(D) 1.0
IN-2010
Common Data for Questions 14 & 15
A PMMC type ammeter has full scale
current of 100 A and a coil resistance of
100
14.
The above PMMC meter is connected in

the circuit shown in the adjoining figure.
The op amp is ideal. The voltage
vi(t) = 1.0sin314t V . Assuming the source
impedance of vi (t) to be zero, the
ammeter will indicate a current of
10k
R1
Measurement
1. k
1.8 V
The resistance required to convert the

100 A ammeter into a 1A full scale dc
ammeter is
(A) 10m in series with the meter
(B) 10m in parallel with the meter
(C) 1m in series with the meter
(D) 1m in parallel with the meter
(A) critically damped and has

resistance of 100
(B) critically damped and has
resistance of 200
(C) under damped and has
resistance of 100
(D) under damped and has
resistance of 200
th
th
th
a coil
a coil
a coil
a coil
Page 491
GATE QUESTION BANK
IN-2011
18. In the Wheatstone bridge shown below,
when the resistance
in re e by 1
the current through the galvanometer is
1k
1k
10V
G
1k
S1
1k
Measurement
EE/IN-2012
20. An analog voltmeter uses external
multiplier settings. With a multiplier
setting of 20 k it reads 440 V and with a
multiplier setting of 80 k, it reads 352 V.
For a multiplier setting of 40 k the
voltmeter reads
(A) 371V
(C) 394V
(B) 383V
(D) 406V
1k
(Consider the Thevenin equivalent

resistance of the bridge in the
calculations)
(A) 1.25 A
(C) 12.5 A
(B) 2.5 A
(D) 25 A
IN-2012
19. A periodic voltage waveform observed on
an oscilloscope across a load is shown. A
permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC)
meter connected across the same load
reads
IN-2013
21. The circuit below incorporates a
permanent magnet coil milli-ammeter of
range 1 mA having a series resistance of
10 k . Assuming constant diode forward
re i n e of
forw r io e rop
of 0.7 V and infinite reverse diode drop of
1.7 V and infinite reverse diode resistance
for each diode, the reading of the meter in
mA is
mA
+
1 k
v(t)
10V
1 k
5V
0
10
12
20
time (ms)
(A)v 4V
(B) 5V
(A) 0.45
(B) 0.5
(C) 8V
(D) 10V
th
th
(C) 0.7
(D) 0.9
th
Page 492
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

EE
1.
5.

Electro dynamometer
[Ans. C]
PMMC reads average value i,e d.c., so its
reading is 8 value.
RMS meter will read rms value of current
RMS =
T
k
[Ans. D]
k
By KCL,
And By KVL, Voltage drop
k n
should be same
(5)(0.2)=20( )
1 = 20
across
i
i
i
in parallel
6.
i ( . )
or
T
) = 10 A
M.I. also reads RMS value, so its reading

is also 10 A
2.
i
1
w number of on u or
i
(i ) w
i
i
i
i ( . ) 1
k
k
1
.
1
k
.
1
k
.
[Ans. B]
1
1
1
5A
25A
3.
. 1
1
[Ans. A]
Area enclosed
(1 )(1 )
)( )
( )( ) = 80
( . 1) (
. 1
Time period = 20
Average reading =
4.
7.
[Ans. *] Range 9.9 to 10.3

Ammeter X
(1
1
1
1.
. 1
[Ans. D]
Because voltage drop across inductor

Because voltage drop across capacitor
j 1
Net voltage
j
j
j
Voltmeter reads magnitude of the voltage
only
.1 )
1.
Ammeter Y
th
th
th
Page 493
GATE QUESTION BANK
(1
1.
IN
1.
Measurement
[Ans. B]
0.2 =
250 mA
I=
and I =
1.
.71 k
.71 k
1
(x)
2.
1.
250
mA
(x)
[Ans. D]
1.
150
mA
h1
1.6 V
(1 )
oop
I
1
1.
.
oop
1.
(x)
8.
9.
. 1
1
Ig
.
7
1 .1
[Ans. 2]
In LPF wattmeter, T on the moving
system is small owing to low power factor
even when the current and potential coils
are fully excited. Also the errors
introduced due to inductance of pressure
coil tend to be large at low power factors.
So for calculating multiplying factor for a
low p.f. wattmeter, p.f. mentioned on the
wattmeter should be taken into account.
Therefore, Multiplying Factor
= (Current range used*Voltage range
used*p.f)/Power at FSD
Given, Power at Full scale reading = 150
Current Range used = 10 A
Voltage Range used = 150 V
Power Factor = 0.2
1
1
.
Therefore
m
1
1
1
Applying KVL in Loop 1, we get
1.6 100I 500I 1000 (I + Ig)=0
1.6 1000Ig=1600I
1.6 1
1
1
1.
. 1
9.9 7
1
1
Now in loop 2,
1
1
(
)
1
1
1
9.9 7
1
11
1
.99 7
. 11
.99 7
1.
7
1.
3.
( )
[Ans. B]
Total resistance of voltmeter is
)(1
=(
)
k
So equivalent circuit is
+
80 V
[Ans. A]
M.I instrument reads RMS value
1
100
V
I
100
k
20 V
20 V
th
..
th
th
Page 494
GATE QUESTION BANK
I=
= 0.4 mA
(
.9
.9 1
.9
( . )( )
( .9 )(1 ) 1
, since diodes are ideal]
9.9
(
1
1
1
Here resistances cannot has negative

value.
1
Therefore
[Ans. D]
r nge
(level )
e olu ilon
(
7.
[Ans. C]
1m
n 1 .9
1 bits (as number of bit can
never be fraction) dynamic range = 6
n = 84 dB
6.
[Ans. C]
.
5.
)(
bu
(Given)
)(
)
(
Divide above equation on both sides with
) = (0.8 0.4) = 0.4 mA
4.
= 0.8 mA
And
Measurement
( )
(
(
)
)
= 12 A
8.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. A]
Meter
10A
Given data
2A
Given drop across meter = 100 mV.

= (10 2) = 8A
By KVL
(8)( ) = 100 mV
1 . m in p r llel wi h mme er
From circuit
v
v
(
v
v
[Ans. A]
1
1
1
)(
)(
)(
)
(By the concept of virtual ground)
m
Also, it can be observed that
VC = 45 mV
poin
VC = 1 R
1
1
9.
)
)
th
th
th
Page 495
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
1
1
1
1
12.
[Ans. A]
1
1m
So in order to measure 1 V (maximum)
we have to connect a series resistance R1
such that
1
9
Now to increase voltage range to 10V, we
have to add another external resistance
R2 such that
(
) 1
1 1
1
9
1
9
9k
13.
[Ans. B]
With switch open redrawing the circuit
[Ans. B]
k
1
(
Bridge can detect a change in R if

galvanometer deflections.
If change in R is minimum, then
minimum deflection in galvanometer
should be 1 mm for detection as 1 mm is
i re olu ion. o for this 1 current
must flow through it.
i. e.
1
1
.
Now in outer loop,
)
1
1
1 (
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
1
1 .99
1
So,
1 (
)
)
1 (1
1. 99
1
= 0.004 + 5.9984 = 6.0024 V
10 mA
5m
ol ge rop ro
i
250 10mA = 2.5V
So the voltage drop across 5m long
resistance is (3 2.5) = 0.5V
Resistance of 5 m long wire is
.
11.
Measurement
[Ans. B]
Writing KVL in inner loop we get,
1
.
1
1
.
.997
.99 m
Writing KVL in another inner loop we get
(
) (
)
.
.
.
9
(
)
( .99
. ) 1
.
.
m orre pon
o
n
he
voltage drop across it is 20 10 m = 0.2V
Redrawing the circuit with switch (s)
closed
3V
10 mA
2m
3m
0.2V
2.5V +
0.3V
+
(
B
th
th
th
Page 496
GATE QUESTION BANK
should be 0.2V for the galvanometer

to show null deflection.
u given n e e
urren gre er
than 10A. so the potential difference
across it should be
(1
1 ) = 1mV
Error is 1mV & true - value is 0.2V
% error =
14.
17.
[Ans. D]
Calculating the resistance
1.8K
1.8V
= 0.5
(1
1
15.
1
18.
(
)
) (100) = (1 100)
( .9999)
1 m in p r llel wi h me er.
[Ans. A]
1k
1k
10V
B
1.
1k
V(t) = 1 sin 314 t

= 0.1m
i(t) = (0.1m) sin (314 t)
= 0.1m
( .
63.7A
19.
.
( .
A
r
[Ans. D]
Assuming spring control
for d.c
for a.c
1k
Thevenin equivalent circuit across AB.

( .
)
. 9 m
(1
1 ) (1
1. 1 )
1.
. 9 m
(1.
r
1)1
1.
vg
16.
The meter swings between 1mA and

0.9 mA, so it is inherently under damped
system.
[Ans. C]
Here, the waveform seen by the ammeter is
Here,
1.62V
By KVL
1.8 1.62 = V
V = 0.18V
1
I = 1A
By KVL,
of the meter
0.9 mA
[Ans. B]
Measurement
= 2.1213 A
9
th
[Ans. A]
As PMMC meter reads only DC value or
average value and average value is equal
to
re un er he urve
To l ime
th
th
Page 497
GATE QUESTION BANK
1 )
Measurement
)
ol
21.
20.
[Ans. D]
or ul iplier e ing
Meter resistance = x
Total resistance =
Voltmeter reading ( )
x
.7 7 m
1
PMMC measures the average value
.7 7
k
k
[Ans. A]
Current in the inverting arm
V x
or ul iplier e ing
Meter resistance = x
Total resistance ( )
k
x
Voltmeter reading ( )= 352 V
k
V x
x
1
(
x
x
x
x)
x
1
x
k
or mul iplier e ing
Total Resistance
( )
x)(
k
k
th
th
th
Page 498
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

(Power and Energy, Instrument Transformers)
EE-2006
1.
A sampling wattmeter (that computes
power from simultaneously sampled
values of voltage and current) is used to
measure the average power of a load. The
peak to peak voltage of the square wave is
10 V and the current is a triangular wave
of 5A p-p as shown in the figure. The
period is 20 ms. The reading in W will be
EE-2010
4.
A wattmeter is connected as shown in the
figure. The wattmeter reads
Current coil
Potential coil
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A) 0 W
(B) 25 W
(C) 50 W
(D) 100 W
EE-2009
2.
The figure shows a three-phase delta
connected
load
supplied from
a
400V, 50 Hz, 3-phase balanced source.
The pressure coil (PC) and current coil
(CC) of a wattmeter are connected to
the load as shown, with the coil
polarities suitably selected to ensure a
positive deflection. The wattmeter
reading will be
a
3-phase
Balanced
supply
400 Volts
50 Hz.
Z1 = (100 + j0)
Z1
b
Z2
(A) 0
(B) 1600 Watt
3.
Z1
Z2
Z2 = (100 + j0)
CC
PC
(C) 800 Watt

(D) 400 Watt
Wattmeter
Zero always
Total power consumed by
Power consumed by
Power consumed by
and
EE-2011
5.
Consider the following statements:
(i) The compensating coil of a low
power
factor
wattmeter
compensates the effect of the
impedance of the current coil.
(ii) The compensating coil of a low
power
factor
wattmeter
compensates the effect of the
impedance of the voltage coil circuit.
(A) (i) is true but (ii) is false
(B) (i) is false but (ii) is true
(C) both (i) and (ii) are true
(D) both (i) and (ii) are false
EE-2013
6.
The input impedance of the permanent
moving coil (PMMC) voltmeter is infinite.
Assuming that the diode shown in the
figure below is ideal, the reading of the
voltmeter in volts is
1k
The pressure coil of a dynamometer type

wattmeter is
(A) highly inductive
(B) highly resistive
(C) purely resistive
(D) purely inductive
14.14 sin (314 t)V
(A) 4.46
(B) 3.15
th
th
100 k
Voltmeter
(C) 2.23
(D) 0
th
Page 499
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
A strain gauge forms one arm of the

bridge shown in the figure below and has
a nominal resistance without any load as
= 300 . Other bridge resistances are
=
=
= 300 . The maximum
permissible current through the strain
gauge is 20 mA. During certain
measurement when the bridge is excited
by maximum permissible voltage and the
strain gauge resistance is increased by
1% over the nominal value, the output
voltage in mV is
+
(A) 56.02
(B) 40.83
(C) 29.85
(D) 10.02
EE-2014
8.
Power consumed by a balanced 3-phase,
3-wire load is measured by the two
wattmeter method. The first wattmeter
reads twice that of the second. Then the
load impedance angle in radians is
(A)
12
(C)
6
(B)
8
(D)
3
9.
While measuring power of a three-phase

balanced load by the two-wattmeter
method, the readings are 100 W and
250 W. The power factor of the load
is__________
10.
In the bridge circuit shown, the capacitors

are loss free. At balance, the value of
capacitance in microfarad is_________
35
(
)
105
01
Measurement
IN-2006
1.
The two-wattmeter method is used to
measure power in a 3-phase, 3-wire
balanced inductive circuit. The line
voltage and line current are
400 V and 10 A respectively. If the load pf
is 0.866 lagging, then readings of the two
wattmeters are
(A) 6000 W and 0 W
(B) 5000 W and 1000 W
(C) 4500 W and 1500 W
(D) 4000 W and 2000 W
IN-2007
2.
A dynamometer type wattmeter with a
single scale marked for the smallest
power range, has two current ranges,
namely, 0-5 A and 0-10 A as well as two
voltage ranges, namely, 0-150 V and
0-300 V. To carry out a load test on a
230V/115V,
1kVA,
single
phase
transformer, the wattmeter is used on the
high voltage side. The voltage and current
ranges are chosen for maximum
utilization of the scale. The multiplying
factor to be used in this case is.
(A) 0.5
(C) 2.0
(B) 1.0
(D) 4.0
IN-2008
3.
A 230 V, 5A, 50 Hz single phase house
service energy meter has a meter
constant of 360 rev/KWhr. The meter
takes 50s for making 51 revolutions of the
disc when connected to a 10 kW, unity
power factor load. The error in the
reading of the meter is
(A) 0%
(C) 2.0%
(B) +0.5%
(D) +2.0%
IN-2011
4.
Power in a there phase star connected
balanced inductive load is measured by
two wattmeter method. The phase
voltage and phase current are 230 V and
5 A, respectively. The power factor of the
th
th
th
Page 500
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement
load is 0.707. The reading and of the

two wattmeters are
(A)
= 298 W and = 1111 W
(B) = 516 W and = 1924 W
(C) = 1220 W and = 1220 W
(D) = 1111 W and = 516 W
EE/IN-2012
5.
voltage and current expressions are
v(t) =
( )+
(3 ) a d ( )
)+
= sin (
(3 - +) +
(5 )
i(t)
Load
wattmeter
V(t)
(A)
cos
(B)
(C)
(D)
+
+
+
]
]
th
th
th
Page 501
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

EE
1.
2.
[Ans. A]
If we consider both the waves, we can see
positive power and negative power in
each case is equal
Net power = 0 W i.e. OW
[Ans. *] Not Matching with IIT Keys
Wattmeter reading = current through C.C
voltage across PC
cos (phase angle
b/w V and I)
=
4.
6.
[Ans. A]
10 ms
= 4 120
=
= 400
120
= 4 +120
400
120
= 800 w
3.
field corresponding to this current. This

field acts in opposition to the current coil
field. Thus the resultant field is due to
current l only. Hence the error caused by
the pressure coil current flowing in the
current coil is neutralized
240
[Ans. B]
It is difficult to have purely resistive
pressure coil. The pressure coil has a
small value of inductance, due to which
error occurs in wattmeter readings.
20 ms
14
14 14 100
= 14
101
14
=
= 4 46
( PMMC reads average voltage)
7.
[Ans. C]
During the normal condition
[Ans. D]
Considering the wattmeter to be an ideal
wattmeter and as PC is connected
across . So option D.
300
300
+
300
300
[Ans. B]
I+
Current coil
= 600
= 12
Compensating coil
Load
Supply
5.
The current coil carries a current of l +

and produces a filed corresponding to this
current. The compensating coil is
connected in series with the pressure coil
circuit and is made as nearly as possible
identical and coincident with the current
coil. It is so connected that it opposes the
field of the current coil. The compensating
coil carries a current
and produces a
8.
20
= 6 02985
6 = 0 02985
= 29 85
[Ans. C]
(30
= 3
(30 + )
= 3
a
= 3
=2
a
th
=
th
1
3
6
th
Page 502
GATE QUESTION BANK
9.
10.
IN
1.
3.
[Ans. *] Range 0.78 to 0.82

(
)
a
= 3
= 3
( + )
3 3
a
=
7
=
= 0 803
*3 (
[Ans. D]
150
350
10 kW
Total revolution =
= 4 kW and
2.
100
4.
[Ans. A]
For a balanced lagging load, connected in
a star network.
The two wattmeter readings are:
(30
)
=
(30 + )
=
Given the load is balanced, hence line
voltage is equal to phase voltage.
Similarly for line and phase currents.
Given,
= 0 707
= 45
(30 45)
= 230 5
= 1111
(30 + )
=
(75 )
= 230 5
= 298
5.
[Ans. C]
()=
+
()=
(
Average power
0.866
)+=
0 866 = 30
= 2 kW
=
= 2kW
3
)+
d(
(3
The product of different frequency terms

have zero average value.
1
1
=
+
2
2
1
( )+
= [
( )]
2
= + +
[Ans. C]
The wattmeter is connected towards H.V.
side
The rated current I =
360 = 50 rev
= 2%
=
=
% error =
[Ans. 0.3]
At balance
=
1
1
=
=
j
j0 1
= 35
= 105
1
1
105 =
35
j
j0 1
105 0 1
=
= 03
35
[Ans. D]
Total power = 3
= 3 400 10
= 6kW = +
and
Measurement
= 4 34
The suitable range is 0.5A and 300V

wattmeter
The load is connected across L.V. side
Therefore the rated current
1
=
= 8 69
115
( ) =2
The multiplying factor =
= 0 a 5 harmonic does not

contribute power as it is not present in
V(t)
1
= [
+
]
2
th
th
th
Page 503
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

(Analog, Digital Meters & Bridges, ADC type DVM)
EE-2006
1.
R1 and R4 are the opposite arms of a
Wheatstone bridge as are R3 and R2. The
source voltage is applied across R1 and R3.
Under balanced conditions which one of
the following is true?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
EE-2007
2.
A bridge circuit is shown in the figure
below. Which one of the sequences given
below is most suitable for balancing the
bridge?
j
4.
Two 8-bit ADCs, one of single slope

integrating type and other of successive
approximation type, take TA and TB times
to convert 5 V analog input signal to
equivalent digital output. If the input
analog signal is reduced to 2.5V, the
approximate time taken by the ADCs will
respectively, be
(A)
(C)
,
(B)
(D)
EE-2009
5.
An average-reading digital multimeter
reads 10V when fed with a triangular
wave, symmetric about the time-axis. For
the same input an rms-reading meter will
read.
(C)
(A)
(D) 10
(B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
~
First adjust R4 and then adjust R1
EE-2010
6.
he Maxwells bridge shown in the figure
is at balance. The parameters of the
inductive coil are
j
EE-2008
3.
The ac Bridge shown in the figure is used
to measure the impedance Z. If the bridge
is balanced for oscillator frequency
f = 2 kHz, then the impedance Z will be
~
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
B
. 98F
Oscillator 5
A
~
D
15.91 mH
(A) (260+j0)
(B)
j
(C)
(D)
j
j
th
th
th
Page 504
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2011
7.
A 4
digit DMM has the error
IN-2006
1.
Consider the AC bridge shown below. If
specification as: 0.2% of reading +10

counts. If a dc voltage of 100 V is read on
its 200 V full scale, the maximum error
that can be expected in the reading is
(A) 0.1%
(C) 0.3%
(B) 0.2%
(D) 0.4%
8.
Measurement
and
(C) low Q inductor

(D) lossy capacitor
(C)
(A)
(D)
IN-2007
2.
Consider the AC bridge shown in the
figure below, with A, L and C having
positive finite values.
EE-2014
9.
The reading of the voltmeter (rms) in
volts, for the circuit shown in the figure is
____________
sint
.5
1/j
|
|
(B)
(A) low resistance

(B) high resistance
then ration |
is approximately equal to
The bridge circuit shown in the figure

below is used for the measurement of an
unknown element . The bridge circuit is
best suited when is a
(A)
(B)
if
if
(C)
if
(D)
cannot be made zero
sin t
10.
IN-2008
3.
If the ac bridge circuit shown below is
balanced the elements Z can be a
The saw-tooth voltage waveform shown

in the figure is fed to a moving iron
voltmeter. Its reading would be close to
______________
R
Detector
D
Z
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
t
ms
ms
th
Pure capacitor
Pure inductor
R-L series combination
R-L parallel combination
th
th
Page 505
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
digit, 200 mV full scale DVM has an
accuracy specification of
.5 of
reading plus 5 counts. When the meter
reads 100 mV, the voltage being
measured as
(A) Any value between 99.5 mV and
100.5 mV
(B) Any value between 99.0 mV and
101.0 mV
(C) exactly 99.5 mV
(D) exactly 100 mV
Measurement
IN-2014
6.
The resistance and inductance of an
inductive coil are measured using an AC
bridge as shown in the figure. The bridge
is to be balanced by varying the
impedance z
coil
EE/IN-2012
5.
The bridge method commonly used for
finding mutual inductance is
(A) Heaviside Campbell bridge
(B) Schering bridge
(C) De Sauty bridge
(D) Wien bridge
For obtaining balance z should consist of

element(s):
(A) R and C
(C) L and C
(B) R and L
(D) Only C

EE
1.
2.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. B]
R1
i1
i2
R2
and x
R3
z
z
z
R4
jx
i3
D
i4
jx
Under balanced condition

z z
z z
j
jx
Battery
Adjustments are made in various arms of

the bridge so that the voltage across the
detector is zero and hence no current
flows through it, when no current flows
through detector the bridge is said to be
balanced.
At balance condition
j [
Equating real and imaginary terms, we

obtain
Solving above equations, we get
th
th
and
th
Page 506
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. B]
Single slope integrating type ADC utilizes
digital counter techniques to measure
time required for a voltage ramp to rise
from zero to the input voltage.
If conversion time for input voltage
5V = TA
So, conversion time for input voltage
2.5 V = TA /2
Conversion time in successive type ADC
does not depend on input voltage. So,
conversion time for input voltage 2.5 V is
also TB.
5.
[Ans. A]
For triangular wave
Q factor of the coil Q =

Therefore
.
( )
and
( )
For a value of a greater than 10, the term

(1/Q)2 will be smaller than 1/1000 and
can be neglected
Therefore eq. (1) and (2) reduces to
.
R4 appears only in eq. (4) and R2 appears
in both eq. (3) &(4)
So first R2 is adjusted and then R4 is
adjusted.
Avg value =
RMS value =
[Ans. A]
5
B C= . 98 F
Oscillator
3.
Measurement
RMS value =
RBC=300
6.
D
[Ans. A]
L=15.1 mH
RAD
R+j
300
~
j
j
.
j
j
j
5.9
At balance
j
At balance
j
j
j
j
Equating real and imaginary terms,
j
th
th
th
Page 507
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
[Ans. C]
9.
Measurement
digit
i
.5
So, maximum count with

9999
1 count =
]
)
digit display
Full scale reading = 200 V
['i' is current through each branch which

are same ]
No. of full digits in case of
digits display
10.
[Ans. *] Range 56 to59
E1 = Error corresponding to 10 counts

.
9999
eading
E2 = Error corresponding to 0.2 % of
reading
E2 = .
ms
RMS value of Saw tooth waveform is
Total error =
.
.
= 0.3 V
%error in reading of 100V
.
.
8.
[Ans. C]
The bridge is Maxwell inductance
capacitance bridge.
Element is an inductor Inductance = Lx
effective resistance of the inductor = Rx
ms t
Moving iron meter reads RMS value only
Meter reads
= 57.73 V
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
a
C
The bridge is limited to measurement of

low Q inductor (1<Q<10).
It is clear from eq. (i) that the
measurement of high Q coils demands a
large value of resistance R1, perhaps 105
or 106 . The resistance boxes of such
high values are very expensive. Thus for
values of Q > 10, the bridge is unsuitable.
This a Maxwell inductance capacitance
bridge, so we can
Say directly that it is used for low Q - value
C
b
th
th
th
Page 508
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. A]
At balance,
)(
(
)
j
et
j
Comparing the real and imaginary parts
we get
Measurement
X=0
and
is purely capacitive.
.
It can be neglected in comparison to 2
4.
[Ans. B]
Error on reading 100 mV
m
.5 m
Also, error due to 5 counts

2.
[Ans. D]
For
(
(
)
j
j
)
j
j
j
j
Comparing the imaginary parts as real

parts are already equal
5m
.5 m
999
Hence, total error = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.0 mV
Meter will read between (100 1) mV
and (100+1) mV.
ie. Between (99.0 mV and 101 mV)
bridge must be balanced
5.
[Ans. A]
Heaviside campbell bridge method is
commonly used for finding mutual
inductance.
6.
[Ans. B]
At balanced condition,
frequency is coming to be imaginary

which is impossible, hence, cannot be
made zero.
j
j
Should be combination of R and L

his bridge is known as Maxwells
inductance bridge so we can directly say the
should be the combination of R and L
th
th
th
Page 509
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

(C.R.O, RF Meters, Special Meters, Q meter)
EE-2006
1.
The time/div and voltage/div axes of an
oscilloscope have been erased. A student
connects a 1 kHz, 5V p-p square wave
calibration pulse to channel 1 of the scope
and observes the screen to be as shown in
the upper trace of the figure.
An
unknown signal is connected to channel 2
(lower trace) of the scope. If the time/div
and V/div on both channels are the same,
the amplitude (p-p) and period of the
unknown signal are respectively
(A) 5 V, 1 ms
(B) 5 V, 2 ms
G
C
(A) A, B, C, A
(B) A, B, C, B
(C) 7.5 V, 2 ms
(D) 10 V, 1 ms
EE-2007
2.
The probes of a nonisolated, two channel
oscilloscope are clipped to points A, B and
C in the circuit of the adjacent figure.
is a square wave of a suitable low
frequency. The display on h and h are
as shown on the right. Then the Signal
and Ground probes S G and S G
of h and h respectively are connected
to points:
EE-2008
3.
Two sinusoidal signals ( t) = A sin t
and q( t) are applied to X and Y inputs
of a dual channel CRO. The Lissajous
figure displayed on the screen is shown
below:
The signal q( t)will be represented as
(A) q(
(B) q(
t) = A sin
2t)= A sin
2t,
=2
2t, 2 =
(C) q(
(D) q(
2t)=
2t,
2=
2t,
2=
A cos
2t)= A cos
EE-2009
4.
The two inputs of a CRO are fed with two
stationary periodic signals. In the X-Y
mode, the screen shows a figure which
changes from ellipse to circle and back to
ellipse with its major axis changing
orientation slowly and repeatedly. The
following inference can be made from
this.
(A) The signals are not sinusoidal
(B) The amplitudes of the signals are
very close but not equal
(C) The signals are sinusoidal with their
frequencies very close but not equal
(D) There is a constant but small phase
difference between the signals
(C) C, B, A, B
(D) B, A, B, C
th
th
th
Page 510
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2011
5.
A dual trace oscilloscope is set to operate
in the alternate mode. The control input
of the multiplexer used in the y-circuit is
fed with a signal having a frequency equal
to
(A) the highest frequency that the
multiplexer can operate properly
(B) twice the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
(C) the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
(D) half the frequency of the time base
(sweep) oscillator
The two signals S and S , shown in

figure, are applied to Y and X deflection
plates of an oscilloscope.
IN-2007
1.
The linear sweep for the time base in an
oscilloscope has deviation from its
nominal
waveform.
The
nominal
(dashed line) and actual (solid line)
sweep waveforms are shown in the
following figure.
Normal
Sweep
start
time
S
T
Retrace
Actual
time
7.
(C)
1.1T
1.15T
1.3T
EE-2014
6.
In an oscilloscope screen, linear sweep is
applied at the
(A) vertical axis
(B) horizontal axis
(C) origin
(D) both horizontal and vertical axis
Measurement
A 5V p-p sine wave with a frequency of

1 kHz will be measured on the
oscilloscope as a sine wave with
(A) 4.45 V p-p and 1 kHz frequency
(B) 5 V p-p and 1kHz frequency
(C) 5 V p-p and 1.1 kHz frequency
(D) 5 V p-p and 1.15 kHz frequency
The waveform displayed on the screen is
2.
Two signals of peak- to-peak voltages

5 V and 2V are being fed to Channel 1 and
Channel 2, respectively, of an oscilloscope
with a single time base. The vertical
sensitivity of both channels is
1 V/division. The two sine waves have
identical frequency and phase. The trigger
is on manual mode the triggers at a level
of +1.25 V on Channel 1, as shown in the
figure below:
th
th
th
Page 511
GATE QUESTION BANK
Which of the following figures correctly

depicts the trace seen in channel 2?
Measurement
IN-2008
3.
The x and y sensitivities of an analog
oscilloscope are set as 2 ms/cm and
1V/cm respectively. The trigger is set at
0V with negative slope. An input of
cos 00 t 300) V is fed to the y input of
the oscilloscope. The waveform seen on
the oscilloscope will be
(A)
(B)
(P)
(C)
(D)
(Q)
IN-2009
4.
The figure shows a periodic waveform to
be displayed on a CRO. A trigger setting
which ensures a stationary display is
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
(R)
-0.5
-1
-1.5
-2
-2.5
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(S)
(A) P
(B) Q
level: 0.2V, slope: ve

level: 0.2V, slope: +ve
(C) R
(D) S
th
th
th
Page 512
GATE QUESTION BANK
5.
The input impedance of CRO is equivalent

to a 1M resistance in parallel with a
45pF capacitance. It is used with a
compensated 10-1 attenuation probe. The
effective input capacitance at the probe
tip is
(A) 4.5pF
(C) 45pF
(B) 5pF
(D) 450pF
IN-2010
6.
In an analog single channel cathode ray
oscilloscope (CRO), the x and y
sensitivities are set as 1ms/div. and
1V/div. respectively. The y-input is
connected to a voltage signal
4 cos (200t 45) V. The trigger source
is internal, level chosen is zero and the
slope is positive. The display seen on the
CRO screen is
(A)
Measurement
IN-2011
7.
A transfer characteristics of the circuit
drawn below is observed on an
oscilloscope used in XY mode. The display
on the oscilloscope is shown in the right
hand side.
is connected to the X input
with a setting of 0.5 V/div, and
is
connected to the Y input with a setting of
2 V/div. The beam is positioned at the
origin when is zero.
sin 0t
Assuming that the op amp is ideal and

zener diodes have forward biased voltage
drop of 0.7 V, the value of reverse break
down voltage of and are respectively
(A) 3.3 V and 5.3 V
(B) 4.7 V and 6.7 V
(C) 6.7 V and 4.7 V
(D) 5.3 V and 3.3 V
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 513
GATE QUESTION BANK
Measurement

EE
1.
[Ans. C]
Peak-peak (p p) division of upper trace
voltage = 2 value of (p p) voltage = 5 V
.
division
Now it will be same for unknown voltage

(p p) division of unknown voltage = 3
p p voltage = 3 2.5 = 7.5 V
Frequency of upper trace = 1 kHz
Time period =
So, S is connected to point A and G is

connected to point B.
Voltage across inductor =
d
[
dt
= 1 ms
Division of x axis (upper) = 4

Division of x axis (lower) = 8
Period of unknown signal = 2 ms.
2.
So, S is connected to point C.

and G is connected to point B.
L
i(t)
3.
[Ans. D]
Here p( t) = A sin t
y line cuts 4 times the Lissagous patter
x line cuts 2 times the Lissagous patter
y
s
s
s
s (s
s
I(t)
(
(
)]
[Ans. B]
Square wave is of low frequency. So, it can
be assumed that time during which the
wave form are displayed on the screen,
the voltage across R and L is .
A
x
)
)
e
Voltage across resistance

i t
e
and q( t) will lead P( t) by 90 as
trace is a circle
q ( t) = A sin ( t + 90 )
q ( t) = A cos t.
th
th
th
Page 514
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
5.
[Ans. C]
Because of phase difference only figure
change from ellipse to circle and back to
ellipse
[Ans. D]
Alternate mode is used to display two
wave forms simultaneously by single CRT.
As fluorescent material stores light for
some time and eye sensing time is 20 ms.
By using multiplexer alternatively two
waves are connected to y plates. In this
mode the frequency of control signal to
multiplexer is equal to half off X time
base generator. In one sweep displays 1st
waveform and in the half record sweep
displays 2nd waveform connected to
Y plates. For low frequency signals
multiplexer is switches at high frequency
signals multiplexer is switches at high
frequency that the multiplexer can
operate. This is called chopping mode.
X0
time
base
X1
xy node
y
Vector sum (in x y)

Points
A
B
C
D
[Ans. B]
7.
[Ans. A]
S
y
0
1
0
y
1
1
0
x
1
2
0
2
tan
( )
0
45
0
225
[Ans. C]
It is clear from the figure that there is no
change in amplitude,
So it will show 5 V peak.
Also amplitude is function of Y plates
so no change.
But here slope during sweep will
change and that will responsible for
change frequency.
Slope is degraded by a factor 1.1, so
frequency will be multiplied by 1.1
(as f 1/T).
So f = 1
.
. kHz.
6.
IN
1.
Measurement
2.
[Ans. B]
As the two channel signals have same
frequency, phase and the trigger level is
set to 1.25 V which is below the
peak peak voltage of input signals
(5V and 2V). So an identical trace appears
on channel 2 also
th
th
th
Page 515
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. A]
X- sensitivity = 2 msec/ cm = Sx
Y-sensitivity = 1 V/cm = Sy
For input peak voltage,
=4V
So length on Y-axis from peak to peak.
l
6.
[Ans. A]
Vy(t) = 4 cos
is
0 sec
T/2 = 0 sec
Now half cycle on X- axis correspond to
length,
T
0 sec
l
c
S
sec c
This is shown in figure (A) only.
[Hint:- Negative slope is given]
5.
[Ans. C]
Hint: The signal is given with rising edge
so the slope will be +ve and only option
(C) satisfies this criteria.
set
00t
as
is set as
Internal triggering is chosen trigger

voltage level is 0V & Slope is positive
screen dimensions are 10div 8div
Number of cycles of signal displayed
f
T
00 z
0div
s div
cycle
The test signal is used as triggering
signal since internal triggering is chosen.
As the trigger voltage level is 0V, the
signal will be displayed from 0V onwards
and from rising side since trigger slope, is
positive.
Therefore option is A
4.
Measurement
7.
[Ans. D]
When is +ve
[2 Division 2V/division = 4 V]
0
[Ans. A]
C1
C
R
hen is ve
is reverse bias
Probe
is forward bias and
0.
3.3
When
So effective capacitance
is negative
[3 Division 2 V/Division = +6V]

0
0.
p
But effective input capacitance at probe
tip
.3
. p
th
th
th
Page 516
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Transmission and Distribution

EE-2006
1.
The concept of an electrically short,
medium and long line is primarily based
on the
(A) nominal voltage of the line
(B) physical length of the line
(C) wavelength of the line
(D) power transmitted over the line
2.
3.
4.
An HVDC link consists of rectifier,

inverter transmission line and other
equipments.
Which one of the following is true for this
link?
(A) The transmission line
produces/supplies reactive power
(B) The rectifier consumes reactive
power and the inverter supplies
reactive
power
from/to
the
respective connected AC systems
(C) Rectifier supplies reactive power and
the inverter
consumes reactive
power to/from the respective
connected AC systems
(D) Both the converters (rectifier and
inverter) consume reactive power
from the respective connected AC
systems
The A, B, C, D constants of a 220 kV line
are: A = D= 0.94
, B = 130
.
C=0.001
If the sending end voltage of
the line for a given load delivered at
nominal voltage is 240 kV, the % voltage
regulation of the line is
(A) 5
(C) 16
(B) 9
(D) 21
2.5m and 3m respectively. The voltage

(volt/km) induced in the telephone
circuit, due to 50 Hz current of 100 amps
in the power circuit is
(A) 4.81 (B) 3.56 (C) 2.29 (D) 1.27
A generator is connected through a
20 MVA 13.8/138 kV step down
transformer, to a transmission line. At the
receiving end of the line a load is supplied
through a step down transformer of 10
MVA, 138/69 kV rating, A 0.72 p.u. load,
evaluated on load side transformer
ratings as base values, is supplied from
the above system. For system base values
of 10 MVA and 69 kV in load circuit, the
values of the load ( in per unit) in
generator circuit will be
(A) 36 (B) 1.44 (C) 0.72 (D) 0.18
5.
EE-2007
6.
Consider the transformer connections in a
part of a power system shown in the
figure.
The nature of transformer
connections and phase shifts are
indicated for all but one transformer.
Which of the following connections, and
the corresponding phase shift , should
be used for the transformer between A
and B?
15kV
Y
400kV
220kV
Autotransformer
A single phase transmission line and a

telephone line are both symmetrically
strung one below the other, in horizontal
configurations, on a common tower. The
shortest and longest distances between
the phase and telephone conductors are
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
Star Star ( = )
Star Delta ( =
)
Delta Star ( =
)
Star Zigzag ( =
)
th
th
Page 517
GATE QUESTION BANK

7.
Two regional systems, each having

several synchronous generators and loads
are interconnected by an ac line and a
HVDC link as shown in the figure. Which
of the following statements is true in the
steady state:
HVDC link
Region 1
Region 2
AC line
(A) Both regions need not have the same

frequency
(B) The total power flow between the
regions ( +
) can be changed by
controlling the HVDC converters
alone
(C) The power sharing between the ac
line and the HVDC link can be
changed by controlling the HVDC
converters alone.
(D) The direction of power flow in the
HVDC link ( ) cannot be reversed.
8.
Consider a bundled conductor of an

overhead line, consisting of three
identical sub-conductors placed at the
corners of an equilateral triangle as
shown in the figure. If we neglect the
charges on the other phase conductors
and ground, and assume that spacing
between sub-conductors is much larger
than their radius, the maximum electric
field intensity is experienced at
Y
Z
Power Systems
The total reactance and total susceptance

of a lossless overhead EHV line, operating
at 50 Hz, are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu
respectively. If the velocity of wave
propagation is
km/s, then the
approximate length of the line is
(A) 122 km
(C) 222 km
(B) 172 km
(D) 272 km
9.
EE-2008
10.
An extra high voltage transmission line of
length 300 km can be approximated by a
lossless line having propagation constant
=0.00127 radians per km. Then the
percentage ratio of line length to
wavelength will be given by
(A) 24.24%
(C) 19.05%
(B) 12.12%
(D) 6.06%
A lossless transmission line having Surge
Impedance Loading (SIL) of 2280 MW is
provided with a uniformly distributed
series capacitive compensation of 30%.
Then,
SIL
of
the
compensated
transmission line will be
(A) 1835 MW
(C) 2725 MW
(B) 2280 MW
(D) 3257 MW
11.
EE-2009
12.
For a fixed value of complex power flow
in a transmission line having a sending
end voltage V, the real power loss will be
proportional to
(A) V
(C) 1/V2
(B) V2
(D) 1/V
EE-2010
13.
Power is transferred from system A to
system B by an HVDC link as shown in the
figure. If the voltages
and
are as
indicated in the figure, and I > 0, then
W
(A) Point X
(B) Point Y
(C) Point Z
(D) point W
th
th
th
Page 518
GATE QUESTION BANK

Power Flow
AC
System
A
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
14.
15.
Consider a three-core, three-phase, 50Hz,

11kV cable whose conductors are
denoted as R, Y and B in the figure. The
inter-phase capacitance ( ) between
each pair of conductors is 0.2F and the
capacitance between each line conductor
and the sheath is 0.4.F. The per-phase
charging current is
16.
C
AC
System
B
D
B
Rectifier
,
,
,
,
Inverter
,
,
,
Consider two buses connected by an

impedance of (0+j5) . The bus1 voltage
is 100
V, and bus2 voltage is
100
V. The real and reactive power
supplied by bus 1, respectively, are
(A) 1000 W, 268 VAr
(B) 1000 W, 134 VAr
(C) 276.9 W, 56.7 VAr
(D) 276.9 W, 56.7 VAr
C1
Outer Sheath
(A) 2.0 A
(B) 2.4 A
(C) 2.7 A
(D) 3.5 A
Consider a three-phase, 50Hz, 11kV

distribution system. Each of the
conductors is suspended by an insulator
string having two identical porcelain
insulators. The self-capacitance of the
insulator is 5 times the shunt capacitance
between the link and the ground, as
shown in the figure. The voltage across
the two insulators are
17.
(A) The magnitude of terminal voltage

decreases, and the field current does
not change.
(B) The magnitude of terminal voltage
increases, and the field current does
not change.
(C) The magnitude of terminal voltage
increases, and the field current
increases.
(D) The magnitude of terminal voltage
does not change, and the field
current decreases.
Y
C1
Receiving
end
A 50Hz synchronous generator is initially

connected to a long lossless transmission
line which is open circuited at the
receiving end. With the field voltage held
constant, the generator is disconnected
from the transmission line. Which of the
following may be said about the steady
state terminal voltage and field current of
the generator?
Long
Transmission
Line
Power Systems
5C
5C
Conductor
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
e
e
e
e
= 3.74 kV, e = 2.61 kV

= 3.46 kV, e = 2.89 kV
= 6.0 kV, e = 4.23 kV
= 5.5 kV, e = 5.5 kV
EE-2011
18.
A nuclear power station of 500 MW
capacity is located at 300 km away from a
load center. Select the most suitable
power
evacuation
transmission
configuration among the following
options.
th
th
th
Page 519
GATE QUESTION BANK

(A)
~
132 kV, 300 km double circuit
(B)
Power Systems
All the line reactances are equal to j1

Bus 2
Bus 1(slack) j1
Load
Center
Load
center
P2=0.1 pu
132 kV, 300 km single circuit with 40%

series capacitor compensation
(C)
~
400 kV, 300 km single circuit
(D)
~
400 kV, 300 km double circuit
Bus 3
P3=0.2 pu
Load
center
EE-2013
19.
A singlephase load is supplied by a
singlephase voltage source. If the
current flowing from the load to the
source is 10
A and if the voltage
at the load terminals is 1006 V, then
the
(A) Load absorbs real power and delivers
reactive power
(B) Load absorbs real power and absorbs
reactive power
(C) Load delivers real power and delivers
reactive power
(D) Load delivers real power and absorbs
reactive power
20.
j1
j1
Load
center
For a power system network with

n nodes, Z33 of its bus impedance matrix is
j0.5 per unit. The voltage at node 3 is
1.3
per unit. If a capacitor having
reactance of j3.5 per unit is now added
to the network between node 3 and the
reference node, the current drawn by the
capacitor per unit is
(A) 0.325
(B) 0.325
(C) 0.371
(D) 0.433
21 and 22
In the following network, the voltage
magnitudes at all buses are equal to 1 pu,
the voltage phase angles are very small,
and the line resistances are negligible.
21.
The voltage phase angles in rad at buses

2 and 3 are
(A) =
, =
(B) = , =
(C) =
, =
(D) =
, =
22.
If the base impedance and the

lineto line base voltage are 100 ohms
and 100 Kv, respectively, then the real
power in MW delivered by the generator
connected at the slack bus is
(A)
10
(C) 10
(B) 0
(D) 20
23.
(t) = cos
A source
t has an
internal impedance of (4+j3) . If a purely
resistive load connected to this source
has to extract the maximum power out of
the source, its value in should be
(A) 3
(C) 5
(B) 4
(D) 7
EE 2014
24.
A distribution feeder of 1 km length
having
resistance,
but
negligible
reactance, is fed from both the ends by
400V, 50 Hz balanced sources. Both
voltage sources S and S are in phase.
The feeder supplies concentrated loads of
unity power factor as shown in the figure.
S
th
~
z
th
th
Page 520
GATE QUESTION BANK
The contributions of
current
supplied
respectively, are
(A) 75 A and 25 A
(B) 50 A and 50 A
25.
26.
28.
A 183-bus power system has 150 PQ

buses and 32 PV buses. In the general
case, to obtain the load flow solution
using Newton-Raphson method in polar
coordinates, the minimum number of
simultaneous equations to be solved
is______________
29.
The complex power consumed by a

constant-voltage load is given by
(
j ),
where, k
k and
k
k
A compensating shunt capacitor is chosen
such that | | 0.25 kVAR, where Q is the
net reactive power consumed by the
capacitor-load combination. The reactive
power (in kVAR) supplied by the
capacitor is___________
30.
For a 400 km long transmission line, the

series impedance is (0.0 + J0.5) /km
and the shunt admittance is
(0.0 + J5.0) mho/km. The magnitude of
the series impedance (in ) of the
equivalent
circuit of the transmission
line is____________
(C) 25 A and 75 A
(D) 0 A and 100 A
Shunt reactors are sometimes used in

high voltage transmission systems to
(A) Limit the short circuit current
through the line.
(B) Compensate for the series reactance
of the line under heavily loaded
condition.
(C) Limit over-voltages at the load side
under lightly loaded condition.
(D) Compensate for the voltage drop in
the line under heavily loaded
condition.
In a long transmission line with r,l,g and c
are the resistance, inductance, shunt
conductance and capacitance per unit
length, respectively, the condition for
distortionless transmission is
(A) rc = lg
(C) rg = lc
(B) r = lc
27.
S and S in 100 A
at
location
P
Power Systems
(D) g = c l
For a fully transposed transmission line

(A) positive, negative and zero sequence
impedances are equal
(B) positive and negative sequence
(C) zero
and
positive
sequence
(D) negative
and
zero
sequence
th
th
th
Page 521
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems

1.
2.
3.
[Ans. C]
It is generally based wavelength of the
line
5.
[Ans. A]
a
[Ans. B]
Rectifiers act as an inductor (for < 900)
Inverters act as a capacitor (for < 900)
(
(
(%)
=0
ase impedance =
=(
=
[Ans. C]
+1
P1
pu
[Note: The Question in IIT Gate was wrong

and later it is modified]
1
P2
6.
[Ans. A]
D2=3 m
D1=2.5 m
15kV
T1
T2
Where, P1and P2 form power line and T1
and T2 form telephone line
Current in power circuit = I = 100 A
Mutual inductance between power line
and telephone line
D
=
ln ( ) m
D
= 16%
4.
ase impedance =
=
alues of load in ohm =
= alue of load in p u
ase impedance
=
=
Base values in generator circuit
(
) =
(k ) =
k
At the time of N.L,

( )=
Base value on load circuit

(
) =
and (k ) =
[Ans. C]
% voltage regulation of the line
=
load
line
ln (
Y
400kV
220kV
Autotransforme
Taking V1 asrthe reference

=
k
=
Phase difference and is
So,
=
k
leads
y
So,
=
k
=
lags
y
=
=
=
=
Phase difference between and
is
=
=
=
So, option (A) is correct
=
m
Voltage induced in the telephone line
=| |=
=
| | =
m
=
km
th
th
th
Page 522
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
8.
[Ans. C]
Both regions are connected by HVDC link
as well as AC line. So AC line is possible
when both regions have same frequency.
By changing fringe angle () of converter,
we can change the power sharing,
between the AC line and HVDC link.
Point X
10.
= 4947.39 km
Ratio =
=
= 0.0606
% Ratio = 6.06 %
Point Y
1
km
[Ans. D]
Wave length = , propagation constant =
=
l
l
l = length of line =
11.
2
l
=
[Ans. B]
Electric field intensity at various points
are shown as follows.
Power Systems
[Ans. C]
Surge impedance loading
= SIL = 2280 MW
= Surge impedance
Surge Impedance loading = SIL =
as voltage is constant
S
Point Z
Point W
Suppose Csc is the series capacitance per

unit length for series compensation.
Therefore, series reactance will be,
It is clear from the above diagrams that

minimum cancellation of vector occurs at
the point Y. Hence maximum electric field
intensity.
9.
[Ans. C]
Velocity of wave propagation
(
Therefore,
f
Total inductance of line =
=S
Inductance/km =
Total susceptance of line = 1.2 pu =
=j
=j
)
)
)
=j (
here
is known as degree of series
compensation
() =
)( )
km km
Let l is the length of the line
Total reaction of line =0.045 pu =
fc
12.
Total capacitance of line =

apacitance km =
=
=
[Ans. C]
S = Complex power
S is defined as , S = VI
S
=
If R is the resistance of transmission line
th
th
th
Page 523
GATE QUESTION BANK
Real power loss =
16.
=( )
=
Power Systems
[Ans. A]
0.4 F
Real power loss
13.
14.
Virtually
connected to
sheath
0.6 F
Since, S and R are fixed
0.6 F
0.6 F
0.4 F
[Ans. C]
Because, power flow takes from AB to CD
so
,
, and
Since current flows from high voltage to
low voltage.
0.4 F
Per charging current

=j
| | =
=
[Ans.A]
=
and =
as
, current will flow from
bus 1 to bus 2
=
j
17.
[Ans. B]
=
=
I1
omplex power = S =
(
j =
=
j
=
and =
15.
j =
5C
Line to line voltage =

= k
= Phase to ground voltage
[Ans. A]
As field voltage is held constant, so

field current does not change.
When the generator is connected

with open circuit transmission line,
line draws charging current
Therefore is higher than Eg

i.e. Vt > Eg
But when the generator is
disconnected from the line, no
charging current is delivered by the
generator i.e. IC = 0. In this Vt = Eg
So, terminal voltage decreases.
I2
I
5C
e =
k =
=
(j
) e = (j ) e
(j
)
e = e
Solving equation (i) and (ii), we get
e =
k
and e =
k
18.
th
(i)
e
(ii)
[Ans. D]
For transmission of bulk power of

very long distance high voltage
(400 kV) is used.
To increase reliability, double circuit

is used.
th
th
Page 524
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
21.
[Ans. B]
Current from load to source is
[Ans. B]
Bus-1 slack
Current from source to load

=
=
=
j
=
=
x =
[x = ]
x =
Here all the bus voltage are assumed at 1
P.u so, it is a DC load flow problem
So, [ ] = [ ] [ ]
and are power injection at bus 2

and 3
=
=
[load is ve]
x
=
[
x
x
x
x
=*
x ]
+=*
So, [ ] = *
[Ans. D]
Equivalent circuits
j
j
+
+=*
[Ans. C]
From previous solution we got.
[ ]=*
+ [ ]=*
+
Now. So,
=
=
=
Now, Base VA=
Bus-3
22.
Bus-2
Current lags voltage so, it absorbs the real

and reactive power.
(or)
Alternative Method:
Current from source to load
=
=
S=
=(
)(
)
=
j
=
j
,
Hence load absorbs real power and
reactive power
20.
Power Systems
Base MVA=100
So, MW delivered by slack generator
(bus )
=
=
23.
th
[Ans. C]
(t) = cos
t
internal impedance = (
j )
For maximum power transfer, the load
impedance magnitude should be same
th
th
Page 525
GATE QUESTION BANK
as source internal thevinens impedance

magnitude
Given the output should be only resistive
in nature maximum power transfer will
be at
=|
i|
=
24.
27.
[Ans. B]
Positive sequence impedance =
negative sequence impedance = x
x
Zero sequence impedance = x
x
x = self-reactance of each line
x = mutual reactance of any line pair
28.
[Ans. 332]
Number of equation to solved is n
=
=
Where n number of PQ buses
m number of PV buses
[Ans. D]
m
m
26.
From source 1, current I is supplied

Let the resistance per km
By KVL,
400 +I (400R) + (I 200)200R
+ (I 300)200R+ (I 500)200R
+400=0
400+400IR+200IR 40000R+200IR
60000R+200IR 1000R+100=0
On solving I = 200A
Which means at point P contribution of
source 1 is 200 200A = 0A
And contribution of source 2 to point P is
rest 100A
25.
Power Systems
29.
[Ans. 0.75]
Reactive power supplied
=
=Initial maximum reactance power
drawn by load
= Net reactive power consumed by
capacitor load combination
=
=
30.

z=
j km
y= j
km
=
km
section series impedance =
[Ans. C]
Under lightly loaded condition leakage
capacitance will supply
to the
load end causing its
voltage to rise.
Hence shunt reactors are used to
maintain the voltage at receiving by
absorbing some reactive power.
= zl =
r = zy =
rl = (
sin hrl
rl
)j
series impedance =
)
(
(
)(
))
=
j
Magnitude of series impedance =
[Ans. A]
For distortion less line
=
rc = lg
th
th
th
Page 526
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Economics of Power Generation

EE -2007
1.
The incremental cost curves in Rs/MW hr
for two generators supplying a common
load of 700 MW are shown in the figures.
The maximum and minimum generation
limits are also indicated. The optimum
generation schedule is:
Incremental Cost Rs/MWhr
600
450
200 MW
450 MW
GENERATOR A
EE-2008
3.
A lossless power system has to serve a
load of 250 MW. There are two
generators (
and
) in the System
with cost curves
and
respectively
defined as follows:
( )=
+ 0.055
( )=3
+ 0.03
Where
and
are the MW injections
from generator
and
respectively.
Then the minimum cost dispatch will be
(A)
= 250 MW;
= 0 MW
(B)
= 150 MW;
= 100 MW
(C)
= 100 MW:
= 150 MW
(D)
= 0 MW;
= 250 MW
Incremental Cost Rs/MWhr
EE-2009
4.
Three generators are feeding a load of
100MW. The details of the generators are
800
650
400 MW
150 MW
GENERATOR B
(A) Generator A: 400 MW,

Generator B: 300 MW
(B) Generator A: 350 MW,
Generator B: 350 MW
(C) Generator A: 450 MW,
Generator B: 250 MW
(D) Generator A: 425 MW,
Generator B: 275 MW
2.
An isolated 50 Hz synchronous generator

is rated at 15 MW which is also the
maximum continuous power limit of its
prime mover. It is equipped with a speed
governor with 5% droop. Initially, the
generator is feeding three loads 4 MW
each at 50 Hz. One of these loads is
programmed to trip permanently if the
frequency falls below 48 Hz. If an
additional load of 3.5MW is connected
then the frequency will settle down to
(A) 49.417 Hz
(C) 50.083 Hz
(B) 49.917 Hz
(D) 50.583 Hz
Generator-1
Generator-2
Rating
(MW)
100
100
Efficiency
(%)
20
30
Regulation (p.u.)
on 100 MVA base
0.02
0.04
Generator-3
100
40
0.03
In the event of increased load power

demand, which of the following will
happen?
(A) All the generators will share equal
power
(B) Generator-3 will share more power
compared to Generator-1
(C) Generator-1 will share more power
(D) Generator-2 will share more power
EE-2011
5.
A load center of 120 MW derives power
from two stations connected by 220 kV
transmission lines of 25 km and 75 km as
shown in the figure below. The three
generators
and
are of 100 MW
capacity each and have identical fuel cost
characteristics. The minimum loss
th
th
th
Page 527
GATE QUESTION BANK
generation schedule for supplying the 120

MW load is
25 km
120 MW
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
6.
= 80 MW + losses
= 20 MW
= 20 MW
= 60 MW
= 30 MW + losses
= 30 MW
= 40 MW
= 40 MW
= 40 MW + losses
= 30 MW + losses
= 45 MW
= 45 MW
For enhancing the power transmission in

a long EHV transmission line, the most
preferred method is to connect a
(A) series inductive compensator in the
line
(B) shunt inductive compensator at the
receiving end
(C) series capacitive compensator in the
line
(D) shunt capacitive compensator at the
sending end
EE-2012
7.
The figure shows a two-generator system
supplying a load of PD = 40 MW,
Connected at bus 2.
Bus 1
Bus 2
p , where the loss

coefficient is specified in pu on a 100 MVA
base. The most economic power
generation schedule in MW is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
~
~
75 km
EE-2014
8.
Three-phase to ground fault takes place at
locations
and
in the system shown
in the figure If the fault takes place at
location
, then the voltage and the
current at bus A are
and
respectively. If the fault takes place at
location , then the voltage and the
current at bus A are
and
respectively. The correct statement about
voltages and currents during faults at
and is
B
~
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
leads
and
leads
leads
and
lags
lags
and
leads
lags
and
lags
9.
In an unbalanced three phase system,

phase current
pu, negative
sequence current
pu,
zero sequence current
pu.
The magnitude of phase current in pu is
(A) 1.00
(C) 11.53
(B) 7.81
(D) 13.00
10.
A two bus power system shown in the

figure supplies load of 1.0+j0.5 p.u.
The fuel cost of generators and

( ) = 10,000 Rs/MWh and
( ) =12,500 Rs/MWh
And the loss in the line is
Power Systems
are:
th
th
th
Page 528
GATE QUESTION BANK

G1
13.
The horizontally placed conductors of a

single phase line operating at 50 Hz are
having outside diameter of 1.6 cm, and
the spacing between centers of the
conductors is 6 m. The permittivity of free
space is
/m.
The capacitance to ground per kilometer
of each line is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
14.
A three phase, 100 MVA, 25 kV generator

has solidly grounded neutral. The
positive, negative, and the zero sequence
reactances of the generator are 0.2 pu
and 0.05 pu, respectively, at the machine
base quantities. If a bolted single phase to
ground fault occurs at the terminal of the
unloaded generator, the fault current in
amperes immediately after the fault
is______________
The values of
respectively are
(A) 0.95 and 6.00
(B) 1.05 and 5.44
11.
12.
in p.u. and
(C) 1.1 and 6.00
(D) 1.1 and 27.12
A three phase star-connected load is

drawing power at a voltage of 0.9 pu and
0.8 power factor lagging. The three phase
base power and base current are
100. MVA and 437.38 A respectively. The
line-to-line load voltage in kV is____________
Power Systems
A synchronous generator is connected to

an infinite bus with excitation voltage
= 1.3 pu. The generator has a
synchronous reactance of 1.1 pu and is
delivering real power (P) of 0.6 pu to the
bus. Assume the infinite bus voltage to be
1.0pu. Neglect stator resistance. The
reactive power (Q) in pu supplied by the
generator to the bus under this condition
is ___________
th
th
th
Page 529
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems

1.
2.
[Ans. C]
Maximum incremental cost in
Rs/MWhr for Generator A
=600 (at 450 MW)
Minimum incremental cost in
Rs/MWhr for Generator B
=650(at 150 MW)
As maximum value of incremental cost of
A is less than minimum value of B.
enerator A will operate at it
maximum (o/p) 450 MW and B at
(700 450) =250MW
Power shared by
Generator 1> Generator 2> Generator 3
5.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
+
= 250MW
6.
[Ans. C]
To enhance the power transmission in a
long EHV transmission line, a series
capacitor is used
(i)
= 1 + 0.11
Power flow in line
= 3 + 0.06
For k% series capacitor compensation
For maximum cost of generation,

=
1 + 0.11
= 3 + 0.06
ii)
Solving equation (i) and (ii),
= 100 MW
= 150 MW
4.
~
~
Generator
is near to load and
,
are away from the load. To reduce losses,
more power is contributed from
Hence = 80 + losses,
= 20 MW, = 20 MW
3.5 = 1.16%
f = 0.583
f = 50 0.583 = 49.417 Hz
3R
120 MW
[Ans. A]
Here, change in (freq.) w.r.t. power
( )
3.
Power shared by a generator
(
7.
[Ans. A]
From coordination equation
[Ans. C]
Let x1, x2 and x3 are reactances of
generator -1, generator -2 and
generator -3 respectively.
Neglecting armature resistance of all the
three generators.
VR1=0.02p.u.
VR2 =0.04 p.u and
VR3=0.03 p.u.
VR1 < VR3 <VR2
Since, voltage regulation
R reactance of generator X1<X3<X2
Given
an
p
th
th
th
Page 530
GATE QUESTION BANK
As the base value is 100 MVA
10.
( )
Power Systems
[Ans. B]
j
j
j
j
A
j
j
co
in
co
co
A
8.
in
in
[Ans. C]
For fault at
Equivalent circuit
A
tan
in
11.
X
X Line impedance

co
p
power
p
Base
|X |
X
lea
or fa lt at f
olt
12.
lag
9.
[Ans. C]
[ ]
[Ans. *] (Range 0.1 to 0.2)

in
X
in
in
][
j
j
j
co
co
j in
j
in
co
ol ing thi
| |
th
th
th
Page 531
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
Power Systems
[Ans. B]
ln (
ln (
km
14.
[Ans. *] Range 15300 to 15500

Reference
p
j
j
p
a e
p
a e
th
th
th
Page 532
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Symmetrical Components & Faults Calculations

EE-2006
1.
Three identical star connected resistors of
1.0pu are connected to an unbalanced
3 phase supply. The load neutral is
isolated. The symmetrical components of
the line voltages in P.u are:
=X
,
=X
. If all the P.u calculations are
with the respective base values, the
phase to neutral sequence voltages are
(A)
=X ( +
),
=Y (
)
(B)
=X (
),
=Y ( +
)
(C)
=
=
(D)
X (
),
Y (
X (
),
Y (
Common data Question For 2 and 3.

A generator feeds power to an infinite bus
through a double circuit transmission
line. A 3- phase fault occurs at the middle
point of one of the lines. The infinite bus
voltage is 1 pu, the transient internal
voltage of the generator is 1.1 pu and the
equivalent transfer admittance during
fault is 0.8pu. The 100 MVA generator
has an inertia constant of
5 MJ/MVA and it was delivering 1.0pu
power prior of the fault with rotor power
angle of
. The system frequency is
50 Hz.
2.
3.
If the initial accelerating power is X pu,

the initial acceleration in elec. deg/sec2,
and the inertia constant in
MJ sec /elec. deg respectively will be
(A) 31.4 X,18
(C) X/1800,0.056
(B) 1800 X,0.056 (D) X/31.4,18
Common Data Question for 4 and 5
For a power system the admittance and
impedance matrices for the fault studies
are as follows.
j
j
j
j
j
=[ j
]
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
= [j
]
j
j
j
The pre-fault voltages are 1.0 p.u at all the
buses. The system was unloaded prior to
the fault. A solid 3 phase fault takes place
at bus 2.
4.
The post fault voltages at buses 1 and 3 in

per unit respectively are
(A) 1.24, 0.63
(C) 0.33, 0.67
(B) 0.31, 0.76
(D) 0.67, 0.33
5.
The per unit fault feeds from generators

connected to buses 1 and 2 respectively
are
(A) 1.20, 2.51
(C) 1.66, 2.50
(B) 1.55, 2.61
(D) 5.00, 2.50
6.
The Gauss Seidel load flow method has

following disadvantages. Tick the
incorrect statement
(A) unreliable convergence
(B) Slow convergence
(C) Choice of slack bus affects
convergence
(D) A good initial guess for voltages is
essential for convergence
The initial accelerating power (in pu) will

be
(A) 1.0
(C) 0.56
(B) 0.6
(D) 0.4
th
th
th
Page 533
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2007
7.
A three phase balanced star connected
voltage source with frequency rad/s is
connected to a star connected balanced
load which is purely inductive. The
instantaneous line currents and phase to
neutral voltages are denoted by (i i i )
and (
) respectively and their
rms values are denoted by V and I.
[
]
If
9.
A 230 V (phase), 50 Hz, three phase,

4 wire systems has a phase sequence
ABC. A unity power-factor load of 4kW is
connected between phase A and neutral
N. It is desired to achieve zero neutral
current through the use of a pure
inductor and pure capacitor in the other
two phases. The value of inductor and
capacitor is
(A) 72.95 mH in phase C and 139.02 F
in phase B
(B) 72.95 mH in phase B and 139.02 F
in phase C
(C) 42.12 mH in phase C and 240.79 F
in phase B
(D) 42.12 mH in phase B and 240.79 F
in phase C
i
[i ]
i
[
]
Then the magnitude of R is

(A) 3 VI
(C) 0.7 VI
(B) VI
(D) 0
8.
Suppose we define a sequence

transformation between a-b-c and
p-n-o variables as follows:
f
f
[f ] k [
] [f ] where
e
f
f
and k is a constant.
Now, if it is given that :
i
[ ]=[
] [i ] and
i
i
[ ]
[i ] then,
i
(A) Z = [
+[
Y
F
An 'a' phase to ground fault with zero

fault impedance occurs at the centre of
the transmission line. Bus voltage at X and
line current from X to F for the phase 'a',
are given by Va Volts and Ia Amperes,
respectively. Then, the impedance
measured by the ground distance relay
located at the terminal X of line XY will be
given by
(C) Z = 3k2 [
(D)
EE-2008
10. A two machine power system is shown
below. Transmission line XY has positive
sequence impedance of Z1 and zero
sequence impedance of Z0
(B) Z = [
Power Systems
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
Page 534
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
A 3 - phase transmission line is shown in

the figure
Power Systems
Common Data Question for 13, 14 and 15

Consider a power system
Y
Voltage drop across the transmission line

is given by the following equation
I
[
]
[
] [I ]
I
Shunt capacitance of the line can be
neglected. If the line positive sequence
impedance of
and zero sequence
impedance of
then the values of s
and Zm will be
(A) Zs
; m
(B) Zs
; m
(C) Zs
; m
(D) Zs
; m
Single line diagram of a 4-bus single

source distribution system is shown
below. Branches e1, e2, e3, and e4 have
equal impedances. The load current
values indicated in the figure are in per
unit Distribution Companys policy
requires radial system operation with
minimum loss. This can be achieved by
opening of the branch
~
e
1+j0
13.
The instant (t0) of the fault will be

(A) 4.682 ms
(C) 14.667 ms
(B) 9.667 ms
(D) 19.667 ms
14.
The rms value of the ac component of

fault current (Ix) will be
(A) 3.59 kA
(C) 7.18 kA
(B) 5.07 kA
(D) 10.15 kA
15.
Instead of the three phase fault, if single

line to ground fault occurs on phase 'a' at
point F with zero fault impedance then
the rms value of ac component of fault
current(Ix)for phase 'a' will be
(A) 4.97pu
(C) 14.93pu
(B) 7.0pu
(D) 29.85pu
e
5+j0
2+j0
(A) e
(B) e
~
I
Given that: = =1.0 + j0.0 P.u;

The positive sequence impedance are
=
=0.001 + j0.01 P.u and
= 0.006 + j0.06 P.u
3 phase Base MVA = 100
Voltage base = 400 kV (Line to Line)
Nominal system frequency = 50 Hz
The reference oltage for Phase a is
defined as V(t)=Vm cos(t).
A symmetrical three phase fault occurs at
centre of the line i e point F at time t0.
The positive sequence impedance from
source to point F equals
(0.004 + j0.04)p.u. The waveform
corresponding to phase 'a' fault current
from bus X reveals that decaying dc offset
current is negative and in magnitude at its
maximum initial value. Assume that the
negative sequence impedances are equal
to positive sequence impedances, and the
zero sequence impedances are three
times positive sequence impedances.
12.
(C) e
(D) e
th
th
th
Page 535
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2009
16. For the Y-bus matrix of a 4-bus system
given in per unit, the buses having shunt
elements are.
Power Systems
(A)
R
G
(B)
j[
17.
(C) 1 and 2
(D) 1, 2 and 4
(C)
Match the items in List-I with the items

in List-II and select the correct answer
using the codes given below the lists.
A.
B.
C.
D.
List I
Improve
power factor
reduce the
current ripples
increase the
power flow in
line
reduce the
Ferranti effect
Codes:
A
(A) 2
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 4
B
3
4
3
1
C
4
3
1
3
1.
List II
shunt reactor
2.
shunt capacitor
3.
series capacitor
4.
series reactor
r
G
r
G
19.
D
1
1
2
2
For the power system shown in the figure

below, the specifications of the
components are the following:
G : 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9%
G : 25 kV, 100 MVA, X = 9%
T : 25 kV/220 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12%
T : 220 kV/25 kV, 90 MVA, X = 12%
Line 1: 220 kV, X = 150 ohms
T
T
Line 1
Bus 1
Bus 2
Choose 25kV as the base voltage at the

generator G1, and 200 MVA as the MVA
base. The impedance diagram is
(A)
j 0.27
j 0.42
j 0.27
j 0.18
Y
B
(D)
EE-2010
18. The zero-sequence circuit of the three
phase transformer shown in the figure is
R
(A) 3 and 4
(B) 2 and 3
j 0.18
(B)
j 0.27
j 0.62
j 0.27
j 0.18
G
th
th
j 0.18
~
th
Page 536
GATE QUESTION BANK

(C)
j 0.42
j 0.27
(C)
j 0.27
j 0.21
j0.10
j 0.21
j2.25
j2.25
j0.10
Power Systems
G
(D)
(D)
j 0.42
j 0. 3
j 0.3
~
G115 kV
j0.10
22.
A three-bus network is shown in the

figure below indicating the p.u.
impedance of each element.
1
2
3
15 kV
j0.2
G2
j0.08
j0.1
G1 = 250 MVA , 15 kV , positive sequence

reactance
X = 25% on its own base
G2 = 100 MVA , 15 kV , positive sequence
reactance
X = 10% on its own base
and = 10 km , positive sequence
reactance
X = 0.225 /km
j0.1
The bus admittance matrix, Y-bus, of the

network is
(A) j[
(B) j[
(C) j[
20.
In the above system, the three-phase fault

MVA at the bus 3 is
(A) 82.55 MVA
(C) 170.91 MVA
(B) 85.11 MVA
(D) 181.82 MVA
10 km
10 km
j2.25
21.
EE-2011
Statement for Linked Answer Question
20 & 21
Two generator units G1 and G2 are
connected by 15 kV line with a bus at the
mid-point as shown below,
1
j2.25
j 0.21
j 0.21
G
j0.25
For the above system, the positive

sequence diagram with the p.u values on
the 100 MVA common base is
(D) j[
(A)
1
j0.10
j1.0
j1.0
j0.10
23.
(B)
1
j0.25
j1.0
j1.0
j0.10
A negative sequence relay is commonly

used to protect
(A) an alternator
(B) a transformer
(C) a transmission line
(D) a bus bar
th
th
th
Page 537
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2012
24. The bus admittance matrix of a three-bus
three-line system is
j[
EE-2014
27. A 2-bus system and corresponding zero
sequence network are shown in the
figure.
us
26.
and
and
C
and
and
Bus 2
pu
pu
(A) 0.2 pu
(B) 0.268 pu
us
The transformers T and T are connected

as
For the system shown below,

and
are complex power demands at bus 1 and
bus 2 respectively. If |V2| = 1 pu, the VAR
rating of the capacitor (
) connected at
bus 2 is
Bus 1
The sequence components of the fault

current are as follows: I
= j 1.5 pu,
I
= j 0.5 pu, I zero = j1 pu. The
type of fault in the system is
(A) LG
(C) LLG
(B) LL
(D) LLLG
If each transmission line between the two

buses is represented by an equivalent
-network, the magnitude of the shunt
susceptance of the line connecting
bus 1 and 2 is
(A) 4
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 0
25.
Power Systems
pu
pu
(C) 0.312 pu
(D) 0.4 pu
th
th
th
Page 538
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems

1.
[Ans. C]
In positive sequence.
Phase sequence is abc
Assuming
and
=1.1 p.u.
Voltage of the bus = | |
pu
Equivalent transfer admittance = 0.8.
Transfer reactance = x
P
= Electrical power delivered by the

generator
during fault =
P
||
sin
sin
pu
Mechanical input do not change during

fault So, P
pu
Accelerating power = P
P
P
P
pu
o if
3.
[Ans. B]
Inertial constant (in MJ s/elec deg)
GH
f
Where,
G = Machine rating
= 10 MVA
H = Inertial constant in MJ/MVA
= 5 MJ/MVA
GH
f
H
f
Accelerating in elec deg/ sec
P
P
ccelerating power = x
P
x
x
4.
[Ans. D]
In negative sequence,
Phase sequence is acb
Assuming
and
So, if
2.
[Ans. C]
Before fault
Electrical power delivered by the
generator P
pu
Mechanical input to the generator = P
At steady state,
P
P
pu
During fault
Initial rotor angle =
Internal voltage of the generator =|E |
Pre fault
Fault current =I
Solid 3- fault occurs at bus
and
th
th
th
Page 539
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. A]
1. The time taken to perform one
iteration of the computation is
relatively smaller in case of G-S
method but the number of iterations
required by G-S method for a
particular system and they increase
with the increase in the size of the
system. Which results in slow
convergence.
2. The convergence characteristic of
G-S method is sometimes very
seriously affected by the selection of
a slack bus and the selection of a
particular bus may result in poor
convergence.
7.
[Ans. A]
j
j
pu
Post fault voltage at bus I is given by
I
Post fault voltage at bus I=1
I
j
j
pu
Post fault voltage at bus I = 3
I
j
j
pu
5.
[Ans. C]
Yii = sum of the admittance directly
connected to ith bus
y
y
y
y excluded
y
o
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
j
j
j
y
j pu
Similarly,
y
y
j
j
j
y
j
pu
y
y
E
j
j
Power Systems
R=[
[
R =*
I
[I ]
I
I +
Magnitude of R is determined of matrix R

R = 3VI
8.
[Ans. B]
Here, [
I
] [I ]
I
j
Where, [
I
] = [Z] [I ]
I
I
] [I ]
I
I
[I ] = K [
I
[Current fed by generator i during fault]

E
E
[The system was unloaded]
Current fed by generator 1
I
[I ]
I
Similarly,
= K[A]
I
pu
Current fed by generator 2,
= K[A] [
] [I
= K[A] [
I
pu
th
th
th
]
]
Page 540
GATE QUESTION BANK
Comparing (1) & (2)
][
= [
=[
9.
10.
[Ans. D]
As the ground distance relay is located at
terminal X
Impedance measured by the relay
11.
[Ans. B]
Let &
be the self and mutual
inductance of a line
Positive sequence impedance
=
i
Zero sequence impedance
= +
ii
Solving eq (i) and eq (ii)
12.
[Ans. D]
Let impedance of each branch be R on
removing (e )
Losses =
Similarly on removing e ,
Losses =
on removing e ,
Losses =
on removing e ,
Losses =
o on removing bus e losses are
minimum, so correct option is (d)
13.
[Ans. A]
Voltage, V =
cos t
Current after fault
][
][
Power Systems
[Ans. B]
I
I
I
Taking
as the reference
P
cos
If an pure inductor is present in phase

B, then I lags
by
If a pure capacitor is present in phase
C, then I leads
by
If current through neutral is to be zero
I sin
I sin
I
I
I
I
I cos
I cos
I cos
|I |
|I |
|I|
i t
I
|I |
cos t
| |
at t = t ; i = 0
cos t
| |
|I |
|I |
| |
The maximum value will be at
t
mH
| C
C
C
f
m sec
F
th
th
th
Page 541
GATE QUESTION BANK
14.
Power Systems
[Ans. A]
j
.003 + j 0.03
.003 + j 0.03
.001 + j 0.01
.001 + j
0.01
eq
j
j
j
From eq (i)
=
=
From eq (ii)
I =
=
=
eq =
j
||
j
eq = 0.002 + j 0.02 p.u
E =
= 1.0 p.u
[ pre fault voltage not specified]
I =
= 49.75
=I
From eq (iii)
pu
=
=
=
=
From eq (iv)
= 144.34
j
j
= 7.18KA
I =
15.
= 3.59
[Ans. C]
I =
Given that
I =
and
I = 29.85
I =
16.
p.u
17.
= 14.93
[Ans. C]
If directly we can add all the elements of
each row. If the sum is not zero, then that
bus contains shunt elements
For ith bus add all the element of ith row.
If sum = 0 ith bus contain shunt elements
[
here
j . . . .(i)
j
ii
j . . (iii)
j
iv
[Ans. B]
Shut capacitor are used to provide part
of the reactive
s required by the load
to keep the voltage within desirable limits
and to improve factor.
Series reactor reduces current ripple.
Shunt reactors are used across
capacitive loads or lightly loaded lines to
absorb some of the leading
s to
control the voltage across the load to
within certain desirable limit.
Series capacitor campensation reduces
the series impedance of the line. Power
flow inline
increases, as
power flow in line

decreases.
j
j
th
th
th
Page 542
GATE QUESTION BANK
18.
[Ans. C]
19.
23.
[Ans. A]
Negative sequence load used to protect
the alternator against unbalanced load
24.
[Ans. B]
Power Systems
[Ans. B]
j[
j[
but,
So,
20.
for Bus admittance matrix,
= j0.62 pu.
[Ans. A]
J1.0
so shunt susceptance of the line

connecting bus1 and 2 is+j2
J1.0
2
-10
+ j2
+j2
-10
N
= 0.25
25.
[Ans. C]
I
= +j 1.5 P.u
I
= j 0.5 P.u
I
= j 1.0 P.u
Since, two sequence current is present,
the type, of fault is not L-L fault
In L-G fault: all sequence networks will be
connected in series. So, the current is
same for all I
I &I
In for the case of LLLG fault, as it is
balanced fault, only two sequence current
will be present in the system.
So, from the above, the type of fault is LLG
26.
[Ans. B]
( ) = 0.1
= 0.1
21.
( ) = 0.1
= 0.225 10 (
) = j1.0
= 0.225 10 (
) = j1.0
[Ans. D]
C
22.
[Ans. B]
1
j0.1
j
j5
0
j0.08
j0.1
V1 =
j0.2
+j 2
j
j
j5
j
= 1p.u.
1-0
z=
j0.5p.u.
0
j
j
V2=
I12
Line is lossless
= 1p.u.
= 1+1
= 2p.u.
Power transfer from bus-1 to bus-2 is
th
th
th
Page 543
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
l p.u.
|
||
sin (
; sin
sin
sin
;
};
; V2 = 1
I12 =
= 1-j0.288
Current
=l
; Current in
=l
[1 j0.268]=
0.268
VAR rating of capacitor
= |V2||lQ|sin(|V2||I2|)
= 1 0.268 sin(+90)
= 0.268
27.
[Ans. B]
For
New sequence network

For
th
th
th
Page 544
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Power System Stability

EE-2006
1.
A 400 V, 50Hz, three phase balanced
source supplies power to a star connected
load whose rating is 123 k VA, 0.8 pf
(lag). The rating (in kVAR) of the delta
connected (capacitive) reactive power
bank necessary to bring the pf to unity is
(A) 28.78
(C) 16.60
(B) 21.60
(D) 12.47
EE-2007
2.
Consider the two power systems shown
in figure A below, which are initially not
interconnected, and are operating in
steady state at the same frequency.
Separate load flow solutions are
computed individually for the two
systems, corresponding to this scenario.
The bus voltage phasors so obtained are
indicated on figure A. These two isolated
systems are now interconnected by a
short transmission line as shown in figure
B, and it is found that
P1 = P2 = Q1 = Q2 = 0;
1 02 0
~
~
1 02 10
~
~
1 0 20
Fig (A)
P1,Q1
10
1 02 0
1.0 0
10
One line trips
130
(A) 0.87
(B) 0.74
4.
(C) 0.67
(D) 0.54
The figure below shows a three phase selfcommutated voltage source converter
connected to a power system.
The
converters dc bus capacitor is marked as
C in the figure. The circuit is initially
operating in steady state with
= 0 and the capacitor dc voltage is equal
to Vdc0. You may neglect all losses and
harmonics. What action should be taken
to increase the capacitor dc voltage
slowly to a new steady state value?
Y
1 02 15
~
~
Y
The bus voltage phase angular difference

between generator bus X and generator
bus Y after the interconnection is
(A) 100
(C) 300
0
(B) 25
(D) 300
3.
0.1 pu
~
~
P2,Q2
Fig (B)
it is constant at 1.0 pu. Due to some

previous disturbance, the rotor angle ()
is undergoing an undamped oscillation,
with the maximum value of (t) = 1300.
One of the parallel lines trips due to relay
malopeation at an instant when
(t) = 1300 as shown in the figure. The
maximum value of the power unit line
reactance, x, such that the system does
not lose synchronism subsequent to this
tripping is
Three
Phase
Voltage
Source
converter
(A) Make positive and maintain it at a

positive value
(B) make positive and return it to its
original value
Consider a synchronous generator

connected to an infinite bus by two
identical parallel transmission lines. The
transient reactance
of the generator is
0.1 pu and the mechanical power input to
th
th
th
Page 545
GATE QUESTION BANK
(C) make negative and maintain it at a

negative value
(D) make negative and return it to its
original value
peed
orque
M
EE-2009
5.
A 500 MW, 21kV, 50 Hz, 3-phase, 2- pole
synchronous generator having a rated
p.f = 0.9, has a moment of inertia of
27.5 10 kg-m2. The inertia constant (H)
will be
(A) 2.44 s
(C) 4.88 s
(B) 2.71 s
(D) 5.42 s
EE-2012
6.
A cylindrical rotor generator delivers
0.5 pu power in the steady state to an
infinite bus through a transmission line of
reactance 0.5 pu. The generator no-load
voltage is 1.5 pu and the infinite bus
voltage is 1pu. The inertia constant of the
generator is 5MW-S/MVA generator
reactance is 1 pu, the critical clearing
angle, in degrees, for a three phase dead
short circuit fault at the generator
terminal is
(A) 53.5
(C) 70.8
(B) 60.2
(D) 79.6
(a)
M
peed
orque
(b)
The stable operating points are

(A) P and R
(C) Q and R
(B) P and S
(D) Q and S
9.
The figure shows the single line diagram

of a single machine infinite bus system.
Infinte
bus
The inertia constant of the synchronous
generator = 5M -s/MVA. Frequency is
50 Hz.
Mechanical power is 1 pu. The system is
operating at the stable equilibrium point
with rotor angle equal to 30 . A three
phase short circuit fault occurs at a
certain location on one of the circuits of
the double circuit transmission line.
During fault, electrical power in pu
is
sin If the values of and ddt at
the instant of fault clearing are 45 and
3.762 radian/s respectively,
then
(in pu) is____________
EE-2014
7.
The undesirable property of an electrical
insulating material is
(A) high dielectric strength
(B) high relative permittivity
(C) high thermal conductivity
(D) high insulation resistivity
8.
Power Systems
The torque-speed characteristics of motor

( ) and load ( ) for two cases are
shown in the figures (a) and (b). The load
torque is equal to motor torque at points
P, Q, R and S
th
th
th
Page 546
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems

1.
2.
3.
[Ans. D]
= 12 3 0 8 = 16.627 kW
= 12
3 0 6 =12.47 kW
cos = 0 8
sin = 0 6
For unity pf, the total reactive power is
zero
Assuming kVAR rating of capacitor bank
=
=0
=
= 12 47 k
So, capacitor banks supplies 12.47 kVAR
reactive power to the load.
[Ans. A]
As = = 0 and
=
=0
There is no energy transfer, so both bus
bar voltage and its phase angle should be
same, so we can consider both bus bar
phase angle as zero.
Phase angle of y y = 20
hase angle of x = x = 30
( hase angle difference
= x
y
= 30
20 = 10
[Ans. C]
Here the alternator is undergoing under
damped oscillations with max = 1300, at
this any fault occurs even then also to
maintain stability value must not go
beyond 1300 for a given mechanical input
= 10 0
E = 1.0
PS = 1.0 P.u
Xeq: equivalent reactance when online is
removed due to normal operation of relay
Xeq = 0.1 + x
sin 130 = 1 0
= 0 67 u [
= 1.0 P.u]
4.
[Ans. D]
To increase the capacitor d.c. voltage
slowly to a new slowly to a new steady
state value, make negative and return
it to its original value.
5.
[Ans. A]
G=
MW = 555.56 MVA
KE Stored
=
27 5
)
10
= 1357.07 MJ
H=
6.
= 2.44 MJ/MVA
[Ans. D]
=
05 =
Infinite bus
| || |
(
sin
15 1
sin
(1 0 5)
= sin (0 5) = 30 =
= 130
sin =
6
Critical clearing angle
= cos [(
2 ) sin
cos ]
th
th
th
Page 547
GATE QUESTION BANK
= cos
= cos
1 3
+
3
3
2
(0 18) = 79 56
*(
7.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. B]
At P point, speed change by
s,
will
increase
- increase
Hence speed will increases by s, hence
move back to previous point.
Hence stable point
At s point, speed change by s, increases, speed will decrease by
s.
Hence move back to pervious point.
Hence stable point
d
d
d
d
For stability
9.
Power Systems
d ( 30)
=
dt
180
(cos cos 30)

d
at = 45 ,
= 3 762
dt
5
3 762
3 14 50
( 30)
3
=
(cos
)
180
2
5
3 762
3 14 50
(45 30)
3
=
(cos 45
)
180
2
0 12 = 0 88
1
(
2
3
)
2
= 0 23
[Ans. *] Range 0.22 to 0.24

d
=
(pu)
f dt
= 1(pu)
efore fault condition
sin =
(at equilibrium)
( ) sin = 1
sin 30 = 1
= 2(pu)
sin
sin
30 45
During fault condition

d
=
f dt
d
=1
sin
f dt
d
= (1
sin )dt
f dt
th
th
th
Page 548
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Protection & Circuit Breakers

EE-2006
1.
Keeping in view the cost and overall
effectiveness, the following circuit
breaker is best suited for capacitor bank
switching
(A) Vacuum
(C) SF6
(B) air blast
(D) Oil
2.
EE-2008
4.
A lossless single machine infinite bus
power system is shown below
1.0 pu
1.0 pu
The synchronous generator transfers

1.0 per unit of power to the infinite bus.
The critical clearing time
of circuit
breaker is 0.28 s. If another identical
synchronous generator is connected in
parallel to the existing generator and each
generator is scheduled to supply 0.5 per
unit of power. Then the critical clearing
time of the circuit breaker will
(A) reduce to 0.14 s
(B) reduce but will be more than 0.14 s
(C) remain constant 0.28 s
(D) increase beyond 0.28 s
5.
Voltage phasors at the two terminals of a

transmission line of length 70 km have a
magnitude of l.0 per unit but are 180
degrees out of phase. Assuming that the
maximum load current in the line is th of
minimum 3-phase fault current. Which
one of the following transmission line
protection schemes will NOT pick up for
this condition?
(A) Distance protection using mho relays
with zone-1 set to 80% of the line
impedance
(B) Directional over current protection
set to pick up at 1.25 times the
maximum load current
(C) Pilot relaying system with directional
comparison scheme
(D) Pilot
relaying
system
with
segregated
phase
comparison
scheme
Transmission
Line
Bus C
Stuck breaker
4
Bus A
F
5
Bus B
(A) 1, 2, 6, 7, 3, 5
(B) 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 3
Transmission
Line
pu
In a biased differential relay, the bias is

defined as a ratio of
(A) number of turns of restraining and
operating coil
(B) operating
coil
current
and
restraining coil current
(C) fault current and operating coil
current
(D) fault current and restraining coil
current
EE-2007
3.
Consider the protection system shown in
the figure below. The circuit breakers
numbered from 1 to 7 are of identical
type. A single line to ground fault with
zero fault impedance occurs at the
midpoint of the line (at point F), but
circuit breaker 4 fails to operate
(stuck breaker).
If the relays are
coordinated correctly, a valid sequence of
circuit breaker operation is
(C) 5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2
(D) 5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
th
th
th
Page 549
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2009
6.
Match the items in List-I with the items
in List-II and select the correct answer
using the codes given below the lists.
List I
List II
a. Short Line
1. Ohm Relay
b. Medium Line
2. Reactance Relay
c. Long Line
3. Mho Relay
(A) a 2, b 1, c 3
(B) a 3, b 2, c 1
9.
Consider a stator winding of an alternator

with an internal high-resistance ground
fault. The currents under the fault
condition are as shown in the figure. The
winding is protected using a differential
current
scheme
with
current
transformers of ratio 400/5 A as shown.
The current through the operating coil is
CT ratio 400/5
(C) a 1, b 2, c 3
(D) a 1, b 3, c 2
Reactor
(A) 1pu
(B) 1pu
8.
CT ratio 400/5
(220+j0)A
EE-2010
7.
Consider a step voltage wave of
magnitude 1pu travelling along a lossless
transmission line that terminates in a
reactor. The voltage magnitude across the
reactor at the instant the travelling wave
reaches the reactor is
A
Power Systems
(250+j0)A
Operating coil
(A) 0.17875
(B) 0.2A
(C) 0.375A
(D) 60kA
EE-2014
10. The overcurrent relays for the line
protection and loads connected at the
buses are shown in the figure.
(C) 2pu
(D) 3pu
~
100A
A three-phase, 33kV oil circuit breaker is

rated 1200A, 2000MVA, 3s. The
symmetrical breaking current is
(A) 1200 A
(C) 35 kA
(B) 3600 A
(D) 104.8 kA
The relays are IDMT in nature having the

characteristic
.
ime ultiplier etting
t
( lug setting ultiplier) .
The maximum and minimum fault
currents at bus B are 2000 A and 500 A
respectively.
Assuming
the
time
multiplier setting and plug setting for
relay
to be 0.1 and 5A respectively, the
operating time of
(in seconds)
is_________
th
th
th
Page 550
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems

1.
2.
[Ans. A]
Vacuum circuit breakers are specially
used for low cost switch having low fault
interrupting capacity, but capable of large
number of load switching operations
without maintenance.
4.
[Ans. D]
0.5 P.u
~
The critical clearing time can be evaluated
for a given critical clearing angle for the
special case where electrical output is
zero and mechanical input is constant so
that the accelerating power is constant
during fault.
Note:- [If the accelerating power is not
constant then we cannot evaluate the
critical clearing time ]
d
dt
[ electrical power delivered ( e) = 0
during fault]
d
d
.t
dt
dt
t
I2
Electrical
equipment
i2
i1
Relay coil
i0=|i1|-|i2|
Restraining coil
Operation of force relay coil

= (|i | |i |)
Opposing force produced by restrain coil
=n (
| | | |
)
From initial conditions at t = 0,
At balance (or) boundary condition

(|i |
=
|i |) = n (
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
( )
= bias
where
ritical clearing angle
t
ritical clearing time
Where n & n are the number of turns on

operating relay coil and restrained coil
respectively
3.
0.5 P.u
[Ans. B]
I1
[Ans. C]
If the relays are co ordinated correctly,
due to fault in a particular section, relay
in that section must operate first, then
relays in near by section if first fails, it is
back up protection. Thus, the sequence is
[5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2].
Initially when one machine is delivering

1.0 P.u electrical output
. .u
When two identical generators are
delivering a total electrical power output
of 1.0 p.u.,
. p. u.
t
th
th
th
Page 551
GATE QUESTION BANK
The instant the travelling wave reaches

the reactor
(t)|
p. u
8.
[Ans.C]
6.
7.
[Ans. A]
Distance protection using mho relays
with zone-1 set to 80% of the line
impedance will not provide protection.
9.
CT ratio
400/5
250 A
250 A
CT ratio
400/5
I2
I1
I0C
Operating coil
Current through operating coil = I

I
I
.
.
.
10.
ZC
(in
[Ans. C]
[Ans. B]
Let surge impedance of the line = Zc
E=Step voltage wave of magnitude 1 p.u.
s
)
(
[Ans. A]
For a short line of transmission, reactance
relay is used
For a medium line of transmission
impedance relay is used
For a long line of transmission, MHO relay
is used.
(s)
critical clearing time of breaker will

increase beyond 0.28 sec.
5.
Power Systems
[Ans. *] Range 0.21 to 0.23
~
I(s)
E(s)
Ls
V(s)
t
I(s)
(s)
(s)
I
I
(s)
s
oltage across the reactor
(s)
I(s). s
s
s
s
(s)
(t)|
.e
at
t=0
aximum load current at

or a setting current of
plug setting is
ax fault current
ratio current setting
or elay
[ . .
. ]
. .
. .
s)
.
. .
( . . ) .
.
(
.
th
th
th
.
)
.
sec
Page 552
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Systems
Generating Stations
EE-2009
1.
Out of the following plant categories
(i) Nuclear
(iii) Pump Storage
(ii) Run-of-river
(iv) Diesel
The base load power plants are
(A) (i) and (ii)
(B) (ii) and (iii)
(C) (i), (ii) and (iv)
(D) (i), (iii) & (iv)
constants. If the two plants optimally

share 1000 MW load at incremental fuel
cost of 100 Rs/MWh, the ratio of load
shared by plants and is
(A) 1:4
(C) 3:2
(B) 2:3
(D) 4:1
3.
There are two generators in a power

system. No-load frequencies of the
generators are 51.5 Hz and 51 Hz,
respectively, and both are having droop
constant of 1 Hz/MW. Total load in the
system is 2.5 MW. Assuming that the
generators are operating under their
respective droop characteristics, the
frequency of the power system in Hz in
the steady state is ______
EE-2014
2.
The fuel cost functions of two power
plants are
Where,
and
are the generated
powers of two plants, and A and B are the

1.
[Ans. C]
2.
[Ans. D]
From
3.
[Ans. *] Range 49.9 to 50.1

( )
th
th
th
Page 553
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
Basics of Power Semiconductor Devices

EE-2006
1.
A voltage commutation circuit is shown in
figure. If the turn off time of the SCRs is
50 sec and a safety margin of 2 is
considered, then what will be the
approximate minimum value of capacitor
required for proper commutation?
200V dc. The forward drops of all

transistors/diodes and gate-cathode
junction during ON state is 1.0 V.
The resistance R should be
3.
1.0
50
C
100V
200V
Th1
Th2
(A) 2.88 F
(B) 1.44
2.
PT
+10V
50
SCR
(C) 0.91
(D) 0.72
An SCR having a turn ON time of 5 sec,

latching current of 50 mA and holding
current of 40 mA is triggered by a short
duration pulse and is used in the circuit
shown in figure. The minimum pulse
width required to turn the SCR ON will be
20
5k
100V
0.5H
(A) 251 sec

(B) 150 sec
(C) 100 sec

(D) 5 sec
EE-2007
Common Data for Question 3 & 4
A 1: 1 Pulse transformer (PT) is used to
trigger the SCR in the adjacent figure. The
SCR is rated at 1.5kV, 250A with
IL=250 mA, IH =150 mA, and
=150 mA,
=100 mA. The SCR is
connected to an inductive load, where
L=150 mH in series with a small
resistance and the supply voltage is
(A) 4.7 k
(B) 470
4.
(C) 47
(D) 4.7
The minimum approximate volt-second

rating of the pulse transformer suitable
for triggering the SCR should be:
(volt-second rating is the maximum of
product of the voltage and the width of
the pulse that may be applied)
(A) 2000 V-s
(C) 20 V-s
(B) 200 V-s
(D) 2.0 V-s
EE 2008
5.
The truth table of a monoshot shown in
the figures is given in the table below:
Two monoshots, one positive edge
triggered and other negative edge
triggered, are connected shown in the
figure. The pulse widths of the two
monoshot outputs, Q and Q are T
and T
respectively.
R
X
Q
X
Y
0
1
th
th
th
0.7R
07R
Page 554
GATE QUESTION BANK

R
C
Q
0.7R
+5V
(B)
C
Q
0.7R
1.5
current
1
0.5
0
The frequency and the duty cycle of the

signal at Q will respectively be
(C)
(B) f
(C) f
10
20
30
time (ms)
40 50
0.5
(D) f
10
20 30
40
time(ms)
10
20
50
(D)
1.5
current
EE-2009
6.
An SCR is considered to be a
semi-controlled device because
(A) it can be turned OFF but not ON with
a gate pulse
(B) it conducts only during one half-cycle
of an alternating current wave
(C) it can be turned ON but not OFF with
a gate pulse
(D) it can be turned ON only during one
half-cycle of an alternating voltage
wave
1
0.5
0
0
8.
30 40
times(ms)
50
Match the switch arrangements on the

top row to the steady-state V-I
characteristics on the lower row. The
steady state operating points are shown
by large black dots.
The circuit shows an ideal diode

connected to a pure inductor and is
connected to a purely sinusoidal 50Hz
voltage source. Under ideal conditions the
current waveform through the inductor
will look like
(a)
(b)
is
0.1
V
1.5
5
current
(A) f
is
(I)
10 sin100 T
(II)
(A)
Vs
1.5
current
7.
Power Electronics
Vs
0.5
0
10
20
30
time(ms)
40
50
th
th
th
Page 555
GATE QUESTION BANK
(c)
Power Electronics
(d)
T
15V
(A) 10 s
(B) 50 s
+
i
is
(III)
(IV)
Vs
Vs
Codes:
a
(A) I
(B) II
(C) IV
(D) IV
b
II
IV
III
III
c
III
I
I
II
d
IV
III
II
I
~
(i), (ii) and (iii)
(A)
(B) (ii), (iii) and (iv)
(C) (ii) and (iii)
(D) (i) and (iv)
13.
EE-2013
11. Thyristor T in the figure below is initially
off and is triggered with a single pulse of
EE-2012
10. The typical ratio of Latching current to
holding current in a 20 A thyristor is
(A) 5.0
(C) 1.0
(B) 2.0
(D) 0.5
and C =(
(C) 100 s
(D) 200 s
EE-2014
12. Figure shows four electronic switches
(i), (ii), (iii) and (iv). Which of the
switches can block voltages of either
polarity applied between terminals a
and b when the active device is in the
OFF state?
a
a
a
a
EE-2011
9.
Circuit turn-off time of an SCR is defined
as the time
(A) taken by the SCR to turn off
(B) required for the SCR current to
become zero
(C) for which the SCR is reverse biased
by the commutation circuit
(D) for which the SCR is reverse biased
to reduced its current below the
holding current
width 10 s. It is given that L =(
ii
iii
iv
A diode circuit feeds an ideal inductor as

Given V
100 sin t V, where
100 rad/s, and L = 31.83 mH. The
initial value of inductor current is zero.
Switch S is closed at t = 2.5ms. The peak
value of inductor current i (in A) in the
first cycle is________
t 2.5 ms
i
. Assuming latching and
holding current of the thyristor are both

zero and the initial charge on C is zero, T
conducts for
th
~
th
th
Page 556
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics

1.
[Ans. A]
Anode current
i
i
0.02 5 1 e
Let minimum pulse width is T
To turn on ia latching current
0.02 5 1 e
)
50m
0.05
T 150 sec
R2
R1
C
VS
Th2
Th1
In this type of commutation, a thyristor

carrying load current is commutated by
transferring its load current to another
incoming thyristor.
Firing of SCR Th1 commutates Th2 and
subsequently, firing of SCR Th2 would
turn off Th1.
Circuit turn off time t for Th
t
R ln 2
and circuit turn off timet for Th
t
R ln 2
as R
R
50
t
t
R cln 2
Safety margin = 2
So, R ln2 2t
2 50 10
c
2.88
50 ln2
[Ans. C]
10
D1
20
0.5H
V2
V1
D2
+
200V
VCE
When the pulses are applied to the base

of the transistor. Transistor operates in
ON state. So, the forward voltage drop in
transistor V
1 V.
V
10 V
10 1 9V
1
V
V ( ) V
9V [turn ratio 1 1]
1
is forward biased and voltage drop in
diode V =1 V
is reversed biased and acts as open
circuit.
Capacitor behaves as open circuit for dc
voltage. Forward voltage drop of gate
cathode junction
V
1V
Voltage drop across resistor R.
V
V
V
V
9 1 1 7V
To ensure turn ON of SCR,
V
7
R
47
150m
iR
R2=5K
K
R
iA
iL
ig
PT
+10V
[Ans. B]
V=100
2.
3.
Current through 5 k resistor

V
100
i
R
5 10
20m
0.02
Current through inductor
V
i
(1 e
)
R
100
.
(1 e
)
20
5 1 e
th
th
th
Page 557
GATE QUESTION BANK
4.
[Ans. A]
7.
[Ans. C]
Frequency of the voltage source,
f = 50 Hz
RL = 1
L
+
iL
VT
Time period, T =
voltage, 0 < t< , energy is stored in the
Forward voltage drop of SCR during

ON state VT=1 V
I
C
+ V
V
di
dt
Ri
inductor and current increases.

During negative half cycle of the source
voltage,
I
8.
0.15
V
V
V
I
I
In
Parallel
V
Switch is ON if either T or impressed

are ON and Switch is OFF, if both T or
impressed D are OFF.
I
1
T
T, current decreases and
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
f
energy stored in the inductor is delivered

to source.
di
i
1 0
dt
i
199(1 e . )
Gate pulse width required = time taken
by i to rise upto
T
250 10
199(1 e . )
T 188.56 s
Width of the pulse = T = 188.56 s
Magnitude of voltage = V = 10 V
Voltage second rating of PT
VT = 10 188.56 s
1885.6 v-s
2000 v-s
5.
20 ms.
During positive half cycle of the source

E=200V
200
Power Electronics
V
6.
[Ans. C]
SCR can only be turn on by applying gate
pulses but it cannot be turnoff by the
same. Once the thyristor is on, and its
anode current is above the latching
current level the gate loses control. It can
be turned off only by reducing the anode
current below holding current. Only
triggering can be done through gate but
commutation cant be done through gate
gate loses control after the SCR turns on.
9.
[Ans. C]
The turn off time provided to the
thyristor by a circuit is called circuit turn
off time. It is defined as the time between
the instant anodes current becomes zero
and the instant reverse voltage due to the
circuit reaches zero.
th
th
th
Page 558
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
11.
[Ans. B]
For medium power thyristors of rating
6 A to 60A the ratio of the latching
current to holding current is 1.5 to 2.
[Ans. C]
1
f
1
f
at t
i
1
100
Power Electronics
(cos ( ) cos t)
4
10ms is maximum
V 1
100
10
(
cos (
))
1000
2
100
1 0.707
100
31.83 10
17.08
100 s
12.
[Ans. C]
In (i) and (iii), when switch are reverse
biased, diode in parallel will start
conducting so not able to block the
reverse voltage
13.
[Ans. *] Range 16.6 to 17.4

100 rad s
2
T
20ms
100
V
2ms
10ms
2ms
10ms
20ms
Start at which current is maximum at

t = 10 ms
di
V sin t
dt
V sin t
di
dt
i
at t
0
k
cos t
2.5 ms i=0
V
100
2.5
cos (
)
1000
V
cos ( )
4
th
th
th
Page 559
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
Phase Controlled Rectifier

EE-2006
1.
A 3-phase fully controlled bridge
converter with freewheeling diode is fed
from 400 V, 50 Hz AC source and is
operating at a firing angle of 600. The load
current is assumed constant at 10 A due
to high load inductance. The input
displacement factor (IDF) and the input
power factor (IPF) of the converter will
be
(A) IDF = 0.867; IPF = 0.828
(B) IDF= 0.867; IPF = 0.552
(C) IDF = 0.5; IPF = 0.478
(D) IDF = 0.5; IPF = 0.318
2.
A single-phase bridge converter is used to

charge a battery of 200 V having an
internal resistance of 2 as shown in
figure. The SCRs are triggered by a
constant dc signal. If SCR 2 gets open
circuited, then what will be the average
charging current?
SCR2
SCR3
SCR4
3.
(C) 11.9 A
(D) 3.54 A
A single-phase half wave uncontrolled

converter circuit shown in figure.
A 2-winding transformer is used at the
input for isolation. Assuming the load
current to be constant and v V sin t
the current waveform through diode
will be
4.
A solar cell of 350 V is feeding power to

an ac supply of 440 V, 50 Hz through a
3-phase fully controlled bridge converter.
A large inductance is connected in the dc
circuit to maintain the dc current at 20 A.
if the solar cell resistance is 0.5 , then
each thyristor will be reverse biased for a
period of
(A) 125
(C) 60
(B) 120
(D) 55
50Hz
(A) 23.8 A
(B) 15 A
Battery
SCR1
200V
230V
EE-2007
5.
A single-phase fully controlled thyristor
bridge ac-dc converter is operating at a
firing angle of 25 and an overlap angle
10 with constant dc output current of
20 A. The fundamental power factor
(displacement factor)at input ac mains is
(A) 0.78
(C) 0.866
(B) 0.827
(D) 0.9
th
th
th
Page 560
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
7.
A Single phase fullwave half-controlled

bridge converter feeds an inductive load.
The two SCRs in the converter are
connected to a common DC bus. The
converter has to have a free-wheeling
diode.
(A) because the converter inherently
does not provide for free-wheeling
(B) because the converter does not
provide for free-wheeling for high
values of triggering angles
(C) or else the free-wheeling action of
the converter will cause shorting of
the AC supply
(D) or else if a gate pulse to one of the
SCRs is missed, it will subsequently
cause a high load current in the other
SCR
EE-2008
9.
A single-phase half controlled converter
shown in the figure is feeding power to
highly inductive load. The converter is
operating at a firing angle of 60.
If the firing pulses are suddenly removed,

the steady state voltage (v0) waveform of
the converter will become
(A)
V
0
In the circuit of adjacent figure the diode

connects the ac source to a pure
inductance L.
D
AC
Power Electronics
(B)
V
0
Pure L
(C)
The diode conducts for

(A) 90
(C) 270
(B) 180
(D) 360
V
0
8.
A three-phase fully-controlled thyristor

bridge converter is used as line
commutated inverter to feed 50 kW
power 420 V dc to a three phase,
415 V(line), 50Hz ac mains. Consider dc
link current to be constant. The rms
current of the thyristor is
(A) 119.05 A
(C) 68.73 A
(B) 79.37 A
(D) 39.68 A
(D)
V
0
10.
th
A three phase fully controlled bridge

converter is feeding a load drawing a
constant and ripple free load current of
10 A at a firing angle of 30 . The
approximate Total harmonic Distortion
th
th
Page 561
GATE QUESTION BANK
(%THD) and the rms value of

fundamental component of the input
current will respectively be
(A) 31% and 6.8 A (C) 66% and 6.8 A
(B) 31% and 7.8 A (D) 66% and 7.8 A
The energy is collected in a bank of 400 V

battery and is connected to converter
through a large filter choke of resistance
10 .
13.
11.
A single phase fully controlled bridge

converter supplies a load drawing
constant and ripple free load current. If
the triggering angle is 30 , the input
power factor will be
(A) 0.65
(C) 0.85
(B) 0.78
(D) 0.866
Power Electronics
14.
EE-2010
12. The fully controlled thyristor converter in
the figure is fed from a single-phase
source. When the firing angle is 0 , the dc
output voltage of the converter is 300V.
What will be the output voltage for a
firing angle of 60 , assuming continuous
conduction?
The maximum
battery will be
(A) 14 A
(B) 40 A
current
through
the
(C) 80 A
(D) 94 A
The kVA rating of the input transformer is

(A) 53.2 kVA
(C) 22.6 kVA
(B) 46.0 kVA
(D) 19.6 kVA
The input voltage given to a converter is
v
100 2 sin 100 t V
The current drawn by the converter is
i
(102 sin (100 t
)
3
52 sin 300 t
22 sin 500 t
6 )
15.
The input power factor of the converter is

(A) 0.31
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.44
(D) 0.71
16.
The active power drawn by the converter

is
(A) 181 W
(C) 707 W
(B) 500 W
(D) 887 W
(A) 150 V
(B) 210 V
(C) 300 V
(D) 100 V
EE-2011
13 and 14
A solar energy installation utilizes a
three-phase bridge converter to feed
energy into power system through a
transformer of 400 V/400 V, as shown
below.
Filter Choke
EE-2012
17. A half-controlled single-phase bridge
rectifier is supplying an R-L load. It is
operated at a firing angle and the load
current is continuous. The fraction of
cycle that the freewheeling diode
conducts is
(A) 1 2
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D)
Battery
th
th
th
Page 562
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2014
18. The figure shows the circuit of a rectifier
fed from a 230-V (rms), 50-Hz sinusoidal
voltage source. If we want to replace the
current source with a resistor so that the
rms value of the current supplied by the
voltage source remains unchanged, the
value of the resistance (in ohms)
is_________ (Assume diodes to be ideal.)
10
230V 50 z
19.
20.
21.
A single-phae SCR based ac regulator is

feeding power to a load consisting of
5 resistance and 16mH inductance. The
input supply is 230 V, 50 Hz ac. The
maximum firing angle at which the
voltage across the device becomes zero all
throughout and the rms value of current
through SCR, under this operating
condition, are
(A) 30 and 46 A
(C) 45 and 23 A
(B) 30 and 23 A
(D) 45 and 32 A
22.
The SCR in the circuit shown has a

latching current of 40 mA. A gate pulse of
50 s is applied to the SCR. The maximum
value of R in to ensure successful firing
of the SCR is___
S R
The figure shows the circuit diagram of a

rectifier. The load consists of a resistance
10 and an inductance 0.05 connected
in series. Assuming ideal thyristor and
ideal diode, the thyristor firing angle
(in degree) needed to obtain an average
load voltage of 70 V is __________
325 sin 314t V
Power Electronics
500
R
100V
200m
oad
A fully controlled converter bridge feeds a

highly inductive load with ripple free load
current. The input supply (v ) to the
bridge is a sinusoidal source. Triggering
angle of the bridge converter is
30 .
The input power factor of the bridge is
_________
23.
A three-phase fully controlled bridge

converter is fed through star-delta
transformer as shown in the figure.
R
i
V
Load
th
th
th
Page 563
GATE QUESTION BANK
24.
The converter is operated at a firing angle

of 30 . Assuming the load current ( ) to
be virtually constant at 1 p.u. and
transformer to be an ideal one, the input
phase current waveform is
Power Electronics
2k 3
2
2 3k
2 3k
1 3k
0
2k 3
k 3
0

1.
[Ans. C]
Load current is constant
10
In 3- full converter with free-wheeling
diode, input displacement factor (IDF)
cos
cos 60
0.5
R S value source current
2
3
2.
[Ans. C]
Vi
E
v
2
3
i0
nth
RMS value of
harmonic
4
n
sin
3
2n
RMS value of fundamental current
22
6
sin 60
average current
1
2 R
Current distortion factor (CDF)

6
3
1 3
( )
2
avg
V sin wt
1
[2V cos
2 R
1
2
0.955
2
[2 (230
2) cos
Input power factor (IPF)

where
0.955
0.478
0.5
sin
sin
avg
1
2
200
230 2
0.66 rad
38
200
[22
200
230 cos 38
2
0.66 ]
11.9
th
th
th
Page 564
GATE QUESTION BANK
3.
[Ans. C]
4402 cos
340
125
Therefore, each thyristor will be reverse
biased for a period of 55
5.
Power Electronics
[Ans. A]
Firing angle=
25
Overlap angle = 10
DC output current
V
[cos
cos
230 2
2
50
[cos 25
cos 25
0.0045
Average output voltage
2V cos
v
20
i
l
t
i
i
t
2
or 0
t
Diode
is forward biased
and conduct.
For
t 2
Diode
becomes
reverse biased and Diode
gets forward
biased and starts conducting.
As load current is constant current through
Diode
i
can be drawn as shown in
the figure.
4.
[Ans. D]
Solar cell emf E = 350 V
DC current
20
Solar cell resistance
R
0.5
V
Voltage across inverter
R
350 20 0.5
340 V
The bridge acts as inverter,
Output voltage of 3 fully controlled
bridge
3V
V
cos
3V
cos
2302 cos 25
3.14
2 3.14 50
10 ]
4.5
3.14
10
20
187.73 9
178.74 V
Displacement factor=
178.25 20
230 20
0.78
6.
[Ans. C]
T2
T1
Vs
I0
V0
D1
D2
1- full wave half controlled bridge

converter without free-wheeling diode is
340
th
th
th
Page 565
GATE QUESTION BANK

Vs
9.
2
[Ans. A]
Vs
V0
D1
D2
Single phase half controlled converter

As load is highly inductive, it means load
current is continuous and almost constant.
At
t
T is fired and T1 starts
conducting load current flows through
T1D1 for
t
. At t
V becomes
negative and D1 gets reverse biased and D2
is forward biased. So during
t
free wheeling action takes place through
T1 and D2 and output voltage become zeros.
At t
load T2 is triggered and load
current is transferred from T1 to T2.
So, during
t 2 T
conducts. At t
It may be possible
that load current is not transferred
completely from T1 to T2, and T1 and T2
may be conducting simultaneously which
results in short circuit of the supply for
short direction.
7.
[Ans. D]
Inductor current is positive for 360 , hence
the diode conducts for whole of the period,
i.e, 360 .
8.
[Ans. C]
Let DC link current =
DC voltage applied to the inverse
V
420
Power fed to the inverter
P V
50 k
420
50 10
119.05
Current through each thyristor flow for
period of 2 3
So, rms current of thyristor.
2 +
4
5
V0
T1D1 T1D2 T1D1

T1D1 T2D2
T2D1 T1D2 T2D1
no firing
pulses
T1 is
triggered
triggered
T1 is T2 is
During,
0
t
freewheeling
by T
V
0
t
T1 D1 conducts
V
V
t
Freewheeling by T1D2, V0=0
t 2
T2D2 conduct , V0 = Vs
T1 is again triggered at 2
So during 2
t 3
T
, conducts.
Now, if firing pulses are removed after T1 is
triggered at 2
.
At t 3
no firing pulse will be
available to trigger T2. So, load current will
flow through T1D2 as load current is
continuous. So during 3
t 4
TD2 will continue to conduct and V0 =0.
At t 4 D1 will become forward biased
and D2 will become reverse biased. So, D1
will conduct and T1 is already conducting.
d t
119.05
Vs
triggered
T2
T1
V0
T2 D T1D1 T1D T2D2
Power Electronics
68.73
th
th
th
Page 566
GATE QUESTION BANK

V
So load current will flow through T1 D1 and

V0 = Vs.
10.
[Ans. B]
Load current =
10
RMS value of total source current
2
3
10
2
3
Supply current i
fourier series
i t
t
V
8.165
2
can be expressed by
4
n
sin sin n t
n
3
t
i
10
3
7.8
2
2
Total Harmonic distortion
(
8.165
)
7.8
Average output voltage

1
V
V sin t. d
100
cos
Average output current = l (constant)

RMS value of supply current = l
l
RMS value of supply voltage
+
T
V
T
Input power factor

Power delivered to load
nput V
(3 )V
V
V
V 2.
+
V
[Ans. B]
30
100
31
11.
2V
V
for
RMS value of fundamental current,

4
sin
3
2
Power Electronics
L
O
A
D
12.
0.78
[Ans. A]
cos
V
th
V
= 300
V
th
. cos60
300.
th
150 V
Page 567
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. B]
Filter
p. f
Choke
Battery(E)
14.
2
3
40
2
3
17.
[Ans. D]
V
18.
32.66
10
over
raction
RMS value of current supplied by source
10
10
3V
32.66
Freewheeling diode conducts for 2

complete cycle
KVA rating of the input transformer

3 400
22.62 V
0.44
[Ans. B]
Active power will be drawn by converter
only due to fundamental component.
Therefore, Active power = V
cos
100 10 cos 60
Active power = 500 watts
[Ans. C]
RMS value of supply current in case of
3 bridge converter
10
cos 60
11.35
16.
Average output voltage of the converter

3V
V
cos
The converter acts as line commutated
inverter and for such mode
90 and V is negative. Therefore
battery supplies energy to AC system.
So, current through battery
400 V
R
for V
0 or
90
Maximum current flow through battery
400
40
10
Power Electronics
T 2
T
t
15.
[Ans. B]
Voltage applied (v) = 1002 sin 100 t
Current resulted
102 sin (10 t
) 52 (300 t
3
22 sin (500 t
10
4
)
RMS value of current supplied when

resistor is there
The current flown into converter consists

of fundamental, 3rd harmonic and 5th
harmonic components.
In the case of converter drawing non
sinusoidal component of current then p.f
will be written as
Input power factor =
10
2R
V
2302
2302
10
2R
R 23
cos
10
10
11.35
th
th
th
Page 568
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
Freewheeling diode is there so after
freewheeling diode will conduct and
energy stored in inductor will dissipate
through FD and R.
V
22
cos 30
22
21.
Power Electronics
3
2
[Ans. C]
v
sin
z
0.78
~
1
V
V sin t d t
2
V 1 cos
2
1 cos
325
70
2 3.14
cos
0.353
69.33
20.
[sin
sin
f
e
v
sin
z
v
v
Voltage across device is zero
[Ans. *] Range 0.74 to 0.82

V
2
tan
tan
)
2
50 16 m
)
5
45.15
v
v
z
z2
230
5
23
22.
output power
V
output power V
1
V
V sin t d t
V
2V
V
2V
rom figure V
cos t |
i t
cos
40
R
cos
nput power factor
50
16m
[Ans. *] Range 6055 to 6065

Given data
40 m
t 50 s
find R
Highly inductive load

So is continuous
nput power factor
V
*1
R
100V
e +
100
[1
500
6060.83
V
R
10
200m
500
2m
5
100 R
cos
th
th
th
Page 569
GATE QUESTION BANK
23.
Power Electronics
[Ans. B]
V
1
3
k
3
input waveform
i
2k3
i
i
k
3
th
th
th
Page 570
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
Choppers
EE-2006
and 2
A voltage commutated chopper operating
at 1 kHz is used to control the speed of dc
motor as shown in figure. The load
current is assumed to be constant at 10 A.
+
1 F
2.
IL = 4A L
2mH
The average output voltage of the

chopper will be
(A) 70 V
(C) 35 V
(B) 47.5 V
(D) 0 V
EE-2007
3.
The circuit in the figure is a current
commutated dc dc chopper where,
Th is the main SCR and Th
is the
auxiliary SCR. The load current is
constant at 10 A. Th
is ON. Th
is
triggered at t=0. Th is turned OFF
between.
(A) 10 V, 2A
(B) 10 V, 8 A
Th
Load
10
25.28H
Load
V0
(C) 40 V, 2 A
(D) 40 V, 8 A
EE-2009
5.
In the chopper circuit shown, the main
thyristor (TM) is operated at a duty ratio
of 0.8 which is much larger the
commutation interval. If the maximum
allowable reapplied dv/dt on T is
50 V s what should be the theoretical
minimum value of C1? Assume current
ripple through L0 to be negligible.
T
T
8
(A) 0.2
(B) 0.02
Th
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
20V
The minimum time in sec for which the

SCR M should be on is
(A) 280 s
(C) 70 s
(B) 140 s
(D) 0 s
230V
ID
V = 250V
1.
EE-2008
4.
switch is operated at a duty cycle of 0.5.
A large capacitor is connected across the
load. The inductor current is assumed to
be continuous. The average voltage across
the load and the average current through
the diode will respectively be
(C) 2
(D) 20
EE-2010
6.
The power electronic converter shown in
the figure has a single-pole double-throw
switch. The pole P of the switch is
connected alternately to throws A and B.
The converter shown is a _______
A
0 s t 25 s
25 s t 50 s
50s t 75 s
75 s t 100 s
th
th
th
Page 571
GATE QUESTION BANK

100
(A) step-down chopper

(buck converter)
(B) half-wave rectifier
(C) step-up chopper (boost converter)
(D) full-wave rectifier
EE-2011
7.
A voltage commutated chopper circuit,
operated at 500 Hz, is shown below.
M
0.1F
Power Electronics
12V
Q
20
470
9.
The average source current in Amps in

steady state is
(A) 3/2
(C) 5/2
(B) 5/3
(D) 15/4
10.
The PEAK-TO-PEAK source current ripple

in amps is
(A) 0.96
(C) 0.192
(B) 0.144
(D) 0.288
10
200V
LOAD
1mH
If the maximum value of load current is

10 A, then the maximum current through
the main (M) and auxiliary (A) thyristors
will be
(A) i
12 and i
10
(B) i
12 and i
2
(C) i
10 and i
12
(D) i
10 and i
8
EE-2012
8.
In the circuit shown, an ideal switch S is
operated at 100 kHz with a duty ratio of
50 . Given that ic is 1.6 A peak-to-peak
and I0 is 5 A dc, the peak current in S is
S
EE-2014
11. Figure (i) show the circuit diagram of a
chopper. The switch S in the circuit in
figure (i) is switched such that the voltage
V across the diode has the wave shape as
shown in figure (ii). The capacitance C is
large so that the voltage across it is
constant. If switch S and the diode are
ideal, the peak to peak ripple (in A) in the
inductor current is___________
S
100V
1m
V
oad
igure i
i
100V
24 V
(A) 6.6 A
(B) 5.0 A
EE-2013
In the figure shown below, the chopper
feeds a resistive load from a battery
source. MOSFET Q is switched at 250 kHz,
with a duty ratio of 0.4. All elements of
the circuit are assumed to be ideal.
0.05
(C) 5.8 A
(D) 4.2 A
0.1
0.15
0.2
t ms
igure ii
12.
th
A step-up chopper is used to feed a load at

400 V dc from a 250 V dc source. The
inductor current is continuous. f the off
time of the switch is 20 s, the switching
frequency of the chopper in kHz
is_____________
th
th
Page 572
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics

1.
2.
5.
[Ans. A]
0.8
c
+
LOAD
Th
+
230 V
vc
V sin
sin
t
- i
V
V and i
. As i tends to
reverse. Th
is turned off.
When V
V , right hand plate has
positive polarity , resonant current i now
builds up through C, L, D and Th . As this
current of Th , net forward current
i
i begins to decrease. Finally
when i in the reversed direction attains
the value I0 , im is reduced to zero and Thm
is turned off.
i
i
sin t 0
1
t
sin ( )
dv
dt
50V
sec
V
0.8 100 80 V
V
80
i
10
R
8
During commutation of main SCR T
load current will be flown through
capacitor.
dv
i
dt
10 10
0.2 f
50
After half a cycle of i ,t
100 V and
At t =0 v
V i
0 and i
.
At t =0, Th
is triggered, a resonant
current i designs to flows from C
throughTh
, L and back to C.
This resonant current is given by
i
[Ans. C]
When S is ON, V = 0V and = 0A
When S is off, V
20 V and = 4A
v
20
V
40V
1 d 1 0.5
0.5 4 = 2A
I0
im
4.
[Ans. C]
Th
10 25.28 sec
50 sec
Option (C) is correct.
Since commutation of Thm starts from
t1=50 sec
250
= 35V
[Ans. C]
V
3.
[Ans. B]
Minimum time for which SCRm should be
ON is same as time for which C charges
from + 250 V to 250V.
T=
140 sec.
20 10
6.
[Ans. A]
B and D are not possible options as the
input is dc.
P V
V (1
P V = V .e
If L is large enough,
V
V when P
0 when P
step down chopper
e )
where T= L/R
So, Th is turned off between

th
th
th
Page 573
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
[Ans. A]
When main thyristor (M) is turned on, an
oscillatory current in the curcuit C, M, L
and diode is set up and it is given by
i t
V sin
10.
20
Given f = 250 k
1
So T
250 10
i
Vin
i. e. Peak peak inductor current

. .
T
0.192
11.
[Ans. C]
Peak Current = I0 +
9.
470
We have to find out peak to peak source

ripple current here ource current and
inductor current are same peak to peak
source ripple = peak to peak inductor
current
V
T
uty ratio
0.1 10
1 10
2
Current through main thyristor
i
t
sin t
So, maximum value of
i
10 2
12
When auxiliary thyristor (A) is turned on
capacitor voltage applies a reverse
voltage across main thyristor and main
thyristor is turned off. The load current is
now carried by c and auxiliary thyristor.
Current through auxiliary thyristor
i
Maximum value of iA = maximum value of
I0 = 10A
8.
12 V
[Ans. C]
Given circuit :
Peak value of current through capacitor
200
Power Electronics
5.8
[Ans. B]
v
V
1
12
20 V
1 0.4
20
1
20
Given that all are ideal
P
P
V
20 1
5 3
[Ans. *] Range 2.49 to 2.51

For 0 t 0.05
ms
V
100 V
or 0.05 t 0.1
ms
V
V
Using volt-sec, across inductor
100 V
0.05 V
0.05
V
50
Slope
50
Slope
0.05
th
50
0.1
di
dt
th
th
Page 574
GATE QUESTION BANK
di
dt
v
dt
Peak to peak current i

50
50
12.
0.05
0.05
10
Power Electronics
t
t
10
10
2.5
[Ans. *] Range 31.0 to 31.5

V
1
V
1
400
1
250
1
8 8
5
3
8
5
T 20 S
8
T 32 s
10
f
31.25 k
32
th
th
th
Page 575
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
Inverters
EE-2006
1.
A single- phase inverter is operated in
PWM mode generating a single-pulse of
width 2d in the centre of each half cycle
as shown in figure. It is found that the
output voltage is free from 5th harmonic
for pulse width 1440. What will be
percentage of 3rd harmonic present in the
output voltage (Vo3/Vo1max)?
V
2d
3
2
2
2
2d
(A) 0.0%
(B) 19.6%
(C) 31.7%
(D) 53.9%
EE-2007
2.
Six
OS Ts connected in a bridge
configuration (having no other power
device) MUST be operated as a Voltage
Source nverter VS . This statement is
(A) True, because being majority carrier
devices, MOSFETs are voltage driven
(B) True, because MOSFETs have
inherently anti-parallel diodes
(C) False, because it can be operated
both as Current Source Inverter
(CSI) or a VSI
(D) False, because MOSFETs can be
operated as excellent constant
current sources in the saturation
region.
3.
A Single phase voltage source inverter is

controlled in a single pulse-width
modulated mode with a pulse width of
1500 in each half cycle. Total harmonic
distortion is defined as
THD =
100,
Where V1 is the rms value of the

fundamental component of the output
voltage. The THD of output ac voltage
wave form is
(A) 65.65%
(C) 31.83%
(B) 48.42%
(D) 30.49%
EE-2008
4.
A 3-phase Voltage Source Inverter is
operated in 180 conduction mode. Which
one of the following statements is true?
(A) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage
will have 3rd harmonic components.
(B) pole-voltage will have 3rd harmonic
component but line-voltage will be
free from 3rd harmonic
(C) Line-voltage will have 3rd harmonic
component but pole-voltage will be
free from 3rd harmonic
(D) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage
will be free from 3rd harmonic
components.
5.
A single phase voltage source inverter is

feeding a purely inductive load as shown
in the figure. The inverter is operated at
50 Hz in 180 square wave mode. Assume
that the load current does not have any dc
component. The peak value of the
inductor current i0 will be________
0.1 H
200 V
I0
(A) 6.37 A
(B) 10 A
(C) 20 A
(D) 40A
EE-2009
6.
The Current Source Inverter shown in
figure is operated by alternately turning
on thyristor pairs T T and T T . If
the load is purely resistive, the theoretical
th
th
th
Page 576
GATE QUESTION BANK
maximum output frequency obtainable

will be
T
0.1
+
10
10 A
+
0.1
(A) 125 kHz

(B) 250 kHz
Power Electronics
EE-2013
8 and 9
The Voltage Source Inverter (VSI) shown
in the figure below is switched to provide
a 50 Hz, square-wave ac output voltage V
across an R-L load. Reference polarity of
v and reference direction of the output
current i are indicated in the figure. It
given that R = 3 ohms, L = 9.55mH.
(C) 500 kHz

(D) 50 kHz
EE-2011
7.
A three-phase current source inverter
used for the speed control of an induction
motor is to be realized using MOSFET
switches as shown below. Switches S to
S are identical switches.
50H
S
z
i0
8.
In the interval when v0 < 0 and i0>0 the

pair of devices which conducts the load
current is
(A) Q Q
(C)
(B) Q Q
(D)
9.
Appropriate transition i.e., Zero Voltage

Switching (ZVS)/Zero Current Switching
(ZCS) of the IGBTs during
turn-on/ turnoff is
(A) ZVS during turn off
(B) ZVS during turn on
(C) ZCS during turn off
(D) ZCS during turn on
S
. .
The proper configuration for realizing

switches S to S is
(B)
(A)
A
A
(C)
(D)
EE-2014
10. The figure shows one period of the output
voltage of an inverter. should be chosen
such that 60
90 . If rms value of
the fundamental component is 50 V, then
in degree is _____________
100V
100V
100V
180
180
180
100V
B
th
th
100V
th
360
360
t
degree
100V
Page 577
GATE QUESTION BANK
11.
Power Electronics
A single-phase voltage source inverter

shown in figure is feeding power to a
load. The triggering pulses of the devices
are also shown in the figure.
S
i
oad
S S
S S
2
If the load current is sinusoidal and is

zero at 0 2
. . , the node voltage V
has the waveform
2
V
V
V
2
2
th
th
th
Page 578
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics

1.
[Ans. B]
The output of inverter = v
v
4V
sin nd sin n t sin n
n
Here pulse width = 2d =144

d 72
4V
v
sin 72 sin t for n
4V
sin 3
3
sin 3
V
V max
72
RMS value of fundamental component of

output voltage.
1 4V
V
[
sin 75 ] 0.87 V
2
Total Harmonic Distortion
72 sin 3 t for n
20.6
sin 72
Option (B) is correct as it is nearer to

20.6%.
0.913 V
0.87V
0.87V
V0
Vs
3
2
t
2d
d) 2
5.
4V
n
cos sin
n
6
3 cos
cos
n
.. i
6
0
2V
sin n t
n
ii
[Ans. B]
V0
vs
Vs
Pulse width = 2d = 150

d 75
100
It is clear from eq. (i) as (ii) both check

voltage and line voltage will be from 3rd
harmonic components.
d
2d
100
[Ans. C]
[Ans. D]
Line voltage and pole voltage of 3 VSI
operated in 180 conduction mode can be
expressed by the fourier series as follows.
[Ans. B]
As MOSFET have internally antiparallel
diodes, MOSFET cannot withstand
reverse voltage, due to which MOSFET
cannot be as current source inverter
(CSI).
or n
3.
31.83
4.
2.
4V
n
sin sin nd sin n t
n
2
-vs
i0
V d
iP
2
iP
2d
5
6
0.913 V
Output voltage in fourier series.
th
th
th
Page 579
GATE QUESTION BANK
Load current increases linearly from

IP to IP during 0 < t
. Where Ip =
Peak value of i0
1
t
sec
2 50 100
t t 0i
and t t i
di
V
dt
During 0< t
V
V
200 V
200
6.
7.
0.1 .
Power Electronics
cannot be used in a CSI. So, a diode is

added in series with the devices for
reverse blocking.
8.
[Ans. D]
V
200
t
0.1
2000
1
10
2
100
[Ans. B]
The circuit shown in the figure is a single
phase bridge auto sequential commutated
inverter (1-phase ASCI)
Thyristor pairs T T and T T
are
alternatively switches to obtain a nearly
square wave load current. Two
commutating capacitors, one
in the
upper half and the other
in the lower
half are connected as shown
Diodes
to
are connected in series
with each SCR to prevent the
commutation capacitors from discharging
into the load. The inverter output
frequency is controlled by adjusting the
period T through the triggering circuits of
thyristors.
The theoretical maximum output
frequency obtainable
1
f
4R
1
4 10 0.1 10
250k z
Voltage and current waveform of a full

bridge inverter
Shaded portion shows the condition
where V
0 i
0
Conducts the load current
9.
[Ans. D]
Turn
on
points
for
thyristors
Q Q Q Q are given
A, B, C represents points where current
cross over zero. Zero current switch
(ZCS) during turn on.
10.
[Ans. *] Range 76.5 to 78.0

Fourier series
a
2
f t
a cos n t
b sin n t
Fundamental component n = 1
a cos t b sin t
1
a
f t cos t d t
[Ans. A]
Device used in current source inverter
(CSI) must have reverse voltage blocking
capacity. Therefore, device such as GTOs,
power transistors and power MOSFETs
th
th
th
Page 580
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
100
0 cos t d t
cos t d t
a
b
cos t d t
cos t d t
cos t d t 1
f t sin t d t
400
[8 cos
[1
R S value
cos
76.99
11.
100
b
cos t d t
4]
2 cos ]
400
2
0.225
[1
2 cos ]
50
[Ans. D]
During to
s s ON
V
So V
2
During
to anti parallel diode of
s and s will conduct to maintain the
flow of load current in positive direction
V
V
2
uring to
Antiparallel diode of s and s conducts to
maintain flow of load current in negative
direction
V
V
2
During
to 2
s
s conducts
V
so V
2
th
th
th
Page 581
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
AC Voltage Regulators and Cycloconverters

EE-2008
1.
In the single-phase voltage controller
circuit shown in the figure, for what range
of triggering angle ( ), the output voltage
(Vo) is not controllable?
T1
50
Vs
EE-2012
In the 3-phase inverter circuit shown, the
load is balanced and the gating scheme is
180o conduction mode. All the switching
devices are ideal.
S
V
S
j50
S
R
3-phase inverter
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
R 20
V0
T2
00 < < 450

450 < < 1350
900 < < 1800
1350 < <1800
3-phase balanced load
2.
The rms value of load phase voltage is

(A) 106.1 V
(C) 212.2 V
(B) 141.4 V
(D) 282.8 V
3.
If the dc bus voltage Vd = 300V, the power

consumed by 3-phase load is
(A) 1.5 kW
(C) 2.5 kW
(B) 2.0 kW
(D) 3.0 kW

1.
[Ans. A]
For 0 <
< , V is not controllable
where = tan (
2.
tan
tan
45
R)
50
(
)
50
1
[Ans. B]
RMS Value of line voltage = VL = VS
RMS value of phase voltage =
=
3.
VS
x 300 = 141.42V
[Ans. D]
P=3.
=3x
= 3000W
th
th
th
Page 582
GATE QUESTION BANK
Power Electronics
Applications of Power Electronics

EE-2006
1. The speed of a 3 phase, 440 V, 50 Hz
induction motor is to be controlled over a
wide range from zero speed to 1.5 time
the rated speed using a 3-phase voltage
source inverter. It is desired to keep the
flux in the machine constant in the
constant torque region by controlling the
terminal voltage as the frequency
changes. The inverter output voltage vs
frequency characteristic should be
(A)
50
(D)
50
(C)
3.
A single-phase,230 V, 50 Hz ac mains fed

step down transformer (4:1) is supplying
power to a half-wave uncontrolled ac-dc
converter used for charging a battery
(12V dc) with the series current limiting
resistor being 19.04 . The charging
current is ______
(A) 2.43 A
(C) 1.22 A
(B) 1.65 A
(D) 1.0 A
50
(B)
power factor of the ac mains at half the

rated speed, is
(A) 0.354
(C) 0.90
(B) 0.372
(D) 0.955
EE-2008
4.
A 220 V, 20 A, 1000 rpm, separately
excited dc motor has an armature
resistance of 2.5 . The motor is
controlled by a step down chopper with a
frequency of 1 kHz. The input dc voltage
to the chopper is 250 V The duty cycle of
the chopper for the motor to operate at a
speed of 600 rpm delivering the rated
torque will be _____________
(A) 0.518
(C) 0.852
(B) 0.608
(D) 0.902
5.
A 220 V, 1400 rpm, 40A separately

excited dc motor has an armature
resistance of 0.4 . The motor is fed from
a single phase circulating current dual
converter with an input ac line voltage of
220 V (rms). The approximate firing
angles of the dual converter for motoring
operation at 50% of rated torque and
1000 rpm will be _______________
(A) 430, 1370
(C) 390, 1410
0
(B) 43 , 47
(D) 390,510
6.
A single phase fully controlled converter

bridge is used for electrical braking of a
separately excited dc motor. The dc motor
load is represented by an equivalent
f
50
EE-2007
2.
A Three-phase, 440V, 50Hz ac mains fed
thyristor bridge is feeding a 440 V dc,
15kW, 1500rpm separately excited dc
motor with a ripple free continuous
current in the dc link under all operating
conditions. Neglecting the losses, the
th
th
th
Page 583
GATE QUESTION BANK
circuit as shown in the figure. Assume

that the load inductance is sufficient to
ensure continuous and ripple free load
current the firing angle of the bridge for a
load current of
I0 = 10A will be _____________
2
230v,
50hz
150V
(A) 44o
(B) 51o
Power Electronics
EE-2013
7.
The separately excited dc motor in the
figure below has a rated armature current
of 20 A and a rated armature voltage of
150V. An ideal chopper switching at 5
kHz is used to control the armature
voltage. If La =0.1mH, Ra = 1 , neglecting
armature reaction, the duty ratio of the
chopper to obtain 50% of the rated
torque at the rated speed and the rated
field current is
(C) 129o
(D) 136o
La, Ra
200 V
(A) 0.4
(B) 0.5
(C) 0.6
(D) 0.7

1.
2.
[Ans. A]
In induction motor V/f
If is constant then V f
(Linear relation)
[Ans. A]
V
440 V f
specification.
V
440 V P
50 z 3
=
3.
0.354
[Ans. D]
19.04
230 V
50 Hz
phase Supply
15kw N 1500 r. p. m
Rating of motor
If losses are neglected, then R=0 and
V = E = 440 V
If speed in the separately excited motor
become half, then V = E =220 V
Power P = 15 kw
P= I0 E
15 10
34.09
440
12 V
N
)
N
1
230 ( )
4
57.5 V
sin
1
2 R
57.5 V
V (
sin
Rms Source current = I0

34.09
3
27.83
Supply power factor at half rated speed
( )
V
12
(
) 12.04
57.5
180 12.04
1
*V
2 R
th
th
V sin t
cos t
th
169.76
d t
+
Page 584
GATE Question Bank
1
2
[V [cos
7.
cos
[Ans. D]
20
V
150
130 V
]
1
2
19.04
*57.52 cos 169.76
cos 12.04
12 (169.76
180
12.04
220
rad/sec
2.5
10
130
=140
V
140
V
200
[Ans. B]
At rated conditions,
Ra
20 1
N
Ra
10 1
)+
1
4.
Power Electronics
0.7
20
At required conditions,
V
2.5 20
5.
250 =
50
= 0.608
[Ans. C]
At rated conditions, Vt = Eb + Iara = Km m
+ Iara Km 204 x 60 2800 Nm
At required conditions, armature
current
20
and N = 1000
rpm
V
cos
cos
20
6.
39 and
0.4
141
[Ans. C]
10 ; V
2302 V
E = 150 V; r
2
cos
cos
cos
150
20
= 129
th
th
th
Page 585
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
Transformer
EE-2006
1.
In transformers, which of the following
statements is valid?
(A) In an open circuit test, copper losses
are obtained while in short circuit
test, core losses are obtained
(B) In an open circuit test, current is
drawn at high power factor
(C) In a short circuit test, current is
drawn at zero power factor
(D) In an open circuit test, current is
drawn at low power factor
2.
3.
4.
Two transformers are to be operated in

parallel such that they share load in
proportion to their kVA ratings. The
rating of the first transformer is 500 kVA
and its pu leakage impedance is 0.05 pu. If
the rating of second transformer is
250 kVA, then its pu leakage impedance is
(A) 0.20
(C) 0.05
(B) 0.10
(D) 0.025
Common Data Question for 3 and 4
A 300 kVA transformer has 95%
efficiency at full load 0.8 pf lagging and
96% efficiency at half load, unity pf.
The iron loss (Pi) and copper loss (Pc) in
kW, under full load operation are
(A) Pc = 4.12, Pi = 8.51
(B) Pc = 6.59, Pi = 9.21
(C) Pc = 8.51, Pi = 4.12
(D) Pc = 12.72, Pi = 3.07
What is the maximum efficiency (in %) at
unity pf load?
(A) 95.1
(C) 96.4
(B) 96.2
(D) 98.1
EE-2007
5.
In a transformer, zero voltage regulation
at full load is
(A) not possible
(B) possible at unity power factor load
(C) possible at leading power factor load

(D) possible at lagging power factor load
6.
A Single-phase 50 kVA, 250V/500V two

winding transformer has an efficiency of
95% at full load, unity power factor. If it is
reconfigured as a 500V / 750V
autotransformer, its efficiency at its new
rated load at unity power factor will be
(A) 95.752%
(C) 98.276%
(B) 97.851%
(D) 99.241%
Common Data for Questions 7, 8 and 9
A three phase squirrel cage induction
motor has a starting current of seven
times the full load current and full load
slip of 5%
If an autotransformer is used for reduced
voltage starting to provide 1.5 per unit
starting torque, the autotransformer ratio
(%) should be
(A) 57.77%
(C) 78.25%
(B) 72.56%
(D) 81.33%
7.
8.
If a star-delta starter is used to start this

induction motor, the per unit starting
torque will be
(A) 0.607
(C) 1.225
(B) 0.816
(D) 1.616
9.
If a starting torque
required then the
current should be
(A) 4.65
(B) 3.75
of 0.5 per unit is

per unit starting
(C) 3.16
(D) 2.13
EE-2008
10. Three single-phase transformers are
connected to form a 3-phase transformer
bank. The transformers are connected in
the following manner
th
th
th
Page 586
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
(A)
a2
a1
a1
a1
a1
b2
a1
b1
a1
a1
a1
Primary
c2
c1
a1Secondary a1
a1
a1
ers
24V
2 2.5
t(s)
48V
(B)
e
The transformer connection will be

represented by
(A) Y d0
(C) Y d6
(B) Y d1
(D) Y d11
48 V
1
t(s)
2 2.5
24 V
(C)
ers
11.
12.
It is desired to measure parameters of
, 2KVA, single-phase
transformer. The Following wattmeters
are available in a laboratory
W1: 250 V, 10 A, Low Power Factor
W2: 250 V, 5 A, Low Power Factor
W3: 150 V, 10 A, High Power Factor
W4: 150 V, 5 A, High Power Factor
The wattmeters used in open circuit test
and short circuit test of the transformer
will respectively be
(A) W1 and W2
(C)
nd
(D)
nd
(B)
nd
The core of a two-winding transformer is
subjected to a magnetic flux variation as
indicated in the figure.
r
100
48V
24V
2.5
t(s)
(D)
ers
0
2 2.5
t(s)
24V
48V
EE-2009
13. The single phase, 50Hz, iron core
transformer in the circuit has both the
vertical arms of cross sectional area
20cm2 and both the horizontal arms of
cross sectional area 10cm2. If the two
windings shown were wound instead on
opposite horizontal arms, the mutual
inductance will
200
( b)
0.12
1
0
1
The induced
2
2.
winding
as a
5
the form
t(
s)
2.5
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
t(s)
double
remain same
be halved
become one quarter
emf (ers) in the secondary

function of time will be of
th
th
th
Page 587
GATE QUESTION BANK
Common Data for Question 14 and 15

a
A
Electrical Machines
i(t)
30 ms
t
5ms
10ms 15ms 20ms
25 ms 30ms
10A
The star-delta transformer shown

above is excited on the star side with
a balanced, 4-wire, 3-phase, sinusoidal
voltage supply of rated magnitude. The
transformer is under no load condition.
15.
C
N
14.
10A
With both S1 and S2 open, the core flux

waveform will be
(A) A sinusoid at fundamental frequency
(B) Flat-topped with third harmonic
(C) Peaky with third-harmonic
(D) None of these
16.
The peak voltage across A and B, with S

open is
(A)
(B) 800V
17.
25 ms
(C)
(D)
If the waveform of i(t) is changed to

i(t)=10 sin (100 t) , the peak voltage
across A and B with S closed is
(A) 400V
(C) 320V
(B) 240V
(D) 160V
With S2 closed and S1 open, the current

waveform in the delta winding will be
(A) a sinusoid at fundamental frequency
(B) flat-topped with third harmonic
(C) only third-harmonic
(D) none of these
Statement for Linked Answer Questions:

18 & 19
A
C
Common Data Questions: 16 and 17

The circuit diagram shows a two
winding, lossless transformer with no
leakage flux, excited from a current
source, i(t), whose waveform is also
shown.
The transformer has a
m gnetizing induct nce of 4 / mH.
The figure above shows coils 1 and 2,

with dot markings as shown, having 4000
and 6000 turns respectively. Both coils
have a rated current of 25A. Coil 1 is
excited with single phase, 400V, 50Hz
supply
1:1
Coil 1
B
18.
A
S
i(t)
Coil 2
th
The coils are to be connected to obtain

a single phase, 400/1000V, auto
transformer to drive a load of 10kVA.
Which of the options given should be
exercised to realize the required auto
transformer?
(A) Connect A and D; Common B
(B) Connect B and D; Common C
(C) Connect A and C; Common B
(D) Connect A and C; Common D
th
th
Page 588
GATE QUESTION BANK
19.
In the autotransformer obtained in

Question 18, the current in each coil is
(A) Coil 1 is 25 A and Coil 2 is 10 A
(B) Coil 1 is 10 A and Coil 2 is 25 A
(C) Coil 1 is 10 A and Coil 2 is 15 A
(D) Coil 1 is 15 A and Coil 2 is 10 A
Electrical Machines
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
( +j )
(0.866 j . )
( .866 + j . )
( +j )
EE-2011
22. A single-phase air core transformer, fed
from a rated sinusoidal supply, is
operating at no load. The steady state
magnetizing current drawn by the
transformer from the supply will have the
waveform
(A) i
EE-2010
20. A single-phase transformer has a turns
ratio of 1:2, and is connected to a purely
resistive load as shown in the figure. The
magnetizing current drawn is 1A, and the
secondary current is 1A. If core losses and
le k ge re ct nces re neglected, the
primary current is
1A
1:2
(B)
(A) 1.41A
(B) 2A
21.
(C) 2.24A
(D) 3A
A balanced star-connected and purely

resistive load is connected at the
secondary of a star-delta transformer as
shown in figure. The line-to-line voltage
rating of the transformer is 110V/220V.
Neglecting the non-idealities of the
transformer, the impedance Z of the
equivalent star-connected load, referred
to the primary side o the transformer, is:
110/220V
R
(D)
B
R
Z
Z
(C) i
EE-2012
23. A single phase 10 kVA, 50 Hz transformer
with 1 kV primary winding draws 0.5 A
and 55 W, at rated voltage and frequency,
on no load. A second transformer has a
th
th
th
Page 589
GATE QUESTION BANK
core with all its linear dimensions

times the corresponding dimensions
of the first transformer. The core material
and lamination thickness are the same in
both transformers. The primary windings
of both the transformers have the same
number of turns. If a rated voltage of 2 kV
at 50 Hz is applied to the primary of the
second transformer, then the no load
current and power, respectively, are
(A) 0.7 A, 77.8 W
(C) 1A, 110 W
(B) 0.7 A, 155.6 W (D) 1A, 220 W
EE-2014
24. The core loss of a single phase, 230/115V,
50 Hz power transformer is measured
from 230 V side by feeding the primary
(230 V side) from a variable voltage,
variable frequency source while keeping
the secondary open circuited. The core
loss is measured to be 1050 W for 230 V,
50 Hz input. The core loss is again
measured to be 500 W for 138 V, 30 Hz
input. The hysteresis and eddy current
losses of the transformer for 230 V, 50 Hz
input are respectively,
(A) 508 W and 542 W.
(B) 468 W and 582 W.
(C) 498 W and 552 W.
(D) 488 W and 562 W.
25.
26.
27.
For a single phase, two winding

transformer, the supply frequency and
voltage are both increased by 10%. The
percentage changes in the hysteresis loss
and eddy current loss, respectively, are
(A) 10 and 21
(C) 21 and 10
(B) 10 and 21
(D) 21 and 10
28.
An open circuit test is performed on

50 Hz transformer, using variable
frequency source and keeping V/f ratio
constant, to separate its eddy current and
hysteresis losses. The variation of core
loss/frequency as function of frequency is
shown in the figure
f(Hz)
sin ( t)
y
(C)
(D)
( /Hz)
The hysteresis and eddy current losses of

the transformer at 25 Hz respectively are
(A) 250 W and 2.5 W
(B) 250 W and 62.5W
(C) 312.5 W and 62.5 W
(D) 312.5 W and 250 W
sin( t) , 4
sin( t),
A single phase, 50 kVA, 1000V/100 V two

winding transformer is connected as an
autotransformer as shown in the figure.
The kVA rating of the autotransformer is

_____________
Assuming an ideal transformer, the

thevenins equiv lent volt ge
nd
impedance as seen from the terminals
x and y for the circuit in figure are
(A)
(B)
Electrical Machines
sin( t) ,
sin( t) , .
th
th
th
Page 590
GATE QUESTION BANK
29.
The load shown in the figure absorbs

4 kW at a power factor of 0.89 lagging.
(A) 5mH, 20mH and 40mH

(B) 5mH, 80mH and 40mH
(C) 25mH, 10mH and 20mH
(D) 45mH, 30mH and 20mH
Hz
c source
31.
Assuming the transformer to be ideal, the

value of the reactance X to improve the
input power factor to unity is _____
30.
Electrical Machines
The parameters measured for a

220V/110V,
50
Hz,
single-phase
transformer are:
Self-inductance of primary winding
= 45mH
Self-inductance of secondary winding
= 30 mH
Mutual inductance between primary and
secondary windings = 20 mH
Using the above parameters, the leakage
( , ) and magnetizing ( )
inductances as referred to primary side in
the equivalent circuit respectively, are
For a specified input voltage and

frequency, if the equivalent radius of the
core of a transformer is reduced by half,
the factor by which the number of turns
in the primary should change to maintain
the same no load current is
(A) 1/4
(C) 2
(B) 1/2
(D) 4

1.
[Ans. D]
Circuit model in Open-Circuit test

In open-circuit test, the transformer
draws only exciting current. The exciting
Current is only magnetizing in nature and
is proportional to the sinusoidal flux and
in phase with it, this is represented by
Lagging the induce emf by
.
However the presence of eddy-currents,
and hysteresis, both demand the flow of
active power into the system and as a
consequence the exciting current
has
another component
in phase with .
Thus the exciting current lags the induced
emf by an angle slightly less than
making power factor very low
th
th
th
Page 591
GATE QUESTION BANK
2.
Electrical Machines
100 A
[Ans. B]
For generator
200 A
250 V
500 V
p.u le k ge imped nce

500 kVA 0.05 = 250 kVA x
x
3.
200 A
[Ans. C]
Efficiency
750 V
(
96% =
300 A
) .
) .
. (
. (
(i)
)
)
500 V
(ii)
,
KVA rating of transformer
From, equation (i)

p + p = 12.63
From equation (ii)
0.25 p + p = 6.25
From above two equations
p
8. , p
4.
For auto transformer,
7.
4.
= 98.276%
[Ans. C]
[Ans. B]
x=
.6 6
.
.
5.
. /
= 96.2%
[Ans. C]
Voltage regulation = I( cos + sin )
(For lagging power factor)
Voltage regulation = I ( cos
sin )
(For leading power factor)
Voltage regulation = I( cos
sin )
=0
t n
.
( )
x = 78.25%
8.
[Ans. B]
. /
( )
9.
= 0.816
[Ans. C]
. /
So zero voltage regulation is possible for

leading power factor
When
t n
(
)
.
.
p.u st rting current
10.
. 6
[Ans. B]
A2
6.
[Ans. C]
= 0.95 =
+ w = 2.631
C
B
B2
C2
th
th
th
Page 592
GATE QUESTION BANK

a2
c
c2
Electrical Machines
d
dt
d* . 4( .
dt
t)+
48
N
e
b
b
48
b2
The possible connections is Yd
t(s)
2.5
4
11.
[Ans. D]
For open circuit test [on LV side ]
The current is of 4 to 8% of full load
current .4
nd is of ow power f ctor .
W2 is required
13.
oil
For short circuit test [on HV side]

The current is full lo d current 8.
The power f ctor is high . to .6
3 is required
12.
[Ans. A]
oil
Reluctance of the magnetic circuit

remains same in both the cases other
windings are wound on horizontal arms
or vertical arms. Self-inductance of a coil
[Ans. B]
Induced emf (e ) in the secondary
winding is given by
d
e
where
dt
During O t
The flux ( ) increases linearly with time
. t
d
e
dt
d( . t)
dt
4
During
t
is const nt
.
d
e
dt
d( . )
dt
uring
t
.
decre ses line rly with time
. 4( .
t)
elut nce
When the coils are wound on vertical

arms.
( ) ( )
nd ( ) ( )
ross-section l re
cm
Assuming square cross-sectional area.
Side of square
Let length of the coil = L

No. of turns
4
( ) (
Similarly,
( )
utu l induc t nce
th
th
th
Page 593
GATE QUESTION BANK
When S is closed, the same induced

voltage appears across the Resistive load
pe k volt ge cross &
4
m ( ) ( )
(
)(
Electrical Machines
m /
Similarly, when the coils are placed on
horizontal arms
18.
[Ans. A]
Hint: Polarity should be such that the
voltages of two coils are additive.
10
m
m
m
m
m
There, mutual inductance gets double
when windings are placed on horizontal
arms.
14.
15.
16.
[Ans. B]
For sinusoidal excitation, the flux is a flat
topped wave with 3rd harmonic. As S1 & S2
both are opened there is no closed path
for the circulation of 3rd harmonic
currents. So no compensating flux is
produced for 3rd harmonic flux. Hence
flux remains as flat topped wave.
19.
[Ans. D]
4
By applying KCL I1=25-10= 15A
20.
[Ans. C]
Secondary current
Secondary current referred to primary
side
(
As the core losses are neglected,

magnetizing current (Im) will be in phase
with flux ( ). Therefore Im lags the
induced emf by
Primary current
+
+
. 4
6. 6
Volts
[Ans. A]
i(t) = 10 sin (100 t) A
induced emf on secondary E2 = M
1000V
To supply 10kVA Load I2 =
. t ch r)
1
D
15
[Ans. D]
(slope of
25
400V
[Ans. C]
With S2 closed, there is a closed path
available for the 3rd harmonic currents
within the phases. As the transformer is
under no load condition only 3rd
harmonic current will be flowing in the
delta connected secondary.
V=M
17.
21.
[Ans. D]
Transformer wise,
nd
cos(
cos(
t)
sin .
t + /
t )
So, turn ratio =
= 2
So, Z =
( )
th
th
th
Page 594
GATE QUESTION BANK
22.
[Ans. C]
It is an air core transformer. So, there is
no saturation effect.
23.
[Ans. B]
We know
26.
Electrical Machines

urrent r ting of
winding
uto tr nsformer r ting
f
as N and f are constant
27.
[Ans. A]
Given data:
, two winding transformer
.
}
const nt
f
. f
f
f,
f
f
f
.
% ch nge
f
%
f
f
% ch nge
f
( . )
%
28.
[Ans. B]
nd lso
i
d
ore loss volume of core
)
k
.6
24.
[Ans. A]
Hysteresis loss
Hysteresis
k ( )
f
k f(
const nt)
k ( )
f
eddy
f
eddy loss
k (
k (
+k (
+k (
k
86. 4
k
Hysteresis k
.
(
eddy
k
ddy loss
4 .8
Hysteresis = 508
25.
[Ans. A]
Thevenin volt ge
( ) sin t
Thevenin imped nce
( )
sin t
( )
const nt)
(
.
.
core loss t f
tf
.
k
+k ( )
(k + k
)
.
.
k +k
tf
k
+k ( )
(k + k
)
k +k
8)
core loss t f
k ( ) f
f
k f (
so
th
Hz Hysteresis
th
th
Page 595
GATE QUESTION BANK
eddy current
6 .
30.
(or) Alternative method

v
f. /
f
v
f . /
f
v
is const nt
f
f&
f
f+ f
+ f
f
From graph, at 0 Hz
c
f
t
Hz
+
Hz
f
f
[Ans. B]
Given data:
- transformer 220/110V, 50Hz
Self-inductance of primary
4 mH
Self-inductance of Secondary
mH
Mutual inductance between primary and
secondary M = 20 mH
be the leakage &
be the mutual
inductance referred to primary side
Equivalent diagram of inductance
referred to primary
+
where
.
t
Electrical Machines
w
6 . w tt
(
29.
n econd ry side
x
x
( ) x
4
4k
cos
4
.8
4
4
sin
.4 6
.8
4 . 6
Energy supplied by reactance to make
unity power factor
4 . 6
. /
(
31.
4 . 6
)
4 . 6 4
4
4 . 6
.66
m)
(
m
8 mH
m)
4 mH
[Ans. C]
For same no load current
f
l Hl
Number of turns of coil
H Magnetic flux density
l
average length
H
d
dt
So same voltage supply
d
d
dt
dt
(r
th
m)
4 m (
mH
th
r
4
th
Page 596
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
Induction Motors
EE-2006
1.
For a single phase capacitor start
induction motor which of the following
statements is valid?
(A) The capacitor is used for power
factor improvement
(B) The direction of rotation can be
changed by reversing the main
winding terminals
(C) The direction of rotation cannot be
changed
(D) The direction of rotation can be
changed by interchanging the supply
terminals
2.
3.
4.
The speed of a 4-pole induction motor is

controlled by varying the supply
frequency while maintaining the ratio of
supply voltage to supply frequency (V/f)
constant. At rated frequency of 50 Hz and
rated voltage of 400 V its speed is
1440 rpm. Find the speed at 30 Hz, if the
load torque is constant.
(A) 882rpm
(C) 840 rpm
(B) 864 rpm
(D) 828 rpm
A 3 phase, 4 pole, 400 V, 50 Hz star
connected induction motor has following
circuit parameters
r
. , r 0.5,
x = x . , x =35 . The starting
torque when the motor is started direct
on line is (use approximate equivalent
circuit model)
(A) 63.6 Nm
(C) 190.8 Nm
(B) 74.3 Nm
(D) 222.9 Nm
Blocked Rotor
test :
400V
90 V
6A
15 A
1002 W
762 W
Neglecting copper loss in no Load test and
core loss in Blocked Rotor test, estimate
motors full lo d efficiency.
(A) 76 %
(C) 82.4 %
(B) 81 %
(D) 85 %
No Load test :
EE-2007
5.
A three- phase squirrel cage induction
motor has a starting torque of 150% and
maximum torque of 300% with respect to
rated torque at rated voltage and rated
frequency. Neglect the stator resistance
and rotational losses. The value of slip for
maximum torque is
(A) 13.48%
(C) 18.92%
(B) 16.42%
(D) 26.79%
EE-2008
6.
A 230 V, 50 Hz 4-pole, single-Phase
induction motor is rotating in the
clockwise (forward) direction at a speed
of 1425-rpm. If the rotor resistance at
stand still is 7.8. Then the effective rotor
resistance in the backward branch of the
equivalent circuit will be
(A)
(C) 8
(B) 4
(D)
6
7.
A 400 V, 50 Hz, 30 hp, three-phase

induction motor is drawing 50 A current
at 0.8 power factor lagging. The stator
and rotor copper losses are 1.5 kW and
900 W respectively. The friction and
windage losses are 1050 W and the core
losses are 1200 W. The air-gap power of
the motor will be
(A) 23.06 kW
(C) 25.01 kW
(B) 24.11 kW
(D) 26.21 kW
A 3 phase, 10 kW, 400 V, 4 pole, 50 Hz,

star connected induction motor draws
on full lo d. ts no lo d nd blocked
rotor test data are given below:
th
th
th
Page 597
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
A 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole, 1400 rpm, star

connected squirrel cage induction motor
has the Following parameters referred to
the stator
. , =
.
Neglect stator resistance and core and
rotational losses of the motor
The motor is controlled from a 3-phase
voltage source inverter with constant V/f
control. The stator line to line voltage
(rms) and frequency to obtain the
maximum torque at starting will be
(A) 20.6 V, 2.7 Hz
(B) 133.3 V, 16.7 Hz
(C) 266.6 V, 33.3 Hz
(D) 323.3V, 40.3 Hz
A 3-phase, 440 V 50Hz. 4-pole, slip ring
induction motor is fed from the rotor side
through an auto transformer and the
stator is connected to variable resistance
as shown in the figure.
Induction
Motor
3 phase,
50 Hz,
Supply
Electrical Machines
9.
The speed of rotation of stator magnetic

field with respect to rotor structure will be
(A) 90 rpm in the direction of rotation,
(B) 90 rpm in the opposite direction of
rotation.
(C) 1500 rpm in the direction of rotation
(D) 1500 rpm in the opposite direction
of rotation
10.
Neglecting all losses of both the machines,

the dc generator power output and the
current through resistance (Rex) will
respectively be
(A) 96 W, 3.10 A
(B) 120 W, 3.46 A
(C) 1504 W, 12.26 A
(D) 1880 W, 13.71 A
EE-2009
11. A 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor
supplied from a balanced 3-phase source
drives a mechanical load.
The torque-speed characteristics of the
motor
(solid curve) and of the load
(dotted curve) are shown. Of the two
equilibrium points A and B, which of the
following options correctly describes the
stability of A and B?
es
+ 220V
Torque
Auto Transformer
The motor is coupled to a 220 V,

separately excited, dc generator feeding
power to fixed power to fixed resistance
of 10 . Two-wattmeter method is used to
measure the input power to induction
motor. The variable resistance is adjusted
such that the motor runs at 1410 rpm and
the following readings were recorded
W1 = 1800 W, W2 =
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
12.
th
1.0
sync
A is stable B is unstable
A is unstable B is stable
Both are stable
Both are unstable
A 220V, 50Hz, single-phase induction

motor has the following connection
diagram and winding orientations shown.
is the axis of the main stator winding
th
th
Page 598
GATE QUESTION BANK
(M1M2) and AA' is that of the auxiliary

winding (A1A2). Directions of the
winding axes indicate direction of flux
when currents in the windings are in
the directions shown. Parameters of
each winding are indicated. When switch
S is closed, the motor
M1
r
Ra
La =
A1
A2
S
220V
50HZ
M2
. m
. /H
A2
A2
Electrical Machines
EE-2011
14. A three-phase 440V, 6pole, 50 Hz, squirrel
cage induction motor is running at a slip
of 5%. The speed of stator magnetic field
with respect to rotor magnetic field and
speed of rotor with respect to stator
magnetic field are
(A) zero, 5 rpm
(B) zero, 955 rpm
(C) 1000 rpm, 5 rpm
(D) 1000 rpm, 955 rpm
EE-2012
15. The slip of an induction motor normally
does not depend on
(A) Rotor Speed
(B) Synchronous speed
(C) Shaft torque
(D) Core-loss component
A
Rotor
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
rotates clockwise
rotates anticlockwise
does not rotate
rotates momentarily and comes to a
halt
EE-2010
13. A balanced three-phase voltage is applied
to a star-connected induction motor, the
phase to neutral voltage being V. The
stator resistance, rotor resistance
referred to the stator, stator leakage
reactance, rotor leakage reactance
referred to the stator, and the
magnetizing reactance are denoted by
r , r , x , x and
, respectively. The
magnitude of starting current of the
motor is given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
18.
The locked rotor current in a 3-phase,

star connected 15 kW, 4-pole, 230 V,
50 Hz induction motor at rated conditions
is 50 A. Neglecting losses and magnetizing
current, the approximate locked rotor line
current drawn when the motor is
connected to a 236 V, 57 Hz supply is
(A) 58.5 A
(C) 42.7 A
(B) 45.0 A
(D) 55.6 A
EE-2013
17. Leakage flux in an induction motor is
(A) Flux that leaks through the machine
(B) Flux that links both stator and rotor
windings
(C) Flux that links none of the windings
(D) Flux that links the stator winding or
the rotor winding but not both
)
)
16.
)
)
th
A 4-pole induction motor, supplied by a

slightly unbalanced three-phase 50HZ
source, is rotating at 1440 rpm. The
electrical frequency in Hz of the induced
negative sequence current in the rotor is
(A) 100
(C) 52
(B) 98
(D) 48
th
th
Page 599
GATE QUESTION BANK
EE-2014
19. An 8-pole, 3-phase, 50 Hz induction
motor is operating at a speed of 700 rpm.
The frequency of the rotor current of the
motor in Hz is __________
20.
21.
22.
23.
A 3 phase, 50 Hz, six pole induction motor

has a rotor resistance of 0.1 and
reactance of 0.92 . Neglect the voltage
drop in stator and assume that the rotor
resistance is constant. Given that the full
load slip is 3%, the ratio of maximum
torque to full load torque is
(A) 1.567
(C) 1.948
(B) 1.712
(D) 2.134
frequency operation of the motor is

TRUE?
(A) At low frequency, the stator flux
increases from its rated value.
(B) At low frequency, the stator flux
decreases from its rated value.
(C) At low frequency, the motor
saturates.
(D) At low frequency, the stator flux
remains unchanged at its rated value
24.
A three-phase, 4-pole, self-excited

induction generator is feeding power to a
load at a frequency f . If the load is
partially
removed,
the
frequency
becomes f . If the speed of the generator
is maintained at 1500 rpm in both the
cases, then
(A) f , f
Hz nd f
f
(B) f
Hz nd f
Hz
(C) f , f
Hz nd f
f
(D) f
Hz nd f
Hz
A single phase induction motor draws
12 MW power at 0.6 lagging power. A
capacitor is connected in parallel to the
motor to improve the power factor of the
combination of motor and capacitor to 0.8
lagging. Assuming that the real and
reactive power drawn by the motor
remains same as before, the reactive
power delivered by the capacitor in
MVAR is ______________
Electrical Machines
A three-phase slip-ring induction motor,

provided with a commutator winding, is
shown in the figure. The motor rotates in
clockwise direction when the rotor
windings are closed.
-ph se c, f Hz
f
rime
over
lip ing nduction

otor
f
f
If the rotor winding is open circuited and

the system is made to run at rotational
speed f with the help of prime-mover in
anti-clockwise direction, then the
frequency of voltage across slip rings is
f and frequency of voltage across
commutator brushes is f . The values
of f and f respectively are
(A) f + f nd f
(B) f f nd f
(C) f f nd f + f
(D) f + f nd f f
25.
In a constant V/f control of induction

motor, the ratio V/f is maintained
constant from 0 to base frequency, where
V is the voltage applied to the motor at
fundamental frequency f which of the
following statements relating to low
th
A single phase induction motor is

provided with capacitor and centrifugal
switch in series with auxiliary winding.
The switch is expected to operate at a
speed of 0.7 Ns, but due to malfunctioning
the switch fails to operate.
The torque-speed characteristic of the
motor is represented by
th
th
Page 600
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
( )
Torque
x
peed
( )
Torque
.
peed
( )
Torque
peed
( )
Torque
.
peed
th
th
th
Page 601
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines

1.
[Ans. B]
4.
[Ans. B]
The value of power loss (Cu loss) at full
load
Switch
Rotor
Auxiliary
winding
=. /
Im
main
winding
4.6 4
Total losses = 1354.67 + 1002

= 2356.67
Start capacitor
Ia
Efficiency =
= 81%
2.
Start capacitor is used to provide

phase difference between
nd .
If supply terminals are interchanged, Ia
and Im will flow in the opposite direction,
so torque will act in the same direction.
Therefore, the direction of rotation will
remain same.
5.
[Ans. C]
6.
[Ans. D]
T
. T
T
T
(
4 V
rpm
4
The slip (s) of rotor with respect to
forward field
Now, T . / s
. /
Now, T
. 66
(
The slip of rotor with respect to backward

field
s
.
.
Effective rotor resistance
)
(
3.
T (given)
. 4
= 26.79%.
[Ans. A]
Rotor resistance at stand still R = 7.8
Synchronous speed
f
= constant (given)
4
(
) +
(
)
4
+
Correct answer is,
. 66) = 840.6 rpm
[Ans. A]
(
= 1500 rpm
T
)
(
/ )
( . )
s)
.8
.
( . )
7.
[Ans. C]
Input power in stator
=
4
.8
. kW
Air gap power = 27.71 1.5 1.2
= 25.01 kW
= 63.58 Nm
th
th
th
Page 602
GATE QUESTION BANK
8.
[Ans. B]
12.
For max. torque slip =

For starting torque
+
f
+ . f
(frequency
at
maximum
f
torque)
)
.
[Ans. B]
f= 50 Hz
Impedance of main winding
Z
r + j f
.
. +j
Z
. +j
Impedance of auxiliary winding
Z
r + j f
+j
Electrical Machines
. /
Z
+j
Current through main winding
. /
=
Z
. +j
8 .4
Current through auxiliary winding
= 16.7 Hz
In const V/f control method
/f
f
8
= 16.7 8
= 133.3 volts
+j
.
8 . 4
Taking Vs as the reference
V
9.
[Ans. A]
= 1500 rpm
In the direction of rotation of rotor,
therefore, speed of the stator field with
respect to rotor 1500 1410 = 90 rpm
Ia
Im
10.
[Ans. C]
Slip =
Im leads Ia the fields created by the two

current also have same difference thereby
constituting an unbalanced field system.
The result is the production of the
starting torque.
Space orientation of the fied
= 0.06
Total power input to induction motor

within = 1800 200 = 1600 W
Power output of induction motor
(
s)
6 (
. 6) = 1504 W
11.
ex
Field due to Im
Field due to Ia
. 6
[Ans. A]
t point if speed lo d torque lso
nd if speed lo d torque hence is
st ble but t if speed lo d torque s
vice versa an were b is unstable.
The motor rotates in the direction of

leading phase to lagging phase.
In this case, the motor rotates
anti clockwise.
th
th
th
Page 603
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. A]
or
the circuit.
Electrical Machines
17.
[Ans. D]
18.
[Ans. B]
f
So it can be neglected from

v
(r + r ) + (x + x )
)f
. 4
(
. 4)
8Hz
19.
14.
[Ans. *]Not matching with IIT keys

Stator and rotor magnetic fields rotates at
same speed. So difference in speed is zero.
Speed of stator magnetic field is Ns
(synchronous speed)
f
rpm
p
6
Rotor speed = (
s)
rpm
So, speed of rotor with respect to stator
magnetic field
sf
20.
[Ans. C]
T
T
s
[Ans. D]
Slip , S =
16.
slip t which m x torque ppe rs
x
s
s
. 8
full lo d slip
Where,
= synchronous speed
rotor speed
As the shaft torque depends upon rotor
speed therefore the slip also depends on
shaft torque.
And core-losses are independent of slip
sf
rpm.
15.

Frequency of rotor current of motor
f supply frequency
s slip of motor
f
rpm
8
( .
T
o
T
21.
[Ans. B]
At standstill , the rotor current is
+
As losses are zero
.
)
+.
.
.
[Ans. C]
Given data:
, 4 pole self excited induction
generator, feeding power at frequency f
Condition 1:In induction generator
speed of
generator 1500rpm
rpm i. e. ,
rpm
f
if
ut
rpm , f
rpm
Hz
Hz
Condition 2:If load is partially removed and frequency

f
speed of generator is constant
therefore
rpm,
but
load
th
th
th
Page 604
GATE QUESTION BANK
removed means speed of the RMF is

increased
compared
to
previous
condition
f
Hz but f
f
f ,f
Hz, f
f
25.
Electrical Machines
[Ans. C]
capacitor start induction motor
entrifug l
switch
in
winding
A.C supply
22.
[Ans. *] Range 6.97 to 7.03

At 0.6 lagging power factor
cos
.6
.6
sin
.8
.6
At 0.8 lagging power factor
cos
(re l power rem in s me)
.8
.8
.6
.8
ue to m in +
uxili ry + switch
.8
.6
.6
in winding only
.8
Torque
6
23.
24.
The currents induced in both main,

auxiliary winding with 90 phase
displacement. So that as per induction
principle R.M.F will produce and then
M/c will rotates with some starting
torque (T )
Centrifugal switch is designed here
when 70% of
reached it will open i.e.,
auxiliary
winding
is
removed
electrically and M/c will rotates as per
doubled field revolving theory.
Torque slip characteristics as shown in
figure below
[Ans. B]
.
peed
[Ans. A]
, slip ring induction motor, provided
with commutator winding motor rotates
in clockwise direction when the rotor
windings are closed. i.e., in motor
operation
Now rotor winding is open circuited and
the system is made to run at rotational
speed f in anticlockwise direction. In this
condition operates as induction generator
so rotor rotates a head of stator R.M.F and
therefore frequency across slip rings is
f+f
f frequency of voltages across
commutator brushes is f
f
uxili ry
Due to malfunctioning centrifugal

switch not opened, so that auxiliary
winding also present even motor
reaches greater than 70%
so that
torque slip characteristics will change
as shown in figure below
Torque
. s
peed
th
th
th
Page 605
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
D.C. Machine
EE-2006
1.
In a DC machine, which of the following
statements is true?
(A) Compensating winding is used for
neutralizing armature reaction while
inter pole winding is used for
producing residual flux
(B) Compensating winding is used for
neutralizing armature reaction while
improving commutation
(C) Compensating winding is used for
improving commutation while
neutralizing armature reaction
(D) Compensating winding is used for
improving commutation while
producing residual flux
2.
A 220 V DC machine supplies 20 A at

200 V as a generator. The armature
resistance is 0.2 ohm. If the machine is
now operated as a motor at same
terminal voltage and current but with the
flux increased by 10% then ratio of motor
speed to generator speed is
(A) 0.87
(C) 0.96
(B) 0.95
(D) 1.06
80rad/s. The rm ture esist nce is .

nd the field winding resist nce is 8 .
4.
The net voltage across the armature

resistance at the time of plugging will be
(A) 6V
(C) 240 V
(B) 234V
(D) 474 V
5.
The external resistance to be added in the

armature circuit to limit the armature
current to 125% of its rated value is
(A)
.
(C)
.
(B)
.
(D)
.
EE-2009
6.
Figure shows the extended view of a
2 pole dc machine with 10 armature
conductors. Normal brush positions are
shown by A and B, placed at the
inter polar axis. If the brushes are now
shifted, in the direction of rotation, to A'
and B' as shown, the voltage waveform
will resemble
N
EE-2007
3.
The dc motor, which can provide zero
speed regulation at full load without any
controller is
(A) series
(B) shunt
(C) cumulative compound
(D) differential compound
A
+
5
5
ot tion t speed
r d/sec
(A) V
t
.
(B)
EE-2008
4 and 5
A 240 V, dc shunt motor draws 15 A while
supplying the rated load at a speed of
.4
.6
.8
t
.
th
th
.4
th
.6
.8
Page 606
GATE QUESTION BANK
(C)
V
Electrical Machines
The rotational losses and armature

reaction are neglected.
Speed (rpm)
1500
t
.
.4
.6
.8
1400
(D)
V
t
.
.4
.6
.8
EE-2010
7.
A separately excited dc machine is
coupled to a 50Hz, three-phase, 4-pole
induction machine as shown in the figure.
The dc machine is energized first and the
machines
rotate
at
1600
rpm.
Subsequently the induction machine is
also connected to a 50Hz, three-phase
source, the phase sequence being
consistent with the direction of rotation.
In steady state,
DC machine
Induction machine
4 pole, 50 Hz
50 Hz,
balanced
three-phase
supply
(A) both machines act as generators

(B) the dc machine acts as a generator,
and induction machine acts as a
motor
(C) the dc machine acts as a motor, and
the induction machine acts a
generator
(D) both machines act as motors
A separately excited DC motor runs at
1500 rpm under no-load with 200V
applied to the armature. The field voltage
is maintained at its rated value. The speed
of the motor, when it delivers at torque of
5 Nm, is 1400 rpm as shown in the figure.
torque
(Nm)
8.
The armature resistance of the motor is.

(A)
(C) 4.4
(B) .4
(D) .
9.
For the motor to deliver a torque of

2.5Nm at 1400 rpm, the armature voltage
to be applied is
(A) 125.5V
(C) 200V
(B) 193.3V
(D) 241.7V
EE-2011
10. A 220 V, DC shunt motor is operating at a
speed of 1440 rpm. The armature
resistance is 1.0 and armature current
is 10 A. If the excitation of the machine is
reduced by 10%, the extra resistance to
be put in the armature circuit to maintain
the same speed and torque will be
(A) .
(C) .
(B) .
(D) 8.
11.
A 4-point starter is used to start and

control the speed of a
(A) dc shunt motor with armature
resistance control
(B) dc shunt motor with field weakening
control
(C) dc series motor
(D) dc compound motor
EE-2012
12. A 220 V, 15 kW, 1000 rpm shunt motor
with armature resistance of 0.25 , has a
rated line current of 68 A and a rated field
th
th
th
Page 607
GATE QUESTION BANK
current of 2.2 A. The change in field flux

required to obtain a speed of 1600 rpm
while drawing a line current of 52.8 A and
a field current of 1.8 A is
(A) 18.18 % increase
(B) 18.18 % decrease
(C) 36.36 % increase
(D) 36.36 % decrease
15.
A separately excited 300 V DC shunt

motor under no load runs at 900 rpm
drawing an armature current of 2 A. The
armature resistance is 0.5. and leakage
inductance is 0.01 H. When loaded, the
armature current is 15 A. Then the speed
in rpm is_________
16.
A 15 kW, 230 V dc shunt motor has

armature circuit resistance of 0.4 and
field circuit resistance of 230 . At no
load and rated voltage, the motor runs at
1400 rpm and the line current drawn by
the motor is 5 A. At full load, the motor
draws a line current of 70 A. Neglect
armature reaction. The full load speed of
the motor in rpm is____________
EE-2014
13. A 250 V dc shunt machine has armature
circuit resistance of 0.6 and field circuit
resistance of 125 . The machine is
connected to 250 V supply mains. The
motor is operated as a generator and then
as a motor separately. The line current of
the machine in both the cases is 50 A. The
ratio of the speed as a generator to the
speed as a motor is ___
14.
Electrical Machines
The no-load speed of a 230 V separately

excited dc motor is 1400 rpm. The
armature resistance drop and the brush
drop are neglected. The field current is
kept constant at rated value. The torque
of the motor in Nm for an armature
current of 8 A is __________
th
th
th
Page 608
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines

EE
1.
2.
[Ans. B]
Compensating winding is placed in slots
cut out in pole faces such that the axis of
this winding coincides with the brush
axis.
The
compensating
winding
neutralizes the armature mmf directly
under the pole while in the interpolar
region, there is incomplete neutralization.
To speed up the commutation process,
the reactance voltage must be neutralized
by injecting a suitable polarity dynamical
(speed) voltage into the commutating
coil. In order that this injection is
restricted to commutating coils, narrow
interpolar are provided in the interpolar
region.
[Ans. A]
For generator
E=V+
+
For motor
V=E+
E = 200 20 0.2 = 196
4.
[Ans. D]
240 V, shunt motor 15A, N = 80 rad/sec
= 0.5
8
4
. = 234
plugging
+
4 + 4 4 4
5.
[Ans. A]
Here,
6.
.6
= 31.1
[Ans. A]
When brushes are shifted in the direction
of motor rotation then rise time less than
fall time.
e ding tip
Tr iling tip
Tr iling tip
e ding tip
. = 204
3.
= 0.87
[Ans. D]
Speed current characteristics of DC
motors
Speed
orce
DC machines is acting as DC motor

When the brush is shifted in the direction
of rotation in the DC motor, field gets
magnetized.
Due to armature reaction, leading tip of
N-pole and S-pole demagnetized.
But increase in flux density.
Due to magnetized effect of armature
reaction waveform of
will be as
given option (a)
Differential compound
n0
Shunt
Cumulative comp.
Series
Ia
(Ia)full load
It can seen from the characteristics, speed

regulation can be zero at full load in the
case of differential component dc motor.
th
th
th
Page 609
GATE QUESTION BANK
7.
[Ans. C]
Synchronous speed
[Ans. B]
At no load
,
= 200 V
12.
[Ans. D]
86.6
6
.8
.8
.
[Ans. B]
4-point starter is used to control the
speed of shunt motor in field weakening
region.
i.e.; above rated speeds.
In field weakening region field current
will reduce in 3 point starter holding
coil unable to hold the plugges in ON
position.
11.
rpm,
86.6
.
]
( + )
.
.
.
86.6 V
.
.
Assuming ,
at N = 14010 rpm
4
=1500 rpm
So, slip S < 0
Hence, dc machine acts as a motor and
Induction machine acts as a generator.
8.
Electrical Machines
.
.
6 .8
.6 64
9.
[Ans. B]
For N = 1400 rpm,
86.6
equired
+
86.6 + ( . )
Where is function of torque,
To Develop 5 N-m it requires 3.925 A
.
.
( )
%decrease=
*
10.
)( .
+
6. 6%decre se
13.
.
. 6
86.6 + ( . 6
= 193.3 V
[Ans. *] Range 1.22 to 1.32

Given data:
Dc shunt machine operated as generator
and motor separately
.6
[Ans. A]
Find: ratio of speed as a generator to
speed as motor
Now flux is decreased by 10%, so

.
Torque is constant so
n gener tor
+
+
+
+
th
th
.6
th
Page 610
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
8 .
In motor operation:
. +
.
k
k
48
.
.
48
.6
.
speed s gener tor
peed s motor
+
f
4
At no load
.4 +
4
Field current is kept constant at rated
value so k will be same at I = 8A
ki
(8
(8)
( t r ted volt ge)

4
4
.4 +
8.4
At rated load
r +
(
) .4 +
.4
k
.4
k
4
8.4
4 .6 rpm
4
6 / ) in m
4
.
15.
iled
winding
[Ans. *] Range 12.45 to 12.65

o lo d
[Ans. *] Range 1239 to 1242
n shunt c]
8 .
.
.
14.
16.
88 .4 rpm

No load
r +
.
+
k -
k
under loaded condition
th
th
th
Page 611
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
Synchronous Machine
EE-2006
1.
A synchronous generator is feeding a zero
power factor (lagging) load at rated
current. The armature reaction is
(A) magnetizing
(B) demagnetizing
(C) cross magnetizing
(D) ineffective
2.
A 3 phase, 400 V, 5 kW, star connected

synchronous motor having an internal
reactance of 10 is operating at
50% load, unity pf. Now, the excitation is
increased by 1%. What will be the new
load in percent, if the power factor is to
be kept same? Neglect all losses and
consider linear magnetic circuit.
(A) 67.9%
(C) 51%
(B) 56.9%
(D) 50%
Common Data Question for 3, 4 and 5
A 4 pole, 50 Hz, synchronous generator
has 48 slots in which a double layer
winding is used. Each coil has 10 turns
and is short pitched by an angle to 6
electrical. The fundamental flux per pole
is 0.025 Wb.
3.
4.
5.
The line-to-line induced emf (in volts), for

a three phase star connection is
approximately
(A) 808
(C) 1400
(B) 888
(D) 1538
The line-to-line induced emf (in volts), for
a
three
phase
connection
is
approximately
(A) 1143
(C) 1617
(B) 1332
(D) 1791
EE-2007
6.
A three-phase synchronous motor
connected to ac main is running at full
load and unity power factor. If its shaft
load is reduced by half, with field current
held constant, its new power factor will be
(A) unity
(B) leading
(C) lagging
(D) dependent on machine parameters
7.
A 100kVA. 415 V (line), Star-connected

synchronous machine generates rated
open circuit voltage of 415 V at field
current of 15A. The short circuit armature
current at a field current of 10 A is equal
to the rated armature current. The per
unit saturated synchronous reactance is
(A) 1.731
(C) 0.666
(B) 1.5
(D) 0.577
EE-2008
8.
Distributed winding and short chording
employed in AC machines will result in
(A) Increase in emf and reduction in
harmonics.
(B) Increase in emf and increase in
harmonics.
(C) Increase in both emf and harmonics.
(D) Reduction in both emf and
harmonics.
and 10
A synchronous motor is connected to an
infinite bus at 1.0pu voltage and draws
0.6 pu current at unity power factor. Its
synchronous reactance is 1.0pu and
resistance is negligible.
The excitation voltage (E) and load angle
( ) will respectively be
(A) 0.8 pu and 36.86 lag
(B) 0.8pu and 36.86o lead
(C) 1.17 pu and 30.96 lead
(D) 1.17 pu and 30.96 lag
9.
The fifth harmonic component of phase

emf (in volts), for a three phase star
connection is
(A) 0
(C) 281
(B) 269
(D) 808
th
th
th
Page 612
GATE QUESTION BANK
10.
Keeping the excitation voltage same, the

load on the motor is increased such that
the motor current increase by 20%. The
operating power will become
(A) 0.995 lagging
(C) 0.791 lagging
(B) 0.995 leading
(D) 0.848 leading
EE-2009
11. A field excitation of 20 A in a certain
alternator results in an armature current
of 400A in short circuit and a terminal
voltage of 2000V on open circuit. The
magnitude of the internal voltage drop
within the machine at a load current
of 200A is
(A) 1V
(C) 100V
(B) 10V
(D) 1000V
EE-2011
12. The direct axis and quadrature axis
reactances of a salient pole alternator are
1.2 p.u and 1.0 p.u respectively. The
armature resistance is negligible. If this
alternator is delivering rated kVA at upf
and at rated voltage then its power angle
is
(A) 30
(C) 60
(B) 45
(D) 90
13.
A three-phase, salient pole synchronous

motor is connected to an infinite bus. It is
operated at no load at normal excitation.
The field excitation of the motor is first
reduced to zero and then increased in the
reverse direction gradually. Then the
armature current
(A) Increase continuously
(B) First increases and then decreases
steeply
(C) First decreases and then increases
steeply
(D) Remains constant
Electrical Machines
performed on it with 90% of the rated

current flowing in its both LV and HV
windings, the measured loss is 81 W. The
transformer has maximum efficiency
when operated at
(A) 50.0% of the rated current.
(B) 64.0% of the rated current.
(C) 80.0% of the rated current.
(D) 88.8% of the rated current.
15.
The angle in the swing equation of a

synchronous generator is the
(A) Angle between stator voltage and
current
(B) Angular displacement of the rotor
with respect to the stator
(C) Angular displacement of the stator
mmf with respect to a synchronously
rotating axis.
(D) Angular displacement of an axis fixed
to the rotor with respect to a
synchronously rotating axis.
EE-2014
16. A star connected 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole
synchronous machine gave the following
open circuit and short circuit test results:
Open circuit test:
= 400 V
(rms, line-to-line) at field current, = 2.3 A
Short circuit test:
= 10 A (rms, phase)
at field current, = 1.5 A
The value of per phase synchronous
impedance in at rated voltage
is____________
17.
A three phase synchronous generator is

to be connected to the infinite bus. The
lamps are connected as shown in the
figure for the synchronization. The phase
sequence of bus voltage is R-Y-B and that
of incoming generator voltage is R'-Y'-B'.
EE-2013
14. A single-phase transformer has no-load
loss of 64 W, as obtained from an opencircuit test. When a short-circuit test is
th
th
th
Page 613
GATE QUESTION BANK

Y
~
nfinite
us
19.
In a synchronous machine, hunting is

predominantly damped by
(A) mechanical losses in the rotor
(B) iron losses in the rotor
(C) copper losses in the stator
(D) copper losses in the rotor
20.
A non-salient pole synchronous generator

having synchronous reactance of 0.8 pu is
supplying 1 pu power to a unity power
factor load at a terminal voltage of 1.1 pu.
Neglecting the armature resistance, the
angle of the voltage behind the
synchronous reactance with respect to
the angle of the terminal voltage in
degrees is ____
~
ncoming
ener tor
It was found that the lamps are becoming

dark in the sequence - - . It means
that the phase sequence of incoming
generator is
(A) opposite to infinite bus and its
frequency is more than infinite bus
(B) opposite to infinite bus but its
frequency is less than infinite bus
(C) same as infinite bus and its frequency
is more than infinite bus
(D) same as infinite bus and its frequency
is less than infinite bus
18.
Electrical Machines
A 20-pole alternator is having 180

identical stator slots with 6 conductors in
each slot. All the coils of a phase are in
series. If the coils are connected to realize
single-phase winding, the generated
voltage is . If the coils are reconnected
to realize three-phase star-connected
winding, the generated phase voltage is
. Assuming full pitch, single-layer
winding, the ratio / is
(A) /
(C)
(B) /
(D)
th
th
th
Page 614
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines

1.
[Ans. B]
Xs
Ef
cos /
cos 8 = 0.951
n double layer wdg.
no. of coils = no. of slots
Ia
Vt
jIa
no. of turns/ph =
Vt
Ia
Ef > Vt, the generator is overexcited.

Therefore armature reaction is
demagnetizing in nature i.e. ar opposes
4.
8 8
= 1400V
or Synchronous Motor,
( cos
) + ( sin
E = .
Truns/ph
7.21
/ +(
Slot angle =
sin(
6 sin . /
.6)
= 2333.729
If these is (0.01) increase in
becomes,
.
. = 236
cos (
, then
4.44f
4.44
.
.
= 1143 v
Slots/pole/ph
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C ]
For two phase scott connection
f.
2.
4.44 f
4.44
.
.
= 808 V
Is
(4
/ ) = 48.93
4 v
4.8
% load =
= 67.86%
4 v
3.
[Ans. C]
4 pole, 50 Hz, no. of slot = S = 48
double layer winding, 1 coil contains 10
turns, (short pitched)
6 , /pole =
0.025 mwb.
4.44 f T
slot /pole/ph =
= 12
slot angle =
/ )
(
/ )
5.
[Ans. A]
Pitch factor
component
=4
slot/pole =
= 1616.45 V
cos (
due
6
to
)
5th
harmonic
cos
[as pitch factor is zero, induced emf due

to 5th harmonic component is zero]
= 0.957
th
th
th
Page 615
GATE QUESTION BANK
6.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. D]
Induced emf
4.44k k fT
As KP & kd v lues re less th n for
distributed & short pitched winding, the
induced emf reduces.
To eliminate higher order harmonics we
use distributed winding and to eliminate
the dominant harmonics i.e., 5th & 7th we
use pitched winding.
9.
[Ans. D]
V = 1 0 pu
.6
z
+j
+j
pu
.6
E
. 66
. 6 pu (It is lagging)
excitation voltage = 1.17 pu
lo d ngle ( )
. 6
10.
[Ans. A]
Let power factor = cos l gging
.6
. pu
j
(cos + j sin )
(cos
j
j sin )
(cos
j .
j sin )
(
. sin ) j . cos
(
. sin ) + ( . cos )
+ .
sin
.44 sin +
.
cos
.
+ .
.44 sin
sin
.
8
. 6
cos
.
l gging
11.
[Ans. D]
Xs
Ia
Vt
Electrical Machines
Ef
Neglecting armature resistance Ra

Vt=Ef +jIa Xs
Ia2
Vt
Ia1
jIa2Xs
jIa1Xs
Ef
Reduced load
Ef at shaft
load at shaft
It can be seen from the phasor diagram

that, when load is reduced at shaft
keeping field current constant the new
power factor becomes leading.
7.
[Ans. C]
Saturation of field poles occur for a field
current equal to for which rated open
circuited voltage is obtained.
for
is (
)
for
for
Z
p.u Z
.
4
8.68
4
. 88 ohm
8.68
.
. 88
6.66
.
.666
2nd Method
Z
(
(
) ph
( . )
(4
(Z ph)
.6 8
(4
Internal resistance =
)
. 4
8.68
.6 8 .
.666
Internal voltage drop = 5200 = 1000V

12.
[Ans. B]
(
T n
)
(
p. u
angle = 0
x
. p. u x
T n
th
th
p. u
Power factor
p. u r
4
th
Page 616
GATE QUESTION BANK
13.
[Ans. B]
As field current reduces the flux will start
reducing, to keep this flux constant the
armature draws high current from bus. At
zero field current the motor acts as
synchronous reluctance motor in this
case the magnetizing current fully taken
from bus, if we increase field current in
reverse direction to keep flux constant
motor draws more current. During this
process the load angle increases at one
point the reversed field force dominates
reluctance torque and rotor slips one pole
pitch and align to opposite pole. The
instant aligns to opposite pole the flux
will be very high to reduce this flux
current drops steeply to synchronous
motor value. Here torque is reluctance
+ synchronous motor torque.
14.
[Ans. C]
Cu.Loss at 90% load = 81W
Cu load at any X fractional load
full lo d cu. loss
full lo d cu. loss
17.
[Ans. A]
In Synchronization [In figure lights are
connected in correct position
i.e.,
y y,
]
1. Observe the lights which are
connected across switches, they
should beat, first get brighter and
then dim as the phasor for generator
nd bus respectively shift. f lights
beats concurrently, the phase
sequence is correct. Else if lights beat
out of phase, one pair of phases
should be reversed
2. Adjust now the prime mover to
slowly increase/decrease the speed of
incoming generator. One should
observe a slow beat of the light
brightness
3. When the lamps beats slowly, the
switches should be closed when the
lights are extinguished
In given data lamps are becoming dark in
the sequence
it means that
phase sequence of incoming generator is
opposite to infinite bus and its frequency
is more than infinite bus.
18.
[Ans. D]
Given data:
20 pole alternator
Total number of turns (T) = 8
6
or
T ph se spre d
8 (mv)
T
or
ph se spre d
( . )
For maximum efficiency

) 64
x (
.8
8 % of r ted lo d
15.
[Ans. D]
16.
[Ans. *] Range 14.5 to 15.5

( t . ) 4
(
)
4
h se
.
4
( t . )
.
4
.
in (per ph se)
.
. 6
Electrical Machines
6
winding gener ted volt ge
winding gener ted ph se volt ge

We know that
T
where
Generated voltage in phase
manner
k
Distribution factor
T
Number of turns per phase
th
th
th
Page 617
GATE QUESTION BANK
sin
sin
19.
sin 8 /
sin 6 /
6
T
.
8 T/
20.
Electrical Machines
[Ans. *] Range 32.4 to 34.0

(pu)
(pu)
(pu) cos
.
( )
.
power f ctory unity
.
.
.8
.
.
. + .
j
.
t n
.
.468
[Ans. D]
In a synchronous machine, hunting is
predominantly damped by damper
winding in other words when hunting
occurs in a system as per induction
principle a currents is induced in damper
winding those will give either induction
generator torque or motor torque. Which
is in phase/opposite phase to rotation as
per options by copper losses in rotor
hunting is damped because induced
currents will give losses also. In case of
salient pole synchronous machine.
In case of cylindrical generator no
damper winding present rotor core itself
act as good damper bar and induced
current called eddy currents.
th
th
th
Page 618
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
Principles of Electro Mechanical Energy Conversion

EE-2007
1.
The electromagnetic torque Te of a drive,
and its connected load torque TL are as
shown below. Out of the operating points
A, B, C and D, the stable ones are
(A)
Te
TL
T
A
Speed
(B)
Te
TL
B
Speed
(C)
Te
C
TL
Speed
(D)
Te
T
D
TL
Speed
(A) A, C, D
(B) B, C
(C) A, D
(D) B, C, D
th
th
th
Page 619
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines

1.
[Ans. A]
Accelerating torque = T
T
Te
TL
So, rotor accelerates and speed increases.

It speed increases due to some
disturbances
T
T
T
T
T
o, rotor decelerates and speed decreases
o, point A, C, D are stable.
T
T
Speed
T
Te
Speed
At point B,
T
T
T
T
T
If speed decreases, due to some
disturbance
T
T
T
T
T
So rotor decelerates, and rotor speed
keeps on decreasing.
If speed increases.
T
T
T
T
T
Rotor accelerates, and rotor speed keeps
on increasing.
So, point is unstable
Speed
T
Te
D
T
Speed
AT points A, C, D
T
T
T
T
T
It due to some disturbance speed
decreases
T
T
T
T
T
th
th
th
Page 620
GATE QUESTION BANK
Electrical Machines
Special Machines
EE-2007
1.
A three-phase, three-stack, variable
reluctance step motor has 20 poles on
each rotor and stator stack , The step
angle of this step motor is
(A)
(C)
(B) 6
(D) 8
EE-2008
2.
In a stepper motor, the detent torque
means
(A) minimum of the static torque with
the phase winding excited.
(B) maximum of the static torque with
the phase winding excited.
(C) minimum of the static torque with
the phase winding unexcited.
(D) maximum of the static torque with
the phase winding unexcited

1.
[Ans. B]
Step angle =
2.
[Ans. D]
Detent Torque (or) Restraining Torque is
the maximum Load Torque that can be
kept on motor shaft in an unexcited
motor without causing continuous
rotation.
th
th
th
Page 621

GQB Ee PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

GQB Ee PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

GQB Ee PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

GATE QUESTION BANK

GATE QUESTION BANK

Network Solution Methodology

Signals & systems

GATE QUESTION BANK

#10. Power Electronics

#11. Electrical Machines

GATE QUESTION BANK

A is a 3 4 real matrix and Ax=B is an

If a square matrix A is real and symmetric,

The Eigenvectors of the matrix 0

written in the form 0 1 and 0 1. What is

Eigen values of a matrix

]. What is the matrix F?

Match the items in columns I and II.

] has one Eigenvalue

1are 5 and 1. What are the

Eigenvalues of the matrix = SS?

GATE QUESTION BANK

For what value of a, if any, will the

Eigen values of a real symmetric matrix

of the matrix is equal to the inverse of the

For the matrix A=0

normalized Eigenvectors is given as

Choose correct set of functions, which are

GATE QUESTION BANK

One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix

Consider a non-homogeneous system of

Consider the matrices

Consider a 33 real symmetric matrix S

For the given matrix A = [

one of the Eigen values is 3. The other two

and 6, respectively. What is the other

For what values of and the following

GATE QUESTION BANK

The inverse of the

The inverse of the matrix 0

The Eigenvalue of the matrix

The following simultaneous equation

The Eigenvalues of matrix 0

2.42 and 6.86

What is the minimum number of

Given the matrices J = [

The sum of Eigenvalues of the matrix, [M]

GATE QUESTION BANK

The determinant of matrix [

Let A be a 4x4 matrix with Eigenvalues

What are the Eigenvalues of the following

How many of the following matrices have

GATE QUESTION BANK

The value of the dot product of the

If the matrix A is such that

Which one of the following options

The product of the non zero Eigenvalues

the following does NOT

Then the determinant of A is equal to

2 matrix with elements

Which one of the following statements is

GATE QUESTION BANK

The rank of the matrix [

Given the matrix 0

For the matrix 0

All the four entries of the 2 x 2 matrix